.'V'

a,,s V /

<<

i W*

Journal

OF THE

Royal
Microscopical Society;

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

AND A SUMMARY OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

zooXiOG-^sr -A-3sriD B o T .A. nsr ^2-

(principally Invertebrata and Cryptogamia),

PRANK CRISP, LL.B., B.A.,

One of the Secretaries of the Society
and a Vice-President and Treasurer of the Liftttean Society of London ;

WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF THE PUBLICATION COMMITTEE AND

A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc, I F. JEFFKEY BELL, M.A.,

Lecturer on Botany at St. Thomas's Hospital, \ Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King's College,

S. O. RIDLEY, M.A., of the British Museum, and JOHN MAYALL, JuN.,

FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY.

.-VOL. III. TiHrtlL

PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

LONDON AND EDINBURGH.
I 885^

\jol- 3

)p BI-MONTHLY. SE^ \

Vol. III. No. 4.] AUGUST, 1880. [ "^ p^ce 487''

f

Ai.

Journal

OF THE

Royal
Microscopical Society;

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS,

AND A RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA,
MICROSCOPY, &c.

Edited, tinder the direction of the PiMication Committee, by

FRANK CRISP, LL.B., B.A., P.L.S.,

One of the Secretaries of the Society;

WITH TUB ASSISTANCE OP

A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc, j F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A,.

Lecturer on Botany at St. T/umias's Hospital, | Professor of Contparaiive Anatomy in King's College,

AND

S. O. RIDLEY, B.A., F.L.S.,

Of i/ie British Mtisctim,

\

FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY,,.-

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

M LONDON AND EDINBURGH. ^i^l

PRINTED BV WM. CLOWES AND SONS, UMITkD,] [STAMrORD STKBET ANf CIIARJNO CRO..S.

( 2 )

JOUENAL

OF THE

EOYAL MICEOSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

VOL. III. No. 4.

CONTENTS.

Tbansactions of the Society — paob

XVI. Notes on Aoinetina : Trtchophrya epistylidis, and Podo-
PHRYA QUADRiPARTiTA. By John Badcock, F.R.M.S. (Plate

XIV.) 561

XVII. On the Visibility of Minute Objects mounted in Phos-
phorus, Solution of Sulphur, Bisulphide op Carbon, and
other Media. By J. W. Stephenson, Treasurer R.M.S.,

F.R.A.S .. 664

XVIII. On the Development and Retrogression of Blood-vessels.
By George Hoggan, M.B., and Frances Elizabeth Hoggan,

M.D. (Plate XV.) 568

XIX. On a Parabolized Gas Slide. By James Edmunds, M.D.,

M.R.C.P. Lond., F.R.M.S. (Figs. 52 and 53) .. .. 585

Record of Current Researches relating to Invertebrata,

Cryptogamia, Microscopy, &c. ,. .. .. .. 587

Zoology.

Bevelopmeut of the Vertebrate Eye 587

Embryology of Batrachiuns 587

Vital Properties of Cells 589

Coalescence of Amoeboid Cells into Plasmodia 590

Structure and Development of Dentine 590

Ovary of Mammals 591

Influence of Saline Solutions on Protoplasm 591

" Law of Association' 592

Degeneration 594

Animal Development 597

Colours of Animals 598

Organisms in Ice from Stagnant Water .. 598

Fertilization of the Ovum 599

Renal Organs of Invertebrata 600

Phylogeny of the Dibranchiate Cephalopoda COl

Aptychi of Ammonites 604

Development of the Pulmoimte Gaderopoda 005

Generative Organs of (he Young Helix aspersa 608

Gasteropoda from the Troas 608

Gasteropoda from the Auckland Islands 608

Marine Polyzoa 609

Fresh-water Polyzoa 609

Larva of Bowerhankia 611

Enldi minaria ducalis 611

( « )

Beoord op Current Kbskarohes, &c. — continued.

PAQB

Nervous Collars of Arthropods 611

Nerve-endings in Muscles of Insects .. 612

Habits of Ants 613

Bespiratory and Circulatory Apparatus of Dipterous Larvx 615

Blepharoceridse 616

Tracheal System of Larval Libellulidm 61(j

Hemains of Branchias in a Libellulid: Smooth Muscle-Fibres in Insects .. 618

Metamorphosis of Prosopistoma 618

Piercing Organ of the Lepidopteran Proboscis 619

Generative Glands and Sexual Products in Bombyx mori 620

Development of Forficula 621

Adora sestuum from the Shore at Heligoland 621

Destruction of Noxious Insects by Mould 622

Development of the Araneina 622

Peculiar Modification of a Parasitic Acarian 624

Structure of Trombidium 625

Central Nervous System of the Crayfish 627

Influence of Acids and Alkalies on Crayfishes 628

Head of the Lobster ., .. 629

Shoiiened Development in Palxmon potiuna 630

Toilet-appendages of the Crustacea .. .. ,. 631

Anal Btspiration of the Copepoda 632

Parasitic Corycxidse 633

Parasite of the American Blue Pike 633

New Crustacea 634

Genital Glands and Segmental Organs of the Polychseta 635

Development of the Spermatozoa of the Earthworm 63G

Embryology of Ligula 637

Nervous System of the Trematoda 638

New Turbellarian , .. .. 640

New Nemerteans 640

New Genus of Echinoidea 641

Fossil Tertiary Echini 641

Mediterranean Echinoderms J 642

Remarkable Ophiurid 642

Intracellular Digestion in Ccelenterata 642

Nervous System of Beroe . . . . 643

Pleurobrachia pileus 644

Anatomy and Histology of tJie Actiniae 645

Structure of some Coralliaria . . . . 648

Antipatharia of the ' Blake ' Expedition 649

American Siphonophora ., 649

Origin and Development of the Ovum in Eucope before Fecundation ., ., 650

Proportion of Water in the Medusm 652

A Fresh-water Hydroid Medusa 652

Physiology of the Fresh-water Medusa 657

Sponges of the Leyden Museum 661

Structure and Affinities of the Genus Protospong id, Salter 661

Batschli's Protozoa 662

Amaebiform and other new Foraminifera ., 662

Vumpyrella lateritia ., .. .. 664

Acinetx l°65

Botany.

Disengagement of Carbonic / 'I from Boots 665

Sensitiveness in the Acacia 665

Copper in Plants 666

Action of Ozone on the Colouring-matters of Plants 667

Bed Cohuring-matter of the Leaves of tlie Virginian Creeper 667

Chemical Composition of Aleurone-grains 667

*' Ci stoma" 668

Apical Growth with several Apical Cells 668

Structure of the Fructification of Pilularia * . . . . 6(59

British Moss-Flora 670

( 4 )

Kkoobd op Current Eeskabohbs, &c. — continued.

PAGE

British Characese 670

Formation of Fat in Fungi 671

Secretion from a Fungus 671

Anthracnose of the Vine 671

Urocystis Cepulx 672

Sterigmatocystis and Nematogonum 672

Mycotheca Marchica 672

Ceriomycesterrestris 673

Vine-pock , 673

Prehistoric Polyporus 673

Relationship of Ozonium to Coprinus , . . . 673-

Dieease of the Apple-tree caused by Alcoholic Fermentation 674

Saecharomyces apiculutus 674

Plasmodia of Myxomycetes 674

Epiphora 675

Lichens of Mont-Dare and Haute-Vienne .. .. 675

Morphology of Floridex 676

Bilateralness in Floridem 677

Fructification of Chsetopteris plumosa 678

Fructification of Squamariem . . 678

Fresh-water Algse of Nova Zemhla 679

Thermal Anahmna 679

Polycystis xruginosa, a cause of the Bed Colour of Drinking-water .. .. 680

Bain of Blood 680

Endochrome of Diatomacese (Fig. 54:) 680

Belgian Diatomacese , . . . . 687

New Deposit of Diutomaceous Earth 688

Preservation of Solutions of Palmelline 688

Microscopy.

Localities for Fresh-water Microscopical Organisms 689

Collection of Living Foraminifera 690

Cleaning Foraminifera 692

Wax Cells 692

Carbolic Acid for Mounting 693

Double-staining of Vegetable Tissues . . . . 693

Wickersheimer's Preservative Fluid and Vegetable Objects 696

Hardening Canada Balsam in Microscopic Preparations by Hot Steam . . 696

Ringing and Finishing Slides 696

Cleaning Cover-glasses 698

Preparing Sections of Coal 698

Cutting Bock Sections 699

Simple Mechanical Finger . . ., 700

Slides from the Naples Zoological Station 700

Homogeneous-Immersion Lenses 701

Fluid for Homogeneous Immersion .. .. 701

Errors of Refraction in the Eyes of Mieroscopists 701

Micrometre or Micromillimetre . . 702

Micrometry and Collar-adjustment .. . . 702

Zeiss' s Microspectroscope (Fig. 55) 703

Boss's Improved Microscope (Pl&te X.YI.) 704

Professor Huxley's Dissecting Microscope (Fig. 56) 705

Nachet's Chemical Microscope (Fig. 57) 707

Tiffany's Prepuce Microscope 709

Tolles-Blackham Microscope-stand .. .. ,, .. , 709

Weber-LieVs Ear Microscope (Fig. 58) 710

Trichina-Microscopes — Hager's, Schmidt and Haensclis, Waechter's, and

Tescftwer's (Figs. 59-63) .. .. 711

Matthews' Improved Turntable (Figa. 64: and 65) 716

BiBIJOGRAPHY .4 .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 718

Peoobbdings of the Society .. .. .. .. .. .. 733

JO URN. R.MICR. SOC.VOL.III.pl. XIV,

(I

H.^Mmx7ar Co lith

AemetmaJriehopLrya episLylidis ^Podophrya quadripar^ita

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

AUGUST, 1880.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XVI. — Notes on Acineiina: Trichojylirya episfyliclis, and Podo-
jplirya qiuidripartita. By John Badcock, F.R.M.S.

(Bead 10th March, 1880.)
Plate XIV.

Eakly in November 1879 I found on some filamentous Algae in
one of the ponds in Victoria Park, a curious amoeboid form of what
seemed to be an Acineton, and which I subsequently found had
been originally discovered by MM. Claparede and Lachmann,
and named Trichophrtja epistylidis. They found it parasitic on
the Epistylis, and being struck with its singular character, con-
sidered it entitled to rank as a new genus under the above name.
They give a somewhat brief account of it. It is, however, very
singular that those authors should have contrasted this form with
Podophrya quadripartita (originally discovered by Baker, and
subsequently found by Stein). Stein had argued in favour of
the theory of the ^cme^a*-state in the life-history of many of the
Infusoria, and among others had described P. quadripartita as
the Acineta of Epnstylis plieatilis, because they were generally
found together, and Claparede and Lachmann say that for the
same reason T. epistylidis might be inferred to be similarly related
to the Epistylis, for " The one, hke the other, seems in eflfect to
lead the life of a parasite, almost exclusively on the branches of
EpistyUs."

It would be a curious commentary on the disputes of those
high authorities on these matters if it could be shown that Ti'i-
chophrya epistylidis and Podo'phrya quadripartiia are one and
the same species in different stages, and that EpistyUs has nothing
to do with either. Such I believe to bo the case, as the following
observations will show, if not conclusively, yet as probable in the
highest degree.

I do not think that the identity of the organism which I found

* This theory has since been abandoQcd by Stein.
VOL. III. 2 r

562 Transactions of the Society.

(PI. XIV., Fig. 1) with those of Claparede and Lachmann will be
disputed, as both the figures and descriptions prove it, with one or
two exceptions which are not essential. Thus, as to parasitism,
I did not find mine on the Ejpistylis, but on filamentous algae :
neither have I seen the faint outline of any embryo as described by
them.

Having placed my first find in a small zoophyte trough, for
the purpose of daily watching it, I soon noticed that the sides of
the glass were covered with very much smaller bodies than those
on the algse, and, though having the same Acineta-like character,
were much more varied in form as well as being very transparent
(see Figs. 2, 2a, and 3). These were very interesting objects of
observation, as one could plainly see the contractile vesicles, the
suctorial character of the tentacles, and their slowly spiral move-
ment of protrusion and retraction. They were not of slow growth,
but came suddenly as though a vesicle or similar body had been
ruptured and its contents shot forth, which coming in contact
with the glass would produce just the appearance noted. The
contractile vesicles were similarly irregular, both as to position and
number. In fact, it was impossible to find any two bodies alike
in shape or organic differentiation. Only one common character
pervaded them, they were all bright, shining patches, semi-fluid,
transparent, and acinetiform.

As the winter advanced the pseudopodia or tentacles disap-
peared, and also the contractile vesicles and other signs of active
life, leaving only small lumps and patches of what may be called
protoplasm. These had nothing of the appearance which death
produces. They were simply bits of quiescent matter, looking
more like shining crystals than anything else.

I had not expected to be able to make any further observations
until another season, when the following incident attracted my
attention. I had given some of the algae to my friend Mr. Cocks,
with the animal forms on it in abundance, which he placed in his
aquarium. This he has recently found to be covered with the
very beautiful forms represented in Figs. 4 and 5, or in other
words by Podophrya quadrijKcrtita. On seeing these at first, and
taking note of similarity in some points notwithstanding difierences
in others, my suspicions as to tlieir being the same were mate-
rially strengthened, if not confirmed, by comparison with one form
which I had drawn last November (Fig. 6). This was found with
the others, but not presenting the same special appearance, I had
not considered it in its true character ; and my view now is, that as
in all forms of life some few more vigorous, or favoured by other
circumstances, will remain after the majority have passed away, so
these solitary individuals remained. There can be no doubt, I think,
of the identity with Figs. 4 and 5.

Notes on Acinetina. By John Badcock. 563

This being so, Nos. 1, la, 2, and 3, are the immature stages in
the life-history of the perfect form now recognized as Podoplirya
quadripartita ; and consequently the new genus Tricliophrya of
Claparede and Lachmann must be abandoned.

One of the forms here figured illustrates the so-called Acineta
of Epistylis. Fig. 7 is the Ejnstylis with the Acineta here
and there upon its branches, and on first observing it under the
Microscope with Mr. Cocks we were inclined to think it a con-
firmation of Stein's theory, when my son, whom we had asked to
sketch it, remarked that it was not a portion of the Epistylis, but
only attached to it. It was somewhat difficult to see the attachment,
however, but we were confirmed as to its nature by subsequently
seeing it on Carchesium and Ophrydiu7n, as well as by its abnormal
position on the sides of the branches of Ejnstylis.

Since writing the foregoing I have been able to make some
further observations of an interesting nature, which I will briefly
state.

I have traced the life-history of one form with tolerable clear-
ness. I had often noticed several small round ciliated bodies
moving about the field of view, sometimes rapidly spinning round,
and then springing with a jerking bound from place to place. On
pursuing one of these bodies it was found finally to settle down
on a filament of the alga, and gradually to develop a peduncle;
then the ciliate character simultaneously changed to that of the
Acineta, and finally it gradually branched out to the three- or
four-cornered perfect form of Podojjhrya qiiadripartita*

These ciliated forms correspond to the description usually
given to Megatricha imrtita, and in their further development —
attached and with a pedicle — to Podophrya fixa. Further I have
obseiTed that in the Megafrieha-stsLte they multiply by self-
division. May we hazard the inference, in view of these observa-
tions, that as not only these, but many other similar forms of life,
pass through several life-cycles, in each of which they " increase
and multiply," this peculiarity has been the fruitful cause of num-
berless new genera and species having been too hastily adopted ?

* This I have seen in many instances since, and found tlicni to develop on
the glass as well as on the weed.

L' P li

564 Transactions of the Society.

XVII. — On the Visibilitij of Minute Objects mounted in Phos-
phorus, Solution of Sulj>hur, Bisulphide of Carhon, and other
Media. By J. W. Stephenson, Treasurer E.M.S., F.K.A.S,

CSead 9th June, 1880.)

The theory that there is a " loss of aperture on balsam-mounted
objects " was enunciated more than twenty years ago by more than
one writer, and although never accepted without question, it has
been maintained with more or less frequency until a comparatively
recent date, when Professor Abbe's demonstration of the theory of
microscopic vision rendered it absolutely untenable.

It is not only untrue that there is a loss of aperture under such
circumstances, but it is positively the reverse of the truth in every
case in which it produces any effect whatever.

It has already been pointed out in the Society's Journal,*
how this mistaken notion probably arose, viz. by failing to distin-
guish between a diminution of angle (which of course takes place
in the case of balsam-mounted objects) and a diminution of
aperture, two entirely different matters, as a small angle in one
medium (as oil) may be capable of embracing more diffraction
spectra than a large angle in another medium (as air), the small
angle having in fact the larger aperture and vice versa.

The loss of aperture by transmitted light is therefore on objects
mounted in air, and this can only be prevented by mounting in
balsam, or some other medium which has a refractive index equal
to, or greater than, the numerical aperture of the immersion objec-
tive employed.

This loss from " dry mounting," as it is called, arises in all
objectives which have an equivalent angle exceeding 180°, which
is the case with so many of the modern immersion objectives, and
notably so in those on the homogeneous principle.

It is this fact which has induced me to bring the subject of
mounting in different media before the Society this evening, as it
is obviously of little use to obtain objectives of the large apertures
with which we are now familiar, if by employing them on objects
surrounded by air we reduce their effectiveness to the common
level of 180" (= 1 n. a.).

I have said " surrounded by air " because when an object is in
physical contact with the cover, the loss is, by its adhesion on one
side, reduced to one-half, just as in an object mounted in balsam the
whole aperture is preserved by the contact of both its sides with
the medium in which it is mounted.

But in mounting diatoms (and some other objects) in Canada
balsam, we find that although we have secured the full aperture of

* See this Journal, ii. (1879) p. 774.

On the Visibility, &g. By J. W. Stephenson. 565

the objective, and therefore its fall resolving power, we have done
so at the expense of the visibility of the resultant image, which
has become fainter by the nearer approximation to equality of the
refractive indices of the diatomaceous silex and the Canada balsam
in which the object is mounted ; the markings, whatever they may
be, are less pronounced than they would have been in air had the
structure been sufficiently coarse for resolution in that medium, a
result which Professor Abbe has shown to be attributable to the
paler diffraction spectra yielded by the balsam-mounted object —
hence we see that it may be possible to resolve an object in balsam
which would be impossible in air, but that if resolvable hi hoih it
would be more visible in air than in balsam.

It may be demonstrated that the visibiHty of very minute
structures is ijroportional to the difference between the refractive
indices of the object and the medium in which it is mounted
{n-ni).

It follows from this that when this diiference = 0, or is very
small, the structure is invisible. This is the case, as most of us
know, when diatoms are immersed in strong suljihuric acid, and it
may therefore be inferred, as was pointed out some years ago, that
the refractive index of diatomaceous silex is about 1 • 43, which,
without any pretence that it is exact, I shall assume as its true
value in the following observations.

As the visibility of minute structures is proportional to the
difference between the refractive indices of object and medium, it is
necessary to give a short table of the refractive indices of those
substances to which I shall refer, and fi'om which the differences of
the indices are to be deduced.

Table of Indices.

Air =1

Water = 1-33

Diatomaceous silex and sulphuric acid = 1'43

Canada balsitni = 1'54

Bisiilpiiide of carbon = l'G8

Solution of sulphur in bisulphide of carbon (approximately) . . = 1-75

Sulphur = 2-11

Solution of phosphorus in bisulphide of carbon (approximately) =2 10

The first case we will consider is that of the visibihty of a diatom
in air, which, although it is otherwise excluded from consideration
in consequence of the lo.-^s of aperture involved, is nevertheless
valuable as a standard of comparison.

The index of diatomaceous silex being taken as 1 • 43, and
that of air being 1, we have as a measure of the visibility of a fine
diatom in air the number "43.

Taking now the various media in succession, and connucncing
with water, of which the index is I '33, the index of diatomucious

566 Transactions of the Society.

silex being, as before, 1 * 43, the difference, being tbe measure of
visibility of a diatom in ivater, is represented by 'lO.

The next in order is Canada balsam, with its index of 1 ' 54 ;
deducting the index of silex, 1 '43, we obtain the difference of •!!,
which is the measure of visibility of the same object in balsam, and
almost identical with that of water.

The next in succession is bisulphide of carbon,* index 1*68,
diatomaceous silex 1 • 43, giving as the measure of visibility in
hisuljihide of carbon ' 25, which it will be observed is about two
and a half times as great as that obtainable in water or balsam.

This result may however be exceeded by dissolving sulphur in
the bisulphide of carbon, although to what extent I am unable at
this moment to say, but as sulphur has an index of 2* 115, and is
moderately soluble, I think I am safe in assuming that the index
of the solution is 1 • 75 ; deducting from this 1 ■ 43, we obtain • 32
as the measure of visibility in solution of sul^jhur, which is nearly
three times as great as that of balsam.

The last in the list is phosphorus, but as this, from its crystal-
line character, cannot be conveniently used in its solid form, it is
also dissolved in bisulphide of carbon, the solution being just short
of that point at which crystals appear.

From the extreme inflammability of phosphorus and other diffi-
culties it is very improbable that it will ever be used to any great
extent, although there is to my mind great scientific interest in
the experiment.

If we take the solution of phosphorus as having an index of
2*1, and deduct that of the silex, 1*43, we obtain '67 as the
measure of the visibility of fine diatom markings in solution of
2)hospJiorus, which is six times as great as that of the same object
in balsam, and no less than 50 per cent, higher than its visibility
in air itself — whilst the greater brightness of the diffraction spectra
will make the more refrangible rays effective, and thus give a
greater power of visual (as distinguished from photograjyhie)
resolution.

Summarized we get the following results : —

Table showing the Visibility of Fine Diatoms when Mounted in the
FOLLOWING Media, securing the full Aperture of Objective.

Water 10

Canada balsam 11

Bisulphide of carbon 25

Solution of sulphur in bisulphide of carbon . . 32
Solution of phosphorus in bisulphide of carbon .. 67

The practical result of the investigation appears to be that
it is essential, if the whole aperture of an objective is to be
utilized, to mount minute structures in some medium other than
air.

* Oil of cassia gives almost exactly the same result.

On the Visibility, &e. By J. W. Ste])henson. 567

That although the full aperture and resolving power are
secured by mounting in balsam, it gives nevertheless nearly the
faintest image of all.

That a solution of phosphorus is, as far as visibility is con-
cerned, by far the most effective, but the difficulties attending its
use must render it unpopular.

The next best is a solution of sulphur in bisulphide of carbon
(although pure bisulphide is very good), and with these there is
no technical difficulty whatever.

A ring of the aqueous solution used by Mr. Browning in
making his bisulphide prisms being formed on the slip, and a drop
of the sulphur solution or pure bisulphide being placed in its
centre, nothing is necessary but to place over it the thin cover
with its adhering diatoms, press it down on the still moist ring,
running round it a somewhat copious margin of the cement, and
the thing is done.

In a short time the glutinous cement sets and finally becomes
dry, when, in order to protect it from the water of the ordinary
immersion lenses, it is desirable to give it a coat of gold size, or
shellac varnish, although for mere keeping purposes this is un-
necessary.

The same course may be adopted in mounting in phosphorus,
except that the solution must be run in from the edge of the thin
cover to avoid the phosphoric acid which rapidly forms on its
surface, and destroys the effect wherever it comes in contact with
the object. I have found varnish made of the best red sealing-
wax (which is better than pure shellac) as useful as Browning's
aqueous cement above referred to, but as it is brittle when dry it
should also be protected by a coating of gold size.

There are now on the table objects mounted in phosphorus and
bisulphide of carbon, which I exhibited in 1873,* and they still
remain unchanged notwithstanding the volatile nature of the
materials. On that occasion I fell into the error of saying that
there was a loss of aperture (instead of angle) with dry objectives
on objects mounted in phosphorus and bisulphide of carbon, when
in fact the aperture remained unchanged.

* See 'Mon. Micr. Journ.,' x. (1873) p. 1.

568 Transactions of the Societtj.

XVIII. — On the Development and Betrogression of Blood-vessels.

By George Hoggan, M.B., and Frances Elizabeth Hoggan,

M.D.

I^Rectd Uth April, 1880.)
Plate XV.

At the present day it is not necessary to hold pessimist ideas in
histology in order to admit that our knowledge of the manner in
which blood-vessels are formed is still unsatisfactory; and. although
for the last thirty years the most eminent histologists have sought
to elucidate the question, it may fairly be said that the very latest
opinions enunciated, differing as they do from all previous ones, are
in no way more satisfactory. Although many of these opinions
appear diametrically opposed to each other, they are principally so,
it seems to us, in being too exclusive in their application; and
with the view of reconciling them, we desire to put on record a
series of clearly ascertained facts or appearances which certain new
histological processes devised by ourselves have enabled us to obtain.
In our opinion, the general disagreement among histologists
upon this question is caused, in the first place, by the unsuitability
of the tissues in which it has been studied, and in the second place,
by the mode of preparation employed. Paradoxical though it may
appear, we have learnt from experience that the worst place in
which to study the development of any special tissue is the em-
bryo itself. There the embryonic cells are so little differentiated
from each other in shape, the intercellular substance or matrix is
so extremely scanty, while the process of developmental growth is
so rapid, that it is almost impossible to obtain a clear demonstra-
tion. The membranous expansion of the tail of a living tadpole,
which has been so often employed for this kind of research, and from
which so diametrically opposed views have been deduced, is espe-
cially unsatisfactory, because in the living cell no nucleus is visible,
and the polar star of the histological explorer being invisible, all
true ideas of direction and course of development are naturally
enough shrouded in obscurity. For our part, we have found
nothing so suitable as the growing broad ligament of pregnant rats
and mice, more especially during a first pregnancy, for there we
have a fringe of developing capillaries lying in a thin, rapidly
distending membrane, in which the gelatinous matrix is so plentiful
and clear that every vessel-forming cell stands out in distinct
relief. In that membrane, moreover, the silvei? method of fixing
and marking can be applied most favourably, in order to show the
junctions of the cells forming, or about to form, the blood-vessels, in
the position and shape they possessed when alive.

JOURK.R.MICR. SOC.VOL m.PL.Xy.

iVtst Mtvrrnar &• Cv Uth

Develoxinient &Ket.T-»car»essi on oP Blood- vessels.

Development, &c., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Uoggan. 569

The animal (by preference a house mouse) ought to be only
moderately well nourished, as both extremes of nutrition defeat our
object, either by obscuring the developing vessels by fat-cells, or
preventing the vessels from being formed. It ought first to be
gently anaesthetized by chloroform under a jar, and as soon as it is
insensible, it ought to be drenched with the anaesthetic, and then
left to die. We never lose time by injecting the animal and after-
wards allowing it to cool, as by that process not only do the cells
alter in shape, but the injection interposes an annoying obstacle to
vision when it has filled the vessels.

As soon as it is dead, we open up the abdomen along the linea
alba, so as to completely expose the gravid uterus, and then seizing
the uterus of one side with fine pointed forceps, we raise it out of
the body cavity, so as gently to distend the membrane or broad
ligament which attaches it to the abdominal wall. On one side
of this membrane we place the smaller of a pair of the histological
rings invented by us, and already described in this Journal ; * and
without allowing it to glide or rub over the surface, we place the
larger of the two rings upon the smaller. In this way a miniature
tambomine is formed ; and after the two rings have been carefully
jammed one on the other, by a slight circular movement, the excess
of membrane can be snipped ofi" external to the rings, and a one-
half per cent, solution of silver in distiUed water poured upon
either or both surfaces, without preliminary washmg ; but after a
few minutes exposure to a dull light, the whole may be gently
washed with ordinary water.

In our piece of membrane not only are the cells fixed in their
living shape, but, as the blood-vessels were full of blood when the
one ring was jammed upon the other, the distending blood was
thus retained within them, and the silver solution now fixes them
in this condition, and makes also the outlines of the cells, which
alone form them, distinctly visible. The membrane is now ready
for staining, the best of all methods for this purpose, according to
our experience, being the one invented and published by one of us.
By this method the membranous portion of the tambourine is first
soaked for a few minutes in methylated spirit, a teaspoonful in a
watch-glass or small saucer being suflicient. This is then pourtxl
away, and in its stead a few drops of a 2 per cent, solution of per-
chloride of iron in spirit is filtered upon the membrane. After a
few minutes a 2 per cent." sohition of pyroi^'allic acid in spirit is
next filtered upon it, and allowed to remain tlu're from a few
seconds to a few minutes, according to the depth of tint reipiireil,
and then the whole is well washed with ordinary water, and tho
staining process is complete. A few drops of glycerine may then
be phicecl u[)on tho membrane to clarify it, and the preparation
• Sec vol. ii. (I87'.i) !». W.u.

570 Transactions of the Societtj.

may be studied at once under the Microscope, or mounted on a
slide as a permanent preparation.

It may with equal facility be rendered transparent by alcohol
and an essential oil, and mounted in balsam or copal varnish, but
it then possesses all the disadvantages of a balsam preparation.
Under all circumstances, the membrane must be clarified before it
is excised from the rings, to prevent unequal contraction. It is
easily excised by running the edge of a knife round the outer rim
of the inner ring, and having prepared a slide previously with a
drop of glycerine upon it, the disk of membrane remains in place
when applied to it ; the glass cover may then be put on and sealed,
as we do it, by hot sealing-wax dropped round the edges, and
trimmed with a hot wire while the whole is compressed by a paper-
clip.

We have thus a preparation mounted in glycerine, in which no
undue distension has taken place, to whose surface no injury has
been done during the whole course of preparation, and whose
progress at every stage could be examined under the Microscope
without damaging it. Moreover, when mounted in glycerine the
blood leaves the vessels when the disk is excised, and is washed
away at the edges with the excess of glycerine, so that all the
vessels appear as rigid, hollow tubes, the thickness of whose walls
and the joints and nuclei of the cells composing them, can be
equally well seen by the silver and pyrogallate of iron processes we
have used.

As an admirable little review of the opinions already arrived at
by difterent observers on the question of the development of blood-
vessels, has lately been given by Dr. George Thin in ' The
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science ' for July, 1876, we
think it inadvisable to lengthen out this paper by any recapitula-
tion of them. With regard to even the latest views. Dr. Thin
states : — " The conclusion to which I have therefore come is, that
the cellules vasoformatives of Eanvier are spaces in the omentum,
to which, I submit, the term ' cell ' is not applicable. The develop-
ment of blood-vessels takes place by an escape, first of fluid, and
finally of the formed elements of the blood from the vascular
system into these spaces. The establishment of the blood current
is speedily followed by the formation of a membranous wall around
the current, which is impermeable for an injection mass or the
blood, and the process is complete."

We are careful to give Dr. Thin's views in his own words, as
they are the latest, to our knowledge, which have appeared in
English. They are opposed to the views of all previous observers,
and they are equally opposed to all the facts we have ascertained
and are about to state in this paper. Indeed we fail to understand
how, if he has used the silver process, he has overlooked the fact

Development, dte., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F, E. Hoggan. 571

that portions of capillaries show the junction markings of the
hollow cells composing them, before ever they have become con-
nected with the circulation.

We have found that a new development of blood-vessels takes
place solely by the aid and addition of the wandering cells.* In
the membranous sheet under consideration, the only cells present,
apart from the layers of endothelium covering the two surfaces of
the rapidly growing tissue, are the wandering cells. They may be
seen here in at least three conditions. They may be found
wandering purposeless over the free surface of either layer of endo-
thelium, or through the soft gelatinous matrix forming the mem-
brane between these layers. If the tissue has been properly
prepared, they are generally found branched in the latter locality,
although on the free surfaces they have retracted into a globular or
circular form, being surrounded by no matrix to retain them in the
branched condition when the silver is applied to fix them. If the
animal has been injected and left to cool before it is opened, and the
silver solution be then applied, they will probably appear round in
shape within the matrix, and very plentiful on the free surfaces in
the same form ; or they may be found developing into fat-cells in the
neighbourhood of the blood-vessels, in which condition they may
either appear round or with matiij branches, according to the condi-
tions of preparation already referred to. They may have more than
one nucleus in the purely wandering condition, but they have not
more than one nucleus as a rule when developing into a fat-cell.
Again, they may be found placing or having placed themselves in
position to form or to strengthen a blood-vessel in course of deve-
lopment. The methodical manner in which this is effected would
almost argue an instinct or intelligence worthy of higher animals ; and
although the directions the cells move in when forming the new
vessel may be manifold, they seem to follow a regular course
throughout. They may either plant themselves at a point in a
blood-vessel where a connection is to be formed, and prolong their
protoplasmic cell substance to join hands with another cell liuk in
the chain of capillary development, as at a, Fig. 9 (Plate XV.), and
e, Fig. 8, or, as is more common, they may appear external to the
future point of junction, and, stretching towards it their proto-
plasmic arm, thus complete the connection. This peripheral position
may be either in direct linear continuation of a new vessel, as at d,

• Wc tliink it unnecessary that we should aguin enter at any lengtli into the
rcasims we have jdready piven in our furnior nrtiolu on tlic Fut-cell, for rejecting
tlic liypotliesis that tlio fixctl cc-\U of the connective tinsue have any Bliare in tlio
fornialion of blood-vo8.s. Is, fat-cclLs, &c. We cannot admit tiiat any fixed cell of
any tis.sue can normally devcloj) directly into the fixed cell of any other tissue.
A "ciinecr cell may indeed impress its charact<r u|ion any lixed or ond)ryonic cells
near it, so that these also Income cancer cells; hut, normally, fixed cells can only
arise from or return to emhryouic cells.

572 Transactions of the Societtj.

Figs. 4, 5, and 6, or at right angles to it, as at a, Figs. 1 and 2, and
i, Fig. 12. Strange to say, in tlie latter condition the already-
existing blood-vessel or capillary seems always ready to meet such an
advance half-way, and will either bend its whole tube, in the case of
a capillary, or dimple its cellular wall, in the case of a larger blood-
vessel, towards the vessel-forming cell, as seen in the examj)les last
named.

It is also worthy of notice that, when we examine the membrane
in the vicinity of such a cell, we find that no other cell is as yet in
position to continue the process of development ; that, in short, the
solitary vessel-forming cell has specially come to place itself in the
most favourable position to enter into the continuation of the vessel
peripherally, and acts there until another cell may come and place
itself beyond it to continue the process. But the most wonderful
instinct of all is seen when a large capillary loop is about to be
formed, when several cells are seen placing themselves at considerable
distances from each other in the precise line which the future vessel
is to occupy. This is well seen in Fig. 12, A, which shows under a
power of 100 diameters a plan of such a loop about to be formed
between a and h, the nodal points in already formed capillaries,
where attachments to the circulation are to be formed. In this
loop or chain, independently of the cells at a, h, and c already
attached to the capillaries (all the component cells of this chain are
drawn separately in the same figure at a much higher power) we
have four links formed, three of them consisting as yet of only
single cells e, f, and h, and one link g, consisting of three cells,
two of which are already vacuolating or hollowing out to form a
tube before any connection is made with the comparatively distant
blood-vessels. Indeed this, the most advanced link of the chain, is
almost equidistant from the nodal points of junction at a and h. It
will also be observed that while gig', the cells which specially
hollow out to form the tube, join by overlapping their ends, or, in
other words, by forming a splice, the third cell g" places itself
upon the splice or junction of the cells, and therefore at the
weakest point, by way of strengthening the whole. This splicing
of cells and application at the point of junction of strengthening
cells we have found invariably throughout, as will be seen also in
all the other figures. Another point of interest at this spot is the
position or presence of a fibre or fibres which seem to connect the
cells together and with the nodal points, or, in other words, to
mark out the line of the future vessel.

Let us next consider the action or behaviour of a single cell
when about to develop into a blood-vessel, and let us choose, in the
first place, a single cell joining itself at right angles to an existing
blood-vessel or capillary from what seenls to be a perij)heral direc-
tion ; but while we say seems, we do not wish to say that such is

Development, &e., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Eoggan. 573

the actual condition, as will afterwards appear. For convenience'
sake, let us commence with Fig. 1, where we see a spindle-shaped
or bipolar cell, a, forming a junction with a comparatively large
blood-vessel h. We speak of cell a as bipolar, because it has
stretched out one-half of its protoplasm peripherally on one side,
while the other half is stretched out centrally in connection with the
blood-vessel. We may also note here that whatever shape a
wandering cell may possess before it makes up its mind to enter
into the composition of a blood-vessel, no sooner is that settled than
it assumes the elongated form, being either unipolar or bipolar from
the nucleus, and in no case yet have we seen a many-branched or
stellate cell entering into connection with a developing blood-vessel.
In Fig. 1 we also notice that the wall of the blood-vessel is bulged
out at its attachment to the protoplasm of the peripheral vessel-
forming cell, a, and the question is an open one whether the bulging
is the result of sympathy on the part of the vessel towards the cell
a approaching from the periphery, or whether the bulging merely
marks the spot where the cell a actually passed through the vessel-
wall from its interior foiuards the periphery to take its place where
it is now seen.

Passing on from Fig. 1, let us follow up the process in Fig. 2,
which takes us on a stage further in the same direction. Here we
have a cell, a, also lying at right angles to the existing vessel, in
this case a capillary, which has not merely bulged, but actually
bent its tube towards cell a. This cell may also be called bipolar,
although the great bulk of its protoplasm lies between the capillary
and the nucleus, which latter lies twice as far from the capillary as in
Fig. 1, or, if we consider the direction of movement to be reversed,
it has passed twice as far from the vessel as cell a, Fig. 1. We
see here also two points of interest already referred to as illustrating
fixed laws throughout : — 1st, The point of the attached cell is not
applied directly at right angles to the vessel, but lies alongside of it
(as was also the case in Fig. 1 ), and in the second place, at the
weakest part of the joint thus formed, we see the cell c placing
itself so as to strengthen the newly-formed joint or splice. Let us
next pass to a more advanced stage, as seen in i, Fig. 12, where
the cell is applied to a formed vessel, as in Figs. 1 and 2. Here
we have the joint strengthened b}' the application of another cell, as
in Fig. 2, and we have the first traces of another important feature,
the formation of the vacuole, or hollowing out of the cell whose
protoplasm is to form the capillary wall. It is to be seen as a small
white spot lying close to the nucleus on the side next the capillary,
and will go on increasing in size until either directly or by the
medium of an additional cell it forms a connection with the cavity
of the formed vessel.

A fourth stage is scon in Fig. 3, where not only has the cavity

574 Transactions of the Society.

of vacuolation become larger than in i, Fig. 12, and its junction
with the capillary strengthened by the addition of two cells h
and c, but already at its peripheral pole it has formed a connec-
tion in direct linear series with another bipolar cell, d, which has
arrived at the same degree of development as a in Fig, 1. We
shall hereafter refer to the bodies seen within the vacuole ; in the
meantime we have to notice that the vacuole has not become con-
tinuous with the cavity of the capillary, but this last phase is seen
between a and 6, Fig. 11, where the cavity is continuous with the
lumina of the vessels to which they are attached.

So far we have traced the history of the development of a
wandering cell into the first link of a developing blood-vessel. The
formation of the second link includes the process of prolongation of
a blood-vessel by a cell in direct linear continuation. Cell d in
Figs, 3 and 4, represents the first stage, in which nothing particular
is to be remarked beyond what we have already described. But in
d, Fig. 5, we have a stage further advanced ; a cavity has already
vacuolated in the direction of a, the cell also vacuolating to which
it is attached on the side next to the blood-vessel.

We may here call attention to an interesting peculiarity gene-
rally observed in cells vacuolating to form blood-vessels. Cell d,
having as yet no cell on its peripheral end or pole, has thrown
the whole of its protoplasma into the duty of forming an attach-
ment with cell a on its central aspect; and for the same reason
the cavity of vacuolation is formed on the central side of the
cell nucleus, while cell a, which wishes to form a connection cen-
trally with h and peripherally with d, has vacuolated at both sides
or ends of its nucleus. Cell i, Fig. 12, showed the earliest stage
in the carrying out of this principle, and we may see the third
stage in cell d, Fig. 6, whose vacuolated cavity at the attached
side of its nucleus has formed a junction with the cavity of the cell
a, to which it is attached centrally, and which, having vacuolated
before forming any attachment to cell h, shows the vacuolation
only on that side of the nucleus nearest to its peripherally attached
neighbour cell d.

In Fig. 7 we have the same process another stage further on,
where not only have the vacuolated cavities in a and d become
connected, but they have gone on extending themselves beyond
their respective nuclei both centrally and peripherally ; and further,
the oblique splice or union between a and d has been strengthened
at its weakest point by the addition of cell c placed according to the
usual rule. In this figure the dotted line represents the continua-
tion of the black silvered line that marks the union of the two cells
a and d on the opposite surface of the tube. In all these examples
it will be observed that we never have cells joining on the end-to-
end principle, as stated by Arnold, but, as a rule, they overlap each

Development, &e., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Roggan. 575

other, as stated by Golubew, whether the junction is effected at
right angles, as in Figs. 1 and 2, or in direct Hnear continuation, as
in Figs. 6 and 7.

Hitherto we have been principally engaged with cells forming
attachments at or from the perij)hery to blood-vessels. Let us
now study those cases where the cells appear to be attached to or
at the blood-vessels, and stretch out from them to form a junction
with cells lying unattached. Cell a, Fig. 9, seems to offer a
suitable example where the cell seems to make the capillary its
base of operation, from which it stretches to form an angular
junction with cell d, the peripheral point of another capillary.
But on the other hand, cell a, Fig. 9, may be held to form the
next stage to cell a, Fig. 1, supposed to be going in an opposite
direction, that is to say from the periphery to the blood-vessel
centrally. In other words, it is difficult or impossible to determine
whether cell a, Fig. 1, should follow cell a, Fig. 9, as a type of
cells acting or passing from the capillary, or cell a, Fig. 9, ought
to follow cell a, Fig. 1, as a type of cells passing to the capillary.
We may leave the question undecided, for it does not really much
matter, and it is only useful in serving to reconcile the opposing
views of Kolliker and Golubew as to whether it was by a cell
passing to or passing from the capillary that new vascular exten-
sions were formed.

If, however, we still follow the process in the sense that cell «,
Fig. 9, is a type of cell acting at or from the blood-vessels, we may
find an undoubted example of the same principle in cell e, Fig. 8,
which, while lying upon the capillary, has begun to stretch out a
short fine process of its protoplasm towards a wandering cell, /, of a
circular form, which has not yet begun to elongate its protoplasm
into the invariable bipolar shape which characterizes the wandering
cell when it has undertaken the duty of a vessel-forming cell.
Cells m and n, Fig. 12, arc very good examples of this direction of
development, and cell h is even more typical, because it has not yet
begun to send out any process peripherally. It must, therefore,
appear abundantly evident that the process of prolongation of
newly forming blood-vessels by cells may bo either towards or
from the vessels. We have shown that, although cell a in Figs. 1,
2, and 9, and i, Fig. 12, may be on debatable ground, yet such
examples as cells a and e, Fig. 8, are undoubtedly extreme examples
respectively of direction of growth from and towards the blood-
vessel.

{Sometimes we have cells connecting the blood-vessels before the
process of vacuolation has begun in them, as in Fig. 10, and again
we may lind earlier stages than that seen in Fig. 1, as for example
in cell/, l''ig. 0, which is evidently only approaching the capillary
in course of formation, and lying at right angles to the joint

576 Transactions of the Society.

between cells a and h, which are already forming the bend towards
cell /, that we see so distinctly marked in most of the figures.

The manner in which the vessel-forming cell vacuolates or
hollows itself out so as to form a tube is a question of great
importance, which is not yet thoroughly understood, judging from
the difi'erent opinions held by observers. This divergence in
opinion is, we believe, to be accounted for by the fact that there
are several different processes included under the head of vacuola-
tion, differing in their course and results, although one process may
be often found passing into another.

When a fixed cell passes into the embryonic form, as in the
case of an inflamed epidermic or cartilage cell, or when the cell of
embryonic cartilage vacuolates to make way for the development of
bone, there is always a plentiful formation of new or young cells
within the mother-cell ; but although these processes have certain
features in common with the vacuolating vessel-forming cell, they are
in other respects unlike it. Again, we have a different process in
the pathological vacuolation of cells, as we have shown it, for
example, in the sweat-glands in leprosy, in which condition there is
no proliferation or formation of new cells, but a cavity is formed
between the nucleus and the cell protoj)lasm, which increases until
it bursts. This vacuolation seems to have the effect of separating
the nucleus from the rest of the cell substance, and thus leads to
death of the individual cell. In such cases, the nucleus may be
either compressed against the cell protoplasm forming the wall of
the vacuole, appearing like the seal of a signet ring when viewed
edgeways, and almost normal in shape when viewed from the front,
or it may appear distorted and floating loosely in the fluid of the
vacuole.

With neither of the above processes does vacuolation of the
vessel-forming cell appear to be identical, although we have some-
times appearances shown apparently analogous with both. Thus
in g. Fig. 12> the nucleus appears to be separated from the cell
protoplasm, and floating loosely hke a distorted blood-corpuscle
within the fluid of the vacuole. On the other hand, in a, Fig. 3,
we have several bodies floating within the fluid of the vacuole, but
they are far too minute to be mistaken for blood-corj)nscles. It
has also been suggested that vacuolation is merely the formation of
fat within cells ; but this is certainly not the case with the vessel-
forming cells, or indeed with any other vacuolating cell we are
acquainted with. Apart from the fact which we have shown, that
osmic acid blackens the fat formed in cells and leaves the vacuolar
fluid transparent, we have also ascertained that in a developing fat-
cel] the nucleus is always surrounded by the protoplasm, however
thin the layer may be. The fat is therefore formed in the proto-
plasmic substance itself, and not between it and the nucleus, which,

Development, (&c., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Iloggan. 577

moreover, is never found floating within the fat-globule, so that
neither chemically nor physically is there any resemblance between
the fat-cell and the vacuolating cell. Nor have we ever seen, as
stated by Schaefer, a vessel-forming cell of a round form vacuolate
and subsequently elongate itself. Without calling his statement in
question, we may say that we have never met with even the com-
mencement of a vacuole in a vessel-forming cell, until after it had
elongated itself and clearly made up its mind to enter into the
construction of a blood-vessel. Of course, if the cells are not fixed
in the living form by the precaution we have referred to, they are
almost certain to retract into the round form. This, indeed,
occurred in some of the preparations we made for this research,
from which drawings were made before we detected the &ct that
the cells had all retracted in the process of preparation ; but here
there was no question of subsequent elongation.

Bearing in mind what we have remarked in the above, let us
proceed to trace the process of vacuolation in vessel-forming cells.
At i, Fig. 12, we have seen that the vacuole may begin and be
formed almost entirely in the substance of the cell protoplasm,
and so close to the end of the cell nucleus that, were it not
for the other examples, it would be difficult to decide whether
or not it touches it. In such a case the nucleus remains evidently
undisturbed upon the protoplasm, and the same is true of the
nuclei at a and d, Fig. 7. In other cases the vacuole may form so
as to sever the connection between nucleus and cell protoplasm, as
seems to have taken place in cell g. Fig. 12. In a, Fig. 3, on the
other hand, the cell evidently possessed more than one nucleus, or
the one nucleus has broken up into its separate constituent bodies,
as shown by Pouchet, the one condition in fact being only less
advanced than the other. At all events, four bodies are seen
within the vacuole, all very much smaller than blood-corpuscles,
but one of them, from its staining less intensely than the other
three, seems to be fixed or spread out normally on the vacuole wall,
or in other words on the cell protoplasm, while the other three
appear to be globular in shape and floating loosely within the fluid
of the vacuole, whence they would probably float off into the
general circulation when connection with it was established. This
is possibly the same process as that described by Kanvier and
Schaefer, by which blood-corpuscles are formal within cells, a
hypothesis, however, the correctness of which we arc not prepared
to admit, for those floating bodies are certainly not blood-corpuscles ;
and when blood-corpuscles are found within cells or tubes, as in
Figs. 13 and IG, we are prepared rather to accent the alternative
explanation offered by the former histologist tn£.t such cavities
are really retrograding blood-vessels, in portions of which blood'
corpuscles have become, so to speak, shut up or imprisoned.

VOL. iir. 2 Q

578 Transactions of the Society.

It is easy to imderstand the condition seen for example in
Figs. 6 and 7, where the nuclei still remain normally attached to
their cell protoplasm which is to form the wall of the future blood-
vessel. But what is to become of ff, Fig. 12, when its nucleus
floats away ? Will a new cell take its place when the circulation
is established, or will the unnucleated protoplasm remain in the
same position ? This we are unable to detennine, bnt the varied
conditions seen in the different examples we offer lead us to sup-
pose that, up to a certain stage, there is an analogy between the
physiological and the pathological vacuolation of cells. In the
vessel-forming cell, however, the accumulating vacuolar fluid finds
an escape into the circulation before much damage is done to it ;
but there is no vent for the pathological vacuolar fluid, and it there-
fore ends by destroying the cell.

We have already referred to the appearances sometimes, but not
always, seen where a line of elastic fibre marks out the track
subsequently to be occupied by a loop of blood-vessel. Such an
appearance is shown under a low power at A, Fig. 12, where,
however, the tint of the fibres has been purposely exaggerated for
the sake of distinctness. It is not our intention to enter into the
question of the development of elastic fibres, of which so little that
is satisfactory is known at the present day, but rather to inquire
into the relation which may exist between them and the cells e, f, h,
and y, which lie along the fine of fibre or fibres and represent the only
links as yet in the future chain of blood-vessel. After premising
that these fibres are only a few of the many elastic fibres which
exist at that spot, but which, as they do not interest us at present,
we have not drawn, lest they should confuse the appearances, we
have first to ask if those fibres existed before the cells placed them-
selves upon them, and if so, how was it that fibres came to be
placed so exactly in the line of the future blood-vessel ? Were
even this answered, are we then to suppose that the cells e, f, g,
and h clamber along the fibre from the nodal points a, h, and c, in
the existing blood-vessel, in order to place themselves where they
are especially wanted ? All these and a host of other questions may
be asked on this subject which our present knowledge does not
enable us to answer; and we ourselves, after much study and
examination of these and analogous appearances, have come to one
hypothetical conclusion which seems to apply to them all.

We do not believe that the fibres existed there before the cells,
but we beheve that they were made by the cells as these passed
into position ; that just as a slug leaves a trail of slime behind it,
those wandering cells may leave a trail behind them of a substance
which is known afterwards as elastic fibre, and that this tendency
accounts for the infinite shapes, sizes, branches, and positions
occupied by such fibres. We distinctly oiler the foregoing merely

Development, &c., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Hoggan, 579

as a liypothesis, but a hypothesis which seems to fit all the various
conditions.

In some cases, as at d, Figs. 5 and 7, the terminal vessel-
forming cell is not continuous with a fibre, while in other cases, as
at a, Fig. 1, the ceil is distinctly continuous with or prolonged
into a fibre. This difierence may yet be found sufficient to decide
whether the cell came centrally from the vessel or peripherally to
it. The further growth in size and calibre of newly developed
capillaries into veins and arteries, as may easily be conceived, takes
place by the interposition of wandering cells between or upon the
already existing cells of the wall. >So much on the question of
development.

Retrogression of Blood-vessels.

While the process of formation of blood-vessels may be held to
follow the same course under all circumstances, retrogression may
take place from several causes and under difierent forms. These
forms may be classed under the two great heads of physiological
and pathological forms of retrogression ; but it is not our intention
to enter at present into the consideration of the changes which
may take place under the latter head, regarding which it may be
sufficient for us to say that, under pathological conditions, the
cellular elements of the vessel walls may undergo either degenera-
tion or malignant changes, which entirely alter their morphological
appearances and destroy their physiological properties.

Confining ourselves, therefore, to physiological causes and forms
of retrogression, we shall direct special attention to changes which
result from, 1st, developmental, and 2nd, nutritive causes or
conditions. Ketrogression, as the result of insufficient nutrition,
can best be studied in connection with the great groups or tracts of
fat-cells to which innumerable blood-vessels are supplied within the
same serous membranes where we have already studied their
development. As the tracts of fat-cells disappear by physiological
absorption, either from want of food in a young and active animal
or through deficient power of assimilation of food in a very aged
animal, so likewise do the blood-vessels which supply them break
up and disappear when their presence there is no longer necessary.
In both these instances no disease is present, and the resulting
retrogression of blood-vessels -is therefore purely physiological, and
unconnected with any pathological condition. After the fat has Ijeen
absorbed i'rora all the cells, and these cells themselves are passing
away, we find notable changes taking place in the whole of the
blood-vessels passing to or snp|)lving a fat-tract.

The changes taking place in the arteries are of two kinds. If
the artery is directed solely towards the fat-tract, we find
innumerable irregular constrictions of its lumen, the muscular coat

2 Q 2

580 Transactions of the Society.

at some parts having contracted so as to nearly obliterate that
lumen, leaving moniliform groups of dilatations enclosing numerous
blood-corpuscles along its course. Very often, however, the
afferent and efferent vessels passing to and from the capillary
plexus of a fat-tract are destitute of muscular elements in their
walls, except at the point where the afferent vessel begins as a
branch passing off at right angles from an artery of considerable
size. In such a case a coat of muscular fibres extends upon it
for a distance of five or six diameters from its point of junction
with the artery, so that when it is no longer necessary for a
nutrient current to pass towards the fat-tract, this sphincter-like
muscular coat contracts, and thus shuts off the blood current.

The changes in the veins or vein-like afferent vessels are not
less strongly marked. These vessels contract their lumen by
causing the one layer of cells which form their wall to contract
laterally, and at the same time to become much thicker, so that
when we focus the Microscope upon the plane of the centre of the
vessel, we find the lumen obliterated, and the cells of the wall,
instead of having their nucleus standing in relief from the inner
surface of the vessel, now appear with a considerable thickness of
their protoplasm covering the nucleus on the internal as well as
upon the external surface of the vessel wall. This contraction
does not seem to be due to any nervous influence, but may in great
part be due to the pressure externally of the gelatinous matrix in
which the vessels lie embedded, and partly to their own proto-
plasmic contractile nature, these actions being permitted by the
absence of the distending fluid within them.

It is, however, in the capillaries that the best marked changes
are to be observed. While the whole capillary plexus supplying
or ramifying in a tract of empty fat-cells contracts the lumen of
the vessels throughout, it is only the loops of capillaries forming
the outer border or edge of the plexus which first retrograde and
break up. In such cases we may observe constriction, or what
really ought in most instances to be called a withering, at one or
more points on the course of the loop, the capillary wall appearing
to become much thinner, as at h, h, Fig. 15, and losing the plump
cylindrical appearance seen in well nourished capillary walls. At
the same time the withered portion seems to lose its faculty of
being stained by certain staining agents which colour satisfactorily
those portions of the capillary intervening between the withered-
like constrictions. Finally, the capillary breaks at one or more
places, and the process of disintegration is carried on at the
extremities of the free ends, one cell after the other breakmg off,
as at a, Fig. 19, and appearing to move away, by means of long
delicate processes or branches, from the seat of its former functions
as an individual element in a capillary wall.

Develojp merit, <&c., of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Hoggan. 581

The thinning or withering of the wall which we have referred
to, is evidently a process of absorption of the excess of protoplasm
which the cell had accumulated after it had taken its position as a
part of the capillary wall at its first development During this
absorption, moreover, particles of a peculiar fatty-like substance
show themselves, as at e. Fig. 19, on the absorbing protoplasm,
which refuse to stain with colouring reagents ; but when logwood
has been used it appears of a yellowish-brown colour, in strong
contradistinction with the blue or purple tint of the healthy nuclei
or protoplasm.

More peculiar still is the relation which the intercepted
portions of capillary bear to the blood-corpuscles, numbers of which
in many cases become shut up in such intercepted portions, as in
Figs. 17 and 19. For the purpose of studying tlie changes under-
gone by those blood-corpuscles, we especially recommend the
pyrogallate of iron staining process, for while the nuclei and pro-
toplasm of the healthy elements are very well shown by it, the
blood-corpuscles seem to have a special affinity for the colouring
matter and stain intensely black, so that there is no difficulty ia
watching their behaviour until they have become completely ab-
sorbed. This faculty of staining intensely is probably due to the
great amount of iron which they normally contain, but whatever
the cause may be, the fact is very evident. The change which
takes place in these elements can be easily followed, even if it
cannot be explained. The corpuscles enclosed in a portion of
capillary undergoing the thinning or absorbing of its protoplasm,
are seen to become paler and transparent, as at h, Fig. 11), and
smaller in size, until a point is reached when they can no longer
be detected, as if they had dissolved away within the absorbing
protoplasm of the capillary cell, and no vestige of them remained
behind. It is highly probable that the yellowish fat-particles, c c,
Fig. 19, already alluded to, are really composed of a modification of
the blood pigment from the corpuscles, a point we have not the
necessary instruments to determine.

This reference to blood-corpuscles within intercepted portions
of capillary, leads us to the much debated question of the presence
of blood-corpuscles within cells already referred to, and of the
signification of those appearances in what have been named vaso-
formative cells by Professor Kanvier, with regard to which we have
also given Dr. Thin's opinion that they are merely spaces in the
omentum to which the term cell is not apjilicable. This question
also brings us to the consideration of the retrogression of blood-
vessels })hysiologically in connection with the development of an
animal. Professors Kanvier and Schutfer independently announced
the discovery of cells containing blood- corpuscles, the one having
Ibund them in the skin of embryo rats, ana the other in the serous

582 Transactions of the Society.

membranes of embryos or newly born animals. Both of these
histologists described these cells as ultimately becoming connected
with or forming part of the circulation, but the former has specially
studied them in this relation and given to them the name they now
bear of " vasoformative cells."

It is unnecessary for us at present to enter into his arguments
for considering these structures as connected with the development
of blood-vessels, as we are more concerned with certain remarks
which he makes at page 633 of his ' Traite d'Histologie,' where he
advances the hypothesis, only to reject it, it is true, that having
regard to the great changes continually taking place in the circula-
tion of the embryo, and after birth more especially in connection
with the obliteration of the branchial arches, the ductus arteriosus,
&c., it may be plainly argued that those cavities containing
blood-corpuscles are really portions of the circulation becoming
obliterated, and that the intercepted portions are really parts of
pre-existing capillaries.

However startling such a hypothesis may appear at first sight,
we are surprised to find Professor Eanvier reject it as being
inapplicable, at all events, to most of the examples he has
studied. For our part, we subscribe fully to it, not as a hypo-
thesis, but as a fact, for there is certainly in this research no fact
easier of demonstration than it is. Our reasons are the followinof :

O

In the first place, there is complete identity between these vaso-
formative (so-called) cells containing blood-corpuscles, and the
intercepted portions of retrograding capillaries containing blood-
corpuscles, in animals where nutrition has been insufiicient. In
the second place, if one studies the omentum of newly-born kittens,
as recommended by Kanvier, nothing can be clearer than the fact
that retrogression and develoj)ment of blood-vessels are going on
side by side, and that the two processes are so distinct that there
is scarcely any possibility of confounding the one with the other.
We give a drawing of such an example, Fig. 13, where retrograding
and developing vessels are lying parallel and close to each other,
so that a glance ought to be sufiicient to distinguish between them.
In this camera lucida drawing a, a! are terminations of branches still
in connection with the original channels of the chculation, and 6, h'
are what are called vasoformative cells, containing blood-corpuscles,
but which in reality are portions of the capillary which originally
stretched from a to a', and are now identical with Figs. 15, 17,
and 19, from a rat which died of old age and inanition. In Fig. 13
we also see a new vessel c, from which three new branches d, d', d",
are being developed, in conformity with the process we described
in the early part of this paper.

It is therefore evident that the physiological retrogression of
blood-vessels follows the same course, whether it be due to insuffi-

Development, dc, of Blood-vessels. By G. and F. E. Eoggan. 583

cient nutrition or assimilation of food, on the one hand, or to
changes in the development of an animal, on the other, the only
peculiarity being that while in the latter case development and
retrogression go on simultaneously and side by side, in the two
former cases only retrogression goes on at one time, there being no
room or reason for development, just as during development of blood-
vessels in the adult there can be no retrogression at the same time.

Bearing in mind, therefore, the small bodies sometimes seen in
vacuolating cells during the formation of blood-vessels, as in Fig 3,
these bodies being in general too small to be mistaken for blood-
corpuscles, we have come to the conclusion that the vasoformative
cells are neither cells nor cavities, but are only intercepted portions
of a retrograding capillary or larger vessel, as the case may be,
and still containing the blood-corpuscles which lay within the vessel
before it broke up into fragments.

The results of this research may be summarized in very few
words. When new blood-vessels are necessary, the wandering cells
come and plant themselves in position according to a definite plan ;
through these, when hollowed out, the circulation of the blood is
established or permitted. When the blood-vessels of any part are
no longer necessary, they break up into their individual cells, and
these separated links of the broken-up chain move off in their
original condition of wandering cells. A simple cycle of life, or
functional phase ; much simpler, indeed, than the cycle we have
described in the life of the fat-cell (a companion study already pub-
lished in this Journal), but none the less evident because it is simple.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.

(Drawings and preparations by the authors.)

The first fourteen figures illustrate the development of blood-vessels, and
Figures 13 and 15 to 19 illustrate their retrogre.ssiun. Figures 11, 13, and IG are
from the omentum of the newly born kitten ; Figures 15, 17, and 18 are frum the
broad ligament of the r.it ; the re;<t are from the broud ligament of pregnant mice.
They have all been stained by silver and pyrogallate of iron, and mounted in
glycerine.

Fig. 1 shows a wandering cell a forming a junction with a blood-vessel 6,
whicli, as if in sympathy, has dimpled or bulged its wall towards the new comer.

Fig. 2. — A similar cell «, in like relationship to a capillary 6, but in a stage
further advanced than Fig. 1. In this case the capillary has bent its whole tube
in sympathy. A second cell c has placed itself against the joint as if to
Btiengthen it.

Fig. 3. — A still further advanced condition, in which a second cell-link <i has
been added to a ; a, moreover, is vacuolating, and shows four small globular IxKiics
within the vacunle. An earlier stage of vacunlution is seen in Fig. 12, at c and i'.

Fig. 4. — A still further advanced coudition, in which cells a and rare vacui'lat-
ing respectively towards'', the proximal, and </, the distal communication.

Fig. 5. — A similar ctmdition where vacuolalion has been going on in cells <i
and d before connection is established with the capillary '>.

Fig. G. — A similar condition where the vacuoles in two ct ll.s a and (/ have
joined to form one cavity before forming a communication with a tliinl cell,
vacuole h intervening between tlieni and the capillary. Th ■ i.s. ijated cell / 1<> the
right of Fig. 1 belongs to this figure. [Fio. 7

584 Transactions of the Soaietij.

Fig. 7. — A similar condition, where the junction of two cells a and d and their
vacuoles forming one cavity is very plainly marked by silver lines. The dotted
line represents the continuation of the silver marking on tlie lower surface of
the tube formed. A third cell c has placed itself, according to rule, against the
joint formed by a and d, but communication has not yet been effected with the
lumen of the capillary.

Fig. 8. — Shows the formation of a capillary plexus. The vacuoles in a and d,
having formed one cavity, are about to establish a communication with the blood-
vessel 6. Three cells by their processes are forming a junction at g. Cell e is
stretching out a process to form a communication with a wandering cell /, which
has not yet begun to elongate its protoplasm.

Fig. 9 shows a junction being formed at an acute angle by cells a and d, so
as to construct a loop between two capillary loops, but only cell d has vacuolated,
and it has not yet connected its cavity with the circulation.

Fig. 10. — A similar loop between two capillary loops g and h, being formed by
three cells a, b, and c, none of which has as yet begun to vacuolate.

Fig. 11. — A branch capillary developing in accordance with the plan seen
in the preceding figures, cell a having vacuolated, and the vacuole being about to
become connected with the lumen of the blood-vessel 6. This figure is to be
compared with Fig. 1(3, which apparently represents retrogression, both figures
being taken from the same field of the Microscope in a preparation of the omentum
of a newly born kitten.

Fig. 12 represents the formation of a largo capillary loop or plexus. At A
the whole plan has been drawn under a low power of 100 diameters, while the
special points of interest have again been drawn at tlie same high power as the
rest of the drawings. The nodal points in the existing capillaries to be connected
are formed at a and at h and c, wliile c, f, g, and h represent some of the links on
the future chain. Of these links, g is formed of tliree cells joined togetlier in the
usual plan, and of these, g and g' are vacuolating ; a nucleus-like body, resembling
also a blood-corpuscle seen edgeways, appears to float free in the vacuole of g.

Fig. 13 shows development and retrogression of vessels going on at the same
moment and in the same field of the Microscope, owing to changes in the circula-
Intion at birth, a a', terminations of a retrograding vessel still connected with the
circulation ; b b' portions of tlie blood-vessel formerly continuous from a to a' and
still containing tlie blond-corpuscles e e, which remained in them at the moment of
separation ; c newly developed vessel with three branches d, d', d'', in course of
development ; //, nuclei of the cells of the wall of the capillary.

Fig. 14 shows a developing loop a becoming connected with the circulation at
b b', the component cells of which follow the rules already noticed.

Fig. 15 shows retrogression of blood-vessels in old age, and failure to
assimilate food, which was plentiful. The loop a is about to break off from the
circulation at 6 6', being exactly the converse of Fig. 14; blood-corpuscles at ee;
nuclei of the cells forming capillary wall at //.

Fig. 16. — A drawing under higher power of 6' Fig. 13, representing a so-called
vasoformative cell, but in reality a portion of a retrograding blood-vessel.
Compare with developing capillary in Fig. 11, from the same preparation.

Fig. 17. — A small portion of a long capillary loop in retrogression (from a rat
which had evidently died of starvation), being the portion still attached to the
plexus, but shut to the circulation, e e, blood-corpuscles ; //, nuclei of cell wall.

Fig. 18. — A similar portion of retrograding capillary, collapsed throughout, and
undergoing absorption. It is about to break up into its constituent cells a a. From
the same preparation as Fig. 17.

Fig. 19, from the same animal as Fig. 15, shows a portion of retrograding
capillary from which one cell a is about to separate itself. That cell contains two
blood-corpuscles 6, nearly absorbed, c, granular matter of the nature of fat or of blood-
pigment ; dd, other blood-corpuscles still normal ; e e, nuclei of wall of capillary.

Fig. 13 is drawn to a scale of 170 diameters ; Figs. 17 and 18 to 280 diameters ; all
the others under the same power of 330 diameters, by the aid of the camera lucida.

( 585 )

XIX. — On a ParahoUzed Gas Slide.
By James Edmunds, M.D., M.K.C.P. Lond., F.K.M.S.

dBead 9th June, 1880.)

This is a simple and inexpensive contrivance which has been made
for me by ]\Iessrs. Beck for the purpose of examining bacteria,
blood-globules, &c., while gases or vapours of various kinds are
projected into an annular space from which they rapidly diffuse
into an object which is being observed under the Microscope.

The slide * (Figs. 52 and 53) is constructed of a shp of optical
crown glass 3 inches by l^, and in thickness from three to four
sixteenths of an inch. An annular zone eleven- sixteenths of an

Fig. 52.

inch in diameter and nearly one-eighth inch deep is turned out
of the slide, so as to leave a central pillar three-eighths of an inch
across, and the top of this pillar is then turned down, so as to

Fig. 53.

leave a . li 1 area nearly a quarter of an inch in diameter, and
exactly on a level with the general surface of the slide. The out-
side of the central pillar is then smoothed into an approximately
paraboloidal surface, and brought to an optical polish. A straight
groove of the same size and depth as the annular zone is then cut
out of the slide parallel to its long side and at a tangent to the
annulus. Into the longitudinal groove of the slide two fine glass
tubes are cemented. One of these is left projecting beyond the end

* Fi". 52 sliowH flie iippor (isj^cpt f>f <he sliilo oxeiivatod willi the ;;roovo
and iiimuluH, tlio totally n llcctiii;^ iiumlioliziMl «rirfiico of thr cciitnil i>il!ar. aii«l
the dtftr central area left on a level with the top of the sliile. Vv^. 5;{ ;,'ive.s :i
longitudinal ROction of the slide drawn through its centre, and nhowin>^ the
annular gas uhaunel, the central paraboloid, and the thiu cover.

586 Transactions of the Society.

of the slide, so as to be connected with a slender elastic tube through
which gases or vapours may be projected, and which, after traversing
the annulus, escape by the other tube. A ring of olive oil is set
around the annulus upon the surface of the slide, and the cover
containing on its centre the drop of liquid to be examined is then
so placed over the annulus that a film of fluid less than a quarter-
inch in diameter lies between the top of the central paraboloid and
the cover, while the margin is sealed by the oil. Thus the object
may be examined, firstly by itself, and afterwards while various
gases are passed through the surrounding annular space, and the
changes produced, say on blood-disks by dry or moist air, alcohol
vapour, ammonia, acetic acid, carbonic acid, &c., can be watched
and repeated at pleasure.

If light be thrown into the central area from beneath by means
of a two-inch objective, the object is seen negatively upon a bright
field, while if the condenser be decentered the light is thrown
upon the parabolic surface and is totally reflected into the object
at such angle as to give a positive image upon a black background
under a dry eighth or sixteenth, as with the immersion paraboloid.
The glass tubes may be cemented into the groove by means of dough,
putty, jDlaster of paris, shellac, &c. If very hot sealing-wax be
used the slide is apt to crack, unless previously heated in water.
Diaphragms of black paper or tin-foil may be gummed on to the
lower sm-face of the slide, so as to stop out the central area when
black-field observations are wanted. Both as a gas slide and as a
simple form of the immersion paraboloid, it works conveniently and
efficiently.

( 587 )
EECOED

OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVEETEBEATA, CEYPTOGAMIA, MICEOSCOPY, &c.*

ZOOLOGY.

A. GENERAL, including- Embryology and Histology
of the Vertebrata.

Development of the Vertebrate Eye.f — Professor Lankester
directs attention to the myelonic or cerebral eye which the Ascidian
tadpole possesses in common with all Vertebrates. All other animals
which have eyes develop the retina from their ectoderm. It is easy to
understand that an organ which is to be affected by the light should
form on the surface of the body where the light falls. It has long been
known as a very puzzling and unaccountable peculiarity of Vertebrates,
that the retina grows out in the embryo as a bud or vesicle of the brain,
and thus forms deeply below the surface and aioay from the light. The
Ascidian tadpole helps us to understand this, for it is perfectly trans-
parent and has its eye actually inside its brain. The light passes
through the transparent tissues and acts on the pigmented eye, lying
deep in the brain. We are thus led to the conclusion — and ho
believes this inference to be now for the first time put into so many
words — that the original Vertebrate must have been a transparent
animal, and had an eye or pair of eyes inside its brain, like that of
the Ascidian tadpole. As the tissues of this ancestral Vcrtebrato
grew denser and more opaque, the eye-bearing part of the brain was
forced by natural selection to grow outwards towards the surface, in
order that it might still be in a position to receive the influence of
the sun's rays. Thus the very peculiar mode of development of the
Vertebrate eye from two parts, a brain-vesicle and a skin-vesicle, is
accounted for.

Embryolog^y of Batrachians.;}: — These 'New Researches' of
Professor Van Eambeke consists of two jiarts : (I.) on the envelopes
of tlio egg and external embryonic changes of Tritons and Axolotl,
and (II.) on the cleavage of the egg in Batrachians generally.

I. 1. Having in a previous essay described the egg proper (vitel-
line splicro or globe) the author now distinguishes its five envelopes
as (1) the vitelline membrane, (2) chorion, (3) inner capsule, (-i) outer
capsule, and (5) adhesive layer. The first is thin and structureless,

* i^' It sliould bo understood that the Society do not liold thonisolveH respon-
sible for tlic views of the autliors of the luipers, &e., referred to, nor fi>r the manner
in wliicli tliose views may be expressed, the objiet of the Kecord Ix'inj^ to present
a siimnmry of the pajjcrs us acbialhi published. Objections and corrections shouhl
therefore, for tlie most pait, be address( d to tiie aullii>rs.

+ 'Degeneration: a rhapter in Darwinism ' (8vo, I/indon, 1S80).

X ' Arch, dc Biologie,' i. (1880; pp. 305-380 (4 plates).

588 RECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

closely fitted to the yolk, with little projections on its inner surface,
corresponding to the vitelline pores, and a fold applied to the first
meridional groove. The chorion, also trans2)arent and homogeneous,
tightly invests the inmost membrane, like which it may be a mere
transformation of the outer substance of the yolk ; or is it not rather
a product of the granulosa, since it takes no share in the act of
cleavage? The chorion is separated from the inner capsule by a
liquid in which the egg moves freely, touching the capsule by its
lowest part. Frequently the egg of Triton, still within the oviduct,
has its vitelline sphere of an elliptic figure (persisting after extrac-
tion), the space about the chorion being at this time filled with jelly.
In Triton the liquid is often bistre-coloured and the inner capsule is
much thinner than in Axolotl, where its optic section displays a
fibrous aspect. The liquid of Axolotl at first contains brilliant
granules and little opaque clots which subsequently disappear. The
outer capsule is transparent as glass, elastic, very resistant, bluish
when seen against a dark ground, and homogeneous or but feebly
striated parallel to its surface ; elliptic in Triton, it is spherical in
Axolotl. Like the inner capsule it is rapidly deposited in the first
moiety of the oviduct. Here begins also the formation of the adhe-
sive layer, to be completed in the further portion of the duct. In
Triton this layer is thin, easily detached from the outer capsule ; not
so in Axolotl, where it is much softer, swelling by contact with
water and resembling a viscous mass. Minute depressions, arranged
with tolerable regularity, are often seen to mark a part of the thick-
ness of the adhesive layer. These are probably the stigmata left
by diatoms, Avhich in other places occupy spots of corresponding
diameter.

I. 2. Professor Van Bambeke distinguishes seventeen stages
between fecundation and the exit of the embryo from the egg.
Stage I., ending with the beginning of cleavage, he has treated in a
previous memoir. Stage II., from cleavage to the commencement of
epiboly, is discussed in the second Part of this essay. Stages III.-
XVII. are here duly described.

II. The author has studied cleavage of the egg in three species of
Triton {alpestris, punctatus, and palmipes), in Axolotl, Pelobates
fuscus, and the common toad. The latter is here referred to but
cursorily, for its strongly pigmented eggs offer peculiarities to be
explained in a future memoir. Six stages, ending with the formation
of the morula, are fully described and illustrated. An historical
sketch is added in which the results detailed are compared with
those of Goette, Biitschli, O. Hertwig, Scott and Osborn, and
Benecke : the researches of Salensky on the sterlet, with the more
general views of Flemming, Fol, and Mayzel, are also noticed. The
whole demands an attentive study. We give the author's own
" conclusions."

1. Cleavage is set up by the first embryonic nucleus (der erste
Lehenskeim, Goette), placed in the upper hemisphere, at the limit of
the ccto- and endodermic segments. The axis of the egg, which
originally passed through the centre of the germinal depression, now

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 589

traverses the embryonic nucleus and abuts peripherally at a point
where the first meridional groove will appear ; in other words, the
upper or active pole is disi:)laced.

2. The nucleus undergoes transfoimations comparable to those
observed in the egg of most organisms (cleavage-amphiaster ). There
are three principal phases, to the last only of which the descriptions
and figures of Goette apply ; so that the egg-nucleus of Amphibians
makes no exception to the general rule.

3. As Goette has shown, a clear rim, which I call cleavage plate,
precedes the appearance of the peripheric groove. It is most clearly
indicated in the plane of the future equatorial cleavage, thus esta-
blishing a marked separation between the ectodermic spherules and
the endodermic mass. It has manifestly for its seat the line of
separation between what I term the ectodermic and endodermic ex-
tremities of the egg.

4. The meridional grooves arise as pale, strongly marked gutters
along the pigmentary cap of the upper hemisphere ; afterwards, by
effacement of the cleavage-spherules, the gutter becomes a simple
groove. The i:)igmentary line of separation then belongs, at least for
the most part, to the cortical layer.

5. In the endodermic extremity, the meridional divisions increase
in activity from the centre towards the periphery. Accordingly, at
any given moment, the cleft portion covers a still undivided region,
represented in sections by an ellipse whose base corresponds to the
lower pole of the egg.

6. Certain phenomena, such as the impulsion of cortical pigmen-
tary masses towards the interior of the egg, the irregularities in the
planes of division observable in some phases, &c., arc explicable only
by admitting the existence of contractions of the protoplasm of the
egg dui'ing cleavage.

7. The roof of the segmentation-cavity, at first monoderic, be-
comes polyderic. There is here no diiierence between the eggs of
Anoura and Urodela.

Vital Properties of Cells.* — M. Eanvier directs particular atten-
tion to the appearance of nuclei in dead cells ; taking for example
the lympliatic and " fixed " cells of the cornea, he points out that,
during life, no nuclei can be made out in them, but that these appear
after the death of the cells. The reason of this appears to bo that,
during life, the nuclei are not apparent because their refractive
power is very much the same as that of the surrounding protoplasm.
At death, changes take place in the protoplasm, so that they then
become apparent. In illustration of this ho has performed the
following experiments : — -

(1) Two corneae were carefully removed from a frog, and were
both placed in damp chambers, exactly similar in construction ; one,
in a room of 23^, was submitted for ten seconds to the action of an
electric current ; this was sufficient to kill some of the cells, and their
nuclei became apparent two minutes afterwards. The other was

♦ ' Comptos Rori'liiH.' Ixxxix. (187^) p. .S18.

590 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

submitted to the same current, at a temperature of 2° ; 45 minutes
elapsed before the nuclei became apparent.

(2) Somewhat similar experiments were undertaken with eyes
from a frog, which were respectively submitted to a temperature of
33° and 80°, together with an electric current ; in the former the
nuclei appeared within an hour after the experiment ; in the latter
not at all.

(3) The cornea of a frog was submitted to an induction current
sufficiently strong to kill the cells, and was then kept for two hours
in a damp chamber at a temperature of 33° ; it was then found that the
nuclei were broken up into fragments or small spherical granules. The
action in this case appears to have been that the currents broke up the
nuclei, and the work thus commenced was completed by "autodigestion."

Coalescence of Amoeboid Cells into Plasmodia.*— The coagulation
of the perivisceral fluids or the blood of Invertebrata as studied in
the air-tight chamber presents, as Mr. Geddes shows, some significant
phenomena. Thus the amoeboid corpuscles of the earthworm's
perivisceral fluid, those of the gill of Pholas, the corpuscles of
Patella and Buccinum, during coagulation become aggregated into
groups, which rapidly become individualized, and themselves send
out pseudopodia.

Of the two kinds of corpuscles possessed by Pagurus, the
elongated, coarsely granular ones do not possess this power, which
however belongs to the finely granular ones, which may enclose the
former kind in their clot ; the same distinction is observed in Carcinus
mcenas and Cancer pagiirus. The corpuscles, with their looped
pseudopodia, of the common starfish send out pseudopodia, as in the
previous cases, from a united mass. The Echinoidea, as exemjilified
by Echinus sph(era, show the phenomenon most strikingly. The clear
perivisceral fluid contains coarsely and finely granular corpuscles
similar to those of Paguriis, besides coloured ones. The clot com-
mences as a cloudiness of the liquid ; the cloud gradually becomes
denser until a small brown pellet is the result. This is formed
entirely of the finely granular corpuscles which run first into small
heaps, these uniting into larger ones until a large mass is formed
containing the nuclei and granules in an endoplasm, and sending
out generally filamentous pseudopodia from a hyaline ectoplasm
which is clearly differentiated from the former ; the pseudopodia
sometimes lengthen to an immense extent.

A comparison of these cell-formed clots with those of the Myxo-
mycetes appears to demonstrate a true homology between them ; and
the possession of the same power by the Ehizopods, Microgromia,
Bhaphidiophrys, PJionergafes, &c., shows it to be at any rate a very
widely spread function of amoeboid cells.

Structure and Development of Dentine. t — M. Magitot gives a
short account of his investigations on this structure, which have led
him to the conclusion that it is not, as some writers— Duvernoy e. g. —

* 'Proc. Roy. Soc.,' xxx. (1880) p. 252, and 1 plate,
t ' Couiptes Rcndus,' xo. (1880) p. 1298.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 591

have imagined, a secreted product, but that it is a living tissue ; this
view, however, is now old, and appears to owe its origin to Professor
Owen, who* pointed out the striking similarity which obtains
between dentinal and ordinary osseous tissue.

Ovary of Mammals. t — Dr. Jules Macleod (of the Ghent Histo-
logical Laboratory) describes the ovaries of the bat (pipistrelle),
mole, and stoat. Successful results were obtained by the method of
double coloration. The ovary and oviduct are very closely connected
by means of their serous investment, as in other mammals except
man. The parenchymatous zone of the stroma is not resolvable into
the separate layers (cortical, subcortical, and follicular), distin-
guished by His. In the stoat this zone, with its peripheric lobules,
is copiously developed and sharply limits the included medullary
vascular stroma ; while in the mole and bat these two portions of the
stroma lie side by side, the one not being wrapped round the other.
In the bat their structure is nearly identical. The ovary of the
adult mole offers seasonal diflferences as to size, structure, and orien-
tation, which are not constant, and merit further study. The serous
endothelium of the bat passes gradually into the adjoining ovarian
epithelium. The cuboid epithelium of the mole is very distinct from
the endothelium of the serous layer, which, as in the bat, is excep-
tionally extended over most of the ovary. In the stoat the epithelium
is nearly cyliudric. The adult intertrabecular ovarian stroma of
these three mammals is largely made up of elements comparable to
the Plasmazellcn of Waldeyer, whose interpretation of the Graafian •
follicles also coincides with the description of their structure and
development here given. Finally, the ovary contains medullary
cords, v/hich the author, following Balfour, regards as homologues of
the male seminiferous tubules. These cords are especially abundant
in the mole, less so in the bat ; in both the contiguous ovarian surface
is closely invested by its capsule, as is the testicle by its albuginea.

Influence of Saline Solutions on Protoplasm. | — The researches
of M. Costerus were stimulated by the results obtained by Professor
de Vries in examining the influence of acids on vegetable substances.
The solutions employed by the former contained chiefly chloride of
sodium or nitrate of potash, and the object of examination was most
frcc^ucntly the red beet-root.

The following was his method of investigation : — In glass
capsules, about 3 cm. high, he placed some very thin slices of beet-
root, which were covered over by water ; similar slices were immersed
in a 10 per cent, solution of sea-salt. It resulted from those experi-
ments that, at the end of a few days, the slices in the salt-solution
comj)lctely lost their colour, whereas thf)so in pure water for some
considerable time after, retained their colour. Similar results were
obtained with solutions of nitrate of potassium.

To what was this efl'oct due ; is more oxygen absorbed by water

* ' ComptcH RpikIuh,' ix. p. 784.

t ' Aroli. (Ic liiolo^'io," i. (1880) pp. 241-278 (2 platfs).

X ' Arch. NeiTl. Sci. o.\nct. ( t iiat.,' xv. (1880) p. 148.

592 KECORD OF CUERENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

when the salts are absent from it? To resolve this question the
author, instead of using thin slices, experimented on pieces 1-2 and
5 mm. in thickness, and 5 mm. in length and width. The access of
air beincf thus hindered, it was, obviously, possible to see whether the
already observed diiferences were altogether to be ascribed to the
greater difficulty of respiration in salt-solution ; and these observa-
tions led him to the conclusion that, when less air penetrates, the
diiFerence between cells in pure water and in salt-solution is less
distinctly marked. The next thing was to subject the slices of beet-
root to an air-pump, before commencing the investigation ; pieces
thus treated showed a remarkable result, inasmuch as the balance was
after fifteen days in favour of the pieces immersed in the salt-
solution.

Other results confirm a conclusion which may be thus formulated ;
the cells of the red beet-root, when air has free access to them, are
injm-iously aftected by salt-solutions, while when the air is removed
or is only present in small quantities these solutions have a sustaining
effect. The former point is the only one which the author at present
attempts to explain, and this explanation is found in the fact that
saline solutions absorb less gas than pure water, and that the co-
efficient of absorption decreases in proportion as the solutions become
more concentrated.

"Law of Association." * — M. Edmond Perrier considers that the
oft-repeated objections to the theory of evolution leave the funda-
mental principles of that doctrine untouched. Having gone over the
various organisms from lowest to highest, seeking out, not the
differences, but the points of similarity between them, he believes he
has ascertained that a simple and very general law presided over their
formation, that they were derived from one another by a constant
process, and that he has succeeded in adding a few arguments to the
theory of the genealogical relationship of species.

This law M. Perrier terms the " law of association." The process
by which it has produced the majority of organisms is the " transfor-
mation of societies into individuals."

Ever since it was shown that every living being was composed of
microscopic corpuscles more or less resembling one another — that
similar corpuscles capable of leading an independent existence consti- ~
tuted of themselves the simplest organisms — it has been thought that
the most highly organized animals and plants were comparable to
vast associations of distinct individuals, each represented by one of
these living corpuscles or cells. In the same organism the life of
each cell is so independent of that of its neighbours, that it is possible
to destroy one set of cells without affecting the others. Despite the
common bond which unites them, these cells, sometimes very dis-
similar, retain their individuality and perform their different functions
for the wellbeing of the whole community, like the various members
of a populous town.

By " association," however, is not meant that the individuals band

* ' Revue Scientifique,' Dec. 1«79, p. .'iSR. Soo ' Pop. Sci. Rov.,' iv. (1 SSO) p. .SO.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 593

together like bees or other gregarious creatures ; and to illustrate this
law it is necessary to refer to forms lower down in the scale in which
the component individuals are united to each other by a common
tissue. Accordingly, M. Perrier turns first to the Hydroids, and,
after referring to the budding of the Hydrce, shows that in compound
forms such as Cordylophora lacustris, and in most of the marine
Hydroids, what is only occasionally produced in Hydra becomes normal.
But a new phenomenon occurs — a veritable system of division of
labour is effected between the members of the same colony. At
first all were similar, all performed the same functions in the same
manner, but speedily each individual became specialized. One devotes
itself exclusively to the capture of food, another to the elaborating of
the nutritive material, and a third to reproduction, so that in the end all
these individuals, which originally had no need of one another, become
mutually necessary. Among the Hydractiniae we may reckon no fewer
than seven kinds of individuals fulfilling different functions. It might
seem to be an exaggeration to attribute the quality of individuals to
the different parts. We have here, it might be said, simple organs ;
but organs of what ? They are just as independent of each other and
of the nutritive individuals as the latter can be of one another. Hence
they are not organs of those polyps. Are we to see in them organs
of the colony ? This is at once to recognize that the colony has an
individual character, and consequently to assume the transformation
we seem to demonstrate. But how has a colony been able to acquire
such organs ? Whence can they have arisen if not from a transforma-
tion of the individuals composing it ?

The author considers that there is no occasion for hypothesis in
order to demonstrate that these colonial organs are the equivalents of
true individuals. The buds which give origin to the different kinds
of individuals in a colony of Hydractinifc, all originate in the same
way, and are for a long time so similar that there is nothing to enable
them to be distinguished. In Podocoryne the humble sac which
represents the sexual individual is replaced by a Medusa much higher
in organization than the Hydra itself, which detaches itself on its
arrival at maturity.

The same train of reasoning is applicable to the Siphonophora
and also to the Coralliaria, which are more highly organized and
exhibit a more complete amalgamation of the component individuals,
each of which in the Coralliarian polyp may be considered as a
number of Hydroid polyps rolled into one.

This transforming of a number of individuals into one individual
can likewise be traced out in the Worms. Van Bencdcn established
that each of the joints of a tape-worm is the equivalent of a Trematode;
and, at a yet earlier period, naturalists considered the segments of
wonns and insects to be equivalent units, each having an actual
individuality, which they called zoonitcs. Sea-urchins and star-fishes
have also been looked upon as colonics of worms united by their
heads.

Can we say the same of the Mollusca and Vertebrata, all the parts
of which seem to be so intimately fascd together? This is what

VOL. III. 2 R

694 BECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

lias still to be investigated ; but whatever the result arrived at, the
generality of the principle of association will not be at all invalidated,
for if in this case simple individualities never existed, we should have
to compare the Mollusca and the Vertebrata with the primordial
individuals, the combinations of which produced the other types. How
did these individuals themselves originate ?

The Hydrce and other analogous organisms, the author thinks,
furnish the answer ; and after dealing with these, he says : —

" Thus, even if it be shown that the Vertebrata and Mollusca do
not result from the fusion of simpler beings once capable of an inde-
pendent existence, they will not, any the less, be colonies of cells.
The ' law of association ' will consequently lose none of its generality,
and will remain the fundamental law of the development of the
animal kingdom, including and governing those laivs of grotdli, organic
repetition, and economy, that for a long time past have engaged the
attention of physiologists," while it explains hitherto inexplicable
homologies.

The author then passes to the consideration of protoplasm, and
from the incapacity of the protoplasmic masses to exceed a certain
size, draws the conclusion that all creatures that exceed this size
must be formed of several distinct masses of protoplasm — that is, are
colonies. " Thus the generality of the law of association is shown to
be a consequence of one of the fundamental properties of protoplasm."

Degeneration.* — Professor E. Eay Lankester has published, as a
separate volume, the lecture which he delivered on this subject at the
British Association meeting in 1879.

In attempting to reconstruct the pedigree of the animal kingdom,
and so to exhibit correctly the genetic relationships of all existing
forms of animals, naturalists have hitherto assumed that the process of
natural selection and survival of the fittest has invariably acted so as
either to improve and elaborate the structure of all the organisms sub-
ject to it, or else has left them unchanged, exactly fitted to their condi-
tions, maintained, as it were, in a state of balance. It has been held
that there have been some six or seven great lines of descent — main
branches of the pedigree — such as those of the vertebrates, molluscs,
insects, star-fishes, and so on ; and that along each of these lines there
has been always and continuously a progress — a change in the
direction of greater elaboration.

Each of these great branches of the family tree is held to be
independent. They all branch ofi" nearly simultaneously from the
main trunk. The animal forms constituting the series in each of
these branches are supposed to gradually increase in elaboration of
structure as we pass upwards from the main trunk of origin and climb
further and fui-ther towards the youngest, most recent twigs. New
organs have, it is supposed, been gradually developed in each series,
giving their possessors great power, enabling them to cope more
successfully with others in that struggle for existence in virtue of

* ' Degeneration : a chapter in Darwinism.' . (8vo, London, 1880.)

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIAj MICROSCOPY, ETC. 595

•wHch these new organs have been little by little called into being.
At the same time, here and tliere along the line of march, certain
forms have been supposed to have " fallen out " — to have ceased to
improve ; and being happily fitted to the conditions of life in which
they were long ago existing, have continued down to the present day
to exist in the same low, imperfect condition. It is in this way that
the lowest forms of animal life at present existing are usually explained,
such as the microscopic animalcules, Amoehi^ and Infusoria. It is in
this way that the lower or more simply-made families of higher
groups have been generally regarded. The simpler living Mollusca
have been supposed necessarily to represent the original forms of the
great race of Mollusca. The simpler vertebrates have been supposed
necessarily to represent the original vertebrates, and so on.

That this is, to a certain extent, a true exjilanation of the existence
at the present day of low forms of animals is proved by the fact that
we find, in very ancient strata, fossil remains of animals whicli difter
over so little from particular animals existing at the present day;
for instance, the Brachiopods Lingula and Terehraiula, the king-
crabs, and the pearly nautilus are found living at the present day,
and arc also found with no appreciable difference in very ancient
strata of the earth's crust, deposited so long ago that most of the
present forms of life had not then been brought into existence, wliilst
other most strange and varied forms occupied their place, and have
now for long ages been extinct.

Whilst we are thus justified by the direct testimony of fossil
remains in accounting for some living forms on the hypothesis that
their peculiar conditions of life have been such as to maintain them
for an immense period of time in statu quo unchanged, loe have no
reason for applying this hypothesis, and this only, to the explanation of
all the more imperfectly organized forms of animal or plant life.

It is clearly enough possible for a set of forces such as we sum up
- under the head " natural selection " to so act on tlie structure of an
organism as to produce one of three results, namely these : to keep it
in statu quo ; to increase the complexity of its structure ; or lastly, to
diminish the comiilexity of its structure. We have as possibilities
either halance, or elaboration, or degeneration.

Owing, as it seems, to the predisposing influence of the systems
of classification in ascending series proceeding steadily upwards from
the " lower " or simplest forms to the " higher " or more complex form
— systems which were prevalent before the doctrine of transformisni
had taken firm root in the minds of naturalists — there has been up to
the present day an endeavour to explain every existing form of life on
the hypothesis that it has been maintained for long ages in n state of
balance ; or else on the hypothesis that it has been elaborated and is
in advance, an improvement upon its ancestors. Only one naturalist
— Dr. Dijhrn, of Naples— has put forward * the hypothesis of dege-
neration as capable of wide ajiijlication to the explanation of existing
forms of life ; and his arguments in favour of a general application

* ' Der Ursprung dor WirlxUliion' mid das Princip <U>8 Fmiclions-wjclisolH.'
(Lcip/iR, 187r).)

2 11 2

596 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of this hypothesis have not, Professor Lankestcr thinks, met with tho
consideration which they merit.

Naturalists have long recognized what is called retrogressive meta-
mori^liosis in the case of parasitic animals, and it is the more i-emark-
able that the same hypothesis should not have been applied to the
explanation of other simple forms of animals. The hypothesi-s of
degeneration will, it is believed, render most valuable service in
pointing out the true relationships of animals which are a puzzle
and a mystery when we use exclusively the hypothesis of Balance
or Elaboration.

Eeferring to tho lizard-like creatures Se/ps and Bipes, which have
lost the locomotive organs once possessed by their ancestors, it is
pointed out that this very partial or local atrophy is not what the
author means by Degeneration ; but if this atrophy is extended to a
variety of important organs, we shall then have a thorough-going
instance of it.

Degeneration may be defined as a gradual change of the structure
in which the organism becomes adapted to less varied and less complex
conditions of life, whilst elaboration is a gradual change of structure
in which the organism becomes adapted to more and more varied and
complex conditions of existence. In elaboration there is a new
expression of form, corresponding to new perfection of work in the
animal machine. In degeneration there is suppression of form, cor-
responding to the cessation of work. Elaboration of some one organ
onay be a necessary accompaniment of degeneration in all the others.
In fact, this is very generally the case ; and it is only when the total
result of the elaboration of some organs and the degeneration of others
is such as to leave the whole animal in a lower condition — that is,
fitted to less complex action and reaction in regard to its surround-
ings than was the ancestral form with which we are comparing it
(either actually or in imagination) — that we speak of that animal as
an instance of degeneration.

Any new set of conditions occurring to an animal which render its
food and safety very easily attained, seem to lead as a rule to degenera-
tion ; just as an active, healthy man sometimes degenerates when he
becomes suddenly possessed of a fortune. The habit of parasitism
clearly acts upon animal organization in this way. Let the parasitic
life once be secured, and away go legs, jaws, eyes, and ears. The
active, highly-gifted crab, insect, or annelid may become a mere sac,
absorbing nourishment and laying eggs.

Some examples of undeniably degenerate animals are examined,
amongst which are Sacculina, which infests hermit-crabs, and from its
young (nauplius) stage with legs, has become a mere sac filled with
eggs, and absorbing nourishment by root-like processes ; Lernceocera,
the parasite of the gills of fishes, which has lost the well-developed
legs of its early stage and become a worm-like creature ; the
cirrhipedes (barnacles), the mites, and the ascidians.

Special attention is given to the latter, the author's object being
to show that their structure and life-history may be best explained on
.the hypothesis that they are instances of degeneration, and in fact are

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOaAMIA, MICROSOOPYj ETC. 597

degenerate vertebrates, as the barnacles are degenerate crustaceans.
The identity of the tadpole of the ascidian and the tadjjolc of the frog
is illustrated by figures representing the external ai)poaranco and the
chief internal organs, together with others, showing how the degenera-
tion proceeds which the ascidian tadpole has to go through to arrive
at the adult structure.

The chief causes of structural degradation are (1) parasitism, (2)
fixity or immobility (as in the adult bai'nacle and ascidian), (3) vege-
tative nutrition (as in the green Planarian worms), and (4) excessive
reduction in size (exemplified in the Rotifers, Ostracoda, and Polyzoa).
Where the conditions are present degeneration may be suspected even
in the absence of any confirmatory embryological evidence.

Degenerative evolution is not limited to zoology, but is applicable
to botany as w'cll, as it clearly offers an explanation of many vegetable
phenomena, and is already admitted as the explanation of facts con-
nected with the reproductive process in the higher plants. The yeast-
plant is in all probability a degenerate floating form derived from a
species of Mucor.

Animal Development.* — Professor Schafer, in his lectures on
Animal Development delivered at the Royal Institution, thus formu-
lates some of the general results arrived at from a consideration of
the facts discussed : —

(1) If we compare the processes of development of any two
animals, from sponges upwards, we find complete correspondence up
to a certain point ; from which point they may diverge from one
another. This point is sometimes placed near the bottom of the
development-scale, sometimes near the top ; or it may be in any inter-
mediate position.

(2) Development is essentially localization of function and con-
comitant or consequent modification of structure ; such modification
being accompanied by segregation of the cells concerned with the
function localized.

(3) The i)ath of development of all the more important of these
BCgi'cgated parts is the same up to a certain point in the development
of each segregation. From this point it may, in any animals or group
of animals, diverge from the rest, or may remain stationaxy, whilst in
the others specialization and modification progress further.

(4) The various stages or phases of development of an animal, as
well as of its specialized parts, are often found to correspond with
cither permanent or transient conditions of animals lower in tho
scale.

(5) Since the phases of development of individual animals are often
seen to be rejnesentations of the permanent conditions which are met
with in a serius of animals belonging to lower grades of organization,
it is impossible not to infer that these successive phases in the deve-
lopment of the individual represent simihir i)hases in the process of
formation or development of the race to which tho individual belongs.

* 'Qiiiirt. Joiirn. Mirr. Si-i.,' xx. (ISiO) [>. 202. (Coiitiiiiiing Ihc bubstuiico ol"
the luiil two of the twelve Iccturei;.)

598 RECOED OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

To revert to a former simile, we may safely say that the developmental
telescope of the individual is the same as that of the race, but with
the tubes shortened or shifted one upon another so that in many cases
their original order is no longer recognizable. The history of the
development, then, of any individual animal from the egg is an
abridgment of the history of formation in time of the race ; or, to
state the matter in as few words as possible, " development represents
descent."

We conclude, therefore, that the ancestors of every animal have
successively exhibited structural conditions which are rej)resented in
a more or less modified form by the successive stages of development
of the individual. This is the only logical conclusion to which the
study of animal development leads. Modifying slightly the words of
Darwin, " to take any other view is to admit that the structure of
animals and the history of their development form a mere suare laid
to entrap our judgment."

Colours of Animals.* — Dr. Camerano, in a brief notice of a larger
work to be published hereafter, divides colours into internal and
external. In animals the latter have of course the chief importance,
and he classifies them morphologically as Hypodermic and Epidermic,
and physiologically as (1) Useful, including those which are pro-
tective (allowing escape), attractive (to the prey of the animal),
deviatory, as the eye-like spots of some insects, which distract
attention from vital parts; (2) Indifferent; (3) Budimental, the
remains of a previous more extensive coloration ; (4) Accidental, as
melanism and albinism, arising out of special circumstances peculiar
to the individual,

Passing from the consideration of the nature of some colours, he
reviews the condition of the different gi'oups of the animal kingdom
in their relation to colour, taking certain species from each as
examples. He distinguishes sexual coloration from that which
depends on the time of year, &c.

The referees on the paper (Signers Cornalia and De Sanctis)
believe that the interpretations of the meaning of the intensity,
quality, or position of a colour need further examination in many
cases ; for though one type of coloration running through several
species many perhaps be exi^licable ; yet when several species agree-
ing in other respects — as volume, habitat, food — are foimd to differ in
the matter of colour, it is diiScult to account for the fact on utilitarian
principles.

Organisms in Ice from Stagnant "Water.f — Mr. M. A. Veeder
has made microscopical investigations with regard to the purity of ice
gathered from stagnant water in canals and ponds. Only those frag-
ments were taken (from the interior of blocks) which appeared clean
and transparent to the unassisted eye. On melting them and
examining the water thus obtained with various powers up to
900 diameters, bits of vegetable tissues and confervoid growths are

* ' Atti R. Acead. Lincei (Traubuut.),' iv. (1S60) p. loO.
t 'Am. Nat.,' xiv. (1880) p. 388.

rNVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMU, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 599

usually recognisable at once. Animaloula were not found in an
active state in water from ice that just melted, but upon allowing
such water to settle and become warm at the ordinary temperature of
a room occupied for living purposes, the sediment deposited is found
to contain, after some hours, monads whose movements are easily
discernible with a magnifying power of from 200 to 400 diameters.
Upon allowing the water to stand still longer, Mr. Veeder found the
Confervae growing thriftily, and in some instances forming clusters
or bundles frequented by minute animalcula, the entire ajipear-
ance in this case being very similar to that presented by the nests
occupied by the young of the common Paramecium seen in stagnant
water.

As the result of these investigations, it appears that freezing does
not free water from filth due to the presence of sewage or decaying
vegetable matter, and further, that it is probable that the germs from
which animalcula are developed, if not the animalcula themselves in
a quiescent state, are present in very much of the ice fciken from
stagnant water, so that the use of such ice in drinking water is
hazardous to say the least.

B. INVERTEBRATA.

Fertilization of the Ovum.* — Professor Schneider calls attention
to his observation in 1873, on Mesostomum and Disfomum, tliat
the nucleus and germinal vesicle become elongated and break up
into strands, which ultimately become arranged into a rosette, under-
going further changes. The grouping of the granules of the proto-
plasm of the cell into a star-shaped form was described in 1847, by
Derbes in the sea-urchin's egg, and by Eeichert in the sj)erm-cells of
Nematodes, &c., and similar facts by Kowalevsky in 1866. Biitschli's
observations on the " directive vesicles " are not beyond criticism.
These are really cells, and consist of part of the germinal vesicle
with some protoplasm.

Professor Schneider's own recent observations,! carried out on
Nematodes, Hirudinea), and Asteracantldon ruhens, show that the sperm-
nucleus has no existence. lie agrees with Fol with regard to Astera-
cantldon in the main. A very small portion of the germinal vesicle
is extruded with the directive vesicle ; the rest sends out ameboid pro-
cesses in all directions, wliicli are, however, very ditlicult to demon-
strate. The tliickncss of the ovum often gives very misleading views
of these relations. This ditfusion of the substance of the nucleus in
the ovum renders it almost impossible for tlio entering siKrniatozoou
to miss it. The stellate mass described as surrounding the latter at
its entrance probably belongs to the germinal vesicle, attracted by tho
stimulus of tho male clemenl. At the cleavage the two stellate masses
of the amjjJiiastcr go to diflercnt parts, and then both approach tho

♦ ' Zool. Anzcig.,' iii. (1880) p. 2r)2.

t He observes tliat lie liaa loniul acetate of cnruiino (mudo by saturating
boiling acetic acid of 45 per cent, strength with carmine, and fiUoring) very iiscfnl.
It isuHed either diluted to a 1 per cent, solution or by placin;,' a drop of the ori^iu.d
boluliou uuilcr the cover-;^labd.

600 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cleavago-plane. The ovum, contrary to Biitsclili and Hertwig, is
entered by the siiermatozoon wliile still in the ovarian follicle, not
when in the egg-capsule. In the Nematodes fecundation takes place
in the oviduct. In Aster acantldon ruhens the directive vesicles
emerge from the micropylc. At the ends of the thirty or more thin
amoeboid processes of the germinal vesicle aj^pear transitorily stellate
figures. The consequences of fertilization may be carried out in sea-
water in immature as well as mature eggs. The formation of embryos
does not take place if the egg-membrane has not been sufficiently
expanded before segmentation. Healthy embryos may be produced
from ova into which as many as eight spermatozoa have penetrated.
The spermatozoon and the yolk-membrane are connected by a fine
process, even before actual contact takes place ; this appears to
originate from the former. After the entrance of the spermatozoon a
ball of substance appears at the point of entrance ; it originates from
the yolk, and swells up to a round bead, larger than a directive
vesicle. When sj)ermatozoa enter immature eggs, this swelling has
the form of a long stripe, whose end branches out stellately : no
segmentation takes place in this case.

Aulostomum and Hirudo require several years for the genera-
tive products to arrive at maturity ; in Nephelis and Clepsine this
occurs in the spring of the second year. In them all the sperm-
cells penetrate to the ova while these are still enclosed in their
follicles ; in Nephelis a ring is formed by them in the middle of the
mature part of the ovary. In Nephelis they may enter the yolk and
continue to move there ; they also penetrate and remain under the
yolk-membrane, but are absorbed when the albumen is developed,
as also in Aulostomum, where eight roll about with a screw-like
motion in the yolk. In Nephelis the germinal vesicle continues
to move after fertilization, sending out two or three stars. The
germinal vesicle is visible in Aulostomum when the ovum leaves the
ovary ; it then becomes an amphiaster, which is concealed by^dark
granules.

Renal Organs of Invertebrata.* — In the course of an interesting
essay on this subject, Dr. Krukenberg gives a valuable table to show
the character of the renal excretion, and the organ of the animal in
which it was found ; other columns give the authority and biblio-
graphical references. We can here only cite some of the more
interesting of these. In the AdinicB guanin is found in the mesen-
terial filaments (Cams), and the same compound is in Porpita found
in a whitish layer on the inferior surface of the mantle (Kolliker).
Selenka found no uric acid in the " Cuvierian tubes " of the Holo-
thuroida. Bodies closely allied to xanthin or guanin were found by
Sommer in the water-vascular system of Tcenia. Uric acid has been
detected in some Tunicata. The organs of Bojanus have been
frequently seen to contain urea or uric acid. In some Arthropoda
similar compounds have been found in the excreta or in the fatty
bodies, where green glands and Malpighian vessels are absent.

* 'Vergl.-Physiul. Stutl.' (Ki-ukenbcrg), ii. (ISSO) p. 14.

INVEBTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIAj MICROSCOPY, ETC. 601

MoUusca.

Phylogeny of the Dibranchiate Cephalopoda.* — In a contribu-
tion to this subject, Dr. Brock points out how little has been done
since the contributions of Professor Owen, now some forty years old,
in aid of our knowledge of the anatomy of the group ; embryologists
have done their best to unravel some of the problems of develoijment,
and it is now necessary to make some attemj)t at their comparative
anatomy.

Shell. — It seems to be quite certain that the Octopoda arc derived
from shell-bearing forms ; Argonauta has in the young the rudiment
of a shell-capsule, and Cirrhoteiithis, which is no true Decapod, has an
internal shell.

Musculature. — The examination of this system is attended with
very considerable difficulties ; but when done comparatively it
exhibits some interesting relations, as the following table will
show : —

(1.) I. The median retractores capitis are neither fused with one
another, nor with the lateral muscles — Enoploteutlus.
II. The median retractors begin to be fused with one
another — Onycliotcuthis.
III. Complete fusion of the median retractors with one
another, and partial fusion with the lateral muscles —
Ommastrcphes, Sepioleuthis, Loligo.
IV. Fusion complete — Scpiola.
V. lietractors enclosed in a muscular hepatic capsule, which
is widely open posteriorly — Sepia.
VI. The capsule completely closed, and the deprcssorcs
infundibuli attached to it — Octopoda.
(2.) I. A cephalo-cervical articulation developed ; the collaris
muscle is inserted into the cervical cartilage — CEgopsida
(except Loligopsis), Sepiotcutkis, Loligo, Sepia.
11. Articulation lost. The collaris forms a closed ring —

Sepiola.
III. The infundibular articulation rudimentary or absent ;
the external layer of the collaris fused with the dorsal
portion of the mantle — Octopoda.
This table gives evidence of a jirogress from the simjile to the
more complex, and of the relations which obtain between some of the
Dibranchiata and Spirula and Nautilus ; the latter point is argued
out in detail.

With regard to that interesting structure — the valve of the iu-
fundibulum — the author points out that it is clear that its loss is au
indication of the attainment of a liighcr stage ; biit he urges that this
loss may have been brought about iudcijcndeutly in the Loligopsida
and in the Octopoda, and that it docs not therefore have any weight
in fixing their respective affinities.

Tlie central nervous system of the Dibranchiata appears to be
eminently formed on one type ; in all CT^gopsida the ganglion

- 'Muri'Lul. Jahibucb,' vi. (ISSO) p. ll>5.

C02 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

bracbialo lias the same elongated form, as was signalized by Albany
Hancock in Ommastrcplies todarus ; the same holds good for the
suiira-pharyngcal lobe of all the Octopoda. In various parts of the
peripheral system stages of differentiation can, on comparison, be
made out ; the ganglion stellatum, for example, did not apparently
belong primarily to the mantle, but lay in the visceral sac whence
it sent olf nerves to the mantle ; this arrangement is still to be seen
in Loligopsis guttata. From this position two series of changes may
occur : the nerve and its ganglion may pass to the mantle, or the
pallial nerve may separate from the ganglion. This, seen at its
earliest in most of the CEgopsida, is carried further in O. todarus and
SepiotctUhis, till in Loligo it is carried to an extreme. Other changes
may occur in various other forms, and in the short, compressed body
of the Octopoda i^art of the pallial nerve is very considerably reduced.
The commissure between the brachial nerves was found to be simple
in all the Decapoda that were examined ; in Cirrhoteuthis a nervo
descends from the brachial nerve to the commissure, while in the
rest of the Octopoda the primitive commissure forms a closed ring,,
connected only by branches with the nerves. After treating of the
visceral nerves, different stages in which are described, the author
passes to the

Excretory System. — In all known Decapod Dibranchiata there arc
two symmetrically disposed orifices, which appear to be primarily
placed in the angle of the branchifc, and thence to jiass more or less
upwards, and inwards ; in the Nautilus, in all CEgopsida, and in
SejjiotcutJiis the orifices of the urinary sacs are simple and slit-shaped ;
in the higher Myopsida and in the Octopoda more or less elongated
papilhc are there developed ; and these papillae, again, exhibit different
stages.

Passing over the water-system and the digestive organs, we come
to the ink-bag, which is ontogcuctically a part of the hind-gut.
From the simple embryonic condition two series of differentiations
can be made out ; one jiasses through the Decapoda to Sepia, the
other through the Octopoda to Octopus and Eledune. The former is
principally effected by changes in size, without any chauge from the
original position. Compared with Enoploteuthis and Sepioteuthis it is
much longer in Ommaslrephes, Loligo, and OnychoteutJiis ; others have
a rudimentary efferent duct. In Chiroteuthis Veranzi it is triangular
in form ; in Sepiola it is trilobate. It is in Sepia only that this ink-
bag becomes connected by a long efferent duct with the anus. In the
Octopoda change of position is the first point that we note ; the ink-
bag tends to pass dorsally behind the diaphragm, and to enter into
closer topographical relations with the liver. In Trcinoctopus carence
it is smaller, and the duct is shorter than in T. violaceus. The heart
of the Myopsida appears to be a further development of that of the
CEgopsida, while the still more highly differentiated organ of the
Octopoda is evidently related to that of the Myopsida ; no certain
comparison can be made with Nautilus or Spirilla.

Little or no assistance is given by the male generative organs
to the resolution of phylogenetic questions ; great differences, suffi-

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

603

cient to fill more than a page, even when stated in a tabular form, arc
to be found in the female organs. Dr. Brock sums up his results in
the following fashion : —

(1) All typical ffigopsida possess two symmetrical oviducts.

(2) The same is true of all typical Octoijoda.

(8) The forms in which one oviduct is wanting (Myopsida) arc in
all points the most ditterentiatcd ; so that it follows that the double
oviduct is the oldest form of the female generative apparatus, and
that all forms with one only have lost the other by reduction of the
l)arts.

The following tables will exhibit the leading diiicrcnccs between
some of the most important genera : —

Nidamcntal glands

Oviducts ..

Kitdiila

Anal appondagcs

Infnndibular valve

"8i)lcou" ..

Omniastrcplios.

+
2
Complicated
Asymmetrical
+
0

Euoploteutliis.

0

2

Simi)lc

Symmetrical

+

+

ChivotfuUiis.

Lo

igopsia.

0

0

1

?

?

?

Symmetrical

?

0

0

+

?

Owciiia.

II.

Shell

ACCCSS017 hearts ..
Nidamcntal glands
Arms

Oiuinastrcphcs
sagittatus.

Onycbotcuthis.

Witli phragmocoue With phragmocono

Absent

+

With suckers

Enoploteutbis.

(Without phragmo-
t, cone,

brnnches of the

(Developed on the

\ cephulic and posterior aorta).

+ I 0

/With hooks and\ ,,,.., , , ,
1 «npl.-,.v. h ^Viih hooks onl

suckers

One of tlic next important questions is the meaning of the shell of
Sepia ; in other points — musculature, radula, loss of superior salivary
glands, forna of liver and of ink-bag, absence of connnissure between
the ganglia stellata and in the fusitm of the accessory nidamental
glands — this form appears to be one of the most dilierentiated of tho
Decapoda. Why, then, docs it retain its shell? In other words,
Has Sepia been derived from Loligid forms, and had the simple
horny shell furtlier developed ? — or (2) Did Sepia separate very
early from the Dibrancliiatc stem, and get its various other characters
ind(!i)endently of the other forms? — or (3) Is Sepia the direct de-
scendant of the Belemnitcs, and have the oDshoots each independently
lost their calcareous shell V The first h3'pothesis is opposed by
jialicoiitidogy ; no evidence supports the second. Tho third view is
the m<ist satisfactory, inasniucli as it seems Ihc; Decapoda exhibit a
marked tendency to lose their shell, while Spirula, with its still

604 EECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

older slicll, is probably an example of a form whicli did early separate
itself from the common stock.

The next point discussed is one of considerable difficulty ; it is
the relations of the Octopoda to the two other groups. The high and
exceedingly peculiar organization of the Octopoda seems almost
certainly to point to their isolation for a long period of time, or, in
other words, to their derivation from some other group than the
Myopsida. When we examine the Loligopsis-group of the CEgopsida,
we find that they alone among the Decapoda present some of the
peculiarities of the Octopod organization — the absence, namely, of a
valve to the funnel, the presence of a well-developed spleen, and the
rudimentary apparatus for closing the mantle. As we may suppose
that the primitive Dibranchiata possessed certain arrangements, such
as the fusion of the supra-pharyngeal ganglion with the cerebrum, &c.,
which are now only seen in the Nautilus and in the Octopoda — it
seems allowable to suppose that these creatures were separated into
two sets, one of which diverged into the Ommastrephida, and the
other into the common stem-form of the Loligopsida and Octopoda.
This view has its objections.

To sum uj) : it seems clear that the Dibranchiate Cephalopoda
may be divided into three distinct phyla. The oldest are the
CEgopsida ; the two others — the Myopsida and the Octopoda — have a
closer genealogical relation to one another. The Q^]gopsida may be
divided into two groups — the Ommastrephida and the Loligopsida.
It is probable that the (Egopsid forms passed through a Belemnite
stage to the Sepias, and that the Decapoda with horny shells divei'ged
as independent branches at different times. The Octopoda, or most
differentiated forms, have evident points of relationship to the Loli-
gopsida ; this derivation may not have been altogether simple.

The parallelism in mode of development of the groups is very
striking ; it is best shown in the tendency to reduce and lose the
shell. In the oldest phylum we find the phragmocone, or a simple
horny shell; in the Myopsida we have Sepiola and Bossia, with a
shell only half the length of the animal. Cirrhoteuthis, an old
Octopod, has a distinct internal shell ; but in the more developed
forms, not only is the shell lost, but is typically so.

The long essay ends with a discussion on the general bearing of
the facts detailed on the doctrine of descent.

Aptychi of Ammonites. — In the dwelling-chamber of Ammonites
is sometimes found a remarkable body — the aptychus — resembling a
bivalve shell widely opened. Very various opinions have been held
about these bodies ; some considering them to be the opercula of the
Ammonites, whilst Pictet avowed that it was difficult to j)rouounce
upon their true affinities.*

Mr. C. Moore has already challenged the correctness of the
operculum view, and in a fui-ther paper f he shows as the result of

* For a summary of the views of English and foreign observers, with references,
see " The Lias Ammonites," T. Wright, ' Palajoutographical Soc./ xsxiv. (1880)
p. 182.

t ' Kept. Brit. Assoc,,' lS7t), p. 311.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 605

minute examinations of diflferont forms, that in every instance tlio
aptyclii were almost entirely cellular, and lines of cell-tubes were
extracted from them, differing in scarcely any respect from the egg-
packets lying amidst the scattered eggs on the Ammonites serpentinus
of the upper lias. The facts he has collected are, he thinks, scarcely
consistent with the idea that the aptychus was simply an operculum,
but on the contrary tend to the conclusion that — possibly with the
siphuucular tube — it is an ovarian sac.

Development of the Pulmonate Gasteropoda. — The conclusion
of M. Fol's essay on this subject, to the introductory portion of which
we have already directed attention,* deals with certain theoretical
points of some importance.

Velum. — This larval structure, which is found in so many diflferent
animals, generally takes the form of an ectodermal thickening, covered
with vibratile cilia of a particularly large size ; it is generally circular
in shape, and is placed at the level of the mouth, and, as a rule, a
little above the buccal orifice. In most of the sea-dwelling MoUusca
it becomes very large ; thus, the superior extremity of the larva
becomes an enormous sinus, which is filled by the liquid of the body-
cavity, and is also provided with muscular fibres. On the other hand,
the Pulmonate Gasteropoda have the velum very small and even rudi-
mentary ; the thickening is not continuous and circular, but is only
developed at the sides ; it is, nevertheless, provided with branching
contractile cells, which are only found in the higher of the marine
forms ; so that, in these land-dwelling snails the velum is a structure
derived from and reduced from the more complicated forms. But the
process of reduction has not been uniform ; the " vibratile welt " has
undergone more diminution than have the sinus and the muscular
fibres, and that although these are not the essential parts of the velum.

Hand in hand with this change in structure, it is evident that there
has been some change in function ; the primitive duty of the velum
was that of a locomotor organ, to which there was added on the
function of seizing nutriment ; in the Pulmonate forms this larval
structure has the function of circulating the nutrient fluid.

The larval heart affords some difficulties ; in form and structure
it closely resembles that of Buccinmn and Purpura ; but it differs in
position, for they are primitively dorsal, whereas that of Helix only
gradually leaves a ventral position ; we require further information
before we can say whether the explanation of tliis difference is to bo
found in the fact that the jiist-mcntioned forms leave the shell at a
' later period in development, or, whether they have their heart and
pallial cavity primitively placed on the ventral surface.

By most authors the symmetry of the body has been ascribed to
the folding round of the shell ; Ihcring, however, regards the torsion
of the shell as due to the asymmetry of the viscera. ]\[. Fol regards
both these opinions as too extreme ; ho himself has already shown
that in the lietcropoda asymmetrical arrangements manifest them-
selves at an extremely early period.

* Sec (intr, p. 414.

606 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

In Helix and Limax the torsion docs not aj^pcar so early, and is
seen simultaneously in the viscera and in the shell. To explain the
phenomena it seems to be necessary to note the process of segmenta-
tion of the ovum ; but here imfortunately there is but little informa-
tion. The fact that organs like the kidneys, which are, as we know,
primarily double, are in the youngest of Gasteropod larvaD single,
seems to show that the asymmetry is produced prior to the commence-
ment of the embryonic period.

Stomach and Liver. — Here the author directs particular attention
to the mode by which the organs are differentiated from the embryonic
digestive cavity. It is, in the first place, necessary to make a funda-
mental distinction between the case where the cells of the endoderm
possess from the first a deposit of nourishment, which comes to them
from the yolk — protolecithin — and that where they borrow from the
yolk swallowed by the larva, an amount of nourishment which may bo
called deuterolecithin. The former does not increase during the period
of development, and tends to diminish ; the latter appears during
that period and is rapidly absorbed. The former appears under the
guise of globules, which are generally small; the latter is formed
into compact and relatively large masses, and is not, or need not be,
altogether derived from the yolk.

The Thecosomatous Pteropoda afford an example of the complete
absence of deuterolecithin ; while in Firoloides there is but little proto-
lecithin, and what there is, is rapidly absorbed. In the Gasteropoda
the embryonic digestive cavity is bounded in part by an endoderm in
which the cells are of the ordinary size, and in part by some very large
spherules, which are crammed with the protolecithin ; the small cells
of the endoderm so grow as to shut off the large spherules from their
connection with the digestive cavity, and these thus fall into the body-
cavity, where they are simply absorbed. Meanwhile the small cells be-
come charged with deuterolecithin ; which, after a time, disappears from
that part of the wall which becomes the stomach and intestine ; the
rest forms a pouch which develops into the liver. These facts seem to
show that that view is incorrect, which regards the deposition of
deuterolecithin as a mere episode in the development of the liver ; this
compound is often absent from the rudiment of the liver, and is, on
the other hand, often found in structures, such as the ectodermal
tissues of the larval Helix, which have no relation to that organ.

Nerve-ganglia. — These structures appear to arise by somewhat
different processes : thus, Fol himself has observed that in the
Pteropoda the cerebral ganglia are formed by an invagination of the
ectoderm, while in the Heteropoda there is a division of the same
primitive layer. Bobretzky has found that these ganglia are in the
Prosobranchiata formed by a condensation of tissue in the mesoderm ;
in the aquatic Pulmonata, Fol has observed a somewhat similar pro-
cess, save that the mesoderm appears to have been derived directly
from the ectoderm ; in the terrestrial forms he has seen an ectodermic
invagination which was just as well marked as in the Pteropoda.

The auditory and optic organs exhibit a very similar diversity ;
the Heteropoda, Prosobranchiata, and terrestrial Pulmonata have

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. GOT

tlieir otocysts formed by a.n iuvaginatiou of the ectoderm, wliilc
there is a delamination of the layer in the Pteropoda and aquatic
Pulmonata.

The pedal ganglia, on the other hand, exhibit a remarkable con-
stancy in their mode of development ; they are always formed in the
midst of a pre-existing mesodermal tissue, and can, therefore, only bo
said to be indirectly ectodermal in origin.

These general considerations lead to still wider generalizations ;
rejecting the view of Bobretzky that the mode of development must
be the same tliroughout any one phylum, M. Fol states his belief that
the identity of embryonic processes is not to be assumed but is to bo
demonstrated ; and, looking at all the facts, he comes to the conclu-
sion that the processes of invagination and of delamination may bo
derived from one another, and that they have not the importance
which is often attributed to them.

Benal Glands. — The Pulmonato Gasteropoda are interesting as
being provided with a larval kidney, which among the Mollusca has
as yet been only observed in Paludina and in a marine Prosobranch ;
paired, it is evidently of the same category as the segmental organs of
the Vermes ; the permanent kidney is unilateral, it is never developed
along the median, but always on the side on which growth is predomi-
nant. The larval and permanent kidneys are very similar in structure,
but they differ from one another in the fact that the inner pore of the
larval kidney opens into the body-cavity, while that of the permanent
one opens into the pericardium ; this is not, however, a ditference of
prime importance. A more important question relates to the " typical "
presence of two pairs of renal glands in the Mollusca, but this is a
question which cannot yet be answered.

General Homologies of the Larval Pulmonata. — The Pteropoda
appear to be those of the Cephalophora which have most completely
retained, in their larval stage, the velum so common among the Vermes ;
they, too, have the cerebral ganglia most directly derived from the
ectoderm. In these, and some other points, the Pulmonata are tho
most divergent of the Cephalophorous Mollusca. So far as tho
digestive tract is concerned, they are only remarkable for the great
quantity of dcutcrolccithin. The larval kidneys do not find their
representative in the larva) of tlic Annelids or of Pohjfjordius, but
the permanent pair (for paired they really are) completely corresponds
in position and structure to the excretory organs of tho Rotifera and
to the first pair in the larva of Polijgordius.

It is impossible to compare tho moUuscan larva with a segmented
worm-larva ; they only correspond to the cephalic portion of the larva
of an Annelid, or to an entire Rotifer ; tho Mollusca aronot segmented
animals which have fused their metamercs, but thoy arc animals
whicli have remained simple.

In conclusion, tho author points out how recent observations tend
to favour the re-establishment of the Vermes of Linnajus ; tho larval
form (Lovenian, vcligcr, trochoi)horc) can, with variations in form, bo
traced through " worms," Annelida, Bryozoa, Brachiopods, and even
EchinodcrniK, and tliese all form a phylum distinct from that of the

608 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Arthropocla on tlio one liand, and of the Cliordata (Timicata and
Vertebrata) on the other.

Generative Organs of the Young Helix aspersa.* — M. Jourdain
has made some interesting observations on this subject, which are of
value from the wide view which the author has taken ; none who have
been engaged with these organs will be sorry to hear of M, Jourdain's
attempt to " preciser la terminologie," and in the presence of so many
different modes of stating observations, it will not be useless to
detail our author's synonymy of the chief parts of this somewhat
complex apparatus : —
Hermaphrodite gland ,. Ovary; testicle; racemose gland.
„ „ . I , J. r. ( Oviduct ; primary oviduct ; efferent canal ; fallo-

Efferent duci of herma- ^.^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^'^^^ deferens (both invaginated) ;
phroditc gland . . , . j g^gj.ent canal of the hermaphrodite gland.

.,, . . , J CEoe ; testicle; ovary; "glaire"; muciparous

Albummiparous gland . . | ^^^^^^ . ^^^^^^^^ ^^J^]

„ , , , (Pedunculated vesicle ; urinary bladder; recepta-

Copulatory pouch .. ..| culura seminis.

Muciparous glands .. Multiiid vesicles ; multifid prostate.
Genital vestibule .. .. Genital cloaca.
Spermatophore .. .. Capreolus.

Young specimens of H. aspersa are very far from exhibiting all
these, with other, parts ; in them, the hermaphrodite gland is composed
of a small number of follicles, and they give off an efferent canal, with
a straight course; this rapidly increases in diameter and divides
lengthwise into an efferent and an ovigerous demi-canal ; the former
exhibits as yet no indications of a prostate, the latter has on it the
rudiments of the albuminiparous glands ; the two tubes soon separate
and the efferent duct becomes a complete canal ; as soon as this is
effected this latter forms a loop which gradually grows out to form the
penis. The flagellum is not yet developed ; there is no dart-sac, and
as yet there are no muciparous glands. These last are in time derived
from two small diverticula which are developed at the base of the
oviduct, and the differences observed in different species are merely
due to differences in the growth of these parts ; thus, if one is absorbed
we find the single muciparous gland of H. ohvoluta ; when they are
both developed but remain undivided, we have the form found in if.
cornea and others ; when one bud subdivides, we have the arrangement
found in H. Bangiana, and so on to the extreme form of H. pomatia.

Gasteropoda from the Troas-t — In giving a list of the compara-
tively large number of forms brought home by Professor Virchow,
Von Martens points out that all the species are now to be found living
in the Mediterranean ; speaking generally, they exhibit no differences
as compared with more modern forms. Those not used for the pro-
duction of ptirple were, for the most part, probably used for food, as
are many of the same species at the present time.

Gasteropoda from the Auckland Islands.^ — In giving a note on
the specimens collected in these islands, the same zoologist describes

* 'Eev. Sci. Nat.,' i. (1880) p. 449.

t ' SB. Ges. naturf. Freunde,' Berlin, 1879, p. 8G. % Ibifl., p. .S7.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 609

a new species of Meaoderma — M. auchlandicimi — which is somewhat
similar to M. novce-zealandice. He fiu-ther points out that in its black
coloration Trochus nirjerrimus brings to mind allied species from the
South African and South American seas, while the green, at its base,
reminds one of the Chinese form, T. argyrostomus.

Molluscoida.

Marine Polyzoa.* — The Eev. T. Hincks has commenced a series
of papers in which he proposes to describe and figure a large number
of marine Polyzoa from various parts of the world which have
hitherto escaped notice, and thus to offer a contribution towards that
general history of the class which still remains to be ^Titten.

It is not intended to be confined to bare diagnosis, and the follow-
ing points especially will receive elucidation : — (1) Geographical dis-
tribution— any new localities for known species will be recorded ;
(2) local variation — the differences exhibited by the same tyj)e under
differing circumstances will be noted whenever the opi^ortunity
presents itself of comparing specimens of the same species from
various parts of the world ; (3) the limits of variability in each case,
and the elements of structure most liable to variation ; (4) the true
principles of classification. With the descriptions of new forms will
be combined notes on such as are little known or misunderstood ;
and, so far as space will permit, in the case of each genus the number
of species already ranked under it will be indicated and its geogra-
phical range. These papers will therefore serve as an index to the
foreign species which have already been described, as well as an
introduction to many that are new. The classification employed will
be that of the author's ' History of the British Marine Polyzoa,' so
far as it apjilies, and with such modification as may be suggested by
an increased knowledge of the morphology of the tribe. A biblio-
graphical list will be appended containing the principal faunistic and
other works which deal with the foreign sjiecies.

The series commences with some Madeiran Polyzoa collected by
Mr. J. Y. Johnson, and six new species are described and figured.
This is followed by descriptions and figures of other specimens from
Australia and elsewhere, including eleven new species and one now
genus (Sijihonoporella).

Fresh-water Polyzoa.f — The ovum of Alcyonclla fungosa is com-
posed, according to W. Reinhardt, of transparent gi-anular protoplasm,
and has a largo clear nucleus and a nucleolus. Later, but while
the nucleus and nucleolus are still distinguishable, appear at the
periphery unifurm, refracting lumps — those described as cells by
Allinan. Generally only one of tlic ova in the ovary develops. The
nucleus enlarges so much as to touch the margin of the denser proto-
plasm ; it contains a delicate protoplasmic network. The sperma-
tozoon consists of a strongly i-efringcnt substance enveloped by a
membrane ; its head is round, but ends in a point, and is separated by

* ' Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hi.st.,' vi. (1880) p. fiO.
t * Zool. Anzfip.,' iii. (1^80) pp. 208, 2M.
VOL. III. 2 R

610 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

a septum from tho tail wLicb is purely protoplasmic ; it originates from
a nucleolus which is similarly refringent. On becoming attached to the
ovimi its central part contracts into a lumj) on which the head rests,
and the whole becomes covered by a membrane proceeding from the
side of the head. After segmentation the mass is converted into a
gastrula by invagination ; the gastrula-mouth closes and the segmen-
tation cavity disappears, and a ring-shaped depression appears in
front enclosing a space which becomes the wall of the future cystid.
Three layers are now present in the body ; tho outer layer, the tunica
muscularis, and the entoderm. The cells of the ring or " cap "
lengthen and become connected with fibres ; the polypides which
develop within it j)ush out the external membrane round them ; the
cilia of this membrane cease moving, and its layers of cells unite and
then break up into long homogeneous separate cells ; in many cases
this mass of cells forms a long process at the side of the cystid, and
sometimes even increases in size ; its further development was not
observed, but after a time it was seen to be absorbed into the cystid ;
it probably represents the stolon of marine Polyzoa.

The structure taken for an ooecium by Nitsche and Metschnikoff
appears to be an extension of the ovarian membrane, with which it
corresponds in position, in its unilaminar structure, and in containing
embryos in stages too early for their emergence. By the formation
of the embryo, the polypides adjoining it appear to be destroyed and to
form the " brown bodies " ; through the openings left by their dis-
appearance the embryo issues forth ; the statohlast originates in the
same Avay, and also at the expense of the aborted polypides. The
digestive canal is developed from the internal layer of the capsule
which encloses the embryo, and not from a specially separated group
of cells, as Hatschek states.

With regard to Cristatella mucedo, the author gives the following
preliminary account of the development : —

The cystid consists, as in Alcyonella, of an ectoderm, a median
layer (the tunica muscularis), and an entoderm. Thus Hatschek must
be wrong when he names the inner layer of the bud, mesoderm ; and
his description of the budding is inexplicable by comparison with the
above-mentioned details, though these may perhaps correspond with
his second, unknown, process of budding. The bud develops by a
thickening of the ectoderm into which the entodermic cells are
pushed ; there is no indentation of the former. The tunica muscu-
laris is very early formed ; the cavity of the tentacle-sheath is
separated later from the alimentary canal, and the lophophore is
formed by an invagination into this tentacle-sheath. The later deve-
lopment of the buds corresponds with that described by Nitsche in
Alcyonella. The statoblasts consist of a uniform granular mass,
covered with the cylindrical cells of the ectoderm, under which cells
lies a layer of nuclei ; the layers increase in number, the tunica
muscularis appearing first ; the entoderm was hid by the opacity of
the central mass.

The well-known concerted movements of the colony are explained
by the structure of the common base, which contains suckers formed by

mvERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA., MICROSCOPY, ETC. Gil

invaginations, broad internally, drawn out externally into necks ;
these suckers arc arranged in rows at right angles to the axis of the
colony.

Larva of Bowerbankia.* — By way of correction of and supiilemcut
to Lis j)revious papers on BowerbanJcia,^ W. RepiachofF says that
the part there described as a mouth and commented on as being
exactly opposite in position to the mouth of the Chilostomata docs not
lead into the digestive cavity at all, but is simjily a ciliated depression
of the epithelium, and has no morphological connection with the
chilostomatous mouth. The organization of the larva is now seen
to be more complicated than was previously stated ; the external epi-
thelium is lined on its inner face by a connective-tissue layer, specially
thickened at certain points : in the body proper is found a mass of
cells considered to be the homologue of the glandular intestinal layer :
at the lower part of the body occurs a paired mass of pear-shaped
cells which stain deeply with carmine, indigo-carmine, and hfema-
toxylin, and are regarded as representing the " cement glands " of the
Entop-octa.

Euktiminaria ducalis.:}: — The Ecv. J. E. Tenison-Woods recently
described § what he considered to be a new genus of Polyzoa under
the above name, and mentioned that similar fossils had been found in
the chalk, and that M. d'Orbigny had suggested that they were
ComatuliB without arms. The author is now convinced that this
explanation of these bodies is the correct one. They are the central
disks of some unknown species of Co7Jia<M?ce, and he has seen a central
disk of an undescribcd species, which though much smaller and with
very much fewer pores, yet is so similar in all other respects that he
does not doubt that Euldiminaria ducalis, the Glenotremiles paradoxus
of Goldfuss, and the Decamerus mijsticiis of Ilagenow, are all central
disks of Comatulce. The central pores on each of these organisms which
bear so close a resemblance to the cells of Polyzoa are doubtless con-
nected with the water circulation, like the madreporiform bodies in
the Echinodcrmata. They are not present in all the Comatuhe, at
least in this form.

Arthropoda.

Nervous Collars of Arthropods.! — M. Lienard gives diagram-
matic figures of the (csoiihagcal rings of Cossus li(in'q)crda, eight
other Hexapods, and two Myriopods. He has studied more than
sixty genera of Arthrojiods, whoso nervous collars he arranges under
four types.

1. Type of Crustacea. — Oesophageal connectives ( = longitudinal
commissures) very long ; transverse commissure straight, at some
distance in front of the sub-a'sophagcal ganglion : Crustaceans (except
Isopods), Myriopods (Glomcris limhata) and Ilexapods (Gryllus cam-

* 'ZfK.l. AnzciK.,' iii. (1880) p. 2G0.

t Iliiil , ii. (l^T'.i) p. (JdO, find i. (1878), No. 10. Sec ante, p. 238.

X ' Tnic. Limi. Soc. N. S. Wnlcs,' iv. (18S0) p. 310.

§ See tliis .Tnnrniil, ii. (1S7'.») p. 707.

II ' Anh. «lc Biologic,' i. (1H80) pp. 381-391 (1 plate).

2 S 2

612 EECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATZNG TO

peatris, Blaps mortisaga, Necrophorus vestigator, N. germanicus, Pierts
hrassicce (caterpillar), Periplaneta orientalis).

2. Tyjie of Dytiscus. — Connectives extremely short ; transverse
commissure apjiosed to, but independent of, the sub-oesophageal
ganglion : wood-lice, dragon-flies, Phryganea, and various beetles.

3. Type of Cossus ligniperda (first described by Lyonnet). — Con-
nectives of variable length ; transverse commissure springing from
the supra-oesophageal ganglion, together with or on the inner side of
the connectives, and closely embracing the gullet under the form of a
vertical sling or loop : various Myriopods, caterpillars, Orthoptera,
Coleoptera, and the larva of Tenthredo.

4. l^ype of Suctorial Hexapods. — Connectives very short and
stout; transverse commissure under one perineurium with the sub-
cesojihageal mass : Hemiptera, adult Lepidoptera, and Diptera.

Adult Hymenoptera did not give satisfactory results. Arachnids
remain to be examined. In Crustaceans it is known that the trans-
verse commissure passes on either side into a small ganglionic mass
from which fibres proceed to the brain. Similar centres, save that
they are closer to the brain, occur in Myriopods and Hexapods, as
shown by Leydig for Dytiscus. This commissure has, therefore, no
direct relation with the lateral " connectives." M. Lienard hopes to
show, in a future paper, the fundamental unity of arrangement of the
cephalic nervous centres throughout the Arthropoda.

«• Insecta.

Nerve-endings in Muscles of Insects.* — Dr. Foettinger asserts,
with Engelmann, the direct continuity of nerve and muscle. He
examined various beetles, caterpillars, and the cockroach. For his
modes of preparing these subjects we must refer to the original paper.
His researches were carried on in the laboratories of Professors
E. Van Beneden and Engelmann.

The presence of a nervous network within the proper substance
of the muscle-cylinders is here denied. Each muscular fibre has
usually several nerve-end organs, or mounds of Doyere, beneath the
Barcolemma. Thus, Hydropliilus piceus may have six. Chrysomela
ccerulea showed nine of Doyere's cones in the space of one millimetre;
while in Passalus glaberrimus along thrice the same extent of muscle
but four or five could be counted. At the summit of Doyere's organ the
axis-cylinder divides into a number of fibrils, which, upon reaching
the base of the cone, immediately pass into the muscular substance
at the level of the intermediate disks. In this sense Dr. Foettinger
modifies the hypothesis of Engelmann (who saw some of his prepara-
tions) as to the connection between the ultimate nerve-fibrils and the
isotropic bands. One nerve may bifurcate to supply two of Doyere's
cones. From the apex of each of these as many as seven fibrils
sometimes diverge. The fibrils often seem to pass through the sub-
stance of the cone, at some distance from its surface, and a like
striated appearance is shown by cones which have been broken

* ' Arch, de Biologie,' i. (1880) pp. 279-304 (1 plate).

INVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. CI 3

across, — facts which cause the observer to conclude that the striae
are true fibrils, and not mere folds of sarcolemma. The author also
found several planes of fibrils mthin a single cone. In other cases
the fibrils, injured probably by reagents, were replaced by rows of
granules.

The author maintains, against Eanvier, the normal occurrence of
true muscular waves. In the passage from the state of repose to that
of complete contraction several phases may be observed. First, the
intermediate disks ( =-^ Zwischenscheiben) and the accessory disks
(= Nebenschciben) become less and less distinct, then quite dis-
appear ; the borders of the transverse disks ( = Querscheiben) are
gradually obscured and form two black streaks (Contractionscheiben
of Nasse) limiting the isotropic substance ; the clear median disk
(= Mittelscheibe) slowly retires from view and is replaced by an
obscure line, which during further contraction vanishes in its turn.
The " Contractionscheiben," formed by the two primitive anisotropic
disks, approach and fuse into a single dark disk. In full contraction
alternating dark and clear disks can alone be seen. The contrac-
tions which begin in the regions supplied by Doyere's cones proceed
in opposite directions along the intervening portions of the muscular
fibre.

Habits of Ants. — Sir John Lubbock has laid before the Linnean
Society * the results of his further observations on this subject.

The paper commences by an account of fresh experiments on the
powers of communication of ants. Among others, a dead bluebottle
fly was pinned down, and after vain efforts at removal the selected
ant hied home, and emerged with friends who slowly, and evidently
incredulously, followed their guide. The latter starting off at a great
pace distanced them, and they returned, again, however, to be in-
formed, come out, and at length be coaxed to tlie prey. In the several
experiments with different species of ants and under varied circum-
stances, these seem to indicate the possession by ants of soraething
approaching language. It is impossible to doubt that the friends
were brought out by the first ant, and as she returned empty-handed
to the nest the others cannot have been induced to follow merely by
observing her proceedings. Hence the conclusion tbat they possess
the power of requesting their friends to come and help them.

For other experiments testing the recognition of relations, although
the old ants had absolutely never seen the young ones until the
moment, some days after arriving at maturity, that they were intro-
duced into the nest, yet in all cases they were undoubtedly recognized
as belonging to the community. It would seem, therefore, to bo
established that the recognition of ants is not personal and individual,
and tbat tlieir harmony is not due to the fact that each ant is
acquainted with every other member of the community. It woukl
further apj)ear from the fact that they recognize tlieir friends even
when intoxicated, and that they know the young born in their own
nest, even when they have been brought out of the chrysalis by

* Juno 17. — Not yet piihlislicd.

"614 BECOED OF CUERENT EESEAECHES RELATING TO

Btrangers, indicating, therefore, that the recognition is not effected
by means of any sign or password.

With regard to workers breeding, the additional evidence tends to
confirm previously advanced views, that whefi workers lay eggs males
are always the issue of these. Without entering into details of
instances, it may broadly be affirmed that in the queenless nests males
have been produced, and in not a single case has a worker laid eggs
which have produced a female, either a queen or a worker. On the
contrary, in nests possessing a queen, workers have been abundantly
produced. The inference from these curious physiological facts leads
to the presumption that, as in the case of bees, so also in ants, some
special food is required to develop the female embryo into a queen.

In Sir John's nests, while from accidents and other causes many
ants are lost during the summer months, in winter, nevertheless,
there are few deaths. As to the age attained, specimens of Formica
fiisca and F. sanguinea, still lively, are now four and others five years
old at least.

The behaviour to strange queens often results in their being
ruthlessly killed ; yet as communities are known to have existed for
years, queens must cccasionally have been adopted. With the view
of trying how far dislike and passion might be assuaged by a formal
temjjorary acquaintance, a queen of F. fusca was introduced into a
queenless nest, but protected by a wire cage, and after some days the
latter removed, but the queen was at once attacked. Mr. McCook,
nevertheless, relates an instance of a fertile queen of Cremastogaster
lineolata having been adopted by a colony of the same species. Such
difference in conduct. Sir John suggests, may be due to his own ants
having been living in a republic ; for it is affirmed that bees long
without a queen are strongly averse to adoj)t or accept another.
Furthermore, if a few ants from a strange nest are put along with a
queen they do not attack her, and if other ants are by degrees added
tbe throne is ultimately secured.

In pursuance of experiments to test the sense of direction, some
ants were trained to go for their food over a wooden bridge made up
of segments. Having got accustomed to the way, afterwards when
an ant was in the act of crossing, a segment was suddenly reversed in
direction, evidently to the ant's discomfiture ; she then either turned
round, or, after traversing the bridge, would return. When, how-
ever, similar pieces of wood were placed between nest and food, and
the ant at the middle piece, those at the ends being transposed, the
ant was not disconcerted. In other instances a circular pajier disk
was placed on a paper bridge, and when the ant was on the disk this
was revolved, but the ant turned round with the paper. A hat-box
with holes of entrance and exit pierced at opposite sides was planted
across the line to the food ; when the ant had entered and the box was
turned round, the ant likewise wheeled about, evidently retaining her
sense of direction. Again, with the insect en route- when the disk or
box with the ant within was merely shifted to the opposite side of the
food without being turned round, the ant did not turn round, but
continued in what ought to have been the direction to the food, and

INVERTEBRATA, ORYPTOQAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 615

evidently was surprised at tlie result on arrival at tlie spot wlicre the
food had previously been.

To ascertain whether ants make sounds audible to one another
the use of the telephone was resorted to, but the results were negative.
These experiments may not be conclusive, for the plate of the tele-
phone may be too stiff to be set in vibration by any sounds which the
ants produced.

As opposed to the opinion expressed by M. Dewitz, Sir J. Lubbock
regards the ancestral ant as having been aculeate, and that the rudi-
mentary condition of the sting in Formica is due to atrophy, perhaps
attributable to disuse.

A ground-plan of the nest of Lasius niger is given, which exhibits
an intricate, narrow, and winding entrance-passage ; the main nest
cavity is further supported by pillars, and here and there by islands ;
protected recesses obtain, evidently strategical retreats in times of
danger.

Studying the relations and treatment of the aphides, or plant-lice
of the ants. Sir John clearly demonstrates that not only are the aphides
kept and protected in the ants' nests, but the eggs of ApMs laid out-
siiie on the leaf-stalks of its food-plant in Octobei', when exjiosed to
risks of weather, are carefully brought by the ants into their nests,
and afterwards tended by them during the long winter moutlis until
March, when the young ones are again brought out and jilaced on the
young vegetable shoots. This proves prudential motives, for though
our native ants may not lay up such great supplies of winter stores
of food as do some of those found abroad, they thus nevertheless take
the means to enable them to procure food during the following
summer. The fact of European ants not generally laying up
abundant stores may be due to the nature of their food. Insects
and small animals form portions of their food, and these cannot
always be kept fresh. They may also not have learnt the art of
building vessels for their honey, probably because their young are
not kept in cells like those of the honey-bee, and their pupfe do not
construct cocoons like those of the humble-bee. Relatively to their
size our English ants nevertheless store proportionally; for if tho
little brown garden ants be watched milking their aphides, a marked
abdominal distension is observable.

The paper concludes with the history and technical description
of a new species of Australian honey-ant. This corroborates West-
mael's strange account of the IMexican species ; certain individual
ants being told off as receptacles for food — in short they become
literally animated honey-pots.

Respiratory and Circulatory Apparatus of Dipterous Larvae.* —
The larvie examined by M: Vialhiues appeared to belong to the genus
CtcnopltDra. lie describes tho dorsal vessel of a yoinig larva as a long
contractile tube, which is only open at its two extremities. In the last
Bogment of tho body there is a median enlargement, and there are two
stigmata at its margins which give off two lui-ge longitudinal trachea).

♦ 'Cumi.tcd llciuhis,' xc. (1880) p. IISO.

616 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

These, almost at oncn, give oflf a number of tracheal branches, which
divide but little and terminate in the cavity of the last ring, in which
they are so numerous as almost completely to fill it. As the cardiac
tube opens widely into this last ring, we find a cavity full of blood and
containing an enormous number of trachea. The method of action is
as follows : when the vessel contracts, the blood is driven into the last
ring; here it is easily oxidized; when the posterior end dilates, the
blood passes in, and as the entrance is fenced by a trellis-work of
tiachete no blood-corpuscles can escape the influence of the oxygen.
Here, then, "the respiratory function is localized in the terminal
segment, and the dorsal vessel is an arterial heart."

Some way behind the anterior orifice the dorsal vessel is covered
by large cells, for which the author proposes the name of pericardiac
cells ; these become greatly developed and connected with the sides of
the body ; they thus form the primitive pericardiac sinus. The point
of origin of the future lateral orifices is indicated by spots of greater
contractility, where the pericardiac cells are not developed.

Development of the Blepharoceridse.* — Under the title of ' An
Unknown Discovery made by Fritz Miiller,' Professor F. Brauer
points out that the developmental history of the Dipteran group of
BlepJiaroceridce has hitherto remained unknown, and in consequence
its systematic position has been uncertain. He has discovered in an
elaborate unpublished work by Fritz Miiller, a fly described as new
under the name of Cunqnra torrentium ; this, however, he identifies
with the genera Paltosoma, Schiner, and Hapalothrix, Low, although
the new species is Brazilian and the latter genus is from Monte
Eosa,

Now certain Dipteran-nymphs of remarkable structure in the
Vienna Museum, and coming from the Tyrol, prove to be exactly like
the pupae assigned by F. Miiller to Cariqnra. Their form is a half
oval and they are attached to stones by a flat transjiarent side. On
the removal of the insect from its case the venation of the wings was
seen to correspond exactly with that of Blepharocera fasciata West,
showing the secondary vein peculiar to the family. Probably the
larv^ of other genera resemble those of F. MuUer's species, which
must stand as Paltosoma ; the cephalic organs should be investigated
in them to decide whether the family belongs to the Culicidse or the
Tipulidas ; the former appears the more probable, and they much
resemble the Simulidae. The larvae of Paltosoma are woodlouse-
shaped, with deep segmental joints ; the lower side carries a series of
suckers and tracheal gills in the middle line.

Tracheal System of Larval Libellulidse.f — Eeferring to Dr.
Palmen's work upon this subject. Dr. H. Hagen (pointing out that
that author has committed some errors of citation, &c.) follows
Lyonnet in showing that the stigmata of the larvae are readily
closed in case of necessity. Thus from the stigmata of a living
JEsc^na-larva, impaled with a pin which was heated in a flame, a
small bubble or bladder was seen protruded ; dead pinned specimens

* ' Zool. Anzeig.,' ill. (1880) p. 134. t I^^id., p. 157.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 617

sometimes show circles of dried blood round the stigmatic opening.
But the stigmata which are thus shown to open under certain con-
ditions can hardly be closed by any other than mechanical means ;
for it is impossible that their walls, lined as they are by a continua-
tion of the cuticle, can fuse together as has been stated. The reason
that the stigma of the first of the eight abdominal segments is so often
overlooked, is that in the exuvium its tracheal branch lies immediately
under the longitudinal cord, composed of the aggregated tracheae ; it
is smaller in the imago of ^schna constrida than in the larva.

A muscular apparatus, at any rate in the second and the other
posterior segments of the larvae, passes backwards and upwards from
the stigma in a groove to the internal angle of the segment. The
prothoracic stigmata differ from those of the abdomen in having
the appearance of an actively used apparatus ; a number of large well-
developed tracheae pass directly to the stigma, within the two lips of
which their openings — covered by a membrane containing a dense
reticulum of quadrangular cells, as in the Perlidae — are readily to be
seen ; the commencement of the spiral thread in the form of folds.
The mesothoracic stigma is closed by a plate which is externally
clothed with hair ; in the larva this plate carries epidermis as
well, and constitutes the " tympanum " of Oustalet ; the tracheae
appear to be functionally active here also, though less so than in the
prothoracic. The tissues of the tracheal brancheae of the rectum are
cast ofi' in Ejjitheca bimaculata and prince'ps, and not renewed in the
imago — they are 5 * 5 mm. long in this genus ; the same seems to hold
with other genera, though it is the exception in ^sclina.

Although it has been contradicted, the respiration in the larvae of
Calopteryginae is conducted by a tracheal system distributed in three
rings which surround the rectum. The middle foliar gill is supplied
by tracheae. Euphcea manifests a still higher development in the
possession of long conical organs on both sides, like those of Sialis,
seen in E, sjAendens and a species from Ceylon. In some larvae
(probably belonging to a new species, to be called Aniso'ptertjx comes,
from the Himalaya), a long pointed cone of cuticular structure extends
along each side of the body from the second to the eighth segment ; the
caudal branchiae are inflated and pointed, each inflated mass contains
a fat body externally pigmented and supplied richly with tracheae
internally ; a tube of similar dark colour and structure extends into
the lateral respiratory cone. On the front edge of the eighth external
plate in Ejritheca and Libcllnla occurs an oblique slit "5 mm. long,
leading into a sac in the body which is loosely enveloped by another
sac of the shape of a Phrygian cap, and • 5 mm. long by • 5 mm. broad,
the inner one being covered with pavcment-ei^ithclium ; outside this iu
the articulation fold of the segment is an area covered with similar
cells ; the external loose sac, like the ci)idermis of a large traclical
stem, shows rows of fine granules imdcr a high power. Tracliero wcro
traced to the slit or opening. This apparatus lias not been found iu
the Agrionidao. It may possibly secrete a lubricating substance for
the joints, and pcrliaps is connected morphidogically with the
abdominal appendages, which are present in Euphiva.

618 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Remains of Branchiae in a Libellulid : Smooth Muscle-Fibres

in Insects.* — Not only has the larva of Eiiphcea — as described f by
Dr. Hagen already-^lateral branchife, but even the imago has them.
Tbey occur as small cuticular processes on the ventral face of every
segment ; on the second segment they are longer and almost free ; in
the male they lie beside the genital hooks. Dr. Palmen's assertion to
this effect is thus justified. Gills do not occur in the larvte of
Mliinocy^ha ; but they occur below the head in the Perlid Dictyopteryx
signata.

A further exception to the conditions obtaining in its congeners is
offered by Euplicea, in the presence of numerous smooth, unstripcd
muscle-fibres in its caudal gills ; these gills have somewhat the shape
of a turnip, and are entirely filled with a pulpy mass consisting of a
regular network of sub-hexagonal connective-tissue cells ; they contain
fat, and each is penetrated by two stout red tracheal vessels. In
longitudinal section they exhibit a great number of smooth cross fibres,
and also a series at right angles to these. The fibres are arranged
thus in the gill, which has a circular outline with the exception of the
lower side which forms a right angle ; from the apex of this angle pro-
ceeds a broad bundle, of which the fibres are somewhat distinct, right
and left into the gill ; at its middle the fibres are much concentrated ;
the upper two-thirds of the gill-cavity are devoid of muscles ; a number
of smaller muscles occur in the lower third with the large ones. The
only indication of striation in any of these fibres under an immersion
power of upwards of 700 diameters was a fine longitudinal lineation
near the point of insertion. The physiological action must be that
these muscles by contracting compress the two large tracheal vessels
which lie nearly in the centre of each, and drive the oxygenated air
from the gill into the body, thus meeting the want of a free circulation
of blood in the part, which is due to its being filled up with other
tissues ; the elasticity of the connective tissue would cause the mass
to re-expand.

A cellular network of such regularity as that of this tissue ap-
pears never to have been recorded from the body of an insect
before. The cells measure about • 08 mm. in diameter, and their wall
less than • 0001 mm. in thickness. The longitudinal striation of the
proximal end of the muscles must be due to a series of folds allowing
of expansion after the air has been driven into the body.

Probably similar arrangements will be found in other Calop-
teryginfe.

Metamorphosis of Prosopistoma.| — In August 1878, M. A.
Vayssiere, in conjunction with Dr. E. Joly, published a note on the
organization of Prosopistoma. Notwithstanding the large number of
living individuals they then had at their disposal, they were imable
to observe any transformation in these curious insects, and conse-
quently were led to accept the view of Mr. MacLachlan, that Proso-
pistoma is merely an Ephemerid adapted for a' permanent aquatic

* ' Zool. Auzeig.,' iii. (18S0) p. 304. t See ante, p. 617.

t ' Comptes Rcudus,' xc. (1880) p. 1370.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOaAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 619

life. Their anatomical observations, especially those as to the con-
siderable concentration of the nervous system, seemed to confirm that
hypothesis.

M. Vayssiere considers that this opinion must now be abandoned,
as he has just seen the metamorphosis of two of the insects captui-ed
in April last.

The following are the principal phases of this metamorphosis : —
Towards the end of May the amber-yellow colour of some of the
insects became darker ; and owing to their transparency he was soon
able to see the first outlines of the new individual, and two or three
days afterwards the animal cast off its pujial envelope, freeing itself
in the same manner as the ordinary Ephemeridfe,

In the perfect state Prosoiyistoma almost exactly resembles Ccenis ;
its last segment is provided with three rudimentary bristles represent-
ing the swimming bristles it possessed during its aquatic state. The
anatomical modifications brought about by this metamorphosis are
reserved for a complete monograph on the genus.

Piercing Organ of the Lepidopteran Proboscis.* — This organ,
which has already been described t by the author, Professor W. Brei-
tenbach, is situated at the end of the proboscis, and is designated by
him " liquid-piercer," or " opotrype," and its function is now con-
sidered. There are various forms which it assumes, but they all result
from the modification of simple hairs. Although a tactile function
has not been satisfactorily demonstrated for the hairs of the proboscis
by evidence of nervous end-organs in them, yet analogy and their
large size lead to such an inference. Turning to those more complex
appendages to the proboscis, the barbed hooks, we find that those
butterflies which possess them — as 0]:)lnderes and Egyholia — live to a
great extent by the juice extracted from the interior of fruits, a process
effected by the intrusion of the stout trunk into the rind and its subse-
quent withdrawal, when the backwardly directed hooks lacerate the
tissues and set free a quantity of juice. Direct observation of a similar
function in the " liquid-piercer " is not forthcoming ; this fixct, liow-
cver, speaks in its favour, namely that on the Alps a number of butter-
flies are seen to be occupied with flowers which contain no lioney,
thrusting the trunk into them and remaining tluis employed for a
time ; if this process was really futile, it would soon cease to bo
repeated; but as it is not, it is probable that liquid is procured by tlio
laceration of the structures by the piercer. The structure of the organ
itself supports this assmnption ; the median point of that of Vaiwssa
is admirably adapted to pierce the delicate membrane of a juicy cell,
and the lateral points to break up more cells, so that where as many
as sixty piercers are i)resent, as in V. canhii, the eficct would be very
great, but only analogous to that already known to be produced by
the maxilljo of the humble-bees.

In ojqiosition to this view stands Fritz Miillcr's opinion that they
arc " taste-rods " ; but to this it is re^jlied that their structure is

• 'Eiitomol. Nucbrichleii,' vi. (18S0) p. 29.
t See this Jouruul, ii. (IS?*.)) p. 41.

620 RECOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCBTES RELATING TO

cuticular, not cellular, and that they probably contain no living
protoplasm through which sensations of taste could be transmitted ;
further, the characteristic " taste-cells " are wanting ; and this hypo-
thesis fails to explain the presence of the teeth and radial plates.
Tactile organs, however, as is the case with the hairs fx'om which they
are derived, they might in part be, transmitting to the insect infor-
mation as to the absence or presence of free honey in any calyx which
is investigated.

Generative Glands and Sexual Products in Bombyx mori.* —
A. Tichomirow has made out a distinct central orifice in the
epithelial septum which divides the ovarian ovum from the yolk-
chamber; through this a granular substance resembling that of the
■yolk-forming cells is seen to pour into the yolk. The chambers in
which the eggs are found after leaving the yolk-forming cells are
clothed all over by closely packed epithelial cells between which no
spaces occur. Sections show that the epithelium of the yolk-chambers
grows thinner as the cells lining the " egg-chambers " grow vertically
thicker, these latter form the chorion, each contributing a small plate
to it ; in far advanced chambers these plates form a continuous
cuticle.

The terminal spaces of the ovarian tubes are filled with cells,
those near the external membrane small, ultimately becoming the
epithelium of the tube, the more central ones are successively larger
and become ova and yolk-forming cells. Free nuclei occur in the
very last chamber, becoming the nuclei of the epithelium. The ovum
and the yolk-cells both increase in size, but the former the quickest
and chiefly at the expense of the latter. The testes consist of two
sacs penetrated by largely branched tracheae ; they contain large
numbers of smaller follicles which vary immensely in their shape and
the nature of their contents from the youngest, which are spherical, to
pear-shaped, and finally to very elongated forms ; in them all, until the
spermatozoa are mature, a fragile tunica propria is discernible. The
testis is enveloped at the proximal end by a fine connective tissue
containing fat-cells ; at the free end the youngest follicles occur,
further down riper ones are found, and finally bunches and single
specimens of spermatozoids. The penetration of the tracheae into
the cavity shows that it cannot be lined internally by an epithelium.
In a comparison of the structures of the male and female glands, the wall
of the testis corresponds to the common envelope of the ovarian tube,
but the ovarian tubes are represented by nothing in the testes ; the
follicles in the latter represent the egg-chambers. The follicles with
their contained spermatoblasts are to be regarded as only a part of
the contents of the gland ; the latter commence as round cells pro-
vided with a nucleus and nucleolus, the outline of the nucleus
disappears suddenly and a strongly refringent body appears near it ;
the nucleolus persists when the cell has taken the form of an
elongated fibre ; the subsequent formation of sj)ermatozoa follows the
process described by Biitschli.

* 'Zool. Anzeig.; iii. (18S0) p. 235.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 621

Development of Forficula.* — L. Camerano has found the eggs of
Forficula auricularia Linn, at the end of January ; a female was
found with them. This conflicts with Fischer's statement that the
eggs are laid in April, but the case was but a single one, and the pre-
ceding fine autumn may have advanced the time of oviposition. On
the eggs being scattered about, the female carried them in her
mandibles to one place so as to re-form the original heap ; her move-
ments were less active when under a good light than otherwise. The
egg is ellipsoidal, yellowish white, and somewhat opaque, about 1 mm.
in extreme diameter. In the ova gathered in January the embryos were
to be seen, with brownish eyes, mandibles, eight-jointed antennae, and
the posterior pincers, prothorax, and abdominal rings superficially
punctate; the antennee, palps, and legs were invested by a pellicle,
which appears not to be the future larval skin. At the end of six days
from the finding of the eggs the young began to come out (but perhaps
unduly early owing to the warmth of the rooms). At this stage they
are whitish in colour, have weak legs, but well-developed and motile
pincers ; after six or seven hours the body begins to assume its brown
colour, beginning with the pincers ; the legs and lower parts become
coloured later. Owing to absorption of air the body rapidly increases
in size, and at the end of ten hours from leaving the egg is 3 mm.
long, excluding the pincers. Three changes of skin take place ;
possibly a fourth, anterior to the first observed, may have escaped
notice, owing to the habit which the larva has of devouring the old
skin at once. The first of these changes occurs when the larva is
about 6 mm. long (excluding pincers), the second at 8 mm., the third
at 12 mm.

In another instance eggs were laid on March 10th by a female
taken in the winter, and the larvsa from them made their first change
of skin between March 24th and the 30th ; the second change took
place on the 15th of April, the third at the beginning of May, and on
May 22nd the larva3 became perfect insects. It was noticed that some
males of this species appeared to prefer dead insects to fruit as food.

Actora sestuum from the Shore at Heligoland.f — This insect,
described by Meigen, justifies its name by the locality, namely the
surf of the sea, or the seaweed floating near the shore, in which it is
found. Dr. Joseph observes tliat it is very timid, flying oft' to
another part of the wet sand at the slightest noise ; it may bo
covered by a wave but it shortly reappears on the surface, the drops
rolling from it as from a sea-bird. This fact is due to a somewhat
glistening waxy covering (which splits and falls away in the form of
minute scales from time to time) being then renewed ; most rapidly
so on the wings, halteres, and spiracles. It is produced as a primarily
oily substance by small glands scattered over the body, aided by
larger tubular ones, resembling the sweat-glands of some mammals,
and lying in the connective tissue between tlie wing-muscles ; their
ducts open beneath the commencements of the wings and halteres.

* ' Rnll. S.)c. Entomr.l. Hal.,' xii. (1880) p. 46.
t ' Zool. Anzcig.,' iii. (1880) p. 250.

622 EECOKD OF CURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The larva resembles tliat of the common Scatophaga stercoraria L.,
but is larger; it lives in the bladclerwrack between high and low-
water mark, the periodical wetting with sea-water being necessary, as
shown by experiments, to its existence. The pupte are found from
2 to 3 inches deep in the sand ; the imago emerges in from fourteen
to eighteen days.

A hymenopterous parasite, resembling Smicra clavipes, was observed
to issue from the pupa in one case ; the egg must have been laid by
the female of that species, which is abundant, between the time that
the larva left the weed and that at which it entered the sand. The
parasite devours the entire interior of the pupa, and emerges in
eighteen days.

Destruction of Noxious Insects by Mould.* — In answering Pro-
fessor Metschnikoff's remarks on Dr. Bail's discovery of the deadly
action of mould on insects, Dr. Hagen remarks that that observer
never applied his method to noxious insects, altliough he was suc-
cessful with other kinds. He himself has found that potato-beetles
took the disease thus engendered, and died in from eight to twelve
days ; the other half of the same lot of beetles, which were not
inoculated, lived through the winter in the same room. He has also
killed plant-lice in a hothouse by this means. He cannot agree with
Professor Metschnikoff that the discovery cannot be applied to prac-
tical r.ses until its scientific meaning is understood, for the results
already show that it is successful in practice, and its success is being
further tested by the experiments of many naturalists.

y. Arachnida.

Development of the Araneina.t — That Mr. Balfour's " notes " on
this subject were really wanted is shown by the extremely scanty list
of writers who have addressed themselves to the spiders, or to allied
forms ; tiie investigations now under consideration were made on
the ova of Agelena labyrinthica. The embryos were, after the method
of Bobretsky, hardened in bichromate of potash, after having been for
a short time in nearly boiling water. " They were stained as a
whole with hfematoxylin after the removal of the membranes, and
embedded for cutting in coagulated albumen."

Segmentation of the Ovum. — When segmentation is complete, the
embryo is found to consist of a single layer of large flattened cells, ■
with a central mass of yolk-segments, polygonal in form and made up of
a number of clear yolk-spherules ; among these yolk-segments we find
bodies which consist of a large nucleus, filled with aj^parent nucleoli,
and of a surrounding layer of protoplasm: each nucleated body
would seem to belong to a yolk-s])here, and to be placed at one side
of it ; the nuclei themselves would be derived from the nuclei of the
" segmentation rosettes."

In the next stage, which is not far from that of the completed
segmentation, the ventral surface of the embryo is distinctly marked ;
it would appear to be made up of a procephalic lobe, an intermediate

* ' Zool. Auzclg.,' iii. (18S0) p. 185.

t ' Quart. Journ. Micr, Sci.,' xx. (1830) p. 1G7.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 623

portion, and. a caudal lobe ; the ventral thickening is important,
inasmuch as it is the point at which two rows of cells are tirst
developed, and is therefore the first indication of the future mesoderm.
The already mentioned intermediate portion consists of three indis-
tinct segments ; the first of these appears to be the seat of origin of
the first pair of ambulatory limbs. The character of the ventral
thickening is to be noted ; first, because it shows that in this form,
at any rate, the cells are continuous across the middle line, and do
not exhibit any bilateral arrangement ; and secondly, because it is
very similar to the arrangement described by Kowalevsky as obtain-
ing in an insect, and is sujiported by the observations of Barrois, who
has already noted the presence of " a continuous ventral plate of
mesoblast."

Shortly after this stage, there is found one in which there are six
segments intermediate between the procephalic and caudal lobes ; the
first two are more indistinct than the succeeding ones, owing pro-
bably to their later formation. The increase in segments is regular,
and each new one appears between the one last formed and the
caudal lobe ; the appendages do not begin to appear until some nine
or ten segments have been formed, and there is, at this period a
distinct median ventral groove ; at this stage the procephalic region
is " distinctly bilobed," but the first segment is still without append-
ages (" chelicerjB ") ; this is in keeping with its late appearance as a
segment. Some of the succeeding appendages are indicated by
swellings. An imperfect, though distinct, division of the mesoblast
into somites is now api^arent.

In the next stage the ventral plate extends over nearly the whole
circumference of the ovum, the procephalic region is distinctly bilobed,
the stomodoeum is commencing, each of the six segments behind the
lobe bears prominent appendages; and behind these there are four
somites with small protuberances. The latter are provisional ap-
pendages, and their presence has been already noted by Clajjarede and
Barrois. Just a little later, sixteen post-cej)halic segments may bo
detected.

The cpiblast exhibits no less interesting characters ; it is very thin
along the median groove, but on either side there is well-marked
thickening forming the first rudiments of the ventral ncrvc-ganglia.
It is of importance to note that tlio clielicera) have a ganglionic-
thickening independent of the procephalic lobes. In these latter tho
cpiblast is much thickened, but this is tho part which goes to form
the supra-cesophagcal ganglia.

Later on, the appendages begin to be jointed, and primitively
these joints are five in number ; this is, as Mr. Balfour points out, an
interesting character, for " this number is permanent in Insects and
in Pcripatus."

Next, we find that tho limbs nearly meet in the middle lino ; tho
two-jointed cheliccrfc ajipear to teruiiuate in rudimentary chclic,
and, so far, indicate that the spiders had anccstdrs with chelate
chelicorro. A largo upi)er and n small lower lip have bocomo
diveldind at the entrance to the stoiiiodiiim ; the priv'cphalic lobes

624 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

are distinct, and are divided by a groove into a narrower anterior and
a broader posterior portion. What is of considerable value is the
observation that a section of the body-cavity is enclosed between the
splanchnic and somatic layers of the mesoblast of these lobes.
Connecting this with the observations of Kleinenberg on Lumhricus,
the author points out that the procephalic lobe of the spider repre-
sents the prfe-oral lobe of the Chtetopod larva ; " but the prolongation
of the body-cavity into it does not necessarily imply that it is equivalent
to a post-oral segment." There is not yet any trace of the separation of
the ganglionic portion of the epiblast of the lobes from the epidermis.

As the embryo takes on the characters of the adult, the hitherto
simple dorsal region begins to be developed, so that there soon
appears a ventral instead of a dorsal flexure of the embryo. After a
time the heart becomes evident, taking its origin from a solid cord of
cells, which are derived from the dorsal mesoblast prior to the
diiferentiation of two strata in this region. About the same time the
thickenings of the supra-oesophageal ganglia become separated from
the epiblast, and the proctodoeum begins to appear.

Other points of interest are described, but our space requires us to
pass on to the general conclusions ; on the whole the history of develop-
ment is conclusive as to the closer affinity of the Arachnida to the
Tracheata than to the Crustacea (Branchiata). The mesoblast has
very much the same history, being in both cases formed by a thicken-
ing of the median line of the ventral streak : in the Crustacea the
mesoblast is known to be developed from the walls of an invagina-
tion. Where mesoblastic somites are found in Crustacea they are not
similar to those of the Tracheata. The mesenteron of the Crustacea is
formed by an invagination, and the proctodoeum appears before or co-
temporaneously with the stomodoeum ; the reverse obtains with the
Tracheata, where, too, the mesenteron is not excessively short, nor the
proctodoeum very long. It is now almost completely certain that the
chelicera3 are true post-oral appendages, and it is clear that, just as in
Lumhricus and Peripatus, there is no invagination of epiblast in the
region of the ventral nerve-cord.

In a postscript to this paper, which appears on p. lOfi of the new
' Studies from the Morphological Laboratory, at Cambridge,' Mr.
Balfour states that his attention has been directed to the German
abstract of a paper, written in Eussian, by Salensky ; from this he
gathers that that observer has detected the splitting of the mesoblast
into splanchnic and somatic layers, and had given a very similar
accoimt of the development of the heart. With regard to the pro-
visional abdominal appendages, the final stages of which Mr. Balfour
was unable to observe, Salensky found that the anterior pair gave
rise to the pulmonary sacs, while he thought that the third and
fourth pairs became the spinning mamillas ; the latter view, at any
rate, the English observer is inclined to reject.

Peculiar Modification of a Parasitic Acarian.* — Amongst a
large niunber of insects parasitic on plants, the female ready to lay

* 'Comptcs Eendus,' xc. (1880) p. 1371.

INVERTEBBATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 625

or to give birth to larvae often covers herself with a cottony or byssoid
secretion, which serves not only to protect herself, but also to pre-
serve the young during the early periods of life. Certain Arachnids,
also parasitic on plants, have the same power ; and a species of
Tetranychus has for that reason been named T. telarius. In this case
the cottony secretion constitutes a true nidification destined to protect
the eggs, as the female lays successively in several nests.

Hitherto nothing similar had been observed amongst the Acarians
parasitic on animals ; but M. Megnin has now found by accident an
exactly similar fact in the parasite of a bird. In dissecting an
American Grosbeak he was struck by the presence of numerous white
spots strewn over the naked median and sternal portion of the skin
covering the lower surface of the breast. Viewed with a lens they
appeared like spots of mould ; but under the Microscope, especially
after soaking them in glycerine, which rendered them diaphanous,
these spots proved to consist of a fine tissue, under which appeared
a group of eggs in different stages of incubation, of empty egg-
shells, and of small yellow Acarians just hatched. These Acarians
are but octopodal larvse, which it is easy to recognize by the anatomical
characters of their rostrum and legs as belonging to the species named
by the author Cheyletus lieteropalpus*

Professor Ch. Eobin f has shown that the plumicolous Sarcoptides
lay their eggs in small masses at the axils of the barbs of the feathers ;
and M. Megnin thought that his parasitic Cheyletidae did the same,
though he had never found their eggs together.

The foregoing observations show how these eggs, which are very
large ('IS mm. x '11 mm.), are laid, and what precautions the
animals take to protect them, a fact which brings them singularly
near the Tetranychi, with which they are besides so closely allied
in organization ; they show, moreover, that the larvae of this species
are octopod at birth, a character not possessed by those of the
Tetranychi, nor even by those of the wandering Chcyletides, such as
Cheyletus eruditus.

Structure of Trombidium.l — The results of A. Croncberg's in-
vestigations lead him to believe in a closer connection between this
genus and the Hydrachnidai than would apjicar from Pagenstecher's
monograph of the genus. His study of T. holosenceum shows that the
cuticle consists of an external layer, traversed by pores and carrying
the hairs, and of a thin fenestrated inner layer. The hypodormis is
granular, semi-fluid in life ; no cell-structure can be discovered in it.

Dlijedive Organs. — The labium presents a deep groove, open in
front. Posteriorly, its halves are united by a cross-piece, from each
side of which a narrow piece runs backwards along the uppi:r edge of
the maxilla, representing the-" supra-cesophagcal ridges " of ////(/ntc'/jmi
glohosa. Closely connected with the ci'oss-picco arc two chitinous
tubes, which jiroject backwards and enclose the posterior three-iniartcrs
of the two great tracheal vessels, the anterior part of these being left,

* ' Joiirn. Aniit. ct I'livsiol.' (Uoliin), 1878.

t ' ("c.iiiptu.s llLMi.his,' Apr. :!(), ISCS.

X 'liiill. S.m;. Iinp. Nat. Mascow,' liv (187!t) i- 2[H
VOL. III. 2 T

G26 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

as also in the Hydraclinidae, uncovered by the tubes. These structures
are represented in Eijlais by two long rods, which enclose the tracheae
for a short distance. Two ridges projecting forwards from the cross-
piece enclose the mouth, as in Hydrachna ; behind this the pharynx,
which consists of a chitinous groove roofed in above by a lamina of
intrinsic and extrinsic muscles, passes backwards within the labium,
exactly as in Hydrachna. An oesophagus of the same diameter
(O* 25 mm.) traverses the main nervous mass, after rising up ; it enters
the lower part of the anterior end of the stomach, thus differing from
Pagenstecher's description, but agreeing with Hydrachna again. The
stomach's upper surface presents symmetrically arranged lobes, through
the spaces between which the vertical body-muscles pass ; the excretory
organ, which has been called a fat body, can be just seen in the median
line. The cfecal lobes consist of a memhrana propria, lined internally
by a thick granular layer containing granular vesicles, but no trace of
cell-structure. A similar structure characterizes the stomach-walls,
so that Pagenstecher's description of cells here, and his consequent in-
terpretation of the organ as a liver, prove erroneous. Probably it has
a double function, the biliary secretion being supplied by the brown
cells and the granular investing substance, in Hydrachnidae. Possibly
the non-cellular mass of Trombidium represents a stage in the break-
ing down of these liver cells. There is no direct connection between
the stomach and anus. The posterior end of the excretory organ,
which has been mistaken for such a connection, is distinguishable by
its chalky-white contents ; it has two anterior branches, and contracts
posteriorly towards the anus ; no lining ei)ithelium was made out.
The buccal glands have a common opening into the mouth, the loop-
shaped gland ending in a narrow canal into which the ducts of the
rounded glands open.

Nervous System. — An oval mass represents the brain and ventral
ganglia ; the posterior part shows signs of bilateral symmetry. A
layer of small cells directly underlies the neurilemma. The twelve
pairs of nerves are divided into two divisions, one directed forwards,
the other backwards ; but besides these there is an anterior, unpaired
nerve, also found in Bhyneolophus, which overlies the oesophagus ; the
pair next behind this is the optic pair-, and a pair lying beneath these
probably supplies the palps ; the next goes to the maxillee ; two stout
pairs following these supply the two front pairs of legs. The two
nerves of the fourth pair of legs are but branches of a single nerve.

Generative Organs. — Treviranus' accoimt of these parts agrees
much better than Pagenstecher's with the real state of the case. The
ovaries are connected by a short bridge of tissue lying above the
generative opening ; the oviducts are directed forwards, and a circular
arrangement of the organs round the oi^ening, common in other
Arachnida, is thus presented. The number of eggs in the ovary is
innumerable, and they range from young elongated forms of • 05 mm.
diam,, with distinct germinal vesicle and spot, to mature individuals of
•15 mm., clouded by presence of yolk. The long and tortuous ovi-
ducts have their basal portions coiled up together; their median
segments arc thickened by a special external layer of cells, • 06 mm.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 627

in diameter. The vagina lias strong circular muscles, and is divided
transversely by a constriction ; the only accessory organs observed are
three small globose vessels, situated on each side of the vagina, and
consisting of a distinct membrane apparently with a cellular epithe-
lium. Of the male organ the two testes form the chief part, and
consist of plicated tubes with their walls, and contain several
chambers lined with flat polygonal cells, enclosing a mass made up of
small nucleated cells, apparently the sperm-cells. Two short, wide
vasa defereutia, lined by circular muscles, underlie the testes. The
medially placed ductus ejaculatorius, of similar structure, is about
twice as broad, and terminates in a copulatory apparatus of the form
of a bulb witb a hollowed chitiuous ridge, with two chitiuous hoojis at
its sides, ending in a sharp, transparent, barbed point ; the muscles
arc transversely arranged. The long, narrow accessory glands observed
by Treviranus open into the distal end of the ductus ejaculatorius ;
they are difficult to disentangle from the surfiice of the testes, and
are lined by an epithelium of roundish or cubical cells and by a fine
membraua intima.

5. Crustacea.

Central Nervous System of the Crayfish.* — Herr Krieger
appears to have a very high opinion of the usefulness of osmic acid,
which he ordinarily applies thus : The ganglia having been removed
from the crayfish, are placed on a slide over the mouth of a wide-
necked flask containing the acid. After having been thus subjected
to its vapour they are removed to picrocarmine, in which they remain
for twelve hours ; they are then macerated in very dilute picrocar-
mine, to which a little picric acid has been added. This treatment is
best aelaptcd for the demonstration of the nuclei, and the protoplasm
of the ganglionic cells. After entering into the mode of investigation
in further detail, the author passes to the descriptive portion of his
paper; this falls under two heads: (1) Histological, and (2) Topo-
graphical.

(1) Commencing with an account of tlie ganglionic cells of the
central nervous system, the author says that they are in all cases
destitute of a membrane, are more or less sj^herical or pyrift)rm in
form, and provided with a proportionately largo and spherical nucleus.
The following forms may be distinguished : —

a. Cells with distinct protojilasm, and generally with a number of
nucleoli within the nucleus.

b. Small cells with a delicate fringe of protoplasm, which is most
distinct in the neighbourhood of the process given off from the cell.

c. Very small granular elements, with processes ; the protoplasm
is evanescent ; the fine, granulated, cell-contents are highly refractive,
but there are no evident nucleoli.

Tlie fibrous elements maybe divided into those which belong to the
ganglionic processes, to tlie fibres of the transverse or of the longitu-
dinal commissures, or to the perijiheral nerve-fibres; histologically,
they may be said to be tubular and well ilevelopeil, or fibrillar and

* 'Zcitsclir. wis8. Zonl.,' xxxiii. (18S0) p. r)27.

2 T 2

628 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

delicate. The author finds no evidence that the former arc compounds
of the latter ; and in this he is supported by Hclmholtz, Haeckel,
and Yung. Two of the fibres of the longitudinal commissures are
especially distinguished by their size ; these are the " colossal "
nerve-fibres. Krieger has been led by his observations to regard the
bundle of fine fibres which were first described by Eemak as placed
in these to be merely coagulation-products. When carefully prepared,
the contents of the colossal fibres may be seen to be clear and homo-
geneous, but after a period of removal from the body delicate striations
appear, and gradually become more distinct.

Dotted Substance. — Even with the naked eye, in the fresh con-
dition, it is possible to see in the ganglia of the crayfish whitish
spheres of a comparatively considerable size ; when these are examined
under the Microscope, they are seen to be neither ganglion-cells nor
fibrous bundles, but rather to consist of a finely granulated mass ; this
dotted substance is by Krieger, as by Leydig, Dietl, and others,
regarded as being a network of very delicate fibres. The true
characters of the body may be demonstrated by two difierent methods.
Of these, one is due to Dietl, and consists in making fine trans-
verse sections of a ganglion which has been hardened in " osmium " ;
the other method is thus described : A portion of a ganglion is placed
for several days in a 0*1 per cent, solution of chromate of ammonia,
is then teased up with fine needles, and placed under a covering glass
in the same fluid. After a brief description of the connective tissue,
the author passes to (2) The Topographical relations of the Nervous
System.

Cerebrum. — When we examine this in transverse sections, wo first
meet with the two optic nerves ; here, two kinds of fibres can be easily
distinguished, one of which is much more delicate than the other.
The fine fibres appear to decussate completely, and not to form a
semi-decussation, as has been stated by Dietl. In the anterior enlarge-
ments of the cerebrum there are some structures which are not
easily comprehended ; the first of these is a band of coarse dotted
substance, which intervenes between the two pairs of spheroidal
bodies which are placed near the chiasma, and the other consists of a
pair of rounded bodies, which are made up of a fine dotted substance
placed below the just-mentioned spheres.

Passing to the oesophageal commissures and their ganglia, the
author points out that the former are made up of fibres, which arise
from the dotted substance of the anterior and posterior swellings of
the cerebrum. After giving a careful description of the ganglion
and of the nerves which are given ofi" from it, he passes to a considera-
tion of the difierent parts of the ventral chain ; he here enters into
great detail, which it would be impossible to make clear without a
rcj)roduction of the figures by which they are illustrated.

Influence of Acids and Alkalies on Crayfishes.* — M. Eichet
commences by pointing out the impossibility of subjecting air-breathing
animals to the influence of acids or alkalies. On the other hand, the

* ' ComptcH lleuduci,' xc. (18S0) p. 1166.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 629

crayfish affortls an extremely easy subject, and the author has been
enabled by its aid to convince himself that acids or alkalies are not
poisonous because of their acidity or alkalinity. This is shown by
the following facts : A crayfish can live for two or three hours in
water containing 25 grammes per litre of acetic acid ; if there are
only 20 grammes per litre it can live for half a day. The mineral
acids are the most fatal ; in 5 grammes (per litre of water) of sul-
phuric acid, a crayfish dies in less than an hour ; if the water only
contains 1 gramme per litre it may live for ten to twelve hours.
Nitric acid has still more marked effects ; half a gramme in a litre of
water will kill a crayfish in two or three hours, and if the quantity of
acid be doubled, the creature will die in half an hour at the outside.
The first tissue to be aff'ectcd appears to be the muscular, and it is a
long time before the effects are lost after the animal is removed from
the acidulated water.

Alkaline solutions appear to have a more marked eflfect ; the least
hurtful is baryta, of which 3 grammes may be put into a litre of water
for the crayfish to remain alive for two or three hours. The most fatal
alkali is ammonia ; half a gramme in a litre of water has an almost
instantaneous effect, and even with one-tenth of a gramme the crayfish
dies in two or three hours. It is, in fine, even more fatal than
strychnine.

The difierences in efiect would appear to be due to the difierent
degree in which the drugs are absorbed by the respiratory organs.

Head of the Lobster.* — Professor Young shows some important
relations in the grooves on the carapace. The so-called " cephalic
groove " is really double : its anterior lateral branch starts from the
antennary sternum, and marks off a prestomial segment. This dis-
tinction of a prestomial region is paralleled in the Annelids, where
also it is supplied from the supra-cesophageal ganglion. In the Stoma-
poda and in the Poutellida^ the antennary segment is free. The posterior
lateral branch begins rather posteriorly — behind the maxillipedes —
and passes forward to join the former opposite the articulation of the
mandible. Fi-om the posterior position of this latter groove, which
marks tbe hinder limits of the strictly oral segments, it is seen that no
place is left for the sterna of the maxillipedes' segments, and their terga
are but small.

Claus's statement that the mandibles do not originate from the
third pair of Nauplius limbs, but from the body-surface behind them, is
borne out by the observation of such a development of it from the
lateral oral margin behind and on the inner side of the third pair of
appendages in some Macrurous larvfx^ ; it is thus similar in origin to
the labrum ; probably the third larval pair of limbs fuses with it, con-
stituting the mandibular palp, which is supplied from the sujira-
CESophagcal ganglion, which also supplies all the prestomial region.

This prestomial region includes the eyes, antenna;, antcnnulcs,
with the sense-sacs at thcii' base ; it is a primitive division of the
body, and its relation to the nervous centres supports the view that

* ' Joum. Anat. et Pliysiol.' (Humphry), xiv. (ISSO) p. 348.

630 RECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the supra-oesoiihageal gauglion is one of a tergal series of ganglia cor-
respontling to the more fully developed sternal set, and so the I'egion
itself may consist simply of terga whose development has been affected
by the disproi^ortionate growth of the terga posterior to them, which
constitute the carapace.

Shortened Development in Palaemon potiuna.* — To the list of land
and fresh-water animals which dispense with the development through
which their marine allies pass, Dr. Fritz Miiller adds the Brazilian
Trichodactylns and ^glea Odebrechtii from the Decapod Crustacea. The
fresh-water shrimps of the mouth of the Itajahy, however — a Leander,
a Pcdcemon, and a species of the Atijince — leave the egg in the zooea
stage. On the other hand, the female of Palcemon potiuna, instead of
laying the large number of eggs usual with kindred species under the
same conditions, produces from six to twenty large ova, 2 mm. in
length, from which issue young of 5 mm. length, having all the deport-
ment of adults, whose form they assume fully at the fourth change of
skin. The condition in which the young leave the egg is that of the
larva of Hipiiolyte polaris, except that the gills arc well developed
while the mouth-parts are mere rudiments.

The changes through which the different organs pass with the four
changes of skin are as follows : —

Frontal process of the carapace, from a short tooth- and hairless
process to one with generally six to seven teeth, with corresponding
tufts of hair in front of them on the upper edge and one or two on the
lower edge, which bears a double row of hairs.

Front edge of carapace at first bears a single inferior bristle, and
finally an antennal and hepatic bristle, a branchiostegal having
appeared in the fourth stage, and having apj)arently fused with the
hej)atic in the last stage.

Front antenna at first zooeiform ; protopodite unsegmentcd, a
bristle on the inner branch, two such on the outer one ; finally, each
of the last segments (generally ten in the male) of the inner division
of the outer branch bears two transverse series of two or three olfac-
tory filaments each.

Hind antenna, from having only the outer branch segmented, has
both segmented, and provided, the one with bristles, the other with
numerous bristles and a spine ; this condition is reached at the second
stage.

Mandible becomes two-branched, toothed, with a palp, instead of
consisting of a single simple cylinder.

Maxillce do not alter, nor do the anterior maxillipedes, materially.

Middle and posterior maxillipedes : the inner branches from the
beginning are long, strong, and devoid of swimming hairs, but carry
terminal claws, serving as legs ; the only change is that they become
comparatively weaker.

Chelate feet, from a segmented but rounded, hairless, immobile
form to chelate appendages with comb-like ornatory spines (the pos-
terior pair becomes longer than the body in very old males).

* ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 152.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 631

Ambulatory abdominal legs, from being hairless and immobile,
become fully developed at the first change of skin.

Gills fully developed from the first,

Post-ahdominal legs begin by having all their ultimate structures,
except the hairs and grasping hooks, of which the here specially
long appendage of the endopodite of the second pair is the last to bo
added.

Tail has a distinct end-piece, with thirty-two to thirty-four bristles,
mostly plumose on both sides : the lateral tail-pieces arc visible in tho
interior. At the third stage the feet and outer and inner lateral
laminae appear ; at the fourth the inner laminfe are longer and broader,
and set round with plumose bristles ; at the fifth and last the median
piece becomes pointed, and carries two i^airsof strong spines laterally.
The number of its plumose hairs diminishes to eight or nine (subse-
quently raised to twenty and upwards).

The reason of the almost entire absence of the zooea-structures in
tho newly-hatched young appears to be due to the, at times, turbu-
lent streams inhabited by the species, which are liable to be flushed
by torrents ; hence tho zooea and all larval stages, in which a
swimming mode of progression exposes them to injury from this
cause, are passed through in three or four days, at the end of which
time the ambulatory legs with their sharp and strong claws are well
developed.

It is strange that the very closely allied Hippohjte polaris also has
a shortened development, while a Brazilian Hippolyfe is known to
emerge from the egg as a zooea.

Toilet-appendages of the Crustacea.* — In tho genus Pahvmon,
Dr. Fritz Miiller states, tho first pair of feet is used for the cleansing
of tho body and the respiratory chambers. Its structure adapts it
admirably for this purpose : it is slender, often exceeding the body in
length, and its pincers are small, but the grasping limb is articu-
lated so as to bo movable in almost any direction ; at tho proximal
end of tho chela3 arc ranged several groups of short bent bristles with
comb-liko teeth on their inner aspects. The outside of each limb of
the pincers carries several bundles of straight, stiff, roughened bristles,
so that it resembles a brush ; their inner side also carries a similar
series of smaller bundles, pointing towards the apex, and so arranged
as to interlock when the " fingers " are brought together.

In the working of these parts in life this pair of limbs is applied
to all parts of tho body, and especially to tho respiratory chamber,
and is there moved about so as to remove foreign particles. They
are also used to convey to the mouth small pieces of carrion whicli
they have torn oft'; the animal also, according to Hcnscn's observations,
uses them to place grains of sand in tho auditory cavity after each
change of skin, as the mass of sandy otoliths is cast oft' with tho
skin.

In other Shrimps, as Alphais and Palcemon, it is probably tho
second pair of feet which fulfils the cleansing function ; they are very

• 'Ko8ino.s,' iv. (ISSO) p. lis.

632 RKCORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

slender, carry small diclfe, and arc rendered more mobile by the fact
that the fore-arm is broken up into a number of small joints : the
first pair of legs is strong, with powerful cheloB. In the hermit-crabs,
the porccllanoiis crabs, and the Galatheidso, on the other hand, it is
the fifth jiair which is thus used ; they are thin, with very mobile
joints, have small pincers well supplied with brushes, combs, &c. ;
they chiefly act on the gill-pouch. A commensal Porcellana living
with an especially mucous worm, was observed to keep these limbs in
constant motion over all parts of the body. In the crayfish, lobster,
and prawn none of the pairs of feet appear adapted for this purpose.

In the Crabs, each of the six maxillipedes bears a long process,
pointing backwards, the edges thickly set with long hairs ; the
whole has the outline of a sabre, and acts like a dusting-brush. The
one belonging to the first pair lies outside the branchial cavity, the
other within it, where they constantly play backwards and forwards
between the branchiae and the carapace. The hairs which clothe them
show an immense variety in the form and arrangement of their teeth,
of which Trichodactylus, Gelasimus, Hepatas, and Lupea afford in-
teresting examples. In Trichodactylus the inner wall of the chamber,
too, bears a number of small protuberances, each terminated by a
spine ; the function of the spines is to cleanse the hairs of the brushes
above mentioned, as they pass to and fro. Trichodactylus is also
remarkable, though not entirely peculiar, for leaving the egg as a
fully developed crab.

Anal Respiration of the Copepoda.* — Mr. M. M. Hartog, in a note
on Cyclops read at the British Association,t pointed out that its respi-
ration was exclusively anal. He has now made out the same in
Canthocamptus (fam. Harpacticidas), and Diaptomus (fam. Calanidje).
In all three the mechanism is the same ; at regular intervals, after
the backward sway of the intestine, the anal valves open for an
instant and then close, giving just time for a slight indraught of
water after the opening, a slight expulsion at the close. The necessary
pressure to confine the animal seems to interfere somewhat with these
movements, sometimes stopping them, if excessive ; hence he " refrains
from noting with illusory exactness the intervals between each
respiratory movement."

It is to be noticed that the rectum contains as a rule liquid only,
the bolus of faeces remaining in it but a short time. By endosmose
the liquid in the rectum will tend to be at the same condition of
gaseous saturation as the body-fluid around it, kept constantly agitated
by the backwards and forwards sway of the stomach. During the
short interval that the anus is open an approach to gaseous equilibrium
with the external water takes place, even despite the very slight move-
ment of the water (shown by the little change of place undergone by
suspended indigo or carmine particles). In the absence of any other
suitable respiratory apparatus, no one can hesitate as to the function of
the action described.

In the Nauplius larvae of Cyclops and Diaptomus the working is

* ' Quart. Jonin. TMicr. Sci.,' xx. (1880) p. 244. t ^ntc, p. 254.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 633

slightly different. The rectum is a subspherical muscular sac, which
at regular intervals contracts so as to leave a linear cavity (along the
long axis of the animal), and immediately dilates, sucking up the
water from without. An anal respiration, such as that of Cyclops, is
found widely among Crustacea — even those which have well-developed
gills like Asfacus, which is one of the highest forms. It has been
demonstrated in Phyllopoda and Cladocera, and is probably the exclu-
sive mode in Leptodora, as shown by Weismann. That it is therefore
primitive, and should be expected to occur in the primitive, or at least
very generalized group of the Copepoda, is an obvious deduction.
Hence the author anticipates that the homoiomorphic zooea larvaD of
the Decapoda will prove to have this same mode of respiration.

If there bo any connection between Rotifers and NauijUus, it is
easy to make out the origin of the arrangement in the latter. The
ciliated funnels and lateral canals of the former can only be of service
when there is a thin unchitinized anterior surface through which
water can transude into the ccelom ; by the extension of chitinization
over the whole surface, these organs lose their function and abort,
while the cloacal " contractile vesicle " takes on an inspiratory as
well as an expiratory function, and becomes more or less confounded
with the rectum, from which probably, even in Eotifers, it takes origin.

Here must be noticed the wide diffusion of anal respiration in
aquatic insect larvfe (alternate inspiration and expiration by the
pumping movements of the rectum). This would point to a common
origin with Crustacea.

A list of the groups in which anal respiration is made out may bo
added : —

Vebmes :

Eotifera.

Gephijrca.

Oliijochwto-Limicola.

ECHINODEEMATA :

Ilolothiiroidea.
Arturopoda :

Crustacea (f^cncral).

Insccta (most aquatic larvas).
MOLLUSCA :

Dentalium,

Parasitic Corycseidse.* — Dr. Delia Vallo makes some contributions
to our knowledge of the anatomy of the genus LirliomoJgus, somo
species of which are parasitic on Actinia.', while others are found on
Mollusca, Worms, or Tunicates. He describes as new L. ndin'uv,
li. ftcroulis (on Pleroklcs fipinulnsus), and L. chromodo^'idis, of which
the female is alone known. IIo forms a now genus, Anthcssus, for
some forms allied to Lichomohjus, the sjiecies of which, A. Solvcurli,
and A. plcurohranrhitc arc distinguished by the characters of their
mouth-organs.

Parasite of the American Blue Pike.t — Professor D. S. Kellicott
describes a new species of Anjidm found on tlie blue pike {Stizostelhiiim

* ' Jlitth. Zool. Stat. Neapfl,' ii. (ISSO) p. S'X

t 'Am. Jouni. Micr.,' v. (1.MS0) p. ^[i. Kio ' Naturo,* xxii. (ISSO) p. 111.

634 KECORD OF QUERENT RESE.\.RCIIES RELATING TO

salmonewn Jord.). Tlic fishermen of the Niagara river at Buftalo
say that when the water becomes warm the fish gets too lazy to take
food, that it then loses flesh, and through its inertness becomes
infested with these lice. Having given this subject especial attention,
Professor Kellicott is inclined to think the account of the fishermen
is correct. The parasite occurs usually on the top of the head of the
fish. When there are several they arc, as a rule, huddled together,
often in heaps, so that the knife may remove a number at once ; it
occurs also on the fins. None were found in the mouth-cavity. As
many as twenty were taken from one lean fish.

When living specimens of the Argulus were placed in a tank with
a small specimen of Lejpidosteus osseus and some minnows, tliey shortly
fixed on them, and the minnows soon died, apparently killed by the
parasites. When first put in, the fish would pursue and catch them,
but would eject them with a suddenness and a queer expression that
was most amusing. In a few moments they were left unnoticed by
the minnows. The gar recoiled in evident fear when one would be seen
approaching. A large female once fastened on to the long nose of the
gar, where it clung for several days, despite the vigorous efforts of
the fish to dislodge it. Cold weather seemed to destroy them ; the
fishermen assert that after frosts the blue pike become fat, and then
no lice are found on them.

The species is called A. stizostethii. The author believes — against
the assertion of Leydig — that the abdominal lobes have a function of
resjiiration above all other parts of the body, and he describes with a
good deal of detail the appendages to the several legs.

New Crustacea. — Mr. G. M. Thomas describes * some Crustacea
from Dunedin Harbour, New Zealand, the maximmn depth of which
is about 6 fathoms. They include one new genus and six new
species : — Mysis denticulata, Parafanais tenuis, Panoplcea (n. gen.)
spinosa, P. dehilis, AnijMlochus squamosus, and Megamoera fasciculata.
The last five are figured.

Mr. T. W. Kirk describes | Paliniirus himidus, the common craw-
fish of the Sydney market, the total length of which, from tip of beak
to end of telson, is 24 inches, with a much swollen carapace
21^ inches in circumference. Though so large and common, it does
not appear to have been hitherto described. It is very near
P. Hugelii, from the Indian Ocean, but distinguished by its miich
larger size, by the beak, supra-orbital and antennal spines being
turned upwards, and by the telson being less triangular and rounded
instead of scarped.

H. Eehberg has investigated | a spring in the island of Heligoland.
He found Gammanis puteanus, a Cyclops which has been assigned by
Fric to C. indcTiellus Koch, but which is a new species, a new Acarid,
and a new Pleuroxus, P. puteanus, n. sp. The latter is distinguished
by having the body contracted behind, and the cephalic rostrum of
about the same length as the labial appendage, and the eye four times

* ' Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,' vi. (1880) p. 1. t Ibi<l., p. 14.

X ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 301.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 635

the size of tlie accessory eye. Labial appendage comparatively large,
distinctly notched so as to appear as if composed of two blunt lobes ;
hind edge of shell straight, lower edge clad thickly with fine bristles,
and having a spine behind. Surface of shell smooth. Postabdomen
broad, contracted at posterior third, beneath which occur eight double
teeth. A short and a long spine at the base of the caudal hooks.
Length, "33 mm.; height, -25 mm. Its nearest ally is Pleuroxus
trigonellus O. F. Miiller.

The Cyclops, G. helgolandicus n. sp., has the front antennre of
fourteen segments, and reaching to the end of the first body segment
when laid back ; the first and eighth segments agree in length, and the
fourth and seventh, which also agree, are together equivalent to one
of these. Second pair of antenna? of four segments, the first being the
longest. Eye with four edges, red or red-brown. Last segment of
outer branch of fourth pair of feet has two spines externally, a sj^ine
and bristles above, and three long bristles internally. Rudimentary
foot consists of a broad basal joint with an external bristle, and a
narrow terminal joint with a spine and a long bristle. The last
abdominal segment is the shortest, hinder edge fringed with fine hairs ;
caudal fnrca four times as long as this, its latter bristle at the third
fifth. The ovisacs contain twelve to twenty eggs, round, projecting
from the body. Total length, 1-GG mm. ; without furca, 1'36 mm.

It appears to be derived from C. pulchellus Koch, difiering from
it mainly in having three fewer antennal joints, in being smaller, in
the shortening of the basal joint of the first segment of the rudi-
mentary feet, and of the second outer bristle of the caudal furca ; but
the species are alike distinguished from all others by a fringe of fine
hairs on the first quarter of the furca, and by the position of the
lateral bristle of the same at the third fifth of its length, and some
other points.

The well was closed in 1809, so that the species appear to have
become thus modified in the intervening period of seventy-one years.

Vermes.

Genital Glands and Segmfintal Organs of the Polychaeta.* — After
a short review of the history of our knowledge of this subject,
M. Cosmovici commences an account of his own investigations by a
detailed descrii)tion of the anatomy of Arcnicola piscnlorum. In dealing
with the circulatory system, he points out (1) that the branches of
the ventral vessel go to a gill ; (2) that they meet with a segmental
organ, or (3 ) that they meet with both gill and scgruental organ.

In describing the segmental organs, ho commences by directing
attention, in the first place, to the structui'o which he calls the organ
of Bojanus. Of these there -are, in Arcnicola, six pairs, which arc
placed on either side of the ganglionic chain, ami in the cephalo-
tlioracic portion of the lateral chamlxjrs of the body. They arc not
fi)und anteriorly to the third or posteriorly to the eighth segment of
ihe body. Though very variable inform, it is iiossiblc to make out in

» ' Arcli. Z.>ol. txp. ct gen.,' viii. (1880) p. 2:53.

G3G RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

them an external border, wliicla is concave, and by wliich tliey arc
attached to the wall of the body, and a convex border which is free
and directed towards the ganglionic cord. The anterior extremity is
convex, and is always closed ; though the posterior extremity appears
to be glandular in character, it is not really so ; the appearance is
due merely to its great contractility, and it is at this end that the
gland communicates with the exterior. This communication is
eficcted by a circular pore, of some size, which is only difficult to see
on account of the rich supply of muscles with which it is provided.
In addition to this communication with the interior, the pouches also
communicate with the "visceral chamber" by an orifice placed near
their anterior extremity ; the whole of the interior is provided with
very long cilia, which work towards the exterior orifice. In structure,
these organs may be regarded as being composed of a wall, and of an
epithelium. The wall is formed of muscular fibres, and of connec-
tive tissue ; the former are most abundant in the region of the
posterior orifice. The epithelial layer is composed of spherical cells,
filled with yellow granules ; the most superficial are ciliated and
deej^ly pigmented. The walls are highly vascular, but there is no
indication whatever of any glandular structure. The author is of
opinion that not only in structure, but also in function, these bodies
are to be compared with the molluscan organ of Bojanus.

Turning next to the segmental organs, we find that we have an
organ, the tissue of which is completely transparent, and which
is largely supplied with blood-vessels ; these bodies are connected
with the organ of Bojanus, and open by a wide orifice into the body-
cavity. By means of this orifice, the tubes are easily enabled to
act as the efferent ducts for the generative products. Connected
with the segmental organs, and like them arranged in six pairs, we
find the ovaries or testes: these are racemose in form, and their
products, which escape young, fall first of all into the body-cavity.
The student of this subject will see that the results here given are
very far from being in accordance with the views of Williams ; the
comparison which the author institutes between them can only be
referred to, as it is impossible to give any abstract of his review.

Development of the Spermatozoa of the Earthworm.* — Mr.
Blomfield commences with a careful account of the position and
appearance of the testes of the earthworm, which is of value, as the
much more prominent seminal vesicles are often mistaken for them.
He describes them as pure white, translucent bodies, irregularly
quadrangular in form, and rarely more than -^^ inch in diameter. By
the assistance of Mr. Bourne, the author is enabled to explain how it is
that the seminal vesicles are ordinarily taken for testes. In order to
demonstrate the truth of Hering's account of the arrangement of these
parts, Mr. Bourne examined a scries of earthworms, and was able to
demonstrate that in full-grown forms, such as are ordinarily chosen
for dissection, the vesicles are so fully developed that the true testes
arc completely hidden from view. In immature specimens, these

* 'Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,' xx. (1880) p. 70.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 637

vesicles form six small outgrowths on the septa of the ninth-
tenth, tenth-eleventh, and eleventh-twelfth segments, respectively ;
the anterior pair grow forward so as to project into the ninth ring,
tlie second grow backward into the eleventh, and the third into the
twelfth ring ; " the ciliated rosettes " of the seminal ducts are found
in the tenth and eleventh rings, and by these the developing sperm-
cells of the testes pass into the seminal reservoirs or vesicles, which
become gradually larger as sexual maturity apjiroaches.

After an account of the minute structure of the seminal vesicles,
the author passes to his more immediate subject.

Development of the Spermatozoa. — " If a portion of the contents of
a seminal reservoir are examined in salt solution, a great many of the
stages of the developing spermatozoon are exhibited in one field."
In his account of this subject, the author makes use of some terms
suggested to him by Professor Lankester ; the spcrmatospore is a term
applied to the " constituent cells of a testicle, derived from tho
primitive germ-epithelium " ; these cells, by the division of their
nuclei, give rise to " spermatospheres" or " sperm-polyplasts." " Each
constituent of a sperm-j^olyj^last is a spermatoblast, and when the
process of division is over each spermatoblast becomes a sperma-
tozoon. It does not, however, hai:)pen that the whole spermatosjihere
is converted into spermatoblasts ; there remains a passive portion,
which in the earthworm occupies a central position ; this is tho
" sperm-blastophore," or " blastophoral cell."

The author then enters into a careful account of the development
of the bodies thus defined, which is illustrated by his own drawings,
and comes to conclusions which are best stated in his own succinct
resume : The nucleus of the spermatospore in the young testis is of
unusually large relative size ; the second nuclei to which it gives rise
stand out around tho central mass (blastojihore) of tho generating
spheroid with very little protoplasm clothing them. The nucleus
undouhtedhj becomes the rod-like head of the earthivorm's sperma-
tozoon, and tho filament is as undeniably formed from non-nuclear
protoplasm.

The sperm-blastoplioro of tho earthworm is, however, non-
nucleated, while in the frog and salamander the corresponding boily
is nucleated. This diflfercnce is, it is suggested, duo to the fact that in
the earthworm the spermatoblasts are further developed, not in testes,
but in the seminal reservoirs, while in tho vertebrates just mentioned
a portion of the blastophoro alone passes oil', while the rest remains
ready to resume its activity. In fact, what hai)pcns in the eartli-
worm is the remarkable i)henomcnon of tho primitive testis-cells
passing into another organ in order to xmdorgo their development.

Embryology of Ligula.* — M. Moniez, in correcting and adding
to tlio recent accounts of this phenomenon given by MM. Duchanip
and JJunnadieu, points out that before develo])ment conunenccs tho
egg consists of a single egg-ccU (which has been taken for a germinal
vcsiclo) ; this lies in tho midst of nutritive globules of various sizes,

* ' l?iill. Sci. IKp. N.ird,' iii. (ISSQ) p. 112.

638 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which generally conceal it. Segmentation takes place in the midst of
the nutritive yolk, the egg-cell not issuing from it previously, as in
Tcenia. As it increases in size it drives the yolk-globules to the
periphery, where they often present the appearance of polygonal cells.
After segmentation the egg consists of finely granular cells, but
slightly connected with each other ; it undergoes delamination in the
same way as in TcBnia ; the central part forms alone the six-spined
embryo, the external part becoming clothed with cilia, and constituting
the " embryophore," within which the embryo lives free. The latter
and its capsule emerge from the egg on the disappearance of the egg-
operculum, and rapidly (in one or two seconds) become far greater in
size than the egg itself. This is owing to the absorption by the
embryophore of a large quantity of liquid, converting it into a finely
granular and very delicate reticulum. The cilia now rotate the
whole ; they are short and uniformly distributed ; a slight pressure
expels the embryo, which after abandoning the embryoj)hore, creeps
about by amoeboid movement, showing its constituent cells plainly.
It is therefore the embryophore — and not the embryo, as stated by
M. Donnadieu — which moves as if it was ciliated, and the existence
of the cilia upon it, pointed out by Leuckart and others, is beyond
all doubt.

Nervous System of the Trematoda.* — Dr. Lang's second com-
munication on this subject commences with an account of the nervous
system of the Tristomida. After reviewing the works of earlier writers,
among whom Blanchard, Kolliker, and Taschenberg (1879) have been
the most conspicuous, he proceeds to give an account of his own inves-
tigations on Tristomum molce. The best subjects for investigation are
the smaller specimens, on account of their greater transparency ; the
principal parts of the nervous system can be made out in the living
examples, for the pale nerve-cords are composed of coarse fibres, just
as in Planocera Graffii among the Dendrocoelous Turbellaria.

The flattened body of these creatures has its periphery almost round ;
at the anterior end of the ventral surface there are two oral suckers,
and in their neighbourhood the margin of the body is so indented as to
give the appearance of a quadrangular median lobe. The abdominal
sucker is very large and powerful, and is connected by a short thin
stalk with the body. On either side of, and not far from the pharynx,
there are two vesicles belonging to the water- vascular system. The
cerebrum lies anteriorly and superiorly to the j^harynx and mouth ;
in form it is a short, pretty broad transverse band, with a concave
posterior edge. There are connected with it four small pigment spots.
On each side of the cerebral mass there are given off four nerves,
which are thus distributed. The most anterior pass to the region
between the oral suckers, where they branch and anastomose. The
succeeding nerves supply the oral stickers themselves, and have con-
nected with them the third pair of nerves, part of which cross over,
however, to the oj^posite side of the body. Where they unite in the
middle line, an unpaired nerve passes forwards to the cephalic lobe.

* • Blittli. Zool. Stat. Neapel," ii. (1880) p. 28.

INVEKTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 639

The arrangement tlius brought about is not unlike that which obtains
in P. Grajfii, where all the nerves given off from the brain are con-
nected together by a circular commissure ; but in Tristomum there is
not any direct continuation between the commissures in the posterior
region. The foui'th pair of nerves passes furthest backwards ; and
these may be seen to consist essentially of a feebly developed dorsal,
and of two well-developed ventral nerves on either side. Of the ventral
trunks, one is peripheral and external, the other internal ; these again
unite in the region of the great ventral sucker.

After describing in detail the distribution of these nerves, the
author passes to the consideration of the minute structure of the nervous
system ; the examination of which is greatly aided by the large size
of the ganglion-cells and of the nerve-elements, as well as by the dis-
tinctness of the nerve-tracts. A good transverse section of a ventral
longitudinal nerve exhibits par excellence the spongy character of
these fibres ; of these there is a network, and in the midst of them
there are a number of lumina of various sizes ; these all contain some
coagulated protoplasm, and in the larger ones nucleated cells are also
to be distinguished. Careful examination of a number of sections
reveals the existence of a number of tubes {neurilemma), and of nerve-
fibres enclosed in these tubes. It would seem that, during life, the
fibre completely fills the tube. It is concluded that, histologically at
any rate, the cerebrum is nothing but a specially and highly developed
transverse commissure, which indicates its relation to the central
nervous system by being composed largely of ganglion-cells.

The eyes, which are extremely simple, consist of (1) an aggrega-
tion of pigment covering in (2) a spherical or oval refracting body,
which in the anterior eyes is directed backwards, and in the posterior
forwards. Connected with this there is (3) a typical ganglionic cell
which forms the retina. (4) A spherical bundle of the dorso-ventral
muscles appears to act as muscles for the eye.

Small peripheral nerve-centres appear to be represented by large
cells which, scattered through the body, are best developed in the
neighbourhood of those regions in which the musculature is best
developed.

Pleurocotijle scombri. — The nervous system of this creature is the
next subject of Dr. Lang's investigations. No eyes are hero develojied ;
the cerebral mass is delicate, and is made up of finer fibres ; the most
distinct nerves belong to four series : —

(1) A pair which pass forwards to the suckers.

(2) A i)air which i)ass upwards — dorsal nerves — but which could
not be traced for any great distance.

(3) A i)air, which pass outwards and upwards, and are soon lost ;
and (4) A pair, better develoijed, of longitudinal trunks, which take a
backward course along the ventral siii-fuce.

JJislomida. — The examples of this group which were examined
were Uistoinum nijrojlavum, and 1). hcjxilicum. The ceutiuil nervous
Bysteni of the former has the tyi'ieiil position, between the oral sucker
and the pharynx. From its ujtptr portion tliero is given oU'dorsally
on either side a nerve for the oral sucker, and a nerve which j>asecs

GIO RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

backward ; from the lower surface a delicate nerve goes to tlie ventral
surface of the oral sucker, while there are also two ventral longitudinal
nerves which, soon after their origin, give off a branch which takes
a dorsal direction. Very similar arrangements are to be found in
J), hepaticum, the results of his observations on which, by means of
sections, the author carefully describes.

In conclusion, the author states that, with regard to the large cells,
principally found in the suckers of these creatures, he is not able to
afiirm that they have any connection with the nerve-fibres which are
distributed to the same parts. But he is of opinion that they are
homologous with the cells of similar character in Tristomum, and he
thinks that they should be regarded as ganglionic cells.

New Turbellarian.* — Dr. Arnold Lang describes a new parasitic
Ehabdocoele Turbellarian, but without giving it any name ; it seems,
however, to be closely allied to Graffilla muricicola ; it is found in
numbers on the foot of Tetliys, but hardly appears to reside there
jiermancntly. Spindle-shaped when extended, and whitish in colour,
they are almost completely dense ; little even can be made out when
they are compressed. The epithelium of the integument is ciliated,
and the cells are polygonal ; no sagittocysts are developed, but here
and there there are pores for the tegumentary glands; below the
integument there is a rudimentary muscular layer, which is so feebly
developed that it can only be detected in very thin sections ; in this
region there are a large number of unicellular pyriform glands, which
are specially developed in the anterior region of the ventral surface.
The pharynx, and its musculature, are very feebly developed, and the
former appears to be devoid of a sheath. The intestine, which is
aproctous, forms the greater part of the animal ; its lumen varies in
width owing to the development of inwardly projecting processes, and
its walls are formed by very long tubular cells, distinctly separated from
one another, and, as it seems, inserted directly into the integument.
No peripheral nerves, special sensory organs, or water-vessels were
detected. The female organs were well developed, but in no specimen
was the author able to find the male glands in anything but a rudi-
mentary condition.

New Nemerteans.l — Dr. Hubrecht, in a first appendix to a paper
already noticed, :j: points out that among the Palteonemertini we-
may either find the system of resj)iratory furrows represented by a
number of small grooves (Polia), or there may be only a simple trans-
verse furrow {Ceplialotrix), or no furrow at all. He then describes a
new species, Carinella inexpectata, which seems to be intermediate
between the two forms with simple or compound grooves ; for here we
have to do with a transverse groove, provided with a set of small
secondary grooves, very much as in Polia ; from which, however, it
differs, and agrees with the simpler forms in having no third pair of
lobes to its cephalic ganglion. The other new species described
belongs to the genus Cerebratulus, and is dedicated to Dr. Eisig, of

* 'Mitth. Zool. Stat. Ncapel,' ii. (1880) p. 107.

t ' Notes R. Zool. Mus. Netherlands,' ii. (1880) p. 93. J Ante, p. 438.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 611

Naples, to whom tlie author owes so much. Tho spccimeu on which
the description was founded was sent to him alive from Naples ; it is
distinguished by the presence of longitudinal stripes on its proboscis,
and by its dark olive-green colour.

Ech,inoderm.ata.

New Genus of Echinoidea.*— Under the name of Palceolampas,
Professor Jeffrey I5ell describes an irregular Echinoid allied to
Conoclypeus and Echinolampas, but distinguished from them by the
possession of certain more archaic characters ; tlie pores of the ambu-
lacral arese are arranged in pairs as far as the ambitus of the test,
while the outer row of each pair extends regularly to the actinostome.
The pores of each pair are not yet connected with one another by
grooves ; those of the inner rows are still fairly circular, but many of
those in the outer rows are slit-like or comma-shaped, and indicate
the commencement of the formation of the groove connecting the pairs
of pores. Two of the ocular plates are interesting on account of
their still retaining indications of their primitively double nature.
The whole test is regularly covered with primary tubercles, and
there are no bare bands even near the mouth, at which, also, the
bourrelets are but feebly developed. The generalized, or feebly
differentiated, characters of the form arc curiously enough spoken to
by the fact that nearly all naturalists who examined it hastily thought
that they had seen it before ; one, how^ever, thought he had a specimen
belonging at any rate to the same genus ; it was only some time
after the reading of his paper that Professor Bell was enabled to see
the specimen in question ; of this he has since given a sliort account
to the Zoological Society, and we are enabled to say that he tinds
himself compelled to regard it as an immature specimen of the more
highly specialized genus, Echinolampas. If this be the correct view,
it affoi'ds another example of the resemblance of the young forms of
differentiated species to the adult forms of less differentiated creatures,
and aids in compelling us to accept the aphorism : " The development
of the individual is a compressed epitome of the history of the
race."

Fossil Tertiary Echini, f — Dr. Martin has arrived at tlie very
interesting conclusion that a considerable percentage of these fossil
Echinids, from Java, are still represented in the Indian Ocean ; the
tertiary species were described by Herklots as new, and these deter-
minations the present writer now revises. The author gives a valu-
able table of the species found, and shows what arc still living, and
what are their allies, either extant or fossil. He arrives at the
important result that even in the tertiary period the tropical oceanic
fauna ajjpears to have been "quite as ilistinct as it is in the present
day, for they contain no fossils which have yet been found in extra-
tropical tertiary deposits. This, as a second table shows, is indicated
also by other groups of the Invcrtebrata ; but in none perhaps is it

• 'Proc. Zool. Roc.,' 1880, p. 4H.
+ ' Nolort R. Mils. Nothcilnn<l8.' ii ' lx>^Ol p ~:i
voT,. in. '2 r

642 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

more evident than with tlie Ecliiuoidea, 57 per cent, of wliicb are
identical in the present time and in tertiary deposits ; the Crustacea,
indeed, give a percentage of 67, but we know of only 9 fossil
species of this order, whereas 19 Echinoidea have been discovered.
6 Foraminifera, 1 Cephalopod, and 1 Brachiopod have been found
fossil, and none of these are identical with recent forms.

Remarkable Ophiurid.* — Herr v. Martens gives a description of
a new species, Opldotliela cUvidua, from Algoa Bay. The species was
six-rayed, but was remarkable for the fact that in the large number of
specimens examined, the arms of each individual were always unequal
in size, and that the longer arms all lay on one side of the disk ;
there might be three large and three small, or two large and four
small arms. It would appear, therefore, that the creature had under-
gone transverse division, and that the smaller arms were newly
formed. These specimens afford some support to the doctrine on
Avhich the author has j^reviously insisted : that when star-fishes have
more than five arms, it is, as a rule, in consequence of the animal
having budded them off after division or injury.

Mediterranean Echinoderms. f — In the present essay, Dr.
Hubert Ludwig gives a brief account of Antedon pTialangium, and
points out the differences between it and A. rosacea ; and of Astropecten
squamatus, of which he has been enabled to examine Miiller and
Troschel's type-sj)ecimen, and with which he associates Philippi's
A. aster. He then describes a new species of the Ophiurida, OpMoconis
hrevispina, of which genus as yet only two species were known. In
giving an account of Thyone aurantiaca he jioints out that the presence
of a male genital papilla appears to be very common among the Deu-
drochirotfe ; and he concludes wdth a notice of a Mediterranean species,
Holotliuria mammata, which was described by Grube in 1840, and
appears to have been never again observed.

Ccelenterata.

Intracellular Digestion in Coelenterata.J — Professor Metschnikoff
considers that this phenomenon, already demonstrated by Jeffrey
Parker in Hydra, must be regarded as the rule in most of the true
Coelenterates. It has now been observed in the Hydroids Plunmlaria,
Tubularia, the Hydromedusfe Eucope, Oceania, Tiara, as the intrusion
into the endoderm cells of solid alimentary particles ; also in Pelagia,
Praya, Forsluilia, Hippopodius, in the Ctenoj^horan Beroe, and in the
Actinians Sagarfia and Aiptasia ; it has not been noticed in the
Trachymedusse. In the Hydroidea and Oceanidfe almost the whole
endoderm has this property (in Eucope the genital organs, the wall of the
circular vessel, and the base of the tentacles were thus penetrated), but it
is usually limited to certain cylindrical thickenings; in the Siphono-
phora it is exerted only by the thickenings of the median division of
the stomach ; in Actinice the mesenteric filaments must now be

* ' SB. Ges. Natnrf. Freund. Berlin,' 1879, p. 127.
t 'Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel,' ii. (18S0) p. 53.
X ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 261.

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 643

regarded as digestive organs owing to the same ocenrrencc in
their ordinary entoderm cells, thus explaining Lewes and Kruken-
berg's observations of the complete absence of any free digestive
secretion ; on the other hand, the Hert wigs' interpretation of the
abundant gland-cells which abound here, must be rejected, and they
must be regarded instead as mucus- glands. The Coelenterate ento-
derm cells are ranked among the araceboid epithelia, taking in as they
do, their food by pseudopodia-like processes ; this is well seen in
Praya diphyea, whose cells are long and envelope food-particles in a
Plasmodium, formed of the fused pseudopodia ; a similar fusion of the
ends of the cells occurs in the Ctenophora and Adinice. In Cteno-
phora the food-particles pass into the wandering cells of the mesoderm,
as in sponges.

Considering that representatives of all the chief groups exhibit
this phenomenon, it would appear to be a primitive endowment of the
Ccelenterate type, and — the same being the case with the lowest worms,
the Turbellarians — also of the Metazoa in primitive times. As the
method does not demand a sjiecial digestive cavity, this last would
appear, where present, to be of secondary origin.

Probably some points in the development of Coelenterata, which
as yet appear at variance with the gastrsea-theory, may be explained
by these considerations.

Nervous System of Beroe.* — Dr. Eimer recajntulates the present
condition of our knowledge of the nervous arrangements in the
Coelenterata. He points out that in an earlier work he had
insisted on the fact that the nervous system of Beroe ovatus was
not distinctly localized, but was represented by a number of nerve-
cells which were distributed over the whole surface of the body, and
were numerous only in the region of the anal pole ; no true nerve-
cords, such as are seen in the higher animals, are to be found in this
Ctenophore. Very similar results have been shown among the Meduste ;
here there is a lamellar central nervous system distributed over the
body, and attaining its greatest development in the Craspedota in the
region of the margin of the umbrella (Cycloneura), and in the Acras-
pedota in the region of the marginal bodies (Toponeura). In both
these groups the nervous elements may be frequently connected with
the epithelium. In these, just as much as in Beroe, it is difficult to
distinguish the nerve-cells as morphological elements, but this is, of
course, in complete agreement with the a priori consideration that
characteristic tissues are no more suddenly developed than are distinct
fimctions. Pliysiological experiments on the Medusa? have confirmed
these views : it now remains to apply the same test to Beroe.

Experiment A. — Specimens were so operated on as to divide them
into three equal parts, representing rcspcctivuly the anal polo, the
oral pole, and the median portion of the body ; wlicn this was done
it was foinid that all the ctcnophores ceasod their activity; after a
sliort time, however, this again reapi)eared in the parts connected
with the anal pole ; after four hours nearly all the parts wore in

* ' Ar.-l,. Mikr. Annt..' xvii. (Is7!)) p. 2VX

2 r 2

644 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

movement. On this, small pieces were cut off from different parts of
the body ; at first without movement, in two hours after they were
quite active. In the second area, exhibitions of movement were very
common. In the third, all the parts and pieces were quite active.
In the median portion the ctenophores of one row exhibited a contrary
direction to the rest. These experiments conclusively demonstrate
that parts disconnected from the anal area are capable of independent
movement.

Experiment B. — A row of ctenophoral plates was separated by
incision, and a division transverse to its long axis at a distance of
about 2 centimetres from the anal pole was made ; for a moment the
movements of all the ctenophores ceased ; then the uninjured plates
began to move, then the distal portion, and last of all the proximal
(oral) portion of the injured plate exhibited activity. In the last
two the movements were independent of one another. These experi-
ments throw into marked relief the extraordinary capacity which the
different parts of the injured Beroe have of performing separate move-
ments, just as though they were distinct animals.

The author further found that the movement of the injured animals
was in the same direction as that of the uninjured, and that the same
power of direction was possessed by them after and before the experi-
ment.

Looked at generally, tliese remarkable observations afford con-
clusive support to the doctrine that the " central region " at the apical
pole is not really the centre of the nervous energy of the animal,
while they show that nerve-cells are at any rate scattered over the
whole of the body, however more numerous they may be in one region,
and, moreover, these nerve-cells may be functional centres for any given
part of the body. The facts here detailed are completely paralleled
by the results already obtained from the study of the Medusfe, and we
may safely assert that " a distinctly localized central nervous system is
not present inBeroe; its central cells are distributed over the whole body
and are only more closely aggregated in the region of the anal pole."

Pleurobrachia pileus.* — In a few notes on this animal, no
specimen of which was found in a sexually mature condition, Herr
Hartmann points out the presence on t^vo lobes of two roimd, red,
granular pigment-spots ; these, which it is possible were rudimentary
eyes, are not to be confounded with the ctenocyst, or auditory vesicle.
The oesophagus-like portion of the digestive canal was connected with
the stomach and the funnel by an orifice surrounded by a circular
projection, and provided with circular and longitudinal muscles. At
the oral pole he detected ganglia which gave off nerve-filaments to the
ctenophoral plates, and to the parenchyma of the body, and which
were further connected with one another by transverse commissures.
The branches of the tentacles were beset with a number of rounded
tubercles, between which there was diffused, in the primary portions
of the tentacle, a reddish pigment ; these tubercles were provided
with a number of urticating capsules.

* 'SB. Gcs. niiturf. Fromi.l. B.rlin,' 1S79, p. 25.

INVERTEBKATA, CEYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 645

Anatomy and Histology of the Actiniae.* — In continuation of
our account of tlie paper of the brothers Hertv\'ig,| we direct attention
to their history of Cerianthus, Edicardsia, and Zoanthus, which is not
so elaborate as the preceding portion.

With regard to Cerianthus, the most important observations are
those which deal with the layer of muscles subjacent to the nervous
system. Forming bnt a thin layer in the tentacles, they form a more
considerable stratum in the oral disk, and here each muscular band
has, as a sujiporting lamella, a thin homogeneous layer, which presents
a free edge towards the nervous layer, and is, as compared with the
same part in the Actinice, much better developed. In the tentacles
the elements of the muscular layer are isolated. The middle layer of
the body is distinguished by the simplicity of its characters, and the
complete absence of si)ecial connective-tissue cells. The endodcrm,
also, presents points of diiierence, for its cells are not, as in the
Actinice, provided with a single flagellum, but with a tuft of delicate
cilia. Parasitic cells are here completely absent. The a-sophagus
is, as compared with that of the Actinice, extremely short ; there is
only one oesophageal groove, and we are therefore enabled to distinguish
a ventral and a dorsal aspect ; when, however, we inquire which is
the dorsal and which is tlie ventral, we find that our authors are in
opposition to Haacke,"): and that they regard the side on which the
groove is developed as being the ventral one. In the walls of this
oesophagus there is developed a special muscular lamella. The septa
of Cerianthus are only feebly ditferentiated from one another, and this
simjjlicity in character extends even to their histological details. After
pointing out the leading characters by which they are here dis-
tinguished from the Actinice, the writers proceed to an account of the
generative organs ; these are very numerous, as they are developed
on every septum, at the point at which that process ceases to be
invested by the oesophagus ; bath ova and spermatozoa may be found
to be enclosed in a capsule of connective tissue, and the testicular
follicles are not only set between each of the ovarian but are also
found to be aggregated into special bands.

The most interesting characters in Edicardsia affect the important
question of the morphology of the septa ; in these creatures there are,
as Quatrefuges showed, only eight septa ; these are all inserted into
the Oisophagus, and they are all extremely muscular ; they aro
arranged in an exactly symmetrical relation to the two oesophageal
grooves. Contrary to what obtains in all allied forms, the tentacles
aro not numerically similar to the septa ; in other words there aro
more than eight, and the number present is not even always a
multiple of that number.

Passing from these details to a general part, the authors eommenoo
with a chapter on the classiticatiou of the Ctelenterata ; to make this
cofuplete they aro compelled, after dealing with the systematic rela-
tions of the forms already described, to enter upon the relations of
these to tlie other Anthozoa, and to an account of the generative

♦ 'Jen. Zcitsilir. Nutiirwu^s..' xiii. (1S80) p. SfW. t -^ntc, pp. ^.')l-l:.7.

X Sec this Journal, ii. (.1879) p. 8'J2.

646 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

organs of the Cliarabydoicla, Discopliora, and Calycozoa ; into these
details we cannot enter, but we give a brief resume of their general
conclusions. Putting aside the very distinct group of sponges, it is
possible to divide the rest of the Ccelenterata into two great gi'oups ;
(1) Ectocarpa, (2) Entocarpa ; ia the latter are all the Anthozoa and
Acraspedota (with also the Charabydeida and Lucernarida), and in the
other the Hydromedusse (including the Siphonophora) and the Cteno-
phora. The most important difference between these two groups lies
in the fact that in the former the generative organs are derived from
the ectoderm, and in the latter from the endoderm ; in one, therefore,
the organs are exposed, and in the latter they are placed in j)rocesses of
the gastro-vascular system. Other minor differences remain to be noted ;
in all the Entocarpa the matured generative products lie separately in
the mesoderm ; in the Anthozoa they are invested by fibrous connective
tissue, and in the Acraspeda by gelatinous capsules. This is not the
case with the Ectocarpa. Nor, again, is the mode of emission similar
in the two divisions ; in the Entocarpa the products pass into the gastro-
vascular system, while in the Ectocarpa, with the possible exception
of the Ctenophora, they pass directly into the water. The two
groups may be thus conveniently and succinctly defined : —

The Entocarpa are Ccelenterata, in which the generative cells are
developed in the endoderm, and pass when mature into the mesoderm ;
they are provided with a special secreting apparatus (the mesenterial
filaments).

The Ectocarpa are Ccelenterata, in which the generative cells are
developed in the ectoderm, where they remain ; they do not possess
any mesenterial filaments.

Other differences may be noted between these groups, but passing
to their common origin, it may be noted that the original ancestor
was doubtless very similar to Hydra, though somewhat more gene-
ralized in character, and with a much less marked differentiation
of ectoderm and endoderm. The generative products had no defined
seat of origin ; when this began to obtain two distinct phyla were
initiated ; one led by the Hydroid Polyps to the Ctenophora, the
other to the Scyphistoma-creatures, in which the generative organs had
an endodermal origin, and in which the gastric cavity was interrupted
by four longitudinal septa ; this division broke up into the Anthozoa
and the Acraspeda.

Some few points as to the histological details of the AdinicB
remain to be summed up : —

(1) The organs are chiefly developed from the ectoderm.

(2) There is a striking similarity between the histological elements
of the ectoderm and endoderm.

(3) The neuro-muscular system is made up of three sets of cells,
muscular, sensory, and ganglionic, and these are connected into one
system by nerve-fibrils.

(4) The muscular fibres seem to have been primitively arranged
in lamellfe. They grew inwards, and became separated into bundles
by the investing connective tissue.

(5) Where no special optic organb arc developed, some, at any

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 647

rate, of the sensory cells of the ectoderm must be sensitive to luminous
imj)ressious.

In conclusion, attention is directed to the bearing of the facts
detailed on the germ-lajer theory. The authors give a sketch of the
change in thought which has had for its effect to give a general mean-
ing to the words ectoderm, endoderm, and mesoderm ; but this change
has hardly been completely accurate. Let us take as an example the
term mesoderm. The students of the embryology of the higher
animals apply the word to a layer of embryonic cells ; and they show
that these cells become converted into definite tissues and organs.
On the other hand, in the Coelenterata, the word is applied to a
definite layer of tissue, which is developed between the inner and
outer epithelial layers. The matter may be best put thus : In
the lowest divisions of the Metazoa there are only two layers, the
ectoblast and endoblast ; in the higher there is a third embryonic
layer, the mesoblast. These three terms should be confined to the
layers of the embryo, and should only be regarded as exhibiting topo-
graphical relations. The terms endoderm, &c., should be thus used :
By endoderm and ectoderm we mean the outer and inner layers of
the developed body, which have been developed from the ectoblast
and endoblast of the germ, and have retained their jirimitive position ;
the term mesoderm is applied to the sum of all the tissues and organs
which are interpolated between the bounding layers, and these may
be cither dcrivates of a special mesoblast, or have taken their origin
directly from one of the two primary germ-layers. With these defini-
tions we can formulate the two following laws : —

(1) As an animal increases in complexity of organization the size
and complexity of the mesoderm increase, while the ectoderm and
endoderm become more simple. In the Ccclenterata the ectoderm
and endoderm fulfil the most varied functions of the animal, but in
the rest these functions are taken on by the mesc derm.

(2) All the organs which in the higher orders are mesodermal,
belong in the lower animals (with the exception of the vascular system,
&c. — direct dcrivates of the mesoderm) to the two primitive cell-
layers.

The facts detailed in this paper would, even if unsupported by
other similar facts, be suiTicicnt to demonstrate that, when we examine
the question of the homology of the layers within the difiercnt
divisions of the animal kingdom, we find that the germ-layers
undergo different kinds of differentiation. This docs not affect
the general homology of the layers ; how docs it bear on the <|uestion
whether the twu layers have always the same relations to the tissues
derived from them ? After a review uf a number of tlie facts which
bear on the question, the autliors come to the conclusion that the
germ-layers are neither organ(dogical nor liistological unities. Wo
cannot argue from what we know of the develoiunent of an organ
in one pliylum as to its history in another.* The steni-form — the
gastriea — must not bo regarded as orgauologically and histologically
indifferent ; its descendants may have had tlieir tissues and organs
* Compare witli this M. FolV views, mitr^ p. (iO").

618 IvECOKL) OF CUIiKENT RESEAKCUES KELATJNG TO

diflferciitiated in various ways ; just as individual cells vary iu their
characters, so too may the germ-layers give rise iu various ways to
the tissues and organs. The work now to be done is to define for
each class of animals (1) how the primary layers of ectoblast and
endoblast are converted into the definite layers and organs ; and
(2) how the cells are histologically differentiated in the separate
layers.

Structure of some Coralliaria.* — Among the Coralliaria the
Actinioi have been the best studied. The almost total deficiency
of facts concerning the microscopical structure of the other groujDS
decided M. C. Merejkowsky to undertake a special study of some
species common in the Bay of Naples. The following are his
results.

The ectoderm is shown to consist of the following elements : —
1. Ordinary ectodermic cells of very elongated form, excessively
depressed and dilated at the upper extremity which is invariably
furnished with only a single cilium. 2. Cells like the last but trans-
formed at their base into an excessively long and slender filament,
sometimes provided with several inflations which may be called the
nervous Jilaments. 3. Epithelio-muscular elements composed of cells
like the first (but shorter and broader), united at their base to
musculai- fibrillas. 4. Nematocysts of two kinds, the larger ones often
surrounded by protoplasm with a nucleus and a long filament (nervous)
in the posterior part, the smaller ones of a different form and always
furnished with a long posterior filament ; the filament bears at j^laces
small knots. 5. Glandular cells always pyriform and with coarsely
granular contents.

The mesoderm is an elastic and structureless membrane, varying
in thickness iu the different parts of the body. It forms longitudinal
protuberances upon the faces of two mesembryenthal septa which
unite at the surface of the stomach. The muscles which spread in a
single layer over it are longitudinal in the interior of the animal and
disposed in horizontal rings on the exterior. They are either long,
slightly flattened filaments, the relations of which to the other histo-
logical elements it is not easy to ascertain, or they are fibrillfe form-
ing a part of the ej)ithelio-muscular elements.

Another very citrious element consists of cells of comparatively
large size, and excessively flattened, which ramify greatly and unite
with each other by their ramifications, and are filled with granular
contents, with nucleus and nucleolus. They are arranged in a layer
and rest immediately upon the outer surface of the elastic membrane.
From their form, habit, and position, the author has no doubt but
that they are nervous ganglia in which the numerous fibrillse of the
different ectodermic cells terminate.

The entoderm is composed almost exclusively of very typical
epithelio-muscular cells. The epithelial cell is not so strongly
elongated as in the ectoderm, but Avith the base much dilated, and
with a single cilium at the extremity. The muscular fibril is very

* ' Comi'tcs Eeudus/ xc. (1880) p. 1086.

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 649

refractive, fusiform, and nearly tlircc times as long as the coll itself.
Glandular cells not essentially diftering from those above described
are also met with.

Mesembryenthal Filaments. — ^The surface of the stomach is not
smooth, but covered with longitudinal elevations, very rich in
glandular cells, each of which corresponds to the place where a
septum unites with the stomach. At the extremity of the stomach
the protuberances form the free edges of the mesembryenthal septa ;
there is therefore an unbroken continuity of these longitudinal pro-
tuberances at the surface of the stomach with the mesembryenthal
filaments, and this fact explains the complete unity in the structure
of these two organs and shows that they can only act as an organ of
digestion. The filaments are solid, and have no interior cavity.
There is no canal passing through the septa and uniting the chambers
formed by them.

Antipatharia of the ' Blake ' Expedition.* — Twelve species of
this interesting group taken in the Caribbean Sea (1878-79) are
described by L. F. Pourtalcs. In determining the species an attempt
has been made to use the diftcrences in the shaj)e of the polyps, as
well as the disposition and form of the sjjines, to draw characters for
a much-needed revision of their classification. It would seem as if
there were at least two difterent types of spines ; the triangular com-
pressed and the more cylindrical. These latter are generally more
densely set, even assuming sometimes a brush-like appearance, as in
Antipathes humilis, a new and wonderfully spinous species, figured but
not described. These cylindrical spines are also unequal on the two
sides of the pinnules, being longer on the side occupied by the polyps,
with a few very mucli longer around the polyi^s. In one species, how-
ever, A. Dcshonni, the spines are in regular verticils. There would appear
to be a connection between the shape of the polyps and the shape and
dis2>osition of the spines. Those si)ecies with triangular spines have
polyps with longer tentacles than those with cylindrical spines, and
the tentacles have a greater tendency to become regular in shape. In
many sjiecies the tentacles are simply contracted ; in a very few they
were found retracted, as figured by Lacaze-Dutliiers ; and in somo
they arc probably not retractile at all.

Eight out of the twelve named are cither desci'ibed or figured as
new species. A. spiralis is a very interesting si)ccies, formerly
referred to A. Dcshuiini D. and M. The polyps are alternately largo
and small, with very large digitiform tentacles much longer than have
been figured of any Antipdlhes before. In the spaces between
successive polyps the ccenosarc shows transverse canals, and those ou
the back part of the branch are more transparent than the rest.

American Siphonophora.f — Mr. J. W. Fewkcs gives a sketch of
the developuuiit of the tentacular knob of Phijsophora hifdrcslafica.
Tho growth of this knob is here more complicated tlian in any

» 'IJull. 'Slws. Comp. Zof.l. Camb.,' vi. (1880) p. US. Sec 'Nature,' xxii.
(1880) p. IKl

t Il'i.l.. p. 127. Stc 'Nuluro.' xxii. (1880) p. 11:5.

650 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

other Siplionophoro ; commencing as a bud on the ciliated base of the
feeding polyp, it is at first only composed of an ectoderm and cndo-
derm. The ectodermic wall divides into two layers and gives rise
to the involucrum ; within this the sacciilns becomes coiled np, and
shortly appears as a complicated organ armed with lasso-cells ; mean-
while the basal jjortion becomes so enlarged as to give an asymmetrical
form to the whole knob. As the fully grown stage is reached, this
enlargement forms a simjile tube along the side of the knob, and tho
complete condition is arrived at. It is interesting to note that in some
allied genera we find arrangements of the parts of the knob which
are only temjjorary in the species under description.

The mantle-tubes of Apolemia uvaria and Gleha h'ppopus are also
described, and the tubes in the larger necto-calyx of Abyla pentagona ;
he adds some critical remarks on the genera Halistemma, Agalma, and
Agalmopsis, and concludes with a notice of the forms of Siphonophora
and VelellidiB to be met with on the eastern coast of the United
States.

Up to the present few forms of either of these groups have been
described from American waters. They seem to be only occasional
visitors blown into the neighbourhood from mid-ocean, and brought
there from the tropics by the Gulf Stream. The wealth of such
species that one meets with in the Mediterranean is unknown on the
New England coast; while, as the author says, in one day at Nice he
has taken eight different genera of Siphonophora, yet at Newport he
has but rarely taken as many as two genera in the length of a
summer's day, and a whole summer once passed, during most of which
he was almost daily on the water without one species being seen.
One or two species of Phijsalia are, however, more common on the
United States coasts than in the Mediterranean.

The only member of the long-stemmed Siphonophora provided
with a float or air-bladder found heretofore on the New England
waters is Agalmopsis cara. Mr. Fewkes can now add A. elegans, and
he thinks that extended observation in the southern bays of the
country will bring to light some of the well-known forms common to
all oceans, such as Apolemia, Ahyla, Phijsophora, and Gleha. Some of
these have already been taken in the Gulf of Mexico and the
Caribbean Sea. Bhizophysa, found in the same localities, might also
be expected to be brought to Eastern American coasts by oceanic
currents.

Origin and Development of the Ovum in Eucope before Fecunda-
tion.*— This subject has been studied by C. Merejkowsky, who gives
the following as the results of his researches. The ovaries of the
Medusa, in the interior of the bell, have the appearance of four small
sacs, due to an evagination of the gastro-vascular cavity. In the
walls of the ovaries, from without inwards we find a layer of
ectodermic cells, the limits of which are not well defined, and the
entoderm composed of several layers of better defined cells. Tho
innermost layer of the entoderm, that which covers the inner surfiice

* ' Comptes Remliit^,' xc. (1880) p. 1012.

INVEBTEBRITA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 651

of the ovtiiy, is composed of the same cells (furnished with a vibratilc
cilium) as the eutoclerm of the radial canals.

Towards the base of the ovary, where it becomes confounded with
the lower surface of the bell, the entodermic layer is as yet only
formed of a single stratum, as in the radial canal ; but in proportion
as we advance towards the interior of the ovary we see the entodermic
cells divide in a direction perpendicular to their length, and thus form
two superposed layers of entoderm ; the division of the cells continuing
in all directions, we thus hud the entoderm grow thicker and thicker.

Between these two lamellaB of entoderm and ectoderm forming the
ovary, is a third more delicate, structureless lamella — the intermediate
lamella — sharply separating them and assisting us to define with
certainty which layer produces the ova. These ova are always found
under the intermediate lamella, and being thus separated from the
ectoderm by that lamella can only be developed from the entoderm.
This is further borne out by observing directly all the graduated
transitions between the ordinary entodermic cells of the young ova.
The changes in an entodermic cell destined to be developed into an
ovum consist in the increase of the vohime of this cell and the trans-
formation of the nucleus into a germinal spot.

In the entodermic cells lining the radial canals the protoplasm is
perfectly transparent and devoid of granules ; the nucleus appears as a
clear round spot containing a central round and denser nucleolus.
The cells with their nuclei and nucleoli subsequently increase in size,
and the protoplasm becomes more and more granular. The nucleolus,
at first simple and furnished with a small vacuole, commences to
divide. It lengthens, becomes constricted in the middle, curves into
the form of a horse-shoe, and finally divides into two parts, each
possessing a central vacuole ; each half again divides into two parts,
but in a direction perpendicular to the first, and so on.

These phenomena, constant and normal in the Medusfe of the
White Sea, are the exception in those from the Bay of Naples. In
the latter the division of the nucleus takes place in a different
manner. AV^hen the nucleolus, after elongation, presents a median
constriction, it does not divide into two parts, but simi)ly elongates in
the form of a band twisted upon itself; constrictions then foi-ming at
several parts, it becomes a long moniliform ribbon rolled up in
several turns. Each division of the chaplet is fusiform and round ;
it regularly contains in the middle a very small vacuole, and is
united to tlio neighbouring divisions by a thin and sometimes rather
long articulation. Sometimes tliis band, which reminds us of tlio
nucleus of some of the Infusoria (Sicnior, Sjnrosttimnm), splits into two.
Finally the articulations of the chaplet separate, and instead of a
nucleolus, there is formed at the centre of the nucleus a group of
several dozens of small round balls which collect into a si)hero placed
at simic distance from the walls of tlie nucleus. These balls continue
to divide until they reach several hundreds in number. During all
this time the ovum enlarges and attains its definitive diameter, which
surpasses nearly twenty times that of tho entodermic cells from wliicli
it originates.

652 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The perfectly mature ovum before fecundation presents the aspect
of a sphere of granular protoplasm with a central and perfectly
uniform nucleus showing not the slightest trace of a nucleolus. The
hundreds of granules into which the nucleolus has been divided have
been dissolved in the protoplasm of the nucleus.

Proportion of Water in the Medusae.* — Dr. Ki-ukenberg has
already shown that a large specimen of Hldzostoma Cuvieri contained
95* 392 per cent, of water, with 1 • 608 of organic and 3 • 0 of inorganic
substances. In order to test the statement of Mobius that Aurelia
aurita from the Bay of Kiel had been found on analysis to contain
99*82 per cent, of water— a proportion leaving the solid materials at
only Jg- of the amount determined in a Triest specimen — a single
specimen of the same species was analyzed, and also two other Aurelice
together. The result showed the solid matters to exist in the pro-
portion of from 4 '21 to 4' 66 jier cent., the water in that of from
95 '34 to 95*79. Chrysaora hyoscella gives between 95*75 and
96*3 per cent, of water, and from 3*7 to 4*25 of solid bodies. Pro-
bably most other Medusae agree with those selected in these points,
so that no marine animal exists having the large proportion of 99*8
per cent, of water as a constituent of its tissues.

A Fresh-water Hydroid Medusa. — One of the most startling
zoological discoveries of recent years was made in June last in the
warm-water tank in which the Victoria regia is grown at the gardens
of the Eoyal Botanical Society, London. The water (which has a
temperature of 85° to 90° F.) was found by Mr. Sowerby to be
literally swarming with little Medusfe of a new genus, about ^ inch
in transverse diameter. No true fresh-water Medusa has hitherto
been known, the one living in the discharging canal of the Cette
salt-works t being the most recent case of the discovery of a species
not actually inhabiting the sea.

The Medusae were examined by Professor Allman, and subsequently
by Professor Lankester, and were described by the former under the
name of Limyiocodium victoria (Xifivrj, a pond, and kojSwj/, a bell) in a
paper read at the meeting of the Linnean Society on Jime 17, and by
the latter as Craspedacustes Sowerhii (in allusion to the relation of its
otocysts to its velum) at the Eoyal Society on the same day.

From Professor Allman's paper J we extract the following : —

The Medusae are very energetic in their movements, swimming
with the characteristic systole and diastole of their umbrella, and in
the warm-water tank were apparently in the very conditions which
contributed most completely to their well-being.

The umhreUa varies much in form with its state of contraction,
passing from a somewhat conical shape with depressed summit through
figiu-es more or less hemispherical to that of a shallow cup or even of
a nearly flat disk. Its outer surface is covered by an epithelium
composed of flattened hexagonal cells with distinct and brilliant
nucleus.

* ' Zool. Auzcig.,' iii. (1880) p. 306. t See tliis Journal, ii. (1879) p. 582.

j 'Nature; xxi.(li-80) p. 178.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 653

The manubrium is large ; it commences with a quadrate base, and
when extended projects beyond tlie margin of the umbrella. The
mouth is destitute of tentacles, but is divided into four lips, which
are everted and plicated. The endoderm of the manubrium is thrown
into four strongly-marked longitudinal plicated ridges.

The radial canals are four in niunber ; they originate each in an
angle of the quadrate base of the manubrium, and open distally into
a wide cii'cular canal. Each radial canal is accompanied by longi-
tudinal muscular fibres, which spread out on each side at the junction
of the radial with the circular canal.

The velum is of moderate width, and the extreme margin of the
umbrella is thickened and festooned, and loaded with brownish-yellow
pigment-cells.

The attachment of the tentacles is peculiar. Instead of being free
contrnuations of the umbrella margin, they are given off from the
outer surface of the umbrella at points a little above the margin.
From each of these points, however, a ridge may be traced centri-
fugally as far as the thickened umbrella margin ; this is caused by
the proximate portion of the tentacle being here adnate to the outer
surface of the umbrella. It holds exactly the position of the " Man-
telspangen " or peronia, so well developed in the whole of the
NarcomedusaB of Haeckel, and occurring also in some genera of his
Trachomedusae. Its structure, however, diifers from that of the true
peronia, which are merely lines of thread-cells marking the path
travelled over by the tentacle, as the insertion of this moved in the
course of metamorphosis from the margin of the umbrella to a point
at some distance above it, while in Limnocodium the ridges are direct
continuations of the tentacles wliose structure they retain. They
become uaiTower as they approach the margin. The number of the
tentacles is very large in adult specimens. The four tentacles which
correspond to the directions of the four radial canals or the perradial
tentacles are the longest and thickest. The quadrant which intervenes
between every two of these carries, at nearly the same height above
the margin, about thirteen shorter and thinner tentacles, while
between every two of these three to five much smaller tentacles are
given ofi" from points nearer to the margin, and at two or three levels,
but without any absolute regularity ; indeed, in the older examples
all regularity, except in the primary or perradial tentacles, seems
lost, and the law of their sequence ceases to be apparent.

No indication of a cavity could bo found in the tentacles ; but
they do not present the peculiar cylindrical chorda-like endodcrmal
axis formed by a series of large, clear, thick-wallod cells which is so
characteristic of the solid tentacles in the Trachomedusrc and Narco-
mcdusa). From tlie solid tentacles of these orders they ditfer also
in their great extensibility, the four perradial tentacles admitting of
extension in the form of long, greatly attenuated filaments to many
times the height of tlie vertical axis of the umbrella, even when this
height is at its maxiumm ; and being again cajjablo of assuming by
contraction the form of short thick clubs. Indeed, instead of pre-
r,((nting the Cdiuparatively rigid ami imperfectly contractih; character

654 KECOIID OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which prevails among the Traehomedusa? and the Narcomcdusae, they
possess as great a power of extension and contraction as may be found
in the tentacles of many Leptomeduste (Thanmantidas, &c.). These
four perradiate tentacles contract independently of the others, and
seem to form a different system. All the tentacles are armed along
their length with minute thread-cells, which are set in close, somewhat
spirally arranged, warts.

The lithocysfs or marginal vesicles are, in adult specimens, about
128 in number. They are situated near the umbrellar margin of the
velum, between the bases of the tentacles, and are grouped somewhat
irregularly, so that their number has no close relation with that of
the tentacles. They consist of a highly refringent spherical body,
on which may be usually seen one or more small nucleus-like cor-
puscles, the whole surrounded by a delicate transparent and structure-
less capsule. This capsule is very remarkable, for instead of pre-
senting the usual spherical form, it is of an elongated pyriform shape.
In its larger end is lodged the spherical refringent body, and it thence
becomes attenuated, forming a long tubular tail-like extension which
is continued into the velum, in which it rims transversely towards its
free margin, and there, after usually becoming more or less convo-
luted, terminates in a blind extremity.

The marginal nerve-ring can be traced running round the whole
margin of the umbrella, and in close relation with the otolitic cells.
Ocelli are not present.

The generative sacs are borne on the radiating canals, into which
they open at a short distance beyond the exit of these from the base
of the manubrium. They are of an oval form, and from their point
of attachment to the radial canal hang down free into the cavity of
the umbrella. Some of the specimens examined contained nearly
mature ova, which, under compression, were forced from the sac
through the radial canal into the cavity of the stomach.

While some of the characters described above point to an affinity
with both the Trachomedusfe and Narcomedusfe, this affinity ceases
to show itself in the very important morphological element afforded
by the marginal bodies. In both Trichomedusfe and Narcomedusse
the marginal bodies belong to the tentacular system ; they are meta-
morphosed tentacles, and their otolite cells are endoderraal, while in
the Lcptomedusfe, the only other order of craspedotal Medusae in
which marginal vesicles occur, these bodies are genetically derived
from the velum. Now in Limnocodium the marginal vesicles seem to
be as truly velar as in the Leptomedusae. They occur on the lower
or abumbral side of the velum, close to its insertion into the umbrella,
and the tubular extension of their capsule runs along this side to the
free margin of the velum, while the delicate epithelium of the abum-
bral side passes over them as in the Leptomedusa3. It is true that
this point cannot be regarded as settled until an opportunity of
tracing the development is afforded ; but in very young specimens
which Professor Allman examined he found nothing opposed to the
view that the marginal vesicles were derived, like those of the
Lcptomedusa", from the velum.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 655

If tliis be the case, Limnocodium will hold a position iutermetliate
between the Leptomeclusce and the TrachomedusEe ; but as the greatest
systematic importance must be attached to the structure and origin
of the marginal vesicles, ils affinity with the Leptomedusa3 must,
Professor Allman considers, be regarded as the closer of the two.

Professor Lankester * considers that the animal is one of the sub-
class Hydromedusas or Medusfe craspedotae, and presents the common
characters of the order Trachomedusfe (as distinguished from the
Narcomedusas) in having its genital sacs or gonads placed in the
course of the radial canals. It agrees with all Tracholina2 (Tracho-
medusai and Narcomedusa)) in having endodermal otocysts, and it
further exhibits the solid tentacles with cartilaginoid axis, the centri-
petal travelling of the tentacles, the tentacle rivets (Mantelspangen),
the thickened marginal ring to the disk (Nessel ring) observed in
many Tracholinre.

Amongst Trachomcdusae, it finds its place in the Petasida), which
are characterized as " Trachomedusfe with four radial canals, in the
course of which the four gonads lie, with a long tubular stomach and
no stomach-stalk."

Amongst Petasidaa it is remarkable for the great number of its
tentacles, which are all solid ; and for its very numeroiis otocysts.
Further, it is remarkable among all Hydromedusfe (velato Medusas,
that is, exclusive of Charyhtlcea) for the fact that centrifugal radiating
canals pass from the otocysts into the velum, where they end ccecally."

The characters of the genus are given, and it is pointed out that
the presence of velar otocystic canals constitutes the chief peculiarity
of the genus, and may necessitate the formation of a distinct family
or sub-order for its reception. The sole character which can be
given as specific over and above the generic characters is that of size.
The diameter of the disk does not exceed one-third of an inch.

It is exceedingly difficult to trace the introduction of the animal
into the tank in the Regent's Park, since no plants have been recently
(within twelve months) added to the lily-house, and the water is run
off every year. Probably a few specimens were last year or the year
before i)reseiit in the tank, and have only this year multiplied in
sufficient abundance to attract attention. Clearly this Medusa is a
tropical species, since it flourishes in water of the high tem])craturo
of DO^ Falir. Mr. Sowerby has observed it feeding on JJaphnia,
which abounds in the water with it.

Professor Lankester sul)sequeutly published t a fuH prelirainaiy
memoir of the animal, illustrated by woodcuts and jdatcs, in which ho
shows that, contrary to the conclusion of Professor Allman, the ten-
tacles of Limnocodium do resemble those of the Tnu-hyliuu IMedusa)
in their insertion and in the possession of true (tliough rudiniuiitury)
pcronia, also that the statement that the so-called litliocysts or
marginal bodies have essentially tlie saniu structure as those of
Tracliyline IMcdusai (being modified tentacles with an endodonnal
axis) is warranted by their develoinnental history. Consequently ho
adheres to the original determination of the affinities of the new
* L.K^'. fit., J.. U7. t ' <i"iiil. Joiini. Mi.T. Sci.,' xx. (ISSO) p. :r.|.

656 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Medusa as one of the Tracliomedusns, thougli it is quite a jieculiar
form, and very possibly is either the isolated representative of an
archaic type of that order or has degenerated in connection with its
exceptional life-conditions — those of fresh water.

Professor Lankester is fully satisfied that Limnocodium develops
directly from the egg. When specimens are kept living in a glass
jar under constant observation it is found that exceedingly small
specimens make their appearance amongst the larger ones. The
youngest which he has seen at present measured only -^^ inch in
diameter, and others were under observation very little larger.
The smallest was of a subspherical form, without any aperture to the
ectodermal investment. Four minute tentacles were sprouting near
one pole of the spherical body, and between these rudiments of four
others were seen. Within — the sub-umbrellar musculature was
already developed and contracting at intervals. The four radial
canals were also present, and, what is more remarkable, the sub-
umbrellar cavity was already well marked, and within it the manu-
brium with the oral aperture. Yet the margin of the umbrella was
still closed by a continuous ectodermal coat which, when perforated,
would become the velum.

These minute embryos correspond very closely in appearance
with the embryos of the well-known typical Trachomedusan Geryonia,
as figured by Metschnikoff.* They leave no possibility of supi)osing
that Limnocodium has, like most Leptomedusfe, a hydroid trophosome.
In respect of its development as in other respects, Limnocodium is not
more closely allied to the Leptomedusae than to the TrachomedusEe,
but is one of the Trachomedusge.

A remarkable fact which is not yet explained, is the excessive
rarity of females. All the specimens which Professor Lankester
examined have been males. Females clearly enough must be present,
or have been present among the shoals of males — wlicnce the embryos
discovered by Mr. Sowerby. It is a known fact among Trachyline
Medusae that in some species males are excessively abundant, and
even in some sj)ecies females have never been detected. Thus again
Limnocodium agrees with the Trachyline Medusae.

The exceedingly important fact that some of the Coelentera and
lower kinds of worms digest their solid food by the inception of the
solid food-particles into the substance of endodermal cells, each cell
behaving as an Amoeha, has now been fairly established by the observa-
tions of AUman on Myriotliela, Metschnikoff on Turbellarians, and
T. J. Parker on Hydra. Limnocodium exhibits this mode of digestion
in the most striking and obvious manner, the endodermal cells of the
stomach showing with a power of 800 their amceboid character, and
showing further the presence of such food-bodies as Protococci, dia-
toms, and Euglence in various stages of digestion within the proto-
plasm of single cells and of aggregated groups of such cells.

At the meeting on June 17 of the Linnean Society at which Pro-
fessor Allman's paper was read, it was suggested that a compromise
should be effected between the two names proposed, and that the
* ' Zeitsclir. f. wis?. Zoologio,' xxiv. pi. ii. fi.2;s. 12 and 15.

INVEUTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 657

Medusa should be called Lhnnocodium Sowerbii. Professor Luiikestcr
now writes * that he shall " henceforth speak of the Medusa as
Limnocodium Soiverbii, Allman and Lankester."

Physiology of the Fresh-water Medusa.t — Mr. G. J. Eomanes
has worked out the physiology of the new form, and gives an interest-
ing account of the results so far obtained.

The natural movements of the Medusa precisely resemble those of
its marine congeners. More particularly, these movements resemble
those of the marine sj)ecies which do not swim continuously, bat
indulge in frequent pauses. In water at the temperature of that in
the Victoria Lily-house the pauses are frequent, and the rate of the
rhythm irregular, suddenly quickening and slowing even during the
same bout, which has the effect of. giving an almost intelligent appear-
ance to the movements. This is especially the case with young
specimens. In colder water (65'' to '< 6°) the movements are more
regular and sustained, so that, guided by the analogy furnished by
experiments on the marine forms, he infers that the temperature of
the natural habitat of this Medusa cannot be so high as 8j°. In
water at that temj^erature the rate of the rhythm is enormously high,
sometimes rising to three pulsations per second. But by progressively
cooling the water, this rate may be progressively lowered, as in the
case of the marine species ; and in water at 65° the maximum rate
observed was eighty pulsations per minute. As the temperature at
which the greatest activity is displayed by the fresh-water species is
fatal to all the marine species which he has observed, the effects of
cooling are only parallel in the two cases when the effects of a series
of higher temperatures in the one case are compared with those of a
series of lower temperatures in the other. Similarly, while a
temperature of 70'^ is fatal to all the species of marine Medusfc, it is
only 100° that is fatal to the fresh-water species. Lastly, while the
marine species will endure any degree of cold without loss of life,
such is not the case with the fresh- water species. Marine Mcduste,
after having been frozen solid, will, when gradually thawed out, again
resume their swimming movements ; but this fresh-water Medusa is
completely destroyed by freezing. Upon being thawed out, tlio
animal is seen to have shrunk into a tiny ball, and it never again
recovers either its life or its shape.

The animals seek the sunlight, congregating at the unshaded end
of the tank. Moreover, during the daytime they swim about at the
surface ; but when the sun goes down they subside, and can no longer
be seen, in all these habits resembling many of the sea-water species.
They are themselves non-luminous.

On excising the margin of the nectocalyx, the result corresponded
precisely with that which is obtained in the case of marine species,
the operation producing immediate, total, and i»crnianent paralysis of
the nectocalyx, while the severed margin continues to pulsate for two
or three days.

A point of S2)ecially physiological interest is that in its uniinitilatcd

♦ 'Nature,' x.\ii. (1880; p. I'Jl. t I-oc. i-it.. \: lltl.

VOL. 111. - X

658 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

state tlio frcsli-water Medusa exhibits the power of localizing with its
manubrium a seat of stimulation situated in the bell. When a part
of the bell is nipped with the forceps, or otherwise irritated, the
free end of the manubrium is moved over and applied to the part irri-
tated. So far, the movement is precisely similar to that occurring in
Tiaropsis indiccms* But there is a curious difference ; for while in
T. indicans these movements of localization continue unimpaired after
the margin of the bell has been removed, and will be ineffectually
attempted even after the bell is almost entirely cut away from
its connections with the manubrium, in the fresh-water Medusa
the movements cease after the extreme margin of the bell has been
removed. For some reason or another the integrity of the margin
here seems to be necessary for exciting the manubrium to perform its
movements of localization. It is clear that this reason must either be
that the margin contains the nerve-centi'es which preside over these
localizing movements of the manubrium, or, much more probably, that
it contains some peripheral nervous structures which are alone capable
of transmitting to the manubrium a stimulus adequate to evoke the
movements of localization. In its unmutilated state this Medusa is at
intervals perpetually applying the extremity of its manubrium to one
part or another of the margin of the bell, the part of the margin
touched always bending in to meet the approaching extremity of the
manubrium. In some cases it can be seen that the object of this co-
ordinated movement is to allow the extremity of the manubrium — i. e.
the mouth of the animal — to pick oif a small j)article of food that has
become entangled in the marginal tentacles. It is therefore not im-
probable that in all cases this is the object of such movements,
although in most cases the particle which is caught by the tentacles is
too small to be seen with the naked eye. As it is thus no doubt a
matter of great importance in the economy of this Medusa that its
marginal tentacles should be very sensitive to contact with minute
particles, so that a very slight stimulus applied to them should start
the co-ordinated movements of localization, it is not surprising that
the tentacular rim should present nerve-endings so far sensitive that
only by their excitation can the reflex mechanism be thrown into
action. But if such is the explanation in this case, it is curious that
in Tiaropsis indicans every part of the bell should be equally capable
of yielding a stimulus to a precisely similar reflex action.

On cutting off portions of the margin, and stimulating the bell
ahove the portions of the margin removed, the manubrium did not remain
passive as it did when the ivhvle margin of the bell was removed ; but
it made ineffectual efforts to find the offending body, and in doing so
always touched some part of the margin which was still unmutilated.
This fact can only be explained by supposing that the stimulus sup-
plied to the mutilated part is spread over the bell, and falsely referred
by the manubrium to some part of the sensitive — i. e. unmutilated —
margin.

But to complete this account of the localizing movements it is
necessary to state one additional fact which, for the sake of clearness,
* ' Phil. Trans.,' clxvii.

INVEBTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIAj MICROSCOPY, ETC. 659

has been hitherto omitted. If any one of the four radial tubes is
irritated, the manubrium will correctly localize the seat of irritation,
whether or not the margin of the bell has been previously removed.
This greater case, so to sjicak, of localizing stimuli in the course of
the radial tubes than anywhere else in the umbrelhi except the margin,
corresponds with what is found to be the case in T. indicans, and pro-
bably has a direct reference to the distribution of the principal nerve-
tracts.

On the whole, therefore, contrasting this case of localization with
the closely parallel case presented by T. indicans, it may be said that
the two chiefly differ in the fresh-water Medusa, even when un-
mutilated, not being able to localize so promptly or so certainly ; and
in the localization being only performed with reference to the margin
and radial tubes, instead of with reference to the whole excitable
surface of the animal.

All marine Medusfe are very intolerant of fresh water, and there-
fore, as the fresh- water species must i^resumably have had marine
ancestors,* it seemed an interesting question to determine how far this
species would prove tolerant of sea-water. For the sake of comparison
the effects of fresh water upon the marine species are first dcscribed.t
If a naked-eyed Medusa which is swimming actively in sea-water is
suddenly transferred to fresh water, it will instantaneously collapse,
become motionless, and sink to the bottom of the vessel, remaiuinfr
motionless until it dies ; but if it be again transferred to sea-water it
will recover, provided that its exposure to the fresh water has not
been too long. It never survives an exposure of fifteen minutes, but may
survive an exposure of ten, and generally survives an exposure of five.
But although tlicy thus continue to live for an indefinite time, their
vigour is conspicuously and permanently imjiaircd. While in the
fresh water irritability persists for a short time after spontaneity has
ceased, and the manubrium and tentacles are strongly retracted.

Turning now to tlic case of the fresh-water species, when first it is
dropped into sea-water at 85^ there is no change in its movements for
about fifteen seconds, although the tentacles may be retracted. But
then, or a few seconds later, there generally occurs a scries of two or
three tonic spasms separated from one another by an interval of a few
seconds. During the next half-minuto the ordinary contractions
become progressively weaker, until they fade away into mere twitching
convulsions, wliich affect different parts of the bell irregularly. After
about a minute from the time of the first immersion all movement
ceases, the bell remaining passive in partial systole. There is now no
vestige of irritability. If transferred to fresh water after five minutes'
exposure, tlitro immediately supervenes a strong and persistent tonic
spasm, resembling rigor mortifv, and tlio animal remains motituiless for
about twenty minutes. Slight twitching contractions then begin to
display themselves, which, however, do not affect the whole bell, but

* I-ooking to the oiKprmons iiuiiilH;r of nmrino eixscios of Modus.!?, it id nnicli
moro ))ri)l)iililo tl.at tin; frL'.-%li-\viiUr sjifcica %verc dorivod from tlnin, than thiitthey
wiro ill rived frmii a t'rcHli-wiitrr niici'.itry.

t For full iiccouut Bco ' I'liil. Tiftu.--.,' clxvii. pp. 711, 71.").

•J \ '2

660 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

occur partially. The tonic spasm continues progressively to increase
in severity, and gives the outline of the margin a very irregular form ;
the twitching contractions become weaker and less frequent, till at last
they altogether die away. Irritability, however, still continues for a
time, a nip with the forceps being followed by a bout of rhythmical
contractions. Death occurs in several hours in strong and irregular
systole.

If the exposure to sea-water has only lasted two minutes, a similar
series of phenomena are presented, excejit that the spontaneous twitch-
ing movements supervene in much less time than twenty minutes. But
an exposure of even one minute may determine a fatal result a few
hours after the Medusa has been restored to fresh water.

Contact with sea-water causes an opalescence and essential disin-
tegration of the tissues, which precisely resemble the effects of fresh
water upon the marine Medusai. When immersed in sea-water this
Medusa floats iipon the surface, owing to its smaller specific gravity.

In diluted sea-water (50 per cent.) the preliminary tonic spasms do
not occur, but all the other phases are the same, though extended through
a longer period. In sea-water still more diluted (1 in 4 or 6) there is
a gradual loss of sjjontaneity, till all movement ceases, shortly after
which irritability also disappears ; manubrium and tentacles expanded.
After an hour's continued exposure intense rigor mortis slowly and
progressively develops itself, so that at last the bell has shrivelled
almost to nothing. An exposure of a few minutes to this _ strength
places the animal past recovery when restored to fresh water. In still
weaker mixtures (1 in 8 or 10) sjwntaneity persists for a long time,
but the animal gradually becomes less and less energetic, till at last it
will only move in a bout of feeble pulsations when irritated. In still
weaker solutions (1 in 12 or 15) spontaneity continues for hours,
and in solutions of from 1 in 15 to 18 the Medusa will swim about
for days.

It will be seen from this account that the fresh-water Medusa,, is
even more intolerant of sea-water than are the marine sjDecies of
fresh water. Moreover the fresh-water Medusa is beyond all com-
parison more intolerant of sea-water than are the marine species of
brine ; for the marine species will survive many hours' immersion in
a saturated solution of salt. While in such a solution they are
motionless, with manubrium and tentacles relaxed, so resembling the
fresh-water Medusa shortly after being immersed in a mixture of
1 part sea-water to 5 of fresh ; but there is the great difference that
while this small amount of salt is very quickly fatal to the fresh-water
species, the large addition of salt exerts no permanently deleterious
influence on the marine species.

We have thus altogether a curious set of cross relations. It
would appear that a much less profound physiological change would
be required to transmute a sea-water jelly-fish into a jelly-fish adapted
to inhab t brine, than would be required to enable it to inhabit fresh
water. Yet the latter is the direction in which the modification has
taken place, and taken place so completely that sea-water is now more
poisonous to the modified species than is fresh water to the unmodified.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 661

There can be no doubt that the modification was gradual — probably
brought about by tlie ancestors of the fresh-water Medusa penetrating
higher and higher through the brackish waters of estuaries into the
fresh water of rivers — and it would, the author thinks, be hard to
point to a more remarkable case of profound physiological modifica-
tion in adaptation to changed conditions of life. If an animal so
exceedingly intolerant of fresh water as is a marine jelly-fish, may yet
have all its tissues changed so as to adaj)t them to thrive in fresh
Water, and even die after an exposure of one minute to their ancestral
element, assuredly we can see no reason why any animal in earth or
sea or anywhere else may not in time become fitted to change its
element.

Porifera.

Sponges of the Leyden Museum.* — In this, the first part of his
communication (written in English), Mr. Vosmaer deals with the family
of the Desmacidinidfe. As is well known, these and all the siliceous
sponges are not only difficult to determine on account of their great
variability, but from the technical objection that Bowerbank and
Schmidt, two leading authorities, worked almost simultaneously, and
altogether independently of one another. After giving the palm to
Schmidt, the author describes the symbols he employs in his descrip-
tions, and then passes to a description and enumeration of the species ;
of these he gives 165, some of which are new, and these he places
in sixteen genei-a, three of which, Ainphilectns, Crnmhe, and Hastatus,
are new ; the characters of some of the others are emended. The
paper seems from the remarks which the author makes on the varia-
bility of species, to be a distinct advance on most essays on the
subject which have appeared in the English language.

Structure and Affinities of the Genus Protospongia, Salter.f —
Mr, W. J. Sollas describes the character of the Cambrian genus
Protosjoongia from the original and other specimens. In Dr. Hicks's
specimen the spicules of the sponge show their original form, when
it is clear that they are not fused together into a continuous network ;
thoy form a network only by the interlacing of tlicir extremities.
The spicules arc quadriradiate, with the centre raised, so that each
spicule indicates the outlines of a low four-sided pyramid, the centre
being at the apex, and the four rays representing the four edges of the
pyramid. The rays do not diverge at right angles, and thus the base
of the pyramid is oblong, though this may be due to distortion. From
some indications the author is inclined to believe that a fifth ray may
have sprung from the centre of the spicule downwards. The rays of
the spicules appear to be cylindrical. The spicules are generally of
seveial sizes, the larger ancs foiming a framework which is filled
in by the smaller forms, tlic latter being regularly arranged, so that
the smaller ones fill up the S(piare spaces left between the rays of the
larger, and thus build up a network of square meshes gradually

* 'Notes R. Mus. Nrtherlands ' (ii. 1880) p. 99.

t ' Abstr. Prc)c. Geol. 8oc. Lend.,' No. 387 (1880) p. 1.

662 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

diminisliing in size. The sponge-wall seems to have consisted of
more than one layer of spicules. The spicules were probably originally
siliceous, but now they consist of iron pyrites.

With regard to the systematic position of Protospongia, the oldest
known sponge, the author remarks that similar spicules similarly
arranged are to be met with in the Hexactinellidse, the absence of
one or two rays being not unusual in part of the spicules of true
Hexactinellids. As the spicules are free, he would refer the sponge
to Zittel's Lyssakina, which are nearly equivalent to Carter's Sarco-
hexactinellida.

Protozoa.

Butschli's Protozoa. — The first part of the second edition of the
first volume of Bronn's ' Klassen u. Ordnungen des Thier-Eeichs,'
which contains the Protozoa, has just appeared ; it is by Dr. O.
Uiitschli, of Heidelberg. The part contains only the commence-
ment of the account of the first division (class or subphylum) to
which the name Sarcodina is given ; the limits of the class are not
•quite the same as those proposed by Hertwig and Lesser, for, as here
defined, it consists of three subclasses, Ehizopoda, Heliozoa, and
Eadiolaria. The bibliography of the first of these recites 118 titles.
The four plates contain nearly 70 figures, of which most are taken
from the special communications of various authors. It is intended
to complete the subject in 12-15 parts, with 30 plates.

Amcebiform and other new Foraminifera.* — Mr. H. J. Carter
describes some specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar, between
Ceylon and the southern extremity of India.

Under the head of Testamcebiformia — new group — (Char., amcebi-
form, testaceous) Mr. Carter says that hitherto almost exclusive atten-
tion has been given to the free Foraminifera, whose exquisitely varied
forms, although in many instances microscopic, have not unnaturally
proved as attractive as the frustules of the Diatomacete, so that it
has become an object of great search to find out a new form,
although it can hardly be seen by the unassisted eye. This to the
specialist is a matter of paramount importance, but to the biologist
one of insignificance compared with the less attractive and larger
forms, which tend to reveal the life-history and connections of the
class generally.

For some time past he has anticipated the existence of amcebiform
Foraminifera, dififerentiated only by the peculiarity of their respective
pseudopodial expansions ; but of course this cannot be ascertained
except by minute and laborious examination of the living so-called
Bathyhius, which probably abounds with them after the manner of
fresh-water Ehizopods, forming a similar slime to that which may
often be observed over the bottom of stagnant (i. e. still) fresh-water
pools. He was not, however, prepared to find that some of these
ever-changing forms were stereotyped as it were by the permanent
secretion of a calcareous test, until the specimens from the Gulf of
Manaar came under his notice, when he observed two well-characterized

* ' Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,' v. (1880) p. 437.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 663

forms to be very abundant in them, which he describes under the
generic names of Holocladina and Cysteodictyina respectively.

With regard to Holocladina (pushdifera) it is evident from the
form of the test that the living animal possessed an amceboid form ;
but whether both were developed successively (that is, one part after
another like the crust on a stream of lava), or the living animal was
fully developed before the test was secreted, there is no evidence now
to show, beyond the presumption that the former was most likely the
case. The absence of all foreign material in the interior, together
with its form, distinctly separates it from the genera Carpenteria
and Polytrema, while it chiefly differs from Aphrosina * in not being
multilocular. No oral apertures were satisfactorily seen ; but it may
fairly be inferred that each of the conical projections on the terminal
branchlets bears one, through which a pseudopodium issues during
the living state, in search of that subtile kind of nourishment which
the present emptiness of the test indicates to have been the nature of
the aliment.

Amongst the other forms described is CeratesUna, n. gen. (2 n. sp.),
in which the test is horny, of a dark amber colour, and translucent.
The composition of the test here brings us one degree nearer than
that of the Testamcebiformia to the absolutely naked Foraminifer, to
whose conjectured existence the author before alluded; but lest it
might be thought that it is merely the chitine without the calcareous
material which characterizes this genus, it should be mentioned that
if a specimen of Ceratestina and an ordinary calcareous test of a
Foraminifer together be exposed to the influence of an acid solution
(e. g. dilute nitric acid), the latter will be dissolved and leave
scarcely any residue, while the former remains unaffected, proving
that the horny substance of the Ceratestina is something more than
the chitine which may support the calcareous material ; indeed the
best way of extracting a Ceratestina is to put the calcareous substance
containing the specimen into a strong solution of nitric acid, which,
all know, is instant destruction to a calcareous test. In some cases
the test is composed in one part of the ordinary calcareous material,
and in the other of the horny substance only, which condition is so
usually seen in one species tliat it would appear to be rather natural
than accidental. The author alludes to a species which he figured and
described, conjecturally, as tlic "embryonic form" of Carpenteria mon-
ticnlaris,-\ but which now, finding it to be a distinct species, he would
name Carpenteria microscopica. The chambers of Carpenteria utricu-
laris and also the cells of Polytrema mimtceum are often lined by a
stifi' horny layer of considerable thickness ; but under what circum-
stances, he is ignorant, as it does not occur always : this, however, is
secondary and must not be confounded with Ceraiestina, in wliich tho
liorny structure is primary and i)ormanent.

The author also describes as new species Polytrema n/lindriritm
and P. meKentcricnm ; and as new species or varieties, Calcariiia adrar
var. hixj^ida and Alreolina sinitosa.

* Sco this Jouriinl, ii. (IS70) p. r.OO.

t 'Aim. nnd Mng. Nat. HJHt.,' .\ix. (1S77) p. 'Ji:{.

664 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATINQ TO

Vampyrella lateritia,*— A winter in the 'American Journal of
Microscopy ' details some observations which he made on this
Rhizopod. The animal is in colour reddish-yellow, in general
appearance much like the common sun-animalcule, Actinoplirys sol,
but larger, more active in its movements, and with the power to change
its form with greater facility. Dr. Leidy's description of it is : —
"Animal usually ^c/mop/irv/s-like, with a soft spheroidal body, capable
of amoeboid variations of form, composed of pale, colourless, granular
jn'otoplasm, with abundance of colouring matter, oil-like molecules,
and vacuoles. Pseudopods as Actino])ln-ys-\\\e rays, Acineta-\\ke
rays, and digit-like, lobate, or wave-like expansions."

Amongst other details the author says that he saw one individual make
its way rapidly across the field of view, and seeming as though some
innate knowledge, some rational impulse, were guiding it, for without
hesitation the little mass of living jelly passed directly to a filament
of Spirogyra longata to which it became attached, withdrawing a
portion ot its rays for the purpose, and conforming itself to the shape
of the plant surface. There it had the apj)earance of resting, stoj^ping
the flow of protoplasmic droj)s along the rays jixst where each one
haiipened to be. This was at nine o'clock. One minute later, the
first turn of the chlorophyll band within the cell suddenly fell down.
In another minute the second turn followed ; in three minutes, the
entire cell-contents were loose and slowly gliding toward the Vam-
pyrella which was sucking them in. At five minutes past nine the
cell was empty, and the animal moving to the next. Here the same
operation was repeated. In its third excursion it placed itself across
tlie partition between two cells, and preceded to imbibe the contents
«f both at once. From one the chlorophyll bands were loosened and
dragged out in a long strip, while in the other they were broken down
into a homogenous green mass and quietly sipped out, the Vampyrella
visibly swelling. It was not until seven cells were emptied that its
appetite was satisfied. A repetition of this was seen in the case of
another individual. The creature must, the author thinks, have the
power to secrete a fluid capable of dissolving the cellulose, and of
acting upon the chlorophyll and protoplasm within the Alga, besides
its very evident ability to remove the latter without first dragging
tliem out, or surrounding them Amoeba fashion. When the seventh
cell had been cleaned out the Vampyrella transferred itself to a fila-
ment of another species of the same genus, where it again rested, but
did not feed, with two short blunt pseudopods protruding as if
clinging to the plant.

Two days later the field contained a cyst presenting three very
distinct lines dividing it into as many parts. Almost as soon as seen,
the VampyrellcB began to escape, two making their exit at opposite
sides simultaneously, the third which the sac contained following
through one of the apertures already made. The process was a rapid
one. A thick colourless pseudopod appeared first. Hardly did it
touch the wall before the opening was made. The ray-like pseudopods
were protruded before one-third of the animal had escaped. Many
* 'Am. Joiirn. Micr.,' v. (ISSO) j). 105.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 6G5

of the dark spots upon tbe cyst walls, probably of excrementitious
matter, followed as free granules, others remaining behind.

Acinetse.* — In continuation of his previous note,f Mr. W. G.
Cocks states that he is satisfied the perfect forms of Acinetce which
he observed in large numbers on the filaments of an Alga, were in
fact developed from some rudimentary, gelatinous-looking masses
throwing out fine radiations or pseudopodia (or more properly, per-
haps, the Amoeboid forms of Acinetce), found by Mr. Badcock in the
autumn — the masses having disappeared, and the swarms of perfect
Acinetce taking their place on the one identical Alga only. The
development was not, however, actually observed.

Mr. Cocks also traced the development of an Acineta from the
ciliated " swarm-germ " emitted by an adult specimen, through the
short pedicellate form, and that which has been described as Podophrya
fixa, back to the perfect Acineta. He also satisfied himself that these
organisms arc not steps in the life-history of any of the species of
Vorticelkt, E^iHtylis, &c., but arc distinct organisms.

BOTANY.

A. GENERAL, including Embryology and Histology
of the Phanerogamia.

Disengagement of Carbonic Acid from Roots.| — M. Cauvet, of
Lyons, has made a fresh series of experiments on this subject. The
general conclusions arrived at are that carbonic acid is disengaged in
smaller quantity during tlie night than during any part of the day ;
that it augments during the morning and diminishes towards evening;
tlie amount disengaged dtiring the night being not more than one-
fourtli of that emitted during the three periods of the day. This
diflbrence he believes to be mainly due to the action of light, which
greatly promotes respiration; all the functions of the plant, especially
transjiiration and respiration, being much less active by night than by
day.

Sensitiveness in the Acacia.§ — In Sejitember last Dr. T. L.
Phijjsun maile some experiments on the development of sensibility in
tlie common Acacia, Itobinia pseuclacacia. The subject was a fine
tree, five or six years old, with luxuriant foliage.

The first experiment was made at 5.30 on the evening of
September 17th, the wind being S.S.E., the temperature 17^ C, and
tlic sun clear, Tlie leaves wore sent to sleep, whilst still brilliantly
lighted l)y the sun, by submitting the terminal leaflet to a scries of
ta2)s with the finger. After ffom ten to twenty smart tajis the other
leaflets commenced to close, and at the end oi' jive minutes were all
" nsleej)." The lateral leaflets folded up one after another, commencing
witli that nearest to tlic point of the leaf, i. e. tlie part struck.

* 'Sci.-Cinssip' ri880). p. 1.").5. t An/r, p. 470.

X 'Hull. Soc-. ]M. Franco,' xxvii. (1880) p. 4:5.
«J •Coinj.tcH l.'.iidiis,' xo. (I8H0) |.. 122H.

666 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The following day at 12 . 30 this experiment was repeated with a
like result, the leaves, the terminal leaflet of which was struck, going
to sleep in the space of four and a half minutes. It took, however,
tioo to three hours' sunlight to restore the lateral leaflets to their former
horizontal position.

This falling down one after the other of the leaflets, com-
mencing from the extremity of the leaf, is exactly similar to what is
observed in the sensitive plant, in which, as the author showed in
1876,* there is simply the development in the highest degree of a
phenomenon which is traceable throughout the whole vegetable
kingdom.

The application of a strong heat to the terminal leaflet, which acts
immediately on the sensitive plant, produced no eifect on the lateral
leaflets of the Acacia, even when the terminal leaflet was crisped and
burnt by a small flame. This seems to the author to demonstrate
that the sap is much less mobile in the tissue of the one plant than
in that of the other.

Copper in Plants.f — In a recent memoir,| M. Dieulafait showed
that copper exists in a state of complete diffusion in all the rocks
of the primordial formation, and in those resulting directly from
their destruction. Among other consequences of this, all plants
which grow on such rocks should contain copper in sensible pro-
portion.

M. Dieulafait has tested this view, and the following are the
results of his investigations: —

Copper exists in all plants which grow on rocks of the. prim or dial
formation. Its proportion is sufficient for it to be recognized v/ith
certainty, even with the ammonia-reaction, by using only 1 gramme
of ash.

Each of the one hundred and twenty-eight specimens of white
oak of marly strata showed the presence of copper with 1 gramme of
ash, though, in general, the proportion of the metal was less than that
in plants of primordial strata.

All the specimens obtained in dolomitic horizons furnished
copper distinctly recognizable in 1 gramme of ash ; but there were
great variations according to the specimens.

The plants which live on comparatively pure limestones did not
furnish any traces of copper under the conditions of the three fore-
going groups. To be able to recognize it with certainty, it was
necessary sometimes to use as much as 100 grammes of ash.

Does copper exist normally in organs of animals and in those of
man ? The facts brought out in the present and previous memoir
naturally led up to this question, which is shown to be less simple
and absolute than has been believed hitherto. M. Dieulafait hopes
shortly to communicate facts as to animals and man living on the
primordial formation.

* ' Familiar Letters on some Mysteries of Nature,' &e., p. 139.

t ' Comptes Rendus,' xc. (1880) p. 703.

J ' Annales de Chimie et de Physique,' 5th ser., xviii.

INVEETEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 667

Action of Ozone on the Colouring-matters of Plants.* — In some
experiments by Mr. A. R. Leeds, in which many varieties of flowers
were exjiosed during nineteen hours to the action of a current of 152
litres of air, containing in all 228 mgr. of ozone, the bleaching
efiected was extremely imperfect. When 1200 litres of air were
passed over various flowers (total ozone, 1 • 8 grains), they were
partly or wholly bleached at the end of five days. A piece of calico
with a pattern in bright green and black was completely bleached
during the same interval, the green having disappeared completely,
and the stain of the mordant only remaining where the black had been.

From these and other results it is concluded that the colouring-
matters of both leaves and flowers of the species {Lantana, Fuchsia,
Petunia, Rosa, Verbena, Pelargonium, Bouvardia, Euphorbia, &c.) experi-
mented with were partly or wholly destroyed by ozone ; but a con-
siderable percentage of ozone is required to produce tliis result, or if
such small amounts as are obtained in the customary methods of
ozonizing air by phosphorus are employed (1 to 3 mgr. per litre)
a large volume of ozonized air must be used, and a considerable
interval elapse before bleaching is eifected.

Red Colouring-matter of the Leaves of the Virginian Creeper.t
The red autumn leaves of the Virginian creeper give up to alcohol a
beautiful rose-red pigment, which is coloured green by a weak solu-
tion of potash, the red colour being again restored by very dilute
sulphuric acid. Berzelius has ali'eady shown that the green pigment
is different from that of chlorophyll-grains, which is strikingly
proved, according to Schnetzler, by the following experiment : —

1 volume of water, 1 volume of the red alcoholic solution, and
^ volume of sulphuric acid are slightly agitated together. After a
short time a beautiful green solution in ether with red fluorescence
floats on the top of the solution of the true chlorophyll-pigment.
The red pigment of the leaves of the Virginian creeper, separated,
from the colouring-matter of the chlorophyll, is dissolved in the
mixture of alcohol and water. It is changed to green by a solution
of potash, but is not then fluorescent.

Chemical Composition of Aleurone-grains.J — Dr. Vines con-
tinues the account of this investigation, which appeared in 1878. § It
was therein shown tliat the aleurone-grains of the lupin consist of
three proteid substances, namely, of two globulins — the one belonging
to the myosin group, the other to tlie vitellin group — and of a substance,
allied to the peptones, provisionally tenncd hcinialbumosc. In the
present communication the results of the investigation of the grains
of the peony and of the castor-oil plant ( liirlnus) are given. The
grains of the peony are found to bo readily soluble in distilled water.
Treatment with 10 per cent. NaCl solution, however, proves tlio
existence of a myosin-globulin. Apparently no vitcllin-globulin is

♦ ' Clum. News,' xl. (1870) p. 8G. Sec ' Jotini. Cluni. Soc.,' Abstr., xxxviii.
(18S0) p. 5S.

t ' Bot Centrnlbl.,' i. (1880) p. 247.

i ' Nature," xxii. (1880) p. 91. § ' Proc. Roy. 6oc.,' xxviii. (187.>^) p. 218.

C(J8 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

present. The grains contain hemialbumose in considerable quantity.
The grains of Ricinus present a complex structure. They consist of a
mass of grouud-substauce of proteid nature, enclosing a crystalloid of
proteid substance and a globoid which consists of inorganic matter.
The groxmd-substance is found to be composed, like the grain of the
lupin, of the two globulins and of hemialbumose. The chemical
nature of the crystalloid is not so clearly made out. It is slowly
soluble in 10 per cent. NaCl solution, and readily soluble in 20 per
cent., or in saturated NaCl solution after treatment with alcohol.
The crystalloids of several plants were investigated with the view of
ascertaining their relative solubility in solutions of this salt. Those
of Viola elatior and of Limim usitatisshnum were found to resemble
those of Bicinus in this respect ; those of BefthoUetia and of Cacurhita
are readily soluble in 10 per cent, and saturated NaGl solutions ;
those of Mtisa ensete and HilUi, and those of Sparganium ramosum are
either insoluble or only partially soluble in these solutions.

The points of more general interest are the action of alcohol in
promoting the solution of the crystalloids of Bicinus in 20 per cent,
and in saturated solutions of NaCl, and the fact that long-continued
exposure to alcohol does not render the vegetable globulins insoluble
in these solutions.

The author finally expresses his opinion that the caseins which
Eitthausen has extracted from various seeds consist to a considerable
extent of precij)itated hemialbumose.

" Cistoma." * — Under this term Gasparrini formerly described a
membranous sac which he claimed to have observed beneath the
semihmar guard-cells of the stoma, continuous with the cuticle of
the epidermis and of the guard-cells. Other botanists not having
confii-med this observation, A. Mori has endeavoured to set the ques-
tion at rest by a very careful examination, chiefly made on the
stomata of Cereus peruiianus, Ficus elastica. Yucca aloeifolia, Aloe
vulgaris, Euphorbia officinarum, Anthurium Scherzerianum, Agave ame-
ricana, and other plants. His observations tend to the conclusion
that the description of the " cistoma " is founded on a mistake. He
finds the cells at the bottom of the stomatic cavity destitute of
any cuticular lining, the walls of these cells consisting entirely of
cellulose, and being in immediate contact with the air which pene-
trates the stomatic cavity. The cuticle which is continuous with the
superficies of the epidermis invests the stomatic cavity only.

Apical Growth with several Apical Cells.! — Various authors
have ascribed a number of apical cells to the roots of Marattiaceae
and Ophioglossacese, the apices of the stems of Selaginella, and the
branches of Fucaccfe.

According to the accurate definition of the apical cell given by
Schwendener, only a single or several equivalent cells can be so
regarded which are grouped immediately around the centre of the
apical point, and which maintain this position dm-ing the apical
growth. But some of the daughter-cells which result from the

* ' Nuov. Giorn. Bot. Ital.,' xii. (1880) p. 148.
t ' SB. Ges. iiaturf. Frciinrl. Berlin,' 1879.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 669

division of apical cells lose this position, and are not correctly
regarded as apical cells, even if still situated near the centre. The
number of ajiical cells may indeed be more than one, but as can
be proved on mechauico-gcomctrical grounds, not so large as Kussow
claims for the roots of Marattiacea). This writer states that he
has, on a longitudinal section, observed as many as from seven to ten
apical cells ; Schweudener never foimd more than two in Marattia,
lying right and left of the median line. The complementtxry trans-
verse section shows altogether four apical cells. Eussow appears not
to have observed the true apex of the root, but a section of the root-
cap. The four apical cells do not touch at one point, but two of
them form an edge.

Foliage shoots of Juniperus communis, seedlings of Pinus inops,
P. Laricio, P. sijliestris, and Abies alba, also show four apical cells,
two opposite ones forming again an edge.

B. CRYPTOGAMIA.

Cryptogamia Vascularia.

Structure of the Fructification of Pilularia.* — According to
recent researches of Jm-anyi, the fructification of Pilularia globulifera
is a leaf-segment of peculiar form. At the time of its formation, in
addition to the simple sterile foliage-leaves, other bifid leaves are
formed, the anterior segment of each of which becomes a sporangium,
the posterior segment developing in the ordinary manner of foliage-
leaves, appearing at an earlier stage as a lateral lobe of the fertile
segment. The chief ground for this opinion is that the tissue of the
pedicel of the fructification always passes over at once into that of the
leaf situated behind it.

The first ai>ix;arancc of the entire yovmg fructification is that of
small cylindrical masses of tissue, which subsequently assume au
obtuse fusiform shape, the thin-wallcd cells being filled with strongly
refractive protoplasm. In the centre of this tissue the procumbial
bundle can soon be detected, out of which the vascular buudle oi the
fructification is developed. At first tliis mass of tissue grows in
leugth nearly uniformly ; but subsequently the lower side grows
more rajjidly, in conseciuencc of which tlie apex of the structure is
elevated, and appears concave on the side wliich faces the sterile leaf.
With this curvature it assumes a club-like form, and forms the
pedicel of the now developing sporocai'p. On this are formed subse-
quently four sickle-shajjcd leaf-segments, from which the principal
part of the fructification is developed, and which form its valves.
They arc placed in opposite pairs, in such a way that their concave
side faces the centre, the convex side lying on the outside. At an early
period the apices of the separate leaf-segments can be distinguished,
and soon afterwards the cavities (lacuna) sorales) in which the
sporangia are formed. The margins of the two growing loaves finally
coalesce, while their free apices still continue their growth. After the
coalescence of tbe segments the young fructification is pear-shaped.

♦ 'SIJ. UiiRar. Aka.i. d. W'iau.,' 18711, No. :>. i>. Ill (Hiiiigiiriun). Set- ' |{..(.
CVutiall)!.,' i. (18S0) p. 207.

670 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The line of coalescence of tlie inner margins of the leaf-segments
coincides with the central axis of the mature fruit. The four crossed
rows of cells which are visible on transverse section, and the signifi-
cation of which has hitherto been obscui-e, are, according to this view,
simply indications of the coalescence of the adjacent leaves. By the
thickening of the walls of the superficial cells of the fructification,
which finally becomes nearly globular, the soral cavities having
closed up, the lines of contact of the leaf-segments become at length
completely obliterated.

Muscinese.

British Moss-Flora. — Dr. E. Braithwaite, of well-known bryo-
logical reputation, has commenced the publication of monographs of
the families of British mosses, each complete in itself and illustrated
by plates of all the species, with microscopical details of their
structure. Part I. includes the Andreaeacese, and Part II. the
Buxbaumiacese and Georgiacese, each with two plates, drawn by the
author.

The cell-structure of the leaves, so important in the distinction of
genera and species, receives due attention both in the figures and
descriptions. The records of localities for all but the common species
are intended to be numerous, and the bibliography ampler than any
that has hitherto appeared in a British work.

The arrangement of the families and genera is principally in
accordance with that suggested by Professor Lindberg,* the most
natural that has yet appeared. In this the Cleistocarpous mosses are
regarded as imperfectly developed forms of various Stegocarpous
families, with which they agree in everything but a separable operculum,
and the genera are framed on a broader and more rational basis, just
as our best botanists now deal with Phasnogamous plants. Professor
Lindberg's terms for the position of the reproductive organs are also
adopted.

Bryologists well know how much a work of this kind is re-
quired, Wilson's ' Bryologia Britannica' being unobtainable except at
a largely enhanced price, and being now altogether insufficient as a
guide to our recently much-extended Moss-Flora.

Characese.

British Characeae'.f — Messrs. H. and J. Groves have compiled a
much-needed monograph of the British species of Characese, accom-
panied by four good plates. The total number of species (besides
two doubtful ones) is nineteen, all previously described. The order
is first divided, as is usually done, into the two sections Chareaj and
Nitelleae (called by Groves Charse and Nitellse — objectionable terms,
as being simply the plurals of the generic name), each including
two genera, Chara and Lychnothamnus, Tolypella and Nitella. Of
Chara nine British species are described, divided into three series,

* ' Utcast till en naturlig Gruppering af Eiuropas Bladmossor med toppsittande
Frukt,' 1878.

t ' Trimcu's Journ. Bot.,' ix. (1880) p. 97.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 671

Triplostich^, Diplostichfc, and Haplostichae, characterized by the
stem having respectively three times, twice, and the same number of
cortical cells as branchlets in the whorls. Lychnothammia includes
only one, Tohjpella numbers three, and Nitella six British species.

Fungi.

Formation of Fat in Fungi.* — The fat formed in vegetable cells
is known to be of the nature of a secretion, and not a product of fer-
mentation ; it is found in quantity varying with the activity of the
growth and of the oxygen-respiration (? assimilation) of the plant. It
may probably originate from the splittiug-up of proteids in the cells
of Penicillium and other fungi. The relation of the formation of fat
to the nutrition of the i^Iant remains still altogether obscure.

A recent scries of experiments by Nageli and Loew on Penicillium
has been directed chiefly to investigate the degree in which various
nutrient substances affect the formation of fat. These they arrange
in this respect in the following series, advancing from those less to
those more favourable : — (1) ammonium acetate ; (2) ammonium tar-
trate and succinate, and asparagine ; (3) leucine ; (4) peptone ; (5)
ammonium tartrate plus sugar ; (6) leucine plus sugar ; (7) peptone
plus sugar.

Secretion from a Fungus-j — M. Eug. Fournier has observed on a
species of Polyporus ("i^robably P. cuticularis) growing on a plum-stem
in his garden at Auteuil, an acid viscid secretion, which begins to be
exuded daily as soon as the pileus is exposed to the full rays of the
sun, about 9 a.m., and continues through the day until and beyond
sunset. In 100 parts of the fluid were found to be contained, on
chemical analysis, 0-545 parts of organic matter, and 0 '065 parts
mineral matter, in all 1-21 parts of residue. Of albuminoid sub-
stances coagulated by heat there were 0 • 03 parts, and of glucose 0 • 32
parts. The residue on calcination was strongly alkaline, and eflervesccd
with acids. It consisted of lime and potassa in combination with
sulpliuric, hydrochloric, and phosijhoric acids.

Anthracnose of the Vine.| — This disease, known in France as
" briileur noir " and in Germany as " Brenner," and widely spread
through the south of Europe from Portugal to Greece, has been made
a subject of careful study by 11. Prillicux. He identifies it with tlie
various organisms described under the names of Spltacchmia ampdinum
by Do Bary, Itamularia ampclopliaga by Passerini, Phoma uvirula by
Arcangeli, and Gloiosporinm ampeluphnr/um by Saccardo, this lust pro-
duciii'^ tljc disease known in Italy as " vajuolo."

The disease is indicated by very detinito characters : spots of a
dark brown colour, somewhat depressed in the centre. Tluse sjxtts
api)ear in great numbers on the young branches, tendrils, leaves, and
berries; they pouctrato and completely destroy the tissue in tho
places where thoy are developed ; they increase at their circumference,

* 'Jnnrti. prnkt. Clam.,' xx. p. 97. See 'Journ. Chcni. Soc.,' Ab.slr.
xxxviii. (IHSO) p. H'M.

t • Bull. Soc. Bot. France/ xxvi. (187:») p. 324 t Ibid., p. TOS.

672 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and frequently coalesce with one another. Ultimately the ends of
the branches present the ajipearance of having been burnt ; the
berries shrivel up or drop. The spores are produced in great
abundance, and are colourless, transparent, and oblong in shape.
They germinate very freely in water.

Prillieux adopts for this fungus Saccardo's name Gloeosporium
ampelophagnm. He is inclined to think that it is not identical with
the fungus which produces the well-known " black rot " of the
American vines, Phoma uvicola, and that it is probably not due to
American importation.

In commenting on the above observation,* M. Cornu disputes
Prillieux's statement that the disease has been known both in
Germany and France for a long period, even a century. He is
disposed to identify it with the American " black rot," and to
consider that it has been introduced into Europe with American
stocks.

M. Prillieux, in a subsequent communication,! gives further
reasons for doubting the identity of the anthracnose with the
American " black rot."

Urocystis Cepulse.J — M. Cornu has made some further observa-
tions on the fungus which causes the disease so destructive to the
onion crop in America, in addition to those already recorded.§ In
reference to Dr. M. C. Cooke's identification of the sj^ecies with U.
Colchici, he points out that a number of instances are known in which
the same host-species is attacked by two or more species of fungus
all belonging to the Ustilagineae. M. Cornu finds that the parasite
cannot attack the tissue of the host when the plant has attained to
any considerable size ; but that it would be in danger of spreading
with alarming rapidity by attacking very young seedlings if the
crop were grown year after year on the same soil. This he believes
to be the reason why it has been so destructive in America, and has
not yet attained any great dimensions in Europe. The safety of the
croj) depends on the transplantation of the seedlings, and the destruc-
tion of all that appear weakly or sickly.

Sterigmatocystis and Nematogonum.H — M. G. Bainier gives a
detailed account of the structure of these two genera of fungi. Of
Sterigmatocystis he describes seven comparatively large species, in
which the sterigmata are very much shorter than the basidia, including
one new one, S. carbonaria ; and five minute species in which the
sterigmata are equal to or larger than the basidia. All these were
found on various di'ugs. The description of Nematogonum aurantiacum
is taken from specimens found on the clippings of a shoemaker's
shop.

Mycotheca Marchica. — Under this title, Zo^jf and Sydow are
publishing a myco-flora of the province Brandenburg in Prussia, the

* ' Bull. Soc. Bot. France,' xxvi. (1879) p. 319.
t Ibid., xxvii. (1880) p. 34. J Ibid., p. 39.

§ See this Journul, ii. (1879) p. 921, and ante, p. 307.
II 'Bull. Soc. Bot. France,' xxvii. (1880) p. 27.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 673

first century of wliicli is already issued. Six new species are de-
scribed, viz. Cyphella pezizoides, Puccinia Sydoiviana, Sclerotinia
Batschiana, CJuctomium botrychodes, Entyloma bicolor, and Thielav'ia
hasicola. In addition to a complete enumeration of the myco-flora,
the work will contain also a treatise on the classification of fungi.

Ceriomyces terrestris.* — The fungus previously described under
this name by Schulzer of Miiggenburg, and referred by him to Corda's
genus Ceriomyces, is stated by the same authority to have been erro-
neously so referred, and to belong in reality to the genus Dcedalia.
He has now found it in three distinct forms, differing greatly in
appearance and habit, but always retaining a uniformity in the size
and form of the sjiores, nearly spherical, and from 3 to 7 mm. in
diameter. From this peculiarity he proposes for it the amended
name Dcedalia lyolymorplia. He considers it to be a transitional form
between the Clavariacei and the Pileati.

Vine-pock.t — Under the name of " Pocken-kraukheit " is known
a disease of the vine caused by the parasitic fungus Gloeosporimn
ampelophagum, which has appeared since 1876 in Italy and the
southern provinces of Austria, and which often destroys a fourth or
even a half of the crop. The fungus forms brown spots, with a grey
or reddish bloom in the centre, which are at first nearly circular, but
subsequently often coalesce. They consist of several layers of pale
brown polyhedral cells, which are colourless above, and are there
narrowed into short sterigmata or conidiophores. The conidia
(spores) are short, elliptical or ovate, colourless, 5-6 mm. long, and
2 '5-3 "5 mm. broad. The development and rapid spreading of the
fungus depends on the conditions of moisture. It is recommended
to remove and burn the infected parts.

Prehistoric Polyporus.| — Von Thiimen describes a piece of a
Polyporua collected, among other prehistoric objects, in the pile-
dwelling station in the neighbourhood of Laibach. The state of the
jireservation was sufficient for the structure to be made out without
difficulty, and for the fungus to be identified with the existing Poly-
porus fomentarius. It may have grown on a tree in the station itself,
or have been brought in from outside by the inhabitants to be used
for the purpose of tinder.

Relationship of Ozonium to Coprinus.§ — 0. Penzig has care-
fully investigated tlie hintory of the structure known as Ozonium Lk. ;
and has come to the conclusion that under the name of Ozouiinn
auricomnm have been united a lunubor of bodies all of which consist
of sterile mycelia of various stages of Coprinus, wliich greatly resemble
one another, but which exhibit minuto differences in their size, tlio
diameter of the hyphao, tlie transverse septation, &c. From among
them ho proposes to establish a new species, Coprinus intermcdius.

* 'Ocator. hot. Z.itHchr.,' xxx. (ISSn) p. 144.

+ 'Dio rockon <los Wniiistockos,' von F. von Thiiinon, Vienna, ISSO. St-o
' Bot. CtntmlMult.' i. ( 1^80) j). 17(5.

X ' ViTliftii.ll. zo(.l.-l.ot. (;. .H. Wien.' xxix. (IS80) p. :^2.
§ ' Nuov. (iiorii. But. Itnl.,' xii. (188(t) p. 132.
VOL. III. 2 Y

074 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Disease of the Apple-tree caused by Alcoholic Fermentation.* —
M. Van Tiegliem calls attention to the conclusion resulting from
M. Miiutz's observations, that alcoholic fermentation is always the
result of a single condition, viz. when a living cell is asphyxiated or
deprived of oxygen in the presence of sugar. He finds precisely the
same conditions occurring in nature in a disease of the roots of the
apple-tree observed by M. Des Cloizeaux in Normandy. The roots,
which were very old, exhaled a strong alcoholic odour. On examina-
tion it was found that neither the fibrovascular bundles nor the
vessels exhibited any deterioration, the mischief being confined to the
cells of the medullary rays and of the woody parenchyma. In these
the ordinary contents had been entirely replaced by brown globules,
alcohol being formed abundantly in these cells, and spreading through
the tissues. No trace of microphytes of any kind was observed. The
alcohol had evidently taken the place of ordinary sugar and starch ;
and its formation appeared to be due to a want of oxygen in the soil.
The season had been remarkably rainy, and the disease was con-
siderably abated by draining the soil or by digging trenches round tlie
root.

Saccharomyces apiculatus.f — E. C. Plansen draws attention to
the inquiry of Brefeld, What is the original source in nature of the
germs of fungi which are efficacioiis in the process of fermentation ?
and attempts to give an answer to this question in the case of
Saccharomyces apiculatus of Eeess and Pasteur. This fungus he finds
to be widely distributed on ripe, sweet, succulent fruits, from which
it is dispersed by the wind ; it occurs also on unripe fruits, but soon
perishes from want of nutriment. Eain and the fall of the ripe fruit
bring it to the ground, where it passes the winter, germinating in the
following summer.

S. apiculatus does not, like S. cerevisice and other ferments, cause
the production of inversion, and is therefore unable to induce
fermentation in saccharose, such as a solution of cane-sugar. It
corresponds in this respect to certain Mucorini, and is a far less
active ferment than the other species of Saccharomyces.

Plasmodia of Myxomycetes. — In October 1879, the Eev. H. H.
Higgins collected some fragments of decaying bark and wood on
which were growing five or six kinds of Myxomycetes. The specimens
were placed on a bed of wet sand under a bell-glass, for observation.

In about three weeks, upon the fragment on which were some
small portions of Fuligo varians Sommf (JEthalium), was developed a
bed or cushion of olive-brown jelly, highly charged with granules ;
length about 30 mm., breadth 10 mm., depth 3 or 4 mm. The
zoospores had not been noticed previously to their union in a compact
Plasmodium. The plasmodium was repeatedly observed both as a
whole and in detached portions ; but it was very sluggish, and the
only way in which motion could be "detected was by getting a view of
the mass under an oblique light, when some slight changes could be

* ' Bull. Soc. Bot. France,' xxvi. (1879) p. 326.
t • Htdwigia,' xix. (1880) p. 75.

INVERTEBRATA, CRTPTOGAMlAj MICROSCOPY, ETC. 675

noticed in the reflections from its surface. Its margin presented no
peculiar features.

Its sluggishness was supposed to be due to its being gorged with
food ; and, to test this inference, a portion of the plasmodium was
placed in a drop of water on an ordinary glass slide. It soon became
ditfused, filling the drop with a granular jelly, perceptibly brown in
colour though paler than the mass from which it had been taken.
Still, no movements could be seen, and signs of its irritability were
altogether obscure.

To eliminate as far as possible the results of satiety, the water in
the drop was evai)orated till the drop became a gummy or viscid
patch. A second drop of piu'o water was then placed on the slide, the
edge of the drop being about 3 mm. from the margin of the viscid
patch. The water in the drop w'as then led to the edge of the patch,
forming a narrow neck of water between the two. In about fuiir
hours the protoplasm of the patch had begun to pass through the
neck, leaving all the granules behind, and was gathering in a mass on
one side of the drop. The protoplasm and the water were alike
perfectly pure and colomdess. The edge of the protoplasm could
only be discerned by a difference between the refractive power of the
water and that of the protoplasm, now highly saturated with water.
Why the protoplasm kept itself together, and why it seemed to choose
one side of the drop, must be left unexplained ; but when the proto-
plasm had filled rather more than half the drop, its margin on the
growing edge was as sharply definite as the outline of the queen's
head on a new sixpence. Well-known amoeboid projections were
there, and others unfamiliar. The protoplasm was now evidently in
a starved condition, and was putting out feelers for food. The
feelers had slow motion, but the author was unable to observe the
circulation which must have been going on in the narrow neck.
Traces of extremely delicate interrupted lines could be seen on the
surfiice of the protoplasm, apparently diverging from the narrow neck.

Before another opportunity offered for rei)eating the experiment,
some change took place in the plasmodium, and further attempts failed.

Lichenes.

Epiphora.* — This genus of lichens was established by Nylandert
out of Parmdia cncausta, and, as Minks believes, on insufficient
grounds. He considers Nylander's Epii)}iorn encansla to bo a true
lichen, which, however, in consequence of unfavourable vital con-
ditions forms neither gonidia nor gonangia, and not even the true
hyphal tissue and apothecia ; so that it cannot even be separuto<l as a
distinct species, much less genus.

Nylander's genus Magriiop»if< has also, according to the same
authority, been fouJidcd on insufficient data.

Lichens of Mont-Dore and Haute-Vienne.J — An important
analytical catalogue of tbc Lichens of tlicso two departments by Lnmy

* ' Flora,' Ixiii. (ISSO) p. 105. ' t Ibid., lix. (187(5) p. 238.

X ' Bull. S..C. B(jt France,' vol. xxv. Is78 (1880) p. 322. Sw ' Revue Mvcol.,"
ii. (1880) p. lOG.

2 Y 2

676 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEAHCHES RELATING TO

de la Cbapclle, occupying 215 pages, lias just been published. In its
arrangement it recalls tbat of Dr. Nylander's ' Synopsis.' Tbe autbor
bas grouped 631 species or subspecies. 204 are common to tbe two
districts; 109 are peculiar to Mont-Dore, and 318 to Haute- Vienne —
tbat is, tbe former bas 313 lichens, and the latter 522.

Of the 119 species peculiar to Mont-Dore, 14 are entirely new,
and are : — Stereocaulon curtulum, S. acaulon ; Parmeliopsis subsore-
dians; Pannariairijptophylliza ; Lecanora suhintricans ; Lecidea aglmza,
L. instrata, L. planula, L. prcecontigua, L. badio-pallens, L, hadio-
pallescens, L. instratula, L. umbriformis, L. thiojiholiza. 17 others are
new to France,

With regard to tbe 522 species of Haute-Vienne, 36 are new,
viz. : —

Ephcebe intricata ; Collema chalazanellum ; Collemopsis coracodiza ;
Stereocaulon acaulon ; Lecanora scotoplaca, L. nigrozonata, L. sub-
mergenda, L. immersata, L. Uparina, L. Biparti, L. conizella ; Pertu-
saria leucosora, P.flavicans ; Urceolaria violaria ; Lecidea submersula,
L. acervulans, L. terebrescens, L. acclinoides, L. albuginosa, L. chryso-
teichiza, L. segregula, L. pauperrima, L. girizans v. opegrapMza,
L. Pichardi, L. conioptiza, L. modica, L. crepera, L. griseo-nigra,
L. sequax, L. gymnomitrii ; Melaspilea deviella ; Endocarpon leptopliyl-
lodes ; Verrucaria Mortarii, V. chlorotella, V. viridatula, V. faginella,
and 35 others.

Tbe catalogue is followed (1) by some notes on tbe geographical
distribution of the species and the nature of the substratum : the
autbor records, amongst other remarkable facts in botanical geography,
the presence on tbe central plateau of France of P. aquila, which
usually frequents the sea-shore ; (2) by a glossary of some technical
words frequently employed in Lichenography ; and (3) concluding
with an alj)habetical table referring to the numbers in the catalogue.

Algae.

Morphology of Floridese.* — Tbe subjects treated of in Agardb's
most recent work on tbe Floridefe are as follows : —

I. Tbe general appearance and external parts of tbe Florideae.
(1) General appearance. (2) Increase and branching of tbe external
parts. (3) Tbe root and the formations belonging to tbe root-
system. (4) Tbe stem. (5) Branches and leaves.

II. The structure of the Floride^. (6) Nature of the cell-
membrane and cuticle. (7) Tbe cell-contents in various stages of
development, and in diiferent layers of the thallus. (8) Tbe con-
nection between tbe various cells, and the means by which this is
effected. (9) Tbe various processes of cell-formation, (10) Relation-
ship of position and grouping of tbe cells ; their union into different
layers,

III. Organs of reproduction. (11) The antberidia. (12) Tbe
spbferospore-fruit and spbasrosijore. (13) The cystocarp or capsular
fruit. (14) Views in relation to tbe so-called double frixctification.

* " Floiideornas Morphnlop;i," ' Sv. Vetenskaps-Akad. Haiidl.,' xv. (1879)
No. 6. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 33.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 677

Bilateralness in Floridese.* — In contradistinction to the ordinary
multilateral structure of the Floridefe, some instances of bilateral
structure have been described by Nageli and Kny in the genera
HerposiiiJionia and Basya. These and other examples have now been
more closely examined by Ambronn.

The nature of the bilateralness is different in these two genera ; in
the former we have an instance of monopodial, in the latter of sym-
podial ramification.

In the first species described, Bytiphloea pinastroides, the apex of
the stem is strongly curved inwards, the axis of the stem grows by
means of an apical cell from which nearly cylindrical segments are
cut off, breaking up into five peripheral and one central cell. The
lateral organs are leaves and axes. The leaves stand in a single piano
upon the convex, tlie axes in two planes on the concave side. The
leaves have a limited, the axes in general an unlimited power of
growth. The former consists of undivided, the latter of segmented
cells. The leaves branch in a pseudo-dichotomous manner, the
number of ramifications being at most six ; the ramification of the
axes generally proceeds to the fifth order. Growth by enlargement of
the cells commences in the leaves at the apex, advancing to the base,
in the axes in the reverse order. Both those divisions by which the
segments break up into five peripheral and one central cell, and those
which result in the formation of the cortex, commence on the convex,
and advance equally on both planes to the concave side.

Bytiphhiia tinctoria differs from R. pinastroides ma,inlj in the outline
of the stem being elliptical instead of circular. The branching also
goes on to the seventh degree.

In Eelicothamnion scorpioides the axis has a strongly incurved cone
of growth as long as it is in active growth. The lateral structures are
exclusively axes, and stand alternately right and left. All the ramifica-
tions lie in one plane, which intersects the primary plane in the axis of
growth of the primary shoot at right angles. The ramification usually
proceeds to the sixth degree. The stem grows by an apical cell, from
which cylindrical segments are separated, each of these breaking up into
from four to seven, usually six, peripheral and one central cell. Each
of the former then divides again by a septum, the commencement of
the cortical structure. The primary axis lias unlimited, the lateral
axes limited growth.

In Ilerposiphonia fenelln and scciindn the axes and the short shoots
(Kurztricbcn) grow by means of an apical cell which is repeatedly
divided by septa; the number of segments is indefinite in the long,
definite in the short shoots. Eacli segment breaks up by longitudinal
divisions into peripheral cells and acentral one, the nuinberof the former
sometimes amounting to as- many as twelve. The lateral structures
on the axes are of three kinds, root-hairs or rhizoids, lateral or long
shoots, and short shoots. Tlie rhizoids arise from the first pcriphoml
cells of the axes, and henco on tlieir convex side. The long and short
shoots are formed from the undivided cells in strict ncropctal succes-

• • l{..t. Z. it..' xxxviii. (iKMt) p. l»;i.

678 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

sion ; but at first the long shoots lie considerably behind the short
ones in growth. The long shoots stand on the middle line of the two
flanks in regular alternation right and left. The short shoots stand on
the concave side in two planes also in regular alternation right and left.
Their growth closes either with an abortive apical cell or with the
formation of leaves. The leaves arise from the youngest segments,
and even from the apical cell itself ; they usually consist of rows of cells
branching in a pseudo-dichotomous manner. The leaves which are not
developed from the apical cell stand on the convex side of the short
shoots. There is no formation of cortex in either species.

Fructification of Chsetopteris plumosa.* — Although the peculiar
fructification of the Sphacelariaceae has been described in several
recent treatises, the favourable illustration furnished by Chcetopteris
j)lumosa appears hitherto to have been neglected. This deficiency is
now supplied by E. WoUny, who obtained his specimens from Spitz-
bergen and Heligoland.

This Alga usually grows on rocks and stones at a depth of from
10 to 20 metres below the surface, and is therefore very difficult to
obtain in the autumn and winter months, when the formation of the
reproductive organs is proceeding. The plant is also subject, in its
native habitat, to a pressure of water of from one to two atmospheres ;
and it is questionable whether the processes that take place under the
abnormal conditions of light and pressure occurring on the micro-
scopic slide would be the natui'al ones. These processes appear to
be completed about the end of December; there being two distinct
periods at which fructification is produced, in autumn and in winter.
That formed in the autumn is very scarce, and the exact function of
the reproductive bodies the author was unable to determine.

In winter are j)roduced the two kinds of sporangia characteristic of
the Sphacelariaceae, the unilocular and the multilocular.

The unilocular sporangia are produced in various positions on the
fertile leaves, but are always formed out of terminal cells. They are
usually spherical and of a dark brown colour, with granular contents,
which in all probability escape in the form of numerous zoospores, as
in Cladosteplms.

The multilocular sporangia are formed on special fertile leaves,
and are quite similar in external form to those of Cladostephus, as
described by Pringsheim ; they are of a greenish-yellow colour, and
are divided into a great number of compartments.

The author suggests that the structures described by him as the
autumn fructification and the unilocular sporangia are possibly due to
the attacks of parasitic Chytridia, a phenomenon so well known in the
Si)hacelariacefe.

Fructification of Squamarieae.t — Professor Schmitz has made this
a special subject of study, in the case of Cruoriopsis cruciata, a small
Mediterranean seaweed, which forms small blood-red or black-red

* ' Hedwigia,' xix. (1880) p. 65.

t ' SB. Niederrliein. Gcs. Natur- ii. Heilkuude ' (Bouu), Aug. 4, 1879.

INVERTEBEATA, CRYPTOGAMIAj MICROSCOPY, ETC. 679

patches on stones, slaclls, &c. The thallus is formed of a single plate
of cells which increases by marginal growth. From this rise in a
vertical direction simjile or dichotomously branched filaments which
are enclosed in jelly and enveloped in a common cuticle. The tetra-
sporangia are developed on certain of these vertical filaments, branches
of which suspend their apical growth, the terminal cell developing into
a tetrasporangium.

On tlje same plant are formed also the sexual organs, antheridia
and " procari)ia." The antheridia arc formed by rapid cell-multipli-
cation from the upper end of special filaments ; the procarpia in the
same way, the terminal cell of a filament developing into a long, slender
trichogyne. But in addition to these, procarjiia of a second kind are
also formed, in the shajje of short lateral 3-5-celled brandies on
numerous filaments of the thallus. The terminal cell of these lateral
branches, which always remain imbedded in the thallus, does not
develop into a trichogjnc, but retains the same form as the other
cells. After the trichogyne of the first kind of procarp has been fer-
tilized, a filament sjirings from its base, which branches and spreads
in the interior of the thallus, and there fertilizes a procarp of tlie
second kind by placing itself in apposition to one of its cells. Some
or all of the remaining cells of the procarp swell up in consequence,
and devcloj) spores. These chains of spores constitute the fructi-
fication of these Algae, to which Zanardini has given the name
" cystidia."

In other species of Squamariea) examined, the process was the
same, indicating an analogy to that which occurs in Dudresnaya.

Fresh-water Algse of Nova Zembla.* — The fresh-water Alga3 col-
lected in Nova Zembla by Dr. F. Kjollman are described by N. Wille
with the assistance of Professor Wittrock. The total number of
species is 172, belonging to 57 genera. Of Desmidieaj there are
100 species belonging to 13 genera ; the following new forms are
described and figured : — Oocystis (?) Novce. Semlice, Sorasirum (?)
simplex, Cosmarium pseudislli'mochondrum, subnofahile, KJellmani, and
Novce Scmlioi, Staurastriim KjeUmani and Novce Semlice, and Gonatozygon
Kjellmani. Microspora is united witli Confctva, and the mode of cell-
division in the latter genus minutely described.

Thermal Anabsena.t — In the thermal spring known as Fontaine
chaude do Dax, at a temperature of 57^ C, II. Serres noticed an Alga
which lined the basin beneath the surface of the water, and wliicli lio
regards as Anahcena thrmalis. It originally develops as long, slender,
colourless, coherent filaments, which produce small, globular organic
bodies, singly or arranged in rows. The cylindrical filaments finally
become mouiliform and curved. The separate portions afterwards
develop into branches which may be Mmftiijochulus laminostis Cohn,
and which combine into a complicated network. Between tlic threads

• Ofvera. af kougl. Vctensk-Aknd. Furli.' (1879), p. 13. Stc ' Bot. Ceiitmlbl.,'
i. (18S0) p. •^i,.

t ' iJull. Sw. de Burdii li Dux,' v. (I8S0) p. i;i. Stc ' I!..t. rLiitrall.l./ i. (1S80)
p. 2:^7.

680 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

filaments were also observed, wliicli presented a resemblance to

Oscillatoria labyrinthiformis.

Polycystis aeruginosa, a cause of the Red Colour of Drinking-
water,*— In a garden-ditcb in a village in West Prussia, from tbe
month of June till the end of August, 1877, and again in 1878, the
water assumed on the surface during the day a burgundy or reddish-
brown colour, changing at sunset to green. This has been determined
by Magnus of Berlin to be caused by a superficial growth of the Alga
Polycystis ceruginosa.

Rain of Blood, t — In the year 1878, J. Brun noticed on the
sacred mountain Djebel-Sekra, near the sacred city of Ouessin, in
Morocco, a so-called " rain of blood," which he found to result from
a quantity of minute shining flakes, which adhered closely to the rocks,
and presented an extraordinary resemblance to drops of blood. These
were found to be a young, undeveloped condition of Protococcus fluvi-
atilis, mixed with organic remains and extremely fine sand. The
explanation suggested was that they were brought by a strong south-
west wind from the Sahara, where the Protococcus is assumed to be
extremely abundant.

Endoehrome of Diatomacese.l — M. Petit has compiled a very
useful account of all that is at present known respecting the colouring
matter of the cell-contents of the Diatomaceas, a full translation of
which is appended : —

" Hitherto, so far as I know, there has been published no general
work on the endoehrome of the Diatomacese. There is, however, no
lack of papers, but they are scattered through the numerous works
which have appeared in England, America, Germany, &c., during the
last fifteen years. I am going to attempt to collect the data which we
possess on this subject, adding some of my own personal observations.
I have considered that, for clearness, it is preferable to put aside
the erroneous opinions which inevitably j)revailed in the early days
of the study of this very interesting group of unicellular AlgaB, and
only to consider those which have been recognized as correct by the
greatest number of observers.

1. Natureofthe Endoehrome. — Every one knows that the Diatomacese
are distinguished from other unicellular Algae by their envelope, which
is formed of two siliceous valves which fit one in the other, and also
by their colour, varying from pale yellow to dark broicn. They owe
this particular tint to a coloured plasma, which affects (in a manner
invariable for every species in a healthy state), sometimes the form of
lamince, sometimes that of granules.

This coloured plasma, called by Kutzing § gonimic substance
(^substance gonimique) is now known under the name of endoehrome,

* ' Ber. Versamml. Westpreuss. Bot. Zool. Ver. Marienwerder.' See ' Bot.
Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 195.

t ' Bull. Soc. Belg. Micr.,' v. (1880) p. 55.

j ' Brebissonia,' ii. (1879-80) p. 81.

!^ ' Die Kieselschiiligcn Bacillarieu oder Diutomeen.'

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 681

•which is not applied to the coloured plasma of the Diatomaccfe alone,
but also to that of all the Algfe in general, whatever their colour.

The endochrome of the Diatomace<\} does not give up its pigment
either to cold or boiling water, but after rather prolonged maceration
it is completely decolorized by cold alcohol, and the latter acquires
a brownish-green colour of greater or let^s intensity.

If the plasmic masses of the frustules ai-e examined after macera-
tion in the alcohol, they will be found unchanged in form. They are
still, as before, either laminae or granules — they have only lost their
colour. The plasma, without any sensible loss of form and without
diminishing, so to say, in volume, has yielded up all its pigment to
the alcohol. From this we are led to conclude that the colouring
matter impregnates the plasmic masses contained in the frustules, in
the same way as chlorophyll impregnates the chlorophyll-bodies in
the higher plants.

It is by maceration in alcohol that the pigment is extracted from
Diatomacese. It is first of all necessary to j^rocure diatoms free from
Oscillatoria or any other kind of alga ; wash them several times in
fresh water, if they are marine species, and afterwards in distilled
water ; let them drain for some time, and dry them rapidly between
sheets of filtering paper. The diatoms thus prepared are then
immersed in a volume equal to their own of 90 per cent, alcohol, and
left to macerate protected from the light. As soon as the diatoms
experience the contact of the alcohol they take a very distinct green
colour and the alcohol immediately becomes a golden yellow.

After six or eight days the alcohol has taken a dull green colour
more or less inclining to brown, and the diatoms have in a great
measure lost their colour ; but it is only after a month or more of
maceration that the plasma becomes completely colourless. Filtered
after eight days of maceration we obtain a concentrated alcoholic
solution of the pigment.

2, Historical. — M. Niigeli * was one of the first to mention the
colouring i)rinciple of the Diatomaccfc and describe its chemical
properties. He considered this colouring matter to be simple, and
gave it the name of diatomine, which wc will preserve, because of its
analogy to chlorophyll, Avhich is itself a compound body.

However, before bim, M. de Brcbissonf first, and later on
Kiitzing, J had remarked that " Melosira becomes green w'hen dried
upon iiaper." Kiitzing had moreover proved tliat the brown coh)ur-
ing principle becomes green under the influence of hydrochloric acid,
and that alcohol removes from the plants a green pigment resembling
chlorophyll.

In 18G7 M. Askenasy § had succeeded in isolating, in an imperfect
manner, it is true, the two colouring princii)les of diatomin, and liad
recognized their principal chemical and optical properties. Although
theio experiments were not at the time considered as conclusive, they

* ' Gathingcn ciiizcU. Algcn,' p. 7.

t Biol)ia.-<on iiml (todcz, ' Algiics dcs Environs (h> Falniso,' \K\vt, p. 11.

X ' HncMllftric'ii.' p. T^.

§ "Biit. /,. Kiimt. (kr Clilninphylla-FiirbstunV," 'But. Zcit.,' July, IMiT.

682 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

liave nevertheless been confirmed by the spectroscopic observations of
M. Nebelung in his study of the colouring matters of some fresh-
water Alga3.*

It was reserved for MM. Kraus and Millardet j to make known
the true nature of the pigment of the Diatomaceae. They succeeded,
by means of benzine, in separating from the alcoholic solution of
diatomiue two colouring principles ; one giving a fine golden yellow
solution and possessing all the properties of phycoxanthine, discovered
by the same authors in the Algfe of another group ; the other giving
a green solution having properties identical with tliose of chloro-
phyll Kraus and Millardet drew this conclusion from their obser-
vations, that diatomine is formed of a mixture of cldorophjjll and
-pliycoxan thine.

When an alcoholic solution of diatomine is filtered, a fact very
simple in itself gives a proof of the presence of two colouring
principles. If the filtering paper used is allowed to dry, we see a
broad coloured border formed round the margin ; the outer part being
tinted yellow while the inner is green.

To conclude the historical part I will cite the direct spectrum
analysis made in 1869 by Professor H. L. Smith of New York,J by
means of the microspectroscope. The spectrum obtained with the
small portion of endochrome from a single diatom, a Navicida, showed
the absorption-band in the red and complete absorption of the second
part of the spectrum, without intermediate bands. This spectrum
would seem to correspond with that of phycoxanthine. (Fig. 54,
No. 2.)

(3) Diatomine. — Let us now see what are the physical properties of
diatomine and of each of the elements of which it is composed.

A concentrated solution of diatomine, prepared according to the
process indicated above, has a green colour verging on brown if
examined by transmitted light. This colour may be more or less
deep. We shall see further on to what cause must be attributed
this variation in the tint. By reflection the same solution has a
carmine red fluorescence nearly resembling that of chlorophyll.

Concentrated sulphuric and hydrochloric acids give to the
solution of diatomine a tint of an intense bluish-green, and different
from that which the solution of chlorophyll takes with the same
reagents.

Ammonia gives no apparent reactions. Lime-water, and especially
baryta-water, render the solution of diatomine turbid, without produc-
ing any precipitate similar to that obtained with the solution of
chlorophyll.§

If a concentrated solution of diatomine is examined by the spectro-

* " Spectrosk. Untersuch. des Farbstof. einig. Siisswasser-Algen," ' Bot. Zeit.,'
June 21, 1878, pp. 394-395.

t " Etudes sur la matiere colorante des phycochromacees et des diatomees."
(Extract from ' Me'm. Soc. Nat. Sci. Strasbourg,' vi. 1868.)

X ' Sillimaii's Journal,' vol. xxxviii. (1869) p. 83.

§ Sec for furtlier details Ad. Weiss, 'Zum Bau uud dcr Niitur der Dia-
tomaceeu,' p. 115.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 683

684 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

scope, it will be seen that its spectrum closely approaches that of
chlorophyll (Nos. 1, 3, 4, 5). Through a layer of two centimetres'
thickness a wide black band can be seen (I,, Nos. 3-5), with
well-defined edges, in the red from 107 to 112 between the B.
and C Fraunhofer lines, and three small bands less marked and
softened off at the edges, one (II.) in the orange between C and D,
from 97 to 102, another appearing very faint 'y (III.) near the yellow
from 89 to 91, and finally one in the green (IV.) on the left of E,
from 78 to 81. The second part of the spectrum is completely
absorbed as far as F, that is, to the limit of the blue and green.

The .sensible difference between the spectrum of diatomine and that
of chlorophyll relates to band I. ; with diatomine the red band is
withdrawn as far as 113, whilst with chlorophyll this band stops at
111-5.

A very thick layer of the solution allows nothing to pass but the
rays of the extreme red, and a few of the yellow ones near to D.

The spectrum which I have just described is that which is most
frequently met with ; but it may happen that the bands III. and IV.
are not seen in the spectrum, although bands I. and II. are clearly
marked. These differences result, as will be seen, in a variation in
the composition of diatomine.

(4) Separation of the two Colouring Principles. — To separate the
two colouring principles which comi^ose diatomine, Kraus and Mil-
lardet employ the following process * : — Some diatoms are macerated
in alcohol, as has been mentioned above. " After some days, when the
alcohol is well saturated, the solution is filtered, and into it is poured
from two to three times its bulk of pure benzine. It is necessary to
use 36 per cent, alcohol, as in this case the two liquids do not mix, as
would happen if absolute alcohol were used. The whole is put into
a flask, and strongly shaken for a minute or two, and then allowed to
settle. The yellow colouring principle, being more soluble in the
alcohol than the green, remains dissolved in it, whilst the benzine
takes up the green. After decanting, the alcoholic solution is treated
with a fresh quantity of benzine, again shaken, allowed to settle, and
decanted ; this operation is repeated until the benzine ceases to be
coloured green." To isolate the two colouring principles it is suffi-
cient to evaporate the solutions.

The process of Kraus and Millardet has the inconvenience of
requiring a great deal of time, for which reason I prefer to employ
the following process, which leads more rapidly to the same result.

I take a solution of diatomine, prepared with 90 per cent, alcohol,
and I dilute it with an equal volume of distilled water to diminish
the strength of the alcohol ; the solution does not become turbid.
To this mixture I add chloroform in quantity equal to one-third of
the total volume. After shaking it for a minute or two I leave it to
settle. In a few hours the separation is complete; the chloroform
takes up the green colouring principle, and sinks to the bottom of
the flask, whilst the yellow, which is more soluble in weak alcohol,
remains in the superficial part. After decanting, I again wash with

* Loc. cit., p. 2(5.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 685

chloroform in tlie same way as before. Usually this second washing
suffices to remove all that remains of the green colouring princii)lc.
If the supernatant portion is turbid its transparency will be restored
by pouring into it a small quantity of 90 per cent, alcohol. We then
have the two colouring principles separately, and it suffices to
evaporate the solutions to obtain the principles in a solid state.

Green Colouring Matter — Chlorophyll. — The solution of the green
colouring matter possesses a fluorescence of a wine-red colour ; by
transmitted light it has an emerald green tint, but this tint may bo
more or less deep. The properties of this colouring matter show
a very great analogy with those of chlorophyll. Its spectrum
(Fig. 54, No. 3) is altogether similar to that of chlorophyll (No. 1) ;
the band III. above is less marked. We may therefore conclude
with Kraus and Millardet {loc. cit.) that the green colouring matter
extracted from diatomine, either by benzine or by chloroform, is no
other than the chlorophyll of the higher plants.

A proof of this opinion may be found by collecting the gas which
escapes during the respiration of diatoms exposed to the light. It is
easy to prove that this gas is oxygen, which evidently arises from
the decomposition of the carbonic acid by the chlorophyll under the
action of light.

Yellow Colouring Matter Phi/coxanthine. — The alcoholic solution of
yellow colouring matter has a brick-red fluorescence, less intense
than that of diatomine. By transmitted light it shows a fine golden
yellow tint, which disappears after a short time even in di ft used
light. If this solution is diluted with twice its bulk of distilled
water it neither precipitates nor becomes turbid.

Concentrated sulphuric and hydrochloric acids communicate to
this solution a greenish-blue tint, exactly similar to that of certain
Oscillatorieaj.

If we examine by the sjiectroscope a solution of yellow colouring
principle, concentrated and completely freed from chlorophyll, wo
find (Fig. 54, No. 2) a very black band in the red from 108 to
113, and the second part of the spectrum is absorbed as far as the
middle of the green at 65, decreasing as far as 70. The band I. is
displaced towards the extremity of the red, and docs not agree with
that of chlorophyll.

All the physical and optical properties just cited show that
there exists a great analogy between the phycoxanthine of Kraus
and Millardet and the yellow colouring matter of diatomine ; there-
fore I do not hesitate to consider them identical, as do these two
authors.*

Kraus a)ul Millardet have proved the scarcely perceptible presence
of band II. in the spectrum ot i)hycoxiinthiiio ; the cau.sc of tliis result
must be attributed to the process ciui)loyed by these two observei"S,
the benzine not succeeding in eliminating the last truces of chh)ro-
phyll.

M. Nebelung,t in using the same process to scjiarato the two
colouring princijiles, was also able to sco with groat difficulty band II.
* Loc. (it., \). 'S2. t l'"*"- •"'• . p •'"••'^-

686 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

I have never succeeded in seeing this second band, even with a very
thick layer of solution diluted with chloroform.

(5) Relation hetxceen the two Colouring Principles. — We will now
consider to what cause is due the more or less deep tint of the
different species of Diatomacete.

Chance having aided me in my researches, I have succeeded in
gathering pure species, and comparing inter se the results obtained.
I found first, in March 1878, very pure Diatoma elongatum in the
ditches of the forest of Bondy; secondly, in May, Nitzschia tenuis
and linearis, with some N. sigmoidea in the watercress-beds of
Mitry; thirdly, in September, my friend Dr. Leuduger Fortmorel
brought me from Saint-Brieuc a large collection of very pure Melosira
nummuloides ; and fom-thly, I was able to collect in June 1879 a
large and very pure quantity of Navicula (^Schizonema) ramosissima on
the rocks of Dieppe, where, at low water, the fronds can be removed
one by one.

It is the spectra obtained with the solutions of diatomine resulting
from these various gatherings that are represented in Fig. 54, Nos.
4, 5, 6, 7.

When the colouring principles are separated by means of chloro-
form it is seen that the chloroform assumes a dark green colour with
the solutions furnished by Melosira and Navicula, whilst it only
acquires a pale green tint with the solutions from Nitzschia and
Diatoma elongatum. The spectra of the solutions furnished by
Melosira and Navicula show the four bands of chlorophyll, whilst
the solutions from the two other species only show bands I. and II.
The first two species, therefore, contain more chlorophyll than the
two others, and as they have a browner tint it must also be concluded
that this dark tint is caused by the abundance of the chlorophyll.

This observation clearly shows that the plasma of Diatomaceaa
has not an equal capacity for chlorophyll, whilst their capacity is
nearly the same for phycoxanthine. Thus the relations between the
two colouring principles may vary enormously from one species to
another. This fact also confirms the opinion of M. Borscow,* that
the variation of colour in the different species is due to the excess of
one of the two pigments over the other.

Certain diatoms often take a pale green tint without any evident
cause [Navicula viridis, Fragilaria virescens). I incline to the
oijiuion of M. Borscow, who attributes this colour to the almost
entire disappearance of phycoxanthine under the action of a cause
still unknown.

The colour of the Diatomaceas varies sometimes in a sensible
manner, and especially it becomes darker towards the time of the act
of division, afterwards resuming its normal tint.

It would seem, therefore, that the proportion of chlorophyll
increases in the plasma at the epoch at which it attains its maximum
of vital force. The plasma assumes a still deeper tint shortly before
the formation of the auxospores, but resumes its natural tint as soon as
the silicification of the cell is about to begin, as I have succeeded in
* ' Die susswas. Diatomaceen dea Siid-Westlichens Russlands,' p. 67, note 15.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, IIICROSCOPY, ETC. 687

proving in the specimens gathered in the pond of Saint-Cucufa in
February 1877.

Besides these transient changes, the plasma usually preserves a
colour of its own. Thus, Navicula in general, Melosira, Pleurosigma
halticum, Bhabdonema, &c., present a very dark brown colour, whilst
Gocconeis, Nitzschia, Siatoma elonijaium, AmpMprora alata, &c., only
show endochrorae of a very pale yellowish-brown.

If we examine the spectra furnished by the different solutions of
diatomine we shall see that the bands I. to IV. of chlorophyll appear
when the latter exists in larger quantity than the phycoxanthine. On
the other hand, the bands I. and II. only are seen, and not bands
III. and IV., when the chlorophyll exists only in small quantity.
In the latter case it is the spectrum of phycoxanthine which domi-
nates, because the absorption of the second part of the spectrum
extends to 63 and decreases to 68.

(6) Conclusions. — It will be readily understood from the preceding
that certain Diatoraacea3, particularly the darkest, Melosira, Navicula,
&c., may become green by desiccation. In this case the jjhycoxan-
thine, which is very unstable . in the light, disappears first, whilst the
chlorophyll persists much longer.

The green tint which the Diatomaceae take under the action of
acids is communicated to them by phycoxanthine, which turns green
when in contact with acids.

The action of alcohol, and consequently that of glycerine, may be
explained by the often observed fact that phycoxanthine, being more
soluble in alcohol than chlorophyll, is separated from the latter,
which remains longer inside the frustules without dissolving. Per-
haps also the alcohol effects a simple molecular change in diatomine,
and separates, by isolating them, the yellow and green colom-ing
principles, which were intimately mingled.

To sum up : the endochrome of the Diatomaceae contains a colour-
ing substance, diatomine, which has much analogy with the chlorophyll
of tlic higher plants. This colouring principle splits up into phy-
coxanthine and chlorophyll ; but the proportions of these two colouring
substances varies in different species. The Diatomaceae which are
the darkest in colour are those which contain the most chlorophyll.
Finally, the spectrum of diatomine shows a great analogy to that of
normal chloroi>hyll."

Belgian Diatomaceae. — Dr. H. van Ileurck, of the Botanic
Garden of Antwerp, has published, with the aid of Hcrr A. Grunow,
the 1st part of a Synopsis of the Diatomaceae of Belgium, which
will consist of 6 parts, with heliographic plates. (Parts 1 and 2,
Ilaphidea3 ; Parts 3 and 4, Pseudo-Rai)hiderc ; Parts 5 and 6, Crypto-
Raphidcae.) Tlio author points out the favourable situation of Belgium
as regards these Algae : the North Sea coast furnishing nearly all the
marine species described by English observers ; the Ardennes, a f ooil
number of the European Alpine species, and tlio central parts of
Belgium, the fresh-water species forming the foundation <if the
European flora.

In liis preface the autlior says tliat all the drawings have bfcn

688 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

made with the greatest exactness, and by means of the most perfect
objectives. They were drawn by himself or under his eye, and
retouched by himself or Herr Grunow, who has also drawn the plates
of some of the groujis. The power used Avas one of 900 diameters
for the easier forms, and 1500 for the most difficult, and the drawings
•were then reduced one-third by heliography. Owing to the care that
has been taken, the excellence of the objectives, and the use of helio-
graphy, he thinks there can be no doubt as to the species figured.
" Unhappily one cannot say as much for the greater part of the
drawings of diatoms published during the last fifty years, a great
part of which are enigmas more or less insoluble even with the aid of
authentic specimens."

Dr. Van Heurck's botanical museum contains the original types
of the principal diatomographs — Kiitzing, Walker- Arnott, Eulenstein,
De Brebisson, &c.

New Deposit of Diatomaceous Earth. — At the May meeting of
the San Francisco Microscopical Society, the President announced,
that more of the celebrated Santa Monica diatomaceous earth, or
some similar to it, had been discovered. The deposit is about
seventy miles from the spot where the original piece was first dis-
covered by Mr. T. P. Woodward, two years ago. The present theory
is that the former piece became detached from the main deposit,
was washed into the sea, and then carried by the tide to the shore
on which it was found. Professor H. L. Smith, of Geneva, N.Y.,
reported by a letter read by the President that he had tried the
deposit and found it so rich and so nearly like the " Santa Monica,"
that he desired a quantity. Mr. Norris and ex-President Hyde had
also made a careful examination of the material, and the former pre-
sented a mounted slide which showed forms of great beauty and fully
as rich as the original of two years ago.

It is added that " scientists all over the world, it is to be hoped,
can now be supplied with this very interesting material, for which
they have been so anxious."

Preservation of Solutions of Palmelline.* — Dr. T. L. Phipson says
that the solution of palmelline obtained by allowing cold water to stand
for a day or two over the air-dried plant (Palmella cruenta), as described
by him,"!" like all solutions of albuminoid substances, is very subject to
decomposition, and at temperatures of 75°-80° F. putrefaction sets in
rapidly. The beautiful rose and yellow dichroic tint of the solution
becomes paler, and finally disappears, whilst the liquid takes a strong
ammoniacal odour and swarms with Bacterium, Vibrio, and Spirillum.
The latter are not easily to be distinguished (except by their small
size and that their motion is more rapid) from the Spirillum which is
present in the blood in cases of relapsing fever, during the pyrexia
only, disappearing as the temperature of the body falls.

Various methods of j)reserving the liquid in question without alter-
ing its composition and ojitical j^roperties were tried. Exclusion
fi-om air and light were only partially successful for short periods.
* ' Chem. News,' xli. (1880) p. 21G. f See this Journal, ante, p. 319.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 689

The addition of a little salicylic acid modifies tlie delicate purple-rose
tint and destroys the dichroism, so that tlie orange-yellow is no longer
seen by reflection ; moreover, it only preserves the liquid for a week
or two, after which the phenomena alluded to set in as above described.
Finally it was found that ether, which has no solvent action on pal-
melline and does not affect its composition nor coagulate it, may be
used with success to preserve the liquid for an indefinite period. It
is sufficient to add a small quantity of ether to the solution in a tube,
cork it, and turn it over once or twice so as to dissolve as much ether
as possible in the liquid, to preserve it with all its properties for
several months. As long as the contents of the tube have a strong
odour of ether no decomposition sets in, and the optical properties of
the palmelline remain intact.

This simple method of preservation may be found applicable to
many other organic substances upon which ether exerts no chemical
action.

MICROSCOPY, &c.

Looalities for Fresh-water Microscopical Organisms. — In the
recent discussions on the proposed purchase of the works of the
Metropolitan water companies, the case of Birmingham, where they
were acquired by the Corporation authorities, has been referred to.
London microscopists would have good reason to rejoice if the
result that has been obtained in Birmingham were repeated here, so
that an abundant supply of rare and interesting species of Rotifers,
Infusoria, &c., should be brought to, or rather within, every micro-
scopist's doors, without the drawbacks of pond-hunting. In Birming-
ham the ordinary supply of water for drinking and other purposes,"
received through the pipes, has just been found to contain the rare
Rotifer Anunjia longisjnna, first found last year by Professor Kellicott
of Buffalo, U.S.A. ; * also A. stipitata, Triarthra lonr/iseln, Saljjina
redunca, Dinocharis pncillum, and some Tardigrada.

Of other forms, the latest addition to fresh-water life is Ceratium
longicorne, very plentiful, but few living, though its congener Peridhiium
fahulatum seemed none the worse for its temporary sojourn in the
pipes. Large quantities of the curious compound organism, Dhwhrynn
seriularia, are also to be noted. Tlic Vorticellida3 and Entomostraca are
represented, the former by both branched and simple forms, and the
latter principally by Bosmina lomjirostrls, with his two long and curved
autennii3, evidently much the worse for his compulsory visit to town,
cither the distance travelled or the mode of transit being unsuitod
to his well-being.

Diatoms are mostly present in the stellate spicies, Astcriunella
formosn, with a few specimens of Synedra and ricurosigmn, while
Desmids are fairly plentiful in Palictstnim rirannlnliim and Ihjtdothcca ;
also Pandoriiia morimi, Clathrori/xlis, and other algiv.

]\[r. J. Levick, from whoso paper t the above list of organisms
is taken, suggests that their presence should rather be considered as

• See this Jouinul, ii. (1870) p. 1 J7. t ' Mi'H- Nut.,' iii. (1880) p. ICG.

VOL. III. '2 •/.

690 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

indicative of tlio general good quality of the water than otherwise, as
some of them, at least, arc known at home and abroad as the inliabi-
tants of deep, clean water only.

It is curious that hitherto neither Leptodora hynlina nor Hyalo'
daphnia Kalhergensis have been found by London microscopists, and
yet it cannot be doubted that it must be as plentiful in the neighbour-
hood of London as of Birmingham. For tlie former a deep reservoir
Kecms to bo essential, the net being dipped G or 7 feet.

Collection of Living Foraminifera.* — Having been occupied for
some years in the study of the rhizopodous fauna of the coasts of
France, M. Vandcn Brocck thinks it may be useful to those similarly
occupied to publish instructions with a view of facilitating the collec-
tion of Foraminifera. The original instructions are very concise and
thoy necessarily suffer in the further condensation which we have been
obliged to give them.

In general, the coarse and purely quartzose sand is very poor in
Foraminifera, though under certain favourable conditions interesting
results may bo obtained, when for instance it contains a sufficient
quantity of the debris of shells, sponges, algfc, &c.

The tide often washes up on the shores of an indented coast a
kind of littoral band, at high-water mark, consisting of algfe and light
debris of shells, sponges, &c., which generally furnishes good material
for the collection of Foraminifera. The debris, if it contains many
algse, should be washed in an abundance of water, lightly rubbing it
between the hands. To preserve the Foraminifera alive, salt water
must be used ; fresh, if the shells only are desired, the latter pre-
venting the saline efflorescences which would otherwise cover the shells.
The floating residue must be thrown away, carefully preserving the
sand deposited in the vessel. Precautions must be taken not to throw
away the Foraminifera, which, being lighter than the grains of quartz,
float above the sand, under (not on the surface of) the water. The
water can also be filtered through coarse muslin and the residue of
algfe, &c., rejected.

The algfe gathered on the beach, or better still, taken from the
place of their growtli, give equally good results. It is useful to
preserve unwashed a few roots of algfe and flexible polyps, as a great
number of living Foraminifera are attached to the leaves and false
roots.

We sometimes find on the coast, amongst the shells and Fora-
minifera of recent fauna, others coming from fossil beds, tertiary,
cretaceous or otherwise, which, bordering on the sea, are worn away
by the action of the waves, or crumble into it from the cliffs which
are undermined at high tide. Thus fossil Foraminifera become dis-
persed among the recent fauna, and it is therefore very important to
take into consideration the neighbourhood in which the sand has been
collected.

In the coarse sand and residues of the shore we generally find
nothing but rolled and worn Foraminifera belonging exclusively to

* ' .Toiirn. fk Micrngr.,' iii. (1879) p. 237.

INVERTEBUATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 691

the large, thick-slicllcd species; those with fragile and delicate shells,
that is to say the most luimci'ous and beautiful, can only live and
develop properly on muddy bottoms, or where the sand is fine and
somewhat slimy, and it is necessary therefore to investigate such
deposits also. For this purpose, some of the following indications
may be followed according to the locality.

Collect at low water (cither with the hand or a small dredge) the
superficial portion of the mud or slimy sand found in ports or the
mouths of rivers, or higher up in their course if the water is salt.
The glutinous coating, generally green or brownish, which covers tho
mud or slimy sand in quiet places often gives excellent results. The
thick black rnud beneath is less rich in Foraminifcra than the upper
portions.

It is also useful to explore tho large pools which remain at low
water, either on the shore when the sand is not too coarse, or in the
estuaries, or even the cavities often met with among the rocks or at
the foot of clifls. It must be remembered that the most favourable
spots are always those which are covered with very fine or slimy sand.
Sediments which are coarser but rich in fine debris, are also
favourable.

Whitish zones are sometimes seen on the margins of pools left at
low tide, composed of little heaps accumulated in the numberless
ridges produced in the sand by tlio retreating water. These whitish
heaps consist of small organic debris, spiculro of sponges, si)ines of
echinoderms, fragments of shells, &c., often mixed with a quantity of
Foraminifcra, of which a great many can be collected by a spoon.

By means of a simple magnifier the presence of living Foraminifcra
can be established on the spot. If, for example, some of the deposit is
examined in a shallow vessel (such as the cover of a tin box) and
under a small quantity of water, the Foraminifcra will bo readily
recognized as small coloured points of red, rose, or yellow — tints
which are given to the thin shell of many species by the colour of tlie
sarcode within.

Tlie places whei'o the water is relatively quiet arc the only really
fav«)urablc ones for finding Foraminifcra. 13redgings from a dei)th of
from 8 to 10 metres (when the water at tho bottom is little moved,
however rougli it may be on the surface), always give good results,
unless tlic bottom consists of })urely quartz deposit or gravel, as is tlie
case in regions subjected to rapid submarine currents, as in the Straits
of Dover. Tho interest of tho collecti(ms increases in proportion to
the depth at which tlicy liave been made.

For the benefit of those who liavo not dredges at their command,
it may be mentioned that the mud brought on board by tho anchors
of ships, or the detritus on tho nets of fishermen, furnish sj)ocies which
are not found on the coast.

Foraminifcra may also be found in tho contents of tho stomachs of
fishes, molluscs, crustacea, actinisp, mednsjo, salpio, i^'c.

Certain species of Annelida, Tf rebel Uv. for instance, form a pro-
tecting sheath wliich often contains Foraminifcra not found on the shore.

'J'ho sand and slinio oi salt marshes in ncrioilical connnunieation

2 z 2

692 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

with the ocean furnisli species which almost exclusively inhabit
brackish water, and others which present special characters.

In the same way as the cases constructed by the larvfe of the
Phryganeidse give in fresh water a rich harvest of small shells and
Entomostraca, so also in brackish water they contain Entomostraca
and Foraminifera often of rare and interesting species.

Oyster and mussel beds are also favourable spots, but in examining
Foraminifera from artificial oyster-beds it must be taken into con-
sideration whether the oysters are of French, English, American or
other origin, as Foraminifera foreign to the region may be found
which were originally brought there with the oyster shell.

In a given locality many variations are found in the faunal
elements, according to the time of collection ; it is advisable, there-
fore, to collect at different seasons, and during two or three consecutive
years, if the fauna is to be thoroughly studied. Changes of temperature
are caused by currents, especially deep currents, which thus influence
the fauna of the bottoms over which they pass as well as by the foreign
matter which they bring. It will be useful therefore to find out
whether they are hot or cold, periodical or continuous, and to know
their origin and direction.

In conclusion, the author points out that his instructions apply
equally to the Entomostraca which generally accompany Foraminifera
in their different habitats.

Cleaning Foraminifera.* — After having read Mr. Vorce's article
on cleaning Foraminifera,! it occurred to Mr. K, M. Cunningham to
use electrical force to extract the shells in the dry way. For this
purpose he used a small tin lid, 4 inches in diameter, filled with a
preparation of rosin and sealing-wax, the resinous surface of which,
for convenience, he excited with an artist's brush, known as a " badger
blender." The sand from sponges or foramiuiferous marl is spread
thinly over as large a surface as' convenient ; the cake of rosin is then
excited by passing the badger's-hair brush over it several times, and
then turning the excited surface of the resinous cake down to within
a quarter of an inch of the material, and passing it gently over it.
The result will be that innumerable light particles will be attracted
to the excited surface, and will remain there, while the sand will
be attracted and repelled, thereby leaving a large percentage of
Foraminifera, spicules, &c., adhering to its surface, which may then
be brushed off" into any suitable receptacle. The above plan may be
tested on a small scale by exciting the end of a large stick of sealing-
wax. Damp weather is unfavourable for the experiment.

Wax Cells.f — Eeferring to Dr. Hamlin's note on this subject,§ it
is suggested (1) that before applying pressure to the outer edge of the
disk a little turpentine should be applied to the lower surface with a
brush extending to the proposed width of the ring, and (2) that
instead of a sliglit moistening of the knife-blade, water should be used
freehj.

* ' Am. M. Micr. Journ.,' i. (1880) p. 88. t ^nfr, p. 497.

X 'Am. M. Micr. Jouru.,' i. (1880) p. 98. § Ante, p. 507.

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICEOSCOPY, ETC, 693

Carbolic Acid for Mounting.* — Mr. F. Barnard, of Kew, Victoria,
writes tliat some years ago he mentioned the use of carbolic acid (the
best crystallized with just sufficient water to keep it fluid) in mount-
ing microscoi)ical objects, and is led to believe that the subject is com-
paratively unknown in England, though in use in Victoria more than
ten years, and to such an extent that turpentine is seldom used in
many studios. The first specimen he saw it tried upon was the head
and jaws of a spider mounted by Mr. Ralph, the President of the
Microscopical Society of Victoria, which led Mr. Barnard to try it in
various ways to render objects transparent, and now he seldom uses
anything else. Whether it is animal or vegetable tissue the eflect
will be the same, the acid will in a very short time render the object
transparent, and the Canada balsam will when applied run in as
readily after it as turpentine.

In the case of such an object as a palate of a mollusc, wash it well
in water and remove it to a bottle of the acid for a few hours, or if it
is desired to mount it at once, place it after washing on a glass slip
in proper position for mounting and drop one or two drojjs of the
acid on it. At first it will look thick and cloudy ; warm the slide
over the spirit lamp, let it cool, and drain oJBf the acid ; if not
perfectly clear when cold, apply some fresh acid and warm again ;
place on a cover if not previously done, and apply the balsam, by
means of a little heat it will run under. With polyzoa the easiest
plan is to jilace them in a little hot water which softens them, tlien
lay them out on a glass slip ; place another on it which is of suflicient
weight to keep them in position while they dry, then drop them into
a bottle of carbolic acid and soak for a time ; twenty-four hours will
render any polyzoa transparent without rendering them brittle, and
the author says he has mounted specimens perfectly clear and trans-
parent in ten minutes from the time they w^ere alive in the zoophyte
trough, ti'eating them as above recommended for palates. For
gizzards and parts of insects he also considers that nothing cornea
near it.

One great advantage carbolic acid has over turpentine is that it
never renders specimens brittle. They can be pulled about as readily
as when frcsli. Should there over be any clouding, it arises from the
moisture of the object, not from the carbolic acid, but from want of
it. It is comparatively inexpensive, far less unpleasant in smell, and
not so sticky and dirty in use as turpentine. It is not necessary to
let the object dry, which invariably alters the shape more or less ;
still, should it be dry it is not any time becoming transparent com-
pared with the old process of soaking in turpentine. We all know
how difficult it is to render- Foraminifcra transparent and free from
air ready for mounting in balsam. One trial of carbolic acid will
convince the most sceptical of the advantages it has over turpentine,
benzine, &c. The only drawback to its use is that it often renders
some vegetable tissues too transi)arcnt.

Double-staining of Vegetable Tissues.!— Ill this paper the writer
(who only givts an initiiil) says tliut, having used a number of dyes in
♦ 'Sci.-Go.ssi|>," 1880, ]\ I'M. + ' Ain. M Mii-r. J,.nrn.,' i. (1880) p. 81.

694 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

double-staining vegetable tissues, the conclusion he has arrived at is,
that no rules can be given which will ensure success in every case.
The process is familiar to every working microscopist, but the limited
number who have fairly succeeded in differentiating the tissues is
somewhat surprising. In his own experience he has met with some
sections which obstinately refused to act as they should under the
operation of the two colours, but even these, with patient manipula-
tion, can be induced to show some results, even though they may not
exhibit that sharpness and purity which it is the aim and object of the
mounter to obtain.

A writer in ' Science-Gossip * has come nearer to the true laws
governing the process than any one who has written on the subject ; he
has at least indicated the direction in which the practical worker
must look to attain success. The theory of the present author is
slightly different, and consequently his process varies somewhat, but
in the main it is the same. The capacity for staining tissue resides
more in the colours than in the tissue itself. A stain may be per-
manent, unless it is driven out. It may be driven out by some
solvent, by some bleaching process, or lastly by some other colour.
Some tissues hold the stain more tenaciously than others, probably on
account of their varying density. Thus the spiral and bass-cells will
retain a colour longer under the influence of a solvent than the softer
and more open parenchymal cells. He endeavours to take advantage
of this property by giving the whole tissue all of one colour that it
can be induced to take, and then driving it out of the parenchymal
tissue by a stronger colour, stopping the process at the moment when
the second colour has completely replaced the first colour in the soft
tissues, and before it has begun to act upon the more dense cells. If
a section be stained with roseine and then be left long enough in a solu-
tion of Nicholson's blue, the whole section will be blue, with no visible
trace of red. If it be taken out before the blue has permeated the
entire tissue, the red will show, in some parts, quite clear and well-
defined among the surrounding blue tissues. Following out this prin-
ciple, that exact point must be determined when the blue has gone far
enough.

In practice the theory is carried out as follows : A two-grain
neutral solution of eosin is used, and in this the prepared sections are
preserved until the operator is ready to use them. They keep per-
fectly well in this solution, and are always ready to undergo the final
process, which requires but a very short time before they can be placed,
fully fiinished, under the covering glass. After taking them from the
eosin solution, they should be passed through 95 per cent, alcohol,
merely to wash off the superfluous colour, and then placed in a half-
grain solution of Nicholson's blue made neutral. The time required
in the blue solution varies with different tissues, and in the nice adjust-
ment of this time lies the whole success of the operation. Three or
four sections of each kind are generally spoilt in determining the exact
time required. A section is taken from the eosin, holding it lightly in
a pair of forceps, rinsed off rapidly in alcohol, and then immersed in
the blue, still in the forceps, while ten can be counted with moderate

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 695

haste. Then quickly place it iu clean alcohol, and brush lightly with
a camel's-hair brush. This immersion in clean alcohol seems to check
the operation of the blue instantly. It should then be examined under
a 1-inch objective to determine whether the exact point where the
blue and the red remain distinct has been reached. If the blue has
not occupied all the softer cells, another section should be taken and
put through the same process, counting twelve, and so on, until the
proper point is reached ; or, on the other hand, decreasing the count
if the blue has infringed upon the red in the more dense tissue. Having
thus determined the count for the sections of that particular material,
the remainder of the sections are passed through tlie blue into the
alcohol, merely counting off the immersion of each section. Then
place the sections for a few moments in absolute alcohol, which seems
to fix the colours, then through oil of cloves into benzole, and moiint
in dammar and benzole. It is sometimes advisable, with delicate tissues,
to merely rinse off the blue in 95 per cent, alcohol, and fix the colours
at once in absolute alcohol, but every operator will learn the minor
details for himself in the manipulation.

Of course, with the " rule of thumb " method of counting off the
time slight variations will occur which will mar the beauty of the
finished product ; besides which minute differences in the thickness of
the section will affect the result, and even a distance of a quarter of
an inch iu the same stem will make a difference in the density of the
tissue, which will be obvious in the sharpness of the colours under the
objective, so that the operator should not be disappointed if out of a
dozen slides only four should be worth preserving. The others can
go into the borax-pot to be cleaned for another operation. The beauty
of those which do pass inspection will amply repay for the labour on the
spoiled ones.

Tlie writer says that he has perhaps been needlessly minute in the
description of the process he has employed, but he has been so often
hampered by the lack of minuteness in descriptions of processes by
others, vvliich he has been endeavouring to carry out, that he deems it
better to err upon the safe side, even at the risk of being considered
dry or prosy.

A no*e is added as to the uso of cosin. He was attracted to it by
its exquisite purity of colour under transmitted light, and its perfect
transparency. Sections preserved iu its solution were found always to
retain their transpai'eney, and did ncjt become clogged or tliiek with
colour, so that when taken out after months of innnersion the most
dense cells were no deej)er in colour than the solution itself. So far
as regards its hold upon the tissues, it is as strong as roseine, or any
of the heavier colours. He cannot testify as to its permanence, but
has some slides that were prepared over a year ago, and appear to bo
as bright and pure as when they were mounted. Contrary to tho
experience of some otliers, he has not found that tlie benz«do has any
bleacliing effect, and it has b^en used with dammar in preference to the
usual balsam. Slides prepared with dammur, however, should have a
thick ring of vaiiiish run around them, as the danim.ir is brittle, and
sliould not 1)(; trusted ub^nt,' to Jk^M tiic covering glass.

696 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Wicker sheimer's Preservative Fluid and Vegetable Objects.* —
Dr. K. Prantl describes the results of his cxperiraeuts with this
fluid,f which, though so valuable for animal substances, he judged
beforehand would not be applicable to parts of plants. The density
of the fluid removes the turgidity of the cells without harden-
ing the protoplasm quickly ; hence the delicate parts of the plant
lose their firmness, and consequently their relative jiosition, even
in the fluid. The flowers of Tropoiolum, for examjile, collapsed
after being a few hours in the fluid, and became unrecognizable.
The lamellae in the pileus of different Agnrici were greatly distorted,
not only after being taken out of the fluid, but whilst still in it.
Those parts of a plant which possess sufiicient consistency alone
preserve their shape, as Ferns rich in sclerenchyma {Blechnum
australe), and the leaves of Conifer^e, objects which can be preserved as
well dry. If pine branches, however, arc laid in the fluid, the falling
off of the acicular leaves in drying is prevented, but this can be done
just as well by concentrated glycerine.

Further, the fluid kills the protoplasm, hence the colouring
matter held in solution by the cell-sap comes out in a short time.
Chlorophyll has hitherto been retained, but changed into a brownish
tint.

Hardening Canada Balsam in Microscopic Preparations by Hot
Steam.l — The inconvenience arising from the slowness with whicli
Canada balsam hardens, especially in summer, has been felt by all
engaged in making permanent preparations. M. Passauer describes
a small and simple apparatus which he made for the purpose of over-
coming this objection. It consists of a round vessel of tin, about
18 cm. in diameter and 6 cm. deep, with a tin cover 19^ cm. square
(for convenience in placing the slides), to the under surface of which
a circular rim about 1^ cm. decji is sohlered and made to fit easily
into the vessel. On the upper side the cover is also furnished with a
rim about 5 mm. deep. In one corner of the lid, but inside the lower
circular rim, a tube 6 cm. in diameter and 10 cm. long is soldered
and passes through the lid.

In using it the vessel is half filled with boiling water, covered
with the lid, and the prej^aration to be hardened laid on the latter,
and the temperature of the water kept at boiling-point by a lamp
placed under the vessel. Special care must be taken that the steam
does not become too hot, otherwise bubbles would be produced in the
balsam and the prejjuration be spoilt, hence the small chimney is
provided, through which part of the steam can escape. By this means
the balsam can be hardened in 1 to 1^ hours.

Ringing and Finishing Slides.§— The following article by Dr. C.
Seller gives some useful hints : — " A gi'cat deal may be said in favour
of and against the careful finishing of microscopical slides, but nobody
will deny that a nicely-ringed preparation looks better in a cabinet,

* ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 26. t Ante, p, 325.

t ' Zeit.sclir. f. Mikr.,' ii. (1880) p. 194.
§ ' Am. Jouin. Micr.,' v. (1880) p. 94.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. G97

and is better taken care of by its owner and his friends, than one
which is not thus embellished, and which shows a greater or less
amount of balsam irregularly distributed around the edge of the
cover, I will, therefore, jot down a few remarks on the ringing and
finishing of slides. After tlie object has been mounted in balsam
and the cover apjilied, it will be found that there is always a greater
or a less surplus of balsam which comes out from under the cover.
This should be allowed to dry, and when thoroughly hard it can be
scraped off with a knife. If a round cover has been used, the slide is
then centered on a turntable, and the cover cleaned with benzoic,
which is best done by dipping a soft linen rag in the benzole and
applyiug the wet place with the forefinger to the centre of the cover-
glass ; the turntable being revolved, the finger is quickly drawn
toward the edge of the cover and the rag removed. One or two such
wipings of the cover will be found sufficient to remove all traces of
balsam or extraneous dirt. The slide itself may then be wiped also
with benzole, and it is then ready for the application of a ring.

The best ringing medium for balsam mounts is dammar dis-
solved in chloroform, because if it is inclined to run under the cover
it will readily mix with the mounting material without leaving a
visible trace behind. I find it best to apply the brush to the edge of
the cover almost dry, the slide on the turntable sj)iuuing rapidly
around, so as to make a track in which the dammar solution will
readily flow. The second application is to be made immediately
following the first, with the brush full, so that there will be a small
drop of solution on the end, which is allowed to touch the edge of the
cover without letting the brush itself come in contact with the glass.
This is repeated until the ring is bnilt up to the proper size. It
should be borne in mind, however, that in drying, the ring of dammar
will shrink considerably, and thus it is necessary to make another
application after a few hours' drying.

Dammar or balsam dissolved in benzole or benzine is objection-
able, because the solution will evaporate too quickly to allow of a
proper building up of the ring, and if such is attempted the re^^ult
will be a ring full of minute air-bubbles. White zinc cement,
Brunswick black, asphaltum varuisli, and other coloured cements may
be employed to cover the first ring of dammar ; but they should never
be used alone, as they are sure to run in sooner or later, no matter
how hard tlie balsam may be. I think that the glass-like ring
obtained with dannuar gives a better appearance to the slide and is
more durable than any of the rings made with coloured cements.

When glycerine mountings, or objects mounted in a watery
medium are to bo ringed, -it is necessary to first get entirely rid of
any glycerine which might be on the cover or slide. To do this I
apply a spring clip to the slide, which serves to hold the cover iu
position after it has been centered, and then wasli off the surplus
glycerine with a stream of water from a syringe. The slide is then
set on end to dry, and a ring of a waterproof cement is applied around
the cover. Such a cement may be bouglit under the name of Bell's
cement, the composition of wlnVli is a t^ecrct. A bitter and less

698 RECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

exj)ensive cement may, however, be made by dissolving 10 grains of
gum-ammoniac in 1 ounce of acetic acid (No. 8), and tben by adding
to this solution 2 drachms of Cox's gelatine. The resulting liquid
flows easily from the brush and is waterproof, especially so if, after
the ring has set, it is brushed over with a solution of 10 grains of
bichromate of potash in 1 ounce of water. But what especially
recommends this cement is its great adhesive power to glass, even if
there should be a little glycerine on the edge of the cover. After the
gelatine ring is dry, any other cement may be employed to cover it,
according to the fancy of the preparer.

When a considerable number of different objects are being pre-
pared at the same time, it is of great imjiortance to be able to tell
one from the other, so as finally to label them correctly without
subjecting them to a careful microscopical examination, A pajier
label, under the frequent necessary handling of the slide, becomes
soiled, and the writing frequently illegible ; while a figure or even a
full label, written with a pen upon the glass slide, will remain intact
throughout the manipulations of cleaning and ringing, and at the
same time can easily be removed by a little rubbing with a rag dipped
in water.

In order to facilitate the finding of slides in a large collection,
it is advisable to place the label bearing the name of the object
always on the same end, and if two labels are used to place the one
with the prejjarer's name on the right hand, and the other bearing the
description of the object on the left."

Cleaning Cover-glasses.* — Dr. E. U. Piper, of Chicago, has
suggested a very simple method of cleaning cover-glasses without
breaking them. Upon a glass plate 2x3 inches are cemented, in
the form of a V, two thin strips of glass. A cover-glass may be laid
U2)on the glass plate, inside of the V, and cleaned by rubbing freely,
being held in position from slipping by the sides of the V.

Preparing Sections of Coal. — Mr. E. T. Newton, the Assistant-
Naturalist of the Geological Survey, who has successfully examined
the microscopical structure of many varieties of coal, gives f the follow-
ing description of the methods employed by him in making his
preparations : —

" One important point to be noticed at the outset is that nothing
like emery powder can be used for the grinding, as the grains embed
themselves in the softer substance of the coal, and, when the section
is finished, will be seen as minute brip;ht sj^ots, thus giving to the
section a deceptive appearance. For the rough grinding an ordinary
grindstone may be used, and for the finer work and finishing a strij)
of ' pumice-stone ' (or corundum stick), and a German hone (or Water-
of-Ayr stone). The form of these which has been fouud most con-
venient is a strip about 1^ inch wide and about G inches long ; the
thickness is immaterial : one of the broader surfaces of these must be
perfectly flat.

* ' Ain. Nut.,' xlv. (1880) p. 465.

t F. Rutlcy's ' Study of Rocka ' (8vn, LoJiduii, 187'J). \\ 71.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 699

Having selected a piece of coal with as few cracks as possible,
cut off a piece with a saw about three-quarters of an inch square and
perhaps one quarter of an inch thick. One of the larger surfaces is
then rubbed flat on the pumice-stone, keeping it well wetted with water,
and then polished upon the hone, also moistened with water. Some-
times it is found to be advantageous to soak the piece of coal in a very
thin solution of Canada balsam in chloroform or benzole, as directed
for softer rocks, or in a solution of shellac in spirits of wine ; in either
case allowing the specimen to dry thoroughly in a warm place. The
polished surface is next cemented to an ordinary microscopical glass
slip (3 inches by 1 inch) with the best marine glue ; and this process
requires care, for it is not easy to exclude all the air-bubbles, and if
they are not excluded the section is very apt in the last stages to
break away wherever they occur. The piece of coal is next reduced
to about one-sixteenth of an inch by means of a grindstone ; some of
the softer kinds may be cut down with a penknife. Care should be
taken not to scratch the glass in the process of grinding, for most
sections of coal, when once ground thin, are too fragile to allow of their
being removed from the glass, but have to be covered and finished off
upon the same slide. The pumice-stone or corundum stick is next
brought into use. The section being turned downwards, hold the
glass slide between the middle finger and thumb, whilst the forefinger
is placed upon the centre of the slide. In this manner the section may
be rubbed round and round over every part of the pumice, using plenty
of water, until it is sufficiently reduced in thickness ; experience alone
showing how far this process may be carried. The section is finally
rubbed in a similar manner upon the hone (or Water-of-Ayr stone). It
is sometimes found necessary to use the hone even while the section is
absolutely opaque, for many coals are so brittle that they crumble to
pieces upon the pumice long before they show any indications of
transparency. "When sufiiciently transparent the section may bo
trimmed with a penknife and the superfluous marine glue cleaned off.

The section is now to be moistened with turpentine, a drop of
ordinary Canada balsam (not too hard) placed upon it, and covered in
the usual way. Whatever heat is necessary should be carefully applied
to the cover-glass by reversing the slide for a moment or so over a
spirit lamp, otherwise the marine glue may be loosened and the section
spoiled. Balsam dissolved in benzoic must not be used for mounting,
as the benzole softens the marine glue, and a good section may in this
way be destroyed."

Cutting Rock Sections. — Mr. Hanks considers it a mistake to cut
a rock section so thin as to be wholly transparent. In some cases
this is necessary; but, as- a general ruh', the section should be hft as
thick as possible, and strongly lighted by the aid of a parabolic
reflector. The beauty of many specimens is destroyed in tho eflbrt
made to fit them for observation by simple transmitted light.
Mr. Attwood's plan * to cement tlio section to a glass slide, and to
examine it from time to time under the Microscope as tho work
progresses, is very important, as it will enable the student to stop at

• Ante, i>. 325.

700 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tlie exact j)oiut wlien light can be passed tbrougli it, but before many
of the most interesting features are destroyed by over-cutting.

Simple Mechanical Finger.* — The devices hitherto employed as
" Mechanical Fingers " depend, Mr. M. A. Veeder writes, upon the
lengthening of the part which supports the substage apparatus by means
of a tube specially fitted for the purpose, or by means of the para-
boloid, so that by a rack movement the slide may be lifted free from
the stage into contact with a hair or fine wire, which is held by the
stage forceps or by some contrivance designed especially for the
purpose. Contact having thus been established, the slide may be
lowered, leaving the object adhering to the hair, or by moving the
sliding stage the object may be pushed in any direction desired.
There is, however, another plan, which he finds to be simpler, and
even more effective in certain respects. With many Microscopes a
condensing lens is supplied, which is fitted to the limb of the instru-
ment by a ball-and-socket joint and sliding stem-rod. Unscrew this
lens and put in its place a piece of cork through which a needle
passes at a right angle to the stem. It is well to have two or three
pieces of cork fitted with needles having difi'erent points ; one, for
instance, may have a human hair projecting slightly beyond its point,
the hair being kept in place by winding with fine thread and coating
with gum ; another may have a flat point, made by breaking off and
grinding the fractured end ; other forms will suggest themselves
as experience may determine. The ball-and-socket joint should be
clamped or wedged, so as to move quite stifiiy. Bring the point of
the needle into view under the objective, and it may be made to touch
the slide, or be lifted away from it by simply turning the stem-rod.
Objects which are seen to adhere to the needle are lifted at once, and
another slide, slightly moistened by breathing on it, may be sub-
stituted for the one on the stage, to which the objects may be made to
adhere at any desired point by turning the stem-rod as before. By
moving the mechanical stage while the point of the needle is in
contact with the slide, objects may be pushed wherever desired on
the slide. In this case it is a decided advantage that both needle and
object remain within view however the stage is moved. Thus dirt
may be scraped away with the greatest ease.

It is evident that such a contrivance, consisting essentially of a
ball-and-socket joint, and a sliding stem with a button attached to the
latter, so that it may be readily turned, might be fitted to the stand of
an ordinary bull's-eye condenser, and thus become available for use
with any microscope-stand.

Slides from the Naples Zoological Station. — At the June meet-
ing of the Society some slides were exhibited (for the most part
illustrating the early stages of Invertebrates t), sent by the Zoological
Station at Naples through Mr. A. W. Waters. Microscopists will be
glad to hear that the Station have commenced a department under the
management of Mr. Fritz Meyer for the preparation of microscopical
objects on a large scale, a list of which they intend shortly to issue.

* 'Am. M. Micr. Jouru.,' i. (1880) p. 88. t See Uat, iwst, p. 736.

INVEKTEBEATA, CRTPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 701

If the slides are generally of the character of those exhibited the
supi)ly must, we are afraid, for some time fall short of the demand, as
there will be few biologists who will not desire to add some of the
slides to their cabinet.

Homogeneous-Immersion Lenses.* — Mr. A. A. Biagdon, referring
to the strong impression prevalent among microscoj^ists that objectives
having high interior angles, say 90° and upwards, are of no use
except to amuse diatomists, says that this is by no means the true
state of the case. On comparing the definition obtained with a water-
immersion objective of 105° interior angle (by Tolles) with other
lenses having 120° or 140° air angle, the image with the latter was
shown to be imsatisfactory. And again on comparing the water-
immersion with the same maker's recent homogeneous-immersion
having 127° interior angle, the advantage was decidedly with the
latter. He refers to the series of microphotographs by Dr. J. J.
Woodward f of A. pellucida mounted in balsam, with Zeiss's ^^^ and \
oil-immersions, together with other notable objectives for comparison
of their respective merits. Among these lenses were a i and -^jj inch
by Spencer, glycerine-immersion, and a -jig -inch oil-immersion by
Tolles, and says that " it is only necessary for any unprejudiced
person to examine this series of photographs to decide at once as to
the superiority of the homogeneous-immersion lenses in defining
power."

Mr. Bragdon approves of Mr. Tolles retaining the screw-collar
with homogeneous-immersion lenses for these reasons, — that it affords
a means of using water as an immersion medium when several
preparations are being mounted of one kind, and it is desired to make
a cursory examination of them at once with high powers before any
change shall have taken place, and without waiting for covers to
become fixed by hardening of the balsam ; the collar-adjustment is
also useful, even with the homogeneous-immersion, to obtain the best
image with diifercnt lengths of draw-tube.

Fluid for Homogeneous Immersion. J — Mr. Bragdon finds that the
best medium for homogeneous immersion is glycerine brought up to
the required index by making a saturated solution witli it and sulj)ho-
carbolatc of zinc : there is only one, and that not a serious, objection
to its every-day use, viz. that it is just a little too thick.

Dr. Blackham also says § that, " good heavy glycerine is the best
immersion medium he has found out of many ; it docs not evaporate,
soften cement used in mounting objects, nor smell badly, is not
poisonous nor irritant, and is in every way satisfactory."

Errors of Refraction in the Eyes of Microscopistsll— Dr. J. C.
IVIorgan points out tliat the requirements in construction and adjust-
ment of glasses and the results of work done must vary greatly with

* ' Am. M. Micr. Journ.,' i. (1880) pp. 89-93.
t Poo this .Tournnl, ii. (IHTK) p. C,~2.
X 'Am. M. l\Iicr. Jotirii.,' i. (ISSO) p. 92.
§ ' Eu<i\. Mooh..' xxxi. (IS.SO) p. 100.
il 'Am. Juurii. Micr.,' v. (IS^O) p. 91.

702

RECOED OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

individualities of the workers' eyes, of wliich one of the most important,
but least thought of, is astigmatism. Owing to this defect, the^ later
pictures of Turner are found to be distorted, the tendency being to
exaggerate the size of the paler dimension in painting it. On the
contrary, in microscopical drawing (as with the camera lucida) the
improperly pale line will be perpetuated and the perspective mis-
represented. Distortion of dimensions generally may be perpetrated
by the most careful observers, and endless disputes may thus arise.
A familiar example of this is shown in the case of the Podura scale.

Micrometre or Micromillimetre.* — Dr. Phin points out that
" micrometre " is inadmissible in America at least, as it would there
be spelt " micrometer," and confounded with the instrument of that
name, a difficulty which the difference in pronunciation would not
remedy. He thinks, therefore, that the proper way is to " fall into
line " with the British Association Committee, and adopt the nomen-
clature suggested by Mr. Stoney, calling the thousandth of a milli-
metre (or the millionth of a metre) a — -, or sixth-metre — the prefix

sixth here indicating the negative exponent of 10 by which the metre
is to be multiplied.

Micrometry and CoUar-adjustment.t — Dr. Beale, in his ' How to
Work with the Microscope,' recommends that scales be drawn or
printed, showing the size to which hundredths or thousandths of the
inch or centimetre are magnified by each of the objectives used, and
one of these scales corresponding to the objective employed, pasted on
every drawing. A writer in the ' American Monthly Microscopical
Journal ' recalls the fact that in all objectives made with a collar-
adjustment, the magnification at the " open " and " closed " points
varies so much, that attention to this is necessary in making the scales
as suggested. Whilst the fact is well known, the amount of the
difference does not seem to have been sufficiently taken into account.
This will be best illustrated by a table showing the variations in a
few objectives of well-known makers, taken with a tube 10 inches in
length, measured from the stage-micrometer to the end of the tnbe
proper (not to the end of the eye-piece) : —

Oculars.

Objective.

A.

B.

C.

Geo. Wale, i inch, open

„ „ closed

Powell and Lealand, ^ inch, open ..

„ „ M closed ..
Spencer and Sons, -Jg inch, open

„ closed ..
Wm. Wales,' iV inch, open

„ '„ closed

262
283
.S92
600
462
633
617
733

433
406
650
833
750
887
850
1200

680
725
1025
1300
1200
1400
1350
1900

' Am. Jon in. Micr.,' p. 117.
Am M. Micr. .loiim.,' i. (1880) p. 67.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 703

It will bo seen that the range in magnification is greater with some
lenses than with others, the dilfcrence increasing with the increase of
power, but with all it is so great, that scales made without taking it
into account would be worse than useless. Accuracy can only be
obtained by using the micrometer with the collar-adjustment at the
same point at which the object sketched has been examined, unless,
indeed, one were willing to take the trouble of compiling a table for
each objective, with the magnification noted for each division of the
collar through the whole range from " uncovered " to " covered."

Zeiss's Microspectroscope. — This instrument, shown in Fig. 55
(half natural size), has, in addition to a comparison-prism and arrange-
ment for reducing the length of the spectrum, a micrometer by which
the position of bright or dark lines in the spectrum is determined by
a direct reading of their -wave-lengths. For this purpose a micrometer
scale is projected on the spectrum by reflection, by the divisions on
which the wave-lengths at every part of the spectrum (according to
Angstrom) can be directly read off in parts of a micromillimetre.
The divisions on the scale read to the second decimal place ; and the
third decimal may be easily estimated by the eye. For convenience
of recording observations there are lithographed sheets with ten
scales of wave-lengths enlarged to lOQ mm.

Fig. 55.

A is a shallow drum between the field- and cyc-glasses of an
achromatic eye-piece, and contains the 'SGravesande slits, comparieon-
prisni, &c.

B is a cylindrical tube over the oye-piecc, and contains the Amici
prism. It carries the lateral tube C, which has a small adiromatio
objective at o at the focus of which at i is the micrometer scale. B
turns on the pivot m and is hold in the axis of the cyc-piccc by a
catch e ; by pressing this catch, B with all the parts attached to it
may be turned about the pin m, so that the eye-piece is free.

704 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

D is a stage with spring clips for fixing the preparation whose
gpectrum is to be compared. The comparison-prism is brought up
before one half of the slit by the lever p. The screw / regulates the
width and g the length of the slit ; when the latter is opened as wide
as possible, the central portion of the field is free ; so that the upper
part (B C) being turned back, the Microscope may be used in the
ordinary way. The screw h (underneath the tube C) serves to adjust
the scale. This is to be fixed before commencing, so that the Fraun-
hofer line D coincides with 0 " 589. The parallelism of the scale with
the spectrum is secured by turning its frame i. The mirror h throws
light on the comparison-prism, and I on the scale.

The microspectroscope is inserted in the tube of the Microscope
like an ordinary eye-piece, and is fixed in the required position by an
attachment screw beneath A. When the object to be examined is of
considerable dimensions, no objective need as a rule be used on the
tube, otherwise as low a one as possible. As a variation in the dis-
tance between the scale and the lens o would alter the value of the
divisions of the scale, very short-sighted or long-sighted observers
must use proper spectacles (or have a spectacle lens placed on B) to
produce a medium distance of vision in order to see the lines and
numbers on the scale with perfect sharpness of definition. For exact
focal adjustment of the spectrum, the eye-glass is movable beneath the
collar B. It must be so fixed that the Fraunhofer lines in the spec-
trum of daylight plainly appear along with the scale, and on moving
the eye there should be no ajipearance of parallactic displacement
towards the division lines.

Ross's Improved Microscope (Plate XVI.). — Since this instru-
ment was first exhibited to the Society * several improvements have
been made in the details of the construction by which the stand is
rendered more serviceable as a practical working instrument.

The vertical pillar supports have been adopted for the main limb,
an alteration which permits the free use of the swinging substage
with the Microscope in a vertical position, a point of special importance
for work with fluid preparations.

For central light the substage can now be clamped in the optic
axis, and the illumination exactly centered by means of the usual
centering screws.

For convenience in using low powers — when the substage con-
denser may be dispensed with — the substage itself may be entirely
removed, the mirror alone then serving as illuminator ; for this
purpose the focus of the mirror has been shortened, and means have
been provided for more readily adjusting it to any required position.

The mechanical stage, with rotatory motion in azimuth and the
facility of being inverted, has been considerably altered by the intro-
duction of phosj)hor-bronze metal'in the parts liable to flexure, and the
stage has been rendered one of the most rigid and at the same time
thinnest yet made. The modifications in the construction of the
stage, though making but little change in its general appearance, are
specially imjiortant in detail.

* See this Jouriiiil, i. (1S7S) pp. 1G3 and 197.

JOURN. R. MICE. SOC. VOL. III. PL. XVJ.

Ross's Improved Microscope.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

705

The slow-motion focussing adjustment has been remodelled so that
the focussing is extremely sensitive and yet free from all rocking
motion, and the bearings of the rack and pinion movements have been
increased in size, and a greater smoothness of motion obtained.

The iris diaphragm can be used either attached to the achromatic
condenser or placed in the stage itself immediately beneath the
object and almost on a level with the upper plane of the stage, so as
to give every facility for regulating the amount of light.

Professor Huxley's Dissecting Microscope. — This instrument
(Fig. 56), made by Messrs. Parkes and Son, of Birmingham, was
arranged by Professor Huxley, and was shown by him during his
term of oflfice as President of the Quekett Microscopical Club. It is
designed specially for use either as a simple or a compound Micro-
scope, and arranged with regard to portability for travelling.

Fig. .56.

The stage— which is furnished with rotating diaphragm, and arm
for carrying a condenser — consists of a circular disk of black plate
glass, with a large central aperture, and is mounted on a brass tripod
stand strong enough t(j bear considerable pressure. The arm, carrying
the powers and compound body. Las a coarse rack movement, and fine
screw arljustmcnt, and can be turned aside if required.

On Professor Huxley's suggestion, that tlic old plan of snnrijKf on
VOL. III. 3 A

706 EECOED OF CURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the objectives and compound body should be abolished, a new and
more expeditious method has been adopted. Instead of screwing the
body on to the arm, and then screwing the objective into the body,
the objectives are made to slide down smoothly into the arm (as
illustrated in the iigure), and may thus be used as simple powers, for
dissection. When the compound body is required, it may be in-
stantaneously slid over the objective, and is thus ready for use, with
a great saving of time and trouble.

Should it be desirable at any time to use objectives having the
Society screw, provision is made for so doing, by the lower end of the
tube which passes through the arm being cut with such a screw. A
loose adapter having the standard screw is also supj^lied with each
instrument, which will receive the objectives belonging to it ; by
screwing them into the adapter they may be used with another
Microscope if necessary.

The following is the (verbal) description which Professor Huxley
gave of the instrument :* —

" In a Microscope to be used for delicate dissections, certain quali-
fications were absolutely essential. In the first place, there must be
perfect steadiness, the stand must be firmly and well supported, and
be of sufiicient strength and weight to bear the pressure put upon it
without moving. Next, it must be of convenient height, so that in
working the hands may get a steady suj)port ; it should fulfil these
two conditions, and yet not be so large as to be clumsy. The next
point was as to the lenses : they should be of such a form as to give a
maximum of power, and yet at the same time afford sufficient distance
between them and the object to admit of needles being moved freely
to an angle of 60'' with the surface of the plate, because the efficiency
of the needles obviously depended upon the angle at which they could
be used, and if a lens were made with a wide face it would very often
interfere with the movements of the needles. Then there was another
point of still greater importance : when a careful dissection had been
made, it often became desirable to examine it with a much higher power
than the one which had served the purpose of preparation, and provision
ought to be made to enable as high a power as was desired to be
brought to bear without disturbing the object, and this could only be
done by placing a compound body above the simple lens.

[The President then exhibited the instrument which he had devised
to meet these requirements as described above.]

" In offering the instrument for discussion, the question would arise
as to the best form of lens to be employed, and he hoped to receive the
opinions of the members upon this and other matters ; but at present he
used an ordinary low-power achromatic objective, made so as to slip into
the arm without screwing; there was great convenience in thus mounting
and using a simple lens. . . . Now, supposing they had made their dis-
section successfully, the point was how to be able to convert the instru-
ment at once into a compound Microscope without disturbing either the
lens or the object. One of his aims in life had been to get Microscope-
makers to abolish screws, which he regarded altogether as abominable
* ' Jomu. Quek. Micr. Club,' v. (1879) p. 144.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 707

inventions ; and in this instance the compound body had been made to
slip over the outside of the socket in which the objective had been
placed. This plan answered fairly well, but he thought it would be
better to have it made to fit rather more easily, and to be secured by
a bayonet joint, because, supposing that the power employed was not
Eufficieut for the purpose, then inconvenience arose unless the body
could be got off again with sufficient ease to ensure the object remain-
ing undisturbed by any jerk or movement. With the improvement of
the bayonet joint it would be easy to remove the body, and having
taken out the first lens, and di'opped in say a ^-inch, the body would go
on again without any disturbance. He had the instrument before them
made upon that pattern, to see how the thing would work ; he had used
it for the past six or eight months incessantly, and he could certainly
say that for his requirements it was the best thing he had seen, and he
believed that with the little addition of a bayonet joint it would be as
nearly perfect as any instrument of the kind could well be. He
thought that all persons who had been occupied in making minute
dissections would see that it had value, and met all the requirements of
the most delicate work. He hoped that the members would examine
and criticize it, and make any suggestions that occtured to them for
its further improvement, for it was becoming of very great importance
to examine thin sections and minute portions of dissections without
subjecting them to any such disturbance as to cause the slightest
alteration, and it was equally important to be able to bring to bear upon
them under such conditions the highest powei's that might be needed."

Nachet's Chemical Microscope.* — In this Microscope (shown in
Fig. 57) the objective is placed beneath the object on a brass box
containing a mirror silvered on its upper surface. To this box is
screwed the body containing the eye-jjiece and a sliding tube which
is used as a coarse adjustment. The silvered surface of the mirror
is entirely protected from the action of the air, as the two oi)enincrs
of the box are furnished with jiarallel glass plates. The focal ad-
justment is made by raising the objective and by the micrometric
screw V which moves the stage. On the latter is a circular glass
cell C, the bottom of which is pierced with a hole of 18 mm., closed
by thin cover-glass well luted with Caaada balsam or with silicate
of potasli. The object to be examined is placed on the thin glass.
An arm B carries a mirror which reflects light from above upon the
object in the cell. The latter is provided with two glass taps R R',
and is covered by a disk of plane glass hermetically sealed by a little
glycerine or grease placed around the edge of the cell. Three small
brass uprights keep the coll and its cover in place and immovable.
The instrument has a new arrangement for seeing the diflereut parts
of the preparation. The body, and consequently tlie objective, is
moved by means of two transverse screws O and T. The plate which
supports the box is furnished with two transverse divisions in con-
nection with the movement of the screws, so as to have in eflect a
finder (the divisions aro not represented in the figure).

* Tmnslated (with 8lip;lit nltorntinns) from note furnislied by M. Naohet.

3 A 2

708

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

If one reflects, M. Nacliet says, on the necessity of attaching india-
rubber tubes to tlie glass taps, and f)f being assured of the perfect
immobility of certain anatomical elements, the advantages of the
above arrangement will be at once understood. Experiments on the
absorption of gas and on the rarefaction and compression of air could
not be more simple. The apparatus gives at the same time a moist,
a warm, and a gas chamber, and moreover the highest powers can be
employed without any inconvenience. The necessary humidity re-
quired for the object is maintained by means of wetted blotting-paper,
&c., placed in the cell C.

Fio. :7

Two parts, as will be seen, are essential in this instrument — first,
the moist chamber ; and secondly, the arrangement of the instrument
itself. As regards the latter, it is very similar to those of Dr. J. L.
Smith and Dr. Leeson,* and the one hitherto made by M. Nachet ; but
there is this capital distinction, that the optical ajiparatus in the new
instrument is movable in all directions, and that the object remains
immovable upon the stage.

More recently M. Nachet has replaced the cell above described by
smaller cells of the same kind attached to brass plates ai'ranged so

* See Dr. W. B. Carpenter's ' The Microscope and its Eevelatious,' 5tli ed.,
1875, p. 108.

INVERTEBRATA, ORYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 700

as to always liave a fixed position ou the stage. By mcaus of the two
transverse divisions of tlie plate carrying tlie optic ajiparatus, any
point of the liquid under examination can be immediately refouud.
This is very important in researches on the culture of ferments, which
are often under observation for several days, and are continually
being modified. The form of the cell rcijresented in the figure
renders the Microscope inconvenient for many consecutive observa-
tions ; the new plan allows the systems of culture to be multiplied in-
definitelj', so as to enable the necessary verifications on any desired
point to be made daily. It is only necessary to take precautions
when the cell is detached from the stage.

Tiffany's Prepuce Microscope- — Several arrangements have
hitherto been devised fur showing the circulation of the blood in the
human subject, so as to obtain assistance in the diagnosis of disease,
amongst which are the " Fra)num Microscope " of Dr. Urban Prit-
cbard,* and the apparatus devised by Dr. C. Hueter for examining
the lower lip, which we recently described under the title of
" Cheilo-angioscopy." f

Dr. Tifiany, of Kansas, U.S.A., suggests + the prepuce as the most
suitable part for the examination of the circulation. On account of
its thinness, high powers with transmitted liglit are available for
the examination. To hold the prepuce in such a position as to render
the examination very satisfactory, he uses a thin piece of celluloid,
wood, or other light substance, with clamps projecting from tlie under
side, which fasten on each side of the lower half of the prejnice, and
by thumbscrews at the free end of the instrument render it tense
both laterally and longitudinally. Near the attached end of the in-
strument is a circular opening, ^ inch in diameter, under which is
fastened a thin cover-glass, so that the mucoiis membrane of the lower
half of the prepuce lies in contact w^ith this cover-glass. In this
position, with the prepuce spread out nearly as thin as the web of a
frog's foot, it is clamped upon the stage of the Microsc()i)e, and by
transmitted light can be examined by tlie highest powers. A vessel
should be selected which is immediately beneath the mucous mem-
brane, and it should be pressed (^uite firmly against the cover-glass.
Two woodcuts are given, showing the proper manner of applying the
clamp and conducting the examination.

Dr. Tiftany has examined several patients, but " having no status
as a guide, has scarcely been able to determine whether what was
seen was normal or abnormal." He is, however, satisfied that this
method will i)rovo a valuable means of making and confirming diag-
nosis of constitutional diseases, as well as a means of watching the
progress and effects of therapeutical agents.

Tolles-Blackham Microscope-stand. — Eeferriug to tlie descrip-
tion of this stand at p. Ti'JO, Dr. iJlackhum writes that the snbstage arm
is not moved circularly by the milled head B ; it slides freely but

* Sec Dr. Heiilo'a ' The Mi(.Tosco|io in Medicine,' Itli cd. (1S7)>) p. 503.
t See tliirf .lunniul, ii. (187;») p. lUO.

X 'St. lionii IMfil. iin(l Surj;. Joinii.,' xxxviii. (1880) pp. ,^87-'J. Sec olau
' Loiiiavillc Med. Her.,' ii. (18H0) p. :tO.

710 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

firmly by hand, B being merely a clamping-screw to hold the substage
apparatus in position, and is but seldom needed, though of great
importance under certain conditions.

Weber-Liel's Ear-Microscope.* — The following is the description
given of this instrument in the ' Berlin Microscopical Journal ': —

To the many and varied adaptations of the Microscope an addition
has lately been made, the possibility of which was formerly thought to
be extremely doubtful, viz. the inspection of internal parts of the
human body which are difficult of access. Although such parts, as the
oral cavity and auditory passage, have previously been examined by
means of a lens and illuminating mirror, the low magnifying power
of the apparatus set narrow limits to the examination. Now, however,
the instrument of Dr. Weber-Liel has made it possible, afc least for
the ear, to detect the finer abnormalities of structure and in many cases
to discover and remove the cause of disease.

The Microscope, which is shown in Fig. 58, consists of three prin-
cipal parts : —

(1) The Microscope proper.

(2) The mirror with illuminating lens.

(3) The pneumatic chamber and flexible tube.

The body of the Microscope Tj has a conical piece 0 attached to
its lower extremity, several of which of different sizes are supplied
with each instrument so that one may be screwed on which is adapted
for the particular case and will entirely fill up the auditory passage.
Above this is a chamber into the side of which an indiarubber tube
opens, having a mouth-piece at its other extremity ; this chamber is
closed at the upper part by the mirror K which fits air-tight so that
when the instrument is introduced into the ear no air has access except
through the tube. The Microscope T^ with the eye-piece T slides
into the txibe T2, the eye-piece having a micrometer at m. The
mirror which closes the pneumatic chamber is inclined at an angle
of 45° to the axis of the tube, with its reflecting surface turned
towards the illuminating lens G. The reflecting surface has its
coating removed in the centre so that a clear view down the axis of
the Microscope is obtained through it. The magnifying power of
the instrument is about twenty diameters, which is strong enough for
viewing the small parts of the ear, as the malleus, stapes, &c.

Besides the parts above figui*ed and described, there should be also
the ordinary speculum and two lenses. One of these lenses, magni-
fying about five diameters, is fixed in a short tube and inserted at Tg
for making a preliminary examination and (what only could hitherto
be done) seeing the position of the parts. The second lens, which
magnifies about three diameters, is used in making the operations. To
give room for the instruments in the latter case, the cone 0 is rejjlaced
by one somewhat longer, which is open at the side; this of coui'se
interferes witli the complete shutting-in of the pneumatic chamber, a
matter, however, of no consequence as this chamber is not wanted
during an operation.

* 'ZeitbcLr. f. Mikr.,' ii. (1880) p. 175.

INVEETEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY^ ETC.

711

If whilst the Microscope is in position the air in the external
auditory passage is slightly condensed or rarefied by apjilying the
mouth to the tube, it will be seen how the tympanic membrane and
the manubrium of the malleus are respectively set in motion ; and
a more definite judgment can be „ _„

formed as to anomalies of tension
in pathological alterations of tissue.
This can be exactly measured by
connecting the tube with a mer-
curial manometer. A most im-
portant feature in connection with
the instrument is the fact that by
means of it the caj^acity for vibra-
tion of the acoustic ajjparatus can
be studied in living persons. For
this purpose, the tympanic mem-
brane, or if this is wanting as well
as malleus and incus, then the stapes
must previously be sprinkled over
with powdered starch, by blowing
a little into the auditory passage.
The starch particles appear under
an intense light as strongly reflect-
ing points. On speaking or singing
loudly in the mouth-piece of the
tube, it will be seen that particular
particles of starch are drawn out
into small lines, from which the
capacity for displacement of the
powdered parts, as regards tlie

action of sounds, can be measured by means of tbu lui.
eye- piece.

The small mobility possessed by the other segments of the
tympanic membrane compared with those of the posterior portions, then
becomes very apparent, and especially in certain pathological con-
ditions we arc able to detect how the mobility of the parts is
not reduced, but considerably increased contrary to what is usually
assumed. The instrument will in general lead to conclusions respecting
changes of diagnostic importance such as could in no way be supposed
with the ordinary mode of examination with intense sunlight ; for
instance, accumulations of secretion behind the tympanic membrane,
which would otherwise be invisible, can be plainly seen.

Trichina-Microscopes— Hager's, Schmidt and Haensch's, Waech-
ter's, and Teschner's. — The number of Trichina-Microscoiies invented
in Germany is continually on the increase. The following are four
forms which do not aj^pcar to havo been hitherto described in
this country : —

Hagcrs * is shown in Fig. 59, and is said to be very useful, not

* H. Hagir, ' Diis Mikroskoi* ' (8vc, Iloiliii, l^TJ).

A- in the

712

KECOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 59.

only in tlie case of Trichince, but also for vegetable tissues. It is a
Microscope combined with a compressorium. The latter consists of
a metal ring c, wliich is pressed upon the stage by a spring /, and
can be released by pressing the lever d. The ring being raised, the
object to be examined (placed between two glass plates) is laid upon

the stage, and the ring is
then allowed to descend
gently upon the plates.

Schmidt and Haenscli's
(shown in Figs. 60 and 61)
also includes a combined stage
(E) and a compressorium (C)
(acted upon by two screws),
but has in addition a special
arrangement for coarse and
fine adjustment of focus. The
inner tube carrying the eye-
piece and objective, which
slides within the outer tube
attached to the pillar of the
Microscope, is provided with
a projecting pin which moves
in a slot cut obliquely in the
outer tube like the thread of
a screw, so that by rotating
the milled rim (B) of the inner
tube it is made to slowly as-
cend and descend as desired.
It is claimed * for this
plan that it obviates a defect
in centering found to exist
in Microscopes with the ordi-
nary sliding adjustment, with
which it constantly happens
that after the tube has been
drawn up to change the
" powers, a suspicious spot

which it was desired to examine is found to have disaj^peared from
the field of view. The objection to the arrangement will probably be
found in the tendency of the tube to " run down " ; at least that was
found to be so in the case of an arrangement somewhat analogous
in principle, proposed by Mr. Fiddian some years ago.

The second improvement claimed is the movement of the stage
in two rectangular directions by the lever A and rack and pinion D.
It is pointed out that it is impossible even for a practised micro-
scopist to move the object in the absence of mechanical apjiliances
without missing any portion of the surface. By means of a test
plate consisting of a photograph (a square German inch in size) of
the numbers 1 to 700, small enough to be clearly legible under a
high power, it was found that the error was as much as 30 per
* Sco ' Imliishie-lilaltcr,' xvi. (1879) p. 289.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

713

Fig.

cent., and as the figures were more readily distinguishable
Trichince, the error in the latter case
will jn-obably be still greater, and a
matter, therefore, of some importance.
The construction and advantages of
this mechanical stage are described by
the inventors somewhat on first prin-
ciples (much in the same way as the
matter would have been dealt with
fifty years ago in this country), and
appear to show a greater want of fa-
miliarity with mechanical stages than
we should have supposed to exist.

With the Microscope are supplied
the two long strips of plate glass
shown in the figure, between which
specimens of the meat to be examined
are placed. The lower and thicker
one has five squares drawn upon it,
each measuring a square (German)
inch.

Waeclders. * — The describer of
this form suggests that, ingenious as
the construction of the one previ-
ously mentioned is, it possesses several
drawbacks, one of which is that " it is

than

Fig. 61.

' I'liariiiiiccutiaclif (.Vntialliullc,' i. (1880) \k 102.

714

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

rather complicated and if used daily for several Lours would be likely
to want rci)airing," and another, that it cannot be used as an ordinary
Microscope.

In the new form, shown in Fig. 62, the slide is composed of two

Fig. G2.

circular glass plates, 5 mm. thick and 8 cm. in diameter, which are
pressed firmly together by a metal knob at their centre. They thus
form a compressorium at the same time. The under plate, which may
of course be thickly covered with the preparations, is divided into
four sections, which are numbered for identification. To prevent any

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

715

fluid coming away, the under plate may be made a very little larger
than the upper.

These plates are turned with the finger about their axis (which is
fixed to the stage so as to move from behind forwards, and vice versa),
an arrangement which allows the examination of a continuous series
of preparations lying in the ijcripheries of different circles 18 to
24 cm. in circumference, whilst by the instrument last described a
continuous line of only aboxit 3 cm. in length can bo examined.

When one periphery has been examined (which is indicated by a
catch-spring), a rack and pinion moves the plates in a radial direction
(as a rule it is best to begin with the inner circle), and they are again

Fig. (Jo.

revolved ; and so on until the last periphery has been examined. There
is hero the great advantage that in adjusting a fresh circle the size of
the field corresponding with tlie power used can be taken into account.
Thus tho lowest power recjuires the rack to bo moved three teetli, the
medimn jjowcr two teeth, and the highest jiower one tootli forward.

\Vh(!n tlio plates are r-enioved from the stage the instrument can be
used as an ordinary ]\Iicrosc(jj)e.

Ti'schurs * is a simpler form, of tho design shown in Fig. 63.

It has a wide inclined stage, on which is a bar attached to two

supports, after the manner of a parallel ruler. ]5y means of tho

adjusting screw h, the bar can be moved to and from the aperture

* 1"'. W. llufltrt, ' MikiObkopiBchc Flcibchboschau ' (8vo, Leipzig, li<yO) j). 51.

716

RECOED OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

in tlic stage. Ui3on the stage is a compressorium. The bar is first
brouglit close to the pillar of the Microscope, and the compressorium
moved along it until all the flesh in that strip has been examined.
The bar is then, by means of the adjusting screw h, advanced for a
distance equal to the diameter of the field of view, and the compres-
sorium is then moved in the reverse direction, and so on. The square a
is said * to be a small scale for the purpose of determining the extent
of movement each time. On account of the depth of the compres-
sorium, it must be reversed in order to examine it comi^letely.

Matthews' Improved Turntable. — There have been many im-
provements suggested in microscopical turntables, most of which have
dealt with the means for securing the glass slide upon the table. Very
few improvements have been made in the means for imparting the
necessary rotatory movement to the table, and none which have come
into general use.

Dr. Matthews' invention has for its chief object to provide a
ready and efficient means for obtaining a rapid and steady rotary
motion to the table, without adding materially to its complexity and
consequent cost, as at present constructed. This object he effects
thus : —

Fig. 64 is a plan view of the machine, and Fig. 65 a side view of
the same, both figures being drawn \ size.

Fig. 64.

A A is a base-board of mahogany, upon which is erected the plat-
form B which serves as a support for the wrist of the operator. This
platform is hinged at h, so that it can be turned up out of the way
when desired. Near the front end of the base-board A is secured a
pivot-pin c'. Upon this pivot-pin is mounted, so as to turn freely,
a broad flanged pulley D. Above this pulley is mounted the
turntable E, also turning freely upon the pivot-pin. The under
side of the turntable is provided with a short neck e, having a ring of
ratchet teeth. The upper flange of the pulley is fitted with a spring
pawl d, which engages with the ring of ratchet teeth on the under side
of the turntable. Underneath the platform B a flat spring F is
secured by one of its ends, and to the free end of this spring is attached
a cord, which is led forward and passed around the pulley. It is then
carried over a second pulley G, from which it hangs pendent.

* The figure is a ' cliche ' from tlie original woodcut.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

717

It will be readily iinclcrstood from the foregoing description that
by pulling downwards upon the cord a rotary movement will be
imj)arted to the pulley D, and through the pawl and ratchet teeth to
the turntable E. By relaxing the pull upon the cord, the spring F

Fig. 65.

will draw the cord back again, carrying round the pulley D and pawl
d in the reverse direction. The weight and momentum imparted to the
turntable will be sufficient to maintain its rotation during this backward
movement of the pulley, and by a repetition of the process the rotation
of the turntable may be continued as long as desired.

In order to hold the slide in a central position upon the turntable,
two metal slips // are pivoted at their oi)posite ends to the surface
of the table. These slips are provided with springs which bear against
the heads of screws on the upper side of the table. By this means the
slide will always be accurately centered laterally. Its adjustment
longitudinally can be effected by the aid of a ring engraved in the
surface of the table.

It is often desirable, however, to apply a circle of cement excentri-
cally. This is especially the case in re-ringing old slides. The
adjustment longitudinally can be readily made as already cxphiiued,
and can of course be made either central or excentric. To provide
for an excentric adjustment laterally, tlie toj) of the table is formed of
a movable disk, which is jjivotcd at c\ This disk is secured in a
central position by mcaiis of a millcd-lieadcd screw e-. By withdraw-
ing this screw slightly the disk is set free and can be shifted laterally
as indicated by the dottetj lines in Fig. G4, so that any amoinit of
exceutricity can bo given to the disk, and consequently to the slide
which it carries.

It is obvious that the pulley G may be placed elsewhere on the
base-board A, or may be disjjeused witli altogether, in wliich case a
direct pull upon the cord can bo used to impart motion to the turntable.

( 718 )
BIBLIOGEAPHY

OF CUEEENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVEETEBEATA, CEYPTOGAMIA, MICEOSCOPY, &c.

JOUKNALS, TEANSACTIONS, &c., the contents of which are noted

IN THE FOLLOWING BIBLIOGRAPHY.

UNITED KINGDOM.
England.

Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Fifth Series, Vol. V., No. 30 ;

Vol. M., No. 31 (June-July).
English Mechanic, Vol. XXXI., Nos. 792-99 (May 28-July 16).
Entomologist, Vol. XIII., Nos. 205-6 (June-July).

Entomologist's Monthly Magazine, Vol. XVII., Nos. 193*-4* (June-July).
Geological Magazine, Dec. II., Vol. VII., Nos. 192-3 (June-July).
GreviUea, Vol. VIII., No. 48 (June).

Hardwicke's Science-Gossip, 1880, Nos. 186-7 (June-July).
Journal of Science, Third Series, Vol. II., Nos. 78*-9 (June-July).
Midland Naturalist, Vol. III., Nos. 30-1 (June- July).
Naturalist, Vol. V., Nos. 59*-60 (.June-July).
Nature, Vol. XXII., Nos. 553*-4*, 555-9 (June 3-July 15).
Popular Science Review, N. S., Vol. IV., No. 15 (July).
Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, N. S., Vol. XX., No. 79 (July).
Trunen's Journal of Botany, N. S., Vol. IX., Nos. 210-11 (June-July).
Zoologist, Third Series, Vol. IV., Nos. 42*-3* (June-July).
London. Entomological Society — Transactions, 1880, Part 2.

„ Geological Society— Quarterly Journal, Vol. XXXVI., No. 142

(May).

„ Palaeontographical Society, Vol. XXXIV. (1880).

„ Royal Society— Proceedings, Vol. XXX., No. 204.

„ Zoological Society — Proceedings, 1880, Part 1 (June).

Scotland.
Scottish Naturalist, Vol. V., No. 39 (July).
Glasgow. Natural History Society— Proceedings, Vol. IV., Part 1.

COLONIES.

India.
Calcutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal— Proceedings, 1880, No. 1* (January).

Canada.
Canadian Naturalist, N. S., Vol. IX., No. 5.

UNITED STATES.
American Journal of Microscopy, Vol. V., Nos. 5-6 (May-June).
American Journal of Science, Third Series, Vol. XIX., No. 114 (June).
American Monthly Microscopical Journal, Vol. I., No. 6 (June).
American Naturalist, Vol. XIV., Nos. 6-7 (June-July).
Psyche, Vol. III., No. 72 (April).
Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences— Proceedings, 1880 (pp. 121-52).

BIBLIOaRAPHY OF INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, ETC. 719

GERMANY.
Archiv fiir Mikroskopisclie Anatomie, Vol. XVIIT., Part 3.
Archiv fiir pathologische Anatomie und Physiologie und fiir Klinisclie

Medicin (Virchow), Vol. LXXX., Parts 2-3.
Botanisches Centralblatt, Nos. [2-3] [4-5] 6, [7-8] [9-10]*, 11-13, 14*, 15,

16*-18*, 19, 20*.
Botanische Zeitung, Vol. XXXVIII., Nos. 18-25, 26*.
Entomologische Nachrichten, Vol. VI., Nos. 11-14.
Entomologische Zeitung (Stettiner), Vol. XLI., Nos. [4-6].
Flora, Vol. LXIII., Nos. 15-18, 19*, 20 (May 21-July 11).
Hedwigia, Vol. XIX., No. 6 (June).

Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaft, N. S., Vol. VII., Part 2.
Kosmos, Vol. IV., Part 4 (July).

Naturforscher, Vol. Xllt, Nos. 23-24, 25*, 26, 27*-2S* (June 5- July 10).
Zoologischer Anzeiger, Vol. III., Nos. 57-60 (June 7-July 12).
Berlin. K. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften — Monatsbericht,

1880. February *-March*.
Dresden. Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft ' Isis ' — Sitzungsberichte, 1879

(July-December).
Jena. Mediciniscli-Naturwisseiiscliaftliche Gesellschaft — Denkschriften,

Vol. II., Part 4*.
Munich. K. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften — Sitzungsberichte,

1880, Part 3.
WtJRZBURG. Physikalisch-Medicinische Gesellschaft — Verhandlungen, N. S.,

Vol. XIV., Parts [3-4].

AUSTRIA-HUNGARY.

Oesterreichische Botanische Zeitschrift, Vol. XXX., Nos. 6-7 (June-July).
Trieste. Societa Adriatica di Scienze NaturaU — BoUettino, Vol. V., No. 2.
Vienna. Embryologisches Institut der K.-K. Universitat — Mittheilungen,
Vol. I., Part 4.

HOLLAND.
Archives Neerlandaises des Sciences exactes et naturelles, Vol. XV., Parts

1-2.
Amsterdam. K. Akademie van Wetenschappen — Verslagen en Mededee-

lingen. Second Scries, Vol. XV., Part 2.
Leiden. Royal Zoological Museum of the Netherlands — Notes, Vol. II.,

No. 2 (April).

DENMARK.
Copenhagen. K. Danske Videnskabemes Selskab — Skrifter, Fifth Series,
Vol. XI., No. 6. Oversigt, 1879, No. 3* ; 1880, No. 1.

SWEDEN AND NORWAY.
Botaniska Notiser, 1880, No. 3 (May).

Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne, Vol. XXV., Parts 2, 3, 4.
Stockholm. K. Vetenskaps Akademien — Ufvcrsigt, Vol. XXXVI., Parts

[1-2]* [3-4] and [5-6] [7-8]* [9-10].

SWITZERLAND.
Bern. Naturforschende Gesellschaft- IMittluilungen, 1879, Nos. [962-78].
Lausanne. Societe Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles— HuUctin, Second

Series, Vol. XVI., No. 83.
St. Gallen. Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft — Vorhand-

Inngen, Vol. LXII*.

720 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

PRANCE.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles (Botaniqne), Sixth Series, Vol. IX., No. 4.

(Zoologie), Sixth Series, Vol. IX., No 1,

Archives de Physiologie normale et pathologique (Brown-Se'quard),
Second Series, VoL VII., Nos. l*-2* (January-April).

Brebissonia, Vol. II., Nos. [10-11] (April-May).

Bulletin Scientifique du Departement du Nord, Vol. III., Nos. 4-5 (April-
May).

Guide du Naturaliste, Vol. II., Nos. 6* [7-8] [9-10]* (March 31-May 31).

Journal de rAnatomie et de la Physiologie (Kobin), Vol. XVI., No. 4*
(July-August).

Journal de Conchyliologie, Third Series, Vol. XX., No. 2.

Journal de Micrographie, Vol. III., Nos. 11-12 (November-December) ;
Vol. IV., No. 1 (January).

Revue Internationale des Sciences Biologiques, Vol. V., No. 6* (June).

Revue des Sciences Naturelles, Second Series, Vol. II., No. 1 (June).

Paris. Academie des Sciences — Coraptes Rendus, Vol. XC, Nos. 21-4, 25*,
26 ; Vol. XCI., No. 1 (May 24-July 5).

BELGIUM.
Brussels. Academie Royale des Sciences, &c., de Belgique — Bulletin,
Vol. XLIX, No. 4*.

ITALY.

Michelia, 1880, No. 6.

Milan. Societa Crittogamologica Italiana — Atti, Second Series, Vol. II.,

Part 2.
Modena. Societa del Naturalist! — Annuario, Seeoul Series, Vol. XIV., Parts

[1-2]*.
Padua. Societa Veneto-Trentina di Scienze Naturali — Bullettino, Vol. I.,

No. 4 (June).
Pisa. Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali — Atti (Processi Verbali,

pp. 53-64).
Rome. R. Accademia del Lincei — Atti, Third Series, Transuuti, Vol. IV.,

Part 6 (May).

SPAIN.
Madrid, Sociedad Espanola de Historia Natixral— Anales, Vol. IX., Part 1,

ZOOLOGY.

A. GENERAL, including Embryology and Histology
of the Vertebrata.

Arndt, R. — Observations on the Red Medulla of Bone. Plate 10, figs 1-4.

Arch. path. Anat. ^- Physiol. (Virchow), LXXX., pp. 385-95.
Aknstein, C. — Historical Note on the Perilymphatic Capillary Network.

Arch. Mikr. Anat., XVIII., pp. 345-6.
Balbiani, E. G. — Fecundation in the Vertebrata. X.-XI.

Journ. de Microfir., III., pp. 470-6, 512-16 ; IV., pp. 10-13.
Balfour, F. M. — A Treatise on Comparative Embryology. Vol. I. 492 pp
275 figs. (8vo. London, 1880.)
„ „ On the Structure and Homologies of the Germinal Layer of

the Embryo, 17 figs. Quart. Journ. Micr. Set., XX., pp. 247-73.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 721

Bkaun, M. — On the Developmental-history of the Parrots. II.

Verh. Phys.-Med. GosclL Wih-zbrmj, XIV., pp. 251-2.
CosTERUs, J. C. — The Influence of Saline Solutions on the Duration of the Life
of Protoplasm. Arch. Ne'erJ. Sci. exact. ^ nat., XV., pp. 148-5-i.

Flejiming, W. — On Epithelium-regeneration, and the so-called free Nucleus-
formation. (Supplement to his Paper on " The Cell and its Vital Phenomena.")

Arch. Mikr. Anat., XVIII., pp. 347-64.
Flesch, M. — On the Cell and Intercellular-substance iu Hyaline Cartilage.

Verh. Phi/s.-iUed. Gesell. Wiirzbur//, XIV., SB., pp. iii.-vi.
Fox, L. W. — The Asymmetry of the Face in Human Embryos.

3IT. Embrt/»l. hist. K.-K. Univ. Wien, I., pp. 279-85.
Frankland, E. — On the Spontaneous Oxidation of Organic Matter iu Water.

[Jcnu-n. Chem, Soc, XXXVII., pp. 517-4G.]
GiBBES, H. — On the Structure of the Spermatozoon. 1 fig.

Qiiart. Journ. Micr. Soc, XX., pp. 320-1.
Hai.pryn, p. — Communications on the Kesults of an Investigation on a prema-
ture Human Embryo. Plato 22, 23-4.

MT. Embri/ol. Inst. K.-K. Univ. Wicn, I., pp. 235-54.
Hannover, A. — The Primordial Cartilage and its Ossification in the Human
Skull before Birth. 2 plates (explanation in French).

K. Dansk. Vidensk. Skr. {Copcnhcu/en), XI., pp. 354-528.
Hanstein., J. v. — The Influences of Cell-nuclei on the Division of Cells. \_Abstr.
from 'SB. Niederrhein. Gesell. Natur. und Heilk. Bonn,' 1879, p. 145.]

Naturf., XIII., pp. 220-1.
Hogg, J. — Impure Drinking-water — its Sanitary Import. 11 figs.

En'jl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 425-6.
Horvath, G. v. — On Periodic Phenomena in the Animal World {conckl.').

Entomol. Nachr., VI., pp. 109-15.
JouRDAiN, S. — On the Existence of a Lymphatic Circulation in Pleuronectes.

Comptes L'cndus, XC, pp. 1430-2.
Knop, W. — On Albuminous Bodies. \^Abstr. from ' Berichto Ub. d. Verb.
Stichsisch. Gesell. Wiss. Leipzig,' 1879, p. 1.] Naturf., XIII., pp. 219-20.

Krause, E. — Notes on the Developmental-history of Embryology.

Kusmos, IV., pp. 257-75.
Krause, W. — On a premature Human Embryo. Zool. Ameig., III., pp. 283-4.
LippiNCOTT, J. S. — Tlie Critics of Evolution {contd.).

Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 398-41G.

Neumann, E. — On Degeneration and Regeneration of Injured Nerves.

Plate IG. Arch. Mihr. Anat., XVIII., pp. 302-44.

Peck, M. R. C. — Cyst-formation in the Boily-wall of the Embryo. Plato 27.

MT. Emhryol. Inst. K.-K. Univ. Wicn, I., i>p. 287-91.

Pouchct. — The Origin of the Red Blood-corpuscles. [^Traasl. from 'Revue

Scienfifique.'] Quirt. Junm. Micr. >'ci., XX., pp. 331-50.

Rawitz, B. — On the Structure of the Spinal Ganglia. Plate 15.

Arch. Mikr. Anat., XVIII., pp. 283-301.
Scuenk. — On the Influence of Colour on tiie Development of Animals.

3IT. Kmhrijol. hist. K.-K Univ. Wicn, I., pp. 205-77.
Sedgwick, A.— On the Development of the structure known as the "Uloinerulus
of the Hcad-kidiicy " in the Chick. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., XX., pp. 372-4.

Slatek, J. W. — The " Laws of Emphasis and Syinmefry."

./vurn. of Sci., II., pp. 434-8.
SoLGEK, B. — Further Researches on tho Anatomy of the Lateral Organs of
Fishes. III. The Lateral Organs of tho Osseous Fishes.

Arch. Mikr. Anal., XVIII., pp. 304-90.

Vincnow, H. J. P. — Vessels of the Vitreous Bo<ly an<l Vascidar Lens in

Aiiitiial ICmbryos. Verh. Ph;i>!.-Mcd. Oc.cH. Wiirzbur;), XIV., SH.. pp. .\x.-xxii.

Waili.y, a. — Hybrids and Di gcnernry. Eutmnnl., XIII., pp. 151-8.

\Vii,.MON, II. C. — On tlic Development of tho Human Skin. Fliitrs 2r)-(!.

MT. Embruol. Inst. K.-K. t'nir. Win,, I., pp. 255-64.

VOL. III.

722 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

B. INVERTEBRATA.

AsPER. — Contributions to the Knowledge of the Deep-water Fauna of the Swiss
Lakes (concld.). , Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 200-7.

MoUusca.

Bareois, T. — Notes on the Glands of the Feet in the Family of the Tellinidae.

Ball. Sci. Dep. No'rd, III., pp. 193-7.
Call, R. E. — Polymorphous Anodonfce. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 529-30.

Crosse, H. — On the Identity of the Genera Hainesia, Bacrystomn, and Mascaria.

Journ. de Conc/i., XX., pp. 135-140.
„ „ Description of the new Genus Pyrgophysn. Fig. 5 of Plate 4.

Journ. de Condi., XX., pp. 140-2.
„ „ Description of undescribed Mnllusca [4] from New Caledonia and
New Britain. 4 figs, of Plate 4.

Journ. de Conch., XX., pp. 142-9.
„ „ Diagnoses Molluscorum novorum [3] iu insula " Nossibe " dicta
et in provincia Paraensi colleetorum. [Latin.]

Journ. de Conch., XX., pp. 149-50.

Dall, W. H. — American Work in the Department of Kecent MoUusca during

the year 1879. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 426-36.

EsMARE, B. — Essay on the Distribution of Land and Fresh-water MoUusca iu

different parts of Norway. 2 figs. Nijt Mag. Naturvid., XXV., pp. 215-23.

Etheridge, R., jun. — Notes on the Gasteropoda contained in the Gilbertson

Collection, British Museum, and figured in Phillips's ' Geology of Yorkshire.'

(/« part.) Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., V., pp. 473-85.

Hudleston, W. H.— Contributions to the Palaeontology of the Yorkshire

Oolites. (In part.) Plates 8-9. [Mollusca.] Geol. Mag., Yll., -pp. 28Q-98.

Jeffreys, J. G. — On a new Species of Chiton [^scabridiis] lately found on the

British Coasts. A7in. ^- 3Iag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 33-5.

Kirk, T. W. — Additions to the List of New-Zealand Marine Mollusca.

Ann. 4- Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., p. 15.

Lankester, E. E. — Dr. C. Rabl on the Pedicle of Invagination in Pulmonate

Gasteropoda. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., XX., pp. 376-7.

Morlet, L. — Supplement to the Monograph of the Genus Ringicula Deshays.

Plates 5 and 6. Journ. de Conch., pp. 150-81.

Munier-Chalmas, E. — Diagnosis generis novi Molluscorum Cephalopodorum

fossilis. [Latin.] Journ. de Conch., XX., pp. 183-4.

Netill, G.— On the Land Shells, extinct and living, of the Neighbourhood

of Mentone (Alpes INIaritimes), with Descriptions of a new Genus and of several

new Species. Plates 13-14. Froc. Zool. Soc. Lond. (1880), pp. 94-142.

Rabl, C. — See Lankester, E. R.

Stossioh, M. — Synopsis of the Fauna of the Adriatic Sea. II. [Italian.]

Boll. Soc. Adriat. Sci. Nat.. V., pp. 157-286.
Vasseur, G. — Diagnoses Molluscorum fossilium novorum. [Latin.]

Journ. de Conch., XX., pp. 182-3.
Vayssiere. — Anatomical Researches on the Mollusca of the Family of the
Bullid£B. (fnpirt.) Plates 1-3. Ann. Sci. Nat.iZoologie),IX., pp. l-6i.

Whitfield, R. P. — On the occurrence of true Lingula in the Trenton Lime-
stones. 2 figs. Am. Journ. Sci., XIX., pp. 472-5.
Wright. T.— Monograph of the Lias Ammonites of the British Islands {contd.).
Part III. Classification, pp. 165-264. Plates 19-40, and 168 figs. 4to. [Palse-
ontographical Society, XXXIV.] 1880.

YorNG, J. — On the species of Bentalium found in the Carboniferous Strata of
the West of Scotland. Proc. Nat. Hist. Sue. Glasgow, IV., pp. 69-70.

MoUuscoida.

Davidson, T. — A Monograph of the British Fossil Brachiopoda. Vol. IV.
Part 3. Supplement to the Permian and Carboniferous Species, pp. 243-315.
Plates 30-7. 4to. [Palajoutographical Society, XXXIV.] 1880.

HiNCKS, T.— Contributions towards a general History of the Marine Polyzoa.
Plates 9-11. {In part.) Ann. # Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 69-92.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 723

Oehlert, D.— The Sj-steniatic; Position of the Brachiopoda according to
M. Moise. Jour7i. de Conch., XX., pp. 109-35.

Shrtbsole, G. W. — A Keview and Description of the various Species of
British Upper Silurian Feuestellidae. Plate 11.

Quart. Jouni. Gcol. Soc, XXXVI., pp. 241-54.

YouKG, J.— On Iih>jncho2Jora,!i GennsofBrachiopod Shells, new to Carboniferous
Strata. Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Giasjoic, IV., pp. 13-14.

Arthropoda.

a. lusecta.

Adolph, G. E. — On Insects' Wings. 6 plates. [From ' Nova Acta K. Leop.-
Carol.-Deutschen Akad. Naturf.,' XLI., Part 2, No. 3.] (4to. Halle, 1879.)
Berlese, A. — See Canestrini, G.
Cameron, P. — Notes on the Coloration and Development of Insects.

Trans. Entomol. Soc. Lond., 1880, pp. G9-79.

Canestrini, G., and A. Berlese. — On a little-known Organ of the Hymenoptera.

[Abstr.] Bidl. Soc. Ven. Trent. Sci. Nat., I., pp. 154.

GoKHAM, II. S. — On the Structure of the Lampyridse with reference to their

Phosphorescence. Trans. Entomol. Soc, 1880, pp. 63-7.

„ „ Materials for a Eevision of tlie Lampyridse.

Trans. Entomol. Soc, 1880, pp. 83-112.
Hagen, H. — Kemains of Branchise in a Libellulid— Smooth Muscle-fibres in
Insects. Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 304-5.

Joseph, G.— Preliminary Communication on the Innervation and Develop-
ment of the Spinning Organs of tlie Insecta. Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 326-8.
King, H. S. — Life-history of Pleotomus pallens Lee. Psyche, III., pp. 51-3.
Kolbe, H. — Tiie Nervures of the Psocidse, and their value in Classification.
1 plate. Stett. Entomol. Zeit., XLL, pp. 179-86.
LiCHTENSTEiN, J. — Lifc-history of Pemphigm bursarius (Apliis) Linn.

Stett. Entomol. Zeit., XLL, pp. 218-22.
MoBBis, C. — Habits and Anatomy of the Honey-bearing Ant.

Journ. of Sci., II., pp. 430-4.
Packakd, a. S., jun.— The Hessian Fly. 43 pp., 2 plates, and 1 fig. [Bull.
No. 4 of the U.y. Entomol. Commission.] (8vo. Washington, 1880.)
Reicuexav, W. v. — The Odoriferous Apparatus of Sphinx ligustri.

Entomol. Nachr., VI., p. 141.
RiETSCH.— On N. Bobretsky's Studies on the Formation of the Blastoderm
and Germinal Layers in the Insecta. Rev. Sci. Nat., II., pp. 54-60.

ToHGE. — Natural History of Ewjonia fuscantaria Hubn.

Stett. Entomol. Zeit., XLL, pp. 213-17.
VayssiJibe, A.— On the Metamorphosis oi Prosopistoma.

Comptes Rendus, XC, pp. 1370-1.
WiGHTON, J. — Notes on the Combs of Bees. Sci.-Gossip, 1880, p. 127.

y. Arachnida.

Bryan, G. H. — Notes on the Nests of European Trap-door Sjiidcrs (cotitd.).

3 figs. Sci.-Gossi]>, 1880, pp. 127-8.

Hasselt, a. W, M. van. — Contribution to the Knowledge of Lipistius dcsulto7-

Schicidte. 3 figs. Vcrsl. <y McdeJccl. K. Ahad. Wet. Amsterdam, XV., pp. 186-96.

„ „ Supplenicnt on j'lHf<i-sc(r/i7;on Mcuge.

Versl. ij- Malrdeel. K. Aktd. UV/. Amsterdam, XV., pp. 196-8.
Meomin. — On a pocidiar Modification of a Parasitic Acarian.

Comptes Rendus, XC, pp. 1371-3.
Transl. Ann. ^ Ma,j. Nat. l/i.'st., VI., pp. 99-100.
PiCHARD, P. — On an Acarian Destroyer of the Gallicolar Pliylloxorn.

Comptes Remlns,'XC., pp. 1572-3.
Workman, T. — A Contribution towards a List of Irish Spichrs.

Entomol., XIIL, pp. 125-<iO.

8 I) 2

724 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

5. Crustacea.
BoASf J. E. V. — Liihodcs anil Paijnrus. Zool. Ayizcig., III., pp. 349-r)2.

Brady, G. S. — A Monograph of the Free and Semi-parasitic Copepodu of the
Britisli Islands. Vol. II., 182 pp. Plates 34-82. (8vo. London, 1880.)

Brandt, E. — On the Nervon.s System of Idothea entomon. \_Transl. from ' Comptes
Eendus,' XC] Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 98-9.

Etheridge, R., jun. - See Nicholson, H. A.

Fraisse, p. — The occurrence of Branchipus Grubii (Dybowsky) in the neigh-
bourhood of Wiirzburg. Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 284-6.
Hesse. — Description of two new Crustacea, Male and Female, of the Genus
Dineiiioura, described and figured from living individuals. Plate 1.

Rev. Sci. Nat., II., pp. 5-15.
KiNGSLEY, J. S. — Progress of American Carcinology in 1879.

Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 498-503.
„ „ Carcinological Notes. No. II. — Revision of the Gelasimi

(m part^. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Fhilad., 1880, pp. 135-52.
Kirk, T. W. — Description of a new Species of Palinurus [tumidus].

Ann. 4- Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 14-15.
KoLMODiN, L. — Ostracoda Silurica Gotlandise. Plate 19. [Latin.]

Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. For., XXXVL, No. 9, pp. 133-9.

Man, J. G. de. — On some Species of Gelasimus Latr. and Macrophthalmus

Latr. [English.] Notes R. Zonl. Mus. Neth., II., pp. 67-72.

MiEus, E. J. — On a Collection of Crustacea from the Malaysian Region.

Part IV., Penseidea, Stomatopoda, Isopoda, Suctoria, and Xiphosura (conoid.).

Plate 15. Anil. # Mag. Nat. Hist., V., pp. 457-72.

Nicholson, H. A., and E. Etheridge, jun. — A Monograpli of the Silurian

Fossils of the Girvan District in Ayrshire. Fasc. II., pp. 137-234. Plates 10-15.

(8vo. Edinburgh, 1880.)

Packard, A. S., jun. — The Structure of the Eye of Trilobites. 4 figs.

Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 503-8.
Eehberg, H. — Two new Crustacea from a spring in Heligoland.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 301-4.
RiCHTERS, F. — On the Distribution of Branchipus Grubii.

Zool. Anzeig., III., p. 359.
Robertson, D. — Fresh and Brackish-water Ostracoda. [Fauna of Scotland.]
35 pp. (8vo. Glasgow, 1880.)

Thomson, G. M. — New Species of Crustacea from New Zealand. Plate I.

Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 1-6.
Vermes.
Bohretzky, N. — On the Copulatory Organs found by him in tlie Genus
Microphthalmus. [_Ahstr. in 'Proc. Zool. Sect. 6th Meeting Russian Naturalists,'
&c.] Zool. Ameig., III., pp. 139-40.

Bourne, A. G.— On the Structure of the Nepliridia of the Medicinal Leech.
Plates 24-5. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci, XX., pp. 283-302.

Etheridge, R., jun. — A Contribution to the Study of the British Carboni-
ferous Tubicolar Annelida. Plate 7. (Contd.) Geol. Mag. , VII., pp. 258-66, 304-7.
Greeff, R. — The Echiurans( Geyi/yreaarmaia). 172 pp. 9 plates and 1 wood-
cut. [From ' Nova Acta K. Leop.-Carol.-Deutschen Akad. Naturf.,' Vol. XLL,
Part 2, No. 1.] (4to. Halle, 1879.)

Hansen, G. A. — Annelida from the Norwegian Nordhaven Expedition of
1878. 4 plates. Nyt Mag. Naturvid., XXV., pp. 224-34.

Hertwig, 0. — The Cha3tognatha. Plates 9-14.

Jen. Zeitschr. Natnrwiss., VII., pp. 196-311.
Hogg, J.— The Natural History of the Fluke— the Rot of Sheep. 9 figs.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 306-7.

Hubrecht, a. a. W. — New Species of Euro23ean Nemerteans. Appendix I.

[English.] Notes R. Zool. Mus. Neth., II., pp. 93-8.

„ „ On the Anatomy and Physiology of the Nervous System

of Nemertines. Plate 23. [Abstr. from 'Verb. K. Akad. Wetensch. Amsterdam,'

1S80.] Plate 23. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., XX., pp. 274-82.

■Joseph, G. — On Enchytraius cavicola n. sp. Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 358-9.

JouRDAiN, S. — On a very simple Form of the Group of Worms — Prothelminthus

Hessi, S. J.= ? Tntosia Icptoplantc A. Giard. Plate 2.

Rev. Sci. Nat., II., pp. 68-74.

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 725

Krabbe, H. — Eeseavches on the occurrence of Intestinul Worms in the
Intestinal Canal of the Horse. 2 figs.

Overs. K. Dariske Vidensk. Selsk., 1880, pp. 33-40; French Benumb, pp. 9-12.
Transl. Ann. tj- Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. OIj-7.
Lankester, E. K. — On Intra-cpithelial Capillaries in tbe Integument of the
Medicinal Leech. Plate 26.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Set., XX., pp. 303-6.
„ ,, On the Connective and Vasifactive Tissues of the

Medicinal Leech. Plates 27-8.

Quart. Jo'irn. Micr. Sci., XX., pp. 307-17.
Leidy, J. — Notice of some Aquatic Worms of the Family Naides. 6 figs.

Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 421-5.
„ „ On a Filaria reported to have come from a Man. 2 figs.

Froc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phllad., 1880, pp. 130-1.
IMuLLEii, C. — Some Eemarks on the Galls on Achillea produced by Awjuillulce.

Bnt. Centralljl., I., pp. 187-8.
Peerojjcito, E. — Hehninthological Observations on the Endemic Disease of
the St. Gotthard Workmen (Anchylostorna duudenalis).

Atti R. Accad. Lincei (^Ti-ansunt.), IV., pp. 179-84.
„ ,, Helminthological Observations and Experimental Re-

searches on tile Disease of the Workmen of the St.
Gottliard Tunnel. Comptcs Eendus, XC, pp. 1373-5.

ViLLOT, A. — On the Organization anil Development of the Gordians.

Comptes Eendus, XC, pp. 15G9-71.

Echinodermata.
Agassiz, a. — Notes on some points in the History of the Synonymy of Echini.

Proc. Zool. Sor. Land., 1880, pp. 33-8.
Bell, F. J. — On Palwolampas, a new Genus of the Echinoidea. Plate 4.

Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1880, pp. 43-9.
Carpenter, P. H.— Some disputed points in Echinoderm Morphology.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., XX., pp. 322-30.
„ „ Feather-Stars, Recent and Fossil. Plates 5-6.

Pop. Sci. Rev., IV., pp. 193-204.
Crinoid Stems, Notes and Observations of Adventitious Structures on. III.

Prix. Nat. flist. Soc. Glasijoio, IV., pp. 73-7.

Danielssen, D. C, and J. Koren. — From the Norwegian Nordhaven J^xpe-

dition. Plates 1-6. Nyt Mag. Natanid., XXV., i)p. 83-140.

Etiieridge, E.,jun.— Observations on the swollen condition of Cariwnifcrous

Crinoid Stems. Plates 1 and 2. Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, IV., pp. 19-36.

GoETTE, A. — Observations on the Embryology of tiie Echinodermata. 3 figs.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 324-6.
Koren, J. — Sec Daniels.=!en, D. C.
Ljl'ngman, a. W. — Catalogue of the Spitzbergen Holotliurida.

Ofrers. K. Vct.-Ahad. For., XXXVI., No. 9, pp. 127-31.

Martin, K. — Revision of tiie Fossil Echini from the Tertiarv Strata of Java.

[English.] Notes R. Zool. Mns. Neih., II., jip. 73-84.

WuiGHT, T. — IVfonograph on tlie British Fo.-isil l^ciiinodi'rmata of Xho Oolitic

Formation.-*. Vol. II. 'i'lic A.stcroidea and Ojiliiiiroidca ('■'(«•/,/.), pp. 155-203.

Plates 19-21 and 3 figs. (4to. [Pahcoiitographicul Society, XXXIV.], 1880.)

Coelenterata.

Allman, G. J. — On Linviocodiuin victoria, a Ilydroid IMedusa of Fresh Water-

Nature, XXII , pp. 178-9, 218.
Duncan, P. M. — Sind Fossil Corals and Alcyonaria. 28 plates.

Pahrontol. Indlca, Ser. XIV , Vol. I., Part 1, 138 p|>.
GoETTE, A. — A new Ilydroid Polyp with a new kind of Reproduction. 2 figs.

ZcmjI. Anzeig., III., pp. 352-8.

IIaeckel, E. — The Organization and Classification of the higher Acra.si>odoto

M( dii.s!i'. Kosiniis, IV., pp. 310-17.

Kki.i.kr, C. — New Colentcratcs from till- Guir of Naples. Piati s 13 11. with

;uhkii<liim by O. ScJiiiiidl. Arch. Mikr. Anat., XVIil., pp. •_'7l-82

726 BIBLIOGEAPHY OF

Krukenbeeg, C. F. W. — On the Quantity of Water in the Medusae.

Zool. Anzeig., Ill , p. 306.

Lankester, E. R. — On a new Jelly-fish of the Order Trachomedusse, living in

Freshwater. iV^a<»re,XXII.,pp. 147-8, 177-8,190-1,241.

See also Zool. Anzeig.., III., pp. 321-4.

„ „ On Limnocodium (Craspedacustes) Sowerbii, a new Tracho-

medusa inhabiting Fresh Water. Plates 30-1, and 5 figs.

Quart. Joitrn. Micr. Sci., XX., pp, 351-71.

Lapworth, C. — On the Geological Distribution of the Rhabdophora. III.

Results (contd.). Ann. ^ ilig. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 16-29.

LiNNAKSSON, G. — On the Graptolites of Gothland. Plate 10.

Ofvers. E. Vct.-Akad. For., XXXVI., No. 5, pp. 3-11.
Merejoicsky, C. — On the Origin and Development of the Ovum in Eucope
before Fecundation. [ Transl. from ' Comptes Rendus.']

Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., V., pp. 498-500.
„ „ On the Structure of some Coralliaria. [^Transl. from ' Comptes

Rendus.'] Ann. (|- Mag. Nat. Hist., V., pp. 502-3.

Parkinson, C. — Notes on tlie Lucernariadps. 6 figs.

Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 132-3.
Romanes, G. J. — Physiology of the Fresh-water Medusa.

Nature, XXII., pp. 179-81.
Schmidt, O. — See Keller, C.

Porifera.

Fresh-water Sponges. A)n. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 125-32.

MiNOT, C. S.— A Sketch of Comparative Embryology. IV. The Embryology
of Sponges. 5 figs. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 479-85.

VosMAER, G. C. J. — The Sponges of the Leyden Museum. I. The Family
of the DesmacidinsB. [English.] Notes B. Zool. Mus. Neth., II., pp. 99-164.

Protozoa.

BiJTSCHLi, O. — Protozoa. Part I. 16 pp. and 4 plates. [Vol. I. of ' Bronn's
Klassen und Ordnungeu des Thier-Reichs.'] (8vo, Leipzig and Heidelberg,
1880.)

Carter, H. J. — Report on Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar,

and presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by Captain W. H. C, Warren. (/«

part!) Plates 18-19, 4-6. Ann. ^- Mag. Nat. Hist., V., pp. 437-57 ; VI., pp. 35-61.

Cocks, W. G. — Researches in Pond Life. II. \_Acineta, Vorticella, &c.] 6 figs.

Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 155-7.
George, F. J. — The Euglena viridis. 1 fig. „ „ pp. 148-50.

Pantanelli, D. — Radiolaria of the Diaspro.

Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat.—Proc. Verb., 1880, p. 58.
,j „ AND De Stefani. — Radiolaria of Santa Barbara in Calabria.

Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat.—Proc. Verb., 1880, pp. 59-60.
„ [Radiolaria in the Italian " Diaspro."]

\_Boll. R. Comitat. Geol. Hal, 1880, Nos. 1-2.]
S., A. C. — Notes on Vampyrella lateritia. 1 fig.

Am, Journ. Micr., V., pp. 105-8.
Stefani, De. — See Pantanelli, D.
Vejdovskt , F.— On the Rhizopoda of the Prague Springs. 4 pp.

Sep. repr. S.B. E. Bohn. Gesell Wiss. Prag, 1880.

BOTANY.

A. GENERAL, including' Embryology and Histology
of the Phanerogamia.

Bertrand, C. E. — Theory of the Bundle (concld.'). Plates 3-5.

Bull. Sci. Dep. Nord, III., pp. 165-85.
CoAZ, J. — The Leaf and its loss of Colour.

3IT. Naturf. Gesell. Bern, 1879, Abhl., pp. 11-21.

INVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 727

Comes, 0. — Experimental Researches on the Action of Light on the Transpira-
tion of Plants. [Ahstr. from ' Eend. K. Accad. Sci. Torino.']

Guide da Nat., II., pp. 175-6.
Cbie, L. — The Ancient Climates and the Fossil Floras of the West of France
(conoid.). Brehissonia, II., pp. 166-70.

Ernst, A. — On the Fertilization of Cobosa penduUflora (Hook. fil.).

Naturf., XXII., pp. 148-9.
Flahault, C. — New Observations on the Modifications of Plants according
to the Physical Conditions of the Medium {concM.). Plates 7-9.

Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.) IX., pp. 193-207.
Hoppe-Seylcr, F. — A further Decomposition-product of Vegetable Chlorophyll.
\_Absti-. from 'Zeitschr. pliysiol. Chemie,' IV., p. 193.] Naturf., XIII., p. 231.

Jackson, B. D. — Remarks on Botanical Bibliography.

Trim. Journ. Bot., IX., pp. 167-77.
Just, L. — Botanischer Jahresbericht. Vol. VI. (1878). 1st Section, Part 1.
288 pp. (8vo. Berlin, 1880.)

Levallois, a. — Presence in Soja hispida (Miinch.) of a notable Quantity of a
Substance soluble in Alcohol, and easily transformable into Glucose.

Comp)tes Bendus, XC, p. 1293.
Marie-Davy. — Meteorology applied to Agriculture and Hygiene. [Action of
Heat, Light, and Water on Vegetation, &c.]

Annuaire de rObscrv. do Mont sour is, 1880, pp. 160-306.
Moll, J. W. — Researches on Exudation of Drops and Injection in Leaves.
2 plates. [German.]

Versl. ^ Mededeel. K. Akad. Wot. Amsterdam, XV., pp. 237-337.
MiJLLER, H. — The Importance of Alpine Flowers for tlie Flower-Theory.

Kosmos, IV., pp. 276-87.
„ „ Relationship of Flowers and Fruit. „ „ pp. 306-7.

Pellet, H. — On the Fixity of Composition of Plants — Relation between the
Starch, Phosphoric Acid, and Mineral Substances in the Potato.

Comptcs Rendiis, XC, pp. 1361-3.
Phipson, T. L. — On a Phenomenon of Sensibility observed in Acacia.

Comptcs Bendns, XC, pp. 1228-9.
Prantl, K. — An Elementary Text-book of Botany. TransL and revised by
S. H. Vines. 332 pp., 275 figs. (8vo. London, 1880.)

Reinsch, p. F. — Discovery of New Plant-forms in Coal and ia Anthracite.
8 pp. 2 plates. (8vo. Casisel, 1880.)

Stahl, E. — On the Influence of Direction and Intensity of Light on some
Phenomena of Motion in the Vegetable Kingdom. Plate 6.

Bot. Zeit., XXXVIII., pp. 297-304, 321-43, 345-57, 361-8.

377-81, 393-400, 409-13.
Treub, M.— On Vegetable Cells with several Nuclei. Plates 2-4. [French.]

Arch. Ni'crl. Sci. exact, (f- nat., XV., pp. 39-60.
Vines, S. H. — On the Chemical Composition of Aleurone-grains.

Proc. Roy. Soc, XXX,, pp. 387-93.

Vonhone, H. — On the Sprouting of Endogenous Organs from the IMother-

Organ. Plate 6. Flora, LXIIL, pp. 227-34, 243-57, 268-74.

B. CRYPTOGAMIA.

Bagnall, J. E.— The Cryptogamic Flora of Warwickshire (coutd.).

Mull. Nat., 111., pp. 132-5.
Engelhardt, H. — On the " Cypris-shale" of North Bohemia and its Vegetable
Contents. Plates 7-9. [Crypt. = Fungi, 2 ; Characctu, 1.]

SB. Xaturw. Ucscll. Isis, 1872, pp. 131-52,
Eyfcrth, i?.— The simplest Forma of Life (contd.). {^I'rans. from German.]

Am. M. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 115-17.

Cryptogamia Vascularia.
Bakei!, J. G. — On a Collection of Fcrua made by Dr. IkccMri in Wcotern
Sumatra. Trim. Jonm. Bui., IX., pp. 209-17.

Balke, H,— (ScrSacha.

728 BIBLIOaRAPHY OF

Cramer, 0. — Preliminary Commuulcation on the Asexual Propagation of the
Protballiuin of Ferns by means of Gemmse or Conidia.

Bot. Centmlbl., I., pp. 476-8.
Ettingshausen, C. — See Gardner, J. S.

Gardner, J. S., and C. Baron Ettingshausen. — A Monograph of the British
Eocene Flora. Part 2 (contd.), Filices, pp. 39-58. Plates 6-11, and 12 figs.
(4 to. [Palfeoutograpliieal Society, XXXIV.] 1880.)
GooDE, J. B. — Notes on some Canadian Ferns.

Can. Natural., IX., pp. 297-301.
Leitgeb, H.— On Dumortiera, a Genus of the Marchantiacese.

Flora, LXIII., pp. 307-12.
Robinson, J. F. — Note on Asplenium lanceolatum (Sinelii).

Sci.-Gossip, 1880, p. 148.

Sachs, J. — Botanical Remains of Dr. H. Bauke. 6 plates of Prothallium

of Ferns and 3 pp. text. Bot. Zeit., XXXVIII. (Supplement).

Vaygreda y Vila, E. — Plants notable for their utility or rarity which grow

spontaneously in Catalonia. II. [Crypt. Vase, pp. 125-8.]

Anal. Soc. Espan. Hist. Nat., IX., pp. 52-130.

Muscinese.

Braithwaite, R. — The British Moss-Flora. Vol. I. Acrocarpous Mosses.
Part 1. Fam. 1. Andrejeacese. Part 2. Fam. 2. Buxbauraiacese. Fam. 3.
Georgiacese. pp. 1-32. Plates 1-4. (8vo. London, 1880.)
Ekstrand, E. V. — Notes on Scandinavian Hepatiese (contd.).

Bot. Notiser, 1880, pp. 65-71.
Lees, F. A. — Mosses of the Wetherby District, additional to Dr. Wesley's List.

Naturalist, V., pp. 181-5.
LiNDBERG, S. — Transition of a Female to a Male Organ in a Moss. Plate 11.
Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. For., XXXVI., No. 5, pp. 75-8.
Sanio, C. — Commeutatio de Harpidiis europjeis inductiva. [Latin.]

Bot. Centralhl, I. (Suppl. 2), 24 pp.
Warnstorf, C. — Short Notices of the Moss-Flora of Salzburg and Steiermark.

Bot. Centralhl., I., pp. 153-4.

„ ,, On the Mu.sci and Hepatic se of the neighbourhood of

Verviers. Bot. Centralhl., I., pp. 379-81.

„ ,, On the Moss -Vegetation of the Upper Valley of the Danube.

Bot. Centralhl., I., pp. 412-14.

„ „ Excursions in the Unterhartz. — A Contribution to the Flora

hercynica. II. HepaticaJ (concld.). Hedwigia, XIX., pp. 89-92.

Characeae.

Groves, H. and J. — A Review of the British Characete (concld.) Plates
203-10. Trim. Juurn. Bot., IX., pp. 161-7.

Fungi.

Barkas, T. p. — A Microscopic Novelty. 1 fig. Vegetable or Animal ?

7 figs. Fngl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 308, 352, 423-4, 451.

Biirij, A. de. — On JScidium ahictinum. {In part.) Plate 10. [ Tmns^. from ' Bot.

Zeit.'] Ann. Sci. A^at. (Bot.), IX., pp. 208-56.

Blytt, a. — Clastuderma novum Myxomycetum genus. [Latin.]

Bot. Zeit., XXXVIIL, p. 343.
BoucHUT. — On a Digestive Ferment contained in the Sap of the Fig-tree.

Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 67-8.
Buchner, H. — On the Experimental Production of Cattle-distemjDer Con-
tagion from the Hay Fungi.

SB. K. Bail. ^I^Mf- '^yiss., 1880, pp. 368-413.
„ „ Experiments on the Origin of the Cattle-distemper by Inspira-

tion. SB. K. Bay. Akad. Wiss., ISSO, p. 414-23.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 729

Chauveau, a. — The Causes whicli may produce a variation in tlie Results
of Authracic Inoculation of Algerian Sheep. Influence of the Quantity of the
Infecting Agents. Applications to the Theory of Immunity.

Comptes Ecndus, XC, pp. 1526-30.
Cooke, M. C. — Observations on Peziza. Grevillea, VIII., pp. 129-41.

„ ,, Note on Mr. Ellis's Eeply to Dr. Corre's Criticism of Paper

on " Variability of Sphaeria quercuum Sz."

Grevillea, VIII., pp. 144.

„ „ On Hymenochwte and its Allies. „ pp. 145-50.

Fkank, a. B. — Note on the Onion-Smut. Bot. Centralbl., I., p. 186.

Gbeenfield. — Bactei-ium Anthracis. [Report to the R. Agricultural Society.]

Quart. Journ. Micr. ScL, XX., pp. 374-6.
Hcbekson, G. — The Observatory of Montsouris and the Atmospheric " Dusts."

Brehissonia, II., pp. 145-7.
Kalchbkennek, C. — Fungi of Australia. I. Basidiomycetes.

Grevillea, VIII., pp. 151-4.
Lanzi, C. M.— The Fungi of the Province of Rome. Part 2. pp. 33-48.
Plates 3 and 4. [Sep. repr. Atti Accad. Pont. Nuov. Lincei, XXXII.]

Magnus, P. — Remarks on A. B. Frank's Note on the Onion-Smut.

Bot. Centralbl., I., pp. 348-9.
Michelson, p. — The Discussion on the etiology of Area Celsi.

Arch. path. Anat. ^ Physiol. ( Yirchow), LXXX., pp. 296-310.

Miquel, p.— Further Researches on the Organized "Dusts" of the Atmo-

sjihere. 10 figs. Annuaire cle I'Observ. de Montsouris, 1880, pp. 386-513.

„ „ Studies on the Organized " Dusts " of the Atmosphere. [From

'Annuaire de I'Observatoire de Montsouris' for 1879.] 3 figs.

Brebissonia, II., pp. 147-65.
„ „ AtmosTpheiic Bacteria. Comptes £endus,X.CI., pp. Qi-7.

Mueller, K. — Phytoptns on Sedum reflexum L. Bot. Centralbl., I., pp. 349-50.
Naegeli, C. v. — Nutrition of the Lower Fungi by Carbon and Nitrogen Com-
pounds. SB. K. Bay. Akad. Wi^s., 1880, pp. 277-367.
Pasteue, L. — Further Experiments on the "Chole'ra des Poules," and Immunity
against it. \_Ahstr. from 'Comptes Rendus,' XC] Aaturf., XIIT., pp. 247--8.
Phillips, W. — Dacrymyces succineus Fr., the Early Stage of a Peziza.

Grevillea, VIII., pp. 154-5.
PiM, G. — Ramularia Cryptostegia;, nov. sp. „ „ p. 150.

Rathay, E.— Preliminary Communication on the "Witch-broom" of the
Cherry-tree, and on Exoascus Wiesneri Rathay.

Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., XXX., p. 225.
Ribbert, H. — A Micro-parasitic Invasion of the whole Cortical Layer of tkc
Brain. [Bacteria.] Plate X., fig. 5.

Arch. path. Anat. ^ Physiol. {Yirchow'), LXXX., pp. 505-G.
RoBSON, M. H. — Tlie Salmon Disease and its Cause. 1 fig.

Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 129-32.

Saccabdo, P. A. — Conspectus generura fungorum Itali.'B inferiornni, nempe ad

Sphseropsideas, Melanconieas et Hyphomyceteas pertinentium, systemate sporo-

logico dispositoruni. [Latin.] Michclia, 1880, No. 6, pp. 1-38.

„ „ Fungi Gallici lecti a cl. viris Brunaud, Lotendre, Mal-

brache, Theny v. editi in Mycotheca Gallica C. Roumegucri. Str II. [Latin.]

Michclia, 1880, No. 6, pp. 39-135.
„ „ Fungorum extra-europseorum Pugillus. [Latin.]

Michclia, 1880. No. 6, pp. 136-49.

„ „ Fungi Dalmntici pauci ex herb, illustr. R. do Visiani, addito

unoalterovemyceteex AngliaetPannonia. [Latin.] Michdii, li>SO,^o. 6, ]>p. l,")0-3.

„ „ Fungi Vi iieti novi vol critici v. Rlycologife Venetro addend i.

Series XI. Michclia, 1880, No. 6, pp. 154-7G.

Schultze, II. — TIk; Theories as to Area Celsi. Plates 4-5.

Arch. path. Anat. <J- Physiol. ( Virchow), LXXX., pp. 193-247.
TuuEMEN', F. UE. — Diagnoses to Centuries 13-15 of ' ]\iycotlucii universalis.'
{/npart.) Flora, LXIII., pp. 312-22.

White, F. B.— Preliminary List of the Fungi of Pcrthsliirc (n,,dd.).

ticuli. ^al., v., pp. 320-5.

730 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

ZoPF, W. — On a new Method of Observing the Mechanism of the Escape of
the Spoi-es in the Ascomycetes, and on some results which have thereby been
established. [From ' SB. Gescll. Naturf. Freunde,' 1880, No. 2.]

Bedwigia, XIX., pp. 94-9.
Lichenes.

Almquist, E. — Lichenological Eesearches on the North Coast of Siberia.

Ofvers. K. Vet-Akad, For., XXXYI., No. 9, pp. 29-39.
Bagltetto, F., and A. Cabestia. — Account of the Lichens of Valsesia.
{In part.) Plates 1-2. Atti Soc. Critt. JtaL, II., pp. 143-254.

Cakestia, a. — See Baglietto, F.
Mueller, J. — Lichenological Contributions. XI. (condd.').

Flora, LXIIL, pp. 259-68, 275-90.
Phillips, W. — British Lichens : Hints how to study them. {In part.) Plate 5.

Midi. Aat., III., pp. 125-8, 1G7-72.

Algae.

Aeeschoug, J. E. — Description of a new Genus of Algse belonging to the
Laminariacepe. [Oxi/fihssuin.'] Bot. Notiser, 1880, pp. 96-8.

Barkas, T. p.— Marine Diatomaceas. Engl. Mcch., XXXI., p. 304.

Baekas, T. p., Bkown, G. D., Fedakb, J., Hogg, J., Peal, C. N., and Shrub-
sole, W. H. — Bacillaria.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 276, 304, 325-6, 356, 374, 405-6.
Brown, G. D.—See Barkas, T. P.

Cooke, M. C. — British Desmids. Grevillea, VIII., pp. 121-8.

Davis, G. E. — On some Protophytes. 2 plates. 15 pp. (8vo, Manchester,
1880.)

Fedakb, J. — Mineralized Diatoms. Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 874-5.

J, ,, Bacillaria parachxa. ,, „ p. 453.

„ „ . See Barkas, T. P.
FiNDON, C. J. B. — Bacillaria paradoxa. 5 figs. „ ,, pp. 452-3.

Geunow, a. — Observations on J. Brun's Diatomacese Flora of the Alps.

Bot. Centralbl., I., pp. 248-55.
HabIeshaw, F. — Bibliography of the Diatomacese (contd.).

Journ. de Microg., III., pp. 497-500 ; IV., pp. 40-2.
Heueck, H. van. — Synopsis of the Diatomacese of Belgium. Fasc. I. Kaphidese.
Part 1. Atlas. Plates 1-10. (8vo. Antwerp, 1880-1.)
Hogg, J.— Sec Barkas, T. P.
KiTTON, F. — The Early History of the Diatomaceae (contd.).

Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 133-6.
Kjellman, F. K. — On the Alga-Vegetation of the Glacial Sea of Siberia.

Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. For., XXXVI., No. 9, pp. 23-28.
Peal, C. N.— .See Barkas, T. P.

Eichtee, p. — On the Change of Colour in some Fresh-water Algse, especially

the Oscillatoriefe. Bot. Centralbl., I., pp. 605-7.

Sheubsole, W. H. — Mineralized Diatoms. Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 451.

„ „ Bacillaria parado.ca. „ „ p. 453.

„ See Barkas, T. P.

Stoddee, C. — About Diatoms. Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 113-5.

"VViLLE, N. — Fresh- water Algse from Nova Zembla collected by Dr. F. Kjellman

in Nordenskiold's Expedition, 1875. Plates 12-14.

Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. For., XXXVI., No. 5, pp. 13-74.
WoKONiN, M. — Vaucheria Be Baryana, n, sp. Plate 7.

Bot. Zeit., XXXVIII , pp. 425-32.
YoUSG, J. — Notes on the Occurrence of a Species of Boring Marine Alga
penetrating the Shell Structure of a Species of Productus.

Proc, Kat. Hist. Soc, Glasgow, IV., pp. 77-8.

INVERTEBEATA, CEYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 731

MICROSCOPY, &c.

Adams, L. E.— Preserving Crustacea. Sd.-Gossip, 1880, p. 138.

Albrecht. — A simple Method for the Microscopical Examination of Blood

for Spirillum. [_Medic.-Chir. Rundschau, XIX., p. 508.]

AwDRY, Mrs. W. — Easy Lessons in Light. 114 pp. 43 figs. (8vo. London,

1880.)

" B. R," » B.Sc," Cark, E., Edmunds, J., Grey, W. J., and Standage, H. C.
— Chromatization of Light by a Microscopic SlMe.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 276-7, 303, 303-4, 304, 325,

354, 379, 399, 399-400, 421-2, 422, 447.

Barnard, F. — On the Use of Carbolic Acid in Mounting Objects for the

Microscope. Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 137-8.

Bizzozero, G.— The Chromo-Cytometer. New instrument for determining

the amount of Haemoglobin in the Blood.

[Med. Jahrh., Wien, 1880, pp. 251-67.]

Blackham, G. E. — The Tolles-Blackham Microscope, P. anijulatum, Amphi-

pleura pellucida, &c. Engl. 3Iech., XXXI., p. 400 [and see p. 420].

Brittan, W. C. — Preparing Slides. Am. Journ. Micr., V., p. 139.

BuTTERWORTH, J. — Cutting and Grinding Rock Sections. 2 figs.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 277.
Calderon y Arana. — Schneider's Polarizing Apparatus. 1 fig.

Anal. Soc. Espan. Hist, Nat., IX. (^Actas) pp. 35-8,
Carb, E.—Scc "B. R."
Ceetes, a. — On the Micrographic Analysis of Water.

Cumptes Rendus, XC, pp. 1435-7.
Clevenger, S. V. — Microscopic Examination of Tissues after tiie Adminis-
tration of Mercury. {In part.) Am. M. Micr. Junrn., I., pp. 110-13.
Crus, R. — Telescope, Microscope, and Aquarium Difficulties and Manipuhx-
tion. 2 figs. Enjl. Ilech., XXXI., p. 448.
Diatoms, Directions for Cleaning, (fn part.)

Am. M. Micr. Journ.., I., pp. 107-10.
Edmunds, J. — See " B. R,"

" Fellow of the R. Micr. Soc." — [Grubb's Microscope, 1 fig. ; Paraboloid
Diaphragms (Williams) ; New Formula Objective (Powell and Lealand's) ;
" Numerical Aperture " as defined by Prof. E. Abbe.]

Engl. Mech., XXXL, pp. 275-6.
„ „ [Opaque Illumination for the Microscope ; a

Correction. Engl. Mech., XXXL, p. 302.
„ „ [Tolles's Opaque Illuminator for the Micro-

scope ; Prof. H. L. Smith's Vertical Illuminator ; Experimental Demonstration of
Apertures, &c. ; Paraboloid Diaphragms.] Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 324-5.

„ „ [Powell and Lealand's new Oil-itnincrsiou

Condenser at the Quokett Club and Royal Society ; New Formula Objectives ;
Royal Microscopical Society ; 80,000 Diameters (?) ; Athletics of Microt^copy.]

Engl. Mech., XXXL, pp. 373-4.
„ „ [Paraboloid Diaphragms ; Dr. Blackham ou

Microscope-stands and English and American Microscopy.]

Engl. Mech., XXXL, p. 420.

FouQVK, F., and A.M. Levy. — Micrograph ical Mineralogy — French iM-uptivo

Rocks. (Ministere des Travaux publics. — Memoires pour servir k rexplicatiou

do la Carte Ge'ologiquc de'taille de la France.) 509 pp. 55 plates. (4to. Paris.

1879.)

George, G. F.-Dull Objectives. Sci.-Gossip, 18S0, p. 159.

GiBBES, H. — On the Use of the Wenliam Binocular with High Powers.

Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., XX., pp. 318-19.
Grey, W. .T.—Sec " B. R."

Grubb's Microscope. — Sec " Fellow," &c., and " Observer."
Hesciil — Contribution to the History of the Compound Micro.scopc. Plate 1>^.

' Arch. Mikr. AwU., XVIIL, pp. 391-402.

732 BIBLIOGRAPnY OF INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, ETC.

Iris Diaphragm an old invention. Am. Joum. Micr., V., pp. 13G-7.

KoETiNG. — A new Microtome. (1 fig.)

Jen. Zeitschr. Natnriciss., VII., pp. 193-5.
Levick, J. — Pond Life : where to find Anuraa longispina.

Midi. Nat., III., pp. 166-7.
Levy, A. M. — See Fouque, F.

Medical Postal Microscopical Society. Am. Joum. Micr., V., pp. 117-18.

Mees, C. L.— Blood Stains. [died. Herald (Louisville), II., p. 89.]

MosELEY, H. N. — Remarks upon some Specimens of Sections of Corals

prepared by Koch's Method. Froc Zool. Soc. Land., 1880, pp. 24-7.

„ Description of a new Species of Simple Coral. ^ figs.

Proc. Zool. Soc. Land., 1880, pp. 41-2.
" Observer."— The Grubb Micros'-'ope-stand. Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 420.

Pelletan, J. — The Camera Lucida of Dr. J. G. Hofmaim. 4 figs.

Joum. de Microg., III., pp. 484-5.
„ „ Gundlach's Hemispherical Immersion Coinlenser. 4 figs.

Joyrn. de Microg., IV., pp. 21-4.
„ „ The Camera Lucida of Dr. J. G. Hofmann. 3 figs.

Joum. de Microg., IV., pp. 25-6.

Pennock, E. — The Binocular Microscope. Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 304.

Peticolas, C. L. — Some new Slides from the Richmond (Virginia) Diutoma-

ceous Earth. Am. Joum. Micr., V., pp. 133-4.

Phin, J. — Micromillimetre, Micrometre, or Sixth-metre.

Am. Joum. Micr., V., p. 117.
Piper, R. U. — Cleaning Cover-glasses. Am. Nat. XIV., pp. 465.

Powell & Lealand's New Formula Objective — See " Fellow," &c.
QuiKOGA, F. — Micrographical Study of some Basalts of Ciudad-Real. Plate 3
to follow. AnaL Soc. Espun. Hist. Nat., IX., pp. 161-79.

Romeo, Nelly A. — Pleurosigma angulatum. Am, Joum. Micr., V., pp. 137-8.
Row, F.— A new Collecting Bottle. 1 fig. Sci.-Gossip, 1880, p. 136.

Sanio, C. — On the Preparation of a suitable Asphalts Varnish for Micro-
scopical Slides. But. CentralU., I., pp. 90-1 .
Seiler, C. — Microscopic Examination ; Preparation of Tissues (contd.).

[Med. Herald (Lo'iisville), II.. pp. 87-9.]
Serrano t Fatigati. — Optical Phenomena in the Field of the IMicroscope.

Anal. Soc. Espan. Hist. N t., IX. (Adas), pp. 20-1.
Sharples, S. p. — Adulterations of Food. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 461-3.

Sokby, H. C— On the Structure and Origin of Non-Calcareous Stratified
Rocks. 11 figs. [Anniversarv Address.]

Quart. Joum. Geol. Soc, XXXVI., Proc, pp. 46-92.
Standage, H. C.—See " B. R."
Stodder, 0. — Microscope-stands [Beck and Tolles].

Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 420.
Stokes, A. C. — Growing Slides. Ain. Joum. Micr., V., p. 139.

Suffolk, W. T.— Tlje President's Address, 1880. [South London Micro-
scopical and Nat. Hist. Society.] 4 pp. (Svo. London, 1880.)

Tiffany, F. B. — Microscopic Examination of the Blood in the Living Person.
[Prepuce.] 2 fio-s. \St. Louis Med. 4- Surg. Joum., XXXVIII., pp. 387-9 ;

Louisville Med. Herald, II., p. 30.]
"Waters, A. W. — Some Rocks of the Vaudois Alps studied microscopically.
Plate 24. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., XVI., pp. 593-8.

Wenham, F. H. — Mr. Stodder and Angular Aperture.

Am. Joum. Micr., V., p. 137.
„ „ On an Improved Immersion-Paraboloid. 3 figs.

Am. M. Micr. Joum., I., pp. 101-2.
Wickersheimer's Preserving Fluid. Entomol. Nachr., VI., pp. 129-32.

Williams, G. — Paraboloid Diaphragms.

Engl. M'ech., XXXI., p. 304 [see also pp. 275-6, 325, 400, and 420].
Willis, L. M. — The Abbe-Zeiss High-angled Immersion Condenser. 2 figs.

Am. Joum. Micr., V., pp. 108-9.

( 733 )
PEOCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Meeting of 9th June, 1880, at King's College, Strand, W.C.
Dr. R. Beaithwaite, F.L.S. (Vice-President) in the Chair.

The Minutes of the meeting of 12th May last were read and
confirmed, and were signed by the Chairman.

The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints) re-
ceived since the last meeting was submitted, and the thauks of the
Society given to the donors.

Microscope (" Sketch-Model "), formerly in the possession of From

Mr. Eilwin Quekett, one of the original members of this
Society, and esteemed by him and by his brother, Professor
Quekett, as an interesting example of early endeavour to
improve the construction of the Microscope Mr.C.F. White.

Parkes & Son's Microscope Lamp, with Cooling Evaporator .. Messrs. Parkes and

Son.

Pepper Cane, Section of Mr. T. Christy.

Surirella gemma from Emden, Prussia, Bottle of Hen- 0. Brandt.

Zoological Station of Naples — 12 slides Tlie Station,through

21r. A. W. Waters.

Mr. Crisp called special attention to the slides received from the
Zoological Station at Naples, which were exhibited under Microscopes
in the room (see p. 700).

Mr, Crisp exhibited and described Waechter's Trichina-Microscope
(see p. 714), and Dr. Weber-Liel's Ear-Microscope (see p. 710), and
described Dr. Tiffany's Prepuce-Microscope (see p. 709).

Dr. Matthews exhibited and described a new form of turntable
(see \). 710).

Mr. Crisp exhibited and explained a "Micrometer-Microscope"
made by M. Hartuack, a description and illustration of which will bo
jjublished hereafter.

Mr. Beck said it had struck him for some time that there was a
great deal of interest attached to the question of the jiurity of tlio
water supply, and that the reports sent in by the inspectors were of
such an uniustructive character as to bo worth very little indeed to
the general public, who were the persons most interested in the
matter. He, therefore, thought that if the Society as a body could
do something to instruct them as to what were signs of purity and
what were really impurities it would be doing a very good service.
Ho remembered that si^me time agt) when there was a Parliamentary

734 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Committee appointed to consider the subject, there were shown in
some of the water examined some monstrous creatures which were
calculated to cause alarm to any one ; but the scientific evidence
showed that the water was really so pure and free from sewage
contamination that it did not kill the creatures which were found.
He threw this out as a hint, as he believed that they ought to show
that whilst they were a scientific body in the highest sense of the
term, they were capable of work which would really be of great
public benefit.

The Chairman said he quite agreed with Mr. Beck in his remarks,
and invited the Fellows to act ui)ou the suggestion made. He thought,
however, that they must rely upon the action of the working Fellows
of the Society rather than on any committee, and hoped that during
the coming recess something might be done in the matter.

Mr. J. W. Stephenson read a paper " On the Visibility of Minute
Objects mounted in Phosphorus, Solution of Sulphur, Bisulphide of
Carbon, and other Media " (see p. 564).

Mr. Stewart said that the paper did not relate to a matter of mere
optical curiosity, but to an extremely valuable means of investigation
as applied to minute structure, which was brought out and rendered
visible with marvellous clearness.

Mr. Crisp described and commented on the proposed process for
cleaning Foraminifera suggested by Mr. K. M. Cunningham, the
method recommended being electrical attraction (see p. 692), and
Mr. A. A. Bragdon's suggestion of the use of glycerine and sulpho-
carbonate of zinc as a medium for homogeneous immersion (see
p. 701).

Dr. Edmunds read a note " On a Parabolized Gas Slide," speci-
mens of which were exhibited in the room (see p. 585).

Mr. W. H. Gilburt read a paper " On the Structure and Function
of the Scale-Leaves of Lathrea squamaria," illustrating the subject
by a number of drawings on the black-board.

The Chairman, in moving a vote of thanks to Mr. Gilburt, re-
marked that the curious plant which had formed the subject of his
paper was not an uncommon one, and the paper showed how much
interest could be got out of a common object if only it were handled
by competent hands.

Mr. Stewart thought it would be interesting to test the nature of
the fluid secretion which Mr. Gilburt had mentioned, in order to see
if it were at all the same as that in the Drosera and other carnivorous
plants.

Mr. Crisp exhibited and described Zeiss's micro-spectroscope (see
p. 703), and Hartnack's polarizing apparatus.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 735

Mr. Woodall gave a resum^ of his paper " On the Interference-
Phenomena produced by Luminous Points."

Mr. Crisp announced that it had been decided by the Council
that the books in the Society's library should be allowed to be circu-
lated amongst the Fellows under regulations which would be announced
as soon as the Assistant-Secretary had completed the catalogue of the
library which he had in hand.

Professor Rogers's paper " On Tolles's Illuminator for High
Powers " was read.

Professor Abbe's paper " On the Function of Aperture in Micro-
scopic Vision " was taken as read.

Mr. Crisp read a part of a letter from the author, in which he
said : " Having been often blamed for obscurity, I resolved to explain
my opinions in such a way now that they cannot fail to be under-
stood." The paper would probably exceed 150 pages of the Journal,
and the Council had therefore decided to print it as a separate
volume.

Mr. Crisp said that it had been repi-esented to him that some of
the Fellows would like tliat the larger part of the Journal should
consist of " Microscopy," i. e. matter relating to the Microscope as an
instrument, its modifications, imiH'ovements, &c. As every existing
source outside the Society was already made use of for " micro-
scopical " notes, one of two things must have happened (remembering
that the suggestion came from within and not outside the Society) —
either communications from Fellows intended for the Journal had
accidentally failed to reach him from some unexplained cause, or it
was not sufficiently understood by the Fellows that the " Microscopy "
portion of the Record was available for communications which
might not be so appropriately jmnted as a formal "paper" in the
Transactions.

In addition it must be remembered that all tastes had to be con-
sulted in the compilation of the Journal (a point which he liad
kept prominently in mind), and it was clear that there was a con-
siderable body of the Fellows who took only a secondary interest in
the Microscope from an instrumental point of view, and who were
more especially concerned" with tlie subjects which required the aid
of the Microscoi>c for their investigation.

A second point which he wished to refer to was, tlmt it was
not to be supposed tliat everything mentioned in tlie Jom-nal was
intended to be thereby certified as " new." Substantially he hud dis-
continued the use of that word altogether in relation to microscopical
matters on account of the irritation it seemed to produce, but still

736 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

there was never a Journal issued tliat he did not receive more than
one letter pointing out that what was described had " been done
before." *

A Special General Meeting was then held pursuant to the
notice given at the last meeting (see p. 559).

Dr. Gray moved and Mr. Michael seconded the following resolu-
tion, which was carried unanimously : —

That the 6th Bye-law be cancelled, and the following substituted
in lieu thereof.

" 6. Every Fellow on his election shall pay an entrance fee of two
guineas.

" 6a. The Annual Subscription to be paid by the Fellows shall be
two guineas, which shall become due in advance on the 1st January
in every year. Fellows elected in any of the months subsequent to
June shall pay one-half only of the subscription for the current
year."

The following Objects, Apparatus, &c., were exhibited:—

Mr. T. Christy : — Section of Pepper Cane.

Mr. Crisp: — Hartnack's Micrometer-Microscope ; Waeehter's
Trichina-Microscope (see p. 714) ; Weber-Liel's Ear-Microscope
(see p. 710) ; Hartnack's Polarizing Apparatus ; Zeiss's Micro-Spec-
troscope (see p. 703).

Mr. O. Brandt : — Twelve slides by K. Getschmann, of Berlin
(arranged Insect scales, &c.).

Mr. Gilburt : — Six sections of Lathrea squamaria, illustrating his
paper.

Dr. Matthews: — Improved Turntable (see p. 716).

Messrs. Parkes and Son : — Microscope Lamp (see p. 528).

Mr. J. W. Stephenson : — Ampliipleura pellucida — in sulphur dis-
solved in bisulphide of carbon ; Pleurosigma elongatum — in phosj)horus
dissolved in bisulphide of carbon ; Pleurosigma formosum — in bisul- ,
phide of carbon alone. (All with Catoptric Immersion Illuminator.)

Mr. C. F. White :— Microscope (see p. 733).

Zoological Station at Naples : — Twelve slides, viz. : AmpMoxus
lanceolatus Yarr. ; Ascetta hlanca H. ; Aster acanthion glacialis 0. F.
Miiller — Larva ; Asterias glacialis O. F. M. — Gastrula ; ditto — Forma-
tion of the Mesoderm ; Echinocardium cordatum Gray — Larva ; Pyro-
soma elegans Les. — Young Colony ; Pseudodidemnum Listerianum — Ova
with embryo; Toxopneustes h-evispinosus J. Miiller — Larva, 3rd, 5th,
and 15th day ; Stichopus regalis Cuv. — Ovary.

* This is irrespective of the descriptions of Microscopes previously figured in
foreign journals, but which not having hitherto appeared in any English publi-
cation, are now figured and described in the Journal so as to make the English
Eecord as complete as posaible.

F^ *^^

^ BI-MONTHLY, ^

r To Non-Fellows,

Vol. ni. No. 6.] OCTOBER, 1880. [ Price 4s.

Journal

OF THE

Royal
Microscopical Society;

CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS.

AND A RECORD OK CURRENT RE5EARC:iES RELATrNG TO

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOQAMIA,
MICROSCOPY, &c.

EdiUd, Muier (he direction of the Publication Committee^ by

FRANK CRISP, LL.B,, B.A., F.L.S.,

One of the Secretaries of the Society,

WITH THE ASSISTANCE CF

A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc, J F. JEFFIIKY BELL, M.A^

Lecturer on Botany at St. Titomas's l/osf-iial, | rrofessor pf CoHtparalive Anatotry in Kim^t College,

KNO

B. O. RIDLEY, B.A., F.L.P.,

Of the British Museum,
FEM.OWS OF TlIF, SOCIRTY,

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

% LONDON AND EDINBURGH. M(? /

RINTKO RV WM. CI^WBS ANO SONS, I.IMITIU},] (srA»:i'OMl STRHlr AND CMABINC CSOSl.

( 2 )

JOURNAL

OF THE

EOYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY,

VOL. III. No. S.

CONTENTS.

Tkansactions of tue Society — ,.a,:b

XX. On the Structure and Function of the Scale-Leaves of
Lathrea squamabia. By W. H. Gilburt, F.R.M.S. (Plate

XVII.) 737

XXI. On Daylight Illumination with the Plane Mirror. An
Appendix to Part I, of the *' Theory of Illuminating
Apparatus." By tlie late Dr.. H. E. Fripp, Ex-off. F.R.M.S.

(Figs. 66-70) 742

XXII. On an Improved Finder. By W. Webb. (Figs. 71 and 72) 750

XXIII. On Tollbs' Interior Illuminator for Opaque Objects. By
William A. Rogers, F.R.M.S. ; with Note by R. B. Tolles,

F.R.M.S. (Figs. 73 and 74) .. .. .. .. 754

Record of Current Researches relating to Inveutbbkata,

Cbyptogamia, Microscopy, &c. .. .. .. .. 759

Zoology.

Development of the liaJibit 759

Development of the " Glomerulus of the Ilead-Kidney^' in the Chick .. .. 75.)

Cellular Evolution of Frotoplcmm 7G0

Imperfection of the Geological Record 7G0

Mollusca of the ' Chdknger ' Expedition 7G1

Antiquity of certain Subordinnte Types of Fresh-iualer and Land Mollusca 7(J3

Development of the Digestive Tract in the Mollusca 7ti3

Action of Poisons on the Cephali'puda 7(i4

Begeneration of the Head in Gastropods 765

Activity and Structure of the Muscles of Mollusca Acepltala 76.5

Pedal Glands of the Tellinidx 765

Anatomy of the Bullidea 766

Development of Teredo .. .. 770

Development uf Lingula 772

Struiure of Adeona 773

New Genus of Polyzoa 774

Little-hnoxvn Organ of the Dymenoptera 774

Honey-hearing Ants 775

Stru-ture of the Lampyridx with reference to thuir Phosjihurescencc .. .. 777

Influence of Temperature in producing Varieties of Lepidoiitcra .. .. 170

Protective Attitude of the Caterpillar of the Lobster Mutk 780

Odoriferous Apparatus of Sphinx ligustrl 7; 0

Spinning Organs (f Insect Larvie 781

Parthenogenesis in iJalictus • 7M1

Gulls produced hy Aphides 782

( y )

Ekoord of CtJBRENT Reskabohes, &c. — Continued.

PAOK

Eyes and Brain of Cermatia forceps 783

New Work on Parasites 784

New Galeodida 785

Antemiary Gland of the Crustacea 785

liapidity of the Transmission of Motor Stimuli along the Nerves of the

Lobster 786

Nervous System of Idotea entomon 787

Cymothoidx 787

Odracoda of Scotland 788

Blind Crustacean 700

A7inelids of the Norwegian North Sea Expedition 790

New Genus of the Archiannelides .. .. 790

Enchytrfeux cavifola 792

Batrai-hobdella Latusti 793

The Chxtognaihn 793

Disease produced by Anchylostoma dwidenalis 799

Organization and Development of the Gordii 8U1

Excretory System of the Trematoda and Cestoda 802

Development of the Liver Fluhe 803

Anatomy of the Nemer tinea 803

Intestinal Worms in the Horse 805

Parasites of Helminthes 805

Bodies found on Meat 800

Flosciilaria ornata 806

Prothelmintlms, a new loio Vermian Form 806

New Synthetic Type 807

Develojjment of the Echinodermata 807

Echinoderms of the Norwegian North Sea Expedition 808

Synthetic Type of Ophinrid 809

Uivmoglobin in the Aquiferous System of an Echinoderm 810

Buccal Skeleton of the Asterida 810

New Cretaceous Comatulm , 810

Structure and Origin of Coral Reefs a7id Islands 810

New Mode of Reproduction among the Hydroida 812

Origin of the Generative Cells in the Uydroida 813

Occurrence of Foreign Spicules in Sponges 813

Tentaculate, Suctorial, and Flagellate Infusoria (P\ates XVIII. and XIX.) 814

Radiolaria in "Diaspro " 819

Botany.

Development of the Embryn-snc 819

Fertilization of Coh.v.a pendulijlora 822

Structure and Motile Properties of Protoplasm 823

Structure of Sieve-tubes 8'it

Oiemical Composition of Chlorophyll .. 825

Composition of Chlorophyll 826

Division of Chloro/jhyll-grains 82G

Branching of Endogenous Organs from the Mother-organ 826

Influence of Direction and Strength of Illumination on certain Motile

Phenomena in Plants 827

Case of Apparent Insectivorism 828

Prolhallia of Ferns 829

Nou-Sexmd Reproduction of the Prothullium of Ferns by means of Qcmmx

or Conidia 829

Amphibious Nature of the Prothallium of Polypodiacex 82'.)

Synopsis of the Speeiesof h6ete» j-iJO

Structure of Dunwrliera 8;fl

Formation of the Sporognnium of Arrhidium 8)52

Transition of Female to Mule Organ in a Moss 8IJ3

Neio Genera of Fungi 833

Mode of Escape of the Spores from tfie Asci in Ascomycetes 834

Fungus-parasites of the Aurantiacex S'Mi

Fungi parasitic on Forest-trees S35

Witch-broom of the Cherry ( /'zoascus Winsncri) 8;$5

( 4 )

Recobd of Ccbrent Reskarohes, &c. — continued.

PAGE

Neto Vegetable Structures from Coal and Anthracite 8;<6

Classification of Bacteriacem 8S7

Atmospheric Bacteria 837

Modification of the Properties of Bacillus anthracis by Cultivatioti .. .. 838
Bacterium foetidum : an Organism associated with profuse Siceating from

the Soles of the Feet 839

Alcoholic Fermentation 841

Clastoderma 8il

Monograph of Arthonia .. .. 841

Algal Vegetation of the Siberian Sea-coast 842

Algse of the Utah Salt Lake 843

Antherozoids of Hildebratidtia rivularis 8l3

New Vaucheria 844

Parasitic Nostoc 845

Movement of the Cell-c(yntents of Closterium lunula 845

Eiidochrome of Diatomacess 84G

MiCEOSCOpy, &c.

Microscopical Analysis of Water 847

Brownian Movement 849

Examining very soft BocJis .. 849

Lenses for Petrographioal Worh (Figs. 75 and 7G) 850

Process for Microscopical Study of very minute Crystalline Grains .. .. 851

Br. Matlhews's Machine for Cutting Hard Sections (Figs. 77-79) . . . . 852

Bleaching and WasJting Sections (Fii^a. 80 &ud 81) 853

Wicliersheimer's Preservative Liquid 855

Preserving the Colours of Tissues 856

Staiyiing- fluid for Amyloid Substance 857

Carbolic Acid for Mounting] 858

WaxCelh 860

Dry " Mounts " for the Microscope — Wax ami Gutta-percha Cells .. .. 8'Jl

Covering Fluid Mounts 864

Thickness of Cover-glasses 866

Finishing Slides 866

Novel Form of Lens 867

Swift's Radial Traversing Sabstagc IllumirMtor (FifiB, 82 and 8S) .. .. 867

Soimes's'^ Isophotal" Binocular Microscope (Fig3.8i-87) 870

NacheVs Microscope loith Rotaiing Foot 873

Edmunds's Parabolized Gas Slide and Nachet's Gas Chamber .. .. .. 873

Advantages of the Binocular Microscope 874

Reduction of Angle of Aperture tcith the Binocular (F'lga. 88-dl) ., .. 874

Apertures exceeding ISO"^ in Air (Figs. d2-di) 875

Diameter of Microscope-tubes 877

Wythe's Amplifiers .. 877

Foreign Mechanical Stages {F'lgs. 95 and dG) 878

''Fine" Adjudmenls (Figs. 91 and 98) 882

Seibert and Kraft's Fine Adjustmeid (Figs. 90-101) 883

Construction of Immersion Objectives (Fig. 102) 884

Mountiiig of the Front Lens of Immersion Objectives 8S4

Penetration 886

Tolles's Improved Traverse-lens, Illuminating and Aperture-measuring

Apparatus (Fig. 103) 887

Semi-cylinder Illuminator (Fig. 101:) 889

Tlie Iris Diaphragm an Old Invention 890

Microscopical Goniometer 890

Pleurosigma angulatum as a Test Object 890

FasoWs Test Plate 891

Giiidher's Photographs of Pleurosigma angulatum 891

New Microscopical Journal 892

BlBIJOGBAPHY .. .. .. .. .. •• •• •• 893

JOXTFiN.P.JvIICP. .SOC:VOL.III.PL.XYn

W.H. {h'Jta:>^~t; ScL <i'Sj -Aat, .

"flwJjSVrmOTvi; Cd.

Sca,le-lea--ves of LatKi?ea ec[U8Lm.a,r-ia

JOURNAL

OF TUB

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

OCTOBER, 1880.

TKANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XX. — On the Structure and Function of the Scale-Leaves of
Lathrea squaniaria. By W. H. Gilburt, F.R.M.S.
(Read 9th June, 1880.)
Plate XVII.
Bentham, ill describing the uuderground portion of this re-
markable plant, says : " Eootstock fleshy and creeping, covered
with close-set, short, thick, fleshy scales." * Syme and Lankester
first describe it as having subterranean stems, and then go on to
say, " Eootstock branched, giving off slender fibres which attach
themselves by minute tubercles to the plant on which it grows ; "
and further on, " The common name of tliis plant was given to it
from a supposed resemblance of the scaly roots to a human
tooth." t

That the term " rootstock " is here incorrectly applied will I
think, be at once apparent, for the following reasons: — («) That
the flowering stem is a direct continuation of axis of the plant ;
(&) that the scales with which the underground portions are I'ur-
nish( d ari.so, as do all leaves, in strictly acropetal order ; (c) and that
the branches are produced from buds arising in the axils of the.so
scales. We must therefore regard it not as a rootstock, but as an
underground stem ; and the scales, as leaves which have undergouo
modification.

The description given above conveys all that need be said of

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII.

Figs. 1-3.— Sections of sciile-loiivcs. 1. Transverse. 2. Tang(.ntiiil. 3. Vortical
nnd radial to tlio stem.
„ 4-G. — Ses.'jiio bUifaoo glaii(l.-<. 4. lu plm. ;"). Pir-ipcctivo. G. 0|pti<-al
BLction allowing laign lia.sal c< II, and thickening of cnp-ccll walls
in anglis.
„ 7, S. — PedicoUate glands.

Figs. 1-3x8; 4-8 X 22.').

♦ ' Ilandlmok nf niitlHli Flora,' vol. ii. p. <'.i)l
t 'English P.utaii.v." vol. vi. pp. ls;i-'.)(i.
vol.. III.

788 Transactions of the Society.

their outward aspect ; but sections of them exhibit a far more com-
plicated structure than their outward form would lead us to expect.
Figs. 1-3 represent sections in as many directions, No. 1 being
transverse, 2 tangential, and 3 longitudinal and radial with regard
to the stem.

The sections show that these organs are so developed as to
enclose a number of chambers, having communication externally at
their base. These chambers are produced by the early, unequal,
and excessive development of what is morphologically the under
side of the lamella of the leaf, the epidermis being continuous over
their entire inner surface. Their number and form is very variable,
and they frequently communicate with each other.

The whole of the inner surface of these chambers is literally
crowded with glands, of which there are two forms, — a sessile gland,
three views of which are shown in Figs. 4-6, and a pedicellate gland.
Figs. 7, 8. The first form is composed of four cap-cells arranged
parallel to each other, and a large basal cell, which appears as an
annulus round the cap-cells, when the gland is looked at in plan or
perspective. Figs. 4, 5 ; Fig. 6 being an optical section, showing
peculiar thickenings of the walls of the cap-cells at four out of the
five angles formed by their union with the basal cell. The lower
wall of the latter, where it is in contact with the deeper cells of the
leaf, exhibits a large number of simple pits, rendering it almost
sieve-like in appearance. The other form of gland has a pedicel
usually consisting of a single cell cut off from the epidermal ceil
from which it originated by a septum, and a glandular head of two
or four cells, the cell plates which form them being always laid
down vertically and at right angles to each other. Occasionally
one of these glands may be found having a pedicel of two, three, or
four cells in vertical series, while others have a head of only three
cells, the division of one of the primary daughter-cells being sup-
pressed.

Both kinds of glands are filled with a colourless, hyaline proto-
plasm, in which usually a few granules are included, frequently
exhibiting vigorous Brownian movement.

On the surface of both forms of glands in the older scale-leaves
a large number of rigid, rod-like filaments are to be seen standing
at right angles to their surfaces, the nature of which I have not
been able to determine. They do not appear to be protoplasmic in
their character, as they do not shrink under the application of
alcohol, and are not continuous with the cell- contents. In young
leaves they are absent. In the older leaves the glands are also
always found surrounded with an accumulation of flocculent matter.

The vascular system of the leaves also requires notice. The
common bundles, upon entering the leaves, divide at once, their
primary branches passing up between the chambers, where they

Scale-Leaves of Lathrea squamaria. By W. H. Gilhurt. 739

again divide and subdivide, their ultimate divisions being composed
of spiral cells only in a single series. These vascular twigs are
very numerous, and only separated from the epidermis and glands
of the chambers by a single layer of cells, their course being
parallel with that of the chamber- walls.

Bearing in mind the conditions under which Lathrea lives, viz.
always buried beneath the surface of the ground, often somewhat
deeply, the question naturally suggested by an examination of these
structures is. What is their function? for it cannot be supposed
that organs so highly specialized should exist and yet serve no
imj)ortant purpose in the economy of the plant.

If a tangential section of a leaf of a plant growing under normal
conditions be removed, it will be found that all the chambers are
filled with a fluid somewhat turbid in appearance and having a
most decided acid reaction; we may therefore conclude that at
least these glands serve the purpose of secretion, the fluid secreted
being discharged outwardly. That this takes place somewhat
abundantly may be inferred from the fact that in the bank from
which I have taken my material, and which is composed of a light
friable loam, the soil immediately surrounding the Lathrea was
saturated with moisture, while all beside could be crumbled apart
with the fingers.

The probability that they possessed absorbing powers also sug-
gested itself, and a large number of experiments have been made to
determine it, adopting the methods employed by Mr. Darwin with
Utricularia, &c.

Thus five tangential sections were cut from the same leaf.
They were cut as thick as could be well examined under a ^-inch
objective, so as to have as many glands under observation as possible.
The sections were first placed under thin covers in distilled water
and examined carefully, when all the glands were seen to present
their normal appearance. The distilled water was then withdrawn,
and under four of the covers a solution of carbonate of ammonia in
the proportion of 1 to 400 was run in, and under the other a 1 per
cent, solution of cane sugar.

After two hours they were examined, and no change was visible ;
after three and a half hours a few of the pediceUate glands showed
decided contraction of the protoplasm and a slight increase of
granulation ; after twelve hours all these glands showed contraction
of their contents, more or less ; and in twenty-four hours, in all, the
protoplasm was greatly contracted and coarsely granular ; while the
section ,in the sugar solution had only a very few of the glands
slightly affected. The sessile surface glands and the cells of the
epidermis remained unaltered, save by the general darkening of
their contents which invariably takes ])lace when the plant is cither
placed in water or exposed to air. Itepcating these experiments

3 c 2

740 Transactions of the Society.

with otLer sets of sections, the results were sometimes less decided ;
some of the glands treated with the carbonate remaining unaffected,
while a considerable number of those iu the sugar solution showed
contraction.

Ammonia-nitrate and phosphate were also employed, of several
strengths, from 1 to |- per cent., using control solutions of cane
sugar or gum-arabic, and occasionally distilled water only.

With ammonia-nitrate the results were altogether negative, a
few of the glands only being affected, and about equally in all the
sections both in the nitrate and control solutions.

Ammonia-phosphate in a 1 per cent, solution gave very decided
results. Eight sections were placed under covers and examined to
see that the glands were in their normal condition. Six of them
were then irrigated with the ammonia-phosphate and two with a
1 per cent, solution of sugar.

In two hours a slight increase of granulation was observed in
the pedicellated glands of all the sections iu the ammonia-phosphate
solution.

In four hours the protoplasm was slightly shrunken and still
more granular.

In twelve hours the above features were very decided, and the
protoplasm much darker in the j)edicellated glands than elsewhere.

In twenty-four hours the protoplasm was so darkened as to be
quite opaque.

In none of the surface glands did I find the least alteration.

The sections in sugar solution were nearly unaltered, only very
few of the pedicellated glands but retained their normal appearance.

Other sets of sections were placed in solutions in the proportion
of 1 to 200, 400, 800; and in each case the results seemed to point
in the same direction, though the changes were neither so rapid
nor decided. In sections placed in a 1 per cent, solution of gum-
arabic, about half the pedicellated glands showed contraction and
granulation, while others placed in water, putrid with decaying
vegetation, remained quite unaltered after twenty-four hours.
Sections placed in distilled water, after being first washed in it, pre-
served their normal appearance at the end of tliirty-six hours ;
while others placed in it direct from the razor had about half their
glands contracted after the lapse of twenty-four hours.

These facts, if not amounting to an absolute demonstration of
the absorbing function of the pedicellate glands, yet furnish strong
presumptive evidence in favour of it.

We may also infer that seeing the fluid which fills the leaf
chambers is acid in character, it must be secreted by the leaf ; and
as the sessile surface glands in all the experiments made, remained
absolutely unaltered, we may conclude that it is by them that the
function is performed. In all probability these functions, viz.

Scale-Leaves of Lathrea squamaria. By W. H. Oilhurt. 741

secretion and absorption, take place alternately, as in other plants
wliere similar organs are found, and similar secretions are poured
out.

That the purpose served by these organs is of advantage to the
plant cannot for a moment be doubted, and that it should be in any
other way than nutrition is difficult to suppose ; and if this be so,
we must conclude that it is the decaying organic matter in the soil
which is appropriated by the plant, being dissolved by the acid
solution so copiously poured out, as inorganic substances could not
be assimilated in the absence of light.

Of course if this be the case, Lathrea must in future be re-
garded as but partially parasitic — a view which was, I believe, held
by Henfrey, on account of the fact that it is often found possessing
roots. That Lathrea does sometimes develop adventitious roots
abundantly is without doubt, I having a longitudinal section of the
end of a secondary stem about half an inch in length, in which
eleven such roots are shown in section. Whether these roots are to
be regarded as such, functionally, or only as organs of attachment
to the host, I am not quite prepared to say. In a portion of a
plant which I attempted to grow in a garden pot independent of a
host — and in which some amount of growth took place — a large
number of thin and delicate roots were developed from the inter-
nodes of the stem nearest the summit. The plant, however,
perished during the severe frosts of last winter.

742 Transactions of the Society.

XXI. — On Daylight Illumination with the Plane Mirror.

An Appendix to Part I. of the " Theory of Illuminating
Apparatus." *

By the late Dr. H. E. Fripp, Ex.-off. F.R.M.S.

(Read l-ith January, 1880.)

In my paper on the theory of illuminating apparatus, published in
the last volume of the Journal, I referred at some length to a
doctrine, which, being well accredited by scientific men abroad, did
not occur to me as a possible stumbling-block to the acceptance of
arguments based thereon, until I learned how much it was at
variance with the teaching and belief of microscopists in this
country. It was, namely, contended that an object placed on the
stage of the Microscope is always and necessarily illumined by a
converging pencil when daylight is reflected upon it from the plane
mirror. In English handbooks of the Microscope it is, on the
contrary, assumed without question that the illuminating pencil is
derived from a parallel beam of rays incident on the mirror whether
plane or concave. Now since the conclusions, theoretical and prac-
tical, deduced from such widely opposed premises cannot but be as
contradictory as the premises themselves, while, moreover, they
cannot both be true, it is desirable as well as important, in a
scientific point of view, that these antagonistic beliefs should be
brought to the final arbitrement of fact. The question is one which
optical science is perfectly competent to determine, proof or dis-
proof of either proposition being readily drawn from consideration
of first principles or from experimental tests. In the hope that a
more explicit statement of the rationale of " converging light " may
bring it more fairly under the notice of those who may be disposed
to give this doctrine due attention, I now present a short summary
of the grounds upon which it rests.

The transference of light, in an optical sense, from one point or
surface to another is efiected either by reflection or refraction. And
in discussing the function of the mirror our sole appeal is to the
law of reflection, just as the law of refraction would be appealed to
if the action of the various lenses of an illuminator were in question.
But in connection with this transference of light by means of reflec-
tor or refractor an interesting problem occurs in estimating the
illuminating eff'ect of the difierent surfaces which consecutively take
the place of the primary light source, ending with the last reflecting
or refracting surface brought into action (as in compound illumina-
tors). All that we know of the property of light in rendering
visible to the eye material particles upon which rays impinge in
such direction as to enter the pupil when reflected, and so for the

* See this Journal, ii. (1879) p. 503.

Illumination icith Plane Mirror. By Dr. 11. E. Fripp. 743

time render tliein virtnally self-luminous, strengthens the propo-
sition that the illuminating power of any light-reJSccting apparatus
is measured hy the nunibei- and direction of rays which fall upon
the object (placed on the Microscope stage) from the mirror or lens
surface next to it : and that the specific intensity of the light can
never he greater than that of the primary light source. This
problem is reduced to its simplest possible form in the case of the
plane mirror. We have but to remember that each constituent
point of its surface is independent of every adjacent point, so far as
incidence and reflection of the light rays are concerned. And it
remains only to discuss the right application of the law of reflection
under given circumstances, and to note that the physical constitu-
tion of ordinary daylight enables it to fuUil the conditions required
for illumination with the plane mirror.

It is not denied that out of a countless number of rays im-
pinging from all sides on the surface of a mirror freely exposed to
daylight, and consequently reflecting them on all sides according to
their several lines of incidence, the larger proportion falls with
parallel incidence. But it is contended that ]iarallel beams are
reflected as such, and — for that very reason — their component rays
do not touch the object, but pass by and outside of it. It is further
contended that every ray which docs reach the object must approach
from without in a direction determined by the position of the point
or surface-element of the mirror where the reflection takes place ;
that is to say, on the relation of this position to the object on one
side and the light source on the other.

The demonstration of these points is offered in the accompanying
diagrams.

It will be granted that obliquity of incidence must always give
rise to obliquity of rejlection.

Further, it will appear from consideration of the relative posi-
tion of object, mirror, and light source (due to mechanical arrange-
ment of the Microscope), that light must always fall obliquely on
the mirror in order to strike the object, whatever be the size or
inclination of the mirror.

The problem of converging illumination is therefore demon-
strated when it is shown that rays incident upon constituent
surface elements of the mirror outside of its centre do incline, after
reflection, towards an axial line above that centre. This axial lino
coincides with the axis of the TMicroscope when the mirror is set for
"central illumination," but when the mirror is moved into position
for oblique ilhimination, the axial Hnt^ is also obli(iuo and coincident
with an imagiufiry lino drawn Irom ecntro of the mirror to the
several points of the ol)jecton which illuminating })encils fall. But
those rays alone will reach the object which full with tho necessary
incidence and reflection.

744

Transactions of the Society.

To find this necessary direction I construct a diagram, in
wliicli lines are drawn from the object to opposite points of the
mirror (those which indicate the extreme angular magnitude of
pencil allowed by size and distance of the mirror from the object
and its inclination to the axis of the Microscope), and project
according to the law of reflection lines outward into space which
indicate the exact arc of sky from which the light should come.
Fig. 66 shows the lines 1 and 7 including an angle of 30^. If
nothing intervene, the Hght of that sky surface must fall upon the
mirror and be reflected on 0. The intermediate rays 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
have each their particular angle of incidence and reflection, and
form the converging illuminating pencil, or rather skeleton
outline of it, since the interspaces are filled by rays not indicated.
(N.B. The diagram shows and corrects the mistake of drawing in
Fig. 3, p. 518, vol. ii.). The magnitude of pencil is of course
primarily dependent upon the presence of adequate light surface,
but its extreme limit depends upon the size of the mirror and its
nearness to the object.

Fig. 66.

y

s'L

/

i^~~

1

1

■ — ^ ________

^^^^

U

"4

-—-z:::^^^

^-^>

r-

— — ^^__

^^^^^:r^^==^

'vr-

a b, mirror : diameter = 2^ inch ; aob, angle of pencil = 30° ; o, object ;
SHS', arc of sky surface which delivers light on ah, subtending angle of 30°;
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, rays falling with variously oblique incidence on mirror ; v o,
vertical line = axis of Microscope ; H o', horizon line ; S o' is', angle of 30°.

In the next place, it is to be observed that parallel beams inci-
dent in the direction of the extreme outside rays of the illuminating
pencil drawn in Fig. 66 and occupying the whole smface of the

Illumination with Plane Mirror. By Dr. H. E. Fripp. 745

mirror (Fig. 67, 1 p,7 p), touch the object by their outside ray only,
the remainder passing by on either side. And, further, that a
parallel beam incident also upon the whole mirror surface, but at
right angles to the axis of the Microscope, illumines the object by

Fig. 67.

l^p, two rays drawn parallel with 1 and 7 respectively. The parallel beams
1 p and p 7 occupy the mirror surface, but instead of being reflected on the
object, fall outside of it, excepting the rays 1 and 7.

. its axial ray alone, as shown in Fig. 68. So also if each of the inter-
vening lines (2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Fig. 66) represented the course of as
many parallel beams occupying the whole mirror surface with the

Fir,. G8.

Piinillcl beam incident on minor at anu'lo of 4;") " to axis of Microscope. Its
axi;il ray alone fall.s on tlie object. Witli dilfereiit inclination the central ray
falls away fnim the; oljjict, and the illnminaliun becomes obliinio: namely, from
some point of mirror snrfaee more or less distant from its centre. This oldiiiuity
of direction does not indicate convergence of light, as it comes from one side
only at a time.

incidence belonging to each line respectively, it is manifest that
the rays would fall on dilfcrent surface elements of the mirror, and

746

Transactions of the Society.

remaining parallel after reflection, fail to strike the object. In
fact, while those rays which do fall with such incidence as to be
reflected on the object, form a converging pencil of given angular
magnitude (e. g. 30^ in Fig. 66), the several bundles of jparaUel
rays falling from the same area of light source would after reflection
occupy a space at the plane of the object (see dotted hues in
Fig. 67) half as large again as the mirror ; scarcely a suitable illu-
mination for a microscopic object !

Lastly, the illuminating power of diverging rays, supposing
them to proceed from a single point of light source and spread

Fig. 69.

Fig. 70.

V 0 axis of Microscope, the instrument being reclined to get the whole pencil
above 'line of horizon ; ab, mirror inclined at 45° ; aob, angle of illuminating
pencil = 30°, subtended by S S', arc of sky ; A, axis of illuminating pencil
reflected on o, object ; S b and S' «, outlines of cone reflected on object o

The dotted lines in both diagrams show that no other rays but S 6 and b a
touch the object, as the other diverging rays from the points b and b taUing witn
greater or less obliquity on the mirror surface, are reflected in directions more
and more remote from the object.

over the mirror smiace, as in Figs. 69 and 70, is too slight and
moreover too scattered to add anything to the total efi'ect.

But it may be (perhaps fairly) objected that diagrams, though

Bluminaiion ivith Plane Mirror. By Dr. H. E. Fripp. 747

useful in illustration, prove nothing unless they themselves are
proved ; or that they mislead when employed to demonstrate phe-
nomena in which the effects of distance which cannot be repre-
sented are main elements of the question ; as, for example, where
it is asserted that sky and cloud hght must by reason of their
distance fall with parallel incidence of rays. In the discussion of
such a doctrine it is pertinent to inquire what that distance is, and
what relation it bears to the extent of luminous surface which can
be brought into play. In regard to the parallelism of the direct
solar rays there is of course no question. But the parallelism of
that portion of solar hght which goes to form the firmament in our
own higher atmosphere is so completely broken up by repeated
refraction and reflection amongst the subtle particles of this higher
atmosphere, that the rays which constitute our dayhght fall from
every point of the visible heavens (though with greatly diminished
intensity). That is to say, we have at disposal a light source
extending over 180^, while the sun itself extends over a visual
angle of but half a degree ! Being thus surrounded by an illimitable
and self-luminous expanse of ether undulations, the question is no
longer of parallel rays only, but of light emanating from an outer
circle above the earth upon every point of the earth's surface.
And a mirror exposed to such a luminous atmosphere must both
receive and reflect from all sides, and upon all sides. If, however,
it be placed under the stage of a Microscope, all vertical light is
intercepted, and there remains nothing but the obhque incidence
before referred to as the starting-point of the theory of illumination
by converging light. But once brought to this point by the
consideration of general principles, we are easily carried on by
appeal to the law of reflection, in the demonstration of which a
geometric diagram stands as rightful evidence, and, as it seems to
me at least, affords indisputable proof that the doctrine of con-
verging light truly applies to the pencil by which the Microscope
object is illumined.

The circumstances attending illumination by cloud-reflected
light differ greatly in detail, but not at all in principle. That
portion of solar rays which strikes upon and is reflected from the
cloud vapour close to the earth (in comparison with firmament or
sky light) retains, after reflection, nearly the same mixture of colour
as produces white light. But its superior ilhimiiiating power is
due probably to the near distance from the earth at which the
refraction and reflection of the solar rays begin, the reflected light
having but a short distance to travel. Another result of this
proximity is that the illumined portion of a single cloud may cover
a considerable arc of sky, 5' to 20' or more. And since tliis lumi-
nous expanse is frequently but a mile or loss from the earth, rays
from extreme points of the cloud must fall with obliquity of iuci-

748 Transactions of the Society.

dence upon the mirror. It must be borne in mind, however, that
the direction of the reflected rays is influenced by mass and shape
of the cloud as a whole, and that its constituent vapour particles do
not present a continuous reflecting surface. The numerous minute
fields of light and shade which may be observed within a compara-
tively circumscribed portion of cloud surface abundantly prove the
actual inequality of reflection.

From the diagrams it may be gathered that one ray only out
of each parallel beam occupying the mirror surface with a given
degree of incidence actually falls on the object. And, further, that
the rays which collectively form the illuminating pencil are singled
out, so to speak, by their fulfilment of the necessary condition of
converging incidence from a large area of light source. A whole
cloud or pile of clouds may in this way be utilized, though the
general surface is so unequally bright that the darker portion will
frequently reduce the effect of the brighter to below the average
intensity of sky light around the cloud. Hence the concave mirror
is preferred to the plane, because, acting on a different princi2:)le,
it collects the relatively small but bright surface of sunlit cloud
without diluting its intensity by including the larger darker
portion. But under ordinary circumstances of sky light illumi-
nation, the convergence of light upon the plane mirror is not only
a necessary consequence of optical law, but also the necessary condi-
tion of an adequate illumination. And it follows that the size of
the mirror and its nearness to the stage are important points in the
design of a Microscope, and equally requiring attention in the
practice as in the theory of illumination.

It has been already noted that a cloud surface is not continuous,
like a mirror surface, and that its shape greatly influences the
direction of reflected rays. Cloud light is, in fact, self-luminous
in the same sense that the light of the firmament is ; that is to say,
the solar rays, falling on the cloud, are refracted and reflected and
dispersed amongst its own vapour particles. Consequently the
parallel incidence of solar rays by no means conditions parallelism
or uniformity of the reflected rays. This character of self-lumi-
nousness may be contrasted with reflection pure and simple, as, for
example, the dazzling glare of a window-pane upon which the sun
shines. Nobody would interpret the reflection from a smooth glass
surface otherwise than as a simple transference of the sun's light
in a new direction, nothing else being changed. The radiation of
sun rays is simply continued from the surface (not self-luminous
substance) of the window-pane. The cloud-reflected hght is, on
the other hand, a residual eflfect, after absorption, refraction, and
dispersion of the original light rays have been carried on in the
intervening cloud matter to such an extent as to lower the specific
intensity of the reflected light beyond calculation. It caimot there-

Illumination with Plane Mirror. By Dr. H. E. Frip-p. 749

fore be inferred from the parallelism of the solar rays that cloud light
falls with parallel incidence, as may be affirmed in the case of the
window-pane which reflects direct sunlight. Nor can the distance
of the cloud be accepted as a sufficient cause of parallel incidence,
considering its many degrees of expanse, and its actual nearness to
the earth. On the contrary, it is self-evident that the different
intensity of light reflected from a cloud at, say, half a mile or three
miles distance, and its different angular magnitude at those dis-
tances, are infinitely more important elements in the calculation of
illuminating effect than the hypothesis of parallel incidence. lu
fact, the inconstant distance of the cloud is in itself a practical
refutation of the idea that such a cloud surface has a constant
illuminating power or conditions an invariably parallel incidence
of reflected rays. Is it possible to believe, for instance, that
from the widely spread extremities of a sunlit cloud subtending
perhaps 20^ of sky arc, and distant perhaps less than a mile, none
but parallel rays shall fall on the mirror ? Or — taking the meaning
of a parallel beam of light to be that its dimensions are the same
throughout its course — is it possible to accept the notion suggested
by sundry diagrams in our handbooks that two inches of sky or
cloud light are all that natiu'e offers for the illumination of micro-
scopic objects, and all that the plane or concave mirror is capable of
reflecting ?

750

Transactions of the Society.

XXII. — On an Improved Finder. By W. Webb.
(Bead Uth April, 1880.)

The finder wliicli I bring before the Society this evening consists
of a square having sides of f inch, and divided into 22,500 smaller
squares with sides the -^ho of an inch (enclosing a space therefore
equal to the toftt^ of an inch), being 20,000 more squares than
the Maltwood finder, which is an inch square. The lines are ruled
by a diamond upon the under side of the thin cover-glass (for
better use with higher powers), and are filled in with black, the
field being transparent.

One square of the Maltwood finder more than covers the field
with a ^-inch objective and A eye-piece, all the corners of the squares
being out of the field ; but in the new finder there are sixteen
squares in the same space as one in the other.

Fig. 71.

"— 1

r

X

"

"

^

^

"

^

■

"

""1

"'

"

H

1

■^

1

With some of the higher powers, it is not incorrect to say that
it is absolutely impossible to use the ordinary finder, because (1)
being a photograph an inch on each side, it is necessarily so very
coarse that when used with the high powers the image as a whole
is destroyed in consequence of the separation of its component
grains of silver ; and (2) all specific trace of locality is absolutely
lost by the great size of the squares.

On an Improved Finder. By W. Wehh. 751

To number the squares from 1 to 22,500 would require more
than 100,000 figures, which renders numbering impossible ; the
squares are therefore plotted in blocks of 100, the boundary lines
of each block of 100 squares being cut deeper, broader, and blacker
than the inner ones (excepting four lines which I will describe
presently), each block consisting of ten rows of squares, and each
row containing ten squares. Each block of 100 squares is inter-
sected vertically and horizontally at its fifth divisions by lines less
black than those forming the boundaries of the blocks of 100 squares,
but still appreciably blacker and broader tban the inner lines, thus
subdividing the blocks into four minor ones, each having five rows
with five squares in each row, the clear distinction between the
three kinds of lines commanding ready and unmistakable recog-
nition.

To reduce the finder to its greatest simplicity in working over
the three-quarters of an inch, 1 have introduced the four special
lines above referred to, they being broader than all the others, and
two of them embracing two sides of every eighth block of 100
squares from the top to the bottom of the finder, and the other
two lines embracing two sides of every eighth block of 100 squares
from the left to the right, the four lines thus forming the
boundaries of the central hlock of 100 squares, and the inter-
section of the two lines which divide that block into smaller blocks
of 25 squares is the central point of the finder, from which the eye
has only to traverse tbrough 75 squares vertically or horizontally
to locate any square wanted

Fig. 71 represents a little more than the top left-hand quarter
of the finder (the finest divisions not being however shown). It
exhibits the central intersecting point of the finder, giving out-
side the broad lines 7 blocks of 100 squares each vcrticallj and 7
horizontally.

Fig. 72 is an enlarged view of one of the blocks of 100 squares,
with the addition of the Hnest lines forming those squares.

It will be readily seen, by looking at these two figures, that from
the centre of the finder the whole of the 22,500 squares can be
easily found by traversing at the very most 75 small squares from
the centre, with the same ease and certainty as the eye traverses the
long and short lines of the eye-piece micrometer, the breadth of tho
line in the finder being as easily distinguishable as tho length in tho
eye-piece micrometer. 'J'he square having one dot in Fig. 72,
(assuming that figure to show the central block of the finder), would
be one square on the left of and ahove tho centre, to bo marked
" 1 1. a." ; the square with two dots would lie the second square
horizontally and vertically to the left of and ahove the centre, to Ix)
marked " 2 h. 2 v. 1. a." ; tho square with three dots would bo
tho fourth horizontally and tho third vertically, to be marked

752

Transactions of the Society.

"4 h. 3 V. 1. a." • and the corner square with four dots would be
the fifth horizontally and fifth vertically, to be marked " 5 h. 5 v. 1. a."
All the above-mentioned markings apply to the other three quarters
of the central block, with the exception that the left above becomes

Fig. 72.

::| I —

~ I

;

0

left below, or right above, or right below, of course always counting
from the centre ; for instance, the square marked with a O near
the lower right-hand corner being the fifth horizontally and fourth
vertically to the right and below the centre, to be marked
" 5 h. 4 V. r. b."

Having thus explained the reading of the central block,we may
take the one marked x in Fig. 71, which we will now assume
Fig. 72 to represent, the small square with three dots would be the
44th horizontally and 43rd vertically, or, 44 h. 43 v. 1. a.

The above expressions might be simplified, as Mr. Crisp has
51 4 , 43 Z

suggested to me, into

-^, and -— T) the numerator of the
or 44

fraction always representing the vertical lines, and the denominator
the horizontal ones, and I and r being placed in the upper or
lower part of the fraction, according as the upper or lower, right
or left, quadrant of the finder is inteuded.

Travel sing the finder in any direction from the centre, one
can go through only seven blocks and a haK — being in all only
seventy-five squares. After counting the squares once or twice, it is
wonderful how rapidly the figures designating the squares are
arrived at ; and if the foregoing description be clearly understood
the process is as short, simple, and certain as it can possibly be
without numbered squares.

On an Imjproved Finder. By W. Webb. 753

It is not uncommonly supposed that it is impossible to use a
finder unless with a movable stage and a stop, but in the absence
of these it is simply necessary to place the thumb, or a finger of
the right hand, upon the slip of glass carrying the object (when it
is in the centre of the field) to prevent it moving, and then to place
the thumb-nail of the left hand, or another slip of glass, against the
left-hand edge of the object-slip, and hold it there while the object
is taken ofi" the stage and a finder is put in its place against the
thumb-nail or shp, and read off as above explained, and the
number of the squares recorded.

The finder will also be found very useful as a stage-plate for
the draughtsman with the camera lucida.

If ruled upon disks for the eye-piece they are unique, as the
plotting and the object are seen as one, either with or without the
camera lucida or neutral tint glass.

The finders are all ruled and mounted so mathematically alike
as to enable a slide to be marked and sent to any part of the world
wherever a Webb's finder may be.

VOT., Tir.

754 Transactions of the Society.

XXIII. — On Tolles' Interior Illuminator for Opaque Objects.

By William A. Eogees, F.R.M.S.

(With Note by K. B. Tolles, F.R.M.S.)

CRead 10th June, 1880.)

The method of obtaining a sufficient illumination for opaque
objects by admitting the light, above the objective and reflecting
it down through the lenses upon the object, is due to Professor
Hamilton L. Smith, of Geneva, New York. '

It is described in a general way in the ' Annual of Scientific
Discovery ' for 1866-7, page 147, and is generally known as
the " vertical illuminator." The more recent modifications in the
form of its construction by Powell and Lealand, and by R. and
J. Beck, while adding perhaps a trifle to convenience in use, add
nothing new in principle.

Two objections have been urged against this form of illumina-
tor : —

First, That there is a great loss of light in the reflections from
the surfaces of the glass plate, and by the diminution of the
aperture in the case of the silvered mirror.

Second, That observers generally find the successful manipula-
tion of it exceedingly difficult.

The second of these objections may be overcome by attaching
the revolving mirror to an arm which receives its motion through
a ball-and-socket joint, attached to the outside of the tube, within
which the mirror revolves. The first objection is to a certain
extent obviated also by this device, since the mirror, being perfectly
under the control of the observer by means of the universal joint,
all the rays of light which are available can be directed upon the
surface to be examined.

Nevertheless, even with the modification of the universal
movement of the mirror, this form of illuminator has not been
found well adapted to the requirements of the special problem
upon which the writer is engaged, viz. the comparison of standards
of length and the investigation of their errors of subdivision. In
the examination, for example, of two different metres, the illumina-
tion should be the same in kind, quality, and quantity for every
graduation examined.

After having tried, as I supposed, every known form of illumina-
tion without success, I was dehghted to find in Carl's ' Repertorium
for Experimental Physics ' for 1877, what appeared to be a new
method of meeting the difficulties of the problem. In volume xiii.
page 566, Professor Wild describes a vertical comparator which
seems to meet in an admirable way all the difficulties which relate

On Tolles Interior Illuminator. By William A. Rogers. 755

to the flexure of the bars upon which the graduations are traced.
In this article he alludes briefly to the method of illumination
which he adopted, as follows : —

" For central illumination of the divisions, small right-angular
glass prisms are affixed in the interior of the Microscope near the
objective, which are placed in the ends of short tubes and inserted
through lateral openings, reflecting the exterior light which passes
along the axis of the short tube vertically against the division,
being still more controlled by the objective. This interior illumina-
tion is, according to my experience, preferable to any other. It
produces sharp, well-defined images of the lines, and gives suffi-
cient light even when diffused daylight falls upon the face of the
prism."

Immediately upon reading this description I went to BIr. Tolles
in order to obtain his assistance in the construction of an illumina-
tor of this form, being ignorant of the fact that he had as early as
1866 made one of exactly the same form. Inasmuch as at least
four persons seem to have independently suggested the use of a
prism inserted between the two lenses of the objective for the
purpose of securing illumination, it is well to insert here what I
believe to be the first published account of the invention. I quote
from the ' Annual ot Scientific Discovery ' for 1866-7, page
149:—

" Mr. Charles Stodder exhibited before the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, in December 1866, a new illuminator of
opaque microscopic objects under high powers, the objective being
its own condenser — the invention of Mr. Tolles.

" The principal difficulty met with in passing a beam of light
down through the objective of a Microscope, and thus condensing a
strong hght upon an opaque object, is, in the case of high powers
especially, the reflection back of a considerable portion hy the
lenses of the objective. This causes fog and obscuration of the
image, though the object be well illuminated. This reflection
takes place principally at the interior front surface of the front
system.

" To obviate this difficulty, a small rectangular prism, immedi-
ately above the front system, is so far introduced iuto the side of
the objective mounting as to slightly encroach upon the extreme
margin of the upper surface of the combination, "When the
parallel rays are reflected by this prism down through the
marginal parts of the front covered by it, they will have their
focus much beyond the place of the object. As a medium case tlie
distance of their convergence wodld be ten times the local distance
of the objective ; consequently a much greater portion of the whole
light incident upon the front system would lie transmitted, and
whatever amount experienced reflection would be dissipated liy

:; 1) 2

756 Transactions of the Society.

travelling back through the objective in a path widely different
from that of the visual pencil."

During a recent visit to the Conservatoire des Arts et Metiers
at Paris, I saw the device here described, attached to the Micro-
scopes of the comparator, with which the operations of the French
Section of the International Bureau of Weights and Measures are
conducted. Its introduction is due to M. Tresca, who has used it
since 1871. It is possible that the invention by M. Tresca may
have been prior to this date.

Subsequently, during a visit to the establishment of Troughton
and Simms, at Charlton, I mentioned to 31 r. Simms that I had
made use of this form of illumination in the Microscopes of
the meridian circle of Harvard College Observatory, thereby
securing far better definition and nearly ten times the magnifying
power. After a moment's search Mr. Simms produced an illumi-
nator of exactly the form described by Mr. Tolles and by Professor
Wild, which he had constructed as early as 1869, at the instance
of Mr, Warner, a retired gentleman residing at Sussex Place,
Brighton.

According to the present evidence, the priority of publication,
and, I believe, of invention also, must be assigned to Mr. Tolles.
Without doubt M. Tresca was the first to make an actual use of
this method of illumination in exact measurements.

The objective of which a sectional view is given in Fig. 73, was
made for me by Mr. Tolles, with special reference to its adapta-
tion to the examination of the divisions of the copper- platinum
metre of the X form which M. Tresca did me the kindness
to trace. It has an aperture of 30° and a focal power of 1 inch.
The front system of lenses is at A. The back system is at
B. A rectangular prism, whose surfaces c, d, e, are ground and
polished, is shown entering one side of the mounting, immediately
above the front lens. Parallel rays of light entering at c pass into
the prism, are reflected from d, emerge at e, impinge upon the
front lens A, and have their principal focus at F ; the focus of the
objective being at F', where the object is seen. The light having
its focus at F is better distributed on account of the greater
breadth of the pencil at F'. It might be sui)posed that if a con-
denser were applied to the prism, the light thereby being brought
to a focus at F', a better illumination would be secured. In actual
experience, Mr. Tolles has found that this is not the case.

The prism is held in place by a spiral spring pressing upon a
ring which fits rather loosely upon the tube. By means of the
screw at / any required inclination can be given to the prism. The
field of illumination can be regulated by pushing in or withdrawing
the prism. When it is entirely withdrawn, the objective takes the
ordinary form.

On Tones' Interior Illuminator. Bij William A. Bogers. 751

I will close this

Fig. 73.

I find the prism useful in supplementing the light from the
mirror below, when an intense illumination is desired with trans-
parent objects. This method of illumination seems to be rather
better adapted to high than to low powers. I have a ^ with
which the most perfect illumination of graduated metal surfaces
can be obtained by simply turning the face of the prism towards
a window. This method seems well adapted also to the resolu-
tion of bands of fine lines. If the lines are ruled on cover-
glass, and are covered with a thin coating of either silver, gold, or
platinum by the method of Professor Wright, of Yale College, the
resolution will be efiected about as well by looking at the lines
through the coating as by viewing them by reflection.

The method of illumination here described has an especial
interest in connection with immersion objectives.
article with a communication with which Mr.
Tolles has kindly furnished me, together with
the sketches shown in Figs. 73 and 74.

" With immersion objectives the illumi-
nator-front has still more efiective and extended
application : —

First, Because more of the front lens can
be brought into use for the purpose of illumi-
nation than with dry objectives.

Second, Because any possible glare arising
from the marginal zone of total reflection in
the dry objective, has no existence when the
front has water contact with the covering
glass. This is strictly true in the case of the ';/

prism, while it might not be true in the case of r

a transparent disk of glass, placed as a reflector
at the back of the entire objective system, and covering its entire
aperture. Eeflection from a disk might easily reach an outside zone
of total reflection even with a water-immersion front, and give back
stray rays which would cloud the view, but the prism would neces-
sarily stop all rays not contributing to the formation of the image,
even without the interposition of diaphragms. In the case of bands
of lines, as in Nobcrt's plates, there would be for the most part
exemption from glare, and the whole interior aperture of the
objective would bo brought into use, except that portion which is
stopped by the prism. • The angle of this interior aperture would
be bounded i7i a homogeneous immersion medium by the extreme
rays utilized by the objective.

Fig. 74 represents the front duplex system of the immersion
■J-inch objective made for Mr. Crisp in 1873. Jt is one of the very
first made to demonstrate the practicability and the utility of the
outside — ' cxtru-limital ' — immersion aperture. It has an cxcep-

758

Transactions of the Society.

tionally small front leus, but it will serve to show the convenient
ajoplication of the prism to objectives of this class.

The rays a and h in Fig. 74, as traced by Professor Keith, show
an angle of 110°, or 55° on each side of the axis. Eays, whether

Fig. 74.

fl>

I

fd

~~^

.

kz

z>\

\

/

^

^

"^

parallel or divergent, entering the prism at c, would take the same
general direction as the rays a and 6, but their focal distance would
be about thrice that of the entire objective. If the seat of the
prism, as shown in Fig. 73, is in a plane at right angles to the
optical axis, then the direction of the illuminating ray can be con-
siderably controlled by raising or lowering the outer end of the
prism by means of the screw at /, and the reacting spiral spring
above."

( 75t) )
EECORD

OF CURRENT BESEABCHES RELATING TO

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, &c.*

ZOOLOGY.

A. GENEHAL, including Embryology and Histology
of the Vertebrata.

Development of the Rabbit. t — The recent observations of Pro-
fessor Kulliker have shown him that on the fifth clay the area cmbryo-
nalis of the rabbit is made up of three layers ; these are

(a) The cells of the investing layer of Rauber, which are flat and
large and are part of the primitive unilaminate germinal
vesicle.

(h) A layer of flattened, pretty thick, small cells, which he (as
also Rauber) regard as ectodermal, while Edouard van
Beneden looks upon them as forming the mesoderm.

(c) The cells of the endoderm are flat and large.

He fiuds tbat the investing cells of Rauber are temporary struc-
tures wLich have no relation to the formation of the ectoderm ; this
is, of course, in express opposition to the view of their future which is
taken by Van Beneden, but it is one on which the learned German
embryologist speaks very confidently ; nor is this all, the mesoderm
is stated not to aj)pear till the time when the primitive stripe begins
to be formed ; when it docs begin it takes all its origin from a thicken-
ing of the ectoderm, and has no relations to the endoderm.

The demonstration of the presence of a number of pieces of nuclei
and cells in the young embryos, and their jn-esence in number in tlio
structures which are undergoing conversion, seem to show that at
these stages the chief part is played by the growth of the cells, and
not by any mechanical causes. The author promises further details
shortly.

Development of the " Glomerulus of the Head-Kidney" in the
Chick.J — This structure has been already noted by Mr. Adam Sedg-
wick and Mr. Balfour, and Gasser has arrived at similar conclusions
as to the characters of the structure. In the i)rcvious communication
no definite answer was given to the point as to whether this glome-
rulus was a " continuous structure." A study of its development lias
since shown Mr. Sedgwick that it is not so, but that the external
glomerulus or glomerillus of the head-kidney of the chick consists

* cS^T It should lie understood tliat (he Society do not liold tliemselves respoii-
sihle for tlic views of the luithora of the jiapers, &e., referred to, nor for the umuner
in which those views may be expressed, the object of tiie Record being to present
II siiniiuiiry of the puj'ers 'is actttal/i/ puhlislied. Objections and corrcctious should
tiirrefore, for tlu- nitjst part, be addressed to the autiiors'.

t 'Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (I8«U) j). :J70.

t ' Quart. Jouru. Mier. Sci.,' xx. (1880) p. 372.

760 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

really of a " series of glomeruli of primary Malpigliian bodies pro-
jecting through the wide openings of the segmental tubes into the
body cavity." These structures seem to be found between the ninth
and thirteenth segments, but the corresponding primary segmental
tubes are never fully developed in the chick.

Further details (with figures) of this extraordinary and unexpected
development are promised.

Cellular Evolution of Protoplasm,* — M. Bordone, in a " thesis "
under this title, commences with amorphous protoplasm as the sim-
plest form of matter capable of containing life ; its first stage in
upward development is the leucocyte, which may arise, though rarely,
in the tissues without origin from a cell. It then acquires a nucleus,
and in this condition may form protoplasmic leucocytes by gemma-
tion. This appears to be proved by the separation from mulberry-
like masses in the blood of the Axolotl of granules which fuse together
and grow by taking in foreign material. This division is preceded by
multiplication of the nucleus, which occurs either by fission or bud-
ding, while in exceptional cases new nuclei may arise independently
in the protoplasm ; budding fission, or segmentation then operates to
multiply the cell.

Imperfection of the Geological Record, t — Herr Fuchs contends
that were the chronicles of past ages so imperfectly kept by the rocks
as Mr. Darwin and his followers maintain, the study of palaeontology
would have an interest merely for curiosity collectors. On the con-
trary, the data already obtained from its study are so full as to afford
a firm basis for the discussion even of such general questions as the
Darwinian theory. Thus, the whole series of organisms may be
divided into two groups, (1) one consisting of such as, owing to their
peculiar habits, or to the soft consistency of their bodies, could only
be exceptionally preserved as fossils (e. g. Medusas, Ascidians, insects,
birds, soft plants) ; (2) the second of those whose form, skeleton, and
manner of life tend to their preservation (corals, &c.). These latter
are preserved not as the consequence of chance, but in the natural
course of the formation of sedimentary strata. How certainly their
survival is owing to these conditions is shown by the discovery of a
richly fossiliferous marl in digging the foundations of the Messina
Docks ; of the fossil shells found, about one hundred were known as
living species, a few were not so known ; these few, however, in time
were added to the recent fauna by dredgings made in the Bay. Of
337 species of testaceous Mollusca found in the sea on the west of Italy,
300 are known to occur in neighbouring quaternary deposits. Com-
paring the richness in species of the most abundant recent molluscan
fauna, that of the Philippine Islands, with that of the European
upper chalk, or of the Bohemian Silurian basin, the two latter lose
little by the comparison. All the indigenous European Ungulates are
known in the fossil state. If such can be shown to be the case with

* See ' Eev. Sci. Nat., ii. (1880) p. 115.

t ' Verb. k.-k. Geol. Keichsanstalt,' xxix. (1879) p. 355 ; xxx. (1880) pp. 39, 61.
See also 'Nature,' xxi. (1880) p. 476.

INVEKTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 761

tlie many groups taken as examples, then the Darwinian theory must
be demonstrable, if at all, from the evidence thus afforded.

Direct contradiction is also given to the evolutionist doctrines by
the fact of the periodicity of the development of animal life which
is seen to have been the rule in past times : i. e. epochs of active deve-
lopment were succeeded by times of comparative rest, and the develop-
ment itself varied in intensity. It is contrary to the analogies afforded
by the j)resent order of things to suppose this to be due to changes in
the external conditions, for these may cause redistribution but not
transmutation of plants and animals. Again, the relation of the
faunae and floras of consecutive geological periods to each other shows
a co-ordination closely resembling that of those of neighbouring dis-
tricts at the present time, in having a number of species in common,
a nimiber of decidedly different ones, and a small number of forms
differing scarcely more than as varieties from some belonging to both
districts.

If this relation is sought to be explained by the missing species
yet to be discovered, it may be replied that if investigation succeeds
in finding in one formation the (e. g.) 50 representative species neces-
sary to show its absolute sequence upon the preceding formation, it is
as likely also to find (e. g.) 500 more species in that formation, and
thus set theorists again to work to find these species also in the beds
following. The asserted completion of the organic series by fossil
links is unfounded, for though, as in the Ungulata, many gaps are
thus filled up (by Anchitherium, &c.), yet as many more are created
by the discovery of wholly new types (as Brontotherium, &c.) ; so
with the mesozoic reptiles and fish and Cephalopoda, and still more
with the palaeozoic fauna ; in particular, Professor Claus's declaration
(in a lecture at Vienna in 1876) of the surprisingly small help
which he has derived from the fossil forms in making out the genea-
logy of the Crustacea, is brouglit forward in support. The number
of its zones of life must be taken into account in reckoning the
changes undergone by organisms in any geological period ; for
instance, 153 zones are distinguished from the Silurian to the present
age, and 33 in the Jurassic rocks, the passage from each zone giving
the necessary conditions for mutation of a species ; but taking the
actual number of such changes observed in the case of the Cephalo-
poda (a highly modifiable group), in passing through the Jurassic
rocks, viz. 77, the conclusion is drawn that on an average only
24 periods of change can actually have occurred for any group of
animals since the Silurian times, a number quite insufficient to
account for the immcuso (asserted) development of new genera,
families, orders, and classes since that time.

B. INVERTEBRATA.

Mollusca.
Mollusca of the 'Challenger' Expedition.*— The Rev. R. B.
Watson gives the following as a few points which stand out with
Bpecial prominonco as the result of his study of this material
* ' Jouiu. Liuii. Soc' (Zool.), xv. (1880), p. 87.

762 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

" 1. Depth is an important condition of molluscan life. That is
to say, there really are shallow and deej) water species and genera,
though their bathymetric limits are not absolutely constant.

To some this may seem too self-evident and universally accepted
a proposition to need statement. Such would have been the case
some years ago, but dredgings from the deep sea have presented facts
which demanded a revisal of received opinions on this point ; and
while the result in the main cannot be said ever to have been
doubtful, and while the evidence of other branches of natural
history has already been obtained in this same sense, it is desirable
also to record the witness of the MoUusca of the ' Challenger '
Expedition.

2. Temperature, even more than mere depth, seems an important
condition in molluscan life.

It is needless to speak here of other conditions, such as light, or
food, or oxygen, because, though there are extreme differences in these
respects, and though their influence must be very great, still their
precise amount, and the nature and direction of their effects, are too
little known to afford foundation for more than guessing.

Pressure seemed likely to form a very important condition in
marine animal life ; the enormous figures representing the square
inch amount of that pressure stirred men's imagination, and their
fancies were supported by the fact that rapid transference to the sur-
face from even a moderate depth destroys life ; but these impressions
were removed by a remembrance of the laws of hydrostatic pressure,
and by substituting a gradual for a rapid transition from deep water
to the surface. Temperature, however, remains as an undoubtedly
important factor.

3. Great differences in these respects of depth and temperature
prove barriers to distribution.

4. Great length of time naturally helps escape from these barriers,
for in the lapse of years accidents are likely to occur enabling
species to evade difficulties which would in ordinary circumstances
prove insurmountable. Hence the finding of a living species in a
fossil state will always justify the expectation of its having a wide
local distribution.

5. Where barriers of depth and temperature do not check distri-
bution, there seems, in ordinary circumstances, no limit to universality
of distribution.

6. There actually are existing species whose distribution is
universal, no barriers having availed against their passage.

7. Still there is no trace, even in these species, of essential,
lasting, and progressive change.

I do not intend to overpress this point, for I allow that it pre-
sents merely negative evidence. I do not assert that there are no
species of MoUusca which have essentially, permanently, and pro-
gressively changed. I only say there are some, even many, which
have not done so, that I do not know any which have, and that the
burden of proof lies with those who assert the positive. Evolutionists
are in the way of saying that a thing being possible is therefore pro-

INVEKTEBBATA, ORYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 763

bable, and consequently is true unless the contrary be proved. I only
wisli to note that this is a reversal of all the laws of evidence in any
case of fact whatever, and to add that, so far as I have had the oppor-
tunity of observation, no proof has reached me of progressive, perma-
nent, and essential change in molluscan development."

Antiquity of certain Subordinate Types of Fresh-water and
Land MoUusca.* — Mr. White points out that of the minor groups
into which some of the " comprehensive " genera of these forms have
been divided, a large number had their origin in periods which were
at least as early as the closing epochs of the cretaceous or of the
eocene periods. After a technical demonstration of these points, the
author, on reviewing the collections, finds that there are in it so
many "familiar forms" that it seems difficult to imagine that a
large number " were living contemporaneously with the last of the
Dinosaurs." The changes these Mollusca have endured seem to be
very remarkable ; there was a " gradual desiccation of the regions
formerly occupied by the great inland lakes," " the elevation of the
whole Eocky Mountain system, and the establishment of the present
great interior river-systems." Although some forms have disappeared,
" the lines of descent of the numerous types which have reached us
unbroken seem to be almost parallel," and the author comes to the
conclusion that in some degree at any rate these types have had a
" saltatory " origin, although he allows that the mode must always
remain obscure.

Development of the Digestive Tract in the Mollusca. t — From
an abstract of the researches of Dr. W. K. Brooks we learn that he has
come to certain definite conclusions, of which the following note gives
an account of some of the most important : —

(1) The polar globules mark the principal axis of the egg.

(2) When there are four equal sjjherules in the egg, the proto-
plasm of each is segregated ; that which will give rise to the ectoderm
occupies the formative end and is quite transparent.

(3) These formative ends separate as four micromeres.

(4) By their division, and by the separation of other cells from
the formative end of the macromercs, an ectoderm is formed, which
entirely covers the four macromercs except at the blastopore.

(5) These macromercs now become fused, and part becomes sepa-
rated to form the endodermal layer of cells.

(6) The remainder divides into a largo number of cells, which
occupy an intermediate position.

(7) These are not food-yolk, but continue to grow.

(8) The ectodermal cells about the blastopore become converted
into the shell-area.

(9) The mouth is an independent invagination of the ectoderm.

(10) Which does not become connected with the digestive tract
until after the closure of the blasto])ore.

(11) The stomachal appears to be the same as the primitive cavity.

* ' Aiuer. Journ. Sci.,' xx. (1880) p. 44.

t ' True. JJostou Sue. Nat. Hist.,' xxx. (18S0) p. 325.

764 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

(12) The " rectal plug " changes its position from the centre of the
shell-area to a point on the ventral surface, where it forms the
definitive anus.

(13) The structure and history of the shell-area is substantially as
described by Eay Lankester.

(14) Periods of rest very conspicuously alternate with periods of
segmentation.

The above observations apply to the Pulmonata, and the history
of the same parts in the oyster is not altogether the same ; in both
cases, however, the blastopore is converted into the shell-area, and
the mouth is formed nearly opposite, by an invagination of the ecto-
derm. The anus is in both distinct from the blastopore, but the in-
testine of the oyster appears to have no relation to the " invagination
neck."

Further details are promised, and will be welcomed, as the
subject is one on which very various statements have been made
by those embryologists who have directed their attention to this
phylum.

Action of Poisons on the Cephalopoda.*— M. Yung gives an
account of the effect of certain poisons on the Dibranchiate forms on
which he has been enabled to experiment : —

Curare when injected subcutaneously has no action, but if two or
three drops were injected into the cephalic artery they almost instan-
taneously brought about a paralysis of the muscles of the mantle, and
then of those of the arms ; although the animal then appeared to be
dead, the " hearts " continued to beat, and the chromatophores retained
their activity.

Stryclinine has a very powerful influence, for 1 part in 30,000 of
sea-water produced a relaxation of the muscles of the chromatophore ;
the respiratory movements increased and then fell rapidly ; tetanus
shortly followed. The animal emptied its ink-bag, and a state of
extreme muscular rigidity was induced ; examination nevertlieless
revealed the fact that the venous hearts were still beating.

Nicotine is still more poisonous to the Cejihalopod, but it produces
a contraction of the muscles of the chromatophores, and the hearts
were arrested in their systole.

Atropine appears to have a very complex action, large quantities
are necessary to produce any effects, and these consist in the gradual
lowering of the cardiac and respiratory movements.

Verairin is an active poison, and produces ii-regularity of move-
ment, and an arrest in systole of the hearts.

Muscarin has a similar action to nicotine on the chromatophores,
but the effect is not so well marked ; it would appear to slowen the
circulation and to increase the secretions.

Upas antiar, when injected into the cephalic artery, has the effect
of throwing the animal into violent couvulsious, the cardiac move-
ments become very irregular, and after a period of acceleration come
to an end in the period of systole.

* ' Comptes Keudus,' xci. (1880) p. 306.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA., MICROSCOPY, ETC. 765

Regeneration of the Head in Gastropods.* — Tlie first to make
experiments on this subject was the eminent Si:)allanzaui ; and he was
followed by Pastor Schaffer, of Eegensburg (1768-1770) ; these
observations have been greatly neglected, but Professor Martens does
well in referring to them in the note in which he deals with the
recently published results of Justus Carriere. This naturalist con-
firms the observations of his two predecessors ; eyes, tentacles, labial
processes may be completely regenerated, but not the pharynx, or the
supra-oesophageal ganglion, the destruction or removal of which is
always accompanied by the death of the animal. More scientific than
his predecessors, M. Carriere was always careful to see that he had
really got, in the removed portion, the organ he intended to take away.
Moreover, certain conditions are necessary to attain to complete
success ; the animals must be in the most satisfactory vital conditions
possible, and must have their requirements in the way of air, food, and
water carefully attended to ; the experiments generally fail if under-
taken at a time when all the energies of tlie animal are directed to
the formation of the generative products ; the beginning of summer
and the autumn season are the most satisfactory times. As to the
species. Helix nemoralis and H. hortensis give the best result ; H. po-
matia is more sensitive, and H. arhustorum and H. fruticum are still
more so. Aquatic Pulmonata give frequently unsuccessful results,
owing to the fact that fungi are very apt to become developed on
their wounds. It may be suggested that the antiseptic treatment can
be applied to physiological as well as to pathological operations.

It is interesting to note that the observer has found that in the
case of the eyes, at any rate, the process of regeneration is com-
parable to that of the first formation of that organ. There is an
invagination of tlie epithelium, the formation of a closed vesicle, the
primitive cylindrical cells become partly converted into corneal cells,
and i^artly into rods and cones. The complete regeneration of the
eye takes from fifty to sixty days.

Activity and Structure of the Muscles of Mollusca Acephala.t —
M. Constance has experimented on the scalloj?, on oysters, on Anomia,
Pectunculus, Venus, Cardium, Mytilus, by pricking, striking, by induc-
tion currents, and by changes of temperature, and finds that of these
agents the current of electricity is the most powerful and constant in
its action. The muscles consist partly of striated fibres in Pectcn ; in
the rest of these Mollusca the striated muscle is replaced by smooth
fibre of a special kind ; in the Dimijaria the two kinds may be distinct.
Both contraction and extension are voluntary actions, and can bo
increased or rendered independent by ammonia vapour, chloroform,
&c., which, together with changes of temperature, cause various
degrees of paralysis of the- sensitive organs.

Pedal Glands of the Tellinidse. J — In Tellina (T. haltica)
M. Barrois finds a small posterior opening on the foot, leading into

• ' Niiturforscher,' xiii. (1880) p. 272.

+ ' Bull. Soc. Acad, do Urcst,' 1879. Sec ' R.v. Sci. Nut.,' ii. (ISSO) p. 117.

X ' Bull. Sci. Uep. Nord,' iii. (iSSO) p. IKS.

766 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

a canal wliicli ends in a larger cavity, plicated and lined witii glands ;
these structures represent the byssal apparatus of those Mollusca
which possess it. The canal represents the open groove of Cardium
edule and the half-closed groove of Pecten maximus ; but these species
have also certain glands situated in it, which have no homologues in
Tellina ; its terminal glands, however, represent the byssal glands.

Scrobicularia piperata differs in the arrangement of these parts
from Tellina only by the inferior length of its canal.

In Donax anatinum, the opening is also posteriorly placed ; the
canal is short and leads into a cavity whose walls are covered with
cylindrical epithelium ; no gland cells occur, they are replaced by an
extremely dense mass of connective tissue which is not stained by
reagents and shows no trace of gland cells. This is the furthest
stage of degradation reached by the apparatus of the byssus in this
family.

Thus in these forms the opening of the duct is transferred from
front to back, the groove is replaced by a canal, the glands of the
groove are entirely lost, and in one of the species [Donax) the byssal
glands are aborted.

Anatomy of the Bullidea.* — M. Vayssiere is principally occupied
in this essay with the description of that imperfectly known form
Gasteropteron Meckelii ; but the difficult family to which this species
belongs presents several points in which our knowledge is very far
from being satisfactory ; its representatives differ considerably from
one another in their external characters, and some among them are
almost completely deprived of any shell. Members of the group may,
however, be recognized by the facts that the dorsal region of their
body is divided into four parts, and that both labial and dorsal
tentacles are altogether absent.

It will not be necessary to follow our author through the histori-
cal chapter in his paper ; coming at once to the genus Gasteropteron,
we find that in it there are at any rate no more than two described
species, G. Meckelii of Kosse, and the very slightly different G. sinense
of A. Adams. The former species, with which alone the French
naturalist now concerns himself, is from 20 to 24 mm. long, and from
25 to 30 mm. broad ; the body proper is even much smaller than
this.

In its general appearance it has no slight resemblance to a
Pteropod, and in that order the earlier naturalists were content to
place it ; the shell is somewhat difficult to detect, and was never
observed till 1860, when Krohn signalized its appearance ; it is only
4-5 tenths of a millimetre in size, is " nautiliform," hyaline, and very
translucent, so that it has a very striking resemblance to that of a
Carinaria ; it is found in the hepatic organ, is situated near to the
anus, although somewhat behind this orifice, and a little on the
right side.

Digestive System.— This portion of the animal is exceedingly
simple ; the oral orifice is situated in the centre of a slight depression,
and just in front of the anterior portion of the foot ; on either side
* ' Ann. Sci. Nat.,' ix. (1880), Art. 1.

INVEKTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 767

tliero are slight projections, and tliese give rise to tlio parapodia,
which aid in forming a kind of funnel-shaped orifice. Just behind
the mouth there is a short, eversible proboscis, and connected with
this there is the obscure structure which is known as the buccal
bulb ; this somewhat elongated organ is ovoid in general shape, and
has behind the two swellings with which it is provided a cylindri-
cally shaped prolongation, which is the seat of origin of the radula.
The muscles of this bulb are, consequent on the absence of any
chitinous skeleton, exceedingly well developed; chitinous parts are,
however, developed from the epithelial cells of the bulb, and at onco
become sufficiently strong to form two small resisting plates, which
may well be regarded as rudimentary jaws. These have an interest-
ing structure ; they are made up of a number of small, irregularly
cylindrical rods, closely set and all directed towards a common
central point. That they are rudimentary jaws would appear to bo
sufficiently well established by the comjiarison which the author has
instituted between them and the similar structures of a further
grade of development which are to be found in Bulla and in other
allied genera. In addition to these rudimentary jaws, small chitinous
papillas have been detected at the point where the proboscis passes
into the bulb. The support for the radula occupies the base of the
buccal cavity ; the radula itself forms a band which is twice as long
as it is wide, the central portion is unarmed and only presents some,
always small, chitinous granules or concretions. On either side there
is a longitudinal row of well-developed teeth, and on these there
follow five parallel rows of smaller lateral teeth (uncini).

The oesophagus takes a course a little towards the left, and then
descends to a somewhat lower plane, where it passes into what the
author calls the second cavity of the body ; it becomes at once con-
tinuous with the stomach. This poi'tion of the tract, in which no
gizzard seems to be developed, is enveloped by the " hepatico-herma-
phrodite mass " ; the internal epithelium is provided with a number of
short cilia. As an ordinary rule, there open on its surface ten distinct
hepatic orifices. The walls of the intestine are even more delicate
than are those of the stomach, and they have no proper coloration ;
what they have is due to their contents. This region, somewhat
equal in calibre to the oesophagus, is not dilatable ; after some coiling
it ends on the right side, in a little pit behind the respiratory appa-
ratus. Towards its termination the musculature of its walls becomes
better developed ; Foraminifera, Eadiolaria, and diatoms appear to
form the chief food of these molluscs.

The salivary glands form two long, white, hyaline sacs without
ramifications, and placed one on either side of the rosophagus, which
they follow along its course, although without contracting any con-
nection with it, and they open into the buccal cavity by narrow ducts,
just above the ccsophagus. The glandular layer is formed of two
rows of cells, of some size but irregular in form ; their nucleus is
distinctly visible.

The liver, contrary to what obtains in most of tlic Opistho-
brancliiata, is not compact, nor docs it open into the stomach by

768 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

a single orifice. It is made up of a certain number of completely-
separated glands, while each has a special duct which opens directly
into the stomach. These ducts and the lobes of the glands do, how-
ever, become somewhat entangled, and thus give rise to the appearance
of a single compact mass, by which the subdivision of the organ is at
first sight obscured. Ten distinct lobes may be generally made out.
The ultimate cells are large, polymorphous, and variously coloured ;
they contain vesicles which may. either be scattered through the cell
or aggregated into a small central mass ; they vary in coloui- through
different shades of yellow.

The author applies the term independent glands to certain distinct
structures ; these are (1) Circumoral glands and (2) posterior gland of
the foot. The former are found in the integument around the orifice
of the proboscis, and within the first cavity of the body ; they vary a
good deal in form, but always end in an excretory duct, which opens
at the entrance to the orifice of the proboscis. Their contents are
hyaline, and are made up of nucleated vesicles with a nucleolus, and
granular bodies suspended in a colourless liquid. They are not, as
the author first thought, unicellular glands, notwithstanding the sim-
plicity of their structure. Their function appears to be that of
assisting in the prehension of the microscopic organisms which form
the food of these creatures.

The posterior gland of the foot appears to have escaped notice
altogether ; this is the more remarkable since it is visible to the naked
eye. In general constitution this gland has much the same structure
as those around the mouth ; its secretion is in the form of a rich supply
of mucus, which seems to form a kind of raft for the animal, and
thereby to enable it to float on the surface of the sea.

The organ of Bojanus is of some size, is placed on the right
side of the body, is of an ochreous yellow tint, and somewhat trans-
lucent. Spongy in constitution, its cell-elements are spherical in
form, and among their contents it was not possible to detect any
crystals of uric acid. On its external wall there is, in front of the
anus, a constant black spot ; this, on careful examination, was seen to
have in its centre five or six small orifices, by means of which the
gland communicates with the exterior. The walls of the gland are,
as is usual, richly supplied with veins.

Bed Gland. — This gland, the presence of which the most super-
ficial observer cannot fail to detect, extends over a portion of the
intestine and over the walls of the " copulatory pouch." Its con-
stituent cells, though smaller, are not unlike in character to those of
the organ of Bojanus ; the contained granular bodies are greyish or of
a bright red, and disappear altogether under the action of acids. The
author is forced to content himself and his readers with an account of
the structural characters of the body, as he is unable to offer any definite
suggestion as to what its function may be.

Bespiratory and Circulatory Organs. — These must be dealt with
very briefly ; the former consists of a semi-pinnate branchial plume,
made up of a number of lamellae, more or less free at their extremity,
and invested by an excessively delicate tissue. The external orifice

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 769

of the " aquiferous system " appears to lie a little above the genital
orifice ; the heart has its long axis set transversely to that of the body,
and the ventricle is, in position, a little superior to the auricle ; the
aorta is a vessel of some size which bifurcates at a very short distance
from the heart into an anterior and a posterior aorta. These and
their branches have their course described in some detail ; but, in con-
sequence of the rarity and small size of these creatures, the author
is not able to make this chapter as complete as he could wish.

Reproductive Organs. — Hermaphroditism appears to be especially
complete in Gasteropteron, for there is only a single duct for the pur
pose of carrying away the male and female products. But our spaco
does not permit us following the author through his important account
of the details.

Nervous System. — The oesoiDhageal collar is formed by three pairs
of ganglia, connected together by commissures of different lengths ;
all these — cerebral, pedal, and visceral — are placed more or less to the
sides of the collar, but the first have, of course, a more distinctly
dorsal position. Among the protecting parts we may note a mass of
hyaline cells which ajjjDear to be in relation to the integument ; re-
calling by their character hypodermic glands, they seem to discharge
a more or less mucilaginous fluid which aids in lessening any shocks
to the nervous centres.

After giving a detailed description of these ganglia and of the
nerves which pass off from them, the author turns to the stomato-
gastric and to the genital ganglia ; the sense-organs are next dealt
with, and here we have to note that, although the dorsal tentacles are
in all Bullidea completely wanting, and are partially replaced by the
cephalic disk, this last-mentioned organ must not be considered
merely as an atrophied tactile organ, for the olfactory sense, which is
ordinarily exercised by the extremity of the tentacles, has its seat in
a more or less well-marked differentiation of that portion of the integu-
ment which lies between the cephalic disk and the foot ; in Gasterop-
teron this sense seems to be completely absent, but the tactile organs
are, as comi)ared with the allied forms, very richly developed. After
a description of the optic and auditory organs, the author passes to

Tlie Anatomy of some Allied Genera {Doridium,Philine, Scaphander,
and Bulla) ; of this the following is a very brief abstract. — The most
striking point in Doridimn is the structure of its copulatory organ ; in
this genus the penis does not, as in most Molliisca, form a thick- walled
tube, but a canal not completely closed, for four-fifths of its length
the left edge of the canal lies over the right, but at its superior
cxtronity there is a kind of groove, which is so formed that the orifice
of the duct is not terminal, but ventral in position.

In Philine and Scaphander the salivary glands are very short and
cylindrical, instead of being elongated as they aic in most members of
this family ; there are only two hepatic orifices, and the circumoral
glands are feebly developed. The olfactory and optic organs aro
exceedingly rudimentary ; the jicnis of Philine is hammer-shaped,
while in Scaphander this organ is completely absent.

As to classification, M. Vnyssi^re docs not find himself in agrcc-

VOIi. III. 3 E

770 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ment with Ihering, wlio would separate Gasteropteron, Philine, and
Scaphander from the Bullidea ; the French anatomist would, however,
retain Woodward's family, and would form in it two subdivisions, in
one of which O aster opter on is the only genus ; these two subdivisions
may be thus characterized. In the first, the paraj^odia are largely
developed, a small nautiloid shell is contained within the mantle, and
the oesophageal collar is made up of a pair of cerebral ganglia, of a
pair of pedal, and of six visceral ganglia ; the last being arranged by
three to the right, and three to the left.

In the second division the parapodia are always rudimentary, the
shell is always very distinct, is never nautiliform, and may be well
developed and external ; there are only three visceral ganglia in the
oesophageal collar, and of these, two are placed to the right, and one
to the left. Here, too, we find that the genital nerve always arises
from the larger of the two left visceral ganglia, while in Gasteropteron
it arises directly from the commissure without the intermediation of
any ganglionic enlargement ; while the branchial nerve, which, in
Gasteropteron always arises from the right visceral centres, may in
them be derived from the right visceral ganglion, from the right half
of the commissure, or from a ganglion placed in the middle of this
connecting cord.

Development of Teredo.* — Dr. Hatschek has extended his obser-
vations in development to the Lamellibranchiate Mollusca.

The youngest ovarian ova are pyriform in shape, and are attached
by their stalk to the wall of the ovary ; the germinal vesicle is excentric ;
the fertilized ova and the embryos are found within the gills of the
mother, where in numerous individuals it is often possible to see three
different stages ; the older being in the more anterior region. It is
soon possible to observe in an unsegmented ovum a clear animal and
a darker vegetative pole ; after the first segmentation we 'have two
unequal spheres, the smaller or more anterior of which is not so dark
as the other, in consequence of the less close packing of the yolk-
granules. The author is of opinion that in all Bilateria a bilateral
symmetry is to be made out in the ovum, just as in all Metazoa there
is a polar differentiation of the same cell. Observations on the process
of segmentation show that the ectoderm is formed from the clearer
cells, while the unpaired larger segmentation-sphere goes to form the
mesoderm and endoderm ; no cleavage cavity was to be observed.

The rudiments of the former of these two inner layers are develojied
from the large dark cell by the separation of a smaller piece, which
occupies the hinder pole of the embryo and divides into two cells
which become placed symmetrically, one on either side ; they are
darker than the ectodermal cells, and their nuclei are larger, so that
they altogether resemble in character the primitive mesodermal cells
of Unio, Planorbis, Pedicellina, and the Annelids.

The gastrula arises by epiboly and its free edge is formed by the
ectodermal layer ; there is still a single large endodermal cell, which
does not become divided for some time, and, even after the commence-

* ' Claus's Arbeiten,' iii. (1880) p. 1.

INTERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 771

ment of the formation of the oesophagus, there are only two enclodermal
cells. As the embryo changes from its ovoid form, we get a flattened
pre-oral, a conical post-oral, and a rounded posterior region. With
high powers it is possible to see, at some distance from the mouth, a
double circlet of delicate cilia, supported on two special rows of ecto-
dermal cells.

The two large ectodermal cells divide, and form the posterior
endodermal mass ; a double pre-oral ciliary cii'clet becomes developed.
Soon the whole siu-face of the embryo is covered with cilia, the only
naked region being a portion of the hinder part of the dorsal surface.
The ectodermal cells begin to form a shell-gland, and this, at a later
stage, forms a deep thick-walled saccule with a narrow cylindrical
lumen ; its orifice and margin are covered by a delicate chitinous
cuticle, which represents the earliest rudiment of the shell, and indi-
cates thereby the primitively unpaired condition of this organ.

From the primary mesodermal cells two or three smaller ones
have been budded off on either side, and pushed forwards ; tho
characters of these parts strongly call to mind the arrangements which
obtain in Criodrilus. The shell becomes double while still very thin,
and almost cuticular in character.

At a somewhat later stage the form of the body and the rudiments
of the organs call to mind the disposition of parts in the trochophore
stage of the Annelid-larva ; the stages next succeeding arc very
markedly affected by the development of the shell, which has grown
considerably, and about this time the double pre-oral circlet of cilia
disappears. The development of the musculature is now rapidly
going on ; and a number of separate parts soon become well marked ;
still do the primitive mesodermal cells retain their large size. As tho
shell grows, takes on a yellowish coloration, and becomes marked by
parallel lines of growth, the characters of the ciliation become much
changed ; cilia have disappeared from the frontal area and from tho
ventral surface ; in the oral region, pre-oral, post-oral, and adoral
zones are to be distinguished.

As the larva at this stage is completely trochophoral, save only as
regards the presence of a shell and a mantle to indicate its molluscan
ancestry, we have to look for a similarly well-marked excretory organ ;
this, just like the kidney of the Trochophore, is to bo found at tho
anterior end of the mesentery, where it forms a longish organ, with a
delicate lumen, and ciliated internally. As this body elongates it
becomes connected with the ectoderm and gets to open to the exterior
by means of an orifice in this layer.

As we cannot follow the author through all his further details, wo
will pass to the concluding part of this descriptive chapter, in which
he speaks of tl;e developnient of the gills. In the maiith; cavity, at
tho sides of the trunk, there appears a ridge of ectoderm, wliich belongs
to the inner lamella of the mantle-fold. Later on, the hinder portion
of this branchial ridge gets set at right angles to the anterior, and at
the angle the rudiment of tho gill is best developed. At a point near
the free cd^o the two layers, of wliich tho fold is composed, bccomo
thinner ; depressions ap})car in this which lead to tho breaking up of

3 E 2

772 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tlie gill, which, at about the same time, becomes marked off from the
inner mautlo-lamella by the ingrowing of the fold.

After some considerations on the early appearance of the bilateral
ai-rangement, to which attention has been called above, the author
says that, with the exception of the Echinodermata, the Trocho-
zoon appears to be the primitive form for all the rest ; WormSj
Molluscs, Molluscoids, Arthropods, and Vertebrates may therefore
be distinguished as Euhilateria. The blastopore closes along the
middle line, and the mouth appears at the point at which lay its
final remnant ; the formation of an ectodermal fore-gut appears
to have happened very early, and, after this, the formation of the
mesoderm is the oldest phenomena. The mode of development of
the mesodermal organs is a matter of great interest ; in the Annelids
the differentiation of the mesodermal bands leads to the distinction
between the head and trunk ; the relations between the trochophore
and the Teredo-larva are so close that their common ancestry is not
to be doubted ; the early development of the shell is only another
examj)le of the appearance before its historic time of an organ which
plays an important part in the organization of the individual.

When we try to trace the phylogenetic history of the mollusc, we
see that there were added to the organs of the Trochozoon, first, the
ventral ganglion of the trunk with the auditory vesicles, the paired
trunk-kidneys, opening by special ciliated infundibula into the
secondary coelom ; and the dorsal heart. These organs characterize
the primitive ancestor of both annelids and molluscs ; then, for the
mollusc, there aj^peared the hepatic diverticula of the stomach, the
dorsal shell, the mantle-fold, the muscular foot, and the primary gills.
When the foot appeared, the free-swimming mode of life was lost,
and the velum began to atrophy. If this be really the true history
of the Mollusca, it is clear that the " step-ladder " form of the ventral
ganglia (Ihering) cannot be regarded as an indication of a pre-
existing segmentation. The lateral approximation of the pedal ganglia
is a secondary character, and so, much more, is the approximation
and final fusion of these centres with the oesophageal ganglion.

Do the facts of development as now known to us support the
monophyletic or the polyphyletic (Ihering) theory of the history
of the Mollusca ? Hatschek believes that the ventral ganglia took
their origin from an ectodermal thickening on the ventral side of the
trunk-region, and that their approximation to the oesophageal ganglion
in the Nudibranchiata is the result of a secondary process. Ihering
would think that in (his) Platycochlides the supra-oesophageal, as well
as the pedal ganglia, had their origin in the frontal plate. Further
investigation of known facts, and further study into still unexplored
regions, can alone decide what answer is to be given to these two
questions.

Molluscoida.

Development of Lingula.* — M. Joliet has an analysis of
Mr. W. K. Brooks's important contribution to this subject, to

* ' Avfli. Zool. Exp. ct Gc'u.,' 1880, p. 390.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY^ ETC. 773

the general conclusions of which we direct attention. Dealing
with the zoological position of the Brachiopoda, the author points
out that embryological investigations have shown us that the re-
semblances between the gills of Tunicates, Brachiopods, and Lamelli-
branches are adult characteristics which have been arrived at by
very different ways. The larvsB of the higher Brachiopods present
a striking resemblance to the larva of Loxosoma ; those of lower
forms, e. g. Lingula, have a striking similarity to the adult (and
especially to the fresh-water) Polyzoa ; the autlior's facts seem to
him to show conclusively the real resemblance between the two
groujis. When the adult instead of the young is examined, we
have incontestably to do with a solitary Bryozoon, provided with
a nervous system and with highly specialized sensory organs. The
relations of the Brachiopoda to the Vermes are much less distinct
than Morse imagines ; their relations to the Bryozoa are very definite.
As to this last, its affinities to the Veliger-form are quite appai-cnt ;
the velum corresponds to the lophophore, the epistoma with its
ganglion corresponds to the foot and the pedal ganglion ; the shell
and its operculum correspond to the cell and operculum of the
Cheilostomatous Polyzoa, and the retractor muscles are " clearly
homologous." The Brachioi)oda, then, may be taken to be the most
highly si)ecialized representatives of the Bryozoan branch, and the
Mollusca proper have a similar relation to the FeZ/^<?r-phylum.

In conclusion, the author insists on the long persistence of Lingula
as showing that the facts of zoology absolutely forbid us to believe
that there must be a continuous evolution of forms owing to a
continuous progress upwards.

Structure of Adeona.* — Dr. Kirchenpauer has given the first
detailed account of one of the most curious and but little known of
the Bryozoa. In 1812 Lamouroux described Adeona, and at first
placed it among the Isidinfe, but subsequently under Escharida),
which included Eschara, Bctepora, Krustensterna, Hornera, Tilesia,
Discopora, Dtastopora, and Celleporaria ; but as no figures of the
minute structure were given, it remained doubtful if Lamouroux had
correctly j)laced the genus. In 1819 Schweigger, who considered it
related to NulUpora, discussed both among tlie corals, but gave very
fair figures showing the zooccial cells of the Bryozoa ; the work is,
however, probably known to few.

The structure of Adeona is interesting in several particulars, but
more especially in tlie jointed radical, upon which character the
genus as now described is established. This consists of calcareous
joints with irregular chitinous intervals, forming a flexible stem much
like Isis, so that it has luiturally been frequently compared to it.
Kirchenpauer finds, in making sections through this radical, that there
are fine connecting tubes passing from the chitinous jiortiou through
the calcareous joints. In one species the zoarium from which this root
springs is a calcareous f(diaccou8 growth, much resembling in shape

* " Ueboj- d. Bryozoen-Guttung i4rftww," von Dr. KirchenpaiUT, ' Journ. Mus.
Godcffroy,' 1880.

774 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

EscJiara foliacea var. angustifolia. In otlier species, however, tho
zoarium consists of a flat reticulated or feuestratecT flabelliform
lamella, consisting of a double layer of zooecia, having the characters
of Lepralia, as we now understand it, according to Mr. Hincks's
classification.

The calcareous stalk, from which grow one or many of these
jointed roots, is pointed at the base, and spreads out in the flabelliform
manner mentioned. This is strengthened by numerous ribs, which
spread through the zoarium, reminding us somewhat of the ribs of
a leaf, and these, besides bifurcating, sometimes anastomose. Micro-
scopical sections show that these thicker parts, which we are obliged
to speak of as ribs, are formed by a thickening of the lamella ; for
here, instead of finding the zooecial chambers near the surface, they
are found back to back in the median line, and over them is a con-
siderable thickness of calcareous growth, which seems to be similar
to that four.d in the older parts of Myriozoum and Eschara, where the
oral aperture is often covered by a growth two or three times larger
than the zocecium.

All known species of the genus are from Australia and South
Africa, and the root structure is sufficiently characteristic for them
to be kept together at present, though it may be found advisable in
the future to base classification more entirely upon the form of the
zooecial cell.

New Genus of Polyzoa.* — Mr. J. B. Wilson describes a new
genus of Cheilostomata closely allied to Catenicella, and to express
that affinity the name Catenicellopsis has, at Professor McCoy's sug-
gestion, been given to it. The two species as yet known are separated
from Catenicella on the same ground that was considered sufficient to
justify the separation of Alysidium from that genus, namely, the mode
of branching.

The diagnosis of the genus is : Cells arising, for the most pai-t,
from the upper and back of other cells by a short chitinous tube ;
cells at each bifurcation commonly geminate ; cells also frequently
arising by a short chitinous tube from the side of another single cell,
immediately below the lateral process.

The two species are C. pusilla and C. delicatula, the first growing
on Gystopliora in small glassy tufts about -J inch high, and the latter
on sea-weed or larger forms of Catenicella in tufts 1 and 2 inches
high.

Arthropoda.

«. Insecta.

;•' Little-known Organ of the Hymenoptera.f — The organ, as
described by MM. Canestrini and Berlese, consists of a dejjression
on the first tarsal joint of the first pair of legs, and of a spur at the
apex of the tibia, either simple, bifid, or armed with spines, and often
protected by a chitinous sheath. The spur is a modified sj^ine, for
two spines are found in the same j)Osition on the second and third

* ' Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict.,' i. (1880) pp. 64-65 (1 plate).
t ' Bull. Soc. Veneto-Trent.,' i. (1880) p. 154.

INVERTEBEATA, CRTPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 775

pairs (in other insects on tlie first also) ; of these one persists in the
first pair as the sjiur above mentioned, the other becomes rudimentary.
No muscles for moving the spur have been found, and its function is
that of cleaning the tongue, and perhaps the antennae also. These
conclusions were derived from a study of many families of the
order.

Honey-hearing Ants. — At p. 242 we gave a short account * of
the Eev. Dr. McCook's observations on some of these ants from
Colorado, which with the head and thorax of a small ant have all the
posterior portion of the body distended into a reservoir of honey, the
size of a large pea and of a rich translucent amber hue. The
creatures cling to the rough roof of the chambers with their feet,
the honey-bag hanging downwards. Not only is the abdomen con-
verted into a receptacle for honey, but the whole internal economy
of the body is transformed for this purj^ose ; all the organs of the
abdomen having quite disappeared, and there remains only a thin
transparent skin. Dr. McCook was able to discover that the working
ants, returning from their outdoor foraging with their bodies distended
with the honey they had harvested, eject it from their own mouths
into those of the honey-bearers, whose bodies thus become distended
with it. The honey-bearer seemed to slightly contract the muscles
of the abdominal skin, forcing from its mouth minute globules of
honey ; these clung to the bail's of the under lij) and were eagerly
lapped up by the hungry ants waiting to be fed. It is probable,
however, that the supplies are principally intended as winter-stores
for the worlcers, for feeding the larva), or for the queen.

Since the period when the above observations were made.
Dr. McCook has had under his constant sui^ervision an artificial
formicary of the ants, and has made some fm-ther interesting com-
munications in regard to them.t The most striking points relate to
two particulars, one bearing on the sympathy, or spirit of beneficence,
of the ants ; the other relating to tlieir anatomy.

Sir John Lubbock has shown that while ants were full of hostility
against individual foes, they showed no sympathy for friends in
trouble. The comfort of the poor honey-bearers, for instance, whilo
the workers were excavating, was utterly ignored. They lay help-
lessly where they had been dropped, and were treated by the other ants
as if they had been so many lifeless impediments to their work.
Instead of making a detour ai-ound tlicm, the Avorkers went straight
forward, clambering over any that lay in their path, and even
dropping the i)ellets of earth which they brought out from tho
excavations upon and around them, until some of the houcy-bearera
were almost buried. There seemed hero a lack both of sympathy and
of intelligence.

The honey-bearers are not, however, quite helpless; they liavo
tho full use of their legs, though their movements are necessarily
made at a disadvantage, from the angle into which tho head and
thorax aro thrown by the swollen condition of the abdomen ; yet they

* See also ' Journ. of Si-ioncc,' ii. (1880) p. 87. t Ibid., p. 430.

776 RECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

have been observed to move by their own efforts, and it is not
impossible that they themselves regain their favourite position on the
ceiling of the nest when accidentally displaced. The reason of their
preferring this position may be from the uncomfortable attitude
which they are forced to assume on the floor of the nest. The
workers, so far as could be seen, made no attempt to replace them. It
may seem that an intense muscular effort would be required to sustain
their great weight in this position. That ants, and insects generally,
are excessively muscular, as compared with the larger animals, is well
known. And the honey-bearers are more muscular than ants
generally, their legs being simply bundles of powerful muscles. But
it is rather difficult to conceive how muscular effort can be brought
to bear to overcome the action of gravity in this position, unless by
some clasping of the terminal hooks of the feet around the excres-
cences of the rough ceiling. It seems more probable that support
is gained by the action of the sucking-disk, which ants possess in
common with many other insects.

An observation of some importance in respect to the question of
ant intelligence is that regarding the demeanour of the ants towards
dead honey-bearers. In this case it is their habit to separate the
head and thorax from the honey-bag, burying the former in the fixed
cemetery which these ants usually establish in the earth outside their
nests. But though the honey-bag remains, full of its sweet contents,
the ants — either from resjiect for the dead or from lack of mental
power to devise a new means of getting at its honeyed freight — seem
to make no effort to penetrate its transparent wall. This is singular,
in view of tlie avidity with which they will lick up the smallest
portion of sweet food offered them in any uncovered condition.

As to their anatomy, it was previously said that the whole abdomen
appeared, to be occupied by the honey, its organs seeming to be oblite-
rated, so that only a thin transparent skin remained. But anatomical
observation shows that this external appearance does not give the
true facts of the case. All the abdominal organs remain, but so
strangely distorted and compressed as to be almost imperceptible.
The fact is that any of these ants may, if necessary, be converted into
a honey-bearer, and that the worker, when on her way home with
her abdomen distended with the fruits of her nocturnal labour, has
made a step towards the condition of the fully developed honey-
bearer.

Of the three special expansions of the intestinal tract of the
abdomen of the ant (the crop, the gizzard, and the stomach) it is
the crop, into which the oesophagus immediately opens, which is the
recipient of the honey. As its stores increase, by continual additions,
it expands more and more, pressing outward the extensible walls of
the abdomen, and compressing the remaining portions of the intestine
into a smaller and smaller space. In a fully laden honey-bearer the
crop has become so expanded that it fills nearly the whole interior of
the greatly dilated abdomen ; the dorsal vessel, or heart, being com-
pressed and flattened against its upper wall ; while the gizzard,

INVERTEBRATA, CRTPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 777

stomach, and intestine are similarly compressed against the posterior
wall. The compression of these organs is so great as seemingly to
preclude their functional action, the stomach appearing to be quite
incapacitated for its normal office of digestion. Yet the continued
vitality of the ant is sufficient evidence that alimentation must still
exist ; and as it is not at all probable that the crop could assume the
function of a digesting organ without injury to its stores, it seems as
if some of the liquid food must make its way into the stomach and
intestine, despite their extreme compression, and be there prepared
for aliment.

It is, in fact, a puzzling question. Dr. McCook is inclined to
think stomach digestion in some instances impossible. But the con-
tinued vitality of the ant seems to render it necessary, despite its
apparent impossibility.

Structure of the Lampyridae with reference to their Phos-
phorescence.*— The Eev. H. S. Gorham arrives at the conclusion
that the sexual instinct has played a large part in moulding the
external structure of this group of beetles, and that it is to that we
may look for an adequate explanation of the development of phos-
phorescent light, though, perhaps, not for its origin.

In the first place, it is to be observed that all the species of this
family do not j)ossess the luminous faculty in equal degree ; but that
on the contrary, while some are highly luminous in both sexes, some
are only highly so in the female, some are not luminous in either
sex, and some (though this appears rather doubtful) are luminous in
the males, and not so, or much less so, in the female.

The part which this faculty of emitting light plays in the economy
of nature has been long and earnestly debated. The most general
view, and one which the author's observations tend to confirm, is that
it serves as a beacon to attract the male to the female ; but he believes
this to be the case only in a special sense in those species which do
not assemble, and especially in those in which the females are in-
capable of flight. In other cases he believes that both sexes are
attracted, and enabled by this means to assemble at niglit for their
union. These inferences are drawn from the consideration of the
relative development of the eyes, together with what is known of the
habits of the various species.

The eyes of the Lampyridae are, he finds, developed in magnitude
according to the amount of luminosity of the species considered ; and
the other parts which he has taken account of, together with these,
are the antennte, of which there is a very great diversity, both between
the sexes and in the genera ; the elytra, which are also subject to
sexual and generic limitations, and finally the size of the abdomen in
the female.

The last-mentioned is no doubt, as in other apterous females, the
result of an increased production of ova. These are in the Lam-
l»yridto laid on roots and other substances near the grouml, where the

♦ 'Trans. Entomol. Soc. Lond.,' 1880, [>\t. G3-<;.

778 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

young larvae will at once be likely to meet with their mollnscan diet.
The greater the tendency to produce ova in abundance the more
sluggish the females would become, and hence females once capable
of flight would lose the use of their wings, and the usefulness of the
light to attract their more volatile partners would be greater than
ever. This he believes to be the explanation of the fact that the
highest degree of light, or at any rate the greatest disproportion in
the amount shown by the sexes, is to be found in those species which
have apterous females, and together with this the greatest develop-
ment of eye in the male.

The species in which both sexes are winged, and in which
both are luminous and in probably nearly equal degree, are, the
author thinks, by far the larger proportion of the whole number of
existing species. In this case the power of emitting light would be
obviously useful in attracting both sexes to assemble in swarms, and
it does not militate against this supposition that in many siDCcies the
males should possess this faculty in the higher degree. It might be
anticipated that if the female has to be guided to the rendezvous of
the species by this eilect, the eyes in that sex would not be inferior
to those of the male ; and such is the fact. One well-known case is
the European and Eastern genus Luciola. Here both sexes fly, both
are luminous, and both have largely developed, powerful eyes.

Neither of these sections, however, comprise those species which
are generally regarded as most tyjjical of the family, the largest, and
those which appear on the whole to have all their parts most highly
specialized, and which, therefore, we place at the head of a systematic
list, such as the genera Lamprocera and Cladodes. It is rather re-
markable that in these genera the light-emitting faculty has not been
developed in the same proportion as the rest of the organs have, and
that while one of these, viz. the eyes, are also reduced in a direct
ratio with the light, and are small and uniform in both sexes,
another organ, the antennae, is developed in inverse ratio as the
phosphorescence is diminished. It is not intended to refer to mere
length, or redundancy in the number of joints, which are more usual
in very simple and primitive forms of the organ, such as we see in
JBlatta, but of a high degree of specialization, testified by large
lamellar plates or pectination. Whether the eye is develoj)ed at the -
expense of the antenna, and is so to speak the recei^tacle of all the
vital forces of the head, or whether the antenna supj)lements the loss
of the other organ of sense, and is useful in detecting the presence of
the female, only one fact is in evidence, which is that this j)lumosity
of the antennas, in one case, and this enormous development of the
eye in the other, are usually sexual characters predominating in the
male, but sometimes found in both sexes.

In support of his view Mr. Gorham exhibited a selection of species
arranged in three groups, viz. : —

i. Species with plumose antennae, small or moderate eyes, both
sexes winged, light-emitting surface confined to one or more small
spots : — Lamprocera, Cladodes, Vesta, Lucidora, Phcenolis, and Megalo-
phthalmus.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 779

ii. Species in which both sexes are winged ; light emitted con-
siderable, sometimes greater in the P ; eyes large, sometimes ex-
cessive ; antennae simple, usually filiform : — Cratomorphus, Lucernula,
Aspidosoma, Luciola, and Plioturis.

iii. Species in which the female is apterous or with rudimentary
wings ; light emitted often very great in the female, and often only
rudimentary traces of it in the male ; antennae usually rudimentary ;
eyes large in the male, often excessively so, occupying nearly the
whole head : — Pleotomus, Lamprophorus, MicropTiotus, Lampyris, and
LmnprorMza.

In the discussion * which followed the paper, the author, in reply
to a question how he had deterinincd the intensity of the light without
actual photometric measurement of the live insects, stated that tlie
light-emitting segments at the extremity of the abdomen were dis-
tinguisliable by their white, vitreous appearance, and that he con-
sidered their number and size to indicate the phosphorescent power.
He did not consider that these vitreous segments were themselves
luminous, but that the source of light was within the body of the
insect, and shone through the transparent segments, or could be
withdrawn at pleasure. In this manner he thought the gradual
extinction or intermittent flashing of the light might be explained.

Influence of Temperature in producing Varieties of Lepi-
doptera.t — G. Dorfmcister has observed a specimen of Vanessa
Atalanta, stated to have been bred from a pupa of the year before,
with the lower side of the hind wings buff-coloured ; he therefore
made experiments to test the caiise of this by trying to breed similar
forms, and succeeded in producing just such a specimen as the first.
As the species docs not naturally pass the winter in the pupa state in
this part of the world, many puptc were killed by cold, and the tem-
perature at which they thrive was discovered in the course of the
experiments. The variety mentioned was obtained among tlie
images from pupa? which had become pupre at 10^ to 11^ Ii., and
were afterwards kept at 7^"" to 5.V" R., and some varieties resembling
it resulted from the same treatment ; pupae, however, kept at from 1°
to 2° R. either died or furnished crippled images.

Using higlicr temjieratures, and forcing the pupae in a shorter
time, he found tliat several similar varieties were i)roduccd, the
method being to allow the pupation of the caterpillars to take i)laco
between 7h^ and ll'^ R., to keep the pupae from three to seven days
at the same temperature, and for the remaining eighteen to thirty
days to keep tliem in a room of sometimes tolerably low temperature.

With Vitnessa urticce he found that diminishing the warmtli pro-
duced stages of transition to the Lai)hxnd form, Vanessa levaiia, how-
ever, which is accustomed to pass the winter as pupa, developed no
varieties when exposed to a greatly diininishod toiiiperaturc.

In order to determine the exact period at which the future
colourings and markings are fixed on the insect, he recalls the fact

* Iliiil. (Proc), p. vi.

t 'MT. Nivtvirw. Vit. Stciuriimrk ' (IXSO), Al.liaii.ll., \k 3. I pliilo.

780 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

that the most extreme varieties resulted from larv^ which had been
kept in the cellar (i. e. at a low temperature) during their period of
pupation ; but from his other experiments, and from some recorded
by Professor Weissmann, he is now inclined to believe that this
critical period occurs, not at the time of the pupation itself, but
immediately after it.

With regard to the known sensitiveness of Lepidoptera to low
temperatures while entering the pupa stage, he states that larvae of
Arctia caja need at least 9° to 10° R. for this operation ; some kept
at a degree varying between 8° and 10° took from twenty -four to
thirty days to make the change after spinning up, and then only
produced somewhat deformed images ; those kept below that tem-
perature perished.

Protective Attitude of the Caterpillar of the Lobster Moth.* —

Most entomologists have admitted that the grotesque attitude of those
caterpillars forming Newman's " Cuspidate " group was in some way
protective, but it is only quite recently that Dr. Hermann Miiller
has made known the results of his observations on the caterijillar of
Stauropus Fagi, which observations now for the first time tend to
show the true meaning of this attitude in the species in question.

When sitting on a twig in its natural position the head and first
five segments are held erect, and the greatly lengthened legs of the
Becond and third segments held outstretched ; thus, when seen from
the front, the whole aspect of the insect, both in form and colour, is
most spider-like, and when alarmed it immediately raises its four long
legs and moves them irregularly, after the manner of a spider attacking
its victim. This spider-like appearance is believed to be a special
protection against ichneumons which may approach it from the front.
According to the experience of H. Miiller ichneumons are especially
afraid of spiders, and he states, on the authority of Fleddermann, an
experienced breeder of insects, that the larva oi S. Fagi was never found
to be attacked by ichneumons, whilst, according to Treitschke, the
nearly allied Hyhocampa Milliauseri is often attacked by them, although
a much rarer species, which rarity may perhaps be attributable to
the complete absence of such protection as that possessed by S. Fagi.

So much for the front aspect of the caterpillar under consideration.
When approached from the rear there is nothing to be seen but the
erect, hard shield-like surface of the last segment surmounted by two
black horns, and presenting an appearance totally unlike that of a
caterpillar. When a side view of the larva is presented, there is
seen on the fourth and fifth segments a small black depression just
below the spiracles, and giving the appearance of a caterpillar ivhich
has been stung hy an ichneumon, so that one of these foes approaching
from the side would be deceived and abandon it without depositing
its eggs.

Odoriferous Apparatus of Sphinx ligustri.t — This has been
lately discovered by Von Eeichenau, who found, while stuflSng the

* ' Kosmos,' 1879, p. 123. See ' Trans. Entom. Soc. Lond.,' 1880, ' Proe.,' p. iii.
t ' Entomol. Naclir.,' vi. (1880) p. 141.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 781

abdomen, a bunch of colourless bair-like scales lying in a fold on
eacb side of the first abdominal segment ; it could be extruded from
the fold by pressure. The aperture has the form of a cylindrical tube,
and here a strong musky scent was perceptible, and did not occur
elsewhere. The scales are readily visible with the naked eye.

Spinning Organs of Insect Larvae.* — Dr. Gustav Joseph has a
preliminary communication on these organs. He finds, in oppo-
sition to Lidth de Jeude, that they are supplied with nerves from
the sub-oesophageal ganglia and from the gastric nervous system.
When the integument is carefully removed from young larvae in
which the fatty body is but slightly developed, it may be seen that
between the peritoneal investment of the spinning tube and its
glandular cell-layer there is a distinct nervous plexus formed of
extremely fine dichotomous filaments which pass in between the
gland-cells.

These spinning organs are developed very early in the course
of existence, and commence as a small depression ; this gradually
deepens and becomes converted into a tube ; the cells which bound
its lumen are at first scarcely to be distinguished from the morpho-
logical elements which make up the outermost layer of the general
integument. These tubules generally make their appearance before
the salivary glands, but this is not always the case. The author,
in opposition to Hatschek, woiald regard them as being tegumentary
glands, or in other words as being primarily difi'erentiatcd from
the integument. They are not to be confotmded with the salivary
glands, the function of which is in relation to the ingested nutri-
ment ; and they themselves demonstrate their relations to the integu-
ment by forming a secretion which hardens on exposure to the air,
and has some of the characters of a cuticle.

As is briefly pointed out, the development of the three constituent
parts of the tube — gland, reservoir, and efferent duct — diflers in
different species. Further details are promised.

Parthenogenesis in Halictus.f — The observations of M. Fabro
have been chiefly made on Halictus cylindricus and H. sexcinctiis.
After a description of the conditions under which he observed the two
species, the author points out tliat for this genus there is no "society"
in the entomological sense of the word ; each mother cares only
for its own larvaj, though the various jiarents unite to form a common
liome ; each cell in the gallery is nevertheless the property of a
single Halictus. As to the relations of the sexes, wo find that males
are very rarely to be detected ; in September, however, they are to bo
found in quantity. Beginning, then, with the month of November,
wo find females which have evidently been fertilized ; this is easy
to understand, but at this ptriod tlio males have completely dis-
appeared. The females pass the winter in their cells, and towards
]\Iay they come out and work at their nests. In July, though no
males have yet been seen, there is a second generation ; but hero

• ' Zmil. Anzcig.,' iii. (1S80) p. 326.
t ' Ann. Sci. Nat.,' ix. (1880) Art. 1.

782 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

comes the difficulty, that we know that the females die down after
having taken steps for the continuance of the race ; and again, what
have become of the numerous females developed in May, if it is
really true that the presence of the males is necessary for the forma-
tion of ova capable of development ? " They are mothers, and fertile
mothers, without having known the male." The generation in July
is therefore a true case of parthenogenesis. The results of these ova
are male and female, and the members of the former sex are in greater
abundance. Excepting the Aphides, this would appear to be the first
well-authenticated case of the alternate development of fertilized and
of non-fertilized ova among the Insecta ; the cases of Lepidoptera
which might be brought to bear upon the point are sporadic and
accidental.

The author concludes with a notice of a parasite on E. sexcindus,
which is the larva of Myiochjtes subdipterus, a coleopteron with
greatly reduced elytra. As soon as the larva of Halictus has
swallowed its honey, it is devoured by Myiodytes ; as to the depo-
sition of the ova of this last, the author has at present nothing to
communicate.

Galls produced by Aphides.* — In this paper M. Courchet deals
with the principal galls produced by aphides, from the trijile point
of view of their development, their morphological value, and their
structure.

He abstains from discussing the action that the puncture exercises
on the vegetable tissues ; but he points out that if mechanical influence
could take any part whatever in the formation of galls it would cer-
tainly be in those of the aphides, the insect being always alive and
active in the heart of the new tissues. Further, the action of the
animal poison, to which, according to M. Lacaze-Duthiers and others
is attributed the production of the galls, is not absolutely comparable
to that of a virus on animal tissues ; the latter has no need to be
inoculated and incessantly renewed to give rise to the production of
special phenomena, whilst M. Courchet has always observed that the
galls (of aphides), which for any cause have been abandoned by their
inhabitants, are arrested in their growth.

M. Courchet passes in review the galls of the Terebinth, the
Lentisk, the Black Poplar, and the Elm, dwelling particularly on
the first three, which are the most interesting and the least studied.

Of the Terebinth, five galls are described : horn galls (galle en
corne), produced by Pempliigus cornicularius, and utricular galls by
P. utricularius, both formed at the expense of the tissues of the
median nervure. The three others are formed by the lamina of the
leaf folded in different ways, and are the production of P. j^allidus,
P.follicularius, and P. semilunarius.

On the Lentisk is found one gall, produced by an Aploneura, and
which is similar to those of P. pallidus and P. follicularius.

The Black Poplar has six galls ; one formed at the expense of the
tissues of a branch, the others being of a foliar nature. They are

* ' Rev. Sci. Nat.,' i. (1880) pp. 533-41.

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 783

produced by the followiug insects : P. sjnrothecce (gall formed of
the twisted petiole), Pacliypaiypa marsupialis (gall in the form of a
purse, generally red and compressed laterally, projecting from the
upper side of the leaf). Pemphigus bursariiis (gall growing either on a
branch or a petiole), P. populi n. sp. (gall insufficiently studied, but it
is believed that the tissues of the median nervure take the greatest
part in its constitution), P. affinis (hardly to be considered a " gall,"
consisting simply of a folding of the leaf on the median nervure, the
right and left margins meeting and forming a large cavity between
the two parts of the leaf), P. vesicarius (gall possibly resulting from
the union and abnormal growth of the leaves of a bud).
The following are M. Courchet's conclusions : —
1st. None of the galls produced by the aphides arise from the
very centre of the tissues of an organ ; some commence by a simple
invagination of the lamina of a leaf (" horn gall," utriculate gall of
the Terebinth), or by a cellular swelling which forms and rises little
by little around the insect as in the gall of Pemyliigns bursarius of
the Black Poplar ; or again, a petiole coiled up on itself encloses the
insect in a cellular utricle which finally becomes a true gall, as
happens in the case of P. spirothecce, &c. ; in other words, all may be
classed under M. de Lacaze-Duthiers' term of " false internal galls."
2nd. Their cavity is always spacious, and the wall relatively thin,
which is rendered necessary by the presence in their interior of an
always considerable number of living insects.

3rd. Their structure always retains more or less of that of the
organ which bears them, and which is entirely, or in part, transformed
to j)roduce them. In general their walls are composed of a tolerably
homogeneous fundamental cellular tissue, which is traversed by fibro-
vascular bundles in variable number. There are no well-marked
concentric layers here, as seen, for instance, in the galls produced by
Cynips on the oak.

4th. All the galls of aphides hitherto observed by the author,
with one exception, represent appendicular organs, or parts of
appendicular organs transformed ; the gall of Pemphigus bursarius
alone is formed laterally on an axis or petiole by a single prolifera-
tion of the herbaceous layer, and in an independent manner.

/3. Myriapoda.

Eyes and Brain of Cermatia forceps.* — Mr. N. Mason lias made
preparations of the eyes of this Myriapod, which is useful as a sjjider-
destroyer, and Dr. Packard gives the result of his examination of tho
eyes and brain.

The eye appears to be constructed on tho same plan as that of
other species of tho sub-class, but differing in important resjiccts.
Though Cermatia is said to have compound eyes in contradistinction
from the so-called " ocelli " of other Myriapods, the latter arc like-
wise truly aggregated or compound, tho " ocelli " being composed of
contiguous facets, tho nerve-fibres supplying them arising in tho

♦ ' Am. Nut.,' xiv. (1880) i\ C02.

784 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

same general manner from the optic nerve as in Cermatia, wliere tlie
facets are much more numerous. The eye of Cermatia is composed of
a hemispherical, many-facetted cornea, the lenses of which are
shallow, doubly convex, being quite regularly lenticular, the chitinous
substance being laminated as usual. Each corneal lens is underlaid
by a retina about as thick as the cornea, the inner surface of each
retinal mass being convex. Corresponding to each lens is a separate
mass of connective tissue, which increases in thickness from the end
of the optic nerve outward towards the cornea ; though the entire
retina of the eye extends back to the ganglion opticum. Within the
broad stratum of connective tissue, forming the entire retina of the
eye, lies next to the corneal lens a layer of " vitreous cells " or " lens-
epithelium " of Graber. This layer is succeeded by the series of
rather large visual rods, one in each mass corresponding to each
corneal lens ; these rods are long and sharp, conical at the end which
extends nearly to the inner edge of the retinal mass ; they each
possess a nucleus, and the connective tissue enveloping the rods is
nucleated, while there is an irregular layer of nucleated cells near or
around the ends of the rods. There are no cones ; these not being
yet detected in the eye of Myriapods. This layer of cells is suc-
ceeded by a thin, slightly curvilinear, transverse strip of connective
tissue passing through the entire eye, and behind it are the loose,
nucleated, spherical cells forming the ganglion opticum.

The brain of Cermatia forceps, as shown by several sections, is
developed on the same plan as in Bothropolys, and the myriopodan
brain seems to correspond more closely in its general form and
histology with that of the insects than the Crustacea. The large,
thick optic nerve arises from the upper side of each hemisphere. The
median furrow above is deep, and on each side is a mass of small
ganglion cells ; also a mass in the deep fissure below the origin of
the optic nerve, and another mass on the inferior lobe extending
down each side of the cesophagus, probably near or at the origin of
the posterior commissure. These masses, i. e. those on the upper and
under side of the brain, connect on each side of the median line, and
in this respect the brain is as in Bothropolys. There are no large
ganglion cells as in Crustacea, including Limulus.

There is, then, no very close resemblance in form or histology
between the eye and brain of Limulus and the Myriapods, the two
types of eye being essentially diiferent.

7- Arachnida.

New "Work on Parasites. — M. P. Mequin has just published
a work entitled ' Les Parasites et les Maladies Parasitaires.' The
part which has already appeared deals with the parasitic Arthropoda.
In addition to the sixty-three woodcuts which are intercalated in the
text, there is a separate atlas of twenty-six plates. This work ought
to be useful as a dictionary and handbook of the characters of the
more important Arthropod j^arasites, for though not without faults
it goes a long way to supply a want which has been long felt.

DTVERTEBRATA, CRTPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 785

New Galeodida.* — In his latest contribution to this subject,
Dr. Karsch describes a number of new forms, and among these there
are three new genera — Zerhina {Z. gracilis C. L. Koch), Dcesia
(D. prcecox C. L, Koch), Biton (B. Ehrenbergii n. sp.), and Gnosippus
(G. Klunzingeri n. sp.). The author is of opinion that the time has
not yet come for a natural arrangement of this group. Simon, in
rejecting what he regards as Koch's artificial arrangement, has left
equally important points out of consideration. In proof of his
position the author gives an interesting table showing the number of
tarsal joints in the three hinder pairs of legs in the genera of the
Galeodida, which shows up the lacuna? in our knowledge in a very
striking manner.

5. Crustacea.

Antennary Gland of the Crustacea.t — In this important essay
Dr. Grobbeu commences with an account of his observations on
some of the Phyllopoda ; in the larva) of Esfheria and Branchipus he
has found that in its early condition the gland consists of two parts,
histologically different ; there is a terminal saccule, and a urinary
canal, looped and coiled. The former lies between the muscles of
the second antenna and has a dorso-ventral direction ; it is attached
to the integument by connective fibres. The canal extends from
before backwards, and opens at the base of the second antenna. The
saccule is lined by an epithelial layer lying on a delicate supporting
membrane ; the cell-protoplasm is clear, rich in vacuoles and nume-
rous yellowish-brown granules. In the canal we only find three
nuclei, so that its walls are formed by three cells ; the protoplasmic
granules are principally arranged in cords, while on the internal
surface the cells are invested by a rather thick cuticle.

In the Nauplius form of Cetochihts hehjolandicus the canal is
formed by a few cells, the terminal saccule by a single one, and it is
provided on its inner surface with a delicate cuticle. In Cyclops
(Nauplius form) the antennary gland is considerably elongated, the
canal is long, curved dorsally, and after a complex course returns to
the region of the saccule.

Turning from the Entomostraca to the Malacostraca, the author
describes what he has seen in Gammarus marinns ; here, again, there
is a terminal saccule and a canal ; the former, reniform in shape, lies
near the integument, and the canal after several coils returns to open
near it. The protoplasm in the cells of the former is coarsely
granular, and in tlie latter finely fibrillatcd ; its terminal portion has
special cells, which completely resemble the matrix-cells of the
integument, and they shed out a chitinous cuticle ; to this portion of
the " urinary canal " the author applies the term of " ureter."

After giving a description of tlie same parts in ^Fysis, Dr.
Grobben comes to the so-called " green gland " of the Dccapoda ; in
Pdhemon trcillianus the gland lies in the basal joint of the second
antenna ; the saccule is reniform and is supplied by a large blood-
vessel ; the whole course of the canal was not exactly followed, and

* ' Arch, fur Nntnrg.,' xlvi. (1880) p. 228.
t ' ClauH's Arboitcn.' iii. (ISSO) p. m.
VOL. III. 3 F

786 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

it will be useless here to describe the numerous loops that it makes.
As to the minuter details, we are told that the saccule is not a simple
sac with smooth walls, but that it consists of a large number of csecal
sacs, between which there is a rich network of connective tissue, in
the lacunae of which the blood can freely circulate. The cells have
large nuclei, and pale, finely granxilar contents ; on the other hand,
in the canal the cell-contents are arranged cord-wise, and are best
developed on the side of the cell most distant from the lumen. The
thick cuticle is likewise striated, and in a direction perpendicular to
the axis of the canal. The results of his observations on the green
gland of Astacus fluviatilis do not altogether agree with those of
previous observers; forming a compact mass, lying largely in the
thorax, the saccule and canal are still to be distinguished ; the former
is rounded, and of a yellowish-green colour; the canal is delicate,
provided with diverticula, and extended into a wide canal of a pale
greenish-grey colour, which has similar diverticula, and which lies
coiled between the saccule and the green part of the canal ; the
terminal portion of the duct is here again lined by a chitinous cuticle.
Deep clefts are to be observed between the epithelial cells of the
saccule, and the protoplasm is seen to contain a number of amorphous
yellow-green bodies; the bright-green portion of the canal has
epithelial cells of a cubical or cylindrical foi^m, and the contained
granules are arranged cord-wise ; there is a thickish cuticle, thinner
at certain points, and so, in optical section, appearing as though it
were composed of rods. The author insists on the rich supply of
blood-vessels to all parts of the canal.

When we compare these results with what we know of the shell-
gland, we find a striking resemblance in structure; without going
here into this subject in detail, attention may be directed to the
conclusion that the two glands have a similar structure ; further, the
view that they are homologous is supported by the fact that they are
both mesodermal in origin. As to the functions of the parts, it
would seem that the terminal saccule is to be compared to the
Malpighian capsules of the Vertebrate kidney ; while the canals are
comparable to the tuhuli contorti.

In both Vermes and Mollusca the urinary canals are formed by
a few cells, and the difference in the length of the canal in Cyclops as
compared with Cetocliilus is to be explained by the fact that one
inhabits fresh and the other salt water, just as the marine Polychaeta
have short, and the fresh-water Oligochaeta long segmental organs.

Rapidity of the Transmission of Motor Stimuli along the Nerves
of the Lobster.* — MM. Fredericq and Vaudevelde find that at Ghent,
at a temperature of 10-12'' C. (in February and March), this rapidity
was about 6 metres a second ; at Eoscoff, with the temperature at
from 18-20° C. they attained different results, the rapidity being
from 10-12 metres a second. Both these data show that in the
lobster stimuli are conveyed along motor nerves very much more
slowly than they are along those of the frog or of man.

* ' ComptcB Rendus,' xci. (1880) p. 239.

INVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 787

Nervous System of Idotea entomon.* — This Isopod, selected
for study by M. Ed. Brandt, has three cephalic, seven tlioracico-
abdominal, and four post-abdominal nerve ganglia. Of the cephalic
group, the supra-oesophageal (not that so called by Rathke, which is
the sub-cesophageal) is made up of two median lobes, the hemispheres,
sending nerves to the interior antennse ; of two external, the optic,
lobes, giving off the optic nerves ; and of two antennary lobes supplying
the external antennaj. The short and very thick oesophageal collar
gives off two nerves to the labrum. The sub-oesophageal ganglion
is small, and, as in insects, gives off three nerve jiairs, to the labium,
maxillfe, and mandibles respectively. The third cephalic mass, for
which the name lyedomaxillary is proposed, rests on a special
pedomaxillary plate, and from it proceeds one pair of nerves,
similarly named, to the two maxillipedes. Of the ganglia of the
main body, the first is small, but larger than the pedomaxillary, and
all the rest arc of one size ; from each of them originates a nerve
pair to the feet, while the commissures between them supply the
muscles and integument of the segment. The pedomaxillary shows
the same arrangement, sending off nerves to the posterior part of the
head as well as those for the maxilliijedes. It would seem from its
innervation and the presence in it of a distinct ganglion that the
posterior part of the head is a thoracic segment amalgamated with
the head. The latter therefore forms part of an imperfect cephalo-
thorax, but is still morphologically different from the heads of insects.
The four post-abdominal ganglia are much smaller than those of
the body ; the three anterior are all of the same size, and give off" each
a single nerve pair to their segments ; the fourth is larger, and four
pairs of nerves proceed from it. An azygos sympathetic trunk lies
here between the commissural cords of the central system, and is
interrupted by ganglia as already described by F. Leydig in Purcellio
scaler.

Cymothoidae. t — A year or two ago a request was sent to the
various museums of the world by Drs. Schiodte and Meinert, of
Copenhagen, requesting the loan of all specimens of Cymothoidfe
(Isopoda) for the pui-pose of monographing the group, and the first
portions of the monograph have now appeared.

The first of these papers treats of the Cirolanidas, which closely
resemble the true Cymothoas, but which differ in having the mouth-
parts adapted for eating flesh. Three genera and nine species arc
characterized, of which the genera Baryhrotes and Tachaa, and species
B. iiulns, B. agilis, T. crassipes, CoraUana coUaris, brevipes, nodosa,
and hirsuta are new. Each species is described, as far as the specimens
permitted, under three heads — male, virgin, and ovigerous females —
the difference between the sexes and between the two forms of the
same sex being very striking.

In the second paper the iEgidic are monographed. Those
Crustacea lead a parasitic life, generally attaching themselves to tlio

♦ 'Coiuptcs Rcndus,' xc. (1880) p. 7i:5.

t ' Nftt. Tiddsk.,' xii. pp. 21'.) nw\ .'J2I. Sro ' Am. Nat.,' xiv. (18S0) p. 510,

3 F 2

788 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

roof of the moutli of fishes, and with their modified mouth-parts,
which form a sucking tube, living on the blood of their hosts. These
forms are described under the following generic and specific names,
those marked (*) being new: — ^ga tridens, Mrsuta* crenulata,
Wehhii, Stroemii, rosacea, serripes, psora, Deshayesiana, antillensis,*
magnifica, monoplitlialma, nodosa,* opJitlialmica, tenuipes* dentata,*
incisa,* ardica, ventrosa and spongiophila, Bocinela danmoniensis,
insularis,* Dumerilii, maculata,* americana,* orientalis,* australis,*
signata * and aries,* Alitropus typus and foveolatus* Full descriptions
are given of the male, virgin, ovigerous female, and the young. The
text is in Latin, and there are plates.

Ostracoda of Scotland.* — The Natural History Society of Glasgow
are publishing catalogues of the fauna of Scotland, with special
reference to Clydesdale and the western district, and amongst them is
one on the fresh and brackish-water species of Ostracoda by Mr. D.
Eobertson.

Forty-one species are given, of which three are new (Cypris
gramdata, Candona euplectella, and C. nitens).

Those which may be considered to belong exclusively to brackish
water, but never by choice to be purely marine, are Cypris salina,
Cypridopsis aculeata, Cytheridea torosa, and its variety teres. Cypris
incongruens and Cypridopsis obesa are frequently found in brackish
water, but as frequently in purely fresh water.

Many other species are occasionally met with in water more or
less brackish, as in ponds a little above high-water mark, subject to
the spray of the sea during high tides and storms, but chiefly in fresh
water quite beyond the reach of marine influences. Eeference is
Hiade to a group of small ponds lying mostly within a few yards of
each other along the south-west shore of the island of Cumbrse, only
a little above high-water mark. These appear to be subject to an
equal amount of sea-spray, and to be exposed to similar conditions,
yet their microscopic fauna are found, when compared, to differ
widely. A list of the Ostracoda found in ten of these sub-brackish
patches of water shows the great number of reputed fresh-water
species associated with those which constantly affect brackish water,
and also the diversity in the numbers and grouping of species existing
between one pond and another. This mixtui-e of fresh and brackish-
water species is all the more remarkable, as none of these ponds
communicate with the others, nor with any fresh-water stream.

The author indicates (1) where the Ostracoda are principally to
be found, (2) what season of the year is most favourable, (3) by what
means secured, and (4) how to preserve them. We can only give a
very condensed statement of the author's views on these points, and
the original paper should be referred to.

The places where to he found are lakes, tarns, ponds, lagoons,
canals, ditches, and often in very small patches of water, and in
slow-running streams; but in the latter by no means commonly,

* Appended to part 1 of ' Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow,' iv. (1880) (separate
title-page and paging).

mVEKTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 789

except in weedy recesses protected from the currents, or where clumps
of thickly growing plants abound. They are more abundant in the
smaller ponds overgrown with weeds than in deep and large sheets of
water. Even in damp mud, and in the scanty water of furrows in old
pasture land, good gatherings are met with. Where the pools are
small and subject to be dried up during summer, they seldom contain
many species, although in such cases one species may prevail greatly.
Limestone districts are favourable to Ostracoda, but all rock or clay
surfaces are better than peat. Where there is nothing but pure peat,
or peaty ponds fringed with Sphagnum, few or no Ostracoda may be
expected. They are seldom searched for successfully where the lakes
or pools have risen much by heavy rainfalls, nor in mill-dams, where
the water is drained off rapidly, leaving broad, bare margins. It is
otherwise where the water in the pools is decreasing gradually by
evaporation. Then the animals appear to have time to follow the
water, and may be taken abundantly when thus brought closer together
in the small shallow pools left here and there. Moorland roadside
ditches are more promising than those at some distance from the
road. This may arise from a supply of material from the drainage of
the road, which may be requisite to build up the shells of these
minute crustaceans. They are seldom absent in ditches or marshes
which contain a little ochreous deposit with a metallic bluish scum on
the surface of the water ; they are more common in broad shallow
ditches than in those more narrow and deep, and are rarely met with
in springs or in ponds abounding with fish. Neither do they thrive
where Amphipods prevail. They are not always fastidious in their
choice of habitat, sometimes disporting in pure fresh water, at other
times revelling in water of very questionable character ; while others
affect brackish water, although they live in very different degrees of
the saline element.

The best time for collecting is of course the summer, during sun-
shine. Heat is conducive to theii" increase and development. In a hot-
house tank at 65^ F., Cypris incongruens abounded, but in water from
the same source at a lower temperature there were comparatively few.
Dr. G. S. Brady found them in mill cooling ponds at 100^ F. They
may be found, however, under the ice in winter.

The preferabL- mode of collection is a net 6 inches (rather than
10 inches) in diameter and 24 inches deep — the mesh one hundred
threads to the inch. This smaller size of net has the great advantage
of admitting conveniently a brass wire sieve with a hoop about an
inch deep to fit into the ring of the muslin net, preventing weeds
and other coarse material from getting into the bag, but sufficiently
open to allow all the Microzoa to pass through. A sieve with a
^-inch mesh is very suitable. Tins protecting sieve requires to bo lilted
together into the mouth of the muslin net, so as not to fall out when
working, but sufficiently easy to be taken off when the contents of the
bag are turned out. For security, it is better to have the sieve slung
to the neck of the handle by a short cord.

To work the net, sinqily sweep it through the vegetation along
the margin of the pond ; this done, remove the sieve, invert the bag.

790 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and convey the contents into a wide-moutlied bottle, &c., which will,
in most cases, indicate .whether there is anything worth further trial,
though it often happens that repeated trials afford good results in the
same jilace where they had failed to be seen by the first inspection.
The Ostracoda generally withdraw within their shells and become
motionless when alarmed, and are difficult to be seen in this state
among the debris of the gathering ; but where they do exist, more or
less of them come to the surface, and are readily detected in an open
vessel, but equally as well and more easily by examining the contents
of the net when the water is well pressed out. To have the full
benefit of the gathering, it is necessary to take some of the mud,
which in most cases can be readily procured by scraping the sides or
bottom of the pool with the ring of the net.

The mode of preservation is shortly dealt with, as Ostracoda
require no sjjecial appliances for preservation so far as the shell is
concerned, further than allowing them to dry ; but when the animals
are wished to be preserved, alcohol, with the addition of a little
glycerine, is preferable.

Blind Crustacean.* — M. A. Milne-Edwards has a note on a
blind species of the genus Nephrojms which was found at a depth of
1500 metres in the Gulf of Florida. The eyes, which are situated
just above the internal antennfe, form small tubercles without cornesB ;
so far the species [N. Agassizii) resembles the N. Stewarti described
by Wood-Mason, but it differs from it in the greater development of
the rostrum which is armed with two pairs of lateral spines, by the
number of tubercles on its carapace, and by the form of the first five
abdominal rings. From the extremity of the rostrum to the end of
the tail the new species measures • 055 metre ; the integument is
completely colourless.

Vermes.

Annelids of the Norwegian North Sea Expedition.! — Fifty-five
sj)ecies are enumerated by G. A. Hansen from the collections ob-
tained by this expedition, among which there are 4 new species of
Polynoe (P, assimilis, sjnnulosa, foraminifera, and glaberrima), a new
Phyllodoce (P. arctica), a new Brada (B. granulosa), and three new
TropJioniai (arctica, horealis, rugosa), in all 9 new forms out of the 55.
Spinther arcticus is figured, apparently for the first time. Polynoe
glaberrima bears much resemblance to Lcenilla glabra Ingr., but the
palps are quite smooth, the tentacular cirrhi are shorter than the
palps ; instead of two bristles at the base of the tentacles, a single
spine occurs. The new species of Phyllodoce bears most resemblance
to P. mucosa, differing from it chiefly in the number of the papillae
on its prostomium.

New Genus of the Archiannelides.;!: — Under the name of Pro-
todrilus Leuclmrti, Dr. Hatschek describes an interesting new form
which he found near Messina. As it is more simple even than Pohj-

* ' Ann. Sci. Nat.,' ix. (1S80), Art. 2.

t ' Nyt Mag. Naturvid.,' xxv. (1880) p. 224 (5 plates).

i ' Claus's Arbeiten,' iii. (1880) p. 79.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY^ ETC. 791

gordius it is almost certain that it is the very lowest of all known
Annelides ; the points in which it is lower affect chiefly the organiza-
tion of the nervous system, the characters of the ventral ciliary groove,
the blood- vascular system, and the relations of the midgut.

These little worms (" Wurmchen ") are of yellowish- white colour,
and the sexually mature individuals are about 4 mm. in length ; they
creep about like Nemertines, and locomotion is principally effected by
cilia, while the direction they take appears to be influenced by the
longitudinal muscles of the body. Their general appearance is very
much that of Polygordius, the elongated body exhibits no external
segmentation, the ventral surface is rather flattened, and along the
trunk there is a deep ciliated groove. The cephalic portion, which is
somewhat thicker, has two flattened contractile tentacles at its anterior
end ; the hinder end is narrower and notched. Segmentation is ex-
pressed by the five boundary lines in the ectoderm, by the ciliation, as
well as by the dissepiments and the segmental organs.

The cephalic region is distinguished by the possession of a very
large post-oral region, similar to that observed in Polygordius and
Saccocirrus. The number of trunk-segments increases during the
maturation of the generative products ; 22-31 segments were counted.
The last segments of all are always very small, and but imperfectly
differentiated in their histological details.

As in the allied forms, the epidermis, the nervous system, and the
sensory organs stand in closer relations to one another than they do
in the more diflerentiated forms ; the epidermis is largely composed
of cubical cells, and a definite cuticle can hardly be made out ; between
these cells there are club-like mucous cells, opening to the exterior by
a fine orifice ; the cilia form, for the greater part, circlets, and of these
we find a double one in front of and a single one behind the mouth ;
while on the post-oral cephalic region there are foiu' circlets. On the
trunk-segments there is anteriorly and posteriorly another circlet, but
the cilia are delicate and sparsely distributed. The sensory hairs are
especially numerous on the tentacles, the anterior end, and on the
posterior segments, and there is also a better developed one on the
two terminal processes.

The nervous system is difficult to make out in the living object,
the ganglionic nature of the frontal ganglion being indistinguishable,
and the presence of the organ merely indicated as a thickening of
the integument ; the sensory organs are represented by two transverse,
elongated, ciliated slits, placed on the dorsal surface of the anterior por-
tion of the head. There arc no pigmented eyes. Transverse sections
of specimens, suitably hardened and prepared, reveal a number of other
facts. The apparently sensory bodies connected with the frontal
plate are seen to consist -of a number of cells ranged round a central
point ; the inner part of the frontal ganglion is formed of a largish
mass of nerve-fibre; the neiglibouriug epithelium is considerably
thickened, but the cells are really all arranged in a single layer. Just
in front of the mouth the fibruus cord bifurcates to become connected
with the lateral i)arts of the ventral surface; in the post-oral cephalic
region they approximate towards one another. lu the first trunk-

792 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

segment they approacli the middle line, and the broad ciliated surface
of the cephalic region is converted into a narrow but deep ciliated
groove. It was not found possible to detect any peripheral nerves.
The muscular system is arranged very much as in Polygordius.

The enteric canal extends to the hinder end of the body, but no
rectal division could be made out in it. Just behind the mouth
there opens into the oesophagus a muscular organ of a complicated
form, and terminating blindly in a chitinous vesicle very similar to
the same organ in Polygordius ; it has a function which still remains
to be discovered.

In the first trunk-segment there is a broad dorsal vessel, which in
the posterior region of the head is enlarged into a contractile bulb ;
this consists of a simple membrane formed of flat, doubly-granular
cells. By rhythmical contractions the bulb drives the colourless
blood into a narrow, thin-wallcd vessel, which reaches as far as the
frontal ganglion, and there opens into a transverse branch, which is
continued on either side into a tentacular vessel. From the cavity
into which these open, the blood is carried away by another thin-
walled vessel. A transverse venous plexus is formed behind the
frontal ganglion, and from thence two ventral veins pass into an un-
paired one. The bulb already mentioned and the arteries of the
tentacles are the only parts that are contractile. The dorsal vessel
appears to be filled from lacunae in the enteric walls, and its lumen
appears to be a continuation of the cavity within the entero-fibrous
layer.

The segmental organs are found in all the fully developed seg-
ments, placed in the lateral line, without the peritoneum. They com-
mence by a narrow infundibulum, armed with a long flagellum ; the wall
of the succeeding portion is filled with granules and provided with
delicate cilia ; the external orifice is in the lateral line, and pierces
the ectoderm.

Protodrilus, like some species of Polygordius, is hermaphrodite ;
the ovaries, which consist of very small cells, are found in the seven
most anterior trunk-segments ; behind these the testes are developed.
In some species of Polygordius the ovaries as well as the testes are
developed in the more posterior segments ; this would seem to indi-
cate that primitively all the segments were hermaphrodite.

The author concludes by remarking on the extreme simplicity
which may be exhibited within the limits of the Annelid type.

Enchytrseus cavicola.* — This is a new species of a blind worm,
described by Dr. G. Joseph, and discovered in a grotto. The greyish-
white body has a transjiarent integument ; the ccelom is always in
communication with the exterior by means of a porus cepliaUcus, which
is placed between the cephalic and oral lobes ; the dorsal vessel has a
definite wall only in the anterior third of the body ; the blood was
reddish in colour. The oesophageal ganglionic swelling is reniform in
shape, and gives an indication of a commissure by a shallow grove.
The orifices of the oviducts are transverse clefts, placed between the

* ' Zool. Aijzeig.,' ill. (IS80) p. 358.

INVERTEBEATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, mCROSCOPY, ETC. 793

12-14tla rings ; tlie testes are stalked, and the seminal glands have an
" amorphous form " ; by these two points the new species is distin-
guished from Pachydrilus, while, by the presence of red blood, it is
remarkable among other species of Enchytrceus.

Batrachobdella Latasti,* — M. Viguier has now published in full
his account of the organization of this form (see this Journal, ii, p.
885). The author is of opinion that in it, and doubtless also in
Clepsine and its allies, the tactile and gustatory sense-organs are to be
found in the proboscis, which has a very rich plexus of nerves. There
are only two eyes, and these are i)laced close to one another ; they are
irregularly quadrangular in form.

The author has some doubt whether the single si^ecimen of Glossi-
pJionia alfjira, which Moquin-Tandon was able to examine, and on
which he founded the species, was not really a large Batracliohdella.
Bearing in mind that the specimens he himself was enabled to examine
were not fully mature, and that the two sj^ecies have the same habits
and inhabit both the same region, he concludes by throwing out the
suggestion that M. Taudon's form was really a Batrachohdella, and
that the new specific name of Latasti may have to yield to the prior
appellation of algira.

The Chsetognatha.'f — Oscar Hertwig publishes a monograph of
rather more than one hundred pages (and five plates) on these very
instructive " worms."

The author commences by directing attention to the deep signifi-
cance which must be given to the two modes by which various
animals develop their coelom or body-cavity ; in the greater^number
of animals this coelom is formed by a cleavage of the mesoblast,
and to this Professor Huxley has applied the name of schizoccele ;
others, such as the Echinodermata, Brachiopoda, and Amphioxus,
together with the Chfetognatha, develop theii- ccjelom from outgrowths
of the endoblast, and to this form Huxley has given the name of
enterocoele.

It is now ten years since Kowalevsky placed these differences on
the firm ground of observation, but, important as these diiferences
are, they have hitherto been hardly regarded with sufficient atten-
tion ; to what results they may lead us will be best illustrated by
stating at once the general conclusions to wliich Dr. 0. Hertwig has
been led.

Relations of the Chcetof/natha to the Codenterata. — The Actinia) by

(1) the development of diverticula from the primitive cntcron, and

(2) the physiological and histological characters of these parts,
exhibit many striking relations to the Chfctognatha. It is at a very
early stage in devcloi)mcnt that the arclienterou of Smjitta bec<jmes
divided into three cavities, or, in other words, jn-ovidcd with two
lateral diverticula ; a septum of an Actinian and an endoblastic fold
of a Sagitta arc comparable structures, inasmuch as both have for

* ♦ Arch. Zool. cxp. ct Rcn.,' viii. (1880) p. .373.
t 'Jen. Zcibchr.,' xiv. (1880) p. 11)0.

794 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

their primary purpose an increase of the internal surface of the
enteron. The differences lie in the degree to which the folds or
septa are developed. In the Actinias there are a number of them,
and they are arranged radially around the enteric axis ; in the
Chsetognatha there are only two, and these two are arranged in a
bilaterally symmetrical fashion, while, instead of continuing to pro-
ject into the enteron by their free edges, they become shut off from
it and converted into two closed sacs.

Passing to the question of their functions, we find both in the
Actiniae and in the Chaatognatha that the generative organs and the
musculature of the body are developed from the endoblast ; the
development of the nervous system has, moreover, probably, though
not certainly, exactly the same history in both these groups.

Striking as these resemblances are, they are not sufficient to justify
us in affirming any closer relation of these two divisions than is
as yet allowed ; all that we see is that there is in the develoj)ment of
organisms certain fundamental laws which are obeyed by different
animals ; and the work on which Hertwig is here engaged is the
study of the laws of the formation of organs and of tissues.

The ChcBtognatJia and the other Worins. — The Chaetognatha seem,
as other naturalists have already noted, to be most nearly allied to
the Nematoids and Annelids ; with the former the most important
resemblances lie in the fact that in many of them (Gordiacea) the
enteric canal is attached to the dermo-muscular tube by a dorsal and
ventral mesentery : together with other points, we have to note that
in other Nematoids the muscles form plates which are set perpen-
dicularly to the surface of the body, and are made up of parallel
fibrils. The relations of Sagitta to the Annelids is still more
remarkable ; if we make a transverse section through a Sagitta and
compare it with a somewhat old larval stage of Polygordius, we find
that in both cases the enteron is invested in a fibrous enteric layer,
and is attached by mesenteries, which completely divide the coelom
into a right and left half. In both cases there are four bands of
longitudinal muscular fibres, the cells of which are derived from the
ccelomatic surface. Points of resemblance to Spadella cephaloptera
are to be observed in the development of transverse muscular fibres
on the inner side of the ventral muscular bands and in the minute
structure of the fibres. The two transverse septa of the Chaetognatha
are comparable to the numerous transverse septa in Annelids, while,
lastly, in both groups the generative products are derived from cells
of the parietal layer of the mesoderm.

Are these resemblances analogical or homological ? To answer
this question we must first answer these others. Has the mesoblast
been formed by the development of folds or by the differentiation of
cells ? Is the coelom an enterocoele or a schizocoele ? These are the
questions which the author is anxious to bring to the fore, and, until
they are answered, we cannot speak confidently as to either the
systematic position of the Cbfetognatha, or as to that of other phyla
and divisions.

We must deal briefly with the details of the anatomy and histology

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 705

of the Cliastoguatha, on which Dr. Hertwig's general conclusions are
based.

The more or less cylindrically shaped body of the Chfetognatha
is distinguished from that of all other Vermes by the possession of
lateral fin-like appendages, and by the special armature of its head.
The lateral fins vary in number and character in diiferent species, but
the unpaired caudal fin is always constant ; this latter has a general
resemblance to that of fishes, but diifers from it in being horizontal
and not vertical. The special armature which gives the name to the
group may be regarded as consisting of (1) spines or (2) prehensile
hooks ; the former are small, straight, and conical, and are arranged
in 2-4 rows around the mouth. The latter, of which there are only
from 8-10, are very much longer, sickle-shaped, and with a sharp
point. Connected with these organs is the special and characteristic
apparatus to which Krohn gave the name of cephalic cap. This con-
sists of two thin folds of integument, which arise on. the dorsal side of
the head, and thence pass on to the ventral surface. The ca3lom
varies in capacity according to the size of the species, but is always
divided by two thin transverse folds into three parts or segments,
which may be respectively denominated the head, trunk, and tail
segments.

The enteric canal takes a straight course through the body ; the
mouth is a longitudinal cleft about half as long as the head ; in the tail
segment the enteron is represented by a caudal septum which divides
the cavity into a right and left portion. There are no kidneys, heart,
or blood-vessels ; each individual is provided with two ovaries and
two testes ; the former occupy nearly the whole of the trunk-segment,
while the latter are developed in the walls of the cavity of the caudal
region ; one segment is, therefore, male, and another female.

Of the external structures we can only notice the fins and the
glandular cells. The fins are reported to be made up of a gelatinous
supporting substance, of homogeneous filaments, and of an epidermal
investment. The first of these is completely structureless and devoid
of cells ; its flat surface is covered by the homogeneous filaments,
which are closely applied to one another and end in a fine point ;
in transverse section they are semicircular, and may be seen to bo
made uj) of a fii*m structureless substance, in which no distinct cells
can be made out in the adult. The cindermis is formed by a single
layer of thin flattened cells.

The glandular cells were only observed in one species, Spadella
cephaloplcra. Lamellar in form, and from three to five in number,
they are arranged in rosette shape around a central point, so that
they seem to be organs of attachment. They give a " warty " appear-
ance to the ventral surface, on which alone they are developed ; thuy
are most common near the tail, and become rarer and smaller ns we
approach the head. The constituent cells are cither cubical or
cylindrical in form.

The sensor 1/ organs are cither tactile, optic, or olfactory, but in all
cases tlioy retain their relations to the ectoderm. The first of thcso
form small elevations, provided with still tactile setno ; they may be

796 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

arranged indefinitely, or, as in a small Sagitta observed by Langerhans,
tbey may be arranged by sixes in forty rings. The eyes are found on
tbe upper surface of the head, and form two blackish spots of so
small a size as to be indistinguishable to the naked eye. When mag-
nified, the eyes are seen to be formed by sj^heres, made uji of small
cells, which are enclosed by the usual transparent epidermis, and are
sharply separated off from that layer ; the part exposed to the light
is coloured by a blackish pigment and contains a transparent lens ;
these last two structures are surrounded by a circlet of numerous,
highly refractive rods ; the form of these rods is highly characteristic.
The end which is approximated to the pigment and lens is thin and
cut short along a transverse axis ; the rods then thicken somewhat,
but suddenly diminish in width towards their tip. Still further and
closer examination leads to the conclusion that the eye of the Chfeto-
gnatha is not a simple but a complex structure, aifording many points
of resemblance to the same organ in the Crustacea ; there are three
lenses, and it is clear that the eye is made up by the fusion of three
simple ocelli. The " optic epithelium " consists of a rod and a layer
of granules, which are sharply distinguished from one another. The
organ is comj)letely enclosed in the epidermis, and is invested on its
outer face by a thin layer of flattened ejiidermic cells.

The olfactory organ does not seem to have been hitherto correctly
apprehended ; it is placed near the eye, on the upper surface of the
head, and behind the supra-oesophageal ganglion ; it is unpaired, and is
of a simple character. There is a delicate epithelial band, made up
of fine cylindrical cells lying on the trausjiarent cells of the epidermis,
and forming a slight projection. In the middle of the band there are
two or three rows of cells which are provided with very long delicate
cilia. The epithelial bands vary in form in various species ; they
are supplied by two well-developed nerves, which arise from the
posterior surface of the supra oesophageal ganglion, and pass to the
olfactory organ along a line parallel to that of the optic nerves.

The nervous system of these creatures is of especial interest, inas-
much as the chief ganglia and the nerves from them are imbedded in
the epidermis, while some of the smaller cejDhalic ganglia, with their
nerves, belong to the mesoderm ; we have, therefore, in the nervous
system of the Chsetognatha to distinguish an ectodermal and a meso-
dermal portion. The former consists of two central organs, the
supra-oesophageal and the ventral ganglia, together with their nerves ;
the mesodermal portion is imbedded in the head. The supra-
cesophageal or cephalic ganglion is imbedded in the epidermis, and
forms a slight outwardly-projecting protuberance; in form it is
regularly hexagonal, and it is separated on its lower surface by a
supporting lamella from the subjacent musculature. It is made up
of a mass of delicate fibres and of small ganglion-cells; from
the former there are given off four stronger and six more delicate
nerves ; two of the former are the anterior motor nerves, and the
other two are the commissures by which these are connected with
the ventral ganglionic mass. The six more delicate nerves are all
sensory. The ventral is larger in size than the cephalic ganglion,

INVEETEBBATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICEOSCOPY, ETC. 797

and is placed at about the centre of the trunk-segment ; owing to its
projection outwards, it has by some authors been spoken of as the
" ventral saddle." Here again there is a fibrous medullary and a
cortical cellular subtsance. In addition to the commissures already
noticed, there are given off from it ten to twelve delicate nerves on
either side, and two well-developed trunks from its posterior aspect.
These various trunks are not distinctly separated from one another,
but unite largely so as to form a considerable nerve plexus.

There appear to be considerable difficulties in the way of the
examination of the mesodermal portion of the nervous system. Ee-
turning to the two motor nerves, which are given off from the supra-
cesophageal ganglion, we find tliat they, after passing some way
forwards, make a dip into the mesoderm ; here they are enlarged into
a ganglion, which may be known as the lateral cephalic ganglion.
This body is semilunar in shape, and consists largely of dotted
substance and slightly of superficial cells. Several uerves are given
off from it, which pass to the muscles of the head. There are also on
either side two very small mesodermal ganglia, which are like those
developed on the cephalic nerves. One of these is called the buccal
ganglion. Certain difficulties still remain to be overcome as to the
innervation of the musculature of the trunk ; it seems that either the
numerous well-develoiied nerves which are given off from the meso-
dermal cephalic ganglia supply these parts, or that the superficial
tegumentary plexus already noticed sends fibrils to the muscles. The
author inclines to the former view, and points out that, if it be correct,
the function of the ectodermal nerve-plexus would be to convey
stimuli to the ventral ganglion, whence, by the commissm-es, they
would be carried to the supra-oesophageal ganglion, and thence con-
veyed by the two motor nerves to the musculature. If this view shall
be shown to be right, it will clearly follow that, in the Chaitognatha,
the sensory and motor nervous systems are distinct fx'om one another,
and that the former would be ectodermal, while the latter would be,
with the musculature, mesodermal in origin.

There are some important points in the characters of the mus-
cular system. As is well knowu, the muscles of these creatures arc
transversely striated ; it is now further pointed out that the muscular
lamclla3 are set in such a way that the delicate intersjiaces between
them only open towards the coelom. Of the questions which we
ask ourselves when wo examine into the characters of this system
one of the most important is that which has refcrcucc to the relations
of the muscular elements of the Cha;tognatha to those of other animals.
It seems impossible to institute any comparison between tlicm and
either the Vcrtebrata oi- the Arthropoda, for the muscular fibrils
are not arranged in bundles, but in lamella) ; there is, however, a
very considerable x-cseniblance to what obtains in the Ccolenterata,
and the study of this resemblance seems to lead to the conclusion that
in tlie Cha;tognatha the muscle-fibrils were, primitively, spread out in
a tliin lamella, and that, by tlie growtli of tliis, fddiugs were formed
which led to the leaf-like arrangement which obtains, in some parts,
later on ; further considerations lead to the important conclusion that

798 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

myoblasts arc to be looked for in tlie epithelium of the coelom (body -
cavity).

Poor as is the " cephalic cap " in muscles, it has a structure of
considerable interest, for it contains the nerve-trunks which connect
the ventral with the cephalic ganglion, as well as the eyes and the
optic nerves. In Spadella cephaloptera there was also to be observed
on either side a short tentacular process, which terminates in a knob-
like enlargement.

After a short account of the enteric tract and the mesenteries, the
author passes to a consideration of the Generative Organs. In animals
which are sexually mature the hinder portion of the two cavities of
the trunk-segment may be seen to be almost completely filled with the
two ovaries ; these are more or less cylindrical bodies, which are only
attached by a thin and short mesentery ; they consist of a rather narrow
oviduct, and of a true ovary. The contents of the former vary in
individuals, and in some cases the author was able to detect in them
spermatozoa in active movement. There is some difficulty in under-
standing how the matured products escape to the exterior ; Hertwig is
of opinion that it is the hinder portion only of the oviducts which
serves for the extrusion of the eggs, while the large caecal portion
functions as a kind of receptaculum seminis.

The male organs form, so far as the matrix of the spermatozoa is
concerned, a projection into the most anterior portion of the caudal
segment ; from this there are set free masses of unripe spermatozoa,
which may be seen to be executing a regularly circulatory movement.
The efferent ducts lie in the hinder portion of the caudal segment,
and the short canal has at its anterior end an infundibular ciliated
orifice. The spermatozoa are collected into a seminal vesicle, more
or less elongated and oval, but varying in form in the various species.

The following table exhibits the system of the group : —

Ch^tognatha. — Body consisting of three segments, separated by
septa, and provided with horizontal fins. The head with prehensile
hooks, spines, and a " cap," with two eyes, and an unpaired olfactory
organ ; coelom spacious. The enteron has two mesenteries, and ojieus
in front of the anenterous caudal segment. Four longitudinal muscular
bands. Nervous system consists of the ventral, the supra-oesophageal,
and the lateral cephalic ganglia. Trunk-segment with two ovaries ;
caudal segment with two testes.

I. Sagitta.

Unpaired caudal, two pairs of lateral fins.
(a) Species from 3-7 cm. long.

1. S. hexaptera; 2. ;S. lyra ; 3. S. magna; 4. S. tricuspidata ;
5. S. bipunctata ; 6. S. serratodentata; 7. S. mariana ; 8. S. pontica ;
9. S. diptera ; 10. S. iriptera.

II. Spadella.
Unpaired caudal fin ; one pair lateral fins.
1. S. cepTialoptera ; 2. S. draco ; 3. S. hamata.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 799

The fourth chapter of this very valuable essay deals with the
development of the Chastognatha, for the study of which S. hipunctata
and S. serratodentata are reported to be very suitable objects. Here
we can only very briefly note one or two points. (I) There is formed
a typical gastrula. (2) Before this stage is lost, part of the endoblast
gives rise to the fii-st elements of the generative organs, and another
part to the rudiments of the enteric canal and of the body-cavity.
(3) The two large cells in the endoblast of the gastrula give rise to
the male and female generative organs. For the further consideration
of these and other points our space compels us to refer to the figures
and descriptions given in the original.

Disease produced by Anchylostoma duodenalis.* — The develop-
ment of this parasite has been followed by Professor Perroncito up to
the stage at which it enters the body of man, and is of especial im-
portance with regard to the epidemic caused by it among the work-
men at the St. Gothard tunnel. Three parasites occur in the
intestine, all producing the same symptoms, and causing the disease
known as Oligcemia perniciosa ; they are Anchylostoma (Dochnius)
duodenalis, Anguillula intestinalis and stercoralis, and may occur in the
different subjects either separately or mixed.

Larval development of Ancliylostoma duodenalis outside the human
body. — The eggs are oval, thin shelled, transparent, measuring • 052
by • 032 mm. At twelve to fourteen hoiu's from the commencement of
incubation, traces of larvae are visible in a very few ; in one to two days
most show larvas in various stages, and after some days they issue. In
eggs kept at between 28^ and 33° C. the exit is seen to be made by two
or three blows which occur within a minute of each other ; the head
emerges generally a little to the side of one of the poles ; the first
effort is the most vigorous, for it springs out, moving the body
laterally with great force ; the movements continue for a short time,
and then a period of quiescence and expansion ensues ; the length at
birth is ■ 2 mm. and maximum diameter • Oli mm. ; the body is
slightly attenuated in front of the pharynx, and ends posteriorly in
an awl-like thin tail ; the head is trilobate, and a rectangular tube
•014 mm. long represents the mouth; the pharynx has an anterior
dilatation, and a little behind tliis, another, the pharyngeal bulb,
carrying chitinous teeth; the whole tube is strongly muscular and
leads into an intestine with a zigzag cavity, ending at a slightly
prominent anus. The rudiment of the genital apparatus is seen as an
oval mass near the middle of the body, on the anal side, between the
intestine and the dermal muscular layer. After the first day the
larva is • 25 mm. long, and continues to increase at the rate of • 05 mm.
per diem, as long as the. temperature docs not exceed 21*^ to 25^ C. ;
the maximum length is "55 mm., the breadth -02- -02-1 mm. After
eight hours of life, the intestine assumes a straight position. After
some days, serpentine movements occur at temperatures even of l-i^
to 10'' C. After the maximum size is attained, the pharynx under-
goes modifications, and is finally altogether renewed. Moauwhilo,

• ' Atli Acciul. Lincei (TmiiBUuti),* iv. (1880) p. 179.

800 RECOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the skin excretes a transparent chitinous substance, forming a capsule
which encloses the whole animal, allowing of its free movement
within. Now the mouth develops the rudiments of its hooks and
styles ; the intestine becomes less granular and more transparent ;
between two of the middle segments appear the papillae which occur
on the sides of the perfect worm. The space left in the capsule round
the worm gradually diminishes, and, chiefly at the end, calcareous
corpuscles are excreted, of round, rectangular, &c., shape, forming a
protective crust. The acid of the gastric juice dissolves the coat and
leaves the larva free ; but death occurs if it does not reach a human
body ; in the encapsuled state it resists desiccation and the action of
indifferent fluids for twenty-fom* hours, and lives well in clear or
muddy water ; a single drop of water may contain 100 larvae.

Larval Development of Anguillula intestinalis. — The eggs are
oval, with more pointed poles than in Ancliylostoma ; they measure
• 05-* 06 mm. by • 03-" 036 mm. Development progresses well at the
temperature 25° to 26'' C. ; bii*th takes place in from fourteen to
twenty hours ; the embryos are more clearly visible, and move more
vigorously within the shell, than in Anclujlostoma. A short quiescent
stage ensues on birth, followed by active movements ; the length of
the larva is -2- -24 mm., the diameter -012 mm.; it is slightly
attenuated in front and has a very sharp tail. The head is trilobate,
the mouth rectangular, with a pharynx and pharyngeal bulb ; the
intestine is cellular and zigzag ; a genital rudiment exists in the same
position as in Anchylostoma. The larvae need a liquid medium more,
and die if the mass becomes somewhat dry, showing a fatty breaking-
down of the tissues, but live in distilled or common water and in 5 to 7
per cent, solutions of common salt or sulphate of soda. In a liquid or
semi-liquid medium the larva doubles its length in twenty-four hours,
becoming -016 mm. thick; the head is round, the body cavity is
surroimded by the dermo-muscular layer, which secretes a most
delicate chitinous capsule for the body.

Anguillula stercoralis Bavay, development of larva outside human
body. — The larvae are developed in the maternal uterus and are ex-
pelled with the faeces at diiferent stages; they are then free and
active, measuring •2-- 26 mm. by • 014-- 016 mm.; the anterior end
of the body is larger, the mouth shorter, the pharynx shorter and
broader, the intestine longer and wider than in the same stage of
Anchylostoma. The genital rudiment is very characteristic, being
shuttle-shaped and • 025 mm. by • 003 mm. in size. Encapsulation
generally takes place in a day. Experiments with different tem-
peratures proved that the larvae always exhibited movements within
five seconds at a temperature of 50° C.

Facts show that these worms were alone sufficient to cause the
disease of aneemia observed at the St. Gothard tunnel ; the disease
probably resulted from the unfavourable conditions under which so
many poor workmen were engaged together.

Anguillula intestinalis should be removed from that genus, and is
better named Slrongylus papillosus, the reasons for which change of
name are reserved.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA; MICROSCOPY, ETC. 801

Organization and Development of the Gordii.* — M. A. Villot
insists upon the fact, tliat the first larval form of the Gordius differs
greatly from that of the Nematoid worms. In these latter, even
including tlie aberrant genera (Mermis and SphcBruIaria) the embryo
and the larva are represented by the tyjies of the Anguillulje (RJiab-
diiis). Now it would need a great effort of imagination to refer the
larva of Gordius to this type. The order Gordiacei, as established
by Von Siebold, cannot, therefore, be retained by zoologists, who
nowadays attach the greatest importance to the characters furnished
by embryogeny and morphogeny.

The second larval form difiers from the first as much as the latter
differs from the sexual form. It is characterized essentially by the
loss of the styles, the shedding of the booklets, and the disappearance
of the annulations.

Each of the two larval periods includes two very distinct phases,
that of parasitism and that of aquatic existence ; but these two phases
do not in each case occur in the same order. In its first larval form
the young Gordius passes from aquatic life to the state of a parasite ;
in its second larval form it quits its post to return to the water. The
two phases of parasitism, although immediately succeeding one
another, differ essentially. So long as the first phase lasts, the young
\vorm, enclosed in its cyst, remains motionless, and does not appear
to take any nourishment or to grow at all. During the second, on
the contrary, it is free, lives at the exj)enso of its host, and becomes
very rapidly dcveloiied.

It lias been sujiposcd hitherto that the passage from the first
larval form to the second is connected with a migration, a change of
host. The observers who saw larvse of Gordius encyst tliemselvcs in
larvaj of Ei^hemeridfe supposed that the Dyticidfe swallowed these
encysted larvae with their prey, and that the young Gordii developed
themselves in the visceral cavity of their new host. For this
hypothesis, which is still classical, the author substituted another
which appeared of more general ajiplication. He said that the
Gordii parasitic upon fishes proceed from larva; previously encysted in
various species of Tipulida?, the larvae of which likewise lived in the
water; and he founded Ins argument upon the consideration that
fishes arc in general very fond of those insects. Both hypotheses
arc contradicted by the well-ascertained fact that the two larval forms
of the Gordii live indifferently in the various aquatic hosts indicated.
He therefore now regards it as very probable that the two phases of
the parasitism of the Gordii are accomplished in one and the same host.

Observation also proves that the larva) of the Gordii do not select
their host. They encyst themselves and become developed in the
most different animals (Batracliians, fishes. Crustaceans, Arachnids,
insects, and molluscs). It is therefore by no means the case, whatever
may have been said, that the larva) of the Gordii are parasites j^cctdiar
to insects. As regards fishes, these are perhaps the animals which
harbour these larvro most frequently and in the greatest number.

♦ 'ComptcH Rcndus,' xci. (1880) p. 15G9. See 'Ann. and Mng. Nnt. Hist.,'
vi. (lS80)p. 1G9.

VOL. III. 3 G

802 KEOOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

It is none tlie less evident that the normal hosts of the Gordii are
all animals exclusively or temporarily aquatic. Water is, in fact, the
normal medium of the Gordii. It is in the water that they become
adult, and that they reproduce ; it is in the water that their larvae
live at first on their escape from the egg ; and it is also in the water
that their migration must be effected.

The parasitism of the larvae of the Gordii in terrestrial animals
has an essentially abnormal and exceptional character ; and in order
to explain it we must have recourse to very peculiar conditions. In
plains these are realized by the periodical inundations and systematic
irrigations, — in mountainous and hilly countries the escaping torrents
carry away everything in their course, the insects perish, and the
worms which they contain are set at liberty.

The frequency of the larvae of Gordii in insects, which is cited as
an objection to the author's views, is more apparent than real. It
must be remembered that the insects are represented by a great
number of species, and are sought after by most naturalists.

Excretory System of the Trematoda and Cestoda.* — M. Frai-
pont, in a preliminary notice as to the results at which he has arrived,
says that

(1) The excretory apparatus arise from small, and not numerous,
infundibula, which communicate with the spaces between the organs
by an orifice placed in their lateral wall. The greater part of every
infundibulum is formed by a single cell armed with a vibratile
flagellum.

(2) In the intervening spaces he finds a system of very delicate
canalicula, which are arranged in a radial fashion.

(3) The infundibula are arranged almost symmetrically on either
side of the middle line, and each gives rise to a small canal, several of
which converge, anastomose, and then open into a system of large
vessels, placed at six definite points in the body, and symmetrically
disposed two by two. There may, consequently, be said to be three
pairs of segmental organs, and it is of interest to remember that in
the larval IJirudinea there are three pairs of segmental organs in the
posterior region.

(4) The system of large canals form two lateral trunks, which
rapidly bifurcate ; of the branches thus formed, one passes towards the
middle line to anastomose with its fellow of the opposite side. The
other passes along the whole of the lateral edge of tlie body, and
after giving oif diverticula which increase in complexity with the
age of the individual, terminate blindly. The trunks themselves
open into a terminal reservoir, which is filled with highly refractive
corpuscles, and opens to the exterior in the middle line and at the
hinder end of the body.

The preceding being an account of what is found in such Trema-
toda as Polystomum integerrimum, Octohotlirium lanceolatiim, and Diplo-
zoon paradoxum, we have next to inquire what obtains in the Cestoda.
" In Caryopkyllceus mutabilis there is the following arrangement : —

* ' Bull. Acad. Roy. Belgique,' xlix. (1880) p. 397.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC 803

(1) There are small ciliated infundibula, identical with those just
described,

(2) The canaliculus from each infuudibulum has a more or less
tortuous direction. They are arranged in groups, and anastomose
with one another.

(3) They give rise to a superficial plexus, whence two largo
trunks pass from behind forwards, on either side ; and these four
are connected anteriorly with ten largo longitudinal trunks.

(4) Those last anastomose largely in the head, and during their
course communicate with one another by transverse branches ; they
open by ten orifices into a reservoir at the hinder end of the body.

The ciliated infundibula have also been detected in the cysticerci
of Tcenia serrata, in the adult T. serrata, and in T. cucumerina,

Tlie author refrains for the present from entering into any general
speculations, and contents himself with pointing out the bearings
which the facts he details have on the affinity between the Platyhel-
minthes, on the one hand, and the Rhyncoccela and Hirudinea on the
other. These worms may, he thinks, bo divided into the Coelomati
and the Acoelomati ; for the latter (the Trematoda and Cestoda) have
the coelom, in which the hajmolymph circulates, in a rudimentary
condition.

Development of the Liver Fluke.* — M. Baillet shows that
segmentation may begin, and even be completed, while tlic egg is
unlaid, or the process may take place in the bile-ducts or gall-bladder
of the host. Further, the withdrawal of the eggs from the body
of the latter does not kill them, as is the case with the Nematode,
Sclerosiomum. Media seem, in fact, to be of little importance in this
matter, for presence or absence of light, immersion in common water,
in water containing organic matter in solution, in damp earth, alike
seem to influence neither the quickness nor perfection of the develop-
ment.

Anatomy of the Nemertinea.f — Herr Dewolctzky has come to
the following conclusions, as he states in a preliminary account: —

(1) The tegunieiitary epithelium contains other than the two
forms of cells already recognized ; there arc fihimentous supporting
cells, gland cells, both miicou.s and granular, as well as the terminal
cells of nerves, and cells which secrete pigments, or concretions of
definite f(u-m.

(2) The ccsophftgcal epithelium is devoid of mucous cells ; tlio
supporting cells are shorter and more massive ; while the granular
cells are not deeply inlaid, and only communicate with the exterior
by fine efferent ducts.

(3) In the sensory epithelium tliere appear to be no glands at
all ; while

(4) In tlie epithelium whieh lines the canal of tlie lateral organ
the glands are confined to two points.

♦ • Mc'in. Acad. Sci. Inscrip. ct ncllcs-Lettrcs,' Toulouse, 1879. Sec * Riv.
Bci. Nat.,' ii. (18H0) p. 114.

t ' Zool. Anzeip.,' ill. (1880) p. ."iTi").

;i o 2

804 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

After reminding the reader that the so-called lateral organ has, by
the latest researches, been seen to be composed of a number of
ganglionic cells and of a fibrous cord, together with a ganglion in-
vested in a membrane of connective tissue, and that there lies in it a
blindly ending ciliated canal, the author states that, as to this last, it
forms in the first third of its course a wide cylindrical vestibule, which
suddenly narrows. At the two points where the lumen of the canal
is constricted, there are to be found the orifices of a number of long,
fine efferent ducts, which pass ofi" from the unicelhilar glands, and are
massed together on the surface of the ganglion. The cilia which line
the canal work towards the blind end. The structure of the narrower
portion of the canal is somewhat remarkable ; there is a layer of
longish, compressed, rod-shaped corpuscles, set almost completely at
right angles to the lumen ; these rods ajjpear to be the bases of the
projecting cilia. The special investment of the canal would appear
to be a specific sensory epithelium, modified from the ordinary tegu-
mentary layer, while the gland cells have been pushed inwards
(downwards) by the ganglionic masses of the lateral organ, and further,
have become localized to two distinct points, where, clearly enough,
they take on the function of defending the sensory epithelium.

As to the proper sensory organ, the function of which is not
known, the author suggests that, as in so many other aquatic and
marine forms, we have to do with a rudimentary organ which has
some function in relation to the character of the water. He is re-
minded by what he has seen in the Nemertinea of the organ of
Lacaze-Duthiers in the fresh- water Pulmonata, and he is supported
in his view by the fact that just as one organ is absent in the terres-
trial Pulmonata, so is the other in the terrestrial Nemertinea.

The enteric epithelium consists of glandular and of elongated
absorptive cells ; the latter contain a number of highly refractive
spheres, which appear to be of an albuminous nature, and are appa-
rently drops of digesting food. Between the circular muscular layer
and the epithelium there is, in all the Nemertinea, a more or less well-
developed layer of connective tissue, which is distinguished by the
author as the subtegumentary connective tissue ; it has been described
as a " basilar membrane," but it is provided with distinct corpuscles,
and is not structureless. In all Anopla the nervous system seems to
lie between this tissue and the circular musculature ; in the more
differentiated Enopla it lies beneath the circular muscles.

The excretory system of Tetrastemma is described as possessing
two long primary trunks, which, anteriorly, pass into an elaborate
coil of loops lying behind the cerebral ganglia ; among others, there
pass off from this coil an efferent duct, which opens to the exterior,
just behind the brain.

Dr. Hubrecht publishes a note * stating that he finds only in the
Hoplonemertini a periphei'al nervous system, where it has the form of
regular dichotomously branching trunks arising from the lateral nerve-
trunks ; in Carinella, which Dr. Hubrecht looks upon as being the
most primitively organized genus of the Palteonemertini, there is,
* ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 400.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 805

externally to the supporting lamella, a layer of nerve-fibres which
forms a plexiform envelopment for the whole body. In its histological
characters, this layer appears to be similar to the ectodermal nerve-
fibre-layer, found by the Hertwigs in the Actinias.

In all the Schizonemertini, as well as in Polia and Valencinia, the
layer has the same histological structure as in Carinella, but it differs
in position, for it lies between the circular and the outer longitudinal
muscular layer. This leads to the view that it is possible that this
layer is a greatly developed ectodermal musculature. In the Hoplo-
nemertini this sijecial nervous layer seems to have disappeared.

Intestinal Worms in the Horse.* — H. Krabbe has published an
interesting account of the occurrence of intestinal worms in the horse.

As the horse is sj)read over the greater part of the inhabited
world, and under conditions of life very varied, it might be supposed
that, like man and the dog, it would not be equally affected with
these parasites, nor with the same species. To determine with some
degree of accuracy the Eutozoa which in Denmark are found in the
intestinal canal of the horse, M. Krabbe examined, during the last
four years, the bodies of 100 horses which were brought for anatomical
purposes to the Veterinary College of Coi^enhagen, between the
months of September and April in each session.

In these horses he found Tcenia perfoUata, 28 times ; T, mamillana,
8 times; Ascaris megalocephala, 16 times; Strongylus armatus, 86
times ; S. tetracantJius, 78 times (in 67 horses out of 86) ; and Oxyuris
curvula, twice. Of T. perfoUata the number found was mostly less
that 25 ; sometimes it was over, and twice between 100 and 200 were
found, while once no less than 400 were met with. In general they
were lodged in the caecum. T. mamillana of Mehlis, a Sjjecies over-
looked by Dujardin and most French writers on the subject, was
described and figured by Gurlt in 1831 ; generally less than 25, but
sometimes up to 72, were met with, mostly in the anterior part of the
small intestine [T. plicata R. was never met with). The Ascaria
never occurred in larger numbers than 11. S. armatus was never met
with in the small intestine ; in the caecum it was common ; much less
so in the first portion of the colon, where very fine specimens of a
dark bluish red colour were found ; generally the number met with
was below 25, but once nearly 200 were found. Of 1409 samples,
1029 were females and 380 males. S. tetracanthus was found in the
caecum and throughout the colon, and Oxyuris curvula also in the colon.

The literature of this subject would appear to be very scanty,
and the author ho2)es tliat the attention of veterinary surgeons in
other parts of tbe world may bo attracted to it. Ample oppor-
tunities of following it up exist in British India, America, and the
Cape of Good Hope district.

Parasites of Helminthes.t — M. Moniez directs attention to a
somewhat curious fact. The EchinorhyncJii have generally been

• 'Overs. K. Dansk. VicJinsk. Stlsk. Forlj.,' 1880, p. 33, aud 'FriicIi Rc'auniV
1». 9. Sc(! ' Niituro," xxii. (lf<8()) j). 217.

t ' Hull. Sfi. Dt'p. Nur.l,' iii. (IHSll) p. liOL

806 EECOED OF CUEKENT EESEARCHES RELATING TO

regarded as not being infested by psorosperms, but he has been able to
detect them in examples of E. proteus. They were figured by 0. F.
Miiller in his 'Zoologia danica,' but were taken by him for the
first two stages in the development of the young Echinorhynchus.

In the same note he states that in Tcenia expansa he has seen a
large number of corpuscles very closely allied to the organism which
produces pebrine. Once, also, he detected them in T. denticulata, but
the specimen in question was associated with an example of the former
species, which was full of these organisms.

Bodies found on Meat.* — On the refuse of certain meat from the
abattoir at Nancy, M. Poincare has found bodies, which were in no
way encysted, among the muscular fibres, to which, however, they
were so intimately attached as to seem at first sight as if they occu-
pied a zone in the cavity of the sarcolemma ; they were found to be
independent of it, and, indeed, no examination is, in most cases, neces-
sary to demonstrate this, as the bodies become isolated spontaneously.
The body is cylindrical, with two conical extremities, with a distinct
cuticle, and presenting a number of lines which circumscribe the
large cells ; within, there is a granular mass, but no distinct signs of
internal organization were to be made out. The bodies were, on the
average, 0 • 05 mm. wide, and 0 • 28 mm. long ; the size varied a good
deal. Notwithstanding the absence of any distinct organization, they
appear to be independent organisms, and it is suggested that they are
examples of some one phase in the metamorphoses of tsenioid forms.
For the moment, the author contents himself with directing attention
to their presence.

Floscularia ornata.f — Mr. T. B. Eosseter, when watching this
floscule, saw enter its mouth a large brown mass which was too
large to pass from the funnel into the vestibule ; the latter began to
swell, the contractile rim gradually opened, the whole of the setae on
the lobes were turned inwards and thrust down the trochal disk on to
the brown jelly-like mass, piercing it like so many needles, thrusting
it from the vestibule through the contractile rim into the mouth,
which instantly became distended, and the prey passed down into the
stomach; the lobes were drawn upwards, and again resumed their
feather-like appearance.

Prothelminthus, a new low Vermian Form.| — The species
described by M. Jourdain under this new generic name was, like
Intoshia leptoplance of Giard, found on the Planarian Leptoplana
tremellaris ; it was found, however, on the surface of the body, instead
of in the gastric caeca, but is, notwithstanding, probably the same
species. It lives alone in a cavity in the integuments of the worm,
similarly to IntosMa linei, as discovered by Giard.

There are two kinds of individuals. Both have a vermiform
shape, are roimded at both ends, and divided into more or less distinct
segments, and are entirely covered by cilia, of which the terminal

* 'Comptes Rendus,' xci. (1880) p. 177.

t ' Sci.-Gossip,' 1880, p. 182.

X ' Rev. Sci. Nat.,' ii. (1880) p. 68 (1 plate).

INVERTEBRATA, ORTPTOOAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 807

ones are the larger and more rigid. A digestive cavity appears to
extend throughout the body ; at one end, surrounded by hairs, is a
dilatable opening, which is lined by crystalline rods, as in Chilodon.
No other organs have been found. The only movements detected
were those of rotation round the long axis of the body, caused only by
the external cilia, and of a bending and displacement of segments,
probably due to contractile mesodermic tissue.

Of the two kinds noticed, the larger are the females, which vary
from 'IS-* 15 mm. in length, with a breadth of '03 mm.; they
are dark green, and the surface appears to be finely punctate. There
are nine or ten quite distinct segments, followed by a terminal part
in which the segments are very indistinctly marked, but which per-
haps represents five more, thus agreeing in the main with the species
figured with some hesitation as Intoshia leptoplance by Keferstein.
The smaller individuals are less numerous, and measure • 1 by "02 mm.
They are hardly at all pigmented except at the posterior extremity ;
they are probably the males, but no male elements have been found
in them. The segaaents ajjpear to be about twelve or thirteen. Some
individuals show a strong median constriction, and some are found
in a kind of cyst. If the pi-esence of a digestive canal with two
openings should be established, the species will have to be excluded
from the Orthonedida. The name given to it (subject to its not being
proved to be identical with I. leptoplance) is P. Hessei.

New Synthetic Type.* — At a meeting of the Zoological Section
of the Eussian Association of Naturalists, A. Kowalevsky gave an
account of Coeloplana Metschnikoivii, a new form which lives on
Zostera in the Eed Sea, and which constitutes a type intermediate
between the Coelentcrates and the Planarian worms.

In its outer form it resembles a Planarian ; it is grey above, white
below, and about three lines in length by two in breadth. Like all
Planariaus, it crawls on the whole ventral surface, in the middle of
which is a slit-like oi)ening communicating with a four-lobed stomach
which resembles most nearly the " funnel " of the Ctenophora ; from
it originate a large number of canals which radiate to the perij)hery
of the auimal and open into a ring canal which bears many csecal
appendages. On the dorsal surface, almost directly over the mouth,
is a vesicle containing a number of vibratilc otolitlis. On either side
of this otocyst is a sheatli from which can be protruded a long retrac-
tile tentacle. Each tentacle is branched and corresjionds in shape to
those of Cydippe and Eschscholtzia, only they have no central canal,
but are composed of muscles. The nervous system and genitalia were
not observed. The whole surface of the body is covered with vibratile
cilia.

Echinodermata.

Development of the Echinodermata.f — Dr. Goethe states that,
when lately looking through some preparations of Bipinnaria made
by Herr Meyer at Naples, he observed a mode of development of the

* 'Zool. Anztip.,' iii. (18S0) p. 140 ; see 'Am. Natural.,' xiv. (1880) p. 531.
t Ibid., Hi. (1880) p. 324.

808 IIECOUP OF CUUKENT KKSEAROIIES RELATING TO

vaso-poritononl system which Joes uot soom to have been liithoito
noticed. Botwooii an apical civcal sac auil t.ho ivsophagus ho saw i)u
either side au outgrowth, which was partly soparatocl by a constriction
from tho rest of the entorou. lu other preparatitnis ho saw these
processes separated from tho enteron, with tlio stone-caual inunedi-
ntely between them. Tho dmible sac thus formed became, later on,
very uuecpially developed on the two sides. This observatit)n is in-
teresting as allying the Asterida on tho one hand with tho Echinoidea
and Ilolothuroida, and on tho other with tho Crinoida. In referenco
to this hist group the author takes the opportunity of stating that ho
WHS wri>ng in following Johannes Miiller in suj)posing that tho tirst
oritico which appears between tho tirst and second ciliated band is
completely obliterated, and ho has now been convinced by tho
demonstrations of Metschuikoft' that tho tirst baud docs uot bccomo
complete until the orifice comes to lie within its area.

Echinoderms of the Norwegian North Sea Expedition.*— Messrs.
Danielssen and Koren continue their account of the llolothurians
belonging to Dr. Theel's group, tho Elpidida>, by very fully describing
a form assigned to a new genus (tho third now launvn), and to bo
called Kol'ja hiialiua. Their specimens do not exceed 50 nun. in length.
It is very distinctly bilateral, tho back being strongly convex ; its
anterior edge, above tho tentacles, forms a kind of collar, with six
conical-pointed papilliv*. Tho mouth looks in the same direction as
tho ventral side of the body. Of tho parts of tho skin, certain globular
nucleated glands with thick walls lying between tho cuticle and
coriiim are to bo sjiecially noticed ; they probably aro mucous in
character. Of tho three forms of spicula, one which is narrow, sinuous,
and doubly pointed, but smaller than in Irpa, is found veutrally ; the
largo forms aro also curved, and more or less spinous; tho former
measure -Oi-i by -002 mm. ; the latter, -357 by -008 mm. ; the third
kind, belonging to the oral disk, is either linear, angulated, and spined,
or rosette-shaped, or reticular. Of the internal skeleton tho calca-
reous rings are rather rudimentary : the five pieces which compose
them are very thin, and of almost uniform thickness throughout. Tho
oral disk carries ten tentacles ; the anus is dorsal ; the sexes aro
separate ; no anal appendages exist. Found off uotth of Norway, at
7r59'N. lat., 1200 fathoms.

A second new generic typo is described as -cloajj/Ao/roc^HS mtrahilis.
It is cylindrical, apodal, posteriorly rounded off'; tho sexes aro
distinct ; no anal res])iratory appendages ; skin provided with two
kinds of calcareous spicules, the one with alato rays and with long
inwardly directed teeth on the circumference, the other more than twice
as large, and with long tooth projecting outwards from the perijihery ;
there are twelve uon-retractilo tentacles ; the locality is 73^ 47' N. hit.,
11"-' 21' E. long. ; the depth, 7G7 fathoms.

Atd-tiwdcrma is a third new genus, represented by two species,
.■I. Jffn'i/)!!ii and otjiiie, found at depths less than 500 fathoms ; the
chief characters show the body to bo cylindrical, the anterior end

* • Nyt Mag. Nuturvid.,' x.w. (1870) p. 83, 3 (t>) I'latcs.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 809

truncate, the oral disk provided with fifteen oblong depressions, con-
taining the saino number of i)apilliform tentacles, and alternating
with fifteen tubular processes also on the disk ; the posterior eiid is
produced tail-wise, tlie cloacal opening surrounded by five papilhe ;
the skin carries perforated papilho provided with peculiar calcareous
bodies, consisting of five to six stellately arranged sjioon-like rods
from tlio centre of which project tlic anchors ; feet absent ; two anal
appendages. A. J<:Jfreij8ii was found chiefly in the most northern fiords
of Finmark ; the other species at IT 27' N. lat., 2iP 51' E. long.

The other species recorded by them are Myriotrodiua Rinlcii
Stcenstrup, M. hrevis Huxley, M. Itinldi Theel fwliich differs from
Steenstrup's species in having more tentacular cirrhi, &c.j, Oliyotrochus
vitreua Sars, Trochostoma boreale Sars, T. arcticum Marenzeller.

Synthetic Type of Ophiurid.* — Professor P. Martin Duncan
describes a very remarkable Opliiuran which forms part of a collec-
tion obtained by Dr. Wallich, during his voyage in II.M.S. ' Bulldog,'
in the year 18G0, off the coast of East Greenland. The Ophiuran was
presented by him to tliis Society.

The Opliiuran — PolDpliolis echinala — -j^^j- inch long, and tlie body
■j\j- inch in diameter, came up with the sounding apparatus from off tho
sea-floor at a depth of 228 fathoms, about 50 miles north and east of
Capo Valloe, East Greenland, and about 200 miles from Capo Fare-
well, date July 10, 18G0, lat. 60^ 42' N., long. W 42' W. The
"cup" came up full of fragments of granite and felspar, to which
were adherent small corallines. Some of them were very delicate,
and their perfect condition indicated an undisturbed state of the
bottom water where they occurred. There was a sudden decrease of
depth close to the spot, and the water shallowed 578 fathoms in
three miles.

Although a young form, this specimen presents tho normal
structures of an Ophiuran, and it is in no way deformed or abortive.
The extreme simplicity of tho oral apparatus is in itself remarkable ;
there are true teetli, but the spines on the side moutli-shields are tho
only mouth pa2)ilhc, and they are so called because it is the fashion,
erroneously, so to call all growtlis from the sides of tho jaw-angles
and side mouth-sliields. The use of the small spines on the side
mouth-shields is that of tentacle-scales, and they can have nothing to
do with alimentation. This remark holds good in tho majority of
instances where the spine arises from tho jaw, close to tho side
mouth-shield and tentacle opening.

There are no tootli-papilla), and the knob-liko projection witliin
the jaw plate beneatli the true teeth, so like that of some Amphiurans,
is not seen on all tlie angles. It comes doubtfully, however, within
tho description of mouth-papillro, and appears to be a true tootli.
The regularity of the pentagon surrounding tho oral apparatus is
very striking, and so is the extreme separation of the jaw-angUs,
much of wliieh, however, may be duo to ixid-morlem contraction. All
tho plates on tho upper surface of tho disk have separate, broad baaed,

* • Journ. Lina. tioc.' (Zoul.), xv. (lS8'J) i». 16.

810 EECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

two or three-tliorned, short spinules on their edges, and rarely else-
where, but the spinulation is not distinct between them. The radial
shields have the greatest number of spinules on them. All the spines
on the side arm-plates project at right angles to the arm, and the
hooks are glassy at their top. The combination of Amphiuran
characters and those of OpMotlirix is thus remarkable.

Haemoglobin in the Aquiferous System of an EcMnoderm.* —
M. Foettinger reports the important discovery of hsemoglobin in an
O^Yanxidi—OpMactis virens. In the elements discovered by Simroth
in the water-vascular system of this species, the writer was, with
living specimens, enabled to detect a bright red colouring matter.
Spectral analysis revealed the presence of the two bands character-
istic of the oxyhaemoglobin of the Vertebrata. The cells in which it
is contained were seen to be nucleated, but in addition to these there
were also found a number of free nuclei and small corpuscles, which
were also charged with haemoglobin. The author would seem to
agree with Simroth in recognizing the presence of a vascular system,
independent of the water-vascular, and charged with a nutrient func-
tion ; this contains a colourless liquid. On the other hand, the system
with the red corpuscles has a respiratory function.

Buccal Skeleton of the Asterida.f — In this note M. Viguier,
while replying to some criticisms of Dr. Hubert Ludwig,| reaffirms
the existence of two parts in the "support of the tooth." The fact
that there is no trace of any fusion is relied upon greatly by Ludwig,
but Viguier points out that in reality the difference between them
lies in the fact that what has been taken for the first ambulacral
piece is composed of two, which always become separated under the
action of potash. This is a statement of fact, which it will be
possible to verify or to disprove.

New Cretaceous Comatulae.§ — Mr. P. Herbert Carpenter describes
five new species of Antedon from British cretaceous deposits, two of
them in the possession of the Eev. P. B. Brodie, the rest in the collec-
tion of the British Museum. The species are : — Antedon perforata and
A. Lundgreni, from the upper chalk, Margate ; A. striata, from the
upper chalk, Dover ; A. laticirra, from the chalk of Wylye, Wiltshire ;
and A. incurva, from the upper greensand, Blackdown. The author
further gives a tabular key to the known English cretaceous species
of Antedon, and in conclusion refers to certain peculiarities in the
structure of these fossils, aj^parently subservient to the circulation of
water in their interior.

Coelenterata.

Structure and Origin of Coral Reefs and Islands.|| — Darwin's
theory may be said to rest on two facts — the one physiological, and

* 'Bull. Acad. Koy. Belgique,' xlix. (1880) p. 402.
t 'Arch. Zool. exp. et gen.,' viii. (1880) p. 1.
X See this Journal, ante, p. 446.
§ ' Quart. Joum. Geol. Soc.,' xxxvi. (1880).

II See 'Nature,' xxi. (1880) p. 351. Abstract of paper read at the Eoyal
Society of Edinburgh.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 811

the other physical — the former, that those species of corals whose
skeletons chiefly make up reefs cannot live in depths greater than
from 20 to 30 fathoms ; the latter, that the surface of the earth is
continually undergoing slow elevation or subsidence.

The corals commence by growing up from the shallow waters
surrounding an island, and form a fringing reef which is closely
attached to the shore. The island slowly sinks, but the corals con-
tinually grow upwards, and keep the upper surface of the reef at a
level with the waves of the ocean. When this has gone on for some
time a wide navigable water channel is formed between the reef and
the shores of the island, and we have a barrier reef. These processes
have but to be continued some stages fui-ther, when the island will
disappear beneath the ocean, and be replaced by an atoll with its
lagoon where the island once stood.

According to this simple and beautiful theory, the fringing reef
becomes a barrier reef, and the barrier reef an atoll by a continuous
process of development.

Professor Semper,* during his examination of the coral reefs in
the Pelew group experienced great difficulties in aj^plying Darwin's
theory. Similar difficulties presented themselves to the author of
this paper, Mr. John Murray, of the ' Challenger ' Expedition, in those
coral regions visited during the cruise of the ' Challenger.' The object
of the present paper is to show, first, that while it must be granted as
generally true that reef-forming species of coral do not live at a
depth greater than 30 or 40 fathoms, yet that there are other agencies
at work in the tropical oceanic regions by which submarine elevations
can be built up from very great dejiths so as to form a foundation for
coral reefs ; second, that while it must be granted that the surface of
the earth has undergone many oscillations in recent geological times,
yet that all the chief features of coral reefs and islands can be
accounted for without calling in the aid of great and general sub-
sidences.

The most recent charts of all coral reef regions have been
examined, and it is found possible to explain all the phenomena by
the principles advanced in the paper, while on the subsidence theory,
it is most difficult to explain the appearance and structures met with
in many grou2)s ; for instance, in the Fiji Islands, where fringing
reefs, barrier reefs, and atolls all occur in close proximity, and where
all the other evidence seems to point to elevation, or at least a long
period of rest. In instances like the Gambicr gi'oup the reefs
situated on the seaward side of tlic outer islands would grow nioro
vigorously than those towards the interior ; they would extend in the
direction of the shallower water, and ultimately would form a con-
tinuous barrier around the whole group. The distinguishing feature
of the views now advanced is that they do away witli the great
and general subsidences required by Darwin's theory, and are in
harmony with Dana's views of the great antiquity and permanence of
the great ocean basin, which all recent deep-sea researches appear to
support.

• ' Zuitsclir. wibs. Z<x^l.,' xiii. p. 50;5.

812 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The results of the paper may be summarized thus : —

(1) Foundations have been prepared for barrier reefs and atolls by
the disintegration of volcanic islands, and by the building up of sub-
marine volcanoes by the deposition on their summits of organic and
other sediments.

(2) The chief food of the corals consists of the abundant pelagic
life of the tropical regions, and the extensive solvent action of sea-
water is shown by the removal of the carbonate of lime shells of these
surface organisms from all the greater depths of the ocean.

(3) When coral plantations build up from submarine banks, they
assume an atoll form, owing to the more abundant supply of food to
the outer margins, and the removal of dead coral rock from the
interior portions by currents, and by the action of the carbonic acid
dissolved in sea-water.

(4) Barrier reefs have built out from the shore on a foundation of
volcanic debris, or on a talus of coral blocks, coral sediment, and
pelagic shells, and the lagoon channel is formed in the same way as a
lagoon.

(5) It is not necessary to call in subsidence to explain any of the
characteristic features of barrier reefs or atolls — all these features
would exist alike in areas of slow elevation, of rest, or of slow
subsidence.

(6) All the causes here appealed to for an explanation of the
structure of coral reefs are proximate, relatively well known, and con-
tinuous in their action.

New Mode of Reproductioii among the Hydroida,* — Dr. Goette
describes the structure and history of a new species of Hydroid-
polyp, which he discovered on a Campanularian during his recent
visit to Naples ; he calls it Hydrella ovipara, and describes it as
having a creeping stolon which bears here and there simple branches,
which are scarcely 1 mm. in length, and terminate in a hydranth. A
skeletal tube, irregularly annulated at its base, invests the body, but
does not form a proper hydrotheca. Remarkable stages were observed
in the characters of the stalk, which was in some cases completely
atrophied at its middle, so as to be reduced to a thin filament, and to
be comj^osed only of the ectoderm. It would appear that H. ovipara,
like some other Hydi'oids (e. g. Eudendrium), undergoes a degeneration
of some of its polyps at the period of sexual maturity ; the ova are
developed from endodermal cells, and within the stalk ; here the eggs
undergo their further development, instead of being conveyed into a
gonophore, while the remaining i)art of the neighbouring endoderra
undergoes atroj^hy. These observations are sufficient to demonstrate
that there is no polymorphism and no alternation of generation in this
species. With this we should note the fact that in many species of
Lafoeida no alternation has yet been detected, and it is possible that
there is none to be observed.

Forms a little more distant, e. g. CordylopJiora, exhibit an incom-
plete development of this alternation of generation, ova being deve-

* 'Zool. Anztig.,' iii. (1880) p. 352.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOftAMIAj MICROSCOPY, ETC. 813

loped in some of the sterile polyps ; in all others the alternation is
complete. Though the phcuomeuou is of course associated with poly-
raorjjhism, it is not to be regarded as sim^ily due to it ; the limitation
of sexual reproduction to some of the similar individuals of a stock,
and the limitation of the gonojAore to the mature polyps, is to be
regarded as a process anterior to the truly secondary phenomena of
polymorphism.

Orig^in of the Generative Cells in the Hydroida.* — Dr. Weiss-
man, in continuation of his researches t has discovered that the
male generative cells may arise in the coenosarc. Basing his result
on what he was able to observe in Plumtdaria echinidafa, we find
him saying that in the male, as well as in the female, gonaugia were
developed at points on the stalk thus ; a small group of ovarian or
seminal cells are, first of all, found in the endoderm, without any
indications whatever of any change in the perisarc or ectoderm.
Around this primitive reproductive organ there become developed a
special cap of cells of the ectoderm ; these cells become very remark-
ably and specially modified, are set at right angles to the supporting
membrane, and contain in the outer jjortion a fluid ; this, which is pro-
bably a secretion, causes an outswelling of the perisarc. In this last
a cleft gradually appears, which grows deeper and deeper ; through
this grow out the ectodermal and endodermal cells, covered by the
perisarc, and a gonangium is thus developed.

The further generalization that in CorchjlopTiora the ovarian cells
arise in the trunk and not in the stalks of the hydranths, is supported
by the observation that the groups of ovarian cells are to be found in
quite young hydrauth-buds, before any tentacles are develojied, and
while the stalk is still quite short. Of course this mode of forming
generative cells is not found in all Hydroids (e. g. Tubularia) ; so
that with regard to the mode of origin of their generative cells, Hydroida
may be ranged in two series ; in one the generative cells arise in the
ccenosarc, and the so-called generative individuals are of secondary
origin ; in the other the generative individuals are primary, and it is
only in them that the generative cells arc developed ; the former are
Coenogenous, the latter Ulastogenous Hydroids. Further speculation
as to the phylogcnetic bearing of these observations is deferred for the
present.

Porifera.

Occurrence of Foreign Spicules in Sponges.t — In two cases, Mr.
S. O. Ridley has sliown this interesting and, to tlic working zoologist,
important phenomenon to have occurred. A species of Ciocalypfa,
characterized by a fibre which is almost wholly composed of long,
singly pointed ("acuate "") sjncules, with a simple rounded head and
sharp i)oiut, and by the almt)st absolute bareness of the outer or dermal
membrane in the natural condition, was found to contain in tlic latter,
in addition to tlic terminal spicules of the fibre proper, certain long
smooth spicules of about tlie same jinqioi-tiojis, but with a slight oval

* ' Z(.<)1. Anzci;,'.,' iii. (1880) p. 'Mil. t ll>i<l., p. 220.

X ' Jonrn. Linn. Hm:' (Z.>o).), xv. (1880) p. Hit.

814 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

head at the rounded end ; these were apparently part and parcel of
the sponge, both on account of their perfect condition and their
frequent occurrence in bundles, as if in nature. They proved, how-
ever, to be derived from a species of Esperia, common in the same
waters, and possessed of a peculiarly fragile spicular dermis, the size
of whose spicules agreed closely with those now found, and which had
no doubt parted with them with great readiness by the fracture of its
brittle covering.

The second case was that of a species of Alehion, with spined
skeleton spicules ; besides other forms, among the bundles of short
skeleton spicules and in the superficial tissues, there occurred, singly
and in fasciculi, precisely the same spicula as those which intruded
into the Ciocalypta, and to almost as great an extent. In the former
case the close resemblance of the intruding to the skeleton spicules
offered great temptations for them to be assigned to the proper spicule
complement, whereas they were undoubtedly derived from the same
species of Esperia.

In conclusion, the writer points out the need of careful observation
of the position and circumstances in which all spicules occur in any
sponges examined, as cases like the present are apt to occur in which
neither the broken or partially absorbed condition of these foreign
bodies, nor their markedly alien type, are present to point to their
real nature and prevent their ranking with the regular structures, and
perhaps assigning the sponge to a wrong genus.

Protozoa.
Tentaculate, Suctorial, and Flagellate Infusoria.* — Prof. Ch.
Eobin first deals with Ophryodendron abietinum Claparede, Plate XVIII.
(Figs. 1, 2)."|' This species adheres to Sertularians, chiefly Sertularia
pumila ; it may be globular, ovoid, or discoid, is generally bilobate,
and has a long retractile tentacle (d), terminated by a bunch of mobile
cirrhi(e); its diameter is from -OG-'IS mm. It is strongly attached
by a short pedicle (a), which is often concealed by the application of
the whole lower surface of the body to the point of fixation. When
removed, the body may become globular. A groove (h) divides the

* ' Journ. Anat. Physiol.' (Robin) xv. (1879) pp. 529-83, plates xxxix. to xhii.

t Fig. 1. — Ophryodendi-on abietinum, separated by pressure from the Sertularia
to which it adhered, to show its point of adhesion, a, and the general form of the
body.

6, i-)artially effaced furrow which divides the body ; c, point where the tentacle
springs from the body ; d, transverse folds of the retracted tentacle ; e, terminal
bunch formed of the cirrhi of the extremity of the tentacle.

Fig. 2. — Ophryodendron after compression, the furrow having thereby dis-
appeared.

o, d, e, as Fig. 1 ; c, Ii, i, a lobed gemmiform body ; /, worm or larva of parasitic
worm ; j, k, the hook by which it adheres.

Fig. 3. — Acinetopsis rara Ch. R. a, pedicle ; 6, c, theca ; d, e, f, extensile and
retractile tentacle.

Fig. 4. — Acineta patula Ehr., the body of which is suspended as it were in its
shell, which resembles a pedicellated cup.

Fig. 5. — Aciyieta tuherosa Ehr., front view. /, the pedicle and its insertion at
the lower extremity of the body, e ; g, g, tubercles.

Fig. 6. — Side view of the same.

Fig. 7. — Trichodina Scorpenm Ch. R., side view, o, superior dorsal or con-
tractile portion of the body, often more or less contracted and flattened ; b, crown

JOTTRN.R MIlTR. S0C.V0L.3II. PL. .XiZEQ.

^^

ym

^'"]\^:'

f

Wcsf,N€«-.^<.« fcO°].(>i..

Fig. 1-2. Uphpyoclciulroi'i abieimum. 3. Aemetopsis rara
4. Aciyieta. patula. 5-6. A. tuberosa. 7- S.'Jri rkodiTui. Scoj?pe:
9. PoAopliryo LiyiicjLfii .

10 rr

joirRN". R.MiCR. soc.VDi..nr. Pi,.xrK:.

a 1

a

/ •'

//'

^ /■'

U

-.b

Fic^. 10-14. Podopln->a . 15 Conodoi5i<T|U hoU-yUt

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY^ ETC. 815

body superficially into two unequal halves, being seldom wanting. It
shows an extraordinary resistance to the action of reagents, even hydro-
chloric and nitric acids merely hardening and rendering it more
transparent ! Its substance is greyish and granular, more transparent
towards the surface, where it is limited by a tough, flexible, refriugent
layer, not separable from it, and from '001- "002 mm. in thickness.
The only organized contents consist of minute granules, which have
no resemblance to trichocysts. Buds (c, h) bearing superficial protu-
berances (j) are produced ; their tissues are directly continued from
those of the parent. Tlie tentacle is inserted in the groove or the
portion furthest from the pedicle if tliat is not present ; the cuticle
of the body is continued over it, being wrinkled (d) when it contracts,
and also forms a distinct band in the centre of the tentacle ; that part

of large cilia ; c, non-contractile discoid portion of the body with the pultiatilo
vesicle ; d, lower crown of tine locomotor cilia.

Fig. 8. — Lower concave face of the same, surronnded by the crown of loco-
motor cilia, d, and occupied by the indLUted wheel-like organ.

Fig. 9. — Podophnja Lynf/hi/ci Ehr., front view, a, the insertion of the pedicle,
ab ; c, transparent theca, the margin of which extends beyond the granular sub-
stance of the body — the latter shows a pulsatile vesicle and hyaline expansions.

Fig. 10. — J'odophrya witlj four gemmae, e, about one quarter developed.

Fig. 11. — Large J'odophrya with eight gemniffl, e, at the close of their develop-
ment, the extended filaments not having completely disappeared. The margin
of the internal concave face of tlie gemm® has also short mobile cilia. In each
gemma are one, two, or sometimes three pulsatile vesicles.

Fig. 12. — Phases of the passage of a gemma to the state of a fixed pedicellate
PodophrJ/a.

a, gemma becoming fixed, still provided with cilia, ?, and with a verrucoso
dorsal face.

b, tlie same, a quarter of an hour later, attached directly by its lower face and
not showing any cilia.

r, tlie same, twelve or fifteen minutes later, elevating its two extremities, and
the dorsal face emitting some pale and short filaments.

d, e, the same, at the end of two successive quarters of an hour.

/, the same, fifteen minutes later, having already assumed the general form of
the adult ami ^^till directly fixed to the Sertularia by the narrow portion, y, where
the pedicle is inserteii.

g, the same, about twenty minutes later, with longer and more numerous
filaments, some already pointed, A short pedicle, /t, is developed, and the
body resembles still more nearly the adult.

/i, the same, half an hriur later, difteiing from the adult only by the shortness
of the pedicle, /, and the few coloured granules of the body.

Fi(i. 13. — J'odophri/a witii the body, r, reduced to small (liraensions after the loss
of the gemma) and recommencing to throw out filaments, still short and blunt, c.

Fio. 14. — Poduj'hri/a, with a non-ciliated external gemma, /, and a bundle of
short filaments or blunted suckers, h. a, b, pedicle.

Fig. 15. — Variety of Codonosiya botrytis Stein ex Ehrenberg, with four rigid
cirrhi,/, instead of a collar.

a, enlargement of the base of the pedicle attached to stationary bodies in the
water; '», thickening of the summit of the jieilicle which bears the bddy of each
animal ; e, individual with the rigi<l cirrhi united by a mt nibrane forming a
collar ; /, the four stitV cirrhi inserted round the njiper portion of the animal so as
to resemble hyaline opercula; i, thin circular membrane in the form of a slightly
raised cuj) inserted on the hyaline operculum round the ba.se of the llagellum,
alternately contracting and dilating ; j, the tlageiliun, four to six times as long as
the body, and as large at its termination, which is blunt, as at its iusortiou in
tho miiidh^ of the hyaline oiKTCiilar summit.

[In tho lettering of the I'lates for "Lyngbei" rend " Lyngbyei," and for
" Conodosiga" read " Codonosiga."]

810 RECORD or CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

of the bocly-siibstancc wticli extends into the tentacle here loses its
granular character, and is simply hyaline. The tentacle is of equal
length as far as the tuft of cirrhi ; it is flattened. The colourless
cirrhi have the form of pine-needles, are • 03 mm. long, and occur to
the number of thirty or more; in the extended state of the tentacle
they are inserted along one-fifth of its length ; in contraction they are
reduced to a mere tuft. They are firmly attached, and, like the rest
of the organism, resist the action of ordinary reagents. Contraction
and elongation take place in the tentacle at intervals of two minutes ;
the cirrhi move rapidly at the same time, either by bending or other-
wise, but not after the manner of either cilia or flagella. No use was
observed to be made of these movements for prehension of food, which
M. Eobin has never noticed taken into the body.

The affinity of the animal is with Acinetopsis rara. The cirrhi
can hardly act as suckers, as Claparede supposes, for they are flattened
and more mobile than the suckers of the Acinetines, and terminate
neither in a point nor a swelling as in those forms.

Worm parasitic on Ophryodendron (Fig. 2). A vermiform body (/)
sometimes occurs, rooted to the body of the animal, which has been
supposed by Claparede to be a species or stage fif the same animal,
and in which he wrongly figures trichocysts ; Wright took it to be
either a bud or one of the Gregarinida. It is, however, M. Eobin
considers, a larva of some worm ; its tissues differ in character from
those of Opliryodendron ; it is separable from it without rujiture, and
is fixed by a special attaching organ ; it wants the nucleus and vacuole
of the Gregarina3. The basal organ of attachment [j, k) consists of a
slender chitinous rod embedded in the worm, with five or six short
hooks which penetrate beneath the cuticle of its host near the
tentacle. The body is greyish and finely granular, and is transjjarent
at the anterior end, which has a sucker -like enlargement ; the prox-
imal end bears an oblique disk-like surface ; dilute hydrochloric
acid causes its substance to shrink and expose a homogeneous cuticle
to view. It moves slowly round on its peduncle, and resembles in
some points the filarian larvae of many Nematode worms.

Acinetopsis rara sp. n. (Fig. 3), discovered by M. Eobin at Con-
carneau, is also a tentaculate Infusorium. It occurs attached to
Sertularians, is from '07- '09 mm. long, and two-thirds as broad,
and lives in a wine-glass-shaped theca (b, c), which rests on a very
slender peduncle (a), 1 mm. long. The body is uniformly granular,
greyish, with a small contractile vesicle ; upper surface flat, an alter-
nately extended contractile tentacle (d, e) proceeding from its centre.
The tentacle, which measures 1 mm. or more in length by * 004- • 005
mm. in thickness, is of uniform thickness throughout, and colourless,
homogeneous, and transparent ; by contraction it is reduced to a length
of 'OS-- 08 mm., with a breadth of '01 mm., becomes marked by
transverse striae, and is now seen to consist of a central filament,
surrounded by a spirally plicated membrane (/). In extension, it is
capable of movement in all directions. The shell or theca is continuous
with the substance of the i)eduncle, and is delicate, colourless, flexible,
and has a free circular edge, beyond which the body is never pro-

INVEETEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 817

truded, though it may sink below it, and may become detached from
the thcca at various points. The contractile vesicle is only momen-
tarily seen.

This form differs from the Acinetinse in possessing a tentacle
which is never retracted into the body wholly or in part, as is the
case with the suckers in that group, but which agrees, with the
exception of the absence of cirrhi, with that of Ojphryodendron. Both
forms must be kept distinct from that family.

Acinefa tiiberosa Ehrb. (Figs. 5 and 6, e,f) offers a good example
of the great affinity of its order with the Infusoria and disagreement
with the Rhizoi)oda, the characters of the gemmje giving grounds for
the one, and the distinctness from the rest of the body and the special
character of the suckers for the latter inference. The variations in
its colour are due to the presence of pale yellow, green, or orange
granules. Frequent contractions of the sarcode remove these granules
from different points which are thus left transparent; the narrow
portion, however, between the two tubercles (g, g) is almost constantly
thus transparent; it contains the one or two contractile vacuoles;
but the central part of the body is generally the most granular, and
is marked off from the lateral portions by two longitudinal ridges on
each side of the shell ; these ridges are absent in A. patula (Fig. 4),
hence the difference in the grouping of the suckers in the two species,
the body not being divided into separate areas. A species found in
stale sea-water had the lower end of the shell rounded; the upper
angles presented, instead of two tubercles, simply two perforations
of the shell.

Trichodina Scorpence sp. n. (Figs. 7 and 8) does not exceed half
the size of T. i^ediculus auctt. ; it occurs on the branchiae of fish of
the genera Scorpena and Trigla. It is disk-shaped, the ventral side
concave, a narrower dome-like mass (a) rising above the disk (<■) ;
the only cilia present consist of a ring of stout ones (b) projectin«
upwards from the upper edge of the disk, and one of fine ones {d) in
a corresponding position on the lower side, the latter marking the
margin of the denticulated plate described as " organ of fixation " by
Clai)aredc and Lachmann. This organ consists of a narrow circle,
into the centre of which project numerous straight teeth, whilu the
circumference is lined by curved ones (Fig. 8). The body and this
organ especially undergo great changes after death, which occurs soon
after that of the host.

Gemmation of Podophrya Lynghyei Ehrb. (Plates XVIII. and
XIX., Figs. 9-14). Tlie body substance of this species, wrongly
referred to P. gemmipnra by Hcrtwig, is not separable to the
sliglitest extent from the shell or theca, though this is readily
distinguishable from it by its contours, its folds, and its resistance
to agents which destroy the former. The nucleus is elongated and
curved, often bi- or tri-furcatc. In encysted individuiils the sub-
stance of the body is withdrawn slightly from contact with the cyst.
The peduncle (a, h) has a very delicate wall, and is homogeneous,
rarely manifesting a longitudinal striation.

The external buds commence as a liyalinc cup of sarcode on the

VOL. III. \\ H

818 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

upper surface of the body (c), in a vacant space surrounded by tlio
suckers ; after a few minutes this sends out a number of conical
elevations (e) regulai'ly arranged in a circle ; they are transparent,
and after a few hours become detached and swim freely. From two
to eight may thus be produced ; they are finely granular, become
elongated, and on their concave internal face apjicars a series of short
cilia ; it is in about half an hour from this time that they are liberated,
and may either crawl or swim by the aid of these cilia. The suckers
of the parent are sometimes wholly retracted during the process, and
are subsequently rein-oduced from the dense, shrunken body (Fig. 13,
c, e). These buds are of truly external origin, the only peculiar
condition noticed inside the parent body at this time being the
prolongation of its nucleus into as many filaments as there are buds,
as in the case of the internal gemmte. The dorsal surface of the bud
is convex ; there are two contractile vacuoles, one appearing at the
middle of the process of gemmation; the nucleus is about "012 mm.
long, and pale-coloured. The bud ceases crawling (Fig. 12, a), and
after resting, fixed by its cilia (i), for a short time, it loses these, and
becomes attached by its entire ventral face (b) ; the two lateral mar-
gins then become slightly drawn out, and short processes (c) appear
on the upper surface; the ventral surface becomes contracted (^d, e,f)
until it forms a peduncle (j), the upper surface, which now bears
transparent, but soft, rays, becoming regularly circular ; a delicate
hyaline i)ellicle then appears on the circumference of the body. The
peduncle proper appears last, without any ajjparent origin from the
substance of the body, as a narrow hyaline disk at its base ; it then
becomes a short non-nucleated capsule with distinct walls (g, h, k, I),
ultimately elongating to assume its final shape.

Another form of bud (Fig. 14, I) is observed, but less commonly,
■ at the same period. When first seen, it formed a cylindrical process
in the calyx, was finely granular, contained one or two contractile
vacuoles, and bore a few short rays (h) ; it then elongated itself,
having a basal strand of substance connecting it with the adult,
whose cuji-like form it takes ; it moves with ease on its pedicle in
this position, but though readily detached, its future history was not
traced.

Variety of Codonosiga botrytls Stein ex Ehrb. (Fig. 15). This
form often has a branched pedicle, the secondary pedicles starting
from the top of the primary one ; each carries an individual, and
their number never exceeds four, and, like the top of the chief one,
they are thicker than the stem. The hyaline, finely granular body
substance contains some special refracting granules, •001- '002 mm.
broad. To a small elevation at the anterior end are attached
four short, stiff cirrhi (/), half the length of the body, in some
cases united by a delicate membrane so as to form a collar (e). In
some individuals the base of the flagellum (j) is surrounded by a short
cup-shaped process (i) which may be either homogeneous or longitu-
dinally striated and is alternately protruded and retracted ; it has not
been observed before. The flagellum ends bluntly. There is no
shell, the body and pedicle dissolving rapidly in ammonia.

INVERTEBRATA, CRTPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 819

The variety has probably been already figured by Fromentel and
Jobard-Muteau as Pijcnohnjon, and described by Bory de Saint Vincent
as Autojjhi/sa. These Flagellata are clearly distinct from the Vorti-
oellina. The cirrhi are homologous with the collar, for the two organs
replace each other.

Radiolaria in "Diaspro."* — Prof. Dante Pantanelli announces
the discovery of Eadiolaria in the Italian " diaspro " from various
places, and of difierent ages ; two from the lias, and one probably
cretaceous, but the greater number were from the upper eocene.
Professor de Stefani, in speaking of this diaspro and manganito at a
previous meeting of the Pisa Society, attributed their formation to
deposits in deep seas ; but this idea was combated, and in couseciuence
Professor Pantanelli undertook the examination, with the above results.
The importance of this is much increased by the fact that the diaspro
of Murio and Crevole are intercalated with the serpentine, and it
may be hoped that much light will thus be definitely thrown on a
question which is occujjying nmch attention in Italy, and has also
been taken up by some of our leading English geologists — the forma-
tion of the Italian serpentines. Professor Pantanelli thinks we may
now definitely accept the hypothesis of Stoppani, that the serpentines
are volcanic rocks, for the most part erupted in deep seas. Thus the
same conclusion is arrived at from quite difierent standpoints. He
also thinks it may facilitate an explanation of the mode of formation
of manganese deposits, as they occur in connection with the diaspro
rich in fossils, and hints that it would make us doubt the possibility
of their being formed by an endogenous action, or from deposits of
mineral water.

Professor de Stefani called attention to the use the Microscope may
now be to anthropologists, in showing from what locality implements
made of this rock were derived.

Mr. A. W. Waters believes he is in a position to refer to the
Eocene " diaspro " the rock mentioned by Professor Bonney,f in
which attention was called to its containing fossils which Professor
Bonney was himself inclined to refer to Eadiolaria and Bryozoa.
Professor Pantanelli lias in the press an article describing a large
number of the Eadiolaria observed.

BOTANY.

A. GENERAL, including Embryology and Histology
of the Phanerogamia.

Development of the Embryo-sac.:}:— Dr. A. Fischer publishes the
results of a largo scries of observations on tho development of the
embryo-sac, especially in monocotyledons and in diulypctalous dicoty-
ledons. Tlie following are the more important of the conclusions at
which ho has arrived.

» ' Boll. U. Com. Gcol. d'ltal.,' 1880, Nod. 1, 2. Sco ' Geol. Mag ,' vii. (1880)
p. 317.

t '(ieol. Mng.,' vi. (1870) p. 3(;0.

t ' Jonaisohi' Zoitsolir. f. Naturwis^a.,' .\iv. (1880) p. 90.

8 H 2

8'20 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The three nuclei in the chalazal end of the embryo-sac around
which the antipodals are subsequently formed, are termed by Fischer
the antipodal nuclei; the fourth nucleus is called the loicer polar
nucleus; the two sister nuclei in the upper end of the embryo-sac
which are taken up into the synergidse, are denominated synerg-
nuclei ; the two others, the germinal nucleus and the lower polar
nucleus, according as they subsequently form the embryo or unite
with the lower polar nucleus ; the product of this union may be called
the central nucleus of the embryo-sac.

In monocotyledons a very great uniformity was observed in the
development of the groups of cells in the end of the embryo-sac, and in
the origin of the central nucleus. The cells of the germinal apparatus
are always formed in threes, and never multiply. Two synergidse are
always produced, the nuclei of which stand to one another as sister-
cells, in the same relation as the germinal nucleus to the upper polar
nucleus. The two synergida3 are usually inserted at the apex, with
exceptions in the cases of Sesleria and Allium fistulosum. The mode
of attachment of the germinal nucleus is subject to greater variations.
Thus we find it inserted into the wall of the embryo-sac beneath the
synergidfe, apparently attached to them, in Luzula, TriglocJiin, Carex,
Alisma, Elodea, and Nothoscordum. In Alopecurus, Melica, Orchis,
Gymnadenia, Ornithogalum, Gladiolus, Crocus vermis, and FunJcia, the
germinal nucleus is attached to the apex of the embryo-sac in the
same way as the synergidfe, so that it appears to be covered by them,
or to lie upon them, according to the side from which the observation
is made. Si^ecial interest is attached to the arrangements in Sesleria
and Allium fistulosum, with which Ehrharta agrees in some respects.

The antipodals always originate in threes. They have but a
transitory existence in Alisma, TriglocJiin, Orcliis, and a majority of
the monocotyledons examined. Those of the Graminefe are dis-
tinguished by the extent to which they divide, and by their
comparatively late resorption.

The union of the two polar nuclei takes place in two ways. In
one case the two nuclei approach one another, and the coalescence
takes place in the centre of the embryo-sac ; in the other case the
uj)per of the two remains stationary, and the lower one passes com-
pletely across the embryo-sac. The former occurs in Luzula, Alisma,
Carex, TriglocJiin, OrcJiis, OrnitJiogalum, and Nothoscordum ; the latter
in Elodea, Graminefe, and Allium fistulosum. The coalescence usually
takes place before impregnation ; but in Alisma and Allium fistulosum
only during the contact of the pollen-tube, or even after impregnation
has been completely effected.

The formation of " tapeten-cells " was observed only in Luzula
and TriglocJiin. The mother-cell springs from the subepidermal
layer in Elodea, Alisma, TriglocJiin, Luzula, and Graminea3 ; in Carex
from a deeper layer of the nucellus. In Alisma and Allium fistulosum
the activity of the mother-cell is exhausted in the formation of
primary daughter-cells. In Gymnadenia, OrcJiis, and AntJiericum
three cells are formed by further division of the lower of these
daughter-cells ; while four secondary daughter-cells are developed

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 821

from the mother-cell in Gramineje, Elodea, TriglocMn, Carex, Luztila,
Tritonia, Sisyrinchiuin, aucl Hemerocallis.

The walls which separate the daughter-cells, especially that which
is formed first, are marked by a strong power of swelling. In all
cases the lowest daughter-cell shows considerable increase in size at
an early jieriod. It is this only which always develojis into the
embryo-sac. Two sacs in a single ovule were once observed in
Trujlochin.

In the dialypetalai, as in monocotyledons, the mode of formation of
the cells in the embryo-sac is remarkably constant. The insertion of
the two synergidsB in its apex exhibits no variation in any species
examined.

In auatropous ovules the germinal nucleus appears as if fixed to
the syuergidic, but is in fact inserted somewhat lower down on the
wall of the embryo-sac, and is partly covered by the synergida). The
only exception observed was in Hippuris, where the position of the
germinal nucleus was always lateral.

The same regularity recurs in the synergidte always appearing in
pairs, and in the presence of a single germinal nucleus ; the only
instances in which two germinal nuclei were observed are Gomphrena
and Santalum album.

A reduction in number of the synergidte to one occurs occasionally
as an abnormality. The antii)odals are always formed in threes ; in
only a single case was a greater number observed, or of their nuclei.
They attain a very j)Owerful development in Delphinium and Allionia ;
but are transitory and fully developed in Chenopodium, Helianthemum,
and Hippuris.

The central nucleus is always formed by coalescence of the two
polar nuclei. Of these either both are motile, meeting in the centre
of the embryo-sac, or the upper one remains stationary, and awaits
the approach of the lower one. The former occurs in Delpliiuimn,
Myosurus, Rihes, Ci/doiiia, Geum, and Ruhus ; the latter in the Centro-
sperma), Uelianthemuia, Hippuris, Sanijuisorha, and Agrimouia.

The mother-cell of the embi'yo-sac always originates, in dialypetala),
from the sube2)idcrmal layer, which attains in tliis class its greatest
dill'erentiation ; and a resemblance is thus exhibited, through Hippuris,
to the behaviour in tlie gamopetalne. Tapeten-cells arc nut always
given off; but a uniform behaviour is often to be observed in large
circles of aftinity, as in the Centrosperuue. In Chenopodium the
division of these cells takes considerable part in the structure of the
uucellus.

Tlie epidermis remains single in a great number of cases ; although
a periclinal increase of its elements occurs frequently. The divisions
are still more copious -in Delphinium, Helianthemum, and Rosacea),
where tliey assist the growth of tlie apex of the nucellus. Hippuris
exhibited a peculiar behaviour of the epidermis, resembling that in
the ganiopetahe.

As a rule, only a single embryo-sac mother-cell is formed, as in
Centrospcrmi\i, Rannnculacea", and ltibe», though a doubling takes
place occasionally. In Helianthemum and Kosaccio several niothcr-

822 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cells are produced regularly, with originally equal power of develop-
ment, until one of them, usually the central one, attains the upper
hand, so that finally only a single embryo-sac is produced.

In Chenopodium and Sabulina only primary daughter-cells proceed
from the mother-cell. By division of the lower of these a row of
tlireo cells is produced in AUionia, Goinphrena, Cydonia, Geum, and
Mi/osurus, exceptionally in Chenopodium. Four secondary daughter-
colls api^ear in Delphinium, Itibes, Helianthermim (in this case as
many as six), Sanguisorha, Huhus, Polygonum, and Hippuris. In
dialypctalte it is always the lowest cell of the row of daughter-cells,
whatever their number, and this only, which develops into the
embryo-sac ; the only exception at present known occurring in B,osa
livida.

Fertilization of Cohsea penduliflora.* — Mr. A. Ernst, writing
from Caracas, describes his observations showing the peculiar circum-
stances under which the flowers of this plant are fertilized.

The flowers have little to attract attention,, being dull green in
colour, with very little red on the filaments, and no smell. The
plant climbs in the same manner as C. scundens, described in Darwin's
' Climbing Plants.' The flowers grow on long peduncles, which gene-
rally have a horizontal position, projecting some five or six inches from
the mass of the foliage. When the calyx opens, the filaments as well as
the style are irregularly twisted ; but in about two or three days all
become straight. The style hangs obliquely downwards ; the fila-
ments all bend sideways, the bend being inside the tube of the
corolla, a little over the hairs at their base. There is often a distance
of 15 cm. between the anthers of either side. About 5 or 6 p.m.
the anthers burst, and soon after the style rises and assumes
a central position, so that there is a distance of about 10 cm.
between the stigmas and any of the anthers. Only then is nectar
being secreted (very copiously) by the glandular disk round the base
of the ovary, and it appears therefore when the anthers have done
their work ; even an hour before their rupture no trace of it is to be
found. The nectar-cavity in the tube of the corolla is completely
shut up by the numerous spreading hairs at the base of the filaments,
so that an overflow is impossible. The grains of pollen are very
large (0 • 2 mm. in diameter) and of the same structure as in Cobcea
scandens

Several weeks passed at first before the manner of fertilization
was witnessed. The stigmas were every morning carefully examined,
but no pollen could be discovered on them. The filaments twisted
back again and got somewhat frizzled, after one single night's
expansion. About noon the corolla drops off, separating from close to
the glandular ring, and then slipping down over the style, which, by
this time, is again in a relaxed hanging position. There is always
some nectar in the tube of the corolla after its separation, but none
remains in the calyx round the ovary, nor does its secretion
continue.

* ' Nature,' xxii. (1880) p. 148.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 823

This shows that the fertilization must take place in the same
night after the bursting of the anthers, and it was but natural to
suppose that it was clfccted by nocturnal moths. It would appear,
furthermore, that the nectar is not of any direct advantage to the
plant, as M. G. Bonnier emphatically affirms,* because of its being
jjroduced and lost in all flowers, fertilized or not, in the same way.

As soon as the number of flowers increased (on some evenings
twenty to twenty-five had their anthers openedj, most of them were
found every morning with pollen on the stigmas ; and keeping a close
watch, it was discovered that the plant was visited by several largo
Sphingidse belonging to the genera Chcerocampa, Diludia, and
Amplionyx. All of them proceeded in the same manner. Holding
the body close over the style, they dipped their spiral tongues into
the tube of the corolla, beating all the while the anthers so violently
with the tijjs of their fore-wings that they dangled about with great
velocity in every direction. The grains of pollen being covered by a
sticky substance, many of them adhered to the- wings. An Amplionyx,
after having visited six flowers consecutively, had the tijis of the fore-
wings almost yellow with pollen. When leaving a flower for another
one, some of this pollen is even lost on the foliage, but by the time
the insect takes its central position before the flower the stigmas are
likewise touched by the wings, and thus some pollen is left on them.
Some flowers remain without being fertilized, especially in places
where the moths cannot reacli them easily. All flowers fertilized in
this manner set fruit very soon ; but no flower gave a fruit without
having its stigmas jiollinized by crossing.

Self-fertilization is therefore excluded, and this is further proved
by the following exjieriments : — Twelve flowers were artificially
fertilized by their own pollen and afterwards protected by muslin
bags ; only in one case was a fruit obtained ; but it is doubtful
whether some foreign pollen did not reach the stigmas of tbis
flower. Cross-fertilization was likewise tried in twelve flowers, nine
being experimented on in the same evening after the opening of
the anthers, and three the next morning. All the former arc now
with fruit ; the latter remained sterile. This fact shows how very
short is the jieriod of possible fertilization.

Flowers visit' d by nocturnal moths are as a rule cither large and
of white colour, -or have a strong smell ; but in this Cohcca the former
is certainly not the case, and no smell could bo discovered. But it is
well known that insects, especially Lepidoptera, have in this respect
a really .wonderful keenness, which enables them to track a scent
absolutely impercei)tible to man.

Structure and Motile Properties of Protoplasm. t — According
to C. Frommann, tlie protoplasm of tlie vegetable cell, whirh often
apjjcars quite homogeneous, has a I'cticulate structure, as also have
the chlorophyll-grains. Tliis structure was seen cspocially clearly in

* ' Ann. Sci. Nut. But.,' viii. (ISTD) p. 20G.

t 'IJiob. lib. Stru'-tiir u. Buwc^^mi'^-urscheinunj^on (Kh rrotoplnMn dor
ril:iii/ciizcllc,' vou C. FicMuiiKimi, Jliiu, 1.S80. See 'Dot. Ctulrulbl.,' i. (ISSU)

82 t RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the epidermal cells of Bhododendron ponticum and Draccena Draco.
The cells are usually not entirely filled with protoplasm ; roundish
lumps or striated Liyers mostly lie near the cell-wall. In the mass
lie larger granules, and these form the knots which are connected
with one another by nets of fine threads with very narrow round,
oval, or angular masses. This reticulate structure of the protoplasm
varies in form and distinct-ness.

The cell-wall also exhibits a filamentous structure ; the reticula-
tions appear gradually to pass over into the substance of the cell-wall.
Two adjoining cells usually communicate with one another by means
of cavities and crevices which are traversed by granules and threads ;
so that the cells are thus closely connected together by the uniting
threads of protoplasm. The contents of the canals are often to be
clearly made out, but are often scarcely to be distinguished from the
cell-wall, since they may gradually acquire the same refractive jiower
as the cell-wall. Chlorophyll-grains and coloured portions of the
reticulations are also found, not only in the cavities of the division-
walls, but even in their substance. The cuticle of the cells is also
not homogeneous, but exhibits reticulate and granular deposits. The
same is also the case with the hypodermal cells ; but among their
contents are found also small roundish granules with a reticulate
structure. A similar structure was manifested by Aloe arhorescens,
Crocus, Hyacinthus, and Mentha.

The origin of the reticulate from homogeneous protoplasm can
be readily followed out in the aleurone grains in swollen seeds of
Lupinus FarJceri ; within the same cell the transition takes j)lace
from homogeneous aleurone grains to grains with a scarcely per-
ceptible, and then to those with an evident reticulation. The
behaviour of the threads of the network when starch-grains are
being developed can be investigated in the chloroi^hyll-grains of Aloe.
In the skeleton of the network lie separate roundish bodies, which
are coloured blue by iodine ; while in other chlorophyll-grains the
threads of the network are themselves coloured blue by iodine,
showing that their substance is gradually transformed into starch.

Structure of Sieve-tubes.* — Previous investigations of the struc-
ture and development of sieve-tubes have been carried out only in the
cases of Pinus sylvestris and P. Laricio, which agree in every detail.
E. Janczewski has now extended his observations to other ConiferaB,
as also to the Gnetacero and Cycadefe.

The bast of gymnosperms always contains numerous sieve-tubes
of uniform shape ; they are jjrismatic, their terminal walls being
strongly oblique. The tangential walls of the sieve-tubes are per-
fectly smooth, but the radial walls are provided with more or less
thick, the terminal walls with especially thick, sieve-plates. These
sieve-plates have a roundish form and sharp boundaries, when the
cell-wall of the sieve-tube is sufficiently thick and passes suddenly
into the sieve-plate, as in Pinus and Abies. When, on the contrary,

* ' SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Krakau, Matb.-naturw. Sect.,' vii. (1880) p. 29. See
' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 485.

mVERTEBEATA, CBYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY^ ETC. 825

the cell-wall is much thinner, not varying greatly in thickness from
the sieve-plate itself, the transition into the sieve-plate is more
gradual, the boundaries of the latter being less striking to the eye,
and the form of the sieve-plate is altered, being divided by stri83 of
the cell-wall into smaller plates more or less separated from one
another, as in Ginrjko, Gnetum, Ephedra, and Cycas. Mature sieve-
plates contain no jn-otoplasm in their interior, and are not subject to
any changes from the season. Their pores are always uncovered, and,
as in angiosperms, comiiletely perforated.

The sieve-i^lates arise from the membrane of the bordered pits
which are in the cambial cells on their radial and terminal walls.
The membrane of these bordered pits swells up, is considerably
altered in structure and in chemical composition, and finally forms
on both sides a thick callus, within which is the sieve-plate, which
is exposed by the absorption of the callus.

Since the protoplasm disapj)ears from the sieve-tubes immediately
after they are set free, nothing can at present be satisfactorily deter-
mined respecting their physiological purpose and the period of their
activity.

The sieve-tubes of gymnosperms are therefore homologous to
those of angiosperms, but differ from the latter, both in the mode
of development of their sieve-plates, in the absence of protoplasm
from them when mature, and also in the constancy in form of the
sieve-plates at all periods of the year.

Chemical Composition of Chlorophyll.* — E. Sacchse, of Leipzig,
publishes some fresh results of phyto-chcmical investigations on the
composition of chlorophyll. By means of a peculiar method he has
succeeded in separating both the green and the yellow pigment from
the beuziu-extracts of leaves, in Allium ursinum and Primula elatior,
in a pure state, though perhaps not altogether unchanged from the
chlorophyll in a functional condition.

Contrary to expectation the green pigment was found not to be
homogeneous, but capable of separation into five distinct chemical
substances, resembling one another closely in optical properties, but
varying in quantitative composition. The proportion of carbon varies
between about 66 and 72 per cent., that of nitrogen between about
3 and 5 • 5 per cent.

Similar results were obtained with the yellow pigment. In this
also were found at least four distinct chemical substances, varying in
colour from yellow to reddish brown, of a similar fatty nature, and
similar spectroscopic proi)crties, but varying in chemical composition.
They are all non-nitrogenous, while the proportion of carbon varies
between about 66 and 71 per cent. Each of the green pigments has
a corresponding yellow "pigment with the same carbon-percentage, but
destitute of nitrogen.

In addition to the green and yellow pigments there was found a
remarkable substance, agreeing nearly with starch in its carbon-

* ' Phytoclicm. UnUr.siicli. iRraiisj^. v. R. Sacchse,' i. (ISSO) p. ]. iSco ' Bot.
Ccntralbl.,' i. (IbSO) p. 5J'J.

82 1) RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

percentage, but distiuguislaed by containing a considerably greater
quantity of water, and only partially converted into sugar by the
action of acids. Tbe author has not been able to determine whether
this is an accidental accompaniment to the pigments, or what is its
relation to chlorophyll.

Composition of Chlorophyll.* — Hoppe-Seylcr publishes a con-
tinuation of his work on chlorophyllan,"]- a crystalline substance
closely resembling chloroj)hyll, obtained from green grass. By
treatment with alcoholic potash, chlorophyllan yields, amongst other
l)roducts, an acid characterized by giving a splendid purple-coloured
ethereal solution, which exhibits very marked rose-red fluorescence.
For this compound — C^oB^siOs — Hoppe-Seyler proposes the name of
dichromatic acid. The absorption spectrum of the acid in ethereal
solution is marked by two bands between C and D, whilst the
spectrum of the fluorescent light from the same solution exhibits two
bright bands in exactly the same positions.

Division of Chlorophyll-grains.;]: — J. Schaarschmidt summarizes
the observations of recent writers on the division of chlorophyll,
adding some also of his own. He states the general results obtained
to be that the chlorophyll-grain is capable of division in all plants ;
that the division is not efiected at any particular time of the year ;
and that it takes place in the same manner as the cell-nucleus, in two
ways ; most usually by a median zone and the formation of numerous
threads of protoplasm ; or by the formation simply of numerous
threads of protoplasm, in which case no formation of a median zone
takes place.

The author enumerates 22 species of cryptogams, and 38 of
phanerogams, in which the division has been observed either by
himself or others. He claims to have observed that the surface of
the chlorophyll-grains is furnished with extremely fine cilia which
are usually placed at equal distances apart, and are colourless. They
were first observed in Boehmeria biloha, most distinctly in Hartwegia
comosa.

Branching of Endogenous Organs from the Mother-organ- §—
An elaborate paper on this subject by H. Vouhone concludes with the
following summary of results : —

1. From the young root a secretion is given off which acts as
a solvent on the tissue of the mother-organ, destrc^ying first the
turgidity of the cells, and then their primordial utricle, and thus
making way for the root.

2. When the secretion cannot act in consequence of the nature of
the cell-wall, the quickly growing root exercises a mechanical pressure
on the obstructive tissue. In this resj)ect there is a difference in the
behaviour of different kinds of tissue.

* ' Zeitschr. physiol. Cliemie.' See ' Nature,' xxii. (18S0) p. 279.
t See this Jourual, ante, pp. IIG and 2!)6.

X ' Magyar Nuve'nytani Lapok,' iv. (1880) p. 33. See ' But. Centralbl.,' i.
(1880) p. 457.

§ ' Flora,' Ixiii. (1880) p. 227.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOQAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 827

a. Tliick-wallcd parenchyma and bast are simply stretched, and
then ruptured.

h. The epidermis and collenchymatous cells continue to grow
for a time together with the root, and are only subse-
quently overtaken and broken through by it.

3. In consequence of the increase in thickness, a union in growth
takes place between the root and the adjoining tissue of the mother-
organ, when the latter is still in a formative condition.

4. The subsequent increase in length of the cells of the root
causes also the innermost cortical cells of the mother-organ, which
are in anatomical connection with the root, to become stretched
radially. At the same time the true increase in thickness causes the
cortical cells to form curves parallel to the surface of the root. In
consequence of the similarity of the cells which form the curves,
curves crossing each other at right angles are also seen ; and hence
the root appears to run out from a broad base, while in fact it is
considerably contracted below.

Influence of Direction and Strength of Illumination on certain
Motile Phenomena in Plants.* — E. Stahl's paper on this subject
contains the following general observations : —

The effects of light in this respect are very various. Sometimes
formed cell-contents, as chlorophyll-grains, in the interior of the
protoplasm, are set in motion, and carried within the cell-cavity
to places which indicate a definite relation to the direction of the
rays of light. In other cases the influence of the light is exhibited,
not in the direction of certain particles, but of entire free motile
organs.

In spite of differences in particular cases, a general and important
phenomenon is evident, that, when other conditions are the same,
csijecially where the direction of the light remains the same, the
variations in sensitiveness to light depend entirely on the intensity of
the light.

When the direction remains the same, the chlorophyll-plate of
Mcsocarpus places itself at right angles to this direction when the
illumination is weak ; but, when the intensity passes a certain limit,
the plate turns througli an angle of 90^, and places itself in the
direction of the rays. A swarnispore usually turns its anterior end
to weaker light, the reverse when the light is stronger. This is true
both in the case of jiositively heliotropic filaments and of those which
grow at right angles to the direction of the light. The behaviour of
species of Chisterium varies with the intensity of the light ; and the
same is true for diatoms, and, according to older observations, for
Oscillatorie;e and Myxomycetes.

The varying susceptibility of vegetable protoplasm to the influence
of light, whicli has tliiis been determined in a number of single cases,
is of j)r()portionate inq»ortance in determining the positions dependent
on light of more complicated organs, as is illustrated in the case of
Vauchcria. Whoa a filament of Vancheria is illuminated from one

• '13ot. Zeit.,' xxxviii. (1880) p. 2'J7.

828 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

side, it assumes a direction of growth at riglit angles to the liglit, so
long as tlie illumination is of a certain intensity. If, other conditions
remaining the same, the distance of the plant from the source of light
is increased, an intensity is sooner or later attained at which the
filament alters its direction of growth, and becomes positively
heliotropic ; it grows more or less exactly towards the light. If the
earlier condition is restored, the plant assumes again its previous
direction. This is true both of positively heliotropic filaments and of
those which grow at right angles to the direction of the light. The
phenomena different from this exhibited by a plant of Vaucheria
rooting in the ground are no doubt due to similar causes ; but the
conditions have not been sufiiciently investigated.

Case of Apparent Insectivorism.* — Professor Baillon, at a
recent meeting of the Linnean Society of Paris, read the following
notes : —

Peperomia arifolia Miq., of which the variety arcjyreia is culti-
vated in so many greenhouses, has the leaves more or less deeply
peltate. I have seen stalks on which the peltation on certain leaves
was so exaggerated as to show on a cross-section a depth of nearly
4 cm. When the concave stalks take a suitable direction, water,
principally that from sprinkling, would accumulate and rest in these
receptacles, so well prepared to preserve it. Many small insects
would fall into the water and be drowned. Last year, when the
season v/as warm, and when the windows of the house w^ere often
open, the number of insects was very considerable, and these, soaking
in the water, gradually fell into decay, and it was remarkable that
there was during this not the least sign of any putrescent odour.
Those who believe in the doctrine of insect-eating plants may
perhaps in this be led to find an argument favourable to such theories.
They will add that the variety of colours so strikingly seen in these
leaves constitutes the agent of attraction for the insects to come and
be devoured.

Three reflections, each of a different sort, here present them-
selves : — 1. Is it not remarkable that the exaggerated peltation of these
leaves is in this case accompanied by an apparent insectivorism, and
that the leaves of the plants known up to this time by botanists as
carnivorous, owe their sac-like or horn-like forms only to an excessive
peltation of their limb, as was demonstrated in the evolution of the
leaves in Sarracenia ? f 2. How can it be considered as a proof of
insectivorism, that plants like TJtricidaria grow better in a fluid
containing albuminoid compounds, when other plants grow equally
favourably in the same kind of fluid, which latter are never for a
moment thought to be carnivorous ? 3. How do the chief priests
of our science reconcile the two ideas, that the surface of the leaves
of plants is unable to absorb pure water in contact with them, and
that the same surface daily absorbs water charged with albuminoid
substances and the like ?

* 'Nature,' xxii. (1880) p. 277. t ' Comptes Eendus,' Ixxi. p. 630.

INVERTEBRATA, ORYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 829

B. ORYPTOGAMIA.

Cryptogamia Vascularia.

Prothallia of Ferns.* — Professor J. Sachs publishes, in the form
of a supplement to the ' Botanische Zeitung' for 1880, 6 plates, com-
prising 120 figures, illustrative of the devcloiiment of the prothallia
of various ferns, found among the papers left by the late lamented
young botanist Dr. H. Bauke. The following are the species illus-
trated: — Platycertum grande, Lygodium japoniciim, Gijmnogramme
tartar ea, G. L' Herminieri, G. decomposiia, Asjjlenium plantagineiim,
Allosorus rotundifolius, Davallia pyxidata, and Hemitelia gigantea.
Thero^is no accompanying letterpress.

Non-Sexual Reproduction of the Prothallium of Ferns by
means of Gemmae or Conidia.f — It has been recorded by many
observers that the prothallium of ferns can increase by the separation
of normal branches formed at the apex, as well as more frequently by
that of adventitious shoots detached from the margin or surface.
Tuberous swellings have also been observed on the prothallium of
Gymnogramme and Hymenophyllum, but their detachment and germi-
nation have not been followed out.

Professor Cramer now records the formation of true non-sexual
reproductive organs on the prothallium of an (unnamed) tropical fern.
The prothallia having been kept for some time in a watch-glass with
water, produced green filamentous excrescences, which were found on
examination to be confervoid prothallia furnished with sexual repro-
ductive organs and with abundance of gemmae or conidia. The whole
confervoid structm'C was from 1 to 1 • 5 cm. in thickness ; the separate
filaments were partly expanded flat on the substratum (herpoblasts of
Cramer), partly growing in an ascending direction (orthoblasts).
Antheridia were frequently observed on them, archegonia only twice.

The gemmfB were produced especially at the extremities of the
orthoblasts. When fully developed they had somewhat the form of a
Clostcrium, consisting of a curved row of six or eight or more cells
rich in chlorophyll and starch, and of a bright green colour. In
course of time they became detached, and in some cases gave birth to
secondary gemmae ; in other cases they directly bore antheridia.

Professor Cramer comjjares this production of secondary proto-
nema-like prothallia in ferns to a similar well-known phenomenon in
Heimtica). From a phylogcnetic point of view he considers that it
indicates the origin of vascular cryptogams and mosses by parallel
lines of descent from algoid plants, rather than the direct descent of
tho former from tlie latter.

Amphibious' Nature of the Prothallium of Polypodiaceae.J —
Dr. A. Dodel-Port describes tho jieculiar behaviour of prothallia of
Asjndinm Jillx-viaa and violasccus wliich ho had kt^pt for a kngthened

* Ana dcm botauischen Nachlasse von Dr. H. Baukc ; supplement to ' Bot.
Zeit.,' xxxviii. (1880).

t ' Deiikschr. Sdnvoiz. Nuturf. Ges..' xxviii. (1880).
i 'Kobinos,' iv. (1880) p. II.

830 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

period beneath a cover-glass flooded with water. A part of the
prothallium having decayed, there sj^rung from all parts of the sound
portion a number of peculiar conferva- or protonema-like adventitious
shoots. The production of similar adventitious shoots was easily
excited in other healthy prothallia by placing them in similar con-
ditions. After the lapse of time these adventitious shoots exhibited
a tendency towards lateral branching, thus becoming secondary
adventitious prothallia. This is regarded by the author as ex-
hibiting an interesting phylogenetic affinity with the conferva-like
protonema of mosses. The prothallium of a fern must be looked on
as an amphibious structure intermediate in its vegetative and repro-
ductive properties between aquatic and terrestrial structures.

Synopsis of the Species of Isoetes.* — Mr. J. G. Baker distin-
guishes 46 species, of which he gives brief diagnoses, dividing them
into 4 groups as follows : —

I. Aquatics.
Velum nullum. 1. I. triquetra A. Br. 2. I. Gunnii A. Br. 3. I.

elatior F. M.
Velum partiale. 4. I. lacustris L. 5. I. echinospora Dur. 6. /.

azorica Dur. 7. I. jjygmce.a Engelm.
Velum completum. 8. I. Stuartii A. Br, 9. I. Lechleri Metten.

II. SUBAQtJATIC^.

A. North American species, with a 2-lobed rootstock.

Velum partiale. 10. I. Bolander I 'Engelm. 11. I. TucJcermani A.Br.

12. I. saccharata Engelm, 13. I. riparia Engelm.
Velum completum. 14. I. nielanospora Eugelm.

B. Australian and New Zealand Species, with a 3-lobed rootstock.
15. I. Mijlleri A. Br. 16. I. Kirhii A. Br. 17. I. alpina Kirk.
18. I. Drummondii A. Br.

III. AMPHIBIiE.

A. Eootstock 2-lobed (all North American species).

Velum partiale. 19. J. Butleri Engelm. 20. I. melanopoda J. Gay.

21. I. Engelmanni A. Br.
Velum completum. 22, I. NuttalUi A. Bx*. 23.2. fiaccida Shuttle w.

B. Eootstock 3-lobed.

1. Species of the Mediterranean region : —

Velum nullum s. parum evolutum. 24. I. setacea Bosc. 25. /.

adspersa A. Br. 26. 1. malinverniana Cs. et de Not.
Velum fere s. totum completum. 27. I. velata A. Br. 28. I. Peral-

deriana Dur. et Letouru. 29. I. dubia Gennari. 30. I. tegulensis

Gennari. 31. I. Boryana Dur. 32. I. tenuissima Boreau. 33.

I. olympica A. Br.

2. Species of Tropical Africa : —

34. I. Wchcitschii A. Br. 35. I. nigritiana A. Br. 36. I. Schwein-
furthii A. Br. 37. I. cequinoctialis Welw.

* ' Trim. Joiu-n. Bot.,' ix. (1880) pp. G") and 105.

INVERTEERATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 831

3. Species of Japan and Tropical Asia : —

38. I. japonica A. Br. 39. I. coromandeliana Linn. 40. I. hrachj-
glossa A. Br.

4. Species of Australia : —

41. I. tripus A. Br.

5. Species of Tropical America : —

42. I. amazonica A. Br. 43. I. cuhana Engelm. 44, I. Gardneriana

Kunze.

IV. Terrestres.
45. I. Duriaei Bory. 4G. I. Hystrix Bory.

Of these 46 species, the 3 following are new : I. Schweinfurtlm
A. Br. ms. Eootstock 3-lobed. Habit of I. setacea. Leaves
12-30, about a foot long, moderately firm in texture, opaque, tapering
to the point, \-\ lin, diam. at the middle, furnished with stomata
and accessory bast-bundles. Sporange small, globose ; veil none.
Macrospores small, chalk-white, with high ridges and strongly honey-
combed all over. Central Africa. I. amazonica A. Br. ms. Eootstock
3-lobed. Leaves 10-20, 2-3 inches long, i-J lin. diam. at the middle,
firm in texture, furnished with stomata and accessory bast-bundles,
with a membranous border, about \ inch long, decurrent from the
dilated base. Sporange small, white, globose, much spotted ; veil
rudimentary. Macrospores middle-sized, chalk-white, closely strongly
tubercled, I. cuhana Engelm. ms. Eootstock 3-lobed. Leaves
10-50, ^-1 foot long, \ lin. diam. at the middle, opaque, moderately
firm in texture, furnished with stomata and accessory bast-bundles,
the membranous base suddenly dilated. Sporange small, oblong,
unspotted ; veil very narrow. Macrospores small, strongly tubercled.
Microspores papillose. Cuba.

Muscineae.

Structure of Dumortiera.* — With the exception of the Eielleae,
Dumortiera is described as the only genus of true Marchantiaccfe
which wants the usual layer of air-chambers with the stomata, as
well as the ventral scales. H. Leitgeb has subjected the genus to
close examination with a view of confirming or otherwise this state-
ment, the species specially examined being D. irrigua and Jiirsuta.

His conclusion is that at least these two species exhibit a complete
uniformity with the normal Marchantiacejc, at all events in an early
stage, in the possession of a layer of air-chambers and of stomata, in
tlie formation of the veutral scales, and in jiossessing both kinds of
rhizoids, the unthickcned and the conical. The only difference con-
sists in the fact that the cover to the air-chambers, which represents
the epidermis, and the ventral scales, iierish at an early period. The
walls of the chambers and the layer of cells which form tluir floor
then alone remain, and the latter presents the appearance of being the
true epidermis. Whether this is the case with all undoubted species
of Dumortiera remains yet to be determined.

A specimen sent from New Zealand as Dumortiera dilatata was
* ' Flora," Uiii. (18.v0) p. 307.

832 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

determined by the author to be a male specimen of a Monoclea, and
this is also the case with specimens in herbaria bearing this name.
Professor Leitgeb is in doubt whether D. dilatata has any existence at
all, and whether all specimens so named do not belong to a hitherto
undescribed species of Monoclea, which should be called M. dilatata;
belonging therefore not to the Marchantiaceae, but to the Jungerman-
niacesB.

Formation of the Sporogonium of Archidium.* — This genus of
mosses is of special interest as presenting a point of contact between
the Phascacese and Bryineae, and at the same time exhibiting points
of resemblance to the Hepaticae. Professor Leitgeb has made the
structure and mode of formation of the sporogonium a subject of
special study.

The author regards the sporogonium of all Musci (including
Sphagnaceae) as consisting, in its earliest stage of development, of
an inner mass of cells, the endothecium, which is distinctly separated
from a peripheral mass, the amphithecium. According to the mode
in which the spores are developed, he distinguishes the following
types : —

A. Spores formed from the amphithecium.

1. Sphagnacece type. The endothecium produces only the

columella, which however does not penetrate the
spore-forming layer, but is covered by it.

B. Spores formed from the endothecium. The sporogonium

always grows by means of a two-edged apical cell.

2. Archidium type. Spore-forming and sterile cells are

intermingled in the endothecium ; the spore-sac is
separated from the wall of the capsule by a bell-
shaped cavity.

3. Andreceacece type. The endothecium is differentiated

into a spore-forming layer and the columella which
does not penetrate the former. The innermost layer
of the amphithecium becomes the spore-sac, which
however is not separated from the wall of the capsule
by any cavity.

4. Bryinece type. The endothecium is differentiated as

in No. 3 ; but the columella penetrates the spore-sac,
which is sejjarated from the wall of the capsule by a
cylindrical cavity.
The following are the most noteworthy points in connection with
the development of the spores and sporogonium of Archidium : —

1. In the first stages of the development of the sporogonium until
the differentiation of the amjihithecium and endothecium, Archidium
agrees with the other Phascaceae.

2. The same is the case also with regard to the formation of the
outer spore-sac ; but this, as in the Andreaeacefe, covers the inner
tissue as a closed bell-shaped layer, and is separated from the wall of
the capsule by a cavity.

* ' SB. k. k. Akad. Wiss. (Wien),' Ixxx. (1880) p. 447.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 833

3. The inner tissue does not originally exhibit any differentiation
into spore-forming layer and columella. A few cells, undefined both
in position and number, which varies from one to seven, become the
mother-cells of the spores, in each of which four spores are formed
tetrahedrally.

4. The cells of the spore-space which remain sterile, as well as
those of the inner layer of the spore-sac, and of the two inner layers
of the wall of the capsule, are subsequently again absorbed, while the
outer layer of the spore-sac remains, almost until the spores are ripe,
in the upper part, but altered so as to be hardly recognizable, and
appearing as a homogeneous membrane.

5. In respect to the processes which are carried on in the spore-
space — the differentiation into spore-mother-cells, which are irregularly
interspersed, and cells which remain sterile — Archidiuni resembles
the Hepaticfe more closely than the Bryinete. The resemblance is
especially close to the Riellea), with which it agrees also in the
structure of the calyptra.

Transition of Female to Male Organ in a Moss.* — This pheno-
menon, probably never before observed in cryptogams, is recorded
by Lindberg in Hyimum eri/throrhizon. A barren female plant
showed some altogether abnormal perichaetia ; these proved to consist
on one side of forms resembling the ordinary female organs, on the
other, of organs approximating to the structure of antheridia. These
latter were almost cylindrical from the base upwards, instead of
having the pear-shaped form of the archegonium : their interior was
found to contain a substance resembling dried spermatozooids ; no
female central cell could be distinguished among them. The upper
edge, however, is circular, and presents a level plane with a central
invagination, as in normal antheridia. The same j)lant bore regular
and typical archegonia of a narrow flask-like shape with a long neck ;
the upper end has a projecting rim with more or less distinct lijjs ;
the central cells are also present, as usual. The discovery of the
hermaphrodite species, H. reflexum, described by Blytt, bears out the
correctness of the present observation ; it is possibly merely a
similar specimen of H. erylTirorhizon, wrongly identified.

Fungi.

New Genera of Fungi. t — Sig. Saccnrdohas compiled a conspectus
of the fungi found in Italy, belonging to the class known as " Fungi
impcrfecti," and regarded by tlie majority of mycologists as early
forms of the Ascomycotos and other higher fungi.

He classifies them iirst under three divisions, the Spl.asroi)sidcte,
^relanconicfc, and Hyplidinycetca?. The Sphfcropsidea; are further
divided into throe sections, the Sphrcroidc .t, Dimid'ato-scjitatai, and
Subcnpulat«3. Within each section the form and colour of the spores
are the characters used for further classification. In the Mclanco-

• 'Oefv. K. Vet. Akad. F.irli.' (8torklif.lin) 1870, Xo. .",. p. 7") (1 \^n\o).
t ' Miclieliii,' 1880, p. 1. See ' IJot. (.'cntrnlM.,' i. (IH80) p. .'il.'i.
VOL. III. 3 I

834 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

niese there is no further division into sections. In the Hyphomycetese,
the largest of the three divisions, there are four sections, the Muce-
dincss, Dematiese, Didymosporfe, and Tubercularieas, with numerous sub-
divisions. 214 genera are described, among them the following new
to science : —

Dendrophoma Sacc. Perithecia calva Phomce, sed basidia ramulosa
vel denticulata pleiospora. Dothiorella Sacc. Stroma basilare ; peri-
thecia botryose aggregata ; sporaj oblongse. SeptaglcBum Sacc. Conidia
oblonga, 2-pluriseptata, hyalina (est Gloeosporium conidiis plarisep-
tatis). Ovularia Sacc. Biophila ; hyphae subsimplices, erectfe, api-
cem versus conidia globosa vel ovoidea gerentes. Pyricularia Sacc.
Hyphas biogente subsimplices ; conidia obclavato-pyriformia, 2-pluri-
septata, solitarie acrogena. Cercosporella Sacc. Candida, biogena ;
hyphse simplices vel ramulosfe ; conidia vermicularia, pluriseptata
(est Cercospora mucedinea). Dactylaria ■ Sacc. Saprophila ; hyphee
fertiles erectee, simplices, apice capitulum conidiorum gerentes ;
conidia fusoidea vel clavulata, 2-pluriseptata. Heterobotrys Sacc.
Conidia catenulata vel simul glomerulata, sphaeroidea, in eodera
mycelio majora et minora, fuliginea et hyalina ; hyphse a conidiis vix
distinctfe. Ceratophorum Sacc. Conidia phyllogena fusoidea vel
cyliudracea, sursum incurvata et pallidiora. Stigmina Sacc. Conidia
ovoidea vel oblonga, 2-pluriseptata, in acervulos aggregata, phyllo-
gena, basidiis brevibus fulta. Gonatobotryum Sacc. Hyphse fuscfe, sim-
plices, erectfe, hinc inde noduloso-inflatae, ibique denticulato-sporigerse ;
conidia ovoidea. 3Iesohofrys Sacc. HyphaB Chcetopsidis ; conidia
ovoidea. Harpographiiim Sacc. Conidia falciformia, continua, hyalina.
Cosmariospora Sacc. Conidia constricto-didyma, verruculosa, hyphis
tenuissimis ramulosis varie inserta ; sporodochium verruciforme, super-
ficiale, botryoideo-lobatum. Tiiberculina Sacc. Conidia in basidiis
crassiusculis brevibus simplicibus vel parce ramulosis acrogena, glo-
bulosa; sporodochium plano-pulvinatum. Heliscus Sacc. Sporodo-
chium applanatum ; conidia cylindracea, apice clavi ad instar poly-
gono-capitata, mediocria, basidiis parce divisis nixa. Strumella Sacc.
Sporodochium verruciforme, ex hyphis varie ramosis conidiisque ex
ovoideo polymorphis varie adnatis compositum.

Mode of Escape of the Spores from the Asci in Ascomycetes.*
— This point has been carefully investigated by W. Zopf, with
the following results: — In Sordaria the asci project through the
ostiolum of the pcrithecium, in consequence of elongating very consi-
derably, and then first buret. In all the Ascomycetes in which the
spores are forcibly ejected, they are connected together by various
contrivances, sometimes by appendages, sometimes by a gelatinous
envelope. These collections of spores are frequently attached to the
apex of the ascus in various ways, a point of importance in their ejec-
tion. Heliotropism j)lays its part not only in the entire perithecium,
but also in the separate asci. The Pyrenomycetos, which have no
ostiolum, often exhibit contriva,nces for facilitating the opening of the

* 'SB. Ges. natuif. Freimde Berlin,' 1880, p. 29. See ' Bot. Ceutralbl.,' i.
(1880) p. 323.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 835

perithecium and the escape of the spores. In Choitomium fimeti there
are at the base of the perithecium very hygroscoiiic hair-like appen-
dages, which attach themselves to other objects, and by their elasticity
burst the perithecium. In Cephalotlieca tdbulata n. sp. (possibly iden-
tical with Eurothim pulcherrimiim), the wall of the perithecium consists
of polyhedral shields, separated by a layer of a delicate tissue, which
are easily forced apart by the pressure of the asci.

Fungus-parasites of the Aurantiacese.* — A. Cattaneo contributes
a list, with descriptions, of no less than 34 species of fungus parasitic
on the orange and its allies, including the following new species : —
Sclerotium Citri, on rotten lemons ; Plioma Hesperidearum, on living
leaves ; Seploria Hesperidearum, on leaves ; Gloeosporium Hesperi-
dearum, on living leaves ; Hysterium Aurantii, on dry wood of the
orange ; Cryptovalsa Citri, on roots which have lost their bark.

Fungi parasitic on Forest-trees.f — E. Eostrup publishes a
memoir on the fungi parasitic on forest-trees in Denmark, excluding
the Uredinca), which have been previously treated of. The species
specially described are Agaricus melleus and osireaius, Trametes radi-
ciperda and Pini, P ohjpor us foment ari us, igniarius, conchatus, radiatus,
sulphureus, siiaveolens, and populinus, Thelephora laciniata, Stereum
hirsutum, Corticeum sulphureum, Gymnoasci, Peziza WillJcommi, Hliy-
tisma, Lophodermium, Hypoderma, Ustulina, Nectria ditissima, Phylla-
chora, Cladosporium, Eriisiphei, Phytophthora Fagi, and Schinzia Aim.

Agaricus melleus is destructive not only to all Coniferas, with the
exception of the silver fir, but attacks and kills many other trees,
especially the beech, hornbeam, alder, bircli, poplar, willow, sycamore,
and mountain ash. It is especially injurious to young pines of from
five to ten years old. Among the other most destructive fungi are
Trametes radiciperda and Nectria ditissima, while it is shown that
several species of P ohjpor us arc true parasites.

Witch-broom of the Cherry (Exoascus WiesnerD.t — The peculiar
deformity of the cherry, birch, &c., known as " Hcxeubesen," or " witch-
broom," is stated by De Bary, in his 'Morphologic u. Physiologie der
Pilzo,' not to be caused by parasitic fungi, but to be of .unknown
origin. E. Rathay believes, on the contrary, tliat he has established
that this disease is caused in the cherry by Exoascus deformans Ccrasi
Fckl,, the mycelium of which persists in the malformation, branching
out each year into tlic young shoots, and forming its liymenium in
May on the under side of the leaves between the cuticle and tlio
epidermal cells.

Exoascus deformans. Cerasi lias a well-developed mycelium, and
8-spored asci, and is therefoi'o well placed in this genus. It difftrs
specifically from the E. deformans PersiccB Fckl. of the peach, for

• ' Arcliivio labomt. Botnn. Crittognin. di Pavia,' iii. (1870). Sec 'lit.
Ceiitralbl.,' i. (18.^0) p. 450.

t 'Tidsskr. for Skovbrii^' ' (CoppDlinjrrn), iv. (1880) p. I.
X 'Oestorr. Dot. Zeitschr.,' xxx. (18S0) p. 225.

3 I 2

836 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

which reason Rathay proposes to confer on it the specific name
Exoascns Wiesneri Eathay. Besides Priinus avium, it occurs also
on P. Cerasus and Chamcecerasus, causing similar broom-like mal-
formations.

New Vegetable Structures from Coal and Anthracite. — In a
separate communication, Herr Paul F. Eeinsch gives, with two jilates,
an account of some of the results of his long researches into the flora
of past epochs. The dejiosits mentioned are, he believes, largely com-
jDOsed of microscopic vegetable structures of extreme simplicity. In
the older Devonian strata (of Illinois) he has found bodies which have
some resemblance to the Myxomycetes, and these he has found again
in other parts of North America, and he has been able to trace them
to Upper Jurassic formations. Taking altogether the numerous
localities in which he has found them, he is certain that the coal is in
no way made up of the remains of the higher plants, which are in
comparatively small proportion as comj)ared with vegetable forms of
the very lowest grade.

The most remarkable body which he has met with is a strongly
polarizing substance, which is either found in regular isolated
spheres and polygonal bodies, or in mass in the clefts of crystals.
Where most constant in size and structure, they are 0" 5-2 '5 mm.
high, formed of a dark grey, hard, horny substance, of a rather higher
specific gravity than ordinary coal, and made of spheres 0 • 13-0 * 24 mm.
in diameter. The spheres consist of a radially arranged, more or
less brown, granular substance, with scarcely any indication of a con-
centric striation. They hardly resemble, morphologically, any plants
already known to us, and it will be necessary to form for them a
sj)ecial division.

After giving a detailed account of their structure, the author says
that, it being certain that we have not here to do with " mineral
bodies," it follows that either: (1) they are crystals formed from the
dissolution of some organic compound, comparable to the " sphtero-
crystals " deposited from alcoholic or aqueous solutions of chenopodin ;
or (2) they are organized bodies, which are either independent plants
(comi^arable to the unicellular Fungi and Algae of the present j^eriod),
or they are parts of some other plant. The author is distinctly in
favour of the facts speaking to one or other of the two latter views.
He forms, therefore, two genera, which he characterizes thus : Blasto-
phragmium, with the body formed of three difterent substances : —

a. A fibrillar, multiramified, filamentar substance.

5. Pellucid substance intermixed with granules 0 • 0008 mm. in
diameter, and with pellucid fibrillse arranged in longitudinal rows.

c. Semipellucid polarizing substance formed of centrogranular
granules, arranged radially, and forming regular spheres ; the system
of the tubules simple, the " tubules " arranged radially, closely com-
pressed, and all of the same length.

The second genus, Asterophragmiutn, is composed of only two sub-
stances ; one is granular and non-pellucid, and the other semi-
pellucid, and possessed of polarizing properties.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 837

Classification of Bacteriacese.* — In a general review of our state
of knowledge of tlie Schizomycetes, Dr. Luersscn arranges the genera
of BacteriacenB as follows : —

I. Cells not united into filaments, sejiarating immediately after
division, or in couples, free or united into colonies (Zoogloea)
by a gelatinous substance.

A. Cells dividing in one direction only.

a. Ccdls globular : Micrococcus.

p. Colls elliptical or shortly cylindrical : Bacterium.

B. Cells dividing regularly in three directions, and thus

forming cubical families, having the form of
packets strung crosswise, and consisting of 4, 8,
16, or more cells : Sarcina.
II, Cells united into cylindrical filaments.

A. Filaments straight, imperfectly segmented.

a. Filaments very fine and short, forming rods :

Bacillus.
(3. FiLiments very fine and very long : Leptothrix.
y. Filaments thick and long : Beggiatoa.

B. Filaments wavy or spiral,

a. Filaments short and stiff.

a. Filaments slightly wavy, often forming

woolly flocks : Vibrio.

b. Filaments spiral, stiff, moving only for-

wards or backwards : Spirillum.
(3. Filaments long, flexible, with rapid undulations,
spiral through their whole length, and en-
dowed with great mobility : Spii-ochcete.
A diagnosis follows of each species, with an account of what is
known of its structure and habits, and of its physiological role.

Atmospheric Bacteria. t — Continuing the observations contained
in a previous paper, | which did not deal with Bacteria, M. Miquel has
succeeded in counting tlic spores of bacteria, and while couflrming
M. Pasteur's observations that they are always present in the air,
shows that their number is subject to incessant variations.

Very small in winter, the number increases in spring, is very high
in summer and autumn, then sinks rapidly when frost sets in. This
law also applies to spores of fungi ; but while the spores of moulds
are abundant in wet periods, the number of aerial bacteria then
becomes very small, and it only rises again in drought when the
spores of moulds become rare. Thus, to the maxima of moulds
correspond the utinlma of bactia-ia, and reciprocally.

In summer and autumn, at Paris, lOUO germs of bacteria are
frequently found in a "cubic metre of air. In winter the number not
tincouimonly descends to four and five, and on soini! days tlio " dust "
from 2U0 litres of air proves iiicai)ablo of causing infection of the

♦ ' Rev. Iiiternat. Sci..' iii. (1S80) p. 242.
t ' CompU's Kendiis,' xci. (1880) p. 04.
X See tliis Juurnal, i. (1878) p. 1U2.

838 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

most alterable liquors. In the interior of houses, in the absence of
mechanical movements raising dust from the surface of objects, the
air is fertilizing only in a volume of 30 to 50 litres. In M. Miquel's
laboratory, the dust of 5 litres usually serves to effect the alteration
of neutral bouillon. In the Paris sewers, infection of the same liquor
is produced by particles in 1 litre of air.

These results differ considerably, it is pointed out, from those
published by Tyndall, who says that a few cubic centimetres of air
will, in most cases, produce infection in the most diverse infusions.

M. Miquel compared the number of deaths from contagious and
epidemic diseases in Paris with the number of bacteria in the air
dui'ing the period from December 1879 to June 1880, and established
that each recrudescence of aerial bacteria icas followed at about eiglit
days' interval by an increase of the deaths in question. Unwilling to
say positively that this is more than a mere coincidence, he projects
further observations regarding it.

Bf . Miquel further finds (contrary to some authors) that the water-
vapour which rises from the ground, from rivers, and from masses in
full putrefaction, is always micrographically pure ; that gases from
buried matter in course of decomposition are always exempt from
bacteria : and that even impure air sent through putrefied meat, far
from being charged with microbia, is entirely purified, provided only
the putrid filter be in a state of moisture comparable to that of the
earth at • 3 metre from the surface of the ground.

Modification of the Properties of Bacillus anthracis by Culti-
vation.*— In the course of some experimental investigations into the
pathology of anthrax at the Brown Institution, made during the past
twelve months, two series of phenomena have been the subject of
study, and in each some results have been attained which Professor
W. S. Greenfield (in a " preliminary note ") believes to be novel, and
of considerable practical importance if verified by other observers.

The practical purpose of these investigations was to ascertain
(1) by what means the virus of splenic fever may be so modified as
to be capable of inoculation without fatal result, and (2) whether a
modified attack, produced by inoculation, exerts any protective
influence against a futm*e inoculation with unmodified virus.

The conclusions arrived at by these experiments were as follows : —

1. That anthrax may be artificially communicated to bovine
animals by inoculation with the blood or spleen of the guinea-pig
which has died of the disease artificially induced, and that the same
result may be attained by inoculation with the Bacillus anthracis
cultivated from the fluids of a rodent ; the disease thus induced being
severe, but rarely fatal to previously healthy bovine animals, a result
previously attained by Dr. Burdon-Sanderson independently.

2. In all the cases thus inoculated, the animals appeared to have
acquired either a considerable degree of protection or entire immunity
from the results of subsequent inoculation, although much larger
doses of the virus were employed.

* ' Proc. Eoy. Soc.,' xxx. (1880) p. 557.

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 839

In tlie course of these experiments the author employed on several
occasions Bacillus antliracis artificially cultivated in successive gene-
rations in aqueous humour, and finding that the results appeared to
vary considerably with the stage of the cultivation, those furthest
removed from the original parent-source being more frequently
inactive, he was led to make a series of observations of which he now
communicates the results. They may be stated as follows : —

That when Bacillus anthracis is artificially grown in successive
generations in a nutrient fluid (aqueous humour), it maintains its
morbific properties through a certain number of generations, but each
successive generation becomes less virulent than its predecessor,
requiring both a longer time and a larger quantity to exert its mor-
bific action ; and after continuous diminution of virulence, at a certain
stage in the successive cultivations, the Bacillus, though maintaining
all its morjiliological characters and its power of growth, becomes
completely innocuous even to the most susceiitible class of animals.

It may be added that the modified virus produces forms of modi-
fied disease which differ widely from ordinary sjilenic fever, both in
the distribution of the Bacilli and in the nature of the symptoms and
pathological appearances.

In regard to the general method employed in the determination
of the gradual diminution of virulence by successive artificial cultiva-
tions, the cultivating fluid was aqueous humour in closed tubes half
filled, and the animals inoculated chiefly mice. The cultivations
were continued to the nineteenth generation, each successive genera-
tion presenting identical morphological characters at the various
stages of its growth, and showing no diminution in the capacity for
growth nor marked variation in the time and temperature relations of
its germination. In no case were any symptoms or a fatal result
produced by inoculation with a later generation than the twelfth,
beyond that stage, a large quantity of actively germinating rods and
spores produced no result whatever. The diminution of virulence
was very marked at the eighth generation, both as regards the pro-
portion of animals affected, and the rapidity of action with an equal
dose.

The author defers at present dwelling upon any conclusions to bo
drawn from the experiments pending further investigations.

Bacterium foetidum : an Organism associated with profuse
Sweating from the Soles of the Feet." — Dr. George Thin refers to
the fiict of the feet of certuiu individuals being characterized by a
peculiar powerful and fa-tid odour, wliich is really connected with
the UKUsture (an admixture of sweat with serous exudation from the
blood) that soaks the soles of the stockings and tlie inside of the
boots.

"When a small portion of the solo of the wet stocking was teased
out in water, the drop of water was found to bo swarming with micro-
cocci. A second generation of the organism, which tlie author calls
Bacterium fatidum, was obtained by placing a small piece of the wet

♦ ' Troc. Roy. Soc.,' xxx. (1880) p. iT3.

840 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

stocking in a test-glass, charged with pure vitreous humour. This
and succeeding generations were cultivated at a temperature which
varied between 94° and 98° Fahr. The successive generations were
obtained by inoculating pure vitreous humour, with requisite precau-
tions. In twenty-four hour? the surface of the vitreous humour was
always found covered with a delicate scum, which in forty-eight hours
was compact and tolerably resistant.

In the scum of one day's growth and in the fluid belo.v it
organisms were found as cocci, single and in pairs, in transition
stages towards rod formation, as single and jointed rods, and as
elongated single rods. Many of the rods were actively motile. The
compact scum of two days' growth was sufficiently resistant to be
removed in an unbroken sheet. "When disturbed by the needle it fell
to the bottom of the glass. It was found to contain all the forms
found in the twenty-four hours' growth, and in addition long unbroken
rods in transition stages towards the formation of chains of spores.
Spores were also found lying beside tlie empty and partially empty
sheaths from which they had been discharged. Groups of single
spores and pairs, identical in size and ajipearance with those which
had come to maturity in the sheaths, were found mixed up with rods
in all phases of development.

The first stage in the development of the organism is the formation
of a pair from one coccus.

The next stage is that in which the whole body is wedge-shaped,
the round brightly-refractive coccus being found in the thick end of
the wedge. Another phase, which is probably the successor of the
preceding one, is the appearance of a canoe-shaped figure with the
bright coccus in the centre.

Other appearances connected with the early stage of development,
and probably following the wedge- and canoe-shaped figures, show
the organism developed into a staflf-shaped body, containing two
elements of very different refractive power. The coccus element is
still distinct and is brightly refractive, the other element is very
slightly refractive and is seen as a dull shade, with however perfectly
distinct outlines. The coccus may be at one end of the rod, two
cocci may be in the centre close together with a prolongation of
protoplasm on either side, or a central rod of protoplasm may have a
coccus at either end.

In the next stage we have the formation of the rods characteristic
of Bacteria. The distinction between the coccus and the protoplasm
becomes lost, although transitions are found in which faint differences
of refraction still betray the two elements. The formation of rods
of ordinary size, of long rods with unbroken protoplasm, of rods
with segmented protoplasm, and of rods filled with spores or cocci,
progresses identically with the similar formation in Bacillus anthracis.

The Bacterium grows in turnip infusion less actively than in
vitreous humour.

Dr. Thin states that an antiseptic treatment by which the bacteria
were killed in the stockings and inner surface of the soles of the boots
completely destroyed the foetor.

INVERTEBBATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 841

Alcoholic Fermentation.* — In regard to tlie transformation of
alcoholic liquids into vinegar, Pasteur, as is well known, holds that
the formation of vinegar is a physiological phenomenon caused by
vegetation of Mi/coderma aceti, while Liebig sees in it merely a chemical
action of oxygen on alcohol. Eecent observations by Herr Wm'm, at
the Breslau Institute of Plant-Physiology, are regarded as putting the
former view beyond a doubt, and Herr Wurm has succeeded in effecting
the industrial manufacture of vinegar in accordance with Pasteur's
view. The conditions are a sowing of pure bacteria, a uniform tempera-
ture of 30^ C, and a well-regulated addition of alcohol. The jirocess
goes on in large covered wooden receptacles (with side-holes for air),
into which are put 200 litres of a mixture of vinegar, water, and alcohol,
along with some mineral salts (phosphates of jiotash, lime, magnesia,
and ammonia). Full particulars have been published in Diugler's
' Polytcchnischcs Journal.' The manufacture is said to be con-
siderably more rapid than that by the old method, and distinctly
economical.

Clastoderma.t — A. Blytt describes a new genus and species of
Myxomycetcs.

Sporangia discreta, calce destituta, stipitata. Columella brevis-
sima aut subnulla. Capillitium e columella ortum, ramis solidis,
lihicinis, demum lutescentibus, repetite bifurcatis, ramulis non auasto-
mosantibus. Sporaugii maturi membrana in fragmenta membranacea
subhyalina inter se libera et distantia divisa. Fragmenta irregulariter
rotuudata, oblonga aut subpolygona, ramulis ultimis capillitii singulis
vel 2-5 affixa. Sporfc lilacinaa,

Clastoderma Debaryianum n. sp. Sporangia sphferoidea, diam.
^-y mm. Stipes fusco-flavescens, ercctus, 1'3-1"4 mm. longus,
e basi latiori versus apicem sensim attenuatus (basi 210-215 /x,
apice ca. 8 fx latus), ad basin columella) anuulo membranaceo augus-
tissimo ciuctus. Columella subnulla, rotundata aut brevissima
(30 /m longa), apice dilatato rotundata. Sporje sphferoidea) Iseves,
diam. 9 5-1 1 /x. Fragmentorum membranaceorum diametrus 10-15 fx,
in fragmentis oblongis diametrus longior usque ad 30 fx longa.

Ilab. in Polyporo emortuo, faciei inferiori gregarie insidens, in
silva abicgua propo Farucbo Christianise (Xorvegia;) mensc Septembri
1879 (A. lilytt).

Lichenes.

Monograph of Arthonia.t — A very valuable monograph of all
the Scandinavian species of Arihonia, referring also to species
found elsewhere, is compiled by S. Almquist. The diagnosis of tho
genus is nearly identical with that of Nylander and Leightou : —
Excipuhun nullum vel rarissimo ambiens ; epithecium ])cridium non
foriiians ; asci pyriformcs ; jiaraphyses iudistinctic ; reactio amyli
Bcmper distiucta, vulgo iutensa.

• S.e ' EnRl. Mccli.,' xxxi. (1880) p. 492.
t ' bet. Zcit..' xxxviii. (1880) p. 343.

X 'Koiirrl. Svenskii Vetenak-Akart.,' xvii. (18S0) p. 1. See ' Uut. Ceutralbl.,'
i. (is.lO) p. 355.

842 RECOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

In accordance with Schwendener's well-known theory, tlie author
regards the genus as belonging, like other lichens, to the Asco-
niycetes. Were the gonidia to be regarded as special organs,
the following improbable results would ensue : (1) Very nearly
related species, like A. granitojpldla and neglectula, and even difl'erent
forms of the same species, as A. mediella, would have diiferent
organs of assimilation, differing greatly from one another, and with-
out any transitional forms. (2) Very nearly related species, as
A. spectcibilis and subastroidea, and even different forms of the same
species, like A. radiata, would differ in some of them possessing, while
others were altogether without, organs of assimilation. (3) Both the
liyphfB and the gonidia and cortical cells would present no difference,
whether Arilwnia was autonomous, or whether it derived its nutri-
ment from the cortical cells. (4) The structure of the thallus would
be the same, whether Arfhonia had gonidia, or whether it made use of
the gonidia of other lichens.

The absence of gonidia is no sufficient reason for excluding a
plant from the group of lichens. The gonidia of the same or of
allied species are cither Palmellacefe or Chroolepida3 ; the gonidia of
two species are often intermixed. The gonidia not uufrequently owe
their origin to the thallus of other lichens ; for example, those of
A. pliceohcea to Verrucaria ceutocarpa. Soredia occur in some species.
In A. fusispora there are apothecia-like structures, which the author
is inclined to regard as soredia.

The genus is divided into seven sections : viz. Coniangium, Coni-
oloma, Pacnolepia, Trachylia, Euarthonia, Nsevia, and Lecideopsis,
the last of which is new, and includes the new species, A. amylospora,
vagans, intecta, and oxijsjjora.

Algae.

Algal Vegetation of the Siberian Sea-coast.*— In spite of his
conviction expressed in 1876 that no new forms would be added to
the known Algfe of the Siberian part of the Arctic Ocean, F. R. Kjell-
mann is able to identify from Baron Maydell's description three species
from Tschaun Bay as belonging to the genera Alaria and Laminaria ;
they were observed in the Russian Geographical Society's Expedition
of 1869.

The results obtained in Professor Nordenskiold's expedition show
that an algal flora appears at various points at a distance from the
coast, as well as in the sublittoral regions ; only two of the former
localities show a jDoor list of species, and here these are confined
to Lithothamnion pohjmorplmm, Phyllophora interrupta, and Lithoderma
fatiscens. Two shore stations furnished only two species, which
were an Enteromorpha and a Urospora. Fucacese do not occur
at all in the littoral region, and only one, Fucus evanescens, was
met with in the eastern part of the Arctic Ocean, and has a
wide though scanty distribution in the western part. The richest
localities were the so-called North Cape (lat. 68° 55' N., long.
179° 25' W.), and the mouth of the Koljuschin Gulf. The most

* ' Oefv. K. Vet. Akad. Forb." (Stockholm), xxxvi. (1880) p. 23.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 843

common species are Poli/siphonia arctica, Rhoclomela tenuissima, a
form of B. suhfusca, Sarcophyllis arctica^ Phyllophora interrupta, SpJia-
celarla arctica, aud Pldoeospora tortilis.

In all, Floridece are represented by 12 species, Fucoidece by 16,
Cldorophylhiphjceai by 6, Plujcochromophjcece by 1, in the material
examined by Kjellmann.

Algse of the Utah Salt Lake.*— Dr. A. S. Packard, jun., has
examined some of the " seaweeds " of the Great Salt Lake which are
probably almost the only source of food for the brine-shrimp, as they
are diffused through the water in nearly equal abundance with the
crustaceans themselves, and do not appear to grow attached to any
objects in the lake or on the shore. The most common form is a
rounded mass which lives suspended in the water.

Professor W. G. Farlow, of Harvard University, soaked out and
examined the dried material, which he found to consist largely of
grains of sand and remains of small animals, mixed with which were
three species of Algfe. The most abundant was one forming irregular
gelatinous masses, sometimes attaining a diameter of half an inch.
The colour, apparently much faded in drying, was brownish with a
tinge of bluish greeu,t and he considered it to be a new species of
Pohjcystis — P. PacJcardii. Its distinguishing characters are the oblong
shape of its cells, which are smaller than in any of the marine species
of the genus, and the firmness and lubulated form of the gelatinous
substance in which they are embedded.

There was also a species of Ulva (using the word in the extended
sense adopted by Le Jolis) in fragments, so that no very accurate
idea of its habit could be formed. The microscopic characters, how-
ever, showed that it was, with scarcely any doubt, Ulva marginata Ag.,
fouud on the coast of Europe. The specimens agreed very well with
those from the French coast, considered by Le Jolis to be the sijccies
described by Agardh.

The third Alga was much less abundant than the others, and was
in ]i0()r condition for comparison with herbarium specimens. It was
a Ilhizuclonium, coming very near to P. salinum Ktz. (R. riparium
Harv.), a common marine species of America, and also found in
Europe near salt springs. The Salt Lake plant has smaller cells and
api)roachcs P. Kochianum, a species also marine and found in saline
regions.

Professor Farlow adds that "as a rule, the Algfc found in saline
regions belong to species found in brackish waters on the coast. One
might exj)cct to find a large variety of Ulvcno and Confervca; in Salt
Lake, and it would bo of interest to sec how closely these inland
forms approximate to the littoral forms of the eastern aud western
coasts."

Antherozoids of Hildebrandtia rivularis.t — Sig. Borzi describes
the nntheridia of this alga, found abundantly in May on smooth slatc-

* ' Am. Nat.,' xiii. (1S7'.») p. 701.

t Tlic colour in life i.t an olives groon.

i ' Kiviatn acicntilicn," i (ISSO). See ' Dot. Ceutralbl.,' i. (18S0) p. 481.

844 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

stones in streams at Vallombrosa, near Florence. Looked at from the
surface, tlic autheridia-beariug tliallus appears to be covered by a
number of roundish or irregular, somewhat elevated, pale dots, con-
sisting of a number of densely-crowded antheridia. They are elon-
gated cylindrical cells, developed vertically from the apex of the
superficial cells of the thallus, twenty or more from a single cell.
Their contents are at first homogeneous, but are subsequently differ-
entiated into seven or more nearly globular antherozoids, placed in a
row one above another, which are set free by the rupture of the mother-
cell.

New Vaucheria * — M. Woroniu describes, under the name
V, de Baryana, a new Vaucheria collected by him in streams near
Montreux, on the Lake of Geneva, but also earlier by De Bary and
Peyritsch near Halle.

The thallus scarcely differs in any respect from that of other
species of the genus. The filaments are more or less branched, usually
from 0'03 to 0*04 mm. in diameter; the chlorophyll is fine-grained,
and of a bright green colour. Notwithstanding this, the tufts of tbis
alga have a very pale green or even a grey tint, owing to their being
copiously encrusted, when old, with calcium carbonate, to such an
extent that on the death of the filament the encrustation frequently
remains behind in the form of a connected tube. Tbis is not an
encrustation from without, but a secretion from the substance of the
Vaucheria itself.

From the thallus spring the fertile branches, erect lateral sboots,
0'2-0*3 mm. in length, containing a great quantity of oil and chloro-
phyll. The extremity of each of these branches develops gradually
into an antheridium. While this is taking place, a lateral protuber-
ance is formed on the upper balf of the branch, which becomes a
stalked oogonium. The development of the two organs advances
pari passu, so that ultimately tbeir orifices stand on the same level.
The terminal antheridium and stalked oogonium determine V. de
Baryana to belong to Walz's section, Vaucherice racemosce, but it differs
from the other species in the form of the antheridium. Instead of
being curved, with the form of a horn or hook, it has two blunt
lateral projections, whicb give it the appearance of tbe handle of a
crutch ; the projections are, bowever, sometimes three or four in
number. The form of the antheridium bears the nearest resemblance
to those in V. piloholoides and sphierospora ; but these species belong
to a different section. The orifice from whicb the antherozoids escape
is always at the end of these protuberances. The oogonia are spherical
and stalked.

The process of fertilization takes place in the same way as in
other species of the genus. The mature oospore is usually quite
spherical, and fills up the whole of the oogonium ; occasionally it is
beaked.

Normally there is a single superior antheridium, and a stalked
oogonium ; occasionally two antheridia accompany a single oogonium,

* ' Bot. Zeit.,' xxxviii. (1880) p. 425.

INVEETEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 845

or two oogouia a single autlieridium, or even two or three oogonia two
antheridia. The production of zoospores was not observed by
Woronin. He considers the new species to be most nearly allied to
V. geminata, and believes that, like that species, it may assume a
(row^ros/ra-condition, and hence occur also in an amoeboid state.

Parasitic Nostoc* — Several Algte belonging to the group of
Nostochineaj enter and live in the tissues of various terrestrial or
aquatic plants, and an additional instance of this has just been
observed by M. L. Marchaud, which he reports on account of its
singularity.

He collected on the edge of a ditch near Montmorency, some
small flask-shaped bodies, of a blackish-green colour, ovoid, cylin-
drical or like commas, from • 1 to 1 • 5 mm. in height, which were fixed
to the ground by branched radicular filaments. They vegetated on
the damp soil intermixed with numerous specimens of Pottia (Gijmno-
stomum triincatuliun), Anthoceras levels, JRiccia glauca, Jungermannia
tenuis, &c., and in some places covered the ground. They are repro-
duced each year, disappearing in winter to reappear in the spring.

These seemed at first to be young individuals of Botrydium
granulatum ; but when examined under the Microscope they presented
an entirely unusual character. Instead of being lined with a layer
of granular chlorophyll, the interior of the ampulla was lined with
a network of moniliform filaments presenting all the characters of
chajilets of Nostoc or Anahcena.

The author discusses the probable nature of these singular bodies,
which, though further examination is yet required, he is inclined to
believe are due to one of the Nostochineaj (Anahcena ov Nostoc), which,
having penetrated into the radicular filaments of a moss or Hepatica,
and there developing, cause a considerable local swelling of the
neighbouring wall.

Movement of the Cell-contents of Closterium lunula. f — Mr.
A. W. Wills jioiiits out that at each cud of the fronds of certain
Desmidiea3 there is a clear oval or spherical sjmcc, within which arc
seen a number cf minute particles in more or less active motion, at
any rate during some periods of the life of the plant. This is
especially the case in the genus Closterium, and conspicuously so in
the largest species, Closterium liinuJa.

In this plant tlierc is also, as lias been often observed, a certain
motion of the colourless granular liquid cell-contents which form a
thin film between tlie deep-green eudochrome mass and the cell-wall
of the frond. This motion has been described as a circulation, but
the term is incorrect. The actual character of the movement is ono
of ebb and flow, alternately towards and from the ends, and, in
favourable specimens, careful examination under a ;J or ,1 objective
shows tliat it takes place in delicate longitudinal lines or bands, and
that in different lines the flow may be actually in 02)posite directions
at the same time, while in any one lino the direction of flow is usually

♦ ' Hull. Soo. Bot. Fninoo," xxvi. (1870) p. 336.
t 'Mull. Nat.,' iii. (1H80) j), IsT.

846 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

reversed every few seconds, a moment of rest or of confused move-
ment of the particles among one another preceding the reversal of the
direction.

The cause of this peculiar ebb and flow has not, he believes, been
previously recorded.

The clear spaces at the ends of the fronds of the Closterium are
really contractile vesicles, and careful observation under the above
powers shows that they are undergoing incessant though slight change
of form. The contraction of any part of the surface of the vesicle is
followed by an immediate rush of the surrounding fluid to fill the
vacuum thus formed, and the direction of the currents, where the
transparent spaces allow them to be observed, may be clearly con-
nected with the corresponding contraction of one or other part of the
vesicle. In stating their flow to be in lines or bands, it is merely
intended to describe the general appearance of the action. The whole
space between the endochrome and the cell-wall is, doubtless, filled
with the fluid ; but the transverse section of the former would pro-
bably present a fluted or corrugated form, corresponding to its longi-
tudinal disposition in belts of denser matter ; and the flow of the
surrounding fluid may probably be determined by the channels formed
by this fluted structure.

These movements may be found to have their parallel in the
smaller species of Closterium, and in other genera of Desmidieaa in
which there is a terminal vesicle.

It is to be noted that the flow of cell-contents, while it is
actuated by the contractile motions of the vesicle, is a phenomenon
wholly distinct from the swarming of the larger particles within it,
the functions of which are, Mr. Wills fears, still hidden in entire
obscurity.

Endochrome of Diatomacese.* — A writer in the ' English
Mechanic,' referring to M. Petit's paper, of which we gave a trans-
lation at p. 680, says, " The English student of the chromatology of
plants will not fail to be surprised, on reading M. Petit's article, to
find no reference to the valuable work done by Mr. Sorby in this
department of scientific research, and we can only come to the con-
clusion that M. Petit is, as so many of his countrymen appear to be,
extremely ignorant of the present position of vegetable and animal
chromatology in England. This is very much to be regretted, as
there is no doubt that had M. Petit been familiar with the valuable
paper read by Mr. Sorby before the Eoyal Society in 1873, and
published in the ' Proceedings ' of the Eoyal Society in that year,-j-
his conclusions would have been much modified, and the ground
covered in his research not only greatly extended, but more minutely
examined. There is no doubt, for instance, that M, Petit would
have foimd reason to believe that his phycoxanthine is identical with
that of Kraus, and, as Mr. Sorby has shown, is really a ' mixture of
two or three distinct colouring matters, which can easily be separated
and do occur separately in other plants.' The true phycoxanthine

* ' Engl. Mech.,' xxxi. (1880) p. 573. t No. 146, vol. xxi.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 847

of Sorby gradually fades on the addition of hydrochloric acid and

turpentine The writer has no doubt (taking his stand almost

entirely upon the charts in M. Petit's jiaper) that the so-called
phycoxantliine, in the condition in which M. Petit examines it, con-
sists of the yellow xauthophyll of Sorby, with a slight admixture of
chlorofucine, true fucoxanthine, and lichnoxanthine, with contamina-
tion by imperfect separation of the chlorophyll, which is itself com-
pound, and a very little of true phycoxanthine. But whilst we are
compelled to regret that M. Petit's work is incomplete, we express
our thanks to him for having opened up a new field of inquiry for
our diatom friends."

MICKOSCOPY, &c.

Microscopical Analysis of Water.* — M. Certes observes that
recourse must bo had to the Microscope in order to discover the nature
of the minute organisms of water, whether badly infested by them or
not. The great difficulty of discovering these bodies in pure waters is
best overcome by the use of osmic acid, which also at once kills and
preserves them.

An experiment which shows the efficacy of his method is to place
30 c.c. of distilled water in each of two tubes, and in one of them to
agitate a glass tube which has been dijjped in water infested with
microscopic organisms; to the contents of both tubes equal amounts
of osmic acid are added. In examining the water with the Microscope
while the one sample shows nothing organized, in the one into which
the rod was dipped even the few dead Infusoria are to be found.

In a drinking water, containing but little organic matter, a solution
of osmic acid of the strength of 1 • 5 per 100 is used, and 1 c.c. of this
is added to 30 or 40 c.c. of the water ; after some minutes as much
more distilled water is added as the vessel will contain (in order to
check the action of the acid). The length of time after this at which
tlie mixture may be examined varies from a few hours in the case of a
highly imj)uro liquid to from twenty-four to twenty-eight for a very
pure one; at the cud of the time it must be decanted with great caro,
80 as to leave the precipitate in from 1 to 2 c.c. of liquid.

The use of staining materials has some advantages ; among the best
of these materials, M. Certes considers are Ranvier's picrocarmiuo,
methyl green, eosiu, haimatoxylin. Paris violet has the recommenda-
tion of deeply staining minute and transparent objects ; it should bo
very dilute ; it then colours cellulose blue, amyloid matters red, and
gives a bluish-violet tint to cilia, flagella, and the protoplasm of
Infusoria. Whatever staining matter is used, it is advisable to mix
some dilute glycerine with it previously to use, care being taken not
to allow the organisms to be shrivelled by too rapid action of tho
glycerine of the mixture ; they arc thus kept transparent, and may
bo preserved well in tlie glycerine.

♦ ' Coinptca RenduH,' xc. (18S0) p. 1 135.

848 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

It is probable that the method may bo well employed in examining
the tissues and liquids of animals for parasites. The author has thus
treated the Anurous Batrachia.

On this subject it may be also noted that Professor Huxley has
recently thrown some doubt on the conclusions arrived at by chemists
in determining the wholesomeness of water. Organic matter may be
either of animal or vegetable origin, the former being dangerous, and
the latter much less so, if not altogether innocuous. To distinguish
between the two kinds is therefore all-important, but unfortunately it
is impossible directly to do this, as both animals and j)lants yield
albuminoid matters, which, chemically speaking, are practically
identical in composition. None of the processes in use by chemists
can be relied upon as giving any indication of the nature of the organic
matter, i. e. whether it is dangerous or not, and yet it is the almost
invariable custom to judge of a water by the quantity of organic
matter it contains, no matter what its origin, and a variation of two or
three times a given amount is held to make the difference between a
good and bad water.

It was to this point that Professor Huxley especially addressed
himself at a meeting of the Chemical Society, and gave it as his
opinion, speaking as a biologist, " that a water may be as pure as can be
as regards chemical analysis, and yet as regards the human body be as
deadly as prussic acid, and, on the other hand, may be chemically
gross, and yet do no harm to any one." " I am aware," he said, " that
chemists may consider this as a terrible conclusion, but it is true, and
if the public are guided by percentages alone, they may often be led
astray. The real value of a determination of the quantity of organic
impurity in a water is that by it a very shrewd notion can be obtained
as to what has had access to that water."

Mr. C. Ekin, commenting * upon these statements, says that since
chemical analysis fails entirely to distinguish between innocuous and
deadly kinds of matter, it may bo thought a work of supererogation to
have recourse to it at all. What, however, analysis fails to do directly
it can to a large extent do indirectly. Organic matter in solution in
water is more or less prone to oxidation, the highly putrescible matter
of sewage being most so, and that derived from vegetation being much
less so. Hence it follows that one would expect to find the oxidized
nitrogen compounds in a greater excess in the one case than in the
other, and that is what we do find. Almost invariably in all waters of
acknowledged wholesomeness the quantity of nitrates never exceeds a
certain small amount, whereas in polluted well and spring waters the
oxidized nitrogen compounds, with other accompaniments of sewage,
are to be found in excess. By means, then, of these oxidized nitrogen
compounds we get collateral evidence throwing light on the nature
and probable source of the contamination, of which a mere percentage
estimation of organic matter would fail to give the slightest indi-
cation.

The mistake has been hitherto that the discussion has been
narrowed by looking at the question almost entirely from a chemist's
* See ' Nature,' xxii. (1880) p. 222.

INVERTEBRATA. CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 849

point of view. It is, however, to tbe biologist that we must look
chiefly for the future elucidation of the subject, and he has a field of
the widest range, embracing much untrodden ground, for his investi-
gations.

Browuian Movement. — ^Similar motions to those shown under the
Microscope by small particles in liquids have been attributed to dust-
particles in air, and accounted for by the shock of molecules with the
particles.

In a paper treating fully of the movements of very minute bodies,*
Herr Niigeli calculates (from data of the mechanical theory of gases
as to the weight and number, and collisions of molecules) the velocity
of the smallest fungus-particles in the air that can be perceived with
the best instrument, supposing a nitrogen or oxygen molecule to drive
against them. It is, at the most, as much as the velocity of the hour-
hand of a watch, since these fungi are 300 million times heavier
than a nitrogen or oxygen molecule. The ordinary motes would
move 50 million times slower than the hour-hand of a watch. Numbers
of the same magnitude are obtained for movements of small jiarticles
in liquids. In both cases a summation of the shocks of different
molecules is not admissible, as the movements ai'c equally distributed
in all directions.

Niigeli therefore disputes the dancing motion of solar dust-particles,
and attributes the Browniau molecular motion to forces active between
the surface molecules of the liquid and the small particles ; but he
does not say how he conceives of this action.f

Examining very soft Rocks. — The following process of preparing
sections of very soft and friable rocks is communicated J by Mr. J. A.
Phillips to Mr. F. Rutley. The chip, which may be to some extent
hardened by saturation in a mixture of balsam and benzol until
thoroughly impregnated with it, and afterwards dried, should be
gently ground or filed down until a smooth, even surface is i)rocured ;
this surface must then be attached to a piece of glass slide cut about
an inch square, and this again fixed in a similar manner by old balsam
to a thicker piece of glass if needful, so that it can be conveniently
lield whilst the grinding is carried on. When it is reduced to such a
degree of tenuity that it will bear no more grinding, even with the finest
materials, such as jewellers' rouge, and when the removal of the section
from the glass to which it is attached would almost inevitably result
in the destruction of the preparation, the lower i)iece of glass should
be warmed and separated fi'om tlic ujjper jjiecc wliich bears the section,
and this, with its attached section, should be again cemented by the
under side of the glass to an ordinary glass slip, covered in the usual
way, and if the edges of the section, or its glass, be disfigured by
grinding, a ring or square margin of lh-uns\vick black or asphalt may
be painted over the unsightly j)iirt.

* 'SB. K. Bay. Akad. Wi.s.^.,' ISTD. p. HSO.
t Sfu ' Natuiv,' xxi. (ISSii) |>. :i.")L».

I V. Hiitl.y'.-, 'Stii'ly <>( UcM-k, ' (Sv,,. London. 1S7'.»). |' 70.
VOL. III. 3 K

850 RECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Mr. Eutley laimself says : * — In the case of very soft rocks, such
as tuffs, clays, &c., useful information may sometimes be acquired
by washing to pieces fragments of the rock ; in this way a fine mud
and often numerous minute crystals and organisms may be procured.
The best aj^paratus for effecting this gradual washing is a conical
glass about 9 or 10 inches high, across the mouth of which a cross-
bar of metal or wood is fixed. A little hole drilled in the centre of
the bar receives the tube of a small thistle-headed glass funnel.
Roughly broken fragments of the rock should be placed in the
bottom of the conical glass, and the apparatus set beneath a tap,
from which a stream of water is continually allowed to run into the
mouth of the funnel, the overflow trickling down the sides of the
glass, which should consequently be placed in a sink. In this
manner a constant current is kept up, and the fragments at the
bottom of the glass are continually turned over, agitated, rubbed
against one another, and gradually disintegrated. This action should
be kept up, often for many days, until a considerable amount of dis-
integrated matter has accumulated. Samples should then be taken
out by means of a pipette and examined under the Microscope.

When the observer wishes to mount either such materials or fine
scaly, powdery, or minutely crystallized minerals, the best method is
to spread a little of the substance on a glass slide, moisten the powder
with a drop of turpentine, and then add a droj) of Canada balsam, and
cover in the usual manner. If the attempt be made to mount
such substances directly in balsam, without the intervention of
turpentine or some kindred medium, air-bubbles are almost certain to
be included in the preparation.

Lenses for Petrographical Work. — Mr. Melville Attwood, in a
paper read before the San Francisco Microscopical Society, quotes the
following passage from Mr. Frank Eutley's book on ' The Study of
Eocks' t : " There is, however, a disadvantage attending the use of lenses
when they are applied to the examination of rocks. This lies in the
difficulty experienced by the observer when he attempts to examine
the streak of minerals under the lens, especially when the minerals
occur in very minute crystals or patches, as it is scarcely possible to
■hold a specimen, with a lens over it in focus, in one baud, and to
Ivork with a knife in the other. Laying the specimen on a table,
and using a lens in one hand and a knife in the other, is a most
Unsatisfactory process ; while the use of a lens fixed on an adjusting
stand is scarcely better. To obviate this difficulty, the author has
devised a small lens with a clip, which can be worn on the nose like
an eye-glass, and both hands are then at liberty — the one to hold the
fepecimen firmly, the other to use the knife or graver. This clip-lens
is moreover better than a watchmaker's eye-glass, because it entails
no muscular effort to keep it in place. It is better to have the lens
mounted in a horn than in a metal rim as it is less heavy and con-
sequently less liable to be accidentally shifted or displaced by the
inclination of the head."

* F. Rutley's ' Study of Eocks^',(Svo, London, 1S79), p. 73.
t Il'id., p. 44.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

851

Mr. Attwood adds that instead of a clip-lens he uses a watch-
maker's eye-glass, fixed with a screw into a light pair of steel
sjiectacle frames, which he thinks the botanist, also, will find a very
useful arrangement. This suggestion was, however, anticipated by
the late Robert Brown, whose set of spectacles were some years
since (1874) presented to the Society by Dr. Gray. Fig. 75 shows

Fig. 75.

one of the spectacle frames fitted with two double-convex lenses
in a short brass tube forming a doublet ; one lens being broken, the
focus cannot now be determined. Fig. 76 shows another arrangement
which allows the magnifier to be turned aside when it is desired to

Fig. 76.

use the naked eye. Two other pairs of spectacles also accompanied
the preceding, with lenses of about 3 inch and 4 inch focus, tho lens in
one unscrewing.

Process for Microscopical Study of very minute Crystalline
Grains.* — M. J. Thoulct" imbeds the particles of mineral in a cement
which, when set, he slices and polishes for microscoitical examination.
Tho mineral powder to be examined is mixed with ten times its
volume of oxide of zinc, and enough silicate of soda (or preferably, of
potasli) is added to make a thick paste. This paste is then transferred
to a niouM, made by laying a thin ring of ghiss upon a sheet of paper.
* ' Bull. SfK-.. Mill. Fninri>,' ii. (1880) p. 7.

3 K 2

852

RECORD 0!f current RESEARCHES RELATING TO

In a few days the mass will have set hard, and can be removed from
the mould, ground, and polished like a natural rock, as it possesses
great tenacity. On examination under the Microscope, the sections
of mineral that it contains are easily distinguished in the midst of
the surrounding opaque material.

Dr. Matthews's Machine for Cutting Hard Sections.— In the
previous volume * we gave a preliminary account of this machine,
and now add the full description, with woodcuts. Fig. 77 being a plan
view, and Fig. 78 a side elevation.

Fig. 77.

Fig. 78.

The metal stage-plate A is supported upon four pillars B B, and
is mounted upon a base-board C. On the upper side of the stage A

* See tliis Journal, ii. (1870) p. 957.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 853

are four vertical pivots d, iiiDon wliich are fitted, so as to turn freely
thereon, tlie four flanged rollers D D and D' D'. In front of tlio
rollers D is fitted a flat metal plate E, and at the back of the rollers
D' is similarly fitted a flat strip of wood F, the side of the strip
bearing against the rollers being provided with a lining of india-
rubber. The plate E and the strip F are secured together by means
of the transverse tie bolt G and the clamp H, thus forming a kind of
rectangular frame, capable of traversing freely to and fro on the
rollers D and D'. At the end of the stage-plate A is mounted in
suitable bearings a crank-shaft I, fitted with a flywheel I* and a
winch-handle J. This crank is connected by the rod K to the bolt
G of the rectangular frame E F. In front of the plate E are secured
the metal bars L and L'. The bar L is slotted, and is secured by
two screws, so as to be capable of adjustment vertically by means of
the screw I. The bar L' is pivoted to the plate by one screw, so as
to admit of adjustment laterally by means of the screw I'. A fine
saw web m is clamped by its ends to the two bars L L'.

The saw being clamped in its place, the requisite tension can be
given to it by the screw l', while, by means of the adjusting screw I,
its parallelism can be secured. On turning the crank-shaft I by
means of the winch-handle J, a reciprocating motion will be imparted
to the frame E F and to the saw m.

For holding and imparting the reqiaisite feed to the material to
be cut, the following contrivance is adopted : — Beneath the stage-
plate A is secured a tube M (shown detached in longitudinal section
at Fig. 79). Sliding freely inside this tube is a solid cylinder N.
This cylinder is pressed by a spiral spring 0 against a micrometer
screw P. On the upper side of the cylinder N is secured by screws
a lever arm Q. This lever arm carries at one end a counterpoise
weight E, and is furnished at the other end with a clamp and binding
screw S. The material to be cut — say a piece of bone — is fastened
by any suitable cement (such as glue) to a slip of wood T, and this
slip is clamped, as sliown in the figure, to the end of the lever arm Q.
By turning the micrometer screw P the cylinder N will be driven
forward, carrying with it the lever arm Q and the piece of bone to be
cut. The counterpoise R will now cause the piece of bone to bear
upwards against the teeth of the saw, and a rapid rccii)rocating
motion being imparted to this latter, as already explained, a thin
slice will be cut oil". This operation may be repeated imtil the whole
of the material is cut up. The slices can then be removed from the
wooden slip by snaking in a little warm water.

A grooved pulley U is provided on the crank-shaft in order that
the machine may be driven by a flywheel and treadle if desired, and
saws of different degrees of fineness may be employed to suit the
various materials required to bo cut.*

Bleaching and Washing Sections. f — Mr. S. Marsh, jun., suggests
the direct action of free chlurinc for bkaching vegetable tissues prior

' Son Mourn. Qiiok. Mi( r. ( liil),' vi. (I^SO) p. 8:5.
t Ibi'l., i-p. Tit-?.

854

EECOKD OF CUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

to staining, avoiding the inconvenience of alcohol which is very
slow in action and not always certain in result, and solutions of
lime chloride and chlorinated soda (Labarraque's) which so disinte-
grate that many delicate tissues are utterly ruined. The former
solution, in addition to its direct destructive influence, has a great
tendency to permit of the formation on its surface of a scum of
carbonate of lime ; this, sinking into the fluid, settles itself upon the
sections, so that if they escape absolute destruction they are in
danger of becoming coated with a brittle film, which proves equally
ruinous to them.

The apparatus employed for the purpose is shown in Fig. 80, and
consists of two small wide-necked (1 oz.) bottles, with a bent glass
(quill) tube passing through the centre of sound and accurately
fitting corks which are made air-tight by shellac varnish. A notch
is cut in the edge of the cork carrying the longer arm of the tube.

Fig. 80.

Fig. 81.

^~J

1_3

^^

\

^^^^S^

To use the apparatus, fill the bottle A three parts full with filtered
rain-water, and to this transfer the sections to be bleached. Into
bottle B put a suificient quantity of crystals of chlorate of potash just
to cover the bottom, and upon them pour a drachm or so of strong
hydrochloric acid, and fit in the corks. Immediately the yellow
vapour of chlorine (or, strictly speaking, of euchlorine) will be ob-
served to fill the bottle B, whence it will pass along the connecting
tube into the water contained in the bottle A, and effectually and
safely bleach the sections. When the water becomes supersaturated,
the excess of chlorine will accumulate in the bottle above the liquid,
and find an exit through the notch in the cork. As to the time
required for bleaching, this of coiarse will vary in accordance with the
nature of the sections operated upon. If the apparatus is set to work
at night (out of doors, in a covered place), in the morning the bleach-
ing is generally found to be complete ; if not, further time may be
allowed, without any danger to the sections being incurred.

Decoloration having been effected, the sections must be thoroughly
washed to eliminate all trace of chlorine before employing any stain -
ing agent. The usual method of effecting this is to put the sections
into a large basin full of water, and repeatedly to change the water.
As this process is not only tedious, but exposes the sections to consider-

INVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 855

able risk of being contaminated with dust and other extraneous matter,
Mr. Marsh emi^loys a system of continuous washing (see Fig. 81^,
For this purpose a small wide-necked bottle, as for bleaching, is
required, and into the side, half an inch or so below the bottom of the
cork, a small hole about an eighth of an inch in diameter is drilled.
A well-fitting cork must be pierced through the centre, so as to permit
the stem of a small funnel to pass through it. By means of a small
indiarubber tubing, the funnel stem is to bo prolonged till it reaches
the bottom of the bottle on the side tvhich is opposite to that containing
the perforation.

The bottle is then half filled with filtered water, and the sections
put into it, and the cork carrying the funnel fitted in. After having
placed a disk of filtering paper into the funnel, this is put beneath the
water-tap, and a gentle stream allowed to trickle into it. The water
will pass to the bottom of the bottle, gradually ascend, and then pass
out at the hole in the side, by which means a constant change in the
water in the bottle is brought about, and a system of continuousi
washing established. As in bleaching, so in washing, the apparatus
may be left to do its work in the night. If the tap be set running in
the evening, the washing will be found to have been most efiectually
accomplished by the morning.

Wickersheimer's Preservative Liquid.* — Herr Wickersheimer
has been continually making experiments for improving this liquid,f
and has become convinced that one and the same mixture is not
suited for all objects ; and he has therefore made four different kinds,
for the application of which the following directions are given : — ■

No. 1 is for injecting whole corpses, including, when still prac-
ticable, the injection of separate parts ; also for immersing preparations
of muscle and nerve, and generally for preserving such preparations
as easily become mouldy. The injection is effected by introducing
the fluid by a syringe with a blunt tube into the carotid artery, or into
any large blood-vessel in separate portions of corpses. For smaller
bodies, lOOgi'ammcsof the liquid should be allowed for every kilo, in
weight (if the body, for larger ones 1 kilo, of liquid to 25 kilo, weight.
For adult men and large animals, it is enough rf '500 to 'TSO kilo, of
liquid is used to every 25 kilo, weight.

No. 2 is for preserving and keeping flexible the ligaments of the
skeleton ; also for preserving Crustacea, beetles, &c., and for lung.
The objects should lie in the liquid from two to six days, according to
their size, and then be put by dry. Lung must be treated as follows,
in order to retain its elasticity permanently. After having first forced
out the blooil, the lung is filled with the liquid by a funnel which is
inserted in the windpipe until it is fully extended. Then, after tlio
liquid has been allowed to drain away again through the windpipe,
the lung is immediately treated several times with the liquid on the
outside, and inflated ; it is then advisable to rinse it once more in u
mixture of one i)art of No. 1 and one part of glycerine, and put it in a

* ' Eutt'mr.l. Naclir.; vi. (1880) p. 12'J.
t Soo tliis Jounml, nutr, pp. 'A'lft niul 09(J.

856 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

wide glass witli a close-fitting wooden lid, as tins prevents the external
surface of the lung becoming dry in case it is not inflated for a long
time.

This is also adapted for permanently preserving plants, especially
Algfe, without shrivelling or the chlorophyll changing. The experi-
ments with plants, however, are not concluded, and Herr Wickers-
heimer hopes to make important advances.*

No. 3 is for microscopical objects. The process is the same as
for glycerine. Those which are intended to be prepared later should
be kept meantime in No. 2. Although with No. 3 excellent results
have already been obtained, experiments are not concluded.

No. 4 is for preserving and hardening brains, and for preserving
fishes and birds with their feathers.

The attention of anatomists, &c.,is called to the fact that by injecting
2 to 2^ kilo, of liquid No. 1 before dissecting, all possibility of blood-
poisoning is prevented, although decomposition may have commenced.
In those cases where it is not advisable to use No. 1 fluid, lest traces
of arsenical poisoning should be effaced, another liquid can be em-
ployed which is quite free from poison, but, like No. 1, renders blood-
poisoning in dissecting impossible.

It is not of course remarkable to find it stated that this liquid is
" not new," and that it was invented by some one else twenty years
ago.t

Preserving the Colours of Tissues.^ — It would undoubtedly be a
great advantage if the specimens in our anatomical museums could
be preserved with their original colours unaltered ; but, unfor-
tunately, hfemoglobin and most of the other pigments found in the
tissues are dissolved out or destroyed, to a greater or less extent,
by all the preservative fluids which are usually employed. If a
piece of fresh tissue be placed in commercial alcohol it very soon
becomes bleached, and the fluid becomes at the same time discoloured
by solution of the colouring matters. Hfemoglobin is soluble in
almost every known fluid, with the exception of absolute alcohol,
which, however, causes great shrinkage of the soft parts, and is,
moreover, too expensive to be very generally employed. Solutions of
chloral hydrate have been used (and with great advantage in many
cases) ; but here again, although the colouring matters are by this
means retained unaltered, they are not thereby rendered insoluble,
and hence they tend to pass out into the fluid, leaving the tissues
partially decolorized. Other media have been tried, but all have
a similar imperfection. By baking or otherwise heating the tissues,
the pigments are so altered as to be rendered insoluble in alcohol ;
but, in addition to the tediousness of the process, the action of alcohol
is then to turn them black in the course of time, and hence this
method is but little employed, except with the object of demonstrating
large extravasation and similar changes.

* See. this Journal, anfe, p. 696.

t See Duncker's 'Zeitschr. IMikr. Fleischscliau,' i. (1880) p. 100.

X ' Jouru. Anat, ami Phvsici.,' xiv. (1880) p. 511.

INVERTEBRATA. CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 857

It is a distinguisliing cliaractcristic of hfemoglobin that, although
a crystalline body, it is not difi'usible ; and hence it occurred to Mr.
H. Bendall that if specimens could be coated with a transparent
membrane of a homogeneous nature, the colouring matters would be
l)rescrved in situ. For this purpose let a quantity of isinglass or
transparent gelatine be taken and steeped in excess of cold water for
twenty-four hours, and then, after draining off the supernatant fluid, be
dissolved by heating over a water-bath. The specimen is then taken,
and, after being carefully wiped to remove suiierfluous moisture,
is either plunged in the liquid gelatine, or brushed thoroughly over
therewith by means of a camel's-hair brush. After having received a
uniform coat, the specimen is suspended in a cool and dry atmosphere
for two or three hours, until the gelatine has had time not only to set,
but to dry slightly on its external surface ; it may then be suspended
in a jar of alcohol, taking care that it be not allowed to rub against
the sides of the jar for the first twenty-four hours. The .alcohol, by
its dehydrating power, rapidly removes the excess of water in the
gelatine, and dries it up to a thin varnish-like, and (if suitable
gelatine be employed) perfectly transparent coat, through which the
pigments are unable to pass out. The alcohol employed should not
be diluted, for if this be done the gelatine remains soft and easily
comes oflF.

By this means the author has been enabled to preserve, in an
almost unaltered condition, portions of muscle, liver, &c., for over
four months ; and not only so, but more delicate graduations of colour,
such as arc seen in an atheromatous aorta, for example, are well
maintained.

It is as well to point out that this method is not suitable for such
tissues as contain very much blood— e. g. the spleen — nor for cyanotic
organs ; for in such cases the blood pigment is carried to the free
surface, and deposited beneath the gelatine in a layer which may be
so dense as to give a darkened and discoloui'cd appearance to the
specimen. Nevertheless, for most tissues the method has hitherto
yielded higlily satisfactory results, and has the additional advantage
that the alcoliol docs not become muddy or discoloured, and hence
does not require to be frequently renewed.

Staining-fliiid for Amyloid Substance.* — Dr. Curschmann, of
Ilamhurg, claims tliat metliyl green lias a peculiar affinity for amyloid
substance, colouring it an intense violet. Surrounding tissues that
have not undergone degeneration are stained grcrn or bluish green.
The contrast is striking; tlie smallest spot of amyloid disease can bo
readily discovered. Methyl green also colours hyaline casts ultra-
marine blue, so in a section of the kidney the healthy tissue would
appear green, liyaline casts blue, and amyloid spots violet. A one per
cent, aqueous solution is used, a few minutes' immersion being suffi-
cient ; a more uniform coloration is produced by using a more
dilute solution and immersing the section for a longer time. Alcohol,
turpentine, and oil of cloves quickly discharge the colour, hcnco

» • Louisville Modical Hornl.l,' ii. (1880) p. 123.

858 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

specimens cannot be mounted in balsam, but may be mounted in
glycerine.

Carbolic Acid for Mounting. — The process described at p. 693
bas been received with considerable favour by English microscopists,
and we therefore print the following paper, also from Victoria,* which
contains a full account of the process by Mr. J. R. Y. Goldstein, the
Hon. Secretary of the Microscoj)al Society of Victoria.

" The mounting of objects in Canada balsam by means of
turpentine has long since been a serious difficulty to students, and a
nuisance even to practical hands. Turpentine evaporates so slowly
that the hardening or baking and finishing of slides becomes a
serious obstacle where time is concerned, while the previous pre-
paration of objects saturated by water is exceedingly troublesome,
and a general characteristic of mossiness pervades the whole oper-
ation.

The members of this society have for some years adopted with
advantage a method suggested by the President, Dr. Ralph, in 1874,
by which the unpleasantness of mounting in balsam is avoided, and
the time occuined considerably shortened. Now that the process
has stood the test of years and has proved so decidedly beneficial,
it is considered advisable to publish in the Journal of the Society
a detailed description of it, in order that microscopists generally
may know and use what may properly be called ' Ralph's Carbolic
Process.'

When first calling attention to the subject Dr. Ralph suggested
the use of glycerine as a means of withdrawing water from objects
before using the acid, but experience has shown that this is not
necessary, as by the use of heat carbolic acid will readily absorb, and
eventually replace the water in any object saturated therewith.

The carbolic acid used should be the purest that can be obtained,
and it will be as well to keep the greater portion as stock in a dark-
blue glass-stoppered bottle, so as to prevent it being discoloured by
exposure to light. From this can be transferred as required a small
quantity to a working bottle of about two drachms capacity. If the
acid is so pure as to be crystallized, melt what is in the smaller
bottle and add a few drops of spirits of wine, which will easily mix
with the acid if held for a few minutes over the spirit-lamp. The
acid will then be less likely to crystallize and the small quantity of
spirit used will not affect the process. Should there be any diffi-
culty in procuring stock of perfectly clear acid, the ordinary coloured
acid of the shops, if in crystals, may be used without fear. As will
be noticed presently, we drive off" all the carbolic acid used, replacing
by clear balsam or dammar, therefore the coloured acid can do no
harm. Perfectly clear acid soon becomes discoloured by exposure to
light, and heat lias a similar effect; when we boil objects in acid
and allow them to remain for a few days, the acid will then have
changed to a rich brown, but as this does not affect the object steeped
therein, it need not trouble us further.

* ' Jonra. Micr. Soc. Vict.,' i. (1880) p. 50.

INVERTEBEATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 859

The advtantagos claimed for this process are that objects need
never be allowed to dry before mounting in balsam or dammar ; that
the operation from first to last is simple and cleanly ; while compared
with the old turpentine process, this is wonderfully rapid. A tiny
insect may bo caught alive, boiled, cleared, mounted in balsam, the
slide finished oft" and put away in the cabinet, all within half an hour.

Objects saturated with water should be drained as well as possible,
without allowing all the water to run off, as in that case air might be
admitted, then transferred to a clean test-tube, covered with carbolic
acid from the working bottle, and boiled for a few minutes over a
spirit-lamp. Corked tightly, a test-tube full of objects in acid may
be put asido for any length of time before mounting. When we
desire to mount one of these objects we transfer it to a clean slide,
put on a thin glass cover, and with the aid of a small pipette allow
enough clean carbolic acid to run in to flood the object. Having
examined under the Microscope, and arranged it to our liking, we
warm the slide over a spirit-lamp, and place sufficient balsam or
dammar on the slide close to the cover ; liquefied by the heat either
medium will at once rim in and drive the acid out at the other side.
This will be greatly facilitated by inclining the slide and holding a
small piece of blotting paper under the thumb close to the lower edge
of the thin cover. When all the acid has been drawn off, the slide is
then placed on a hot-plate to harden, and afterwards finished in the
usual manner by scraping off the superfluous balsam, wiping the slide
carefully with a clean rag moistened with spirits of wine, and finished
on the turntable by sealing the cover with a ring of Brunswick
black or other varnish.

Another aid to the thorough displacement of the acid is to use the
balsam in as thick and pasty a condition as possible. At the same
time this is not essential to success, as thin balsam works very well.
Benzine* should bo used in preference to turpentine to liquefy
balsam that has become too stiff. Newly purchased balsam is often
very thin. In this case it is advisable to bake it in a cool oven for
some days until it is hard enough to resist slight pressure, and then
add about one-fourth part of benzine, placing the bottle in a hot-
water bath, which will ensure perfect mixture. Balsam thus prepared
will harden quickly, which it does not do if liquefied by turpentine.
Turpentine may therefore bo excluded from the Microscopist's
laboratory.

When mounting, it is well to bo provided with several pieces of
blotting paper about an inch square. These should bo used as above
described to aid tlie substitution of one licpiid for another, particularly
when displacing watery carbolic acid by pure acid.

Vegetable tissues such as plant leaves, sections of wood, &.C., after
washing in water may be drained and transferred at once to tlie slide,
covered by thin glass, flooded in carbolic acid, and then boiled over
the spirit-lamp, adding fresli acid from time to time until tlie object
is perfectly clear. Air bubbles may thus bo boiled t)ut, and the

* Some prcfur chlornfonn, wliicli will lic|Uefy \hv ))iilsam willioiit luat, but wo
tliiuk the Ijcnzino mucli superior in aubaoquciit opcrutious.

8 (JO RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

object decolorized and rendered beautifully clear by the process.
When cool add fresh acid and follow with balsam as above.

Insects whole, or their organs, and animal tissues generally may
be treated in the same way, which seems to suit such organisms better
than the old method. The action of the acid under heat is rapid * and
can easily be stopped when required by simply blowing upon the
cover.

In preparing Sertularians and Polyzoa, where the empty cells
retain the air so pertinaciously, this annoyance may be overcome by
boiling in water and allowing to cool, replacing the water by carbolic
acid, when alternate boiling and cooling at intervals more or less
lengthened will effectually dispose of air in the cells. Those who
have opportunities of collecting on the sea-shoro will find that just
after storms many species will have been washed ujjon the beach,
some possibly alive. Objects thus obtained, or by means of dredging,
should at once be placed in small phials in a fluid consisting of sj)irits
of wine and water in equal parts — sea-water will do. When these
are taken home, they should be washed several times in fresh water
to get rid of the salt, sorted, and transferred to a mixture of spirits of
wine and fresh v/ater in equal jiarts. They can thus be kept in good
order for any length of time, or they may be mounted at once by the
carbolic process.

Eadulas or palates of molluscs should be boiled in strong liquor
potassfe for a few minutes, well washed in three or four waters to
remove all traces of the potash, and then, treated with the carbolic
acid as above described, may be mounted very quickly.

To ensure clear mounts, the balsam should always be imme-
diately preceded by perfectly clean acid, displacing with the aid of
blotting paper the acid previously used. If this be neglected, and
the acid first used should not be completely removed, a little cloudi-
ness may result from the admixture of the balsam with the water in
the acid. In this case the slide must be flooded in fresh acid to
soften the balsam, heated, and the cloudy balsam drawn off by blotting
paper, substituting fresh balsam."

Wax Cells. t — ^Mr. F. Barnard gives the following as a preferable
process for making these cells : — Take a small piece of wax according
to the size and depth of the cell required, place it in the middle of
the glass slip, warm it thoroughly over a spirit lamp, then press it
upon the slide perfectly flat and even with a smooth surface. This
is easily done by means of what he calls a gauge made thus : on
each end of a slip of glass, cement with balsam small pieces of paper,
card, or glass of the thickness of the required cell, moisten the under
side and press upon the warm wax till down as far as the end pieces
will allow ; by moving this gauge about a little, there will be a
tolerably smooth and level cake of wax on the slide the thickness of
the gauge.

* As some objects are injured by heat, they may be cleared by soaking in cold
carbolic acid for a few days, or until cleared sufficiently,
t ' Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict.,' i. (1880) p. 53.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPYj ETC. 861

The centre can be turned out with a penknife or other convenient
tool on a turntable. The cell can be cleaned with a rag moistened
with benzine, or to avoid the difficulty of this the glass slip may be
covered with a solution of gum tragacanth, to which a small quantity
of sugar has been added, allowing it to dry before the application of
the wax, when the marks of the knife left in turning out the cell can
be removed by washing in water only. These cells would not, how-
ever, do for mounting in glycerine, water, &c., and the adhesion of the
wax to the slide would be destroyed ; but if the pi-ocess is carried a
little further and the slide with the cell on is soaked in w^ater, the
cell will be freed, and when washed and dried can be apjdied to
another slide. By this use of gum any number of cells can be made
and kept ready, like glass and vulcanite cells.

Dry "Mounts" for the Microscope— Wax and Gutta-percha
Cells.* — The following is by Professor Hamilton L. Smith (in the
new American weekly periodical ' Science,' w'hich is intended to be
conducted on a similar plan to ' Nature ').

" What shall we use to preserve dry mounts effectually ? Many
may think that nothing is easier ; a cell of Brunswick black ; a wax
ring, or one of balsam ; but the question is not thus easily to be
disposed of. The writer has, within the last five years, mounted, or
has had mounted under his siqjervision, some 15,000 slides of various
microscopical objects, chiefly, however, foraminifera and diatoms ;
half of these were dry mounts.

Two things are important — the cell should be quickly and easily
made, and the object when mounted in it should remain unchanged.
There are very few cells as now made which will fulfil both these
conditions, especially the latter. The deterioration of delicate dry
mounts, and especially of test objects, sometimes within a few months
after their preparation, but more or less certain in nearly every case,
is well enough known.

All of the dry mounts of the Euleustein series of diatoms, e. g.,
which I have seen, are spoiled ; and my cabinet is full of such prepa-
rations. Even Moller's do not escape, though they are, u2)on the
whole, the most durable. I have abundance of amateur works that
no doubt looked very beautiful just as they issued from the hands of
the enthusiastic preparers, which are now, alas ! mere wrecks ; and,
worse than this, many choice and rare specimens, which I cannot
replace, hopelessly ruined.

I believe that I was the first one to suggest the use of sheet wax
for the bottoms of cells for foraminifera and other opaque objects,
and of wax rings for diatoms and other transjiarent objcjcts. The
number of spoiled specimens, especially of diatoms and delicate
transparent objects which I can now show, proves that this method of
mounting is decidedly bad. I have lived to see the day when I shall
be quite glad if the responsibility of suggesting sucli a nuisance as
the wax ring can be transferred to some one else. For large opaque
objects, like most of the foraminifera, seeds, pollens, &c., the object

♦ 'Science,' i. (ISSO) p. 'J(J.

862 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

itself is not so mucli injured, but the covering glass will, sooner or
later, become covered (inside tlie cell) on the under surface, with a
dew-like deposit, which, when illuminated, will glisten almost like so
many minute points of quicksilver, and though out of focus when the
object is viewed, will show very disagreeably, like a thin gauze
between ; and with transparent objects these minute globules will not
only dot the entire field as so many dark or light points, but the
object itself will appear as though it had been wetted.

Not long ago a well-known optician showed to me a spoiled slide
oiPodura. The scales were very good and large — in fact, it was a slide
which I had given to him, and it had been selected by myself in
Beck's establishment in London as unexceptionably fine. This slide
began slowly to show symptoms of ' sweating.' One scale after
another appeared, as though moisture had, in some mysterious way,
penetrated to the objects ; it was not water, however, for when the
cover, after much trouble, had been removed, and warmed sufficiently
to evaporate anything like water, the scales still exhibited the same
appearance, and, in fact, the heat required to get rid of this apparent
moisture was so great that the scales were charred. When wax rings
are used, this apparent wetting or 'sweating' occurs quickly, and
more disagreeable than this, innumerable elongated sj)ecks, possibly
crystalline, appear all over the under surface of the cover-glass.
The same trouble occurs when any of the ordinary asphalt prepara-
tions are used, and the only cement which I have thus far found to
be tolerably successful is shellac thoroughly incorporated with the
finest carbon (diamond black), such as is used in the preparation of
the best printing inks ; the solvent being alcohol, these rings dry
rapidly, and the cover is attached by heating. Even these rings
cannot be trusted, unless thoroughly dry, and siiontaneous drying is
better than baking. I have had preparations spoiled after mounting
on asphalt rings, which had been made for over a year, and which
had been subjected for several hours to the heat of a steam-bath.
With large, somewhat coarse objects, the defect is not so marked ;
but with delicate ones, and especially test objects, it is simply a
nuisance. With care I think the shellac rings may answer pretty
well. I have not tried the aniline coloured rings. The moisture
(whatever it is), and the crystalline specks, appear to be derived from
the vaporizable parts of the wax, or cement, given off under con-
ditions where one would suppose such a thing impossible ; it is, how-
ever, a fact ; I have the proof of it, and I dare say hundreds of others
have, too plainly evident.

There is another mode of making cells which promises well for
permanence. My attention was first called to this method by Dr. Tulk,
of London, who suggested for this purpose the thin gutta-percha tissue
used by surgeons in the place of oiled silk. I have had special
punches made, which cut neat rings from this tissue, and I have used
these rings with the greatest satisfaction. I have no preparation of
my own more than about two years old ; these, so far, show no signs
of change. Dr. Tulk informs me that he has them ten years old, and
still good as when new. I have noticed that in some recent papers

mVERTEBRATA, CRTPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 863

iu the microscopical journals the writers, wlio with little experience
have so lauded wax rings, speak of ' thin rubber ' for rings ; evidently
they have seen somewhere the gutta-percha mount, and supposed it
rubber — the latter will not answer, melted rubber will not become
hard. One beauty of the gutta-percha ring is the very moderate
heat required ; it is thus available for many objects which might be
injured by the greater heat necessary for the asphalt or shellac rings.
As tliese rings, in the arrangement which I have spoken of, can be
rapidly made, and as they can be kept for any length of time (shut
away from the dust), they are at any moment ready as well as con-
venient for use. The preparation is first arranged, dried or burnt on
the cover, the slide cleaned, a ring laid on the centre, and on this the
cover is placed ; the whole is now held together by the forceps, and
sliijhtly warmed, just sufficient to soften the gutta-percha ; the forceps
may now be laid aside, or used simply to press the cover home,
wanning the slide gently, also the cover ; the perfect contact of the
softened ' tissue ' with the cover and slide is easily recognized, and
with a little care this can be effected very quickly, and nothing further
is necessary. A finishing ring of coloured cement makes a very neat
mount, but it is not necessary."

Mr. F. Kitton, writing* on the above paper, says that he is unable
to suggest a remedy.

The " damping-off " of dry mounts, particularly of diatoms, used
to be (some twenty-five years ago) attributed to the imperfect washing
of the diatoms : either the acid used in cleaning was not eliminated, or
the water used for that purpose was impure ; but preparations which
showed no acid reaction, and which had been carefully washed with
the purest distilled water obtainable, when dry mounted, still showed
the presence of moisture. This was then accounted for (?) by the
suggestion that the supposed moisture was really condensation from
the asphalt ring supporting the cover ; he therefore mounted somo
covers perfectly cleaned (by boiling in acid, washing in distilled
water, and afterwards heating them over a Bunsen burner) on somo
hard asphalt rings; the slides were heated sufficient to cause the
covers to adhere, and when cold the latter were concave, the interior
of the cell being nearly exhausted of air. These mounts (about a
dozen) were carefully finished, and then left upon the table for several
montlis before examination. Some of them showed minute globules
on the inner surface of the cover-glass, othei'S minute radiating acicular
crystals, and the remainder were perfectly clear.

Tliis experiment being far from satisfactory, he tried " shellac "
as follows : Perforating a hole about ,\ inch in diameter, in a piece of
" tliick " thin glass, he covered tlio edges with the lac, and cemented
two til in covers to it, aiid with a similar result to the previous experi-
ment. He also tried paper cells saturated with " shellac " dissolved
ill spirit, or soakeil in paraffin wax, but in no case were they invariably
successful. lie has therefore come to the conclusion that the fault
rests with the cover itself, and conGrniatory to this opinion is the fact
that the covers on balsam {hardened before attaching the cover) sorac-
♦ ' KukI. M.rli..' xxxi. (1S80) p. ."iS'i.

864 RECORD OF CURREMT RE>,EARCHES RELATING TO

times sliow like deposits. A similar " sweating " almost invariably
occurs on our oculars, which has often been referred to an exudation
from the " black " within the tube, but erroneously.

Mr. Kitton has in his i^ossession a small box of thin covers, selected
by the late William Smith, author of the ' Synopsis of British Dia-
tomacefc,' of which at least 30 per cent, exhibit traces of oxidation in
the form of minute pits. Query — Would not these covers have shown
the so-called " damping-off " if used ?

Covering Fluid Mounts.* — In mounting objects in fluid, one of
the principal requirements is to fasten the cover of the cell securely,
so as neither to permit leakage nor runuing-in of the cement. There
are two methods described in most of the text-books, both of which
have, according to Mr. W. M. Bale, disadvantages that impair their
utility to a greater or less extent.

The first, which is recommended by Davies, is to paint the cell on
its upper surface, and the cover on its under surface near the margin,
with thin coats of gold size or other cement, and to press down the
cover, forcing out the superfluous fluid in doing so, when the varnished
surfaces of the cover and cell, not being affected by the fluid, will adhere
together. It is a serious defect in this process that it will not permit
of sliding the cover to one side after fixing it, if, as frequently
happens, it should be necessary to readjust the position of an object
which may appear on examination under the Microscope to require
alteration. Moreover, thin pellicles of fluid frequently remain between
the cover and the surface of the cell, preventing the perfect adhesion
of the cement, and allowing the ingress of air. The other pro-
cess, which is preferred by Dr. Carpenter, is to simply apply the
cover upon a cell a little larger than itself, and when the outside is
dry to paint it round the margin with varnish, giving several coats as
they successively dry. This has the disadvantage of not holding the
cover sufficiently firmly to the cell, and of being peculiarly liable to
" running in."

These evils are to a great extent obviated in the following plan,
which is especially adapted to cells of any thickness not greater than
that of ordinary card or thin glass. An essential point consists in
reversing Carpenter's rule, and using a cell smaller than the covering
glass, so that when the cover is in position it projects beyond the cell
for about one-sixteenth or one-twelfth of an inch on every side. The
cells may be made of any suitable material — thin tissue paper will
serve for minute objects, and common cardboard for those of con-
siderable thickness. The cell may be attached to the slide, or simply
placed in the position which it is to occupy, without being cemented.
The objects are immersed in the fluid in the centre of the cell and the
cover pressed gently down, forcing out the fluid which is in excess of
the capacity of the cell, and after it is ascertained, by examination
under the Microscope, that the object requires no readjustment, the
fluid must be removed from the space between the cover and the slide
outside the cell-wall. This is easily accomplished by simply allowing

* 'Joiini. Micr. Soc. Vict.,' i. (1880) pp. 57-GO.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 865

the slide to stand till the superfluous fluid has evaporated, or, where
the cell is thick enough, blotting-paper may be inserted under the
margin of the cover to absorb it. If this plan be adopted, care must
be taken, after the fluid is removed, to allow the slide to stand for a
minute or two until the slide and the under surface of the cover
margin are quite dry, otherwise the cement will not adhere. Two or
three drops of thin balsam or gold size are then to be applied at
different points of the edge of the cover, when it will run in by
capillary attraction and fill the space outside the cell and beneath the
cover. Directly this cavity is filled, any superfluous cement remaining
on the slide must be removed, otherwise the running-in process will
extend too far, and the cement will enter the cell. The slide may then
be put aside to harden. It will often be found after a day or two,
especially with cells of considerable thickness, that the cement will
be so shrunk fi'om evaporation as no longer to quite fill the space
destined for it, when a little more may be applied at the edges till
the space is refilled, care of course being taken to scrupulously remove
the superfluous cement as soon as the requisite amount has run in.
It occasionally happens that some of the fluid is forced out of the cell
in process of drying, and occupies part of the space which should be
filled only by the cement. This " running out " is no doubt caused
by the shrinkage of the cement drawing the cover down more closely,
and if the fluid extends only a very slight distance beyond the outer
margin of the cell no injury is done, but if enough is expelled to make
a passage nearly or quite through the cement wall, there will be a
liability of leakage. The best safeguard against this mishap is to be
cautious that the cement is not run in till the whole of the fluid has
evaporated from outside the cell, or even till the thin film between
the covering glass and the upper surface of the cell has commenced to
dry. When this occurs, the cover will generally be drawn down as
closely as is necessary, and the cement may be applied with reasonable
security.

The result of this operation is to secure a double cell, the inner
part consisting of the paper or wliatcver material may be used, and
the outer of a solid wall of cement firmly uniting the slide and cover,
and as wide as may be required. The author uses a cell about one-
eighth of an inch less in diameter than the cover, giving a margin of
-jJ^ all round. Care must be taken in finishing slides mounted in this
manner, as ho has fomid one commence to run in on the application
of varnish, after being mounted some months, the fresh varnisli having
softened the original cement. This difiiculty would probably be
obviated by using a rajjidly drying varnish, and only applying a thin
layer at once, or by making a narrow circle of gum round the margin
of the cover and aHowing it todrybefitre using the finishing material;
or by using jiaper covers, and tlius dis2)cnsing with varnish entirely.
Thei-o can bo no doubt that slides mounted in this way will have
almost tlio permanency of balsam mountings, so far as freedom from
external influences can secure it.

A modification of the above process may be used with media which
will not evaporate to dryness, such as glycerine and castor oil. In

VOL. III. 3 L

866 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

this case it will be advisable to place the object iu the centre of the
cell, in a quantity of the medium so small that on j)ressing down the
cover the drop will not quite fill the cell, and consequently none will
be forced out. The cement may then be run iu under the margin, as
above described. If the medium be thin and likely to spread over
the floor of the cell before the cover can be applied, it will be better
to suspend a small drop from the centre of the cover, and bring it
down upon the object ; and in any case the cover should be moistened
with the medium before applying it.

The author adds in a note that he finds Tuckett advises the use
of a cover larger than the cell, in order to i^revcnt running in ; b\it
as he does not withdraw the fluid from the space round the cell, his
method gains no advantage over the ordinary plan in security from
leakage.

Thickness of Cover-glasses. — Dr. C. Eeddots points out,* in
answer to a complaint that cover-glasses are not accurately assorted
as to thickness by the dealers, for which it was said " there seems
no good reason," that the good reason is to be found in the extra
cost that would be entailed by measuring, so that the matter is better
left to each microscopist to do. Moreover, in these days of objectives
with large working distance — homogeneous-immersion and others —
there is no such necessity as there used formerly to be to hunt for
very thin cover-glasses.

Finishing Slides. f — A writer in the ' American Monthly Micro-
scopical Journal,' having used dammar dissolved in benzole as a
mounting medium for some time past, finds that, when thoroughly
dry, the gum becomes brittle, and a slight jar is apt to start the
covering glass, and rapid destruction of the slide follows. He has
found it necessary, therefore, to run a ring of some tough material
around the covering glass to protect it, his efforts being directed to
discovering a material that would give the necessary strength, that
can be easily handled, so as to make a neat finish. The best results
can be obtained by the use of a thick copal furniture-varnish — what
is known as rubbing-varnish — using the thickest, finest varnish that
can be procured, and putting enough dragon's blood in the bottle to
give it colour, without destroying its transparency. It should be so
thick that a small drop will not flow from the camel's-hair brush.
The older it is the better.

The slide, having been cleaned of superfluous gum or balsam, should
have a little shellac varnish run around in the angle formed by the
covering glass and the slide to prevent the coloured varnish from
running under the cover in the subsequent operations. When this is
dry, which will be in a few minutes, the slide is mounted on the turn-
table, and a sufficiency of the varnish put round the edge of the
co^j^ering glass, extending over the slide. The turntable is then put
in rapid revolution, and with the point of a knife applied to the
glass, first outside on the slide and afterwards inside on the covering

* 'Am. Mrm. MiVr. Jmirn.,' i. (1S80) p. 123. f I'-'^-, PP- 122-3.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 867

glass, a ring is spun, whicli may be made as narrow as is desired,
and with its rounded top extending above the covering glass.

The slides are laid aside in a dry place for at least a week to
harden, when the superfluous varnish can be cleaned off from the
glass with a bit of soft linen rag and rottenstone and water, rubbing
the whole mount gently with circular strokes. This removes the
superfluous varnish from the glass to the edge of the ring, leaving
it with a clean circular edge, and at the same time rubs down any
inequalities which may exist in the ring itself. After this, wash the
slide well in fresh water with a soft brush to remove all traces of the
rottenstone, and gently dry it with a soft cambric handkerchief.
When it is dry, a few circular strokes with dry cambric on the end
of the finger, will give the ring a semi-polish, which leaves it with a
very neat finish.

The whole slide is usually cleaned with the rottenstone and
water, so that when it is dried and gently wiped, it is ready to receive
the label. The whole process is quite expeditious, and the results
are so satisfactory, in the permanence and finish of the slides, that
the author is confident, if any one gives it a fair trial, it will super-
sede all other cements for a like purpose.

Novel Form of Lens.* — Dr. Cusco, ophthalmic surgeon in one
of the hospitals of Paris, has invented a lens of variable focus, in
which the pressure of a column of water or other transparent liquid
is made to alter the curvature of the flat faces of a cylindrical cell of
brass closed with thin glass disks. The pressure can be regulated
by a manometer gauge to any required degree within the limits of
working. It is said that the lens gives a sharp, well-defined focus.
It was constructed for Dr. Cusco by M. Laurent.

Swift's Radial Traversing Substage Illuminator.— Messrs. Swift
have further developed the idea of a " swinging substage " by the
apparatus shown in Figs. 82 and 83. The essential feature is the
addition of a second sector with condenser at right angles to the first.

The following is their description of the apparatus (slightly
abridged).

" This apparatus has been constructed for the purpose of increas-
ing the resolving px-ojierty of high-power objectives by causing still
more oblique pencils to impinge on the object than can be obtained by
any other method. The arrangement consists firstly of an arc-piece
fixed below tlio stage radial to an imaginary line drawn through tlic
axis of the objective, and in tlie same plane with the object. On this
an achromatic condenser of special construction is made to travel,
thus keeping the rays of light on the object during its entire travers-
ing, these rays converging in a focus through the front lens in a highly
concentrated form. The condenser is illuminated by a rectangular
prism.

The next part of the contrivance consists of a second arc-picco
placed at riglit angles to the former one ; this also cari'ies a similar
achromatic condenser and illuminating prism, and moves radial to

♦ 'Nntnr.-.' xxii. (]»s()) p. 2S0.

3 I. 2

868 BEOORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 82.

the same centre. Botli these arc-pieces are so divided that each
pencil of light can be projected at a similar angle, and previous
results always recorded in the same way. Difficult test objects are

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

869

readily revealed, especially sucli diatoms as have rectangular strisB
or markings

With diatoms easily resolvable, and only requiring one pencil of
light to sliow the markings, the second arc-piece with its illuminating
apparatus can be turned away from the stage as shown in Fig. 83.
The figure also shows how ojiaquc objects may be illuminated, viz.
by moving the condenser of the first arc-piece above the stage of the

Fig. 83.

Microscope, when a pencil of light can bo projected on to the object
more perpendicularly than with the buH's-cyc condenser, thus pre-
venting shadows in coarse or deep objects which often produce dis-
tortion and false appearances. When the apparatus is used for opaque
objects with a lower power than the 1-inch objective, the achromatic
combination can bo removed and the light directed from the prism,
which can be made to give convergent rays sufficient for use with a
4-inch objective.

A great advantage is presented in this arrangement, viz. that a
more obli({uo angle of light can bo obtained with it tlian by other
swinging stages, in consequence of the optical combination (with all its
fittings included) being less than ,V the diameter of the establislied
size of substage used with the Zcntmaycr, for instance, thus enabling
the apparatus to bo moved further up to the under stirfuce of tho
stage than if its mountings were larger. A still further improvement
claimed for it is that tlie whcde of the apparatus and its belongings
can be easily detached from tho Microscope, and an ordinary substago
slid into tlie same fitting for tlio purpose of receiving pcdarizing
apparatus, paraboloid, spot lens, &c. As its iitting is not adapted to
or coimected with tho stage, tho firmness and stability of this very
important portion of tho instrument are not thereby imi)airod."

870

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 84.

Holmes's "Isophotal" Binocular Microscope. — The description
of this Microscope should be added to the " Curiosities of Literature."
The paper was recently presented to this Society, but withdrawn on our
objection to print it au serieux and without alteration, having appa-
rently met with a similar objection at the hands of the British Asso-
ciation authorities last year. Deviation is described as being " half
as great when an isosceles prism is used," it being apparently supposed
that an " isosceles " prism has an invariable angle instead of an
infinite variety of angles. A prism is commended as giving " flatness
of field." Reflecting prisms are described as causing more loss of
light and more error than refracting ones, and notwithstanding a
5 per cent, loss of light by transmission, a net gain of 5 per cent, is
vouched for as the result of the interposition between the objective
and the eye-piece of the refracting "Isophotal" prism (!). The
" distance of the prism from the objective in relation to the eye-piece "
is held to have an efiect on the angles of incidence and emergence.
Wenham's prism is denounced as causing
the " left-eye view to be darkened, definition
impaired, field cylindrically distorted," and
Stephenson's as having prisms with " twelve
surfaces" (instead of six or eight), and as
"practically useless from the line of sight
being at right angles to the objective, and
from torsion of the image." An achromatic
prism is italicized as having only "three sur-
faces " (instead of four), and finally a right-
angled prism is apparently in future to be
known as a " Holmes prism."

The Isophotal prism as drawn by the
inventor is shown in Fig. 84 (fac-simile).

The following is the inventor's descrip-
tion verbatim:* —

" In the course of experiments to produce
a Microscope that might be used with both
eyes, I have originated three constructions.
The first of these acted by total reflection, the second by free trans-
mission through divided glasses, and the third by an achromatized
jprism."

[The first f and second J plans are then described.]
" With regard to my third and last plan of binocular Microscope,
by means of an achromatic prism. The advantages I claim for it are
(1) that it can be used as a monocular or as a binocular without
change of body-tube ; (2) that it gives two equally lighted fields in
two equally inclined body-tubes ; (3) that it gives stereoscopic effect
with less loss of light or definition than any other construction with
undivided glasses; and (4) from its evident adaptability to higher
powers."

* 'Engl. Mech.,' xxxi. (1880) p. 464.

+ ' Journ. Quek. Micr. Club,' i. (1869) p. 175.

J ' Mon. Micr. Jouru.,' iii. (1870) p. 273.

mVERTEBRATA, OEYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPYj ETC. 871

[Here follows a description with diagrams of various binocular
Microscopes, viz. : — Eiddell's (1851), Nachet's (1852), Wenham's first
(1853), Holmes's first (1858), Wenham's second (1860), Holmes's
second (1869), Stephenson's (1870).]

" Here, then, we have six different systems employing prisms
having from four to twelve surfaces to absorb light and impair defini-
tion. Division and angulation of the objective [Holmes's second
plan J disposes of all these sources of error, and gives directness and
value to an observation ; but when that plan is considered inadmis-
sible, the solution of the problem must rather be sought in the direc-
tion of a refracting arrangoaent of few surfaces, as less light is lost
and less error introduced thus than by any number of reflecting
prisms.

These considerations led to my third binocular. Fig. 84, wherein
one achromatic prism of three surfaces* of the form and in the position
shown, divides the light from the objective and bends it into itself,
until both its halves cross each other and diverge from opi)osite sides
into two eye-pieces. I call this the Isopliotal prism, and it gives the
most correct stereoscopic effects to all objects viewed, without im-
pairing illumination or definition.

The light lost by transmission is about 5 per cent., and the gain
by observing with two eyes is about 10 per cent. ; therefore, a more
brilliant view is obtained in this manner than by a monocular, using
the same glass and illuminator.

The two equally inclined bodies of the Microscope swing on a
pivot, at their junction, to such extent as to bring one of them vertical,
when the instrument becomes a monocular by merely withdrawing
the prism. This motion was ^irs/ devised by me for this Microscojie.

In applying any refracting prism to a beam of light carrying an
image, it is necessary to place the prism in such a position that it
shall refract in its least degree — that is, cause the minimum deviation
of the beam acted on ; in all other positions the image of a circular
spot of light will be elongated to an elliptical form.

In adapting a pair of prisms to bend the image pencils from the
halves of an objective across each other into opposite eyes (Fig. 81),
the violence is greater than if they were to be bent only into adjacent
eyes. It therefore becomes important to construct the prisms of such
a form as to give the least refraction possible for a given angle of
glass ; otherwise, the resulting images being elongated in one direc-
tion, a distorted view woiild be produced.

This error is entirely eliminated by attention to two consider-
ations. Firstly, the prism must receive its beam at an aiignhir and not
at a perpendicular incidence ; secondly, the distance of the prism from
the objective in relation to the cyc-piecc must bo such as to make the
angles of incidence and emergence equal to each other — no other
form or position being admissible without distortion. I claim to bo
the first to have recorded this action in connection with this subject,
and to have based the construction of an instrument on the deduction.

* This ahoiild of course bo /"»;• surfaces, which is equivalent to cijlit iu all,
the same us th« ytcpheiiaou binocular when the rellccting plute is used.

872

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 8G.

The achromatized prism for stereoscopic effects can take but
three forms. For simj^licity's sake, I will ouly deal with one half of
the prism, the other half beius; symmetrical.

If a right-angled prism (Fig. 85) receive the rays at a perpen-
dicular incidence, the whole of the refraction takes place at the
inclined second surface, and the distortion is the greatest possible.

If an isosceles prism (Fig. 86) be used, the deviation is half as
great, but still so considerable as to preclude its use.

But if my form of prism (Figs. 84 and 87) receive the incident
Fig. 85. beam on its inclined surface, the angles are more

nearly equal than in any other form in any other
position, and perfect equality may be obtained by
modifying the relative distances between objec-
tive, prism, and eye-piece.

These conditions at once indicate the dimen-
sions of the prism. When in position it must be
large enough to admit all the rays from the
objective at the distance seen to give no distor-
tion of a known object ; and here we have dis-
tinctness and flatness of field also.

Such is the Isoj)hotal prism, giving its name
to the Microscope. In the course of experiments,
I have made the prisms of the lightest and
densest glass, of the longest and shortest di-
verging power, as large as a shilling, and again
so small as to slide into a j-inch objective ; and
have arrived at what I believe to be the best
form for practical use."
It need hardly be said that the quality of " Isophotal " is not (as
the inventor would seem to imply by the title of the paper) by any
means peculiar to this instrument, those of Riddell, Nachet, Stephen-
son, and Ahrens, being equally " isophotal."

We are fortunate in having been for some years the possessor of
one of these instruments, which we preserved, not so much on account
of the " Isophotal " prism, as for the mechanical curiosity of the
arrangement by which " the two equally inclined bodies of the Micro-
scope swing on a pivot at their junction to such an extent as to bring
one of them vertical, when the instrument becomes a monocular by
merely withdrawing the prism." This motion, Mr. Holmes says,
" WB-s first devised by me for this Microscope."

Mr. Wenham subsequently pointed out* the incompleteness of
the article in regard to the binocular Microscopes previously made
(Nachet's existing form and others being omitted), and also that the
" Isophotal prism " is the same as that devised by himself in
1860.t

Mr. Holmes, in reply to Mr. Wenham's first note, wrote : J —

" Matters of date have nothing to do with the subject, there being

* ' Engl. Mech.,' xxxi. (1880) pp. 500 ami 5G9.
t Sec ' Moil. Mi.T. Jouni.,' 1874, p. 129.
t * Engl. Mcch.,' xxxi. (1880) p. 516.

Fig. 87.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 873

no question of priority in dissimilar inventions. My prism does not
claim to be either a copy of, or au improvement on, Mr. Wenliam's
prism of 1860, as he appears to suppose, but is substantially an inde-
pendent invention, made ten years later (1870) in total ignorance of
Mr. Wenbam's prism. . . . And I have only to say, in conclusion, that
my prism is as different from Mr. Wenbam's prism as a Huygbenian
eye-piece is different from a Ramsden eyo-picce."

Nachet's Microscope with Rotating Foot. — A Microscope was
devised some time ago by M. Nachet to embody a rotatory motion in
azimuth around the mirror. This was effected as follows : —

The base of the stand was a solid disk of metal, in the centre of
the face of which the mirror was attached with Nachet's usual articu-
lations, permitting free motion in all directions. Near the edge of the
base a circular groove was made, into which the foot of the Micro-
scope proper — a ring of metal carrying the pillar support, as in the
Beckett lamp — was fitted, and made to rotate easily. The centre of
this circular foot was made coincident with the optic axis of the
Microscope. It is obvious that so long as the object remained in the
axis of rotation (which was secured by the Microscope being used in a
vertical position), the azimuthal rotation around the mirror was
practically perfect, except just where the pillar of the stand intercepted
the light on the mirror ; and the varying effects of light due to this
motion, when the mirror was placed excentrically, could be observed
with facility.

The stand was intended to provide in the simplest form the equi-
valent of a perfectly concentric rotating stage, such as is adapted to
M. Nachet's more elaborate stands. We have never understood why
this inexpensive form of Student's stand has been withheld from
popular appreciation.

Edmunds's Parabolized Gas Slide and Nachet's Gas Chamber.—
Dr. Edmunds claims that everything which can be accomplished by
means of the latter apparatus * may also be accomplished by the
parabolized gas slide.f

For the study of such coarser microscopical objects as do not need
the black-ground effects of the immersion paraboloid, it is necessary
only that a ring of tin-foil, wax, or shellac bo interposed between the
margin of the thin cover and the toj) of the slide, oil or grease being
still used to seal up the interspace. Thus tlie thin cover and the film
of material under observation is lifted away from immersion contact
with the top of the central paraboloid, and gaseous reagents act in-
stantaneously upon the object. If also a slender ring of cotton or silk
bo packed into the bottom of the annular channel, it serves to hold
water and keep up the humidity of the object when, from any cause,
it is less convenient to pass gaseous reagents over a piece of wet cotton-
wool before entering the annulus of the slide.

Dr. Edmunds also considers that the gas chamber introduces a
practical ditliculty, inasmuch as on changing the reagent it takes a
long time to sweep the chamber clear of its previous contents, and

♦ See this Jouruul, ante, i>. 707. t I'^iil-. 1' 583.

874 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

therefore it becomes difficult to determine the point at whicli tlic
effects of the various reagents begin and end. On the other hand, in
the gas slide the annular channel is a mere continuation of the tube,
and is instantly swept clear, so that the effects of various reagents
mark themselves off sharply.

Advantages of the Binocular Microscope. — Very varied opinions
exist as to whether the binocular Microscope is or is not of practical
value in histological investigations. Such authorities as Professors
Huxley * and Lankester in England, Professor Eanvier in France, f
and the German biologists almost without exception have pronounced
against it. Nevertheless there is undoubtedly a large class of cases
in which the binocular Microscope is of the greatest use in the ready
recognition of the true structure of an object, and this is especially so
in transparent objects in which the precise position of one part above
or below another can be recognized by means of a binocular with
exceptional facility, and as is said by the writer of the paper next
referred to, " there is no difficulty in deciding whether a fine nerve-
termination passes over or under or into a connective-tissue corpuscle."
Several cases occurred during the last scientific session in which it
was clear that the observers had failed to appreciate the true relation
of the parts of the object in consequence of the use of a monocular
instrument.

Whilst, however, we object to the view that the binocular is not
of value in biological investigations, we have to call attention to the
necessity of avoiding an error of an opposite kind, viz. of laying too
much stress on the perfection of the stereoscopic effect when objec-
tives of high angle are used. An instance of this is to be found in a
recently published paper,| the writer of which refers to the " bold
relief" obtained with a Wenham prism used with an objective of high
angle. Cells are described as being seen, "not as flat plates, but
as spheroidal bodies." Now Dr. Carpenter long ago pointed out §
that with large angles the effect of projection is so greatly exaggerated,
that in the case of perfectly spherical objects the side next the eye
instead of resembling a hemisphere looks like the small end of an
egg. " Hence," he says, " it may be confidently affirmed — alike on
theoretical and on practical grounds — that when an objective of wider
angle than 40° is used with the stereoscopic binocular the object
viewed by it is represented in exaggerated relief, so that its apparent
form must be more or less distorted."

In addition, it may be noted that high-angled objectives having
little " penetration " produce a false sense of stereoscopic effect by
reason of the parts of the object which are within and without the
focus being larger than those which are in focus.

Reduction of Angle of Aperture with the Binocular. — Micro-
scopists should bear in mind that it is only in one direction that the
binocular reduces the angle of aj)erture of objectives. If for instance

* ' Journ. Quek. Micr. Club,' v. (1879) p. 146.

t See tliis Journal, i. (1878) p. 149.

t ' Quar. Journ. Micr. Sci.,' xx. (1880) p. 318.

§ ' The Microscope and its Revelations,' 5th ed. (1875) p. C9.

INVERTEBEATA, CIIYPTOGAMIA, MICKOSCOPY, ETC.

875

an object have parallel lines upon it, and these lie in a direction from
the back to the front of the stage, the diffraction spectra will bo
arranged in a row at right angles to the lines, and half of the spectra
which would otherwise have been admitted will be cut off by the

Fig. 88.

Fig. 89.

z

o

2

o

Object.

Spectra.

prism (Figs. 88 and 89). If, however, the object is turned round so
that the lines run from left to right, the row of spectra will bo
admitted (Figs. 90 and 91), and there will consequently bo no
diminution of aperture.

Fig. 90.

Fig. 91.

Object.

Spectra.

If the number of lines in the object were doubled, the distance
between the spectra would also be doubled, and the spectrum No. 1
in Fig. 89 would occupy the place of No. 2, and would thus fall
outside the field, and there would bo no resolution. On turning tho
object round, however (see Figs. 90 and 91), the spectrum No. 1,
though more widely separated from the central illuminating beam
by reason of the greater fineness of the lines would still fall within tho
field (occupying the jdace of No. 2) and tho object would be resolved.

It is therefore of practical importance to see that the object is
properly placed when a binocular is used.

Apertures exceeding ISC in Air. — Many microscopists still
experience a difficulty in gras])ing tho idea of an object-glass having
an upcrture " exceeding 180' in air," but a little consideration should
di8j)cl any difficulty.

Fig. 92 represents the theoretical maximum of 180" in oil or other
homogeneous fluid. It is a semicircle, enclosing 30 spaces, radiant
from the point A (of 6° each), S])read out as a fan, through which the
diffraction spectra emanating from A may bo su])posed to pass.

If wo now substitute for tho oil a fluid, such as icater, having a

876

RECOKD OF CUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

lower refractive index, the radiant spaces will become wider, and can
therefore no longer be contained in the semicircle, as is shown in
Fig. 93. The fan will have opened out, and instead of the original
30 spaces there will be only 26f , the other 3^, outside the semicircle,
being excluded.

If we now substitute air, we shall have a further widening of the
radiant spaces; the fan will have been yet further expanded (as

Fig. 93.

Fig. 92

Water.

Fig. 94,

Air.

shown in Fig. 94), arising from the still lower refractive index of air,
and the semicircle will contain no more than 20 spaces, 10 of them
being now beyond the 180°,

It will therefore be seen that while an aperture of 180° in aii-
includes (in the illustration given) only 20 radiant s])aces, 180° in
water and oil include respectively 26f and 30, these numbers repre-
senting the respective apertures in air, water, and oil, the smallest
number (20) rejiresenting, as before stated, 180° in air.

The whole confusion has arisen from not getting beyond the
simple and obvious fact, about which there can be no dispute, that a
dry lens cannot have an aperture of more than 180°. That which is not
appreciated is the fact that by substituting for the air of the dry lens
either water or some other more refractive medium than aii\ the condi-

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 877

tions are entirely changed, and tliat " aperture " is not a question of
" angles" simply as angles, at all.

Diameter of Microscope-tubes.^ — In a paper read two or three
years ago to the Sau Francisco Microscopical Society (now first pub-
lished *), Dr. J. H. Wythe says that the diameter of the Microscope-
tube has an important relation to the distinctness and luminosity of
the image. Few tubes are wide enough to utilize more than a small
proportion of the rays proceeding from an objective. The field-glass
of the eye-piece should be of the greatest diameter possible for its
focal length, and the tube wide enough to receive it, in order to
concentrate the greatest number of rays from the objective. The
short tubes of French and German Microscopes are supplied with
narrow eye-pieces, which cut the cone of rays nearer the objective,
and give a more brilliant image than would be possible in a longer
tube. If the tube be longer, it must also be wider, and the eye-piece
of corresponding diameter.

Wythe's Amplifiers. — Dr. Wythe in the same paper proceeds to
explain his views as to the construction of amplifiers, some of which
he exhibited to the Society, which were considered to be a great
improvement upon any previously seen.

" In considering the construction of the Microscope with a view to
greater amplification by the eye-piece, it occurred to me that the
concave lens or meniscus used to diverge the rays of the objective
should form a part of the eye-piece, and be of as large diameter as the
tube will allow. If it be of small diameter, it must be placed nearer
the objective. This is the form and position of the amplifiers of
Tolles, Zentmayer, and others.

One of the amplifiers, exhibited by me to the Society on a
previous occasion, consists of a conical meniscus, whose position in
the tube and eficcts correspond with the amplifiers above named. With
this simple addition placed in the lower end of the draw-tube the
magnifying power of an objective can be nearly doubled with little
loss of light or of definition.

The other form of amplifier now exhibited is still better. A
double concave lens, or meniscus, of as great diameter as the tube
will allow and of considerable diverging power, is placed at a distance
of from 2 to 4 inches in front of the eye-piece. In the improved
form in wliich I now present it, a concave meniscus of 6 inches
equivalent focus and 1;\- inch diameter (which formerly served as
part of the object-glass of a small telescope), is placed in a draw-
tube at the end next the eyc-pieco and about 3 inches from the
latter. To counteract the aberration of the amplifier, I have some-
times substituted foi' the plano-convex field-glass of the Huyghenian
eye-piece a convex meniscus of short focus, which gives also a very
wide and flat field of view. Ordinary eye-pieces and the pcrisco])iC
eye-pieces of Gundlach may also bo used with the amplifier. Tlie
amplifying eyc-pieco, thus constructed, 1ms given me great satisfaction.
If the concave meniscus were made achromatic, it would doubtless be

* ' Am. Joiini. Mior.,' v. (1880) p. 81.

878 EECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

a still further improvement, yet the performance of the eye-piece
leaves little to be desired. The wavy, basket-like, longitudinal strise
on Surirella gemma and the hexagons on P. angulatum are well seen
with a \ objective, and the Frustulia Saxonica and A. pellucida (dry)
have been resolved by it with a non-adjusting ^ of Gundlach's.

In place of the concave meniscus referred to, I have also used,
with nearly as good effects, a double concave lens of 2 or 3 inches
equivalent focus, such as can be obtained at an optician's for about
50 cents. So that by a very small cost of time and money, the pos-
sessor of an ordinary objective may increase the power of his instru-
ment to a very great degree.

I reiterate the conviction before expressed, that further improve-
ment of the Microscope may be looked for in the construction of eye-
pieces— regulating their magnifying power and increasing their
diameters so as to concentrate rays from the objective, which are now
absorbed by the sides of the tube."

Foreign Mechanical Stages. — We described and illustrated at
pp. 712-13 (Figs. 60-1) a mechanical stage (by Schmidt and
Haensch), which was claimed to be a great improvement uj)on other
stages, and the action of which, as regards the movement of the
object in two rectangular directions, and the proof that thereby every
part of the object must certainly come into the field of view, were
given with extreme minuteness, as if the idea of a mechanical
stage with rectangular movements had only now dawned upon
microscopists.

The matter has now been carried a step further, and we are
brought somewhat nearer to the present day by the two stages
described below, and which are represented to be better than the
English stages in several important particulars. As the descrip-
tion * wonld suffer by any abstract, we have given a full translation.
The writer (Dr. E. Kaiser, of Berlin) first refers to the above Micro-
scope of Schmidt and Haensch.j and its arrangement for exact
centering of the tube whilst focussing, and then proceeds as
follows : —

" We Germans have hitherto fitted up our Microscopes in a most
meagre way as regards mechanical accessory apparatus. If we compare
our instruments in this respect with those made on the other side of
the Channel, we must certainly confess that ours are far excelled by the
English ones. We have always consoled ourselves for this with the
idea that the numerous mechanical appliances of the English instru-
ments are really only playthings which are never in any case necessary.
But nothing is so erroneous as this idea. The so-called ' substage '
of the English, their provisions for the fine adjustment and me-
chanical motion of the object, do not constitute a mere plaything in
any sense, but are absolutely necessary and indispensable for scientific
investigations. The conviction of this has gained ground with time
more and more in oiu' scientific circles, and to Zeiss's manufactory,

* ' Bot. Centralb].,' i. (18S0) p. 728. t See this Journal, ante, p. 713.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 879

under the excellent theoretical guidance of Professor Abbe, is due the
credit of being the first to take into account this new tendency.

A year ago, the firm of Schmidt and Haensch following in the
footsteps of Zeiss, made improvements in the Microscope, and in
particular brought out their new movable stage.

The first and oldest movable stage on Schmidt and Haensch's
model was placed on the ordinary stage, and very much distinguished
itself over those of English construction [i. e. the stage on j5. 713 !] in
being more simple, and entailing, therefore, a higher degree of
certainty and exactness * in the work. The motion from back to front
was produced by a screw, whilst the lateral motion (from right to
left) was effected by a simple lever-movement. This construction
did. not provide, it is true, for the diagonal motion of the object,
which is possible with English Microscopes, but, on the other hand, it
afforded what . is entirely wanting in English stages, an absolute
guarantee that no portion however small of the preparation can escape
the attention of the observer. The eminent im2)ortance of this in many
scientific investigations need not be insisted upon by us.

One defect, however, of this stage of Schmidt and Haensch could
not be disguised, and that was that it appeared only suitable for
use with low powers. All other objections which have been brought
against it, especially those of Professor Johne of Dresden,t must bo
met with the rejoinder that they are either empty phrases or, as the
writer will prove in another place, erroneous conclusions drawn from
wrong calculations and false premises.

Messrs. Schmidt and Haensch's manufactory has now produced
at the instigation of the writer and by the application of an idea of
Professor H. Goltzsch, two new movable stages, which are free from
the reproach we have admitted above, and which ought to satisfy all
requirements.

There is the most absolute certainty, even when the highest
powers are used, that not even the minutest part of the preparation
will bo passed over ; whilst at the same time, like the Maltwood
finder, it serves to find again readily any particular point of tho
preparation.

An essential advantage of tho new stages over English ones
consists in the fact tliat, besides the simplicity and certainty of their
construction, the larger one can also be used as a screw micrometer,
and both allow of a much greater use being made of the optical capacity
of the Microscope, on account of tlieir being considerably thinner than
the English movable stages, whereby a better adjustment of the
diaphragms (c. g. raising the diajihragms to the under surface of the
slide without using tho condensers) is rendered possible.

Tho two stages are designed on a ccmimon principle, but difier
from each other by one being intended for rapid work with low and
medium powers (uj) to GOO), whilst the other is for exact scientific
investigations and measurements, in which the highest powers may bo
used.

* AM ifnlifH ns in original toxt. t ^''O tliis Jonrnal, ante, p. 71.S,

880

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Both stages arc applied to the ordinary stage, and arc held in
position by springs.

The lirst stage (Fig. 05), which is the simpler of the two,
consists, 1st, of a fixed plate A, with a coiitral opening B for the
usual diaphragms, and, 2nd, of the movable plate C, which turns
about D, and lias a larger rectangular opening.

On the plate C are two clamps E J*j, which serve to fix the slide.
A sector //' is attached to the fixed plate A, and is graduated at /'.
The pointer/ turns on II, and is connected at D with the movable
plate C by a screw, and the plate can therefore be moved about
the point I). As appears from a simi>le inspection of the figure, the
pointer/ (and with it of course the plate C) can bo turned about 11

Fio. 95.

so as to fall upon any particular division of the scale /'. The
preparation on the slide which is fixed by the clamps E E, can there-
fore be moved its whole width under the objective by means of the
lever movement at D, whilst the examination of the object longitudin-
ally is efiectod by gradually pushing the pointer / along the scale/'.

If the motion of tlie i)oint(a'/ou the scalo/'is so regulated that
it moves each time over the space of the field of view, and if after
every such movement the pr(!2)aration is examined through its whole
width by turning the phito C about D, it follows that every point of
the object must appear in the field ; the ai^plicability of this stage as
a Maltvvood finder is also thus evident.

To use the stage, for instance, for finding a given point (e. g. a
diatom-frustulo), it is only necessary to note the position of the

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

881

pointer /on the scale of/'. Suppose a Pleurosigma attenuatum of a
certain preparation to lie in the field when the pointer / was on the
division 18 of the scale /', and it is required to find this frustule
again. Solution : Put /on the division 18 of/', place the preparation
firmly between the clanij)S E E, and turn the plate C about D, the
Pleurosigma sought for must iacvitably appear in the field.

A great advantage of this stage consists in its enabling the
observer, by simply taking out the screw H, to move the preparation
about in any direction under the objective, just as in the case of free-
hand movement of the object with the ordinary stage.

The second stage (Fig. 96), whicli is the more complicated, and is
intended for scientific investigations and for measuring, is similar in
construction to the stage above described.

Fig. 96.

The plate A is dovetailed into the microscope-stage B, and by
means of the divided screw C can be moved longitudinally. It has a
scale at A, the divisions on which correspond to a revolution of the
screw C (0 ■ 25 mm.). The drum of the screw C is divided into one
liundrcd parts, each division having thus the value 0*0025 mm.
Ihere is also a nonius which marks the tenth part of this value.

On the plate A there is a second movable plate (on which is an
cxccntric disk E, and the i>iece F for fixing the slide), movable about
the screw D by the pinion at G, so that one minute may bo read oft'
directly by means <.f the scale and nonius.

It is not necessary to prove that the same jirinciple is involved in
the construction of both stages, and consequently that with the second
stage an equally systematic, and indeed much more perfect reading ofif
of the position of the object is possible, as with the first stage. It can
also I e used in just the same way as a IMaltwood finder, but giving, of

VOL. III. 3 M

882

EECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATINa TO

Fig. 97.

coi:rse, much greater precision. The divisions at A and C, as also
tlie scale at G, give most exact and close readings for fixing the posi-
tion of a given jjoint of the object, and the stage has the advantage
that the position of the point is referred not to a curved line merely,
but to a particular portion of the segment of a circle which lies within
the dimensions of one field.

When this stage is used as an object-micrometer, it must of course
(as with every screw micrometer), be used in the direction in which
the screw C works. It is well only to commence measuring after
the screw has been turned a little in the direction in which tbe
measurement is being made, as only by this means can the dead-way
be obviated, which is unavoidable when a screw turns backwards and
forwards.

The measurements are read off directly from the divisions at A
and C. At A we have a value of 0 ■ 25 mm., at C of 2 • 5 ^, and at the
nonius at C (to read which a lens is required), a value of 0 ' 25 /x.

Lastly, it should be mentioned that an objection which may
rightly be urged against the first stage, and which precludes its
use for exact scientific investigations, is got rid off entirely in

the second form. It is this : the
turning of the upper movable
plate about the point D in the
first stage produces somewhat
excentric circles ; in the second
this is not the case, as the circles
formed about the point D are
exactly concentric."

What are the mechanical
stages of English construction
which have found their way to
Germany, and to which the
above two stages are so greatly
superior ?

"Fine" Adjustments.— The
crimes that are said to have been
committed in the name of liberty
are, we think, pretty well matched
by those committed in the name
of cheapness, at any rate when
perpetrated in the case of such
an instrument as the Microscope.
Fig. 97 shows a method actually
adopted in practice in a German
instrument for making the fine
adjustment. When the screw m is
withdrawn, the spx'ing seen above
the mirror presses the arm attached
to the stage against the pillar

of the Microscope, and the stage then takes an oblique position.

When the screw m is turned, it forces the arm outwards, and thus

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

883

Fig. 98.

elevates the stage above the horizontal position as much as it was
formerly inclined below it.

We should, have supposed that whatever advantage might be
gained by being able to use a high power with this instrument would
be lost by the defective adjustment.

A still cheaper and still more barbarous method is shown in
Fig. 98, in which the screw beneath the
stage elevates the upper of two plates of
which the stage is composed ; the upper
plate is, however, only separable from the
lower plate at one side, so that in this
case also the object would not lie hori-
zontally, but obliquely; indeed, by reason
of its thinness the upper plate in our
instrument is more or less curved when
separated.

It is perhaps fair to note that, when
literally translated, these adjustments are described by the relative
term of '^ finer," and that they are very cheap.

Fig. 100.

Fig. 99

Fig. 101.

Seibert and Krafft's Fine Adjustment. — It is claimed for this
contrivauco that it acts without friction. Thiio difforcnt forms arc
shown in Figs. 91), 100, 101.

3 M 2

884 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Tlio tube is suspended from two parallel arras, whose terminal
points are movably connected with both the pillar of the microscope
and the tube itself. These arms with medium adjustment are exactly
horizontal ; but if the tube is raised or lowered by means of the micro-
meter-screw, which acts upon a projecting piece between the arms, the
latter assume a slightly oblique position. The movement effected by
means of the screw corresponds therefore to the displacement of a
parallelogram of which one side remains fixed in a vertical position
while the opposite side is slightly raised or lowered, still preserving
the parallelism. Since the displacement takes place between the
points of eight screws, any shifting of the image is entirely avoided,
and friction is reduced to a minimum. In consequence of this the
micrometer-screw turns very easily, and dead-way is avoided with
equal resistance on both ends.*

Construction of Immersion Objectives-t — The following note is
by Mr. Wenham, and we therefore give it verbatim (with the wood-
cut), though we are not sure that we altogether understand what is
meant to be conveyed, especially in regard to dispensing with the
use of oil. No alteration of the front of an objective can, as it seems
to us, ever make a water-immersion objective equal in aperture an
oil- (homogeneous) immersion : —

" From the above | it may be inferred, that if the front of an
object-glass, in cases when the aperture is supposed to be limited by
water from rays reflected back and increased by an intermedium of oil
of cedar or cloves, if the first surface is also made concave, it would be
the means of dispensing with the objectionable use of oil. I have
tried some experiments this way. Fig. 102 is the front lens of an
p ,f.n immersion -jIq -inch object-glass. At first the con-

cave surface of the front was made much shallower
than is shown, without any appreciable difference
in effect from that of a flat plane. The concave
was then deepened till it reached to^near three
times that of the hemispherical back radius, with
a slightly improved result in the way of increase
of light and flatness of field. The experiment was not carried further.
The radius of the back convex is "045, that of the concave "13. Of
course if oil of the same optical properties as the glass were to be
used, the effect of the concave surface would be simply nil. It would
then act like a flat front."

Mounting of the Front Lens of Immersion Objectives. — Messrs.
Powell and Lealand claim to have made a water-immersion ^, with
a numerical aperture of 1 • 30 or 155° (the theoretical maximum being
1-33 or 180°).

To obtain this aperture the plan described by Professor Abbe § is

* Nageli and Scbwendener, ' Das Mikroskop,' 2nd ed.

t ' Am. Mon. Micr. Journ.,' i. (1880) p. 101.

% A description of the construction of the immersion-paraboloid.

§ See this Journal, ii. (1879) p. 821.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 885

adopted. Tho front lens is greater than a hemisphere, and the
surface is active in the production of the image up to several degrees
beyond the equator, so that the lens is mounted on a thin glass plate,
and the slightly prominent edge of the latter fixed to the brass work of
the objective.

" F. R. M. S.," writing on this subject, says : * — " This plan of
mounting front lenses on a thin plate of glass so that the setting need
not encroach on the active spherical surface, seems to have been known
to and practised by the late Andrew Eoss in connection with dry
lenses. Some ten years ago ToUes, of Boston, experimented with this
plan of mounting, for water-immersion lenses. But I believe it is
not on record that either Ross or Tolles ever attempted to utilize
a front lens beyond the hemisphere.

The first notice I have met with, relating to the possible use of
a front lens greater than a hemisj^here, is in a paper ' On the
Question of a Theoretical Limit to the Apertures of Microscopic
Objectives,' | by Professor G. G. Stokes, of Cambridge. Professor
Stokes there discussed the question from a theoretical jioint of view,
and gave a demonstration, based on the assumption that such a frout
lens could be utilized, proving the possibility of ajiertures approxi-
mating to 180^, measured in the body of the lens.

The first practical development of this idea — whether suggested by
Professor Stokes's paper or not, I am unable to say — was projected by
Professor E. Abbe, of Jena University, and successfully applied by
Zeiss, the optician, of Jena, under Professor Abbe's direction, to
extend tho apertures of homogeneous-immersion objectives to the
highest point hitherto attained, 1*4 numerical ap. (= 131°, nearly,
measured in crown glass of mean index 1 • 525).

In June 1879, Professor Abbe brought over to England one of
these high-angled J objectives. He exi)lained at the R. M. S. that he
had found it necessary to prepare a special immersion fluid (an
aqueous solution of chloride of zinc) for use with the new lens,
because he had not found it possible to obtain satisfactory correction
of the aberrations with any of the refractive fluids previously in use.
Even with the zinc solution he found it important to improve the
corrections by a novel chromatic refracting device of his own con-
trivance, to be placed immediately below the eye-piece. While this
immersion medium remained in the desired condition, tho definition
obtained with the lens was remarkably good ; but, unfortunately, the
solution quickly became turbid and useless, so that Professor Abbe
did not venture to exhibit tho lens at work in public. Ho stated that
the difficulties of construction would probably preclude Mr. Zeiss
from making such lenses for sale. I Lad the good fortune to see tho
lens tested under the most favourable conditions, and can aflirm that
it produced excellent results.

In certain demonstrations conducted by Professor Abbo he jiointcd
out the fact that tho now lens could bo utilized for proving tho
refractive indices of various immersion fluids ; for example, using

* 'EiikI. Mc'ch.,' xxxi. (18S0) j>. 517.
t See this Jouiiml, i. (\mn) p. I'SJ).

886 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

water, he obtained the precise numerical aperture 1*33 (= double
the " critical angle," 62° 58', from crown glass to water), &c. With
air as the external medium at the plane-front of the lens, the
num. ap. 1 • 0 was exactly shown (as, indeed, it is with all immersion
objectives having num. ap. greater than 1*0, i. e. greater than cor-
responds to the maximum air-angle, 180°).

In applying this kind of front lens to the water - immersion
system, Messrs, Powell and Lealand have distinctly had in view to
extend the aperture to the maximum ivith water as the immersion
medium. The new ^ has an aperture so near the limit (123° out of a
possible 126°),* that it may be taken to exhaust the problem of
aperture — so far as it can be exhausted with the condition that the
aberrations must be corrected with icater as the inter-medium, and with
that initial power of magnification. It is to be hoped that a similar
aperture will be obtained with a much higher initial power of magni-
fication— say, \, yV, Tijj ^^^ sVj which will practically close the water-
immersion question until new refracting media are experimented
with.

There can be no doubt that the development of the homogeneous-
immersion system is the problem of the future as regards attaining
the limit of visibility with the Microscope. In view of the success
that has attended the construction of the new \ water-immersion,
with a front lens greater than a hemisphere, Messrs. Powell and
Lealand have not hesitated to engage themselves to construct a
-^V on a similar formula, but for homogeneous immersion." The
objective has since been completed, and has an aperture of 142°
(measured in a crown glass semi-cylinder of mean index 1 • 5 nearly),
with a focal distance of • 007 inch.

Penetration. t — Dr. Blackham protests against objectives with
penetration, the amount of which he contends increases with the
amount of spherical aberration in the objective which has been left
uncorrected, and decreases in proportion as the corrections for sphe-
rical aberration approach perfection. Penetration, he maintains, pro-
diices a melting together or con-fusion of the images and a necessary
loss of definition ; and he appears to consider Dr. Carpenter's recom-
mendation of focal depth in objectives as inconsistent with his state-
ment that the " defining power of an objective mainly depends upon
the completeness of its corrections, ... an attribute essential to the
satisfactory performance of any objective, whatever be its other quali-
ties." He also combats the suggestion that as the human eye has con-
siderable penetrating power, that quality must also be good for
objectives. He points out (1) that the eye is in fact possessed of
penetrating power to a much less degree than is generally suj)posed, this
being confounded with the power of accommodation, by means of which
the eye can be successively focussed with great rapidity upon objects
at different distances ; and (2) that the optical conditions in regard to
the relative distances of the object and image being reversed, it does

* Or \\?P and 122° if the index is taken as 1-52.
t 'Am. Journ. Micr.,' v. (1880) p. 145.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 887

not follow that, admitting a certain amount of penetration to bo useful
in the eye, the same is true with the objective.

As to the view that objectives with penetrating power enable us to
see the parts of objects in their true and natural relations, and that
the greatest part of histological work is being done with them to-day,
he replies, " the more is the pity, because most of it will have to be
done over again with better lenses." The fallacy that such objectives
enable us to see different planes of objects in their true relations
arises from confounding depth of focus with stereoscopic effect, the
latter not being dependent upon the former. Diagrams are given of
two pieces of wire netting, in squares of different patterns, which are
supposed to be laid over one another. " With a corrected objective
you see the upper one first, and following nature's plan with the eye,
you focus down through it and see the other. If both are seen at once,
as a penetrating objective would do, we get a compound figure totally
unlike either — an illusion of sight."

ToUes's Improved Traverse-lens, Illuminating and Aperture -
measuring Apparatus. — Mr. Tolles has improved upon the traverse-
lens which he described in 1879,* and his new apparatus is shown in
Fig. 103. The following description is supplied by him : —

The apparatus being intended for measurement and use of the
largest apertures, a nearly semicircular sector-plate became a neces-
sity.

For more convenient use, a small stage c is supplied, but this stage
and its accompanying traverse-lens h are readily removable. The
traverse-lens h is less than a hemisphere by the thickness of an object-
slide — assumed 'OS inch.

For convenience of mounting in its cell, the top surface of h
has a curvature moderately convex, but with a medium of the index of
glass connecting the lens and slide, the cuxwature is neutralized.

When the object to be viewed is in position, it is of course in the
centre of motion of the illumination apparatus, as guided by tlie groove
in the plate A. The semicircular rim of the plate is graduated to
degrees, and numbered each way from the zero point (midway from
the ends) to nearly 90°.

When the truncated cone of glass Tc, having immersion contact
witli the traverse-lens h, is moved from zero to the degree of obliquity
where the light fails to give view of the object thrtjugh the objective,
at tlie eye-piece of the Microscope, then the half angle of interior
aperture can be noted by means of an index at the edge of the plate h.
If desirable, the half angle on the other side uf tlie axis can be ascer-
tained in the same manner, the cone h being first transferred to the
fitting on which the prism n is shown in the figure.

The outer end of the cone h can be cut ott" by means of a cup z,
with a semicircular oi)ening so as to limit the light to an axial direc-
tion in the cone. For greater accuracy the apparatus includes an extra
arm j> and p', for carrying a small candle in tlie tube / as a radiant,
and which attaches to the plate h in place of the prism m. This arm

* Sec 111 is Journal, ii. (1879) p. 388.

888

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

also carries an adapter (j for the reception of objective, having the
standard screw, so that any suitable objective can be used as a
condenser.

But in taking angles with the candle-radiant in use, a tube i, of

A, grooved semicircular plate, h, traverse-lens fitted to stage c. c, stage on
which the object is clamped, d, condensing lens fitting on k. F, elbow-arm
for attachment of the whole apparatus to the substage of the Microscope. Tliis
attachment is effected by means of an adapter y, or can be fitted with rack move-
ment, g, an adapter for auxiliary tube, or to carry an objective as a condenser.
h, a plate on which is mounted various apparatus for directing and condensing
light upon the object, i, auxiliary tube for measuring apertures, k, a solid
glass cone, concave at the smaller end (for immersion contact with the traverse-
lens U) and plane at the other, upon which a condensing lens d fits, or the semi-
circular diaphragm z. m, a rectangular prism, to give direction to the light
axially upon k or n. n, a reflecting prism (acting with two internal reflections),
to give very great obliquity of the illuminating ray with moderate movement of
the plate /t out of the axial position, or the zero position, o, a hemispherical
traverse-lens, for use in measuring the widest possible interior angles, with inter-
vening medium of index 1 '525 ; it fits in the position occupied by h and c in the
figure. /', a radial arm extending from the plate /;. p', arm for candle fitting iu
tube t. b, c, k, m, n, and j), are removable.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 889

some two inches in length, is mounted in this adapter between the
radiant and the cone h. This tube has only a narrow central slit
opening at each end, which slits being brought coincident in direction
with the candle-flame, permit only a thin sheet of light to pass to the
object. This restriction of the incident light, though not jiractically
important in taking interior angles, shuts out anij question of accuracy.

The extra traverse-lens o is made a hemisphere, so as to dispense
with the object-slide ; traverse-lens h and stage c being removed, and
lens b replaced with traverse-lens o.

The object is mounted on the plane surface of this hemispherical
lens under a cover-glass, and all cemented with balsam of 1 '525 index
of refraction, The cone k has immersion contact as before, and the
cone and all the illumination apparatus can be brought round to 90°
of axial obliquity without coming in contact with slide or stage.

This last-described arrangement of radial-arm and radiant is espe-
cially useful in taking air apertures with dry mounted objects under
view.

My method is this : — Selecting a cover-glass of | inch or larger
diameter, I place at any marginal part of the cover a little diatom-
aceous material, add a drop of alcohol to distribute the same, and
by burning off the alcohol the objects adhere sufficiently to the surface.

This cover-glass is then to be cemented to a slide, not at the
centre, but projecting over the end more than half its breadth, the
diatomaceous mount being most distant from the slide-end. At about
the centre of the slide, another cover of similar thickness should be
cemented, so as to bring the slide to parallelism with the face of the
back-stage (part of c in figure) when placed with the cover-glasses
do\vnward upon it. The slide is then moved to bring the mounted
objects into the optical axis, and the objective focussed upon them,
with correction in some way for cover thickness.

Under these circumstances, witli nothing intervening between
radiant and object, when we restrict the light that illuminates the
object to what can pass through the narrow slits at
the ends of the tubes mounted on the radial arm p, ■

there can remain no question of the obliquitij of the
illuminating rays that give us view of the object ;
for rays of no other obliquity are admitted.

Semi-cylinder Illuminator. — Mr. J. Mayall,
jun., sends us the accompanying figure, sliowing a
convenient way of mounting a semi-cylinder, or
prism, &c., to be used for oblique illumination in
the substagc of those stands that are not provided
with swinging motion. The mounting permits the
semi-cylinder to bo tilted and placed cxcentrically ;
in this manner, without inmicrsiou contact, by
suitable adjustment, the dry object can bo viewed
with any colour of monochromatic light. Placed
in immersion contact with tlie slide, the utmost
oldiquity of incident light can be obtained on Nobcrt's lines
(ruled on the under surface of cover-glass iu air) by refraction into

890 EECORD OF CUREENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the stratum of air, using a pencil incident at the upper internal
surface just within the critical angle of emergence — the prismatic
rays of different refrangibility being then available. Objects in fluid
may be placed on the plane surface of the semi-cylinder and illu-
minated with ordinary transmitted light, or rendered " self-luminous "
in a dark field, as with the hemisijherical illuminator, prism, or
Wenham's immersion paraboloid. A concave mirror with double
arm is sufficient to direct the illumination. The semi-cylinder
figured was made in 1875 by Mr. Tolles, of Boston, for measuring
apertures. The mounting was exhibited at the Society in 1878.

The Iris Diaphragm an Old Invention.* — It is generally st:p-
posed that the iris diaphragm, as applied to Microscopes and tele-
scopes, is a very recent invention, but the following passage, taken
from an early volume of ' Nicholson's Journal ' (1804), shows that it
is three-quarters of a century old : —

" Every attentive observer must have taken notice, that light is of
as much consequence to artificial vision as magnifying power. It may
therefore afford matter of surprise that the most variable of all adjust-
ments of the eye, viz. that of aperture, should never be introduced
into our artificial combinations. Distant woods, and other land
objects, are invisible to a high magnifying power, for want of light,
when the same objects may be distinctly seen with a lower. By means
of an artificial iris, which an ingenious artist will find little difficulty
in contriving, this disadvantage in telescopes might be obviated. Sup-
pose a brass ring to surround the object end of the telescope, and
upon this let eight or more triangular slips of brass be fixed so as to
revolve on equidistant pins passing through each triangle near one of
its corners. If the triangles be sliddeu in upon each other, it may
readily be apprehended that they will close the aperture ; and if they
be all made to revolve or slide backwards alike, it is clear that their
edge will leave an octagonal aperture greater or less, according to
circumstances. The equable motion of all the triangles may be pro-
duced either by pinions and one toothed wheel, or by what is called
snail-work."

Microscopical Goniometer.! — Mr. Eutlcy, referring to the
Schmidt goniometer (a positive eye-piece in which a cobweb is placed
with a graduated brass circle and vernier), says that when the angles
of crystals occurring in sections of rock which are not very trans-
lucent have to be measured by this instrument, difficulty is often
experienced in seeing the cobweb distinctly, and this is one of the
most serious drawbacks to the use of this kind of goniometer for
petrological purjioses. Its utility would, he considers, be increased
if one-half of the field were obscured by the insertion of a blackened
semicircle of metal v\ithin the focus of the eye-piece instead of the
cobweb.

Pleurosigma angulatum as a Test Object. — We continually find
suggestions made in English and foreign journals that P. angulatum

* ' Am. Journ. Micr.,' v. (1880) p. 136.

t ' Study of Kocks ' (8vo, London, 1879) p. 53.

INVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 891

is not now a proper test object for " high-power " objectives, and this
view appears to be founded on the fact that whereas at least a
^ objective was formerly required to resolve this diatom, it can now
be accomplished by a 7[ or ^ inch.

In the first place, there is an error in the assumption that resolu-
tion is essentially dependent upon the power of the objective instead
of upon its aperture. A ^ objective, if of only 1 • 1 numerical aper-
ture, will not resolve so many lines to the inch as a ^ of 1 ' 15
of equal quality.

In addition to this, it is of course a mistake to consider that the
test depends upon the mere fact of the resolution of the markings
upon the object. For such a purpose, it is agreed that no one would
now think of using it. The real test, however, is the manner in ivhich
the image is shown, and by the qualiti/ of the image of a known object
the performance of objectives can be most readily determined by
practised observers.

Fasoldt's Test Plate.* — Mr. Fasoldt has, it is said, made a test
plate of forty-one bands with a new machine constructed by him for the
execution of fine ruling, and capable of dividing an inch into 10,000,000
parts. The first band is ruled with lines at the rate of 5000 to the
inch, and the last at the rate of 1,000,000 to the inch. After the
million band, there are three " test bands " ruled in 50,000 lines to
the inch, but the lines cut of the same breadth and depth as those of
the quarter million, half million, and one million bands respectively.

We have not yet seen any description of the plate, our information
being taken from an article, " An Evening with Fasoldt's 1,000,000
Test Plate," in which the writer is rapturous over the " genius who
dared not only to project, but to execute, a test so many years in
advance of microscopical science."

Gunther's Photographs of Pleurosigma angulatum.f — After the
researches of Professor Abbe on the Theory of Microscopic Vision had
placed it beyond doubt (writes Dr. Kaiser) that " the image of fine
structures is not produced dioptrically, but by the interference of
diffracted rays," there could no longer be any question that " the
interference images arising from the action of diffraction do not neces-
sarily represent the nature of the corresponding object," and therefore
all attempts to determine the structure of the more difficult objects
(as e. g. diatom valves) by simple inspection of tlieir microscopical
images, must be considered a priori as utterly futile. Rows of
dcprt!Ssions will produce precisely the same images as actual stria;,
whilst on tlie other hand, by striie of different densities, may bo
produced the same interference-images as with an actual grating.

In order, tluireforc, to projierly ascertain the structure of iinely-
organized objects, and especially to determine the structure of the
diatom valves used as test objects, recourse has repeatidly been liad
to microphotograpliy, which has proved an excellent auxiliary in this
department of micrographic research, and in addition has to some

* ' Am. Journ. iMin.,' v. (ISSO) p. ICO.
t ' Uot. CVntmlbl.,' i. (18S0) p. GS3.

892 RECOBD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC.

extent furnished empirical proof of the correctness of the deductions
of our theorists.

Photographs of Pleurosigma angulatum, in which the polygons
ohsorved on the valves show as annular de2)ressions, have been
already published by Stein in his ' Das Licht im Dienste wissen-
schaftlicher Forschung ' (Leipzig, 1877), plate x. These photographs
were not, however, taken directly from the object, but were only en-
largements of a smaller microphotograph (reproduced from plate ix.)
made by photographic apparatus which enlarged it with a rather
objectionable effect, the original microphotograph exhibiting the
well-known hexagonal markings.

To Mr. Carl Giinther, a photographer of Berlin, the credit is due
of having produced (exhibited at the recent International Fishery
Exhibition) two photographs of Pleurosigma angulatum taken direct
from the object, which as regards excellence of execution are at least
equal to the best productions of microphotography, and which at all
events are calculated to refute most thoroughly any objections which
may be urged against Stein's enlargements.

Both photographs were taken by a dry process of J. D. Moller,
with direct sunlight and central illumination by Abbe's illuminating
apparatus, a concave lens being interposed. An old Guudlach's
immersion-system No. 7 was used, and with it one of the photographs
was produced with an amplification of 2000 times at the distance of
1 metre, and the other with an amplification of 5900 times at a
distance of 3 metres.

In those places in which the photograph has come out perfectly
sharp (and consequently in the centre especially), both photographs
show, like Stein's enlargements, circular openings, with dark contour
and bright centre, a circumstance which characterizes them as being
without doubt " openings.'''

Where the i3hotogra2:)hs are less sharp (near the margin, therefore)
the figures, which still produce the impression of oijenings, are more
angular, whereby on a superficial examination is produced the appear-
ance of the well-known " hatchings," running in three directions.
The larger photograjih shows, of course, these marked peculiarities
more clearly and strikingly than the smaller one.

These photographs, it is certain, not only furnish a fresh proof of
the correctness of Abbe's theory of microscojiic vision ; but they
also plainly demonstrate the great importance of photography for the
study of the more difficult microscopical structures.

New Microscopical Journal. — Herr Duncker, of Berlin, has com-
menced a 'Journal for Microscoj)ical Examination of Flesh and
Popular Microscopy ' (4to), which appears twice a month. The
thirteenth number, which is before us, contains articles on " Schools
for the Examination of Flesh," " Micrococci and Bacteria," " The
Collection and Preparing of Diatoms," &c.

( 803 )
BIBLTOGEAPHY

OF CUREENT RESEARCHES REI/ATING TO

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, &g.

JOURNALS, TRANSACTIONS, &c., the contents op which are noted

IN THE FOLLOWING BIBLIOGRAPHY.

UNITED KINGDOM.
England.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Fifth Series, Vol. VI., Nos. 32-3

(August-September).
English Mechanic, Vol. XXXI., Nos. 800-6; Vol. XXXII., Nos. 807*, 808-10

(July 23-October 1).
Entomologist, Vol. XIII., Nos. 207*-8* (August-September).
Entomologist's Monthly Magazine, Vol. XVII., Nos. 195-G* (August-
September).
Geological Magazine, N. S., Dec. 11., Vol. VII., Nos. 194-5* (August-
September).
Grevillea, Vol. IX., No. 49 (September).

Hardwicke's Science-Gossip, 1880, Nos. 188-9 (August-September.)
Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, Vol. XIV., Part 4 (July).
Journal of Physiology, Vol. II., Nos. [5-G].

Journal of Science, Third Serie.s, Vol. II., Nos. 80*-l* (AugustHSeptcmber).
Midland Naturalist, Vol. III., Nos. 32-3 (August-September).
Naturalist, Vol. VI., Nos. Gl*-G2* (August-September).

Nature, Vol. XXII., Nos. 5G0-4, 5G.5*, 5G6, 5G7*-9*, 570 (July 22-Scptember 30).
Trimen's Journal of Botany, N. S., Vol. IX., Nos. 212*-13* (August-
September).
London. Geological Society — Qimrterly Journal, Vol. XXXVI., No. 143.

„ Linnean Society— Jouriinl (Zoology), Vol. XV., No. 82. (fJotany)

Vol. XVIII., Nos. [lOG-7].
„ Quekett Microscopical Club — Journal, Vol. VI., No. 44 (August).

„ Royal Society — Proceedings, Vol. XXX., No. 205.

„ Zoological Society — Proceedings, 1880, Part 2. Transactions,

Vol. XL, Part 2*.
Norwich. Norfolk and Norwich Naturalists' Society — ■ Transactions,

Vol. III., Part 1.
Plymouth. Plymouth Institution and Devon and Cornwall Natural
History Society — Transactions, Vol. VII., Part 2*.

Ireland.
DiBLiN. Royal Irish Academy— Prococilings. Science, Second Series, Vol. III.,
No. 4* (April). TransactioDB, Vol. XXVI., Art. 22*.

COLONIES.
India.
Calcutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal — Proceedings, 1880, No. 2*-3* (February-
March).

Australasia.
Victoria. Microscopical Society — Journal, Vol. I., Nos. 2-3].

894 BIBLIOaRAPHY OF

UNITED STATES.
American Journal of Microscopy, Vol. V., Nos. 7-8 (July-August).
American Journal of Science, Third Series, Vol. XX., Nos. 115, 116*-117*

(July- September).
American Monthly Microscopical Journal, Vol. I., Nos. 7-9 (July-September).
American Naturalist, Vol. XIV., Nos. 8-9 (August-September).
Psyche, Vol. III., Nos. 73-4.

Boston. American Academy of Arts and Sciences — Proceedings, Vol. XV.,
Part 1*.

„ Society of Natural History — Proceedings, Vol. XX., Part 3.

Cincinnati. Society of Natural History — Journal, Vol. III., No. 2.
Philadelphia. American Philosophical Society — Proceedings, Vol. XVIII.,

No. 105.
St. Louts. Academy of Science — Transactions, Vol. IV., No. 1.

GERMANY.

Archiv fiir pathologische Anatomie und Physiologic und fiir Klinische

Medicin (Virchow), Vol. LXXXI., Parts 1-2.
Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, Vol. XLVI., Part 3.
Botanische Zeitung, Vol. XXXVIII., Nos. 27-33.

Botanisches Centralblatt, Vol. I., Nos. [21-2], [23-4], 25, 26-*9, 30, 31*-3*.
Entomologische Nachrichten, Vol. VI., Nos. 15, 16*-18*.
Flora, Vol. LXIIL, Nos. 21, 22*-23*, 24.
Hedwigia, Vol. XIX., Nos. 7, 8*, 9 (July-September).
Jahrblicher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik, Vol. XII., Part 2.
Kosmos, Vol. VII., Parts 5-6 (August-September).
Morphologisches Jahrbuch, Vol. VI., Part 3.

Naturforscher, Vol. XIII., Nos. 29, 30*-39*, 40 (July 17-October 2).
Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie, Vol. XXXIV., Parts 3-4.
Zoologischer Anzeiger, Vol. III., Nos. 61-5 (July 26-September 20).
Berlin. K. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften — Monatsbericht,

1880. April, May*, June*.
Jena. Jenaische Zeitschrift fiir Naturwissenschaft, Vol. XIV., Part 3.

AUSTRIA-HUNGARY.
Oesterreichische Botanische Zeitschrift, Vol. XXX., Nos. 8-9 (August-
September).
Vienna. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Math.-Naturw. Classe — Sitz-
ungsberichte. First Section, Vol. LXXX., Parts [3-4] and 5.
„ Zoologisches Institut der Universitat Wien und Zoologische

Station in Triest — Arbeiten, Vol. III., Part 1.

HOLLAND.

Amsterdam. K. Akademie van Wetenschappen — Verslagen en Mededee-

lingen, Second Series, Vol. XV., Part 3*.
Leiden. Royal Zoological Museum of the Netherlands — Notes, Vol. II.,

No. 3.

FRANCE.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles (Botaniqne), Sixth Series, Vol. IX., Nos.
[5-6]. (Zoologie), Sixth Series, Vol. IX., Nos. [2-4].

Archives de Physiologie (Brown-Se'quard), Second Seiies, 1880, No. 3 (May-
June).

INVERTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 895

Archives de Zoologie experimentale et gene'rale (Lacaze-Duthiers),

Vol. VIII., No. 3.
Brebissonia, Vol. II., No. 12 (June). Vol. III., No. 1 (July).
Bulletin Scientiflque du Departement du Nord, Vol. III., No. G (Juue).
Guide du Naturaliste, Vol. II., Nos. 11*-14*.

Journal de rAnatomie et de la Physiologie (Robin), Vol. XVI., No. 5*
(September-Octol)er).

Journal de Micrographie, Vol. IV., Nos. [2-3], [4-5] (February-May).
Revue Bryologique, Vol. VII., Nos. 1-4.

Revue Internationale des Sciences Biologiques, Vd. VI., Nos. 7-9 (July-
September).

Revue Mycologique, Vol. II., No. 7 (July).

Paris. Academic des Sciences — Comptes Rendus, Vol. XCI.. Nos. 2-7, 8*,
9-11, 12* (July 12-September 20).
„ Societe Botanique de France — Bulletin, Vol. XXVI., E.\traorclinary
Session at Aurillac, 1879; Vol. XXVII., Parts 2-3; Revue Biblio^'rapliique,
Part B.

BELGIUM.
Archives de Biologic, Vol. 1., Part 3.

Brussels. Academic Royale des Sciences, &c., de Belgique — Bulletin,
Vol. XLIX, Nos. 5, G ; Vol. L., Nos. 7, 8.
„ Soci§te Beige de Microscopic— Bulletin, Vol. VI., Nos. 6*, 7*.

[8-9]*, 10*.

ITALY.

Florence. Societa Entomologica Italiana — Bullettino, Vol. XII., Part 2*.
MoDENA. Societa dei Naturalisti — Annuario, Second Series, Vol. XIV., Part 3.
Rome. R. Accademia dei Lincei — Atti — Third Series, Transunti, Vol. IV.,
Fasc. 7 (June). Memorie, Vols. III.-IV.

ZOOLOGY.

A. GENERAL, including Embryology and Histology
of the Vertebrata.

Aga-ssiz, a. — Pala)ontologieal and Embryological Development. [Address at
Boston Meeting of the Amcr. Assoc. Adv. Sci.] Nature, XXII., pp. 424-31.

Balbiani, E. G. — B'"ecundation in the Vertebrata {contd.). 1 fig.

Jouni. dc Microg., IV., pp. 53-9, 115-22.
Bellonci, G. — Researches on the Minute Structure of the Brain of tho
Teleostei. G plates. Atti li. Accad. Line. — 3fcm., III., pp. 258-G9.

Beneden, E. Van. — Contribution to tlie Knowledge of the Ovary of Mammalia.
Plates 20-1. Arch, dc Biol., I., pp. 475-550.

Beneden, E. Van, and C. Julin. — Researches on tho Structure of the Ovary,
the Ovulation, Fecundation, and Early Phases of Development of the Cheiroptera.
Preliminary Communication. Bull. Acad. li, Sci. Bcly., XLIX., pp. G2S-55.

„ „ ' „ Observations on the Maturation, Fecunda-

tion, and Segmentation of the Ovuuj in tho Cheiroptera. Plates 22-3.

Arch, dc Biol., I., pp. 551-71.
Frommann, C. — On tho Theory of the Structure of Cells. Plato 22.

Jen. Zeitachr, Natuno,, XIV., pp. 458-65.
Jruv, C. — See Beneden, E. Van.

Koellikeu, a. — Tlio Development of the Germinal Layers in the Rabbit.
Prelinnnary Conimuniciitiou. /-ool, Anzciij., III., pp. 370-5, .'?9()-5.

896 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

Krause, E.— Notes on the Dovelopmental-Historv of Embryology. II.-III.
(9 figs.) Kosmos, VII., pp. 334-49, 419-40.

Laulanie. — Observations on the Origin of Fibrillse in the Bundles of Connec-
tive Tissue. Goinptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 180-2.

MoBiGGiA, A.— Three Embryos of a Fowl in a single Blastoderm. 1 plate.

Atti R. Accad. Line— Mem., III., pp. 399-402.

Pascoe, F. p. — Zoological Classification: a handy Book of Reference, with
Tables of the Sub-kingdoms, Classes, Orders, &c., of the Animal Kingdom, their
Characters, and Lists of the Families and principal Genera. 2nd ed. 528 pp.
(8vo. London, 1880.)

ScHNEiDEH, A.— On Fertilization of the Animal Ovum.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 426-7.

Scott W. B. — Preliminary Communication on the Embryology of Petromyzon.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 422-6, 443-6.

Yung, E.— On the Influence of Coloured Lights on the Development of
Animals. Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 440-1.

Zoological Eecord for 1878. (8vo. London, 1880.)

B. INVERTEBRATA.

Carter, H. J.— Report on Specimens dredged up from the Gulf of Manaar,
and presented to the Liverpool Free Museum by Captain Warren (concld.).
Plates 7-8. fForaminifera, Spongida, Hydroida, Actinozoa, &c.]

Ann. S,- Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 129-56,

MoUusca.

Bergh, E. — On the Nudibranchiate Gasteropod Mollusea of the North Pacilic
Ocean, with special reference to those of Alaska. Part II. {conckl).

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1880, pp. 121-7.
Brooks, W. K.— The Development of the Digestive Tract in Molluscs,

Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XX., pp. 325-9.
Craven, A. E.— On a Collection of Land and Freshwater Shells made during
a short Expedition to the Usambnra Coimtry in Eastern Africa, with descriptions
of seven new species. 7 figs, of Plate 22.

Proc. Zool. Soc. Land., 1880, pp. 216-9.
,, Description of Three New Species of Land and Freshwater
Shells from Nossi-Be Island (N.W. Coast of Madagascar). 3 figs, of Plate 22.

Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1880, pp. 215-6.

GoDWiN-AusTEN, H. H. — On the Land Molluscan Genus Girasia of Gray,

with Remarks on its Anatomy and on the Form of the Capreolus of Lister (or

Spermatophore) as developed in species of this genus of Indian Helicidse.

Plates 24-7. ^'-oc Zool. Soc. Lond., 1880, pp. 289-99.

Hatschek, B. — On the Embryology of Teredo. Plates 1-3.

Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, III., pp. 1-44.

Htjtton, F. W. — Manual of the New Zealand Mollusea — a Systematic and

Descriptive 'catalogue of the Marine and Land Shells, and of the soft Molluscs

and Polyzoa of New Zealand and the adjacent Islands, 234 pp. (8vo.

Wellington, 1880.)

Jeffreys, J. G.— On the Occurrence of Marine Shells of existing Species at
different heights above the present level of the Sea.

Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, XXXVI., pp. 351-5.

Martens, E. v. — Regeneration of the Head in Gastropods. \_Abstr. of J.

Carriere's ' Studies on the Phenomena of Regeneration in the Invertebrata.

I. In the Pulmonata.'] Naturf., XIII., p. 272.

On the Phylogeny of the Ammonites.

' Naturf., XIII., pp. 370-1.

Owen, R.— On the External and Structural Characters of the male Spirula

australis Lara. Plate 32. Proc Zool. Soc. Lond., 1880, pp. 352-4.

Rolleston, G.— Note on the Geographical Distribution of Limax agrestis.

Avion hortensis, and Fasciola hepatica. [English.] Zool. Anzeig., II., pp. 400-5.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 897

Smith, E. A. — Description of a uew Species of Helicidaj from New Zealand

\_nelix {Paryphantci) Gillicsii']. A7in. ^ Mug. Nat. Hist., VI., p. 159.

„ „ Oil tiie Sliells of Lake Tanganyika and of the neighbourhood

of Ujiji, Central Africa. Plate 31. Froc. Zool. Soc. Load., 1880, pp. 3il-52.

Vayssiere, M. — Anatomical liesearches on the MoUusca of the Family of the

Biillida; (concld.). Plates 4-12. Ann. Sci. Nat. (ZooL), IX., pp. 65-123.

Watson, R. B.— MoUuscaa of H.M.S. ' Chullenger ' Expedition. V. 1 fig.

Joum. Linn. Soc. {ZooL), XV., pp. 87-126.
White, C. A.— On the Antiquity of certain subordinate Types of Fresh-water
and Land Mollusca. Am. Joum. ScL, XX., p^J. 44-9.

WiMMEK, A. — On the Mollusca-Fauna of the Galapagos Islands.

SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXXX., pp. 465-514.
Yung, E. — On the Absorption and Elimination of Poisons in Cephalopoda.

Comptes Hondas, XCI., pp. 238-9.
,, On the Action of Poisons in the Cephalopoda.

Comptes PiCndus, XCI., pp. 306-8.
„ On the Influence of Alkaline or Acid Media on the Cephalopoda.

Comptes Eendus, XCI., pp. 439-40.

MoUuscoida.

Davidson, T. — On the Species of Brachiopoda that characterize the " Ores
Armoricain '' of Brittany, together with a few observations on the Budleigh
Salterton " Pebbles.'' Plate 10 and 3 figs. Geol. Mag., VII., pp. 337-43.

Goldstein, J. R. Y. — Notes on living Polyzoa.

Joum. Micr. Soc. Vict, I., pp. 42-50.
„ „ A New Species of Polyzoa [_CateniceUa po7iderosa].

Joum. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., p. 63.
Maplestone, C. M. — A new Species of Polyzoa [Catenicella pulchella'].

Joum. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., p. 64.
Traustedt. — Genera and Species of AscidisB simplices.

Zool. Anzeig., Ill , pp. 467-9.
Uhlig, V. — On the Liassic Brachiopod-fauna of Sospirolo near Belluiio. 5
plates. SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXXX., pp. 259-310.

Vine, G. R. — A Review of the Family Diastoporidae for tiie purpose of classi-
fication. Plate 13. Quart. Jonrn. Geol. Soc, XXX VI., pp. 356-61.
Waters, A. W. — Note on the Genus Hetcropora.

Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 156-7.
„ „ Reply on the term " Bryozoa."

Ann. ii> Mag. Nut. Hist., VI., pp. 157-8.
Wilson, J. B. — Fossil Catenicella) from the Miocene Beds at Bird Rock, near
Gecloug. Joum. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 60-3.

„ „ On a new Genus of Polyzoa \_Catenicellopsis].

Joum. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 64-5.

Arthropoda.

Megnin, P. — Parasites and Parasitic Diseases in INIau, Domestic Animals, and
the Wild Animals witli which they may Ije in contact— In.sccts, Arachnida,
Crustacea. 63 figs, and an Atlas of 26 plates. 478 pp. (8vo. Paris, 1880.)

a. Insecta.

Bale, W. M. — Notes on Insect Eggs. Joum. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., i)p. 69-71.
Canestuini, J. — On a singular Organ of the Ilymenoptcra.

Zuol. Anzclg., III., pp. 421-2.
Edwards, W. II. — Experiments upon the effect of Cold applied (n Chrysalids
of Butterilies (concld.). rsgclu; III., pp. 75-6.

Farke, J. H. — Study on the Habits and Parthenogenesis of the Halicti.

Ann. Sci. Nat. (Zool.), IX., Art. No. 4, 27 pp.
FiJGNEn, K. — The Odoriferous Apparatus of Sphin.v Ligustri.

Knt'Uwl. Ndchr., VL, p. 1(!6.

VOL. III. 3 N

898 BIBLIOGKAPHY OP

Hagek, H. a. — A new Species of Simulium, with a remarkable Nymplia

case. Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XX., pp. 305-7.

Havser, G. — Pliysioloc(ical and Histological Researches on the Organ of

Smell of Insects. Plates 17-19. Zeitschr. loiss. Zoo/., XXXIV., pp. 367-403.

Jawokowski, a. — On the Development of the Dorsal Vessel and of the

Musculature in CliironomuH and some other Insects. 5 plates.

SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXXX., pp. 238-58.

KiJNCKEL, J. — Morphological Signification of the Appendages serving for

the Suspension of the Chrysalis. Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 395-7.

LicHTENSTEiN, J. — Complement of the Biological Evolution of the Aphides of

the Galls of the Poplar (^PenqMgus bursarius Lin.).

Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 339-40.
IMacLeod, J. — See Botany A.

Mayek, p. — On certain Organs of Sense in tlic Antennae of the Diptera.
1 plate. Atti R. Accad. Line— Mem., III., 211-20.

Michels, H. — Description of the Nervous System of Oryctes nasicornis in the
larva, pupa, and perfect state. Plates 31-6.

Zeitschr. wiss. ZooL, XXXIV., pp. 641-702.
Moody, H. L. — Transformation of Nacerdes melanura. Psyche, III., p. 68.

Os<BOHNE, J. A. — Some facts in the Life-history of Gastrophysa raphani.

Entom. Mon. Mag., XVII., pp. 49-57.
„ ,, Parthenogenesis in the Coleoptera.

Nature, XXII., pp. 509-10.
PoLETAiEW, N. — The Salivary Glands of the Odonataj (Neuroptera).

Comptes Rendus, XCI., p. 129.

Prentiss, A. N. — Destruction of obnoxious Insects by means of Fungoid

Growths. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 575-81, 630-5.

Eeichenau, W. v. — The Odoriferous Organs of the male Sphinx Lvjustri.

9 figs. Eosmos, IV., pp. 387-90.

ZiMMERMANN, O. — On a peculiar Formation of the Dorsal Vessel in some

larvse of EphemeridaB. 4 figs. Zeitschr. wiss. Zool, XXXIV., pp. 404-6.

p. Myriapoda.

Packard, A. S., jun. — The Eyes and Brain of Cermatia forceps.

Am. Nut., XIV., pp. 602-3.

y, Arachnida.

Cambridge, O. P.— On some new and little-known Spiders of the Genus
Argyrodes Sim. Plates 28-30. Pruc. Zool. Soc. Bond., 1880, pp. 320-44.

Okoneberg, a. — On the Mouth-parts of the Arachnida. Plates 14-16.

Arch. Naturg., XLVL, pp. 285-300.
Emerton, J. H.— Breeding Habits of Spiders. 1 fig.

Am. Nat., XIV., p. 595.
Haller, G.— Acarinological Notes. Plate 17.

Arch. Naturg., XLVI., pp. 355-74,

MacLeod, J. — On the Structure of the Poison Apparatus of the Araneidea.

Preliminary Communication. Bidl. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., L., pp. 110-13.

Michael, A. D. — On two Species of Acariua believed not to have been before

recorded as British. Plates 6-7. Joum. Qicek. Micr. Club, VI., pp. 107-20.

5. Crustacea.

Fredkricq, L., and G. Vandevelde. — Velocity of Transmission of the Motor
Excitation in the Nerves of the Lobster. Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 239-40.

Grobben, C. — The Antennary Gland of the Crustacea. Plate 9.

Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, III., pp. 93-110.
Haller, G. — On some new Cymothoinas. Plate 18.

Arch. Naturg., XLVI., pp. 375-95.

Man, J. G. de.— On some Podophthalmous Crustacea presented to the

Leyden Musfium by Mr. J. A. Kruyt, collected in the Red Sea near the city of

Djeddah. [English.] Notes R. Zool. Mas. Nctherl., II., pp. 171-85.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOQAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 89 i)

jMieks, E. J. — Notice of Crustaceans collected by P. Geddes at Vera Cruz.

Journ. Linn. Soc. (^ZooL), XV., pp. 85-7.

Milne-Edwards, A. — Note on a new species of Blind Crustacea, from great
depths of the sea. Ann. Set. Nat. (^ZooL), IX., Art. No. 2, 1 p.

SxEBBiNG, T. R. R. — Gastrosctccus spiaiferus Goes, newly described and
figured. Plate 3. Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. lli-18.

Vandevelde, G. — See Fre'dc'ricq, L.

Vermes.

Babesin, v.— On a Nematode fimnd in the Human Peritoneum. Plate 5,

figs- 1-5. Arch. path. Anat. ^ Physiol. ( Virchow), LXXXI., pp. 158-65.

Beal, F. E. L.— Tardigrades and Eggs. 3 figs. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 593-4.

Bell, F. J. — On the I'entastomum polyzonum of Harley, with a Note on the

Synonymy of the Allied Species. Ann. ^ Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 173-G.

Cosmovici, L. C. — Genital Glands and Segmental Organs of the Polychsetons

Annelids (concW.). Plates 21-8. [Trans.]

Arch. Zuol. expcr. 4' gen. (Zacaze-Duthiers}, VIII., pp. 289-372.
Dewoletzky, R. — On the Anatomy of the Nemertines. Prt- liminary Com-
munication I. Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 375-9, 396-400.
Etheridge, R , jun. — A Contribution to the Study of the British Carboni-
ferous Tubicolar Annelida {concld.). Gcol. Mag., VII., pp. 362-9.
Fkaipont, J. — Researches on the Excretory Apparatus of the Trematodes and
Ccstodes. (Preliminary Note.) Bull. Acad'. M. Sci. Belg., XLIX., pp. 397-402.
„ „ Excretory Apparatus of the Trematodes and the Cestodes.
2nd note. Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., L., pp. 106-7.
„ „ Researches on the Excretory Apparatus of the Trematodes and
the Cestodes. Plates 18-19. " Arch, cle Biol., I., pp. 415-56.
Giard, a. — On the Aflinities of the Genus Polggordius witli the Annelida of
the Family of Opheliid.-e. Comptes Rendus, XCT., pp. 341-3.
Hatschkk, B. — On the Embryology of Echiurus and the Systematic Position of
the Echiuridte (Gephyrei chaetiferi). Plates 4-6.

Arbeit. Zool. Instit. Univ. Wien, III., pp. 45-78.

„ „ Protodrilus Leuckartii. A new Genus of the Archiannelida.

Plates 7-8. Arbeit. Zool. Tnstit. Unit. Wicn, III., pp. 79-92.

HtNDE, G. J. — On Annelid Jaws from the Wenlock and Ludlow Formations of

the West of England. Plate 14. Qwirt. Journ. Geol. Sci., XXXVI., pp. 368-78.

HiBUECHT, A. A. \V. — On the Anatomy of Nemertines.

Zool. Ameig., II., pp. 406-7.

Laczko, K. — Contributions to the Knowledge of the History of the

Tctrarhyuchi, principally of the Nervous System. Zool. Anzetg., III., pp. 427-9.

Leick.\rt. — On a ease of Cestodic Tuberculose, with some Observations

on the ova of Tccnia inediocanellata. Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., XLIX., pp. 659-69.

Manson, p. — Further Observations on Micro-Fllaria), with Descriptions of

new Species. Plates 8-10. Journ. Quck. Micr. CM>, VI., pi). 130-40.

]\lu.\iEZ, R. — Studies on the Cestodes. Bnll. Sci. Dep. Nord, III., pp. 240-6.

„ ., On the Cysticerci of the Tanice.

Rev. Intcrnat. Sci., VI., pp. 135-52.
,, „ Ccstodes and Ilelminlhologists. „ „ j))). 268-75.

Peuroncito, E. — Ililininthologioiil Observations upon the Endemic Disease
dcveliijted among the LabourLTs iu the Tunnel of Mount St. Gothard.

Journ. Que/:. Micr. Club, VI., pp. 141-50. _
I'oiNCARE. — On a peculiar Altei-atiou of Butcher's ftleat. 3 figs.

Comptes Rewlus, XCI., pp. 177-9.
„ On the Embryos accompanying the Cysticerci iu I'ork.

Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 362-3.

RosSETEK, ']'. B. — -Flosculariii ornatu. Sci.-Gossip, 1880, jip. 182-3.

So.M.MEit, F. — The Anatomy of the Liver Fluke, Distonium hefdicum L. Plates

27-32. Zeitschr. f,w. ZooL, XXXIV.. pp. 539-610.

Si'KNOKL, J. W. — Contributions to tho Knowledge of the Gcphyna. II. The

Orgauizatiou of Kchiurus I'allusii. Plates 23-6, and 2 figs.

Zeit^-cftr. iriss. Zool., XXXIV., p|>. 160-538.

;^ N 2

900 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

Thomas, F. — Syndtijtrlum and Angiiillula on Dryaa.

Bot. Ccntralbl., I., pp. 761-4.
ViGViER, C. — On the Organization of Batrachohdella Latastii. Plates 29-30.

Arch. Zool. cxpe'r. ^ f/cn (Lncaze-Bnthiers), VIII,, pp. 373-90.

Villot, A. — On the Organization and Development of the Gordii. \_'lranslAvova.

'Comptes Rendus.'] Ann. (}• Mng. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 169-71.

Wilson, E. B. — Preliminary Abstract of Observations upon the Early Stages

of some Polychajtous Anuelides. [English.] Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 455-6.

Echinodermata.

Bell, F. J. — Note on an abnormal (quadriradiate) specimen of Amblypncustes
formosus. Figs. 1-3 of Plato 5. Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.}, XV., pp. 126-9.

„ „ On the Names to be applied to certain Echinoidea.

J'roc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1880, pp. 220-2.
CoTTEAU, G. — On the Echinida of the Tertiary Strata of Belgium.

Comptes Rendus, XCL, pp. 182-3.

Duncan, P. M. — On a Synthetic Type of Ophiurid from the North Atlantic.

Plate 3. Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), XV., pp. 73-8.

FoETTiNGER, A. — On the Existence of Haemoglobin in the Echinoderms.

Plate 17. Arch, de Biol, I., pp. 405-13.

„ „ On the Discovery of Hfemoglobin in the Aquiferous System

of an Echiuodcrm {Ophiactis virens).

Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., XLIX., pp. 402-4.
Hambach, G.— Contribution to the Anatomy of the genus Pentrernites, with
description of new species. Plates A and B.

Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, IV., pp. 145-60.
LcDwiG, H. — The Formation of the Egg-covering in Antcdon rosacea. 3 figs.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 470-1.

MiLLEU, S. A. — Description of four new Species of Silurian Fossils. Plate 4.

[3 Ech.] Journ. Cincinn. Soc. Nat. Hist., III., pp. 140-4.

Sladen, W. p. — Oh a remarkable Form of Pedicellaria and the Functions

perfoiuied thereby, together with general observations on the altered forms of

this organ in the Echinida). Plates 12-13.

Ann. S( Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 101-14.

Stewart, C. — Note on an Abnormal Amhlgpneustes griseus. Figs. 4-6 of

Plate 5. Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool), XV., p. 130.

Wetherby, a. G. — Remarks on the Trenton Limestone of Kentucky, with

Descriptions of new Fossils from that Formation and the Kaskaskia (Chester)

Sub-carboniferous. Plate 5. [6 n. sp. Crinoids.]

Journ. Cincinn. Soc. Nat. Hist., III., pp. 144-60.

Coelenterata.

Allman, G. J. — On Limnocodium victoria, a new Hydroid Medusa of Fresh

Water. 3 figs. Journ. Linn. Soc. (Zool.), XV., pp. 131-7.

„ „ The Fresh-water Medusa. Nature, XXII., p. 290.

Fewkes, J. W. — The Siphonophores (I. The Anatomy and Development of

Agalma). 6 figs. Am. Nat., XIV., pp. 617-30.

,, „ Note on the Structure of Rhizophysa jUiformis. Plate 2.

Froc. Lost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XX., pp. 292-303.
„ The Tubes in the larger Nectocalyx of Ahyla pentagona.
Plate 3. Froc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., XX., pp. 318-24.

Hektwig, R. — On the Structure of the Ctenophora. Plates 15-21.

Jen. Zeitschr. Naiurw., XIV., pp. 313-457-
Keesciiner, L. — On the Embryologyof Hydra. Preliminary Communication.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 454-5.
Koch, G. v.— Notes on Corals. Plate 16. Morphol. Jahrh., VI., pp. 355-61.
Lankester, E. R. — The Fresh-water Medusa.

Nature, XXII., pp. 316-7, 361.

LArwoRTH, C. — On the Geological Distribution of IhcEhabdophora. Part III.

{contcl). Ann. <)• Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 185-207.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 901

Murray, J. — The Structure and Origin of Coral Keefs and Islands. [Abstr.
of paper read at Roy. Soc. Edinb.] Nature, XXII., pp. 351-5.

EoBiNSON, J. F. — The Medusa Aquarium. 1 fig. Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 176-8.
RoEMEK, ¥. — Notes on the Genus Caunopcra of Phillips.

Geol. Mag., VII., pp. 343-5.
Taylor, J. E. — Our common British Fossils and where to find them. No. XII.
(Corals). 6 figs. Sci.-Gossip, 1880, pp. 197-8.

AVeismann, a. — On the Origin of the Sexual Cells of the Hydroida. II.

Zool. An^eig., III., pp. 367-70.

Porifera.

Carter, H. J. — On Fossil Sponge-spicules from the Carboniferous Strata of
Ben Bulben, near Sligo. Plate 146, figs. 1-17.

An7i. cf- Mag. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 209-14.
„ „ Sponges. [Including " List of Sponges dredged by the Bir-

mingham Natural History and Microscopical Society, Falmouth Excursion, 1879,
depth 15-50 lathom^".] Mid. Nat., III., pp. 190-5,

Merejkowsky, C. de. — Reproduction of the Sponges by exterior budding.
Plate 31. Arch. Zool. exp^r. ^ gen. (^Lacaze-Buthiers), VIII, pp. 417-32.

Mills, H. — Fresh-water Sponges. Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 125-32.

ScHtJLTZE, F. E. — Researches on the Structure and Development of the
Sponges. IX. The Plakinid*. Plates 20-2.

Zeitschr. wiss. Zool, XXXIV., pp. 407-51.
SoLLAS, W. J. — On the Structure and Afiinities of the Genus Protospongia
(Salter). 2 figs. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, XXXVI., pp. 3G2-7.

VosMAER, G. C. J. — A Spongiological Bibliography.

Zool. Anzeig., III., pp. 478-80.

Waller, J. G. — On an- undescribed British Sponge of the Genus Raphiodesma

Bow. Plate 5. Journ. Quek. Micr. Club, VI., pp. 97-104.

Protozoa.

Fullagab, J. — A peculiar Infusorian. 1 fig. \_Trachelocercaohr.']

Sci.-Gossip, 1880, p 181.
„ „ Notes on the Amcebas. 14 figs. Sci.-Gossi]), 1880, pp. 204-7.

Kent, W. S. — A Manual of the Infusoria. Part 1. 144 pp., 9 plates. (8vo.
London, 1880.)

Lanbssan, J. L. de. — The Protozoa. 16 figs.

Bev. Internat. Sci., VI., pp. 1-49.
Lapiiam, W. G. — Fclonvjxa palustris. 1 plate and 3 figs. (/« part.)

Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 152-6, 165-71.
Pantanelli, D. — The Diaspro of Tuscany and its Fossils. [Report.]

Atti Ji. Accad. Line. — Transunt., IV., pp. 198-9.
Wilson, E. — On the Occurrence of Foramiuifera in the Carboniferous Lime-
stone of Derbyshire. Midi. Nat., III., pp. 220-1.

BOTANY.

A. GENERAL, including Embryolog'y and Histology
of the Phanerogamia.

Bachmann, E, — On Suberous Growths on Leaves. l'l,it(>s 7-10.

Ja/trh. wiss. Hot., XII., pp. 191-23G.

Baillon. — On a Case of Apparent Inscctivorism. \_Ahstr. of paper at tlio

Linncan Soc. of Paris.] Nature, XXII., p. 277.

Bclircns, W. — On the Influence of the Movcmcjit and other Physical I'ropertics

of Water on the lleliaviuur of Aquatic Plants. [^Abstr.']

Kosmos, VII., pp. 4G6-71.

BoNSiEii, G. — On the Variation with Altitude of the Colouring Matter of

Flowers in the tame Species. Biiil. Soc. IJvt. France, XXVIL, pp. 103-5.

902 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

Bonnier, G. — On the Quantity of Heat Disengaged by Plants during Ger-
mination. Ball. Soc. But. France, XXVII., pp. 141-4.
„ „ See Tieghem, P. Van.
Bretfeld, Freiiierr v. — On tlie Fall of Leaves and Healing of the Eesulting
gear. Ja/trb. iviss. Bot., XII., pp. 133-60.
Cauvet. — Second Note on the Disengagement of Carbonic Acid by the Roots
of Plants. -Sm/^. Soc. Bot. France, XXVII., pp. 113-16.
Comes, H. — Influence of Light on the Transpu-ation of Plants.

Comptes Bendus, XCI., p. 533.
Crie, L. — Contributions to the Palseozoic Flora.

Comptes Bendus, XCI., pp. 241-2.
D'Arbacmont. — Note on the Production of Chlorophyll in the Dark.

Bnll. Soc. Bot. France, XXVII., pp. 89-97.
De Candolle, a. — Phytograpliy, or the Art of Describing Plants considered
from difft-rent points of view. 481 pp. (8vo. Paris, 1880.)
Engelmann, G. — The Acorns and their Germination.

Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, IV., pp. 190-2.
Ettingshausen, C. Baron v. — Preliminary Communications on Phyto-Piiylo-
genetic Researches. SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXXX., pp. 557-91.

Gray, A. — Action of Light on Vegetation. Am. Journ. ScL, XX., pp. 74-6.
GmGNAKD, L.— On the Structure and Functions of the Embryonal Suspensor
in some Leguminoste. Comptes Bendus, XCI., pp. 346-9.

Heckel, E. — On the Action of high and moist Temperatures and of some
chemical Substances (benzoate of soda, benzoic acid, sulphurous acid) on Ger-
mination. Comptes Bendus, XCI., pp. 129-31.
„ „ On deforming Pilosism in some Plants.

Comptes Bendus, XCI., pp. 349-51.
Hegelmaier, F. — On the Suspension of Dicotyle'dons composed of Multi-
nucleated Cells. Bot. Zelt., XXXVIII., pp. 497-506, 513-22.
Hoffsiann, H.— On the Thermal Constants of Vegetation.

Bot. Zelt., XXXVIII., pp. 465-71.
Lanessan, J. L. DE. — The Colouring Matters and the Coloration of Plants.

Bev. Internat. Sci., VI., pp. 97-134.
MacLeod, J. — Contribution to the Study of the Role of Insects in the Pol-
linization of Heterostyle Flowers {Brimula elatior).

Bull. Acad. R. Sci. Belg., L., pp. 27-33.
Mer, E. — On the Absorption of Water by the Leaves of Bulbous Plants.

Bidl. Soc. Bot. France, XXVI., pp. xli.-iv.
MI'ller, H. — Some Practical and Theoretical Remarks on F. Hildebrand's
Comparative Researches on the Sap-glands of the Cruciferse.

Jahrb. iciss. Bot., XII., pp. 161-9.
„ „ On the Development of the Colours of Flowers.

Kosmos, IV., pp. 350-65.
PorLSEN, V. A. — Botanical Microchemistry ; a Guide to Phytohistological
Researches for the Use of Students. 80 pp. (8vo. Copenhagen, 1880.)

ScHNETZLER, J. B. — On Changes in the Red Colouring Matter of Fcsonia
officinalis under the influence of Chemical Reagents. Bot. Centralbl., I., p. 682.
Tangl, E. — On open Comujunicatiun between the Cells of the Endosperm of
some Seeds. Plates 4-6. Jahrb. wiss. Bot., XII., pp. 170-90.

TiEGHEM, P. Van, and G. Bonnier. — Researches on Retarded Life and Dor-
mant Life. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 83-8, 116-22.
Tbeub, M. — Note on the Nuclei of Vegetable Cells. Plate XVI.

Arch, de Biol., I., pp. 393-404.

B. CRYPTOGAMIA.

AiTOHESON, J. E. T.— On the Flora of the Kuram Valley, &c., Afghanistan.
[Crypt. = 30.] Journ. Linn. Soc. {Bot.), XVIII., pp. 1-113.

Brongxiakt, C, and M. Coenu. — Note on the Cryptogams collected in the
Environs of Gisors on the 16th May, 1880.

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVII., pp. lGO-1.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 903

Eyfcrthy B. — The Simplest Forms of Life (contd.). [Trans, from the German.]

Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 133-4.

GoEBEL, K. — Contributions to the Comparative Developmental-history of the
Sporangia. Plate 8. Bot. Zeit., XXXVIIl., pp. 545-52, 561-71.

Makchaxd, L. — Piiarmaeo-medical Cryptogamic Botany. Part I. 138 pp.,
30 figs. (8vo. Paris, 1880.)

Williamson, W. C. — On the Organization of the Fossil Plants of the Coal
Measures. XI. Abstract. Proc. Eoy. Soc, XXX., pp. 550-4.

Cryptogamia Vascularia.

Gardener, J. S. — Observations on Arctic Fossil Floras with regard to Tempe-
rature. {_G leichenix and Oleawlra.'] Nature, XXII., pp. 341-2.

Muscineae.
Bescherelle, E. — Bryological Flora of Re'union and the other South African
Islands of the Indian Ocean. (/« part.)

Ann. Sci. Nat. (Bot.). IX., pp. 291-380.
„ „ Bryological Flora of the Island of Nossi-Be'.

Bev. BryoL, VII., pp. 17-23, 33-40.
Braithwaite, R. — The Sphagnaceaj or Peat-Mosses of Europe and North
America. 91 pp., 29 plates. (8vo. London, 1880.)

Brotherus, V. F. — Bryological Excursions in the Caucasus.

Bcv. BryoL, VII., pp. 49-58.
Bbtologists of Europe, List of. Fifth Supplement.

Bev. BryoL, VII., pp. 1-2.
Debaf. — Two new Mosses ? „ „ pp. 41-3.

Geheeb, A. — Note on Weisia Welioitschii Schpr. „ „ p. 45.

Hampe, E. — Selection of Exotic Mosses, new or little known, by J. E. Duby.

Fhra, LXIII., pp. 332-6.
Hy. — On tlie Structure of the Stem in Mosses.

Bu'L Soc. Bot. France, XXVII., pp. 106-12.
Leitgeb, H. — The Sporogonium of Archidium. 1 plate.

SB. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXXX., pp. 447-CO.

LiNDBERG, S. O. — Tortula lingulata n. sp. Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. 40-1.

„ „ De peristomio Eucalyptse stieptocarpse et procerse. [Latin.]

Rev. BryoL, VII., p. 77.
„ „ Distinctio Scapanise carinthiacse e Sc. apiculata. [Latin.]

Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. 77-8.
MuLLER, C— Prodromus Bryologias Argentinicje sen Musci Lorentziani
Argentinici (contd.). [Latin.] Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. 5-13, 58-64.

Philibert. — Notes on some Rare or Critical Species.

Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. 27-8, 43-5.
Rechin, J. — Bryological Glance at the Environs of Mamers (Sarthe).

BulL Soc. Bot. France, XXVI., pp. xx.-iii.
„ „ Report on a Bryological Excursion to Lioran.

BulL Soc. Bot. France, XXVI., pp. Ixxix.-lxxxii.
Renaild, F. — Note on some [12] Mosses of the Pyrenees (contd.).

Rev. BryoL, \U., pp. 2-5, 78-9.
„ „ Note on Trichostomum (Jiydrogonium) meditcrraneum C. l\Iiill.

Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. 79-80.
Stabler, G. — Two new British HepaticsB [Cesia oi^Ksa and Radnla Limknbergii],

Trim. Journ. Bot., LX., p. 243.
Venttri. — A Bryological Novelty \_Bryum calcarcum n. sp.J.

Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. 23-G.
„ Critical Notes on the Genus Orihotrichum.

Rev. BryoL, VII., pp. G5-7G.
Fungi.

Baky, A. DK. — On JEcidiuiii ubictinuni (conctd.).

Ann. Sci. Nat. {Hot.), IX., pp. 2.")7-60.
Bergonzini, C— On u new colourtd Bacterium.

Anmur. Soc. NaturuL Mod., XIV., pp. 149-58.

904 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF

BoL'DiER. — See Koze.

BouLEY. — Observations on M. Pasteur's paper.

Comptes Bendus, XCI., pp. 4.57-9.

BRrNAUD, p. — Dichotomous Table of the Families of Pyrenomycetes hitherto

fouiKl in the Charente-Infe'rieure. Rev. Mycol., II., pp. 129-36.

Cooke, M. C. — Exotic Fungi. Grevillea, IX., pp. 10-15.

„ „ See Kalchbrenner, C.

Cooke, M. C, and Dr. Habkness. — Californian Fungi.

Grevillea, IX., pp. 6-9.
CoBNU, M. — Note on some Fungi. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVII., pp. 124-5.
„ Note on some Fungi of the French Flora.

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 144-5.
„ Alternation of Generations in some Urediuese,

ComjJtes Rcndus, XCI., pp. 98-9.
Ercolant, G. B. — On Onychomycosis in Man and the Solipedes. (in part.')

Journ. de Microgr., IV., pp. 131-6.
Fedaeb, J. — Fungi and Algse in the London Clay.

F7igl. Mech., XXXII., p. 39.
GiLLOT, X. — Note on some new or rare Fungi observed in the environs of
Autun. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 156-60.

„ Discovery in France of Roesleria hypogma Thiim. and Pass.

Rev. Mycol., II., pp. 124-5.
,, Variations in Agaricus (^Fsathyra) hifrons Berkl.

Rev. Mycol, pp. 125-6.

Geawitz, p. — On the Growth of Moulds in the Animal Organism. Plate 10.

Arch. path. Anat. t^ Physiol. (^Virchoiv), LXXXL, pp. 355-76.

Greenfield, W. S. — Preliminary Note on some points in the Pathology of

Anthrax, with especial reference to the modification of the properties of the

Bacillus anthracis by cultivation, and to the protective influence of inoculation

■with a modified virus. Proc. Roy. Soc, XXX., pp. 559-60.

Harkness, Dr.— *S'(?c Cooke, M. C.

[Hitchcock, E.] — Studies of Atmospheric Dust.

Am. If. Micr. Journ., I., 135-8.
Ihne, E, — Infection Experiments with Puccinia Makacearum.

Hedwigia, XIX., pp. 157-18.
Kalchbrenner, C, and M. C. Cooke. —Australian Fungi (contd.)

Grevillea, IX., pp. 1-4.
„ „ South African Fungi.

Grevillea, pp. 17-34.
Kaesten, p. a. — Pyrenomycetes aliquot novi.

Hedwigia, XIX., pp. 115-18.
Klebs, E., and C. ToMMASi-CRrcELi. — Studies on the Nature of Malaria.

5 plates. Atti R. Accud. Line. — Mem., IV., pp. 172-235.

Lanessan, J. L. DE. — The Saccharomycetes and the Fermentations which

tliey cause. Rev. Internat. Sci., VI., pp. 220-40.

MiQUEL, P. — Studies on the Organized Dusts of the Atmosphere (contd.).

6 figs. Brehissonia, II., pp. 177-95.

Pasteur, L. — On the Etiology of Anthrax. Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 86-94.
„ „ Experiments tending to show that Fowls vaccinated for

" Cholera " are refractory for Antlirax.

Comjytes Retulus, XCL, p. 315.
,, „ On the Etiology of Antliiacic Affections.

Comptes Rendus, XCL, pp. 455-7.
Patol'illard, N. — On the Conidial Apparatus of Pleurotus ostreatus Fr.
1 fig. Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 125-6.

„ „ Note on some Fungi of the Environs of Paris.

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 161-2.
Plowright, C. B. — Boletus sulphureus and Hclvella infula at Brandon.

Trans. Norf. ^- Norw. Nat. Soc, III., pp. 151-2.
„ „ Poisoning by Agaricus (amanita) phalloides.

Trans. Norf. ^ Noru: Nat. Soc, III., p. 152.

INVERTEBEATA, CRYPT0GA3IIA, MICROSCOPf, ETC, 905

Ploweight, C. B. — On the Occurrence of Ergot upon Wheat dming the
past Autumn (1879).

Trans. Norf. # l\orvo. Nat. Soc, III., pp. 152-3.
PoixcARE. — On tlie Productiou of Anthrax by Pasturages.

Comptes Rendus, XCI., pp. 179-80.
RouMEGUERE, C— A new eatable Amanita. Hypothesis of the circumstances
which may render a poisonous species inoffensive. Mev. Mycol., II., pp. 151-7.
„ „ Preparation by Dr. Herpell of fleshy Funffi for Study.

Rev. Mycol., II., pp. 157-8.
„ „ A conidiferous Rhizomorpha discovered bv the Abbe

Barljiclie. Rev. Mycol., pp. 159-60.

EozE and Bocdier. — Contribution to the Mycology of Auvergne. Plate 3.

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVI., pp. Ixxiv.-ix.
Saccardo, p. a. — Programme of the ' Sylloge Fungorum omnium hucusque
cognitorum.' Rev. Mycol., II., pp. 148-50.

„ „ Spegazzinia novum Hyphomycetum genus. [Latin.]

Rev. Mycol., 11., p. 140.
Salomoxse^', C. J. — A simple Method for the pure Culture of ditferent
Bacteria of Putrefaction. Bot. Zeit., XXXVIII., pp. 4S1-9.

ScHULZER, S. — Mycological Notes.

Oesterr. Bot. Zeitschr., XXX., pp. 250-2, 286-7.

Spegazzini, C. — Funffi nonnuUi in insula Sancti Vincentii in die 11 Decembri

1879 lecti a C. S. [Partly Latin.] 2Zei\ J/yco/., IL, pp. 160-1.

Thin, G. — On Bacterium foetiJum : an organism associated with profuse

sweating of the soles of the feet. Plate 6. Proc. Roy. Soc, XXX., pp. 473-8.

TaiiiiEX, F. v. — Diagnoses to ' Mycotheca universalis ' (concUl.).

Flora, LXin., pp. 323-32.
TiEGHESi, P. VAX — Bacillus Amylohacter in the Coal Epoch.

Ann. Sci. Nat. (^Bot.), IX., pp. 381-2.
„ „ On some aggregated Bacteria.

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 148-53.
„ ,, Observations on the green Bacteriacese, on the white

Phycochromaceae, and on the Affinities of the two Families.

Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVIL, pp. 174-G.
Tommasi-Crcdeli, C. — See Klebs, E.

ToussArs'T, H.— On Immunity against Anthrax acquired by preventive
Inoculations. Comptes Rend"S, XCI., pp. 135-7.

„ ,, Identity of Septicemy and "Cholera des Ponies."

Comptes Remlus, XCI., pp. 301-3.
Winter, G. — Piemarks on some Uredinese and Ustilaginere.

Hed:rigia, XIX., pp. 105-10.
„ „ Mycological Notes from the Grisons. {Fn part.)

ffedwigia, XIX., pp. 139-41.

Wolff, M. — On the Bacterium-tlieory in Illness resulting from Wounds.

(In part.) Arch. path. Anat. 4' Rhysiol.(V irchow), LXXXL, p. 193.

Lichenes.

Arnold, F.— Lichenological Fragments. XXII. Flora, LXIIL, pp. 371-85.
Lenhariski:, T. Bri.'^on de. — Liclienological Observations. The substratum
and the H|)ccilic characters. Rev. Jlycol., II., pp. 141-5.

Minks, A.— [On his recent work, " The Microgonidium."]

Rev. Mycol., II., pp. 119-24.
Phillips, W. — British Lichens : hints how to study them {cunt/.).

Midi. Nat., III., pp. 196-9,
Algse.

Carter, H. J. — On misdirected Efforts to Conjugation in Spiroqyra. Plato
14, figs. 1-3. Ann. .]f- Maj. Nat. Hist., VI., pp. 207-9.

Cooke, M. C. — Additional British Desniids. Orcvittea, IX., pp. .■{8-9.

Fedarb, J. — Micro-Geology. [Shrubsole's Mineralized Diatoms in the London
Clay.] Sci.-Gosilp, 18S0, p. 179.

VOL. in. 3 0

906 BIBLIOGKAPHY OP

H., H. P.— The Chromatology of Diatoms. Enjl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 573-4.
Habiksham% F. — Bibliography of the Diatomacese (contcl).

Journ. de Microg., IV., pp. 98-101.

Ejellman, F. iZ.— The Algte of the Siberian Polar Sea. [Ahtr. from ' Ofvers.

af K. Vet. Akad. Forhandl.', 1879.] Kature, XXII., pp. 376-7.

Mekeschkowsky, C. — Observations on the Movements of the DiatomacesB and

theii- Cause. Bot. Zeit, XXXVIIL, pp. 529-40.

Petit, P.— Spirogyra of Environs of Paris. 4 pp. 12 plates. (8vo. Paris,

1880.)

„ „ Discovery of Diatoms in the London Clay.

Brebissonia, II., pp. 195-6.
„ „ Note on the Trichogyne of Hildehrandtia rivularis Ag. Plate 1.

Brebissonia, III., pp. 1-5.
Phillips, W. — Breaking of the Meres. Plate 134. Grevillea, IX., pp. 4-5.
PiccoNE, A. — Catalogue of the Algfe collected during the Cruise of the
' Violante,' and especially in some small Mediterranean Islands. 2 figs.

Atti B. Accad. Line. — Mem., IV., pp. 19-35.
ScHWENDENEE, S. — On Spiral Phyllotaxis in Florideae. 1 plate.

MB. K. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., 1880, pp. 327-38.

TiEGHEM, P. Van. — On a new ciliated Organism containing Chlorophyll

{Dimystax Perrieri). Bull. Soc. Bot. France, XXVII., pp. 130-2.

Wills, A. W. — Note on the Movement of the Cell-contents of Ciosterium

lunata. Midi. Nat, III., pp. 187-8.

„ ,, On the Structure and Life-history of Volvox globator. Plate 7.

{In part.) Midi. Nat., IIL, pp. 209-14.

WoLLE, F. — Notes on Fresh- water Algse (Bulbochcete). 1 fig.

Am. Man. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 121-2.

MICEOSCOPY, &c.

Bale, W. M. — On covering fluid Mounts to avoid Leakage or Kunning-in.

Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 57-60.
„ 5, On selecting and mounting Diatoms.

Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 65-9.
Barnard, F. — A new Method of making Cells of Wax for mounting opaque
and transparent Objects. Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 53-7.

Bendall, H. — Note on a new Method of preserving the Colours of Tissues.

Journ. of Anat. ^ Physiol., XIV., pp. 511-12.

Blackham, G. E. — On Angular Aperture of Objectives for the Microscope.

2fpp. 18 plates. (8vo. New York, 1880.)

„ „ Penetration : a contribution to the study of the subject.

1 plate. Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 145-50.

„ „ P. angulatum, „ ,, „ p. 160.

„ „ American Microscopy — Devices for Illumination.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 518.
Bragdon, a. a. — Honour claimed without services rendered. [Reply to
Mr. Wenham.] Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 180-3.

Brown, J. Q.—See Roy, C. S.
Bulloch's New Microscope, — See Fellow, &c.
Buerell, F. S.— An Evening with Fasoldt's 1,000,000 Test-plate.

Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 160-2.
Carnot, J. B. — Manual of Microscopy. 218 pp. (8vo. Louvain, 1880.)
Carr, E., and Edmunds, J. — Chromatization of Light by a Glass Plate
[microscope slide]. Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 469, 525-6.

Clevenger, S. V. — Microscopic Examination of Tissues after the Administra-
tion of Mercury (contd.). Am. Mon, Micr. Journ., I., pp. 131-3.
CocKEY, C. H. — Mounting Bottle. „ „ „ p. 139.
Cramer, C. — On the Stereoscopic Ocular of Prazmowski. {^Abstr. from
' SB. Nat. Ges. Zui-ich.'] Bot. Centralhl, I., pp. 927-8.

INVEKTEBKATAj CKYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 907

Cbtjs, R. — Economic Objectives — " To A. J. S." — and other Micro items. 1 fig.

Enijl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 545-6.
Curtis, L. — Tiie Microscopical Examination of Signatures.

Am. Mm. Alter. Journ., I., pp. 124-9.
DuBY, J. E. — See Hampe, E.
Edmtjnds, J. — See Can, E.

" Fellow of the E. Micr. Soc." — [Photograph of FrustuJia saxonica, by Mr. S.
Wells of Boston, U.S.A. 1 fig. ; Powell and Lealand's newest formula ^ Water-
iinmersion ; Inexpensive Microscopes, &c.] iVy/. Mech., XXXI., pp. 468-9.

„ „ [Powell and Lealand's newest formula

I Water-immersion Objective ; Front Lenses greater than Hemispheres ; the
Abbe-Zeiss Homogeneous-immersion i of specially high aperture ; Homogeneous
Immersion; Micro-photography; 80,000 Diameters and American Microscopy.]

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 517-18.
„ „ [Ross's improved Microscope; Swinging Sub-

stage to Microscope in 1873 by Bulloch of Chicago, U.S.A.; Bulloch's new
Microscope; the 10-inch Microscope-body ; Abbe's Apertometer Tables. 1 fig.]

Eyigl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 567-8.
„ „ [Bulloch's new Microscope, 1 fig.; Fine-focuss-

ing Adjustments ; Powell and Lealand's new formula Homogeneous-immersion
-jL- ; Abbe's Dechromatizing Device for High-angled Objectives ; Homogeneous-
immersions with or without Correction- screw.] Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 617-18.
„ „ [Powell and Lealand's new -jij Oil-immersion;

Illumination of Opaque Objects ; Prodigious Magnifications in America ; Achro-
matic Condensers.] Engl. Mech., XXXII., p. 84.
Feknald, C. H. — Method of preparing and mounting Wings of Micro-lepido-
ptera. Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 172-3.
" Four Inch." — Twenty thousand diameters. Am. Journ. Micr., V., p. 160.
Frazer, p., jun. — A Mirror for Illuminating Opaque Objects for the Projecting
Microscope. 1 fig. Froc. Amc'r. Fhil. Soc. Philx., XVIIL, pp. 503-4.
Gage, S. H. — Permanent Microscopic Preparations of Plasmodium.

Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 173-4.
Goldstein, J, E. Y. — On the Use of Carbolic Acid in mounting Microscopic
Objects. Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 50-3.

Houies, S. — Thelsophotal Binocular Microscope, 11 figs.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 464-5, 546.
Hull, H. V. — Glass for Slides. Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 138-9.

Kaiser, E. — C. Giinther's Photographs of Pleurosigma angulutum.

Bot. Centralbl., I., pp. 683-4.
„ „ On some new Improvements in the Microscope-stand. 2 figs.

Bot. Centralbl., I., pp. 72^8-34.
KiTTON, F. — " Dry Mounts " for the Microscope.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 582-3.
Lens-making. 10 figs. [From the ' Scientific American.']

Engl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 513-14.

LooMis, B. W. — A simple and speedy Method of Staining Animal and

Vegetable Sections. Am. Mon. Micr. Journ,, I., p. 143.

Malassez, L. — On the most recent Improvements in the Methods and

Apparatus for counting Blood-globules, and on a new Counter. 5 figs.

Arch, de I'hysiol., 1880, pp. 377-419.
Martin, A.— On a Method of direct Autocollimation of Objectives and its
Application to the Measurement of the Indices of Refraction of the Glasses which
compose them. • Comptes Bendus, XCI., pp. 219-21.

' Microscopist's Annual for 1879.' No. 1, containing List of Microscopical
Socit-ties in the United States, Directory of all tlio Dealers and Manufacturers in
the World, Tables, Rules, Formula;, &c., useful to Microscopiats. 48 pi). (12mo
New York, 1880.)

MoNTUiNY, C. — Note on the Difference in the Appreciation of the apparent
Size of Microscopic Images by different observers.

J!»ll. Acid. li. Set. Belg., XLIX.. pp. G70-8.
Moore, A. Y. — Higher Magnifying Powers. Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 174-5.
" Orderic Vital." — The Achromatic Object-glass. Engl. Mech., XXXL, j). 476.

908 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, ETC.

"Orderic Vital."— Lens-grinding, &c. Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 619,

Pacini, F. — On some Metliods of preparing and preserving the Microscopic
Elements of the Animal and Vegetable Tissues. {In part.)

Journ. de Microg., IV., pp. 136-42.
Pelletan, J. — Immersion Illuminators. The prism of Dr. Woodward. 1 fig.

Journ. de Microg., IV., pp. 72-6.
„ „ The Camera Lucida of Dr. J. G. Hofmann for Landscapes.
1 fig. Journ. de Microg., IV., pp. 76-8.

Phin, J. — Microscopical. 80,000 diameters.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 469. ^See also p. 518.]
Photograph oi Frmtulia saxonica. — See Fellow, &c.

Powull and Lealand's newest formula \ Water-immersion and new -^-^ Oil-
immersion. — See Fellow, &c.

Ralph, T. S. — Annual Address of the President.

Journ. Micr. Soc. Vict., I., pp. 33-41.

Eeddots, C. — Cover-glasses. Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 123-4.

EoGEES, W. A. — On the present state of the question of Standards of Length.

Proc. Am. Acad. Arts ^ Sci., XV., pp. 273-312.

EoMEO, N. A. — A Eeply to Dr. Blackham and " Four Inch."

Am. Journ. Micr., V., p. 185.

EoY, C. S., and J. Graham Brown. — The Blood-pressure and its Variations

in the Arterioles, Capillaries, and smaller Veins. Plate 10. [Description of

Methods employed, pp. 325-30.] Journ. of F/,y.siol., IL, pp. 323-56.

Eyder, J. A. — Holman's new Compressorium and Moist Chamber. 2 figs.

A7n. Nat., XIV., pp. 691-3.
S., A. J. — Economic Objectives. Engl. Mech., XXXI. , p. 569.

Scott, E. T.— Lens-making. „ XXXIL, p. 37.

Sidle, J. W.— The new " Congress " Turn-table. 2 figs.

Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 162-3.
Smith, A. — Microscopical Drawings upon Glass. Sci.-Gossij), 1880, p. 183.
Sternberg, G. M.— A useful Culture-cell. 1 fig.

Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 141-3.
Stoddee, 0. — Eeply to Mr. Wenhara. Am. Journ. Micr., V., p. 183.

„ „ The ToUes-Blackham Stand. Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 546.

Stolterfoth, H. — On a simple Method of cleaning Diatoms.

Journ. Que/i. Micr. Club, VI., pp. 95-6.
" Sunlight." — Centering Lenses. Engl. 3£ech., XXXI., p. 470.

„ Leos-grinding, &c.

Engl. Mech., XXXI., p. 569 ; XXXIL, p. 69.
VoRCE, C. M. — On Penetration. Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 183-4.

,, „ CarbolicAcid in Balsam-mounting.

Am. Mon. Micr, Journ., I., pp. 161-2.

W.— Finishing Slides. „ „ pp. 122-3.

Ward, E. H. — Inaugural Address, including Eemarks on the Practical Uses

of the Microscope, deliveieil at St. James's Hall, Buffalo, N.Y., August 19th, 1879.

17 pp. (8vo. Indianapolis, 1S80.)

Wenham, F. H. — The Binocular Microscope with Achromatized Eefracting
Prisms. 2 figs. E7igl. Mech., XXXI., pp. 500-1, 569.

West, E. G. — Microscopic Tracings of Lissajou's Curves.

Ann. Report S. Loud. Micr. ^ Nat. Hist. Club, 1880, pp. 29-30.
White, J. D. — A new Injecting Apparatus. 1 fig.

Am. Mon. Micr. Journ., I., p. 141.
„ „ Improvement in making Wax-cells.

Am. Afon. Micr. Journ., I., pp. 150-1.
Woodward, A. L. — Eeflection from inside of the Body-tube of the Microscope.

Am. Journ. Micr., V., pp. 184-5.

H}

T'

W BI-MONTHLY. ^

Vol. III. No. 6.] DECEMBER, 1880. ["^ PHcltr^'

Journal

OF THE

Royal
Microscopical Society

^ CONTAINING ITS TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS,

AND A RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA,
MICROSCOPY, &c.

Edited, under the direction of the Publication Committee^ by

PRANK CRISP, LL.B., B.A., P.L.S.,

One of the Secretaries of the Society;

WITH THB ASSISTANCE OF

A. W. BENNETT, M.A., B.Sc., I F. JEFFREY BELL, M.A.,

Lecturer oh Botany at St. Thomas' t Hospital, \ Professor of Comparative Anatomy in Kin^'M ColUge,

AND

S. O. RIDLEY, B.A., F.L.S.,

Of t lie British Museum,
FELLOWS OF THE SOCIETY.

WILLIAMS & NORGATE,

LONDON AND EDINBURGH.

PBIMID IV WM. CLOWl* AND «OyS, I.IMITIID,] [.^ITAMFOHD STREBT AND CMAHINC CROSS.

( 2 )

JOUENAL

OF THE

EOYAL MICEOSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

VOL. III. No. 6.

CONTENTS.

TbANSAOTIONS op the SoOIBTT — PAOB

XXIV. On some Structural Features op Eohinostrephus molare,

Parabalenia gratiosa, and Stomopneustes variolaris.

By Charles Stewart, M.K.C.S., Sec. E.M.S. (Plate XX.) 909

XXV. On the Diatomaoe^ in the Llyn Arbnig Bach Deposit.

By Henry Stolterfoth, M.D 913

XXVI. On a New Method op Testing an Object-glass used as a

Simultaneous Condensing Illuminator op brilliantly
reflecting Objects such as minute Particles op Quick-
silver. By G. W. Royston-Pigott, M.A., M.D. Cantab.,
F.R.S., &c. .. 916

Record op Current Researches relating to Invertebrata,

Crtptogamia, Microscopy, &c. .. .. .. .. 918

Zoology.

Impregnation of file Animal Ovum 918

Influence of Light on the Development of Animals 918

Origin of the Nervous System 919

Terminations of Nerves in the Epidermis 922

Minute Structure of Smooth Muscular Fibres . . .. _ 922

Changes which Starch undergoes in the Animal Organism 923

Deep-toater Fauna of the Swiss Lakes 924

Dredgings in the Bay of Biscay 92i

Deep Dredgings in the Lake of Tiberias 925

Fresh-water Microscopic Organisms 926

Excretory System of the Cephalopoda 926

Influence of Acids and Alkalies on CephaJopods 929

'^ Liver" of the Gastropoda 929

Striated Muscles in the Monomyarian Acephalous Mollusca 9:^0

Green Colour of Oysters 931

Neomenia gorgonophilus 932

Australian Polyzoa 933

Fossil CatenicellcC from the (Australian') Miocene • . 933

Recent arid Fossil Species of Australian Selenariadx 934

Undefined Faculty in Insects 934

Nervous System of Oryctes nasicomis 935

Activity of Bees 937

Scent- organs of the Male Privet Hawkmoth 938

Morphology of the Suspensory Organs of Chrysalids 939

Preservation of the Chrysalis from Cold 939

Wing-muscles of Insects 940

Salivary Glands of the Odonata 941

Mode of Bespiration in the Larvse of the Genus Euphoea (Libellulidx) .. 941

Poduridx from Switzerland 942

Segments of the Geophilidx 943

Poison-organs of the Spiders 943

( 8 )

Ebcoed of Corbbnt Rk8barohe9, &c. — continued.

PAOB

Pentaetomum polyzonum ""^^

Anal Bespiration of the Crustacea • 9^4

Genealogy of the Mysid^e 9^*

Nest-building Amphipods 945

Development of Orcheslia Montagui and O. Mediterranea .. .. .. .. 946

Structure of the Eye of Limulua . . 947

Eye of Trilobites 948

New Etttomostracon from Afghanistan 948

Genital Glands and Segmental Organs of the Polychxta 949

Copulatcky Organs of Microphthalmus 950

Development and Classifictition of the Echiurida 931

Excretory Organs in the Trematoda and Cestoida 954

Ciliated Embryo of Bilharzia 955

New Type of the Cestodes 956

New Cestodes 956

Solenophorus megacephalus 957

Histology of the Tetrarhynchi 958

Viviparous Chirodota 958

Observations on the Temnopleuridx 958

Abnormal Echinids 959

Remarkable Form of Pedicellaria 960

New Echinodermata 961

Synthetic Starfish 962

Formation of the Egg-covering in Antedon rosacea 963

The Ctenophora 963

Medusx and Hydroid Polyps living in Fresh Water 967

Origin of the Generative Cells in the Hydroida 968

Development of Hydra 969

Structure of Hydra 969

IJxternal Gemmation in the Spongida (TlateXXI.) 970

General and Comparative Morphology of the Sponges 971

New British Sponge . . . . • 972

Infusoria at Parasites 972

Chlorophyll and Stai'ch in Infusoria 973

New Opalinids 973

Importance of Foraminifera for the Doctrine of Descent 975

New Moueron 975

Botany.

Division of the Nucleus in the Pollen-Mother-ceUs of Tradescantia . . . . 976

Multinucleated Cells in the Sunpensor of Dicotyledons 979

Latex and Laticiferous Vessels .. ., .. •• 981

liudlmentary Coma in Godetia 981

Nectariferous Trichomes of Melampyrum 982

Threads of Protoplasm on Glandular Uairs of Silphium 982

Besin-passages in the Coniferx 983

Infiuejice of Light on the Transpiration of Plants 983

Heliotropism 984

Formation of Chlorophyll in the Dark 984

Chlorophyll in the Leaves of tlie Canada Vine .. 985

Absorption of Water by the Leaves of Bulbous Plants 9;'>5

Disengagement of Carbonic Acid from the Boots of Plants 985

Digestive Principles of I'lanta 986

Nutrition of the Droscra 986

Botanical Micro-Chemistry 986

Bed Pigment of the Flowers of the Peony 987

Development of the Sporangium in Vascular Cryptogams .. 987

Structure of the Stem of Mosses 989

Stomata of Marchantiacex 990

Infloresrence of the Marchantiacem 9;»1

New Hepaticv 9lt2

Observatitms on Urcdineie and Ustilaginete 992

Uredo viticida 9!>3

Development of the Spsrmogonia of JHcidiomycetea 993

( 4 )

Keoobd op Current Eesbarohes, Ac. — continued.

PAOB

Infection of Puccinia Malvacearum 994

Alternation of Generations in Gymnosporangium 995

Conidial Apparatus of Pleurotus ostreatus 996

Plychogaster albus, Cord., a Form of a Polyporiis ., . . 996

Synchytrium parasitic upon Dryaa 996

New Vine-disease 997

Clover-disease in Sweden 997

Salmon Disease 997

Biology of the Schizomycetea 998

Influence of Schizomycetes on the Development of Yeast 1000

New Microscopic Schizomycetes .. .. .. .. .. 1001

Social Bacteria 1001

Development and Fermenting Power of Bacteria , . . . 1005

Effect of Putrefactive Changes on Bacteria 1006

Theory of Virulent Diseases and the '^ Fowl-Cholera" 1006

Fowl-Cholera and " Sleep Disease" 1012

Fowl- Cholera and Anthrax 1013

Etiology of Anthrax 1013

Anthrax^— Its Spread and Prevention .. 1015

Immunity from Anthrax obtained hy Inoculation 1016

Identity of Bacillus anthracis and Ray-Bacillus 1018

Bacteria in Ear-disease, &c .. 1020

^^Hysterophymes" of Starch and Fat 1020

Carpozyma, the Ferment of Wine 1020

Morphology of Lichens : Endophloeal Species of Polyblastia ; Epiphora ;

Magmopsis 1021

Application of Pringsheim^s Researches on Chlorophyll to the Life of the

Lichen 1022

AgardKs ' Morphologia Floridearum' 1022

Oxyglossum, a new Genus of Laminariaceas ., 1022

New Endophytic Alga 1023

New Genus of Oscillatorieie .. .. 1023

Change of Colour in OsciHatorieas 1023

Cell-division in Conferva and (Edogonium 1024

Incrusted Filaments of Conferva • 1024

Germination of the Zoospores of (Edogonium 1025

Codiolum gregarium, A. Br 1026

Algse from the Amazons 1026

Fossil Diatoms 1026

Dimystax Perrieri, new Ciliated Organism containing Chlorophyll .. .. 1026

MicBOScopy, &c.

Permanent Microscopical Preparations of Amphibian Blood 1028

Preparing and Mounting Wings of Micro-Lepidoptera 1029

Microscopical Investigation of Wood 1030

Permanent Preparations of Plasmodium 1030

Preparation of Green Algm 1031

Slides from the Naples Zoological Station 1031

^eroscqpe« (Figs. 105 and 106) 1032

Microscopical Appearance of the Valves of Diatoms (¥ig, 107) , 10:^3

Cleaning Diatoms with Soap 1034

Separation of Heavy Microscopic Minerals 1034

Pearson-Teesdale Microtome (Figa. lOS &nd lOd) 1034

Hailes' Poly-microtome (FigB. 110 aad 111) 1036

Salicylic Acid as a Preservative 1037

Dry "■ Mounts" for the Microscope 1038

Wax Cells 1039

Improvement in Making Wax Cells 1040

Atwood's Rubber CeU (Fig. 112) 1041

Parhes's Frog-plate (Fig. 113) 1041

Sternberg's Cultwre-celllFig. lU) 1042

Apertures exceeding 180° in Air 1043

Visibility of Minute Objects — New Medium for Mounting (Monohromido

of Naphthaline) 1043

JOTIRN.Tl ICCR. SOC.TOLIEPL.S?: .

C/StewiTcrfc cL&b.

P e a^G ella.T'iae &.e . of Eelmiostpepli-us xnola3?e.
Pa-rasalexiia. a-xicL Stoxaopneiistes.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

DECEMBER, 1880.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE SOCIETY.

XXIV. — On some Sti'uctural Features of Echinosirej^Jius molare,

Parasalenia graliosa, and Stomojmeustes variolaris.

By Chaeles Stewaet, M.E.C.S., Sec. E.J\I.S.

(JRead 10th November, 1880.)

Plate XX.

EchinoBtreplius. — This genus differs from all other Desmosticha
in the form of its corona, which is broadest near the abactinal pole,
with the mouth situated at the extremity of the opposite, more
pointed, region. The flattened abactinal surface bearing spines far
exceeding in length those of other parts.

These exceptional features give greater interest to the other
points in its structure, which, in some respects, are as remarkably
difi'erent from other forms as the coarser characters.

Genital glands. — These are abundantly crowded with spicula,
those in the parts of the branches nearest the common duct being
in the form of perforated plates, often of large size, and identical
in all respects with those found in the genus PhyUac<(nthus
amongst the Cidaridae; but mixed with these, and replacing them at
the tips of the branches, are numerous bihamate spicula, such as are
so widely distributed amongst the Echinometradae and Echinidte.
The greatly varied spicular forms in Echinometra lucunter some-
what approach to this condition, but in it the perforated plates

explanation op plate XX.

Fig. L — Portion of genital gland of Echinostrcphns molare.

„ 2. — Si(](! vifw of jiiw of geminiform pedicellaria oi Echinostrephus.

„ S. — Ditto viewed fi'Am witliin.

„ 4. — Jiiw of ophioce])li;tlons \^(ii\\cc\\;ma, oi Echinostrephus.

„ 5. — Jaw of tridact\ le pfdioelluriii of Echinostrcjihus.

„ 6. — Sido view of jaw of gemmiforiii pedicellaria of Parasalenia.

„ 7. — Ditto viewed from witliin.

„ 8. — Spicula from aml)td:icial tulie of Parasalenia.

„ 9.— Jaw of n|ilii()Oipliulou.s pi dicellaria of Slomnpncustcs.

„ 10. — Jaw of tridartylc |)eilii-ellaria of I'^tomojmeustc.t.

No. S niiignifle.l :;".:; cii:mi , tlio rest 7,'i diam.
vol . 111. ':) V

910 Transactions of the Society.

are very different, and are apparently derived as a modification of
either simple bihamate or biacerate spicula.

From each genital opening protruded a cylindrical mass of
generative products, apparently surrounded and held together by a
thin membrane. May this not be a provision favouring the passing
of the ova or spermatozoa beyond the long spines of this region ?

Pedicellariae. — The gemmiform pedicellarise resemble in all
essential points those of EcJmiometra and Heterocentrotus. The
jaw terminates in a long, deeply grooved fang ; the groove, which
is almost converted into a canal by the meeting of its margins,
opening at a point near, but never at, the tip on the external or
distal surface. A long, solid fang rises close to the terminal one,
but nearer the base of the jaw, and usually on the right side. The
expanded, wing-like portion of the jaw is deeply notched on its
distal border. This character of the terminal fang, in conjunction with
the two glandular masses attached to each jaw, lead me to think
that these pedicellarise have, amongst other functions, that of intro-
ducing a poison into any wound they inflict.

The gemmiform pedicellarise are of two sizes, one about two-
thirds that of the other.

There is nothing remarkable about the tridactyle pedicellariaa.
The serrate borders of the prongs are widely separated, especially
near the distal extremity, which is somewhat spoon- shaped ; they
come in contact with one another by this part, which forms about
two-thirds of the entire length of the jaw. The sides of the prong
are pressed in forming a crest running the whole length of its outer
surface.

The ophiocephalous and trifoliate pedicellarise are similar to
those of most Echinometradae and Echinidae.

The ambulacral tubes have the usual bihamate spicula, but
much varied in size and thickness.

Parasalenia, — This genus, which at first sight looks so like an
ordinary Echinometra, differs, as has been already pointed out, in
the arrangement of its pores, and in its anal plates — the latter
resembling those of Arbacia.

Spines. — These are unlike those of any other of the Echino-
metradae in showing no evidence of periodicity of growth, such as is
met with in the rest of that family. The calcareous wedges, which
radiate from the interior of the spine, remaining for a long time
thin, and separated by a space, rather broader than themselves,
occupied by the usual calcareous network. Near the surface of the
spines, the wedges somewhat suddenly become much thickened, so
as nearly to come in contact. Their substance is peculiar, in
presenting in sections a regularly dotted character, reminding one
of the markings of striped muscle. They show no peculiarity under
polarized light.

Echinostrephus molare, &g. By C. Stewart. 911

Pedicellarire. — The pedicellariae are very scantily present. The
gemmiform variety is remarkable for the complete absence of the
secondary solid fang found in Echinometra, Heterocentrotus, and
in some members of the genus Strongylocentrotus. There is a
slight bulging to the right, at the base of the teraiinal fang, but it
shows no trace of a spine. This feature is of interest, as the
terminal with one basal fang is held by M. E. Perrier to be
characteristic of the Echinometradae, to which family most would,
I should think, refer Parasalenia. The tridactyle form is exceed-
ingly delicate, and I was unable to obtain any perfect, nor could
I find any of the other varieties.

The spicula of the ambulacral tubes are unlike any that I have
found in other JJesmosticha. They are biacerate, and generally
slightly bent in the centre. Their concave side is usually provided
with two often bifid spinules. It would be interesting to know
the structure of the viscera. Unfortunately my specimen was
thoroughly cleaned out and dry.

Stomopneustes. — This genus is interesting as often showing con-
siderable varieties in the form of the corona, which, though usually
circular, is sometimes elliptical. It is remarkable also for the size
and structure of the spicula of its ambulacral tubes, the spicula
being equally well developed in a specimen of 1 inch diameter as
in one of 4. These alone suffice to determine the genus, but as
they have been already described and figured, I will not further
allude to them.

Pedicellariae. — The ophiocephalous form is very abundant, and
they at once call attention from their large size. Their jaws are
more powerfully toothed than in any other genus I have examined,
but are most remarkable for being borne almost directly on the
calcareous stem. The muscular intervening portion, usually so
long, being in this case almost entirely absent, causes them to
resemble at first sight the gemmiform variety. Those of the
peristomal membrane are, however, of the ordinary character met
with in Echini generally. I was unable to find any gemmiform
pedicellariae, though I examined many specimens with great care.

The tridactyle form is short, and varies greatly in size. They
are broad, and when the jaws are closed the whole length of their
finely serrate edges come in contact. The crest-like septum on the
inner surface of the bo.dy of the jaw is prolonged as an irregular
crest on the inner surface of the spoon-shaped prong of the jaw
nearly to its tip. The great variation in the size of these pedicel-
lariae, and tlie broad, spoou-shajied charat'tor of their jaws make the
smaller forms closely resemble the trifoliate variety, and lend
weight to Professor Agassiz's view, that the latter are rarely
stages of the former. But what I take hero to bo the trifoliato
form, although of the same dimensions as the smallest tridactylcs,

3 p 2

912 Transactions of the Society.

show no indication of the peculiar crest described, and differ also in
some other particulars.

In conclusion, I may say that it seems to me most desirable
that minute, and even apparently trivial, features should be given in
the descriptions of species, and that when this is more done we may
find affinities between forms we should otherwise not suspect, and
be enabled by the examination of even an ambulacral tube or pedi-
cellaria, &c., to determine a species without the denudation of
portions of the corona, which is sometimes not desirable.

( 913 )

XXV. — 071 the Diatomaceee in the Llyn Arenig Bach Deposit.
By Henry Stolterfoth, M.D.

iBead 13th October, 1880.)

Having been for some time past engaged in examining diatoma-
ceous deposits, most of them from foreign countries, many from
places one has small chance of visiting, it was with no little interest
I heard of the discovery made by Mr. W. F. Lowe, of the Arenig
Bach deposit. I only know of one other diatomaceous deposit in
North Wales, mentioned by Smith in his ' British Diatomaceae ' as
Dolgelly earth, but which I have obtained, though only in small
quantities, and from some feet below the surface of the water, at a
lake called Cwm Bychan, fifteen miles from Dolgelly.

In October 1879,1 accompanied Mr. W. F. Lowe and a few friends
to the Arenigs. We had a wet day, and lost some time in finding
the lake, which lies nine miles from Bala, amidst the mountains.
On reaching it, we found that it had been drained to the extent of
about twelve feet below its normal level, so that about one-third of
its surface was dry. The edge of the lake for about ten yards
consisted of stones from the surrounding mountains, which are of
igneous origin. The remainder of the uncovered surface that we
were able to examine, was covered with about one foot of peat, and
under this was the diatomaceous material, also about one foot thick.
A small stream at the head of the lake had cut a section through
the peat and diatoms, and the latter rested directly on the rocky
bottom. This partial inspection of the bed of a mountain lake,
more than repaid the trouble of getting to it, for not only is it
something to have seen a deposit in situ, and to have handled and
examined it in more than microscopic quantities, but it enabled me
to get my specimens from different positions as naturally deposited,
an important point if we are ever to determine the time during
which a deposit has been forming, and the changes that may have
taken place with regard to species.

This much I think we may say with regard to the Arenig
deposit, that the diatoms have been collecting at the bottom of the
lake ever since the last glacial period, and although the deposit was
only a foot thick where we examined it, it is probable that in the
centre of the lake it is much thicker.

It now remains for mo to speak more pai-ticularly of the
diatoms.

For the purpose of a systematic examination, I made,

1st. (liatliorings of as many growing forms as I was able, in
and about the lake.

2nd. I took some of the peat immediately above the deposit.

3rd. A portion of the de}X)sit Ix^Iow tlie poaf.

914

Transactions ofihe Society.

4th. A portion from the middle of the deposit.

5th. A portion from the lowest part of the deposit.

All these collections I kept carefully separated, and having
cleaned and examined them, I have arranged them in five columns,
marking the relative abundance of each species. One asterisk, marks
very rare; two asterisks, rare; three asterisks, common; four
asterisks, abundant.

List op Diatomacejs from Llyn Arenig Bach.

1

2

3

4

5

Recent.

Peat.

Top.

Middle,

Bottom.

Navicula

nobilis Ehr

**

****

****

****

****

major W. Sm

**

****

****

****

*if**

divergens W. Sm

**

***

***

***

***

mesolepta Ebr

**

**

**

viiidis W. Sm

***

***

**

**

gibba Ehr

***

***

***

***

***

rhomboides Ehr

***

****

***

**

***

Berians Kiitz

***

****

****

****

**

acuta W. Sm

**■

**

firma Kiitz

*

**

gracillima

**

***

*♦*

**

**

cryptocephala Kiitz

**

alpina W. Sm

**

***

***

lataW. Sm

*

bacillaris Greg

**

**

afSnis Ehr

**

**

acuminata W. Sm

*

*»

Tabellaria

flocculosa Kiitz.

♦***

***

**

fenestrata Kiitz

***»

Eunotia

diadema Ehr

***

****

****

**

**

tetraodon Ehr

**

**

**

**

incisa Greg

****

****

****

**

**

camelus Greg

*

Epithemia

alpestris W. Sm

*

*

Himantidium

bidens Ehr

**

***

**

***

*♦

glacile Ehr

***

**

**

*♦

undulatum W. Sm

***

****

***

***

****

majus W. Sm

**

*

**

»

Synedra

radians W. Sm

***

Cocconeis

placentula Ehr

♦

Melosira

orichalcpa W. Sm

***

****

***

**

nivalis W. Sm

**

***

***

****

****

spinosa W. Sm

****

***

Cymbella

scotica W. Sm

**

***

***

**

**

maculata Kiitz

**

**

♦ *

cuspidata Kiitz

**

Llyn Arenig Bach Deposit, d'c. By Ilenry Stolterfoth. 915

Nitzschia

tenuis W. Sm

Stauroneis

gracilis Ehr

ancepa Ehr

Burirella

biseriata Do Breb

splendida Kiifz

linearis W. Sm

Gomphonema

acuminatum Ehr

dichotomuin Kiitz

Pleurosigma

lacustro W. Sm

Cymatoplenra

solca W. Sm

Odontidium

mutabilo W. Sm

Fragilaria

capucina Dem

1 2

Recent. Peat.

3 4

Top. Middle.

5

Bottom.

*

**
**
*♦

*

*

*
**

***

**
**

**♦♦
**

♦♦

*
**

Total number of species

32

38

29

26

25

The result arrived at from the examination of this list proves
that no species has existed in the lake which is not now a living
form in some place or other, while I was able to gather in a short
time more living species than are to be found in any part of the
deposit except the peat. The large forms of diatoms do not
appear to have sunk to the bottom, but are spread uniformly
throughout the deposit.

One of the variations amongst the larger forms of diatoms is
marked by Surirella biseriata being abundant at the top and
middle of the deposit, while replaced at the bottom by Surirella
splendida, and as we go down, Melosira nivalis becomes more
abundant, also Gomplwnema acuminatum.

It would be a great advantage if more was known of the
relative thickness of diatomaceous deposits, and the position of our
specimens in situ, for from this wo might learn something of the
way in which one species replaces another.

Such an immense mass of minute forms as are collected at the
bottom of Llyn Arenig Bacb, point to the fact, that a long quiet
age has passed since the lake was formed. How long, as yet no
man can sjiy.

This spring (1880) I liavc again visited tlio spot with <lie hope
of making a more careful examination ; but, alas ! I found the lake
again full, and all the wondrous deposit at least ten foct below the
surface ; and unless something goes wrong with the ]>ala water-
works, there is little chance that human eye will again rest on what
may bo termed one of the secrets of the deep.

916 Transactions of the Society.

XXVI. — On a New Method of Testing an Ohject-glass used as a
Simultaneous Condensing Illuminator of hrilliantly reflecting
Ohjects such as minute Particles of Quicksilver. By G. W.
KoYSTON-PiGOTT, M.A., M.D. Cantab., F.K.S., &o.

(Bead ISth November, 1880.)

The recent advances made in object-glass illumination in America,
induce me to describe some results obtained nearly two years ago.
These results surprised me very much at the time, and led me to
believe an infallible test had at length been discovered. Some of
the phenomena are truly remarkable, and were at first extremely
puzzling. They appeared to present a new order of diffraction
rings of exquisite precision and beauty of arrangement.

The apparatus employed consisted of some excellent |ths and
T^^ths. A Smith illuminator, consisting of a disk of glass placed at
45° in the optical tube, illuminated the objects by horizontal rays.
The object-glass then condensed the flame upon the stage.

Mercurial globules, forced by a piston through a leather bag
contained in a glass syringe, were formed extremely clean ; these
were then continuously smashed with a steel spring ; examined ;
selected ; and secured under a glass cover.

Viewed with dry lenses, extraordinary forms appeared. Minute,
flat, circular mirrors (mirrorlets), spherical globules adhering to the
upper glass, and particles adhering to the lower glass slide. The
latter varied through many sizes, and each presented brilliant
rings in the sharpest focal plane of remarkable appearance, totally
difierent from anything seen before.

Diffraction rings for a corrected glass are almost entirely either
outside or inside the focal plane. These were hi it.

The diameter measured by micrometer (reading to ^pg-^^j^^ths) was
nearly in every case nine-tenths of the diameter of the globule. In
many an exact image of the flame presented edgeways was
accurately depicted.

On the plane side of the circular little mirrorlets could be
seen occasionally black points, clustering more or less, of a minute-
ness surpassing all previous observation : dealing an astounding
blow against the microscopic dogma of a hundred thousandth of an
inch being the limit of vision, " light being too coarse a thing to
show anything less than half a wave-length." But more of this
anon.

Another order of phenomena is differently produced. In
order to preserve the mercurial particles from premature tarnishing,
drops of liquid were introduced ; my astonishment was great to find
that the brilliant rings were now diminished to one-ninth their

Testing an Ohject-glass, &g. By Q. W. Royston-Pigoii. 917

former size : they had just been nine-tenths the globule diameter,
they were now one-ninth 1

Selecting globules about the 100,000th of an inch — (easy of
representation by separating the spider lines) under a power of
1000 — by searching the illuminated field, the tiny illumination
could still be caught by the best glasses I possessed. The exquisite
truth of these reflections by condensing the light down upon the
objects through the object-glass, forms the most thoroughly
searching and infallible test of the excellence of a glass with which
I am acquainted.

For some months a series of observations more and more
confirmed me in this opinion.

The manipulation is somewhat delicate ; the hght or flame
must be placed so that its distance measured by the path of the
illuminating rays shall equal nearly the distance of the eye from
the stage. If immersion liquids are used, those globules must be
selected which appear brilhantly illumined on an intensely black
ground. I have used a tin cylinder somewhat contracted at the
top and perforated with a pigeon-hole aperture to project the
illuminating rays horizontally.*

A transcend ently fine diff'racting ring of light of the most
astounding attenuation may be discovered with the finest glasses,
appearing much finer than the spider lines of the micrometer, the
thinnest of which is the 10,000th of an inch mounted by
Mr. Browning. Now what this represents on the stage when an
object-glass magnifies 1000 times to the eye, I leave my friends to
calculate for themselves. But many persons have agreed with mo
that it looked, though then enlarged a hundred times, much finer
than the web in question.

Practical opticians know full well the extreme difficulty of
viewing mercurial globules under very high power, and brightly
illuminated by oblique rays.

Tins method shows true images of such surprising distinctness
and incredible reduction as almost to defy adequate description.

I had the pleasure of exhibiting these appearances to
Mr. Stephenson last spring, and to Mr. Curties recently.

* Tlio polished tin entirely stops tlie radiation of heat upon the observer's head,
which is sometimes somewhat near the illuminator.

( 918 )
RECORD

OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

INVERTEBEATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, &c.*

ZOOLOGY.

A. GENERAL, including Embryology and Histology
of the Vertebrata.

Impregnation of the Animal Ovum.f — Professor Schneider states
that the impregnating spennatozoa disappear, either by breaking up
into small pieces or by uniting to form nucleated spherules, which
gradually diminish and disappear. The observations on which this
statement is based were made on the eggs of Aulostomum, Nephelis,
Piscicola, and Mesostomum Ehrenhergii. In Aulostormim and Piscicola
there were hundreds, in Nephelis thousands, and in Mesostomum about
ten entering spermatozoa. The formation of the first amphiaster has
nothing to do either with their presence or their absence.

In Aulostomum and Piscicola the author made the important obser-
vation that the spermatozoa pass into the unripe egg, and are there
broken up. This explains how it was that Robin took the ovaries of
Nephelis for oospermatophores. In this form the spermatozoa are
set radially, and maintain their movements for some time after their
entrance into the egg.

Influence of Light on the Development of Animals. J — M. Yung
states, that from observations which he has been making at Naples, he
is able to confirm, with regard to marine forms, the results arrived at
by him in experiments on fresh-water forms. Eggs of Loligo vulgaris,
and Sepia officinalis, placed in vessels containing two litres of water,
and subjected to monochromatic lights of different shades, developed
at unequal rates, those which were under violet or blue had their de-
velopment accelerated, those under red or green retarded. Yellow
most resembles white light in its eff'ects. Such larval specimens of the
Ascidian, Ciona intestinalis, as fixed themselves to his violet glasses
grew more rapidly and gave rise to more vigorous individuals than
those which fixed themselves to the other vases. Contrary to his
earlier results, he finds that development, though retarded, is in fact
effected under the influence of red or green glasses.

* 1^° It should be understood that the Society do not hold themselves respon-
sible for the views of the autliors of the papers, &c., referred to, nor for the manner
in which those views may be expressed, the object of the Kecord being to present
a summary of the papers as actually published. Objections and corrections should
therefore, for the most part, be addressed to the authors.

t ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 426.

X 'Comptes Rendus,' xci. (1880) p. 440. See also ' MT. Zool. Stat. Neapel,'
ii. (1880) pp. 233-7.

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC. 919

Origin of the Nervous System. — The following is from Mr. F. M.
Balfour's address to the Department of Anatomy and Physiology, at
the recent meeting of the British Association : —

" The general features of the origin of the nervous system, which
have so far been made out by means of the study of embryology, are
the following : —

1. The nervous system of the higher Metazoa has been developed
in the course of a long series of generations by a gradual process of
differentiation of parts of the epidermis.

2. Part of the central nervous system of many forms arose as a
local collection of nerve-cells in the epidermis, in the neighbourhood
of rudimentary organs of vision.

3. Ganglion-cells have been evolved from simple epithelial cells
of the epidermis.

4. The primitive nerves were outgrowths of the original ganglion-
cells ; and the nerves of the higher forms are formed as outgrowths
of the central nervous system.

The points on which embryology has not yet thrown a satisfactory
light are : —

1. The steps by which the protoplasmic processes, from the primi-
tive epidermic cells, became united together so as to form a network
of nerve-fibres, placing the various parts of the body in nervous com-
munication.

2. The process by which nerves became connected with muscles,
80 that a stimulus received by a nerve-cell could be communicated to
and cause a contraction in a muscle.

Eecent investigations on the anatomy of the Coelenterata, especially
of jelly-fish and sea-anemones, have thrown some light on these points,
although there is left much that is still obscure.

In this country Mr. Romanes has conducted some interesting
physiological experiments on these forms ; and Professor Schiifer has
made some important histological investigations upon them. In
Germany a series of interesting researches have also been made on them
by Professors Kleinenberg, Glaus, and Eimer, and more especially by
the brothers Hertwig, of Jena. Careful histological investigations,
especially those of the last-named authors, have made us acquainted
with the forms of some very primitive types of nervous system. In
the common sea-anemones there are, for instance, no organs of special
sense, and no definite central nervous system. There are, however,
scattered throughout tlie skin, and also throughout the lining of the
digestive tract, a number of specially modified epithelial cells, which
are no doubt delicate organs of sense. They are provided at their
free extremity with a long hair, and are prolonged on their inner side
into a fine process, which penetrates the deeper part of the epithelial
layer of the skin or digestive wall. They eventually join a fine net-
work of protoplasmic fibres, which forms a special layer immediately
within the epithelium. The fibres of this network are no doubt
essentially nervous. In addition to fibres there are, moreover, present
in the network, cells of the same character as the multipolar
ganglion-cells in the nervous system of Vertebrates, and some of these

920 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cells are characterized by sending a process into the superjacent
epithelium. Such cells are obviously epithelial cells in the act of
becoming nerve-cells ; and it is probable that the nerve-cells are, iu
fact, sense-cells which have travelled inwards and lost their epithelial
character. There is every reason to think that the network just
described is not only continuous with the sense-cells in the epithelium,
but that it is also continuous with epithelial cells which are provided
with muscular prolongations. The nervous system thus consists of a
network of protoplasmic fibres, continuous on the one hand with
sense-cells in the epithelium, and on the other with muscular cells.
The nervous network is generally distributed both beneath the epi-
thelium of the skin and that of the digestive tract, but is especially
concentrated in the disk-like region between the mouth and tentacles.

The above observations have thrown a very clear light on the
characters of the nervous system at an early stage of its evolution, but
they leave unanswered the questions how the nervous network first
arose, and how its fibres became continuous with muscles.

It is probable that the nervous network took its origin from pro-
cesses of the sense-cells. The processes of the different cells probably
first met and then fused together, and becoming more arborescent,
finally gave rise to a complicated network.

The connection between this network and the muscular cells also
probably took place by a process of contact and fusion.

Epithelial cells with muscular processes were discovered by
Kleinenberg before epithelial cells with nervous processes were
known, and he suggested that the epithelial part of such cells was a
sense-organ, and that the connecting part between this and the con-
tractile processes was a rudimentary nerve. This ingenious theory
explained completely the fact of nerves being continuous with muscles ;
but on the further discoveries being made just described, it became
obvious that this theory would have to be abandoned, and that some
other explanation would have to be given of the continuity between
nerves and muscles. The hypothetical explanation just offered is
that of fusion.

It seems very probable that many of the epithelial cells were
originally provided with processes, the protoplasm of which, like that
of the Protozoa, carried on the functions of nerves and muscles at the
same time, and that these processes united amongst themselves into a
network. By a process of differentiation parts of this network may
have become specially contractile, and other parts may have lost their
contractility and become solely nervous. In this way the connection
between nerves and muscles might be explained, and this hypothesis
fits in very well with the condition of the neuro-muscular system as
we find it iu the Coelenterata.

The nervous system of the higher Metazoa appears then to have
originated from a differentiation of some of the superficial epithelial
cells of the body, though it is possible that some parts of the system
may have been formed by a differentiation of the alimentary epithelium.
The cells of the epithelium were most likely at the same time con-
tractile and sensory, and the differentiation of the nervous system

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 921

may very probably have commenced, in the first instance, from a
specialization in the function of part of a network formed of neuro-
muscular prolongations of epithelial cells. A simultaneous differentia-
tion of otlaer parts of the network into muscular fibres may have led
to the continuity at present obtaining between nerves and muscles.

Local differentiations of the nervous network, which was no doubt
distributed over the whole body, took place on the formation of organs
of special sense, and such difierentiations gave rise to the formation of
a central nervous system. The central nervous system was at first
continuoiis with the epidermis, but became separated from it, and
travelled inwards. Ganglion-cells took their origin from sensory
epithelial cells prjovided with prolongations continuous with the
nervous network. Such ei)ithelial cells gradually lost their epithelial
character, and finally became completely detached from the ejjidermis.

Kcrves, such as we find them in the higher types, originated from
special differentiations of the nervous network, radiating from the
parts of the central nervous system."

With regard to organs of special sense, Mr, Balfour (in an earlier
part of his address) pointed out that it might have been anticipated
a priori that organs of special sense would only appear in animals
provided with a well-developed central nervous system. This, how-
ever, is not the case. Special cells with long delicate hairs, which
are undoubtedly highly sensitive structures, are present in animals
in which as yet nothing has been found which could be called a
central nervous system ; and there is every reason to think that the
organs of special sense originated j^ci^'i passu with the central nervous
system. It is probable that in the simplest organisms the whole
body is sensitive to light, but that with the apijcarauce of pigment-
cells in certain parts of the body, the sensitiveness to light became
localized to the areas where the pigment-cells were present. Since,
however, it was necessary that stimuli received by such organs should
be communicated to other parts of the body, some of the epidermic
cells in the neighbourhood of the pigment-spots, which were at first
only sensitive, in the same manner as other cells of the epidermis,
became gradually difiercntiated into special nerve-cells.

As to the details of this differentiation, embryology does not as
yet throw any great light ; but from the study of comparative anatomy
there are grounds for thinking that it was somewhat as follows : —
Cells placed on the surface sent protoplasmic processes of a nervous
nature inwards, which came into connection with nervous processes
from siinilar cells placed in other jjarts of tlic body. The cells with
such processes then became removed from the surface, forming a deep
layer of the epidermis below the sensitive cells of the organ of vision.
Witli these cells they remained connected by protoplasmic filaments,
and thus they came to form a thickening of the epidermis underneath
the organ of vision, the cells of which received their stimuli from
those of the organ of vision, and transmitted the stinnili so received
to other parts of tlio body. Such a thickening would obviously bo
tlic rudiment of a central nervoiis system, and it is easy to see by
what steps it might become gradually larger and more important, and

922 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

might gradually travel inwards, remaining connected with the sense-
organ at the surface by protoplasmic filaments, which would then
constitute nerves. The rudimentary eye would at first merely consist
partly of cells sensitive to light, and partly of optical structures con-
stituting the lens, which would throw an image of external objects
upon it, and so convert the whole structure into a true organ of vision.
It has thus come about that, in the development of the individual, the
retina or sensitive part of the eye is first formed in connection with
the central nervous system, while the lenses of the eye are indepen-
dently evolved from the epidermis at a later period.

Terminations of Nerves in the Epidermis.* — Professor Eanvier,
in a paper on this subject, mentions an improvement which he has
devised in the method of using chloride of gold for investigations on
the ultimate nerve-endings in tissues, the process of Loewit, though a
great improvement on that" of Cohnheim, having disadvantages.

In the first place Professor Eanvier placed the tissues with the
nerve terminations two to four hours in a mixture of chloride of gold
and formic acid which had been boiled and then cooled. After
removal and washing, the reduction of the gold is effected either by
the action of daylight in slightly acidified water, or in the dark in a
solution of formic acid. By this method the terminations of the
nerves in muscles appear continuously arborescent instead of being
frequently interrupted as when Loewit's process is employed. At the
same time they contain some irregularities. For this reason Professor
Eanvier says it became necessary to invent a fresh process, and he
attempted to replace formic acid by one which would not have an
equally deleterious effect on delicate elements, and he believes he has
found it in lemon-juice. This, although altering nervous tissues by
its protracted action, yet preserves their form sufficiently long for it
not to be altered in the time requisite to procure the whole effect of
the chloride of gold. Preparations of the white or red muscles of the
rabbit treated successively with lemon-juice and chloride of gold,
preserve the nerve terminations not only continuously arborescent
but also remarkably regular.

This process was adopted by Professor Eanvier in his investiga-
tion of the nerve terminations in the epidermis in general (employing
the snout of the pig, the nose of the mole, and the skin of the human
finger), and after a brief statement of the results, he says " the theory,
or rather the hypothesis, which I propose is founded on the facts
which I have just briefly expounded. The nerves which enter the
epidermis, whatever may be the form or extent of their ramifications,
are subject to a continuous evolution. They grow while at the same
time their terminations undergo a gradual degeneration ; this de-
generation leads to the formation of granules of nervous substance,
which become perfectly free and are soon transported into the inert
layers of the epidermis."

Minute Structure of Smooth Muscular Fibres.t — The latest re-
searches of Professor Engelmann have led him to the conclusion that,

* ' Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,' xx. (1880) pp. 45G-8, plate xxxvi.
+ ' Rev. Inteniat. Sci.,' vi. (1880) p. 1«2.

INVEBTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 923

notwithstanding the generally received opinion, the smooth muscular
fibres are made up of fibrillae. The parts which have been made the
subject of his investigations are the stomach, intestinal canal, bladder,
and arteries of rabbits, pigeons, tritons, and frogs, together with various
organs from invertebrate animals.

The size of the fibrillse appears to be fairly constant, and their
width to be very much that of the fibrillae of striated muscular fibre.
They are generally cylindrical in form and non-ramified ; in some
abnormal cases they exhibit varicosities. They are always optically
homogeneous, and very markedly exhibit double refraction. Each
fibrilla is surrounded by a layer of homogeneous matter, not doubly
refractive, and, during life, scarcely measurable. It would seem to be
soft and more or less coherent. In most cases the fibrils are set at equal
distances from one another, and are not grouped into fasciculi ; they
have, as a rule, a direction parallel to that of the long axis of the muscle
cells. There are, however, certain very remarkable exceptions to this
rule to be observed in many Invertebrata. In some the fibrils exhibit
a helicoid arrangement around the longitudinal axis of the cells.
Observations on this point can easily be made on the anterior adductor
muscles of Anodon, and it will then be seen that the angle which
these fibrils make with the axis depends largely on the state of con-
traction of the muscle. "When in a state of contraction they exhibit the
double striation which was first observed by Schwalbe. The author
shows that this is partly due to an optical illusion, and in part to the
state of compression of the fibrils. It is not, consequently, correct to
regard these muscles as affording any intermediation between smooth
and striated muscular elements.

A very remarkable fact has also been noted by Engehnann — the
optic axis of the doubly refractive fibrils does not coincide with their
longitudinal axis, but with that of the cell.

In conclusion, attention is directed to the generalization that there
is a unity in the structure of the different contractile elements ; these
arc, strictly, always fibrils. It is demonstrable already in the case of
muscles, whether " smooth " or " striated," as well as in that of vibra-
tile cilia and of spermatozoa. Further observations will probably
show it to be true of many foi-ms of protoplasm.

Changes which Starch undergoes in the Animal Organism.* —
Hcrr H. E. Bimmermanu, alter referring to the statement of Musculus
and Gruber, that starch, by the action of diastase or acids, yields
soluble starch, maltose, grape-sugar, and three forms of dextrin, named
respectively a, ft, and y achroodextriu, which are variously affected by
ferments, states that wliile maltose and grape-sugar are produced by
the action of saliva on starch, glycogen, whether obtained on a diet of
grape-sugar or albuminoids, when treated in the same manner, yields
larger quantities of maltose and gi-ape-sugar and a reducible dextrin.

Sachsse's method of estimating sugar by mercuric iodide was used,
as it was found difficult to determine the end of the reaction with
Fehling's solution. The substances were injected into the jugular

♦ ' riliijrer'a Arohiv,' xx. (1880) pp. '201-10. Sco 'Journ. Chcin. Soc.,'
Abstr. xxxviii. (18S0) p. G77.

924 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

vein of a rabbit, and tlie urine subsequently examined, with the follow-
ing results : —

Maltose is partly converted in the blood into grape-sugar, and
partly passes out unchanged. Soluble starch yields dextrin and grape-
sugar. Achroodextrin (a) suffers only partial change, grape-sugar and
maltose being found in the urine, together with dextrin. Achroodex-
trin (13) yields a similar result. Achroodextrin (y) yielded no sugar.

Generally, the results tend to show that the changes which starch
undergoes in the body are similar to those which occur when it is
submitted to the action of diastase outside it.

B. INVERTEBRATA.

Deep-water Fauna of the Swiss Lakes.* — Dr. Asper gives a brief
account of his investigations into the fauna of eleven of the Swiss
lakes.

That of the Lake of Zurich would appear to be very rich. The
MoUusca are represented by various genera, and those delicate Cyclads
— the Pisidia — are always present. The larvee of Diptera were also
numerous. Living in small tubes formed from the slime, they are
either colourless or of an intense yellow or red colour ; and they chiefly
belong to the genera Cliironomus and Tanypus. Acarida were nowhere
completely absent. Vermes were richly represented, and chiefly by
species of Lumbriculus and Scemiris. Of the latter genus great quan-
tities were observed. There was also a colourless Hydra. In the Lake
of Lucerne seventy specimens of what apjiears to be Asellus Foreli
■were taken at one dredging. Here, again, Lumbriculids and Dipterous
larvfe were very abundant. In the Lake of Sils (Engadine) — to omit
many points of interest in other lakes — the Hydroids aj)pear to be
especially remarkable. A new species is described and figured by the
author under the name of Hydra rhcetica. Of a bright red colour, and
often as much as 1^ cm. in size, it gives indications of forming buds
which remain permanently attached to it, and so give rise to a colony.
The male and female individuals can be easily distinguished. The
fauna of this lake was very rich in individuals, though comparatively
poor in species.

Dredgings in the Bay of Biscay-t— The following are some of
the more important results to which M. A. Milne-Edwards directs
attention.

The Crustacea were, he says, extremely interesting ; not one of the
specimens dredged is also littoral in habitat, and it seems as though
there were two faunas placed one above the other, and not mixing.
He forms a new genus — ScyramatMa — to contain Aiuathia Carpenteri
and Scyra umbonata ; a crab with phosphorescent eyes was found at
various depths between 700 m. and 1300 m. (Geryon tridens); this has
been already seen in the Norwegian seas. Munida tenuimana^ with
large and phosphorescent eyes was not rare. Gnathoplia^isia zoea, which

* ' Zuol. Auzeig..' iii. (1880) pp. 130, 200.
t 'CVtmples Eeudus,' xci. (1880) p. 355.

INVERTEBRATAj ORYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC, 925

has only as yet been collected by the ' Challenger ' (off the Azores
and near Brazil) was also met with.

Most of the Mollnsca belong to the deep-sea fauna of the Xorth
Atlantic and of the Arctic Seas ; among the Mediterranean forms,
there were some which as yet have only been found in the fossil
state. The similarity of the deep-sea fauna at different latitudes is
very strikingly shown by this collection, Pteroj^oda were taken
from all depths ; indications of HeteroiJoda were not absent. A short
list of the more important Mollusca obtained is given by M. Milne-
Edwards in a foot-note.*

ChaBtopod worms were abundant at all the stations ; a species of
the remarkable Chcetoderma was also taken ; two or three new genera
of Gei)hyrea were met with, and several of the forms had a resemblance
to the arctic species.

A new species of Edwardsia (or Hyanthus), a beautiful red Adamsia,
a large Bunodes, and a new species of Flabellum represent the most
striking Zoantharia ; the Alcyonaria are reported to be very remark-
able, and among them was a specimen of the rare Umhellularia.

The Echinodermata appear to form the most valuable part of the
collection ; there is a new species of Phormosoma, which is to be dis-
tinguished from P. placenta by the ornamentation of the plates, and
by its large sjiines on the oral surface ; Pourtalesia Jeffreysii, two
new and remarkable iSpatangoids make up the chief Ecliinid gains.
The Asterida were all interesting and rare ; but above all we have to
note the capture of Brisinga coronata, which was taken at several
stations. Among the Ophiurids, which were abundant, there was
found one which, not described, is said to be probably the represen-
tative of an absolutely new type. There are some new and fine species
of Holothurioida, Among the Crinoids we find only two examples of
an Aidedon, allied to A. Sarsi of the Northern Seas.

Hyalonema, Holtenea, Farrea, &c., were among the Siliceous
Sponges,

Large specimens of Orhitolifes ieniiisshna and a magnificent series
of arenaceous forms are to be noted among the Foraniiuifera.

In some cases the dredge descended to 3000 metres, and, in addi-
tion to the zoological collections, there have been made observations
of very consideiablo importance on the hydrographical relations of
the sea-bottom of this region.

Deep Dredgings in the Lake of Tiberias,t— The luvcrtebrata
obtained by M, Lortet in these dredgings include ten species of
Mollnsca, of which three are new to science. These are named by
M. Locard, Unio Lortdi, U. pictrl, U. Maris Galilai. The otbcr
species arc Unio tcrminalis and tijridis, Cyrcna flnminalis, Neritina
jordani, Melania tuherculata, MelanopHis prwmorsa and costala. Tho
three latter shells give the fauna a marine appearance ; and it is to bo
considered as a transition-fauna between salt and fresh water, tho
lake having probably been originally salt, and subsequently altered

* See also tlio lists of Dr. J. Gwyn JefTrpys, 'Ann. niul M;ip. Nat Hi.-;t ' vi
(1880), pp. 31.') and 374.

t 'Comptea Rendns,* xoi. (1880) p. r)no.
VOL. III. 3 Q

926 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

by the passage of the Jordan waters tlirougli it. Near the shore were
found a small shrimp, and the crab Telphusa fluviatilis. A very fine
volcanic mud from the greatest depths contained diatomSj foraminifera,
&c. No alga was brought up.

The TJnio shells at the depth of 250 metres were curiously softened,
and resembled in condition the fossils of some of the Tertiary strata
of the middle of France ; this is probably chiefly due to pressure.

Fresh-water Microscopic Ors^anisms.* — Professor Maggi has pub-
lished a catalogue of the Eotifera of Valcovia, containing fourteen
genera, and eighteen species.

He also gives a list of the fresh-water Ehizopoda of Lombardy,
and has come to the conclusion that AmpMzonella fiava is not iden-
tical with Pseudochlamys patella, but that it is a developmental stage
of some unknown form. He has investigated the plastids found in
ciliated Infusoria, and, especially, those which are found in the nuclei
of the Oxytricha. When these organisms are treated with a two-per-
cent, solution of bichromate of potash, dark granulations are to be
observed in the parenchyma of the body, and a black reticulum is
also to be made out in the nuclei.

Mollusca.

Excretory System of the Cephalopoda.f — One important point
to which Dr. Vigelius has especially given his attention in this paper
is the homology between the renal organs of the cephalopodous and
■ of the other Mollusca, but unfortunately with no certain result.}

Commencing with the DibrancMata Decapoda, he finds in all a
general agreement in the essential points ; there is but one renal sac,
which lies between the gills and communicates with the pallial cavity
by two symmetrical efferent ducts or orifices. Various veins, which
carry venous blood to the gills, also pass into the renal sac, and enter
into close connection with its walls ; they are the bearers of the so-
called venous appendages. In the upper or dorsal portion of the sac
there are two bile-dacts which finally unite and pass their contents
into a gastric cpecum. The sac itself is laterally connected by two
orifices with a large, and otherwise closed cavity (viscero-i^ericardial
cavity) which contains the arterial heart, the median portion of the
branchial veins, the branchial hearts with their appendages, certain
organs of the digestive system, and, finally, the generative gland.

In place of a short account of the different forms examined, a
somewhat more detailed history of one form — the common Sepia
officinalis —will be j)referable. Some way behind the anus there is to
be noti'jcd on either side a cylindrical tubule, which projects freely
into the branchial cavity ; there the efferent ducts of the renal sac
have thick muscular walls, and their fine lumen opens by a small,
rounded, terminal pore ; they are separated from one another by the
rectum and by the duct of the ink-bag. These ducts divide the

* ' Rev. Sci. Nat.,' ii. (18S0) p. 242.

+ ' Niedcrl. Arch. Zool.,' v. (1880) pp. 115-84. (2 plates.)
• J He always speak.s of that part of the body wliich contains the branchial
eavity as being ventral in position.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 927

ventral portion of the renal sac into two lateral regions ; the right
one is elongated in form, and save for its urethral opening would
ajjpear to be closed. It extends backwards as far as the aboral
surface of the branchial heart, while anteriorly it gradually diminishes
in size, as it passes into the right ureter. The right ventral portion
is almost completely filled up by the numerous api^endages attached
to the veins which traverse it ; these are, when fresh, more or less
transparent and liyaline, and of a spongy texture, they vary in size,
and in s^iirit specimens often form a single mass.

The author then enters into a detailed account of the veins of this
(riglit ventral) region. In it, as in the left ventral portion, there are
(l)a branch of the vena cava, (•2) the lateral pallial vein, and (8) the
vena abdominalis ; and these are attached to the dorsal and lateral walls.
But in the left half there is not, as there is in the right, any vein for
the ink-bag, or any vena genitalis ; but instead of these there is a me-
senteric vein. The left half is, moreover, not so completely closed as
the right is, for there is a pore by means of which it is connected
witli the dorsal half of the renal sac. There are, further, communi-
cations (two) between the two ventral portions. The superior or
d(n"sal portion of the sac is a spacious cavity which, save for the
already-mentioned ventral pores, is completely closed ; but it does not
lie directly qu the ventral half, for it is separated by a portion of the
body-cavity, of a considerable size. Various digestive organs are to
be found within it ; there is the spirally coiled cfecura, and the two
gall-ducts, with tlieir peculiar ajjpeudagcs, to which the name of
pancreas has been a])plied. The intervening body-cavity, already
mentioned, is connected with the sac by two orifices ; near tlie base of
each ureter there is, on the inner wall of the sac, an orifice which leads
into a canal ; this canal widens into a cavity, in which there is con-
tained the asymmetrically placed arterial heart ; the hinder portion
of this "pericardial cavity" is occupied inferiorly by the ink-baf'
and the generative organs, and is limited superiorly by the dorsal
portion of the renal sac; its right side is almost completely filled up
l)y the stomach. This then may be known as the viscero-iJcricardial
cavity.

Within the renal sac there are to be found reddish spheres with a
sharp contour, and not rarely surrounded by a colourless ring ; there
are also rhombic crystals, sometimes reddish in colour, and varyin"
much in size ; in form they resemble crystals of uric acid, and they
seem undoubtedly to be products of excretion. Other spheres are
also to be seen in the freshly killed animal, which are of a pale green
colour, and generally exhibit a concentric structure; it is possible
that these are developiiieutal stages of the true excretion-spheres.
The wall of the sac is made up (d' fibrillar connective tissue, with a
few muscular bands. Tlio inner surface is invested by a unilaminato
mosaic of ejiithelial cells, fiattened or polygonal in form, and pi*ovidcd
with largo nuclei. In the ureter there is a (.•ylindricul epitlieliuni,
whicli gives rise to a fine cuticle; on the opjiosite side of tlie basal
membrane tliero arc a nunilna- of irregularly arranged, circular and
longitudinal muscular fibres. Tlie venous appendages ai)pear to liave

3 Q 2

928 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATraO TO

a solely excretory function ; each of them consists of a branching
system of veins, giving off a number of finer vessels, which extend
to the periphery, but these do not appear to exhibit any regular
arrangement.

In the Octopoda Dihranchiata we again find two renal sacs, which
communicate with the exterior by two ureters ; but the ureters are
papilliform. Veins traverse the sac, as in the Decapoda, and on their
course they also develop venous appendages (excretory organs) ; each
renal sac communicates with a system of canals which in the female
leads to the generative gland, and in the male to the investing sac.
In the female the canal-system is symmetrically developed, but in the
male, owing to the cxcentric position of the generative organs, it is
asymmetrical. The author's most important example in this group is
Octopus macropus.

For the Tetrahranchiata the author had unfortunately to content
himself with a single example ; he was chiefly able to concern himself
with the venous apjiendages, and he finds that in histological struc-
ture they have a very close resemblance to the same organs in the
Dihranchiata, and the same is true as to the four renal sacs.

If then the venous appendages of all the Cephalopoda are formed
on the same type it will be well to sum up their real characters ; they
are closed branching systems, arising from the veins, of a secretory
function ; this is shown not only by their structure and by their
relations to the veins but by the presence in their lumina of definite
bodies, which are obviously excretory products ; these last are always
given off in a solid condition ; and the fluid present appears to be
only the medium by which they are conveyed to the exterior. The
agreement between the Tetrahranchiata and Dihranchiata does not
end here ; in both, the pericardium is provided with slits, and though
those of the Decapoda do not now open into the pallial cavity, it is
very probable that they did so primarily. The branchial hearts do
indeed present rather more difiiculties, for in Nautilus the branchial
hearts with their appendages are not to be found in any viscero-
pericardiac cavity, but this may be explained by supposing that these
organs were in the Dihranchiata primitively separated off" from the
branchial arteries, and became locally developed to their present size.
In that artery it is possible to distinguish a longer and wider portion,
from one which is narrower and shorter; in the Dihranchiata these are
separated by the branchial heart, while in Nautilus the follicular
appendage is developed at their point of junction, and it was at this
point that the venous heart of the Dihranchiata was develojDed. If
this supposition be accepted, it easily follows that in all jn'obahility
the appendage of the venous heart was develojied from the follicular
appendage ; and there is still a great morphological similarity between
the two organs.

The author is not inclined to agree with Hancock in regarding
the renal chamber of the Nudibrauchs as being homologous with the
renal chamber proper of the Cephalopod ; and he believes that the
English zoologist has been led astray by not taking into account the
organization of Nautilus ; nor does he seem to agree with the views

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 929

put out by Gegenbaur ; and in short he comes to the conclusion that
we have not as yet a sufficient body of facts to justify us in arriving
at any definite determination of what organs in the other Mollusca
are homologous to the renal organs of the Cephalopoda.

Influence of Acids and Alkalies on Cephalopods.* — M. Yung
finds himself able to confirm, in these animals, most of the results
obtained by M. Eichet when operating on Crustacea. f

The Cephalopoda are extremely sensitive to the action of mineral
acids ; with a slight dose the respiratory movements are accelerated ;
four specimens of Eledone moschata, resjiiring tweuty-four to twenty-
six times a minute, gave after five minutes in 2 litres of water con-
taining -5 cc. of sulphuric, nitric, liydrochloric, and oxalic acids,
respectively, fifty-six, forty-two, thirty-six, and thirty respirations a
minute. A double dose in the case of all but oxalic acid had a toxic
efiect, but sulphuric acid was the slowest in its results.

The alkalies may be ranged in the following order of toxicity : —
ammonia, potash, sodium, calcium, baryta. The first is extremely
rapid ; with a dose of one per thousand, it kills almost at once ; the
respiratory movements are, at first, accelerated, and after having
reached a maximum which varies with the agent employed, they
gradually diminish.

"Liver" of the Gastropoda. :{: — Dr. Barfurth is of opinion that this
organ is a hepato-paucreas ; his most important observations appear to
have been on Arion empiricorum, and in it he recognizes three kinds
of cells as comjiosing the gland in question.

When fresh portions of the organ are suitably treated with osmic
acid, some of the cells rapidly become deejily tinged of a black colour ;
these are regarded as the preparers of the hepatic ferment ; their
contents are ordinarily large spheres, of a yellow or brown colour, iu
the fresh state ; the cells are generally elongate, and often spherical.
The second set of cells arc the true hepatic cells, with the nucleus
placed in their basal portion ; elongated in form, they are consider-
ably thickened near the lumen of the follicle ; their contents chiefly
consist of small, spherical, or irregularly shaped granules, which only
blacken after some hours' exposure to the influence of osmic acid ;
the secretion of these cells is soluble in alcohol or ether, contrary
to what hai)pons with the ferment-cells. The third form of cell is
filled with highly refractive colourless granules which consist in most
cases of carbonate of lime, allied with some organic substance ; but
their further characters have still to be investigated.

Ditterenccs seem to obtain between the aquatic and terrestrial
Gastropods in their bcliaviour to chemieal reagents; the livers of the
former harden much ni(h-e slowly in absolute alcoliol and osmic acid,
and their ferment-cells do not blacken so quickly ; while the cal-
careous cells may be absent, scarce, or replaced by small crystals of
what is ai)parently oxalate of calcium.

* 'Coiniiles ReiuluM,' xci. (1880) j). 43'J.
t See this Jntiriiftl, </»t/<', p. (J'2S.
X 'Zool. Anzei-.,' iii. (I8S0) \>. 191).

930 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Striated Muscles in the Monomyarian Acephalous MoUusca.* —
Although the existence of such muscles was affirmed by Eeichert as
early as 1842, and by subsequent authors, in certain Cephalopoda,
Acephala, and Gasteropoda, on the ground of a transverse striation
which was noticed, yet M. Blanchard has determined these facts to
have been wrongly interpreted : such striation in the cases advanced
was either due to the contracted state of the fibres, or to a special
arrangement of the intracellular or interfibrillar granular matter of the
muscles.

On the other hand, their existence in certain Mollusca is now
established by his own investigations, viz, in the Pectinidce alone.

In a Pecten (P.jacoheus, e, g.) the adductor muscle is compound;
a smaller, white, shining division is separated from the rest of the
mass by a membrane proceeding from the sheath, and is formed of
smooth fibres ; tbe larger mass, which consists of striated fibres, is
dull grey in colour.

This tissue, like the muscle of the wing of Htjdropliilus, is formed of
a number of very delicate parallel fibrillfe not united by sarcolemma, but
they are not interspersed with granular matter, as in the muscle of the
insects' wing. Each fibril extends from one valve to the other. Besides
a coarse transverse striation, an extremely fine one is_ distinguishable
by a power of 500 to 600 diameters ; here the " thick disks " seen in the
wing muscle of HydropMlus alternate with " clear spaces," which here
too are crossed by " thin disks " ; by treatment with chromic acid or
with dilute alcohol the " clear spaces " are also seen in the thick disks,
in some fibrils here also the thick and thin disks colour strongly with
carmine, and especially with ha^matoxylin. Polarized light exhibits
the " disks " as doubly, and the clear spaces as singly, refractive,
as in Vertebrata. The muscle of Pecten is however distinguished
more evidently from that of E ijdropMlus by the occurrence on each
fibril of a large elongated nucleus which projects from the surface,
colours strongly with carmine, and contains granular protoplasm. The
mean diameter of the fibril is -01 mm., varying to '02 mm.; the
mean length of the nucleus is from -01 to -012 mm., its breadth from
•004 to -005.

If the adductor muscle of Pecten is homologous, as M. Lacaze-
Duthiers has declared, with the posterior adductor of the Dimyaria,
one would expect to find striated fibres in this muscle also ; but they
are absent from this and all other parts of Mytilus edidis, Anodonta,
and Unio hitherto investigated. The compound nature of the muscle
in the former case points rather to the conclusion arrived at by
Gegenbaur, that it consists of the two originally distinct adductors.

As an object for histological study this muscle is preferable to that
of the HydropMlus wing, as it is easy to fix it either in the relaxed
or contracted state ; the fibres are larger and more easily isolated, and
the granular substance which interferes with the preparation in the
latter case is here absent. Although the tissue has been vainly sought
for in the Gasteropods and in various races of the oyster, yet in the
latter form the adductor presents very ditierent characters in its two
halves, so that it gives encouragement to further investigation.
* ■ Kev. lutciiiiit. Soi.,' v. (1880) p. 356.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 931

Green Colour of Oysters.* — lu 1877,+ mention was made of the
fact that the green cohmv observed in oysters, in certain localities, is
caused by a variety of Navicula, to whicli the name N. oslrearia has
been given. Further particulars of experiments made by M. Puysegur,
at Sissablc, are not without interest.|

" The green slime was collected by lightly scraping the margin of
one of the ' clears ' with a sjioon, and was put in flasks, shaken for a
moment, and then allowed to settle, so as to get rid of the mud, some
admixture of which is inevitable. The coloured fluid, containing
little or nothing besides diatoms, was then poured ofl' into other flasks.
Care and some little dexterity are requisite, as if there is too much
silt, or too large a quantity of water, which is generally the case
when the task is intrusted to a subordinate, it is sometimes next to
impossible to concentrate the fluid enough to show the results with
the desired plainness.

Returning home, we poured the fluid into soup-plates set on a
table before a window. The diatoms speedily settled on the sides
and bottoms of the plates, coating them with a green slime, the thick-
ness and tint of which varied with the jiroportiou of diatoms present.
In each plate, according to its size, we put three to six i)erfcctly
white oysters, which had never been in the ' clears,' and the shells of
which had jjreviously been washed and brushed clean. In similar
l)lates like numbers of the same oysters were laid in ordinary sea-
water. Twenty-six hours after the ccmimencement of the experiment
the oysters in tlic water charged with diatoms had all acquired a
marked grecnisli hue ; the other oysters remained unaltered. The
experiment was repeated many times with identically the same results.
The green colour in the oysters was found to be more decided in
l)roportion as tlie water was more highly charged with diatoms.
In the course of the experiments the shell of one of the oysters was
l)erforated, so as to lay bare tlie mantle. After the oyster had turned
green, it was laid in ordinary sea-water for a few days, when the
greenness disapi)eared altogether. It reai)peared when the oyster was
replaced in fresh water containing Navicula ostrearia.

In the course of tlie exi)eriments it was observed that by the open-
ing and closing of their valves the oysters induced currents in the
water, by means of which they drew towards them, and surrounded
themselves with, the particles of matter suspended therein. The
existence and direction of these currents were shown by the dis-
ajjjtearance of the slime and the consequent laying bare of the sides
and bottoms of the i)lates, the diatoms remaining only at jjoints out
of reacli of the currents. Directed towards the biitcal ajierture by
the cilia with whicli the branehiie are provided, the Navicahv. enter
the stomach of the molluse, and there part with their nutritive con-
stituents. The yellow chlorophyll is digested and decomposed ; the
soluble colouring mutter passes direct into the blood, to which it
iiiij)iu-ts its colour. Thus it happens that the most vesicular portions
of the structure, us the bruuchiic, arc the most highly coloured.

Examination of the digestive tubes of the oystcx's cxporimeuted

• ' Nature,' xxii. (ISSd) )). ."ilil. t H'l''-. xvi. (1877) p. :{;>7.

\ ' liivuf iiiuiilime tt (.uldiiiiilc,' l-Mirunry ISSO.

932 RECOBD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

upon proved the fact of tlie absorption of the diatoms. The stomachs,
intestines, and ffeces were strewed with loric^e of Naviculce. The
loricte, being siliceous, are not aifected by the digestive juices, and
it would seem extraordinary that with so tenacious a covering their
contents should be evolved, were it not for the knowledge of the fact
that the covering is not continuous, the line of suture separating the
valves composing the frustule being scarcely silicified at all."

It would therefore appear to be established beyond dispute that
the green hue in oysters is due exclusively to their absorption of
certain Naviculce contained in the circumambient water. The facts
are in perfect keeping with the observations of growers, that heavy
rains (which increase the supply of fresh water) cause the disappear-
ance of the green from the " clears," while, on the other hand, dry
north-east gales, which greatly increase the saturation of the water,
bring it, as it is called, " into condition."

Two points of special interest in connection with the subject
remain for future investigation. These are : —

1. Does the NavicuJa in question remain all the year in the waters
where it is found in winter ?

2. Is the coloration of the beds accidental or temporary ? In
other words. Does this alga disappear from the reservoirs when the
water changes its colour, or does it become itself discoloured for
a time ?

Neomenia gorgonophilus.* — Dr. A, Kowalevsky has described the

structure of this new si:)ecies.

About 2 inches long, it lives parasitically on Gorgonias, creeping
about after the manner of a Nemertine. On the lower surface of the
body there extends, from the mouth to the anus, an exceedingly delicate
ciliated foot. The gelatinous investment of the rest of the body con-
sists of (1) a gelatinous substance ; (2) calcareous spicules in a horny
basal layer, and (3) epithelial cells of two forms ; in one the cells are
short, and in the other elongated. Subjacent to the integument there
is a muscular layer, which is especially well developed in the region
of the foot, and in this region there are not only longitudinal, but also
transversely disposed muscles. The enteric tract is straight, and
appears to ojjen posteriorly into a muscular cloaca ; into this there
also open the duct of the ovary, and two tubular glands, which are very
jjrobably the testicles. There is a supra-oesoiDhageal ganglion, whence
arise four longitudinal nerve-trunks, which extend through the whole
length of the body ; two are larger and median (pedal) and two smaller
and lateral. They are regarded as corresponding to the pedal and
branchial trunks of the Chitons. The dorsal vessel, which is best
seen in young examples, has a considerable enlargement anteriorly.
As to the organs of secretion, the author finds, at the sides of the
digestive canal, a large number of cells, which fill up the whole space
between it and the walls of the body, and contain rounded concretions,
similar to those found in the molluscan organ of Bojanus. Above
the dorsal vessel, and on either side of it, there lies the paired ovary.

* ' Zool. Anzeig.,' ill. (1880) p. 190.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC 933

The organ which has been regarded as the testicle lies below the
enteric tract ; it commences as an unpaired tube, but soon bifurcates.

Molluscoida.

Australian Polyzoa.* — The Rev. J. E. Tenison-Woods gives a
description and figure of an Amathia from Australia, which he considers
new, and calls A. torfuosa, and takes the opportunity of reviewing the
family. This species is, however, common in the Mediterranean, and
is no doubt the Serialaria semiconvoluta of authors on the Mediter-
ranean fauna, which has, however, as yet been but imperfectly and not
always correctly described. The fact of the cells being biserial has
led one Australian author to form a new genus for the species, but
the growth is the same with the Mediterranean and several other
species, which, however, varies much in the length of the inter-
nodes, so that one Euroi^ean writer has, in manuscript, called a variety
similar to the Australian one, Serialaria distans.

Mr. Woods has not given the size of his forms, which is impor-
tant, as we believe the variety in the Australian seas has a much larger
growth than the Mediterranean one. Although this paper is founded
on a mistake, Mr Woods has put together a great deal of information
on the family which will be of use to workers in Australia, where the
literature is not so easily obtainable.

Mr. Woods very wisely gives a figure of what he considered a new
species, and it would be a great benefit if other authors would follow
him in this, for several Australian and New Zealand workers have
lately been giving descriptions without plates, and thus names have
been created, to a large extent, of forms wliich the descriptions (in not
a few cases imperfect) will not enable others to recognize.

Fossil Cateidcellae from the (Australian) Mioeene.t — Mr. J. B.
Wilson reports tae discovery of Catenicelhe in the Miocene Tertiary
beds near Geelong, on whicli Mr. Busk has favoured us with the fol-
lowing note : —

" The occurrence of Catenicellidsc in the fossil state, and so far back
as the Miocene epoch, if that be really the age of the beds, is an impor-
tant and interesting fact. In 18G5 the Rev. J. E. Tenison-Woods, in a
paper on the fossil Polyzoa of the same district, laid i)articular stress
on the circumstance that the marine fauna of that period ditlbred
essentially from the existing fauna in tlie total absence of Catenicel-
lida;, which form, as it may be said, one of the most characteristic
features of tlie existing Australian marine fauna (so far as the Polyzoa
are concerned). It now a^ipears that in rtality the Miocene fauna
was as rich in those forms as it is now. Mr. Wilson enumerates
about twenty extinct species, all, ho says, ditlennt from the existing
ones, which, so far as I am aware, do not amount to more than thirty.

When we consider that beyond the Australian region, including,
of course, New Zeahind, scarcely more than a single species of
Calenicclla is anywliero met with at the present time, and that none

* Tonison- Woods, Rev. .1. K., " On tho Ginus Atnithia of Lam., witli a,
Description of new Species," 'Trans, and Proo. R. Sec. Vict.,' ivi. (1880).
t • Joiirii. Micr. 8oc. Vict.,' i. (1880) pp. (30-3.

934 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

have ever been met witli fossil except iu Australia, it would seem, so
far as tliis evidence goes, that the Australian Polyzoan fauna was as
peculiar to that region iu the Miocene period as it is at the present day.
The si)ccies all seem to have changed, it is true, but they do not appear
to have either advanced or retrograded, since, according to Mr. Wilson,
the Miocene fossil forms may be classified in the same groups as those
of the present time.

This communication appears to me of the highest interest palsBon-
tologically, and it is much to be wished that we should have carefully
drawn figures as well as descriptions of the forms mentioned, as in
things so similar, verbal descriptions are insufi&cient fur any critical
pur2)0se."

Recent and Fossil Species of Australian Selenariadse.* — The
Eev. J. E. Tenison- Woods gives a short review of the Selenariadse,
a family of Polyzoa, and then proceeds to describe several new
sjjecies of Lunulites and Selenaria, both recent and fossil. He con-
siders the genus Cupularia of Busk a superfluity and unites it with
the genus Lunulites, believing that Cwpularia cannot even be main-
tained as a subgenus, as the same individual may sometimes have the
features of Ciqndaria in one part and those of Lunulites in another.

This family is only represented by a few living species iu the
northern hemisphere, where, however, it was abundant in the Cainozoic
and Neozoic periods, and the adlitiou of twelve new species, of which
four are recent, is an imj^ortant addition to our knowledge of the
family. All the sjpecies are well figured in two good lithographed
plates,

Arthropoda.
a. lusecta.

Undefined Faculty in Insects.f — M. J. H. Fabre recalls the fact
that Ammopldla (Sand-wasp), boring its mine until a late hour of the
day, abandons its work, after having closed the opening with a stone,
goes to a distance, and yet knows how to return next day to its home,
though the localities may be new and unknown. Bemhex also has a
similar power. Where human observation and memory are defective,
their coup d'oeil and remembrance have a certainty which is all but infal-
lible. It may be said that there is in an insect something more subtle
than the simple faculty of remembering — a kind of intuition of
localities without analogy in man — and in order, if possible, to throw
some light on this point M. Fabre instituted a series of experiments.

The first experiment was with twelve females of Cerceris tubercu-
lata, which were caught, marked, enclosed sej^arately in a box, and
released in the fields two kilometres from the nests. They all went
iu a direct line towards their nests, and five hours later two were
found there, and a third and a fourth soon followed.

* Teiiison-Woods, J. E., " On some Eeccnt aud Fossil Si^ecies of Australiim
Selcnaiiaila3 (Polyzoa)," ' Traus. Pliil. Soc. of Adelaide,' ISSU.

t Fabre, J. H., ' Souveuirs entomologiques. Etudes sur riustinct et les
uioeuis des Iiiscctes.' :-;2i jip. (8vo, Paris, 1879.) See 'Eutouiol. Mou. Mag.,'
xyii. (1880) pp. 100-2.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 935

Another experiment was made with nine females, which were
taken three kilometres from the nests, and after being kcjit in confine-
ment all night were released, not in the fields, which may jiossibly
have been more or less known to them, but in the public street of a
town, in the centre of a ])opulous quarter, to which the Cercerides,
with their rustic habits, had certainly never penetrated. Each released
Cerccris rose up vertically between the two rows of houses, as if to
disengage itself as quickly as possible from the street ; then, clearing
the roofs, it launched out immediately, with a hasty flight, towards
the south, where the nests were. The next day five of the insects
were found at the nests (none being visible the previous day).

Transported to enormous distances, the pigeon promi)tly returns.
If we compare the length of the jiassage and the bulk of the creature,
the Cerceris, transported to a distance of three kilometres and return-
ing to its nest, is much superior to the j^igeon. The bulk of the
insect is not a cubic centimetre, and that of the pigion amounts to
quite a cubic decimetre. The bird, a thousand times larger than the
liymenopteron, should, in order to rival it, regain its home from a
distance of 3000 kilometres, three times the length of Franco from
north to south. But power of wing, and still less clearness of instinct,
are not qualities to be measured by the metre. The relations of bulk
cannot here be taken into consideration, and we can only see in tlie
insect a worthy rival of the bird without deciding which has the
advantage.

When the jugeon and the Cerceris are artificially removed from
home by man and transported to gi-eat distances into regions hitherto
uuvisited by them, are they guided by remembrance ? Can memory
serve them for a compass when, arrived at a certain elevation, they
recover the lost j)oint, and start, with all their power of flight, to that
side t)f the horizon where their nests are to be found ? Is it memory
wliich traces their route in the air, to traverse regions they see for the
first time ? Evidently not ; there can be no remembrance of the
unknown. The hymenoptcron and the bird do not know the place in
wliich they find themselves ; nothing can have informed them of the
general direction in which their displacement may have been eftectcd,
for it was in the darkness of a close basket, or of a box, that the
journey was made. Locality, orientation, arc unknown to them ;
nevertheless they return.

They have, then, for a guide, something more than simitle remem-
brance ; they have a special faculty, a kind of topogra[)hical sense,
of which it is impossible for us to have any idea, not having anything
analogous to it.

Nervous System of Oryctes nasicornis.* — Dr. Michelis devotes
70 pages and 4 plates to an account of the nervous system of this
Lamellicoru Coleojjteron, in its larval, pupal, and adult stages ;
like numerous of its allies, it is interesting from the fact that
there is a great want of similarity between what is seen in the
larval and in the adult form; in the former it is short and com-

* 'Z.ilM-lir. wirs. Z.M.I.,' xxxiv. (ISSO) p. Gll-702.

936 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

pressed, so that, on superficial examination, there appears to be
only one fused ganglionic mass, while, in the latter, the thoracic
ganglia, at any rate, are separated from one another by extended
longitudinal commissures. Is this difference due to a new formation,
or to the elongation, as it were, of the separate parts of the cord ?
The result will show that his observations lead the author to be
strongly inclined to adopt the latter view.

The cerebral ganglion of the larva is placed at about the middle of
the head, and directly on the cesophagus; it consists of two lobes,
pyriform in shape, and with their thickest ends approximated and
directed anteriorly. There is some difference in the form of the
masses in the younger and older larvte. From the anterior surface
there are given off four nerves for the mouth ; at about the same
place there arises the nervus recurrens, and behind these there is
an unpaired nerve which goes to the oesophagus ; shortly before this
reaches the midgut it enlarges into a ganglion; very similar rela-
tions are, so far as this is concerned, seen in the adult, save only that
the ganglia frontalia have considerably increased in size. The
ganglia of the paired bucco-gastric nerves are similarly larger, and
the double character which they had in the larva is exchanged for
an apparent unity. On the other hand, the transverse commissure
which connects these ganglia is much shorter than in the larva ; the
various intermediate stages between the two are to be made out in
successive stages of the pupa. The same is exactly true of the com-
missures of the oesophageal ring. With regard to the ventral chain,
the author is in agreement with Cuvier ; in the larva it ends, so far
as he has seen, at the point of separation of the second and third
segments of the body. In a larva 2 cm. long it measured • 2 cm. and
•07 cm. broad; in one 3*4 cm. long, it was -31 cm. long and '075
broad ; in the adult stage it measured • 79 cm., while the length
of the ganglia amounted to -52 cm., a length which had been
observed in some of the oldest of the larvae ; the agreement between
the two is sufficiently striking, and it only remains to note that the
breadth was in the adult somewhat greater, being in the proportion
of eleven to nine in the larva.

The author enters into a detailed description of the nervous
system, an account of which would be altogether unintelligible unless
it were accompanied by the figures with which he illustrates it.

Tlie second portion of the paper deals with the relations of the
tracheal to the nervous system ; and the third with an account of
the more minute structure of the ventral cord. In the larva there are
two investing layers, which are distinguished as the outer and the
granulo-cellular neurilemma ; the former is an obscurely striated
membrane, with elongated nuclei embedded in it. The latter forms a
stratum of finely granular substance, with clear rounded nuclei;
there are no definite boundaries to its cells ; it is feebly developed on
the dorsal, and well developed on the ventral surface of the cord ;
it is the part which, in connection with the tracheae, produces the
segmentation of the ventral cord. The ganglion cells surround the
central fibrous layer in an almost continuous investment, save at the

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 937

median plane, where the cells of the neurilemma are best developed ;
they vary greatly in size.

Referring to the paper for the other important details with which
it abounds, we find, as a general conclusion, that the separate ganglia
of the adult do not arise from any new formations, but from the
extension of the ventral cord of the larva ; the peripheral nerves are
the same in both ; there is no histolysis of the larval nerves, but a
growth of the nerve-trunks. In both, there are the same number
of ventral ganglia, both have similar relations to the tracheal system,
and intermediate conditions are to be seen in the pupa. There is no
" dotted substance " as Leydig understands the term, and no true
transverse commissures ; instead of these there are a large number of
transverse bundles, which, on the one side, arise from the ganglia,
and on the other, form the peripheral nerves.

Activity of Bees.* — The paper of E. Erlenmeyer and A. v, Planta-
Reichenau is a sequel to former reports f on a similar subject, being
further experiments made to ascertain whether the wax secreted by
bees is derived from the sugar and other carbo-hydrates which are
found in the nectar of the flowers, or from such nitrogenous matters
as exist in the pollen.

A healthy swarm was bought in February, well cared for and
fed, and at the beginning of the experiments was in a very healthy
condition. A determined number of the bees was carefully weighed,
and, with the queen, transferred to the experimental hive, which was
furnished with all appliances requisite for carrying out the experi-
ments. The food was weighed in tared capsules. Before tlie
weighing of the swarm, fifty of the bees were killed with chloro-
form vapour, and used for fat and nitrogen determinations. Each
experiment lasted four days and four nights, and for a whole day
the animals were confined to tlie hive.

The bees were first fed with a solution of sugar-candy, and a
remarkable yield of wax was the result. The suggestion was made
that the albumen in their bodies contributed to it, but both the
nitrogen and the fat were the same before and after the experiment.
A second trial w.is made by feeding the bees on honey, but the
quantity of wax produced was less. Further observations, extended
over longer periods, were made, with a view to see what etfect tempe-
rature would have on the production of wax. The first, made during
favourable weather, on sugar-candy solution mixed witli 1 per cent, of
wheat-flour, gave very good results ; the second, carried on simul-
taneously, on honey and wheat-flour, gave good, but still inferior
results ; the third, with the same food as the first, but in less favour-
able weather, gave a much inferior yield ; in another experiment the
small proi)()rtion of 0 • 22 per cent, dry gelatine was ailded to tlie sugar
solution, witli un.satisfactury results, whilst a much larger proportion
of gelatine, 1^ per cent., added to honey produced a very largo
amount. When, however, the quantity of gelatine was increased to

* 'Bicd. Ci'ntr.,' 1880, pp. 191-3. See Mourn. Ch.m. Soc.,' Ahetr. xxxviii.
(1880) j.p. 72.'') C.
t IM.l.. p. 115.

938 KECOKD OF CUERENT EESEARCHES RELATING TO

5 per cent., and wlien a mixture of 20 parts peptone and 20 parts
honey was employed, the bees refused their food altogether, and most
of them died. A mixture was made of 1-18 parts glutinous peptone,
100 parts sugar, and 60 parts rose-water ; it was all eaten, but neither
honey or wax produced ; the bodies of the bees were distended, their
honey-bags full, but their stomachs empty. A mixture of 342 grams
sugar-syrup and 28 grams egg-albumen was also quickly consumed,
but no honey or wax obtained. A similar mixture of egg-yolk (24 to
414 sugar-syrup), produced a small proportion of wax only.

As general results, the authors believe that the food of bees should
not be highly nitrogenous, and that beeswax is formed from non-
nitrogenous substances, especially sugar. Erlenmeyer is further of
opinion that the fatty portions of the bees' bodies are formed solely
from hydrocarbons, the albumenoids only playing the part of nourish-
ment to the active organs, keeping them in working order and
supplying waste.

Scent-organs of the Male Privet Hawkmoth.*— Herr W. von
Eeichenau, as already briefly reported,! following up Dr. Fritz Miiller's
discoveries in this direction, finds both the j^rivet and pine hawk-
moths to be provided, in the imago state, with a special scent-organ
at the edge of the lower side of the first abdominal segment ; it comes
into view on pressure of the abdomen of the dead or living insect, and
consists of two symmetrical bunches of hair-shaped scales, which may
be extruded or drawn in. "When they are extruded in a living Sphinx
Uijustri, a distinct musky scent is apparent at the distance of half a
metre ; but ceases when they are retracted into their fold, which
occurs when the insect is at rest. In minute structure they are really
capillary tubes, tapering gradually to points, and filled with globules
of the scent substance ; they do not spring simply from depressions in
the chitinous skeleton, as do the ordinary scales, but are rooted in,
and radiate from, a sac common to them all ; this sac contains an
opaque white mass, and is capable of being stretched by two muscles
attached to the ends ; in it the hairs stand close together, united by a
long band of tissue, and each implanted by a pincer-shaped root.

The parts probably act as follows: — The moth, when excited, acts by
its nervous system on the muscles of the segmental fold, so that they
open the latter, transforming it into a boat-shaj)ed groove ; at the
same time the muscles of the base of the hairs exercise a tension upon
the band which unites the bases of these, and causes them to become
arranged as a radiating, instead of a converging group ; when these
muscles cease to act, the hairs converge again and retreat into the
fold. The muscles also act by stretching the basal sac, so that its
white contents are pressed against the roots of the hairs, and entering
them, expel some of the contained scent material through the tips. The
fact that the hairs are never found empty is explained, either by the
extreme diti:usibility of small quantities of the scent, or by its replace-
ment by some of the white substance from the base.

The object of these organs, of which only a rudiment is present in

. * ' Kosmos,' iv. (1880) p. 387. t Sec this JourBal, ante, p. 780.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 939

the female, is probably to enable the male to exercise a charm over its
partner.

The importance of these modified scales is greater than that of
the normal ones which colour the wings, as these are almost invisible
in the dnsk ; and they show an important connection existing between,
scent and alimentation, for it is found that insects choose, as flowers
from which to feed, those whose scent most nearly resembles their
own. The privet hawk-moth, for instance, prefers the musk-scented
Weigelia, and second to it, the Petunia, smelling of honey and musk ;
the Zyrjoence, which emit an odour like that of honey, prefer the honey-
scented Scabious best.

Morphology of the Suspensory Organs of Chrysalids.* —
M. Kiinckel points out how little knowledge as to this subject has
been definitely acquired sinco the time of Reaumur. That eminent
naturalist described how the tail of the chrysalis was separated from
the integument of the caterpilhir, and bec:ime attached by the hooks
with which it is furnished. The author has again investigated this
subject, and has come to the conclusion that the chrysalids have no
real tail at all.

Examining the chrysalis of Papilionids or Nymphalids, he has
seen that the " tail " is formed by the union, along the median line,
of a pair of appendages ; these have each a series of hooks, and they
belong to the twelfth ring of the chrysalis, in which there are no
stigmata. The appendages surround the extremity of the abdomen
and circumscribe the anus ; when ccdysis occurs the Pajjilio, on
losing its suspensory apparatus, loses its anal appendages. These
last may, especially in many genera of the Notodontidfe, take on very
various forms. In Dicranura they are two retractile prolongations ;
in Platypterijx they are united for some part of their length, and arc
no longer retractile ; in Uropus they are somewhat similar to the
same parts in Dicranura, but they have a more distinct pediform
character, and they also have a crown of hooks. Their power of
modification easily leads us to see how they became suspensory organs.

Further information may be gained by taking a caterpillar, just
before the period of metamorphosis is completely reached ; the best
examples are to be found among species of the genus Vanessa. If
ccdysis be hastened by treatment with alcohol or chromic acid, it is
possible to see that the posterior extremity of the chrysalis is
entangled in the twelfth ring of the caterjjillar, and that the parts
which carry the suspenscjry liooks (the " tail " of many authors) aro
hidden under the integument of the anal appendages of the
caterpillar.

It follows, therefore,. tliat the chrysalids of tlio Lcpidoptcra attach
or suspend themselves by tlie hooks of the membranous anal
apiieudages, wliich are modified and adapted to the special conditions
of tlieir life.

Preservation of the Chrysalis from Cold.t — Dr. Jousset do
Dcll«;snie was led to the consideration of the question whether tho

♦ 'Omiptes Uendii.-',' \c\. (1880) p. 395.

t ' La Nature,' viii. (1880) 1" si'incstrp, p. 8H.

940 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cocoon preserves the chrysalis from extreme cold by finding in the
month of March (1872) some cocoons of Attacus cynthia suspended to
the branches of the trees in the abbey garden of 8aint-Germain-des-
Pres, Specimens of these moths had been introduced by Babinet in
1860, and, unattended by any one, had bred there since; the
successive generations successfully supporting the cold of eleven
winters. The winter of 1871-2 had been excessively severe. In
Paris the mean temperature from the 8th to the 19th December, 1871,
had remained at — 9° C. and on the 21st the thermometer descended
to — 20°, remaining at — 18° for twenty-four hours. Dr. Bellesme
was therefore surprised to find the chrysalids in a complete state
of preservation, the perfect insect emerging in due course. This
unlocked for resistance to congelation could only be due to one
of two causes ; either the almost absolute non-conductivity of the
silky covering, or the production of a notable quantity of heat on the
part of the insect. The latter alternative seemed improbable con-
sidering the immobility of the nymph.

Dr. Bellesme proceeded to test the conductibility of the cocoon, and
having opened one and extracted the chrysalis, he inserted the bulb of a
sensitive thermometer in its place, securing the cocoon round it with an
elastic band, and arranged it so that the bulb of the instrument did not
touch the cocoon anywhere. The cocoon thus prepared was intro-
duced, in company with a thermometer for comparison, into a testing-
glass, surrounded by a freezing mixture. Before the experiment both
thermometers marked 18° ; five minutes after their introduction into
the test-glass they were withdrawn, when both marked 9°. On
suspending them in the oj)en air the comparison thermometer rapidly
rose, and in a few moments had regained its former level of 18° ;
after ten minutes, the thermometer which had the cocoon tied over it
stood at the same point.

If, therefore, the nymph resists congelation, it does so by virtue
of a continuous and considerable disengagement of heat. It is
extremely probable that this heat is produced at the expense of the
organic transformations which take place within. There is the dis-
appearance of certain muscles which have served the larva and the
formation of new ones to be used by the perfect insect. But the muscu-
lar system of the larva is far more considerable than that of the
perfect insect ; all the heat rendered available by the destruction
of the old muscles is not, therefore, used up in the construction of
new ones. Moreover, uric acid and its derivatives are very abun-
dant in the recently metamorphosed insect, another sign of the
existence of active combustion during the nymphal period. To
these organic-chemical phenomena must then, apparently, be attri-
buted the facility with whicli insects, in course of transformation,
support prolonged low temperatures.

Wing-muscles of Insects.* — N. Poletaiew describes the difference

between the wing-muscles of the Lepidoptera and of the Libellulidse.

Those of the former may be arranged in three groups : (1) a median

* 'Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 212.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 941

paired dorsal muscle ; (2) lateral and dorsoventral muscles of the
meso- and metathoras ; {?■) median dorsoventral whicli raise, while
the other two sets depress, the wings. Only two muscles are inserted
by means of tendons into the wings, the rotation-axes of which lie
parallel to the axis of the body.

The Libellulida3 want the median wing-muscle; each of their
chief muscles is provided with one or two very small accessory
muscles. Owing to the structure of their wings the muscles are
inserted directly at the base of the thickened nervures of the wing,
and all have a superior, and some, in addition, an inferior tendon,
while the rotation axes of their wings are set at an angle of from 30°
to 55° to the longitudinal axis of the insect itself.

Salivary Glands of the Odonata.* — The salivary glands of the
Odonata (Dragon-flies), although denied by entomologists, exist, says
Herr Poletaiew, in all the species of the three families of this sub-
order of insects.

In their structure they present the characters common to acinous
glands, and consist of lobules, or glandular grains (acini), whose
excretory canals unite by degrees into two principal ducts, one for
each gland. These lobules, elongated, and of an o-\'al form, are
more numerous in the ^schnidaj and Libellulidas than in the
Agrionidee. ^schna grandis L., for example, has more than 150
of them, whilst Lcstes sponsa Hansen, has only sixty. In tlie two
first-named families, moreover, these lobules are closer, and more
interlaced by the trachea3.

The salivary glands are situated in the prothorax, near or over the
first thoracic ganglion. Generally they are in front of the latter, and
at the same time in front of the anterior depressor of the wing. In
some Libellulidaj — the smallest ones — they arc further back, reaching
even to the elevator of the anterior wing (e. g. Libcllala scotica Donov.).
The whole cluster affects an oval form. Each of the two principal
canals, after reaching the interior of the head, enlarges into a sac or
bladder, oval or spherical in form, then is continued as a very short
tube, and meeting its congener, constitutes a single duct which opens
directly into the mouth under the tongue (ligula).

Mode of Respiration in the Larvae of the Genus Euphoea
(Libellulidae).! — Mr. II. A. llagen describes this as follows : —

On each side of segments 1-8 of the abdomen is a conical
branchial apjiendago with unravelled edges ; three strong, equal,
cylindrical, caudal, branchial appendages ; the rectal branchiio formed
of three simple columns.

The existence of latei"ul branchial abdominal appendages is known
in tlio genus Sialis, but is altogether unique in the Odonata.
Kespiration in the larva of Euphijea is thus possible in four different
manners: (1) by stigmata, two on the thorax and eight on tlie
abdomen ; (2) by lateral branchial ai)pendages well provided with

• ^CJomptea RtiKhis,' xci. (1880) p. 129.

t ' Coinptcs Kondiis S(m\ Kntnmol. Bclg.,' iik etinp of 1st May, 1S80.

VOL. III. 3 n

942 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tracheae ; (3) by caudal brancTiial appendages equally well provided
with trachcfe ; (4) by rectal branchife formed of three columns in the
mucous system of the rectum, well provided with trachece. No doubt
the four kinds of respiration do not act simultaneously, and the
stigmata of the abdomen j)robably never, as they only receive a
simple tracheal branch, but the stigmata of the prothorax are provided
internally with numerous well-developed tracheae, and perhaps serve
for the expulsion of used air.

Mr. E. MacLachlan, in commenting * upon the preceding, de-
scribes it as " a most important physiological discovery, and showing
how little is yet known of the structure of the larvae of dragon-flies.
The beautiful genus Euplicea inhabits tropical Asia and the islands of
the Eastern Archipelago."

Poduridae from Switzerland. f — Dr. G. Haller records the capture
of four species of Poduridae, two from the canton of Berne, and
two apparently from near Zurich.

»0f the former cases, one is that oi Achoreutes purjmrascens Lubbock,
which occurred over an extent of 10 metres of a road, in the puddles ;
the other, that of an apparently new species of the same genus, which
was found in patches on damp earth of some millimetres in depth,
and in one instance of about 16 square inches in extent. The name
A. Scliluppii is proposed for this form, which is distinguished by the
large size of its head (one-third the length of the body, which does not
exceed 1 millimetre). The antennte are very thick, and dark violet
in colour ; the head is light reddish brown ; the body is remarkably
constricted between the sixth and seventh segments, and varies from
brick-red colour to near that of A. purpurascens. The whole is
covered with short bristles, which are of larger size on the abdomen.

The new genus Lubhockia is formed to contain a species found in
moss near Zurich, and closely allied to Achoreutes. The genus is thus
defined : " Body cylindrical, segments subequal. Eyes ? Antennae
extended, longer than the head, slender, five-jointed. Accessory claws
on the four front feet very small, scarcely to be distinguished ;
plainer on the third pair. No scales or knobbed hairs, but two strong,
slightly bent pairs of spines, near the hind margin of the body.
Leaping-fork very small." The species is named L. ccerulea. The
body is dark blue above, lighter below ; the S2)ines are golden yellow.
Hairs occur, at some distance apart, on the legs and on the upper part
of the body. Total length 1^ millimetre.

A new species of Isotoma, I. Turicensis, is described, from moss in
the same locality as the LuhbocMa. Its back is blue-black, the ventral
surface lighter ; anal spring and legs below the coxae, almost colour-
less. Terminal segment of fork ending in three tiny warts. Body
clothed with closely set, colourless hairs, mixed with a smaller
number of bristles. Two large bristles near the hind edge of the legs.
Length about 1 millimetre. Closely allied to I. arborea Lubbock.

* ' Eutomol. Mon. Mag.,' vii. (1880) p. 90.

t 'MT. Schweiz. Entomol. Ges.,' vi. (1880) p. 1.

INVEBTEBEATA, CllYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 943

p. Myriapoda.

Segments of the Geophilidse.* — Dr. Sseliwanoff describes the
structure of the segmeuts iu these forms.

Each body-segment, though bearing only a single pair of legs, is
clearly enough made up of two segments. In these the numerous
small lamelho which form the lateral jiarts, are arranged in two
transverse series. The number of these lamella) is greatest in the
lowest forms, while in those more highly developed the lamellae
either fuse with one another, or partially disappear. The same
remark applies to the distinctness of the two component segments
connected with each pair of appendages. The author is also reported
to have made some observations on Bothriogaster.

7- Arachnida.

Poison-organs of the Spiders.f — M. MacLeod, in this prelimi-
nary communication, deals chiefly with the histological characters of
these organs. Among the forms examined are Epeira diadema, Agelena
labyrhithica, and Tegcnaria domestica.

In all these forms there are two j)oi son-glands, each of which presents
a pyriform glandular body, invested by a layer of spirally arranged
muscular fibres, and an excretory canal, which opens at the extremity
of the chelicorse. The gland is either jilaced in the cephalothorax,
immediately below the dorsal integument, or partly iu the cephalo-
thorax and partly in the basal joint of the cheliceras. Its wall is seen
to be composed, from without inwards, of the following layers : —
(a) a muscular tunic ; (h) a glandular epithelium. The former is
made up of a single layer of striated fibres, and is everywhere of the
same thickness. The transverse striation, though always distinctly
apparent, is but feebly marked. The longitudiiial strife are, on tho
other hand, very distinctly visible. Tho numerous nuclei are very
regularly arranged in longitudinal rows, and as many as four rows may
be made out iu a single fibre. On either side of the muscular layer
there is an investment of connective tissue, and they arc connected
together by regularly arranged septa, which traverse and scjiaratc
from one anf)ther the longitudinal constituents of tho muscular layer.
The elements of the glandular epithelium vary according to tho
ago and species of the specimen under examination. In a young
Agclcna they are cylindrical, with deeply set nuclei ; in the adult the
cells are more distinctly calyciform, and there is a narrow tube, three
or four times as long as tho protoplasmic portion of tho cell.
Numerous intermediate stages between tho extreme forms are to bo
noted.

The excretory canal arises from tho narrowest part of the gland,
but the Inuscular tunic is formed of striated fibres, which are nrranged
s[)iriilly around the organ, and which are much more delicate and
more widely separated from one anotlier. The epithelial layer, which
invests tho inner face of tho internal layer of councctivo tissues, is

♦ 'Zool. Anzi'ip;.,' iii. (1880) p. 1C7.

t ' IJull. Acud R. Sci. Belg.,' 1. (1880) pp. llO-i:?.

3 R 2

944 EECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

made up of very small cells, which are cubical in form and regular in
arrangement.

Pentastomum polyzonum.* — Professor Jeffrey Bell has been able
to rediscover this species in an African python which died in Womb-
well's menagerie. The species was shortly described and well figured
by Dr. Harley in the ' Proceedings ' of the Zoological Society for
1857, the specimen being from the collection of Dr. Sharpey, but
having no history. A careful comparison of the two specimens in the
British Museum with Dr. Harley's figure, and an examination of
other species, seems to show that the number of the rings of the integu-
ment is pretty definite for each form ; P. polyzonum having nineteen
rings, and P. annulatum Baird (described by Harley under the name
of P. muUicinctum), having twenty-seven or twenty-eight.

5. Crustacea.

Anal Respiration of the Crustacea, t — In a former note J Mr. M.
Hartog suggested that the zoea larva of the higher Crustacea would,
on examination, prove to breathe in the same way as the Copepoda.
Zoeas of Cancer, and probably of some species of prawn, have con-
firmed this amply. The respiratory diastole and systole of the rectum
with rhythmical openings of the anus, are thoroughly well marked.
It may here be noted that in carmine stainings of the entire Copepoda
the stain does not diffuse through the integument, but up through the
rectum in the first instance. The power of dialysis through the
chitinized integument is slight, if at all existent. Now that another
place is found for the respiratory function, it may be denied to the
expanded pleura of the carapace.

This constancy of function in the anus is remarkable, and indi-
cates that the gills which characterize so many of the higher Crustacea
are secondary formations, long posterior to the differentiation of the
class. As to their origin ? They are probably, in all cases, modifica-
tions of those processes of the appendages which primitively bring
about nutritive currents.

Genealogy of the Mysid8e.§ — Herr Czernjawsky has given an
account of his speculations on this subject. He has been examining
thirty-two species, most of which are new, and has noted very remark-
able variations in the locomotor organs, and in the parts of the mouth,
as well as in the brood-cavity of the mother. He comes to the con-
clusion that the Mysidae form a side-branch of the great Crustacean
phylum, and that this branch began at the same point as that of the
Macrura, which, for its part, gave rise to the Brachyura and the
Anomura. The fact that the auditory organ of the Mysidae is placed
in the caudal appendages, and in the Macrura at the base of the
antennae, seems to prove to the author that the latter are not derived
from the former.

* ' Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,' vi. (1880) p. 173.
t ' Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci.,' xx. (1880) p. 485.
t See this Journal, ante, p. 633.
§ 'Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 213.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 945

The ancestor of the two groups is to he found in the Mysis-stage
of the Decapoda (Fritz Miiller). The ancestors were pelagic forms,
with three flagella to the superior antennas, and with biramose ab-
dominal swimming feet in both sexes. So far as the present existing
Mysidse are concerned the third flagellum is only retained in the
male of Podopsis. This is somewhat remarkable, as this genus is
one of the most retrograde of its group. In the other genera there
is no indication of it whatever. Among the Macrura, Palcemon has a
third flagellum, more or less well developed, and in the more lowly
rejiresentatives it is still well marked. The abdominal feet are still
swimming organs in the Macrura, but in forms of Mysidae which were
examined, those parts never had that function in both sexes. In the
former the right and left mandibles are equal, but in all Mysidae they
are unequal, and are generally very different.

Basing his argument on the conclusion to which he has arrived,
that where the male differs most from the primitive form, the group to
which it belongs is progressing, and that, on the contrary, where the
female exhibits the most marked divergence, the group is retrograding,
the author concludes that the Mysidae are degenerating. This may
be shown by the abdominal appendages, for in the male there is a
gradual series of atrojjhy, while in the female they are nearly always
comi^letely rudimentary ; so, too, the male Mysidae often retain their
pelagic habitat.

The author concludes with an indication of the characters by
means of which the relations of the different genera, and their history,
are to be made out.

Nest-building Amphipods* — Mr. S. J. Smith, in a paper on some
Amphipods described by T. Say, states that the tubes which certain
species make to live in are to a great extent formed of pellets of their
excreta.

In 1874 he watched carefully the process of constructing the
tubes in several species of Amphipoda. Microdentopus grandimaniis
(M. minax Smith) was a particularly favourable subject for observa-
'tion.

When captured and placed in a small zoophyte trough with small
branching algae, the individuals almost always proceeded at once
to construct a tube, and could very readily be observed under the
Microscope. A few slender branches of the alga were pulled toward
each other by means of the antennae and gnathopods, and fastened by
threads of cement spun from branch to branch by the first and second
pairs of perajopods. The branches were not usually at once brought
near cnougli together to serve as the framework of the tube, but were
gradually brouglit together by jjulling them in and fastening tliom a
little at a time, until they were brought into their proper position,
where they were firmly held by means of a thick network of fine
threads of cement spun from branch to branch. After the tube
had assumed very nearly its completed form, it was still usually
nothing but a transparent network of cement threads woven among the

♦ ' Trans. Connect. Acud.,' 1860. Soo ' Nature,' x.\ii. (1880) p. 51)5.

946 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

branches of the alga, though occasionally a branch of the alga was
bitten off and added to the framework ; but very soon the animal
began to work bits of excrement and bits of alga into the net. In this
case the pellets of excrement, as passed, were taken in the gnathopods
and maxillipeds, and apjiarently also by the maxillae and mandibles,
and broken into minute fragments and worked through the web, upon
the outside of which they seemed to adhere, partially by the viscosity
of the cement threads, and partially by the tangle of threads over
them. Excrement and bits of alga were thus worked into the wall of
the tube until the whole animal was protected from view, while, during
the whole process, the spinning of cement over the inside of the tube
was kept up.

When spinning the cement threads within the tube, the animal was
held in place on the ventral side by the second pair of gnathopods and
the caudal appendages, the latter being curved beneath the anterior
portion of the pleon, and on the dorsal side by the third, fourth, and
fifth pairs of persoopods extended and turned up over the back, with
the dactyli turned outward into the web. The sj)inuing was done
wholly with the first and second peraeopods, the tips of which were
touched from point to point over the inside of the skeleton tube in a
way that recalled strongly the movements of the hands in playing upon
a piano. The cement adhered at once at the points touched and spun
out between them in uniform delicate threads. The threads seemed
to harden very quickly after they were spun, and did not seem, even
from the first, to adhere to the animal itself.

Development of Orchestia Montagui and 0. Mediterranea.* —
Herr TJljanin gives an account of his observations on the early stages
in the development of these " sand-fleas."

He deals especially with the formation of the blastoderm and of
the germinal layers. He was unable to detect the germinal vesicle.
Sections showed in each of the four cleavage spheres a stellate cell ;
these cells jjass to the periphery gradually. They are of considerable
size, and consist of a granular j)rotoplasm, which gives off" more or less
long filamentous processes. Their nucleus is large, and there are also
two or three nucleoli. It is they alone which give rise to the later
blastoderm cells. At the time when there are, altogether, thirty-two
cells, the cleavage spheres begin to get indistinct boundaries, and, a little
later on, the limits between them disappear altogether. The smaller
and peripheral cells which go to form the blastoderm become closely
appressed, and the whole mass takes on a polygonal form. This por-
tion, when complete, covers over nearly two-thirds of the surface of
the egg, and consists of cubical, somewhat elongated cells. The
mesoderm commences to be developed before the ectoderm is com-
pletely formed. It clearly enougli owes its origin to that layer, aiising
close to the edge of the blastoderm disk in the form of a small rounded
thickening. In the course of growth it reaches to the oj^posite side of
the egg, or to that at which the dorsal region of the animal is, later
on, developed. Now is shed the so-called cuticle of the blastoderm.

* ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 163.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 947

The " spherical organ" is regarded by the author as being the
homologue of the shell-gland of the Mollusca ; both are local invagina-
tions, and while one gives rise to the shell the other forms the blasto-
derm cuticle. It has also a relation to the formation of the ectoderm
and mesoderm, for at the time when the first signs of the extremities
become apparent, and the spherical organ has taken up a definite posi-
tion, tlie yolk, lying below this last, begins to break up into spheres,
and this change gradually extends over the mass. It would seem
probable that these " Ballen " have their origin in the spherical organ,
and it may be that the cells of the ectoderm arise from the base of the
invagination.

Structure of the Eye of Limulus.* — Dr. A. S. Packard, jun.,
writes : —

The eyes of the horse-shoe or king crab are four in number, con-
sisting of a pair of compound eyes situated on the side of the head,
and a pair of small, sim2)le eyes on the front of the head. As described
by A. Milne-Edwards and Owen, the optic nerves to these eyes are
very long, and close to each eye subdivide into an irregular plexus of
fine nerves, a branch being distributed to each facet composing the
compound eye. The structure of the eye is very unlike that of any
other Arthropod eye. The cornea is simjily a smooth convex portion
of the integument, which is much thinner than the adjoining part of
the chitinous skin. There are no facets, the cornea externally being
structureless, simply laminated like the rest of the integument. On
the internal side of the cornea are a series of solid chitinous conical
bodies, separated from one another by a slight interspace, and in form
resembling so many Minie-rifle balls. The conical ends of these solid
cones project free into the interior of the body, and are enveloped in
a dense layer of black pigment. Within the base of these cones are
secondary, shallow, cup-like bodies, or sliallow secondary cones. It
is these primary cones which, seen through the smooth, convex, trans-
lucent cornea, give the appearance of a faceted surface to the external
eye.

All the parts thus far described, except the pigment layer, are
moulded with the rest of the crust ; and the large, long, slender cones
can be easily seen by viewing a piece of the cast-off eye, the solid
cones being seen projecting from the inner surface of the cast-off
cornea.

The internal structure of the eye is very simple. There are no
cones ami no rods, but a branch of the optic nerve impinges directly
upon the end of the solid chitinous cone, as determined by removing
the layer of pigment with dilute jKjtash, and treating the section with
acetic acid, and then stiiiiiing witli picrocannine. So far as the
uutlior can ascertain, no Artliropod eye is so simple as that of Litnnlus.

Tho observations wore based on a study of the lobstoi-'s eye from
preparations of very great beauty and delicacy, made for Iiini by Mr.
N. N. Mason, of Pi'ovidcnco, who has also made beautiful sections of
the Limulua oyc, after treating them in various ways. Tho question

♦ ' Am. Natnriil.,' xiv. (1880) p. 212.

948 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

as to the nature of the solid cones he is not yet prepared to settle.
Are they crystalline lenses or only analogous organs ? Can the horse-
shoe crab distinguish objects ? He doubts if its eyes enable it to
more than distinguish between the light and darkness.

Eye of Trilobites.* — Dr. Packard has also investigated the
internal structure of the hard parts of the eye of Trilobites ; only the
entire eye, the external anatomy of the cornea, and the form and
number of the facets having been previously described and figured by
Burmeister, Barrande, and others.

From the facts presented it would seem evident that the hard
parts of the eye of the Trilobites and of Limuliis are, throughout,
identical. The nature of the soft parts will, as a matter of course,
always remain problematical, unless the dark line which seems to
run across from one lens to another really represents the outer
edge of the pignient of the retina ; but however this may be, judging
by the identity in structure of the solid parts, we have, reasoning
by analogy, good evidence that most probably the eye of the Trilo-
bites had a retinal mass like that of Limuhis, and that the numerous
small branches of the long, slender, optic nerve (for such it must
have been) impinged on the ends of the corneal lenses. It has
been shown by Grenacher and the author, that the eye of Limulus
is constructed on a totally different plan from that of other Arthro-
pods ; and he now feels authorized in claiming that the Trilobite's eye
was organized on the same plan as that of Limulus ; and thus when
we add the close resemblance in the larval forms, in the general
anatomy of the body-segments, and the fact demcmstrated by Mr.
Walcott that the Trilobites had jointed round limbs (and probably
membranous ones), we are led to believe that the two groups of
Merostomata and Trilobites are subdivisions or orders of one and
the same subclass of Crustacea, for which he previously proposed the
term PalfBOcarida.

New Entomostraeon from Afghanistan.f — Dr. F. Day describes
(from a collection made by Dr. Duke in Afghanistan) a new entomos-
traeon— Ajnis dukianus — captured in a pond near Kelat in 1877.

Superiorly the general colour of the carapace is olive, the spinous
projections sienna, and the body and tail dull yellow. The largest
examjjle is 1 • 4 inch long, 0 • 6 inch in width, while the caudal aj)pen-
dages are 0 • 7 inch in length. The caudal portion of the body is
twice as long as the carapace. The segments of the body have each a
transverse row of from six to eight short, spinous elevations directed
backwards, the lateral spine being that most developed. The joints of
the caudal appendage are similarly, but less strongly armed, to those of
the body. The entire extent of the semilunar notch at the posterior
extremity of the carapace is armed with very fine and short needle-
like points, all being of about the same size ; while under the Micro-
scope the hind portion of the carapace's outer edge is also seen to bo
minutely and evenly armed with fine points.

* ' Am. Natural.,' xiv. (1880) p. 503. (1 fls^s.)
t ' rroc. Zool. Soc. Lond.,' 1880, p. 392. (1 fig.)

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 949

The great comparative length of the body of this species distin-
guishes it from known forms of Apis, while its carapace is relatively
smaller and armature less developed.

Vermes.

Genital Glands and Segmental Organs of the Polychseta.* — In
continuing, in a further number of M. Lacazc-Duthiers' ' Archives,'
his further account of this subject, M. Cosmovici deals with it in a
comparative manner.

The result of his researches may be thus summed up : — Taking
for exami)Ics Arenicola ptscatorum and Terehella giganfea, we find that
the " pouches of the body-cavity " are comijosed of two jmrts ; one is
voluminous and glandular, comparable to the molluscan organ of
Bojanus ; plexuses of blood-vessels are found in its wall, its interior
is lined by a very thick layer of pigmented cells, the most superficial
of which have vibratile cilia ; the organ communicates with the
interior by a pore, and crystals of uric acid are to be found in it.
The second portion is a bell-shai:)cd organ, with two lips ; one of
these, more or less richly ciliated, is traversed by a blood-vessel ; the
organ is continuous with a funnel of varying length ; connected with
the glandular portion, it is obviously a segmental organ, and serves as
the oviduct in the female and the sperm-duct in the male. In the
Serpulidse and Hermellidte the two jiarts are distinct. In the
sedentary Annelids we find, then, two kinds of organs. The organs
of Bojanus vary in their number and disposition in the different
genera and species. The segmental organs, which may or may not be
connected with the organs of Bojanus, similarly diftcr in different
forms ; their function is to collect the generative products which float
in the coelom and to pass them outwards. The more the animal
rises in the scale of development of the Annelidan type the closer is
the connection between the two sets of organs ; the sedentary are
more elaborately developed than the errant forms, and thus it is in
them that the two parts are more closely connected. With the
exception of the two families already mentioned — the Serpulida; and
the Hermellidie — the segments of the body greatly lose their " indi-
viduality."

As to the genital glands, the researches of the author have
convinced him that there are two organs of this kind, both male and
female, and that tliey are constant in position. Only in the " beau
temps " do they become visible ; they are racemose and attached to a
blood-vessel ; each acinus of the glnnd is surrounded by a delicate
membrane, capable of distension. The nuclei seen in the contained
pr()to2)laHra are the germinal spots of tho future ova ; around these
nuclei the amorphous pr()toi)lasm becomes collected, and the ova are
driven forward by the develoinnent of fresh protophism at the base of
each acinus. The ripe eggs fall into the cavity of the body and
CKcai)C to the exterior through the ducts of the segmental organs.
Tlie testes present a similar history. The genital glands are to be

* Sec this .IiMunal, ui/c, p. 63.").

950 RECOBD OF CURKENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

found in young specimens, and it may be of interest to add that
Arenicola especially lends itself to tliese investigations.

Spirorhis communis is to be added to the few species of Polychseta
which are, as yet, known to be hermaphrodite. The author thinks
that further investigations will show that the same is true of many
other species of that genus.

Not much is known as to the mode of oviposition. Terehella
conchilega extrudes its ova one by one ; after a little it changes its
place, turns over on to the other side, and lays more ; it probably
lays its eggs in different places. Many, and esiDCcially the Opheliadae,
deposit their eggs in gelatinous masses, in the centre of which there
is a water-tube. In this case it appears probable that the male
afterwards visits the ova, and that the sperm passes in by this tube.

The second chapter of this very elaborate paper (which extends
altogether over 144 pages, and is illustrated by ten plates) deals
with the Terebellidfe, and the parts discussed are arranged in
sections as follows: — (1) The animal; body; organs of nutrition;
(2) organs of excretion and reproduction, organ of Bojauus, seg-
mental organs, ovary and testis. The third chapter deals with
the Opheliada?, in which a few remarks are made on the history
of their development. The fourth chapter deals with the Chteto-
pterini ; the next with the SerpulidaB, of which Sabella arenilega
and Myxicola modesta were chiefly studied. The sixth chapter,
dedicated to the Cljmenidae, is especially occupied with Clymenia
zostericola, which ajjpears to be abundant at Koscoff. The Pecti-
naridfe occupy the seventh chapter ; the Hermellidga the eighth.
In the introduction to this the author repeats that, for the purpose
of distinctly seeing the segmental organs, it is necessary to have
living specimens. The second part of the essay deals with the Errant
Annelids, of which four families only were studied. The repre-
sentatives of these were Hermione, Sthcnelais, Cirratulus, Nereis, and
Marphysa.

The author would seem to be much impressed by the way in
which the organs examined differ in different species.

Copulatory Organs of Microphthalmus.* — Dr. Bobretzky, in
describing the se organs, states that M. fragilis and M. similis, the two
species found at Sebastopol, are both hermaphrodite, and that the
male sexual products are exclusively developed in the segments of
the anterior, and the female in those of the posterior half of the body.
These annelids are also characterized by the fact that their coelom is
more or less completely filled up by connective tissue ; when we find
an animal with the sexual j)roducts matured, we may see two male
copulatory organs, which are attached to the body at the point of
union of the second and third setigerous segments ; each consists of
two fleshy lips, with a median penial papilla, at the centre of which
there is placed the orifice of the vas deferens. This duct has a
ciliated internal orifice ; the ripe zoosperms chiefly become collected
together at the sides of the enteric canal. In each segment of the

* 'Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 139.

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 951

female or hinder portion of the body there are two somewhat spacious
sacs, often found filled with zoosperms ; each of these communicates
with a narrow tubular canal, which opens into the ccelom by a ciliated
infundibulum. There is also another opening connected with these
sacs, the function of which is evidently that of a receptaculum seminis ;
these open to the exterior at the base of their proper paradopodia.
It is further to be noted that these sacs resemble in their structure
and arrangement segmental organs, and this is the more obvious in
young specimens in which the sexual products are still undeveloped.
The author is unable to decide definitely whether the male copulatory
organs are also to be regarded as modified segmental organs.

Development and Classification of the Echiurida.* — Dr.Hatschek
has been fortunate enough to find a series of an Echiurid larva, of
which he gives an account. They were distinguished from the
species examined by Salensky not only by the fact that they were
considerably larger and exhibited a somewhat more complex develop-
ment of the organs, but also by the striking fact that they had not
one only, but two circlets of seta? at their hinder ends.

The series exhibited a very marked increase in size, the specimens
being all within a month's development.

The troclioplwre-stage includes all the phases of the unsegmented
animal. In this it is possible to detect all the parts which were
seen in the same stage in Poli/gordius ; there is no distinction
externally between the head and trunk, and the latter is, at this
period, very inconsiderable. In the cephalic region there is a
double-rowed pre-oral, and a single-rowed post-oral ciliary circlet,
while between them tbere is the adoral ciliated zone ; in addition to
this there is a ventral baud between the mouth and anus. This
region, later on, becomes deepened into the ventral (neural) groove.
At the interior pole of the body there is a transversely elongated
frontal plate, which is formed by a thickening of the ectoderm, and
is likewise ciliated.

The limits of the cells of the ectoderm can only be distinguished
in some parts, and in the rest they have to be made out by the
arrangement of the nuclei. The mesodermal structures are thus
arranged. In the trunk, and lying close to the ectoderm, there are
very short mesodermal bands ; these commence by two large oval
cells placed just in front of the anus, and touching one another in the
middle line ; thoy are easily distinguished by their cleavagc-sphere-
like appearance. The few other cells of which the bunds are made
up are dillcrcnt in character, and are only arranged in double rows
quite anteriorly.

The muscles iu the .cephalic region are altogether similar to those
seen in Puh/ijordius, and in addition to these we find on the wbole of
the inner surface of the body - wall a system of extrtmely fine
muscular filaments, which are closely attached to the ectoderm, and
are arrangcid partly in circular fashion and partly irr(>gulurly ; these
are shown, later on, to bo very characteristic of tlio Echiurid larva.

* 'Clans' Arbeitcn,' iii. (1880) p. 45.

952 KECOED OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

By the aid of high magnification, it is possible to see in the hinder
portion of the cephalic region a very delicate longitudinal canal —
the head-kidney ; this runs for the greater part of its course parallel
to the ventral longitudinal muscle, and opens ventrally at the anterior
end of the mesodermal band, where its lumen is continuous with a fine
pore in the ectoderm. Anteriorly, this excretory organ terminates in
a small solid swelling, which is distinguishable by its clearer
appearance from the dark granular protoplasm of the walls of the
canal. The termination would appear to be formed by a single cell,
and the rest of the canal by a very small number of cells.

The point to be noted in the older examples of the same stage is
chiefly the great increase in the size of the trunk ; this affects
chiefly the mesodermal bands which, growing rapidly, get their cells
arranged in two, then in several rows, and, in time, in two layers.
Of other characters, the most important are the appearance of a
pre-anal circlet of cilia, not hitherto distinctly seen in the larva either
of Mollusca or Rotatoria ; the pre-oral circlet gradually becomes
reduced to one row ; the cells which form the inner layer of the
integument become considerably modified ; at first connected with
one another by numerous in*ocesses, they become in time converted
into a membrane, which forms an internal sac ; a secondary branch is
developed on the kidney, and in time the primary one is atrophied.

The characters of the second period are shortly summed up in
saying that the increase in size is still chiefly seen in the region of
the trunk ; the mesodermal bands become further developed in the
characteristic Annelid mode ; starting from before backwards they
give rise to the primary segments. In these there appear cavities
which are due to the separation of the entero-muscular from the
dermo-muscular layer. It is at this period that the oesophageal
commissures and the lateral ganglia of the ventral cord begin to be
developed, and that we see the first appearance of the ventral
setigerous sacs ; these are placed in the first trunk-segment, and at
the sides of the ventral longitudinal muscles.

In the third period the process of segmentation comes to an end,
and the separate segments all take very much the same appearance.
Metamerism is very clearly shown, internally, by the appearance of
segmental ciliary circlets, and (later on) by the peculiar arrange-
ment of the pigment. At the same time we find that the internal
dissepiments, which primitively divided the secondary coelom into
segmental cavities, are converted into filaments, and are gradually
replaced by a tissue of ramifying cells which extend between the
dermo-muscular and the entero-muscular plates. Nor can any very
distinct indications of segmentation be said to be afforded by the
ventral ganglionic cord.

Turning to the development of the setfe, we find that their sacs
have been growing inwards towards the coelom, and transverse
growths give indications of the muscles of the setee ; internally a
small cavity is formed, and at its base there appears a small, highly
refractive corpuscle, which is the tip of the seta. This grows broader,
and elongates ; its cavity is still hollow, its chitiuous walls show signs

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 953

of a longitudinal striation, and it is soon possible to detect a striation
of its epithelial cells. The terminal kidneys are also appearing ;
these arc not developed, as has been often supposed, from the rectum,
but in a similar fashion to the other segmental organs, and, as they
belong to the terminal segment, their mode of development has an
important bearing on the theory of metamerism. Other points must
be passed over to bring us to the next stage in which the larval
characters begin to lose their importance, and the creature commences
to take on the more definite characters of the Echiurus. As these
processes are being completed the ciliary circlets get lost, while
blood-vessels and dermal papillte begin to appear. In the last larval
stage we have distinct, though young, Echiuri.

Theoretical Considerations. — The author is of opinion that the
history of develoijment, as he has observed it, is conclusive as to the
Annelidan affinities of Echiurus ; and, as this genus has very distinct
relations to the other chfctigerous Gephyrea, Thalassema and Bonellia,
he believes himself justified in extending his generalizations to the
whole of the Echiurida. Every point of importance in development
is Annelidan, but we have farther to recognize that, owing to
adaptation to special modes of life, the Echiurida are modified forms.
The next question is, of course, are their relations to the Archi-
annelides closer than they are to higher forms ? and here their com-
plicated organization and the jDresence of the characteristic setai
enable us to answer it in favour of their nearer relationship being to
the Chastopoda. Further consideration leads us to see that by the
presence of a proboscis, the absence of distinct dissepiments, tho
reduction of the setoe and of the segmental organs, together with such
important j)oints as the extension of the post-oral region and the
characters of the terminal segments in which there is an organ
homodynamous with a segmental organ, the Echiurida have undergone
a wide divergence from the primitive type.

As to their relations to the non-setigerous Gephyrea (Sipunculids,
&c.), the author is not completely satisfied, and waits for embryological
investigations to say whether some of their characteristics are due to
genetic relations.

The Annelidcs may now bo thus arranged : —

1st Class. Archiannclides (Polygordiua).

2nd Class. Chaitopodcs.
1st Order. Saccocirrida3.
2ud J, Polycha;tiT!.
3rd. „ Echiuridic.
4th. „ Oligochicta;.

3rd Class. Ilirudinea.

Api)endix (1th Class). Sipuneulacea.

As to their bearing en the Trocliophoro-thoory, tho author is of
opinion that the i)resent results bear out fully the doctrines on which
he has previously insisted ; while as to the theory of segmentation,
he points out that in tho IVIullusca there is a similar distinction
between head and trunk, but that no mutameric difiercntiation is to
be made out in the latter. In the hnver Bilateria the chief orfjians of

954 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

animal life are confined to the anterior portion of tlie body, while the
hinder part contains the generative organs. But, nevertheless, it is
only gradually that the head takes on the higher sensory functions
and becomes sterile. At first it is the head which is the largest part
of the body ; in the trunk, differentiation commences in the anterior
portion, and growth is terminal. This is the typical mode of growth
which leads in time to the typical metameric animal.

Excretory Organs in the Trematoda and Cestoida.* — M. Frai-
pont has a fuller paper on this subject,! which is illustrated by two
plates.

In dealing with the morphology of the excretory system in
the Vermes, he points out that, on a comparative examination, there
are two types of renal organs. In the Turbellaria, Nemertinea,
Cestoida, Trematoda, and Eotifera, there is a system of canals, with
walls, which are probably glandular, and which ojien into the coelom
by a number of ciliated infuudibnla, and are connected with the outer
world by a single and median, or by two lateral vesicles. On the
other hand, in the Anuulata (Hirudinea, Oligochfeta, Chfetopoda) there
are true segmental organs (uephridia — Laukester) which are always
multiple and paired. In the Gephyrea both sets of organs appear to
be present.

Coming to closer details, it is possible to detect in the Trema-
toda : —

(1) A terminal vesicle, posterior in position ; or two vesicles,
ventral and anterior.

(2) Into this there open by two trunks a system of large canals.

(3) These canals communicate with lymphatic spaces by ciliated
infundibula.

(4) From these, canaliculi pass into the larger canals.
Practically similar arrangements are to be seen in the Cestoida ;

but it is to be noted that in some, at any rate, of the forms which
exhibit a segmentation there are a number of pores communicating
with the exterior ; and this is of interest as pointing to the mode by
which in the Annulata a number of organs may have become deve-
loped.

In the Dendrocoelous Turbellarians, Hallez has denied the presence
of an excretory apparatus, but the observations of Schmidt, Schultze,
and Kennel would appear to make its presence almost certain. Not-
withstanding contradictory statements, an arrangement is also to be
found in the Nemertinea (especially Malacohdella) which is exactly
formed on the same type as in the Ehabdocoela.

In the Rotifera we again find an organ formed of three constituent
parts : (1) a terminal vesicle, single or double, and ordinarily placed
at the hinder end of the body, (2) two large lateral trunks, with a
glandular wall, and (3) small canaliculi which open into the general
cavity of the body by one or more ciliated infundibula. This general
concordance in structure is in striking agreement with the well-
known views of Professor Gegenbaur.

* ' Arcli. de Biol.,' i. (1880) p. 415. + See this Journal, ante, p. 802.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 955

Can we fiutl in the anal vesicles of the Gephyrea a resemblance to
the excretory organs of the Rotifera ? The investigations of Lacaze-
Duthiers on Bonellia viridis have shown that there are two large
contractile vesicles opening into the cloaca ; into these vesicles open
tufts of ramified tubes which open by their end into the coelom by
ciliated iufundibula ; the author remarks that in Echiurus this
arrangement is less well developed,* and that in Sipunculns it is
reduced to the rudiments of the vesicles. On the other hand, Sipun-
cnliis has a pair of true segmental organs, while Bonellia has none at
all. In Thalassema and the Echiurida there are two or three pairs of
segmental organs.

In the Hirudinea the primitive excretory apparatus seems, at least
during development, to make a last appearance, while it completely
disappears in the Annelidcs. Are the permanent renal organs of
these Annulata the homologues of the apparatus found in the more
lowly worms? This does not seem to be yet certainly established,
for we have (1) the presence of both sets of organs in some adult
Gephyrea, and (2) in the Hirudinea the two sets, one of which dis-
appears very early, appear to have an independent origin.

Tlic author is not inclined to accept Professor Haeckel's division of
the Vermes into Ccelomati and Acoelomati ; as to the latter, he points
out that there are spaces in tlie connective tissue of the Trematoda,
and that into these the ciliated infundibula open ; these lacunae may
further vary greatly in extent ; this is true of the terrestrial Planaria,
where Moscley has discovered longitudinal s^^aces on either side of
the body, and of the Nemertiuea, where a ccelomatic space has been
observed by Macintosh and Hubrecht to surround the digestive
tract.

In a note presented to the Academy of Brussels,! M. Fraipont
states that he has been able to extend his observations to Distomum
appendiculatum (which lives in the intestine of Gadus morrhua), and
finds it to be provided with ciliated infundibula, exactly comparable
to those of D. S(iunmida. D. divtn/cns has, it is interesting to note.
two infundibula terminating each canaliculus, and that in the place
of one. A young living Tienia echinococcus has, in addition to the
four longitudinal canals, a system of fine canaliculi, a certain number
of whicl) terminate by small ciliated infundibula, similar to those of
T. serrat a and T. cucumcrina. Bothriocepludus infundihuUformis (from
the pyloric ai)pendages and intestine of Trutta trutta) has a very
complicated system of canals. Tricuspidaria nodulosa (from the
intestine of Esox lnrian) has a plexus of very fine canaliculi, from
which there arise small branches which are j)rovided at their free end
with a ciliated infundibuluni.

Ciliated Embryo of Bilharzia.:}: — The ovum of this little-studied
entozonn presents, according to ]M. J. Chatin, a regularly oval shape,
and a smooth external contour, and has a conical prominence at one of
its poles. Segmentation is rapid, and results ultimately in the forma-

* Sec t1lis Journal, .ni/r. p. \'M.

t • Hull. A.ad. K. Sci. IJfl- ,' xlix. (1880) p. lOG.

i 'CoinptcH Ucn.lu.s,' xci. (1880) p. 554.

956 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tion of an embryo covered with a well-ciliated cuticle. A kind of
proboscis indicates the future cephalic region. No differentiation
takes place internally, as a rule, until the extrusion of the egg.
After this has occurred, a cascal depression commences to form below
the proboscis, and extends vertically into the body. It grows con-
siderably, and throws out a number of secondary diverticula, which
form an elaborate network, of vascular appearance, at different parts
of the body, especially in the tegumentary layer. At the same time
appear in the posterior region sumo usually spheroidal bodies, which
increase in number and bulk, and contain nitrogenous, glycogenous,
and fatty materials. They are j)robably gemmaB formed within the
embryo ; for when they are fully formed, it becomes disintegrated
and sets them free, when they move about with rapid contractions in
the surrounding medium.

The nature of the ovum, as here set forth, shows this animal to
rank, at this stage, above all the other members of its class ; for the
Cfeca which it possesses represent the beginning of a digestive appara-
tus, and the vascular tree represents an excretory organ, while the
contractile gemmae are an entirely new factor in the anatomy of the
group.

New Type of the Cestodes.* — M. Mouiez, impressed with the
necessity of a comparative study, has of late largely devoted himself
to these forms, and he has been rewarded by the discovery of a new
type, to which he gives the generic name of Leuckartia. It is an
unarmed Bothriocephalid, with both ventral and lateral genital organs.
It was found in the pyloric appendages of a salmon, from an unknown
locality.

Among the interesting points discussed, special attention is due to
the account of the nervous system, which, as is well known, is so
difficult to make out distinctly in these worms. Here it is easily
seen. It does not, however, seem to persist for a long period, but to
early undergo a kind of fatty degeneration ; so that it is, therefore,
best studied in young joints. The author believes that Sommer and
Landois have mistaken for nerves the outer of the two blood-vessels
which they describe. In Bothriocephalus latus (old joints) the nervous
cords are, owing to the great development of the spermatozoa, pushed
to the ventral surface, and it is very much this position that the
German helminthologists give to their outer vessel.

With regard to the systematic position of Leuckartia, the author
points out that, with the exception of TrioenopJiorus, the Bothrio-
cephalida have the genital orifices ventral in position, and have two
suckers, while the TjeniadsB have the genital orifices lateral and have
four suckers. The new genus belongs to the former group, for B.
proboscideus (as figui-ed by Blanchard) has both lateral and ventral
genital organs.

New Cestodes. t — M. Moniez describes a new species of Tcenia,
from the intestines of the wild rabbits at Wimereux, under the name
of T. wimerosa. It is about 1 cm. long by 1^ mm. broad. The head
* ' Bull. Sci. De'p. du Nord,' ill. (1880) p. G7. t Ibiil-, P- 240.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 057

is large, with well-marked suckers, but no Looks or neck. The lower
edge of the segments is very distinct, rounded, and bears a row of
filaments resembling those of the suckers of Ligula. The genital
apparatus is single, and occurs on the same side in all segments, the
female opening on the inferior edge, the very prominent penis in the
middle of each. The penial sheath early occupies most of the seg-
ment, but is iiltimately absorbed, owing to the development of the
ova. The ova resemble those of the Tcenice inarmatK.

In considering the development of the Cestodes, M. Moniez points
out that the imperfect segmentation of the ovum, as shown by Teenia
serrata and expansa, is by no means the rule in this group. And in
these cases the extruded cells do not aid in the formation of the cells
of the blastoderm, but they are the homologues of the polar corpus-
cules, and only occur when these are wanting, and vice versa. The
true relations of the extruded cell are seen clearly in a new species of
Cestode, found at Wimereux, in Squatina angelus. Here the original
egg-cell, after dividing into two, becomes distended with liquid, and
ascends to the surface of the yolk, and is ixsually destroyed shortly.
On the other hand, the primary cell is detached in the form of an
ordinary polar vesicle in species such as T. anatina, &c., in which the
segmentation appears to be regular ; or else it persists, and increases
greatly in size (in T. serjientulus and others), in which case, the blasto-
dermic cells surround it, and may even conceal it, after giving the
embryo the appearance of being hollow. In a Botlirioceplialas inhabit-
ing the salmon, these processes are exactly like those of Liyula, except
that tlie embryo is developed within the parent, and that the amnion,
corresponding to the embryophore, is granular, and shows no analogy
with the corresponding membrane in Ligula. The embryo is seen in
Teenia serpentulus, and less distinctly in T. cuciimerina, gradually
to become hollow. Two muscles, strongly refractive in appearance,
arc especially noticeable, passing backwards from the cephalic bulb,
to become attached at the posterior end of the cavity thus formed.

The segmental organs of the Cestoidea are not the organs described
by Fraipont as such, but, as is the most clearly seen in Leuckartia,
consist of the so-called vagina, which opens at one end into the uterus,
and at tlie other into a wider chamber connected with the ova. This
chamber lias proper muscles, is attached on all sides to the surround-
ing tissues, and the cells which line it contain a coloured material ;
the tube leading to it is ciliated throughout. It thus fulfils all the
requirements of a typical segmental organ ; and it is known to exist
in tliis form in the higher Tani(i\

Solenophorus megacephalus.* — -M. Moniez in this note criticizes
the account given by M. ruirier.f The later observer has only
been able to detect two (one on either side) in place of six longi-
tudinal vessels. Without dealing with any points in discussion
between these two naturalists, it is of importance to direct attention
to the explanation which ]\r. ]\[oniez gives as to the very ditfurent
accounts of various observers. As in all the lower animals, thero

♦ ' Hull. Sci. Dcp. (In Nnrd,' iii. (ISSO) p. 113.
t Sec this .Iduniiil, ii. (187'.t) p. 2M.
VOL. 111. 3 S

958 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

appear to be all kinds of grades between distinct vessels with complete
walls, and those whicb may almost be regarded as lacunae. More-
over, there are examples of central vessels which give rise to largely
anastomosing peripheral branches ; and these (as in Leuckartia) may
even penetrate into the meshes of the fundamental tissue. Injections
might, of course, give rise to the appearance of vessels in cases such
as these. The author further directs attention to the great develop-
ment of the marginal fold of each joint in Solenophorus.

Histolog'y of the Tetrarhynchi* — Herr Laczko says of the
" knobs " of the proboscis of these forms that they are provided with
two muscular layers. One is very thick on its outer surface, and
forms a layer of longitudinal fibres, arranged in three groups. The
other, external to this, consists of a double layer of diagonal fibres.
In addition to these, there is also a circular layer, the fibres of which
are thick. The retractor proboscidis arises independently from the
most posterior portion of the wall of the knob, and gradually decreases
in width as it passes forwards. The nervous system appears to be
exceedingly well-developed. On both the ventral and the dorsal sides
there is a well-developed layer of ganglionic cells. These are uni-
polar, of considerable size, and provided with a distinct nucleus.
The processes which arise from them, and which may be twice or
thrice as long as the cell, have their long axis in a line with that of
the muscular fibres. It is clear, therefore, that we have to do with
a cephalic ganglion formed of typical, large, unipolar ganglion cells,
which give ofi' two columns of ganglionic substance to the knobs of
the proboscis, and also send branches to the suckers.

Echinodermata.

Viviparous Chirodota.f — Dr. Hubert Ludwig directs attention to
the rediscovery of Oersted's Synaptula vivipara (the Chirodota rotifera
of Pourtales). Dr. Ludwig's example was obtained by Professor E. van
Beneden from the Brazilian seas. In the body-cavity, an 1 quite free,
he found sixteen young, all considerably developed. No indications
could be made out of the way by which they would pass to the ex-
terior. The specimens were so well preserved that the author has
been able to make a complete anatomical investigation, which he
promises to publish shortly. The attention of American naturalists
to the subject will probably lead to important results.

Observations on the Temnopleuridae. | — The greater part of
Professor Bell's paper on these regular Echinoida is occujjied with an
account of the measurements of the more important parts of the tests
of these creatures ; the diameter being given in absolute measurements,
the percentage values of the measurements of the height, the abactinal
area, the anal area, and the actinostome are given in percentages,
" Two recommendations," the author says, " present themselves for
undertaking this exceedingly laborious task : the changes which occur
during growth are at once seen ; and secondly, an aid is given to that

* 'Zool. Anzeig,' iii. (1880) p. 427. t Ibid., p. 492.

X 'Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond,,' 1880, p. 422. (1 plate.)

INVERTEBEATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 959

not small group of naturalists who have not under their hands so
large a series of forms as is fortunately to be found in our own
national collection. Differences in proportion will not now form the
chief ground on wliich new species are established ; and the value of
the British Museum series will be hereby extended to those naturalists
who, for want of such, are naturally enough led to regard their single
immature specimen as the rejiresentative of a new species."

In dealing with the genus Ambh/jmeustes Professor Bell points out
that, in the case of A. griseus and A. formosus, it is possible to detect
two very distinct series for each species ; taking the former, we find
that there is one series with a small actinostome, a small abactinal
area, and a rather wide poriferous zone ; the other has the actinal and
abactinal areas very much larger, and the poriferous zone somewhat
narrower ; these characters are shown by the table of measurements ;
with them, however, there are associated two others, " those with the
small actinostome have much larger genital pores and the madreporic
plate is much more prominent," In dealing with A. formosus the
author enters into greater details as to the sizes of the genital pores,
and illustrates his results by showing, by the aid of four entomological
pins, of various calibres, how these small orifices may vary in size.
He propoimds the possibility of the two series being, in each case,
diifcrent sex-form.s of the species, and looks to those naturalists who
can get fresh specimens, for a definite resolution of the question. In
dealing with Salmacis globator he points out that two very distinct
forms appear to have had this name given to them, but he refrains
from naming at the present either one or the other, and contents
himself with giving a descrii^tion of the two, and figures of them both.
He hopes that Professor Alex. Agassiz will be able to set this matter
right, as he and his father arc the only two naturalists who have given
original descriptions of the sjiecies.

With regard to changes during growth, one or two examples will
show how marked this may be ; if we take Temnopleurus UardwicJcii we
find that a specimen 7 mm. in diameter has an anal area 14 '28 per
cent, wide and an actinostome 42*8 per cent, wide, while one 43 mm.
in diameter has the same parts 9 "02 per cent, and 26 "7 wide ; while
Salmacis sulcata has, with 14 mm. for diameter, an actinostome of a
width 42 '8 per cent., and when the diameter is 59 mm. the percentage
value of the widtli of the actinostome is only 26 • 6.

Abnormal Echinids.* — Professor Jeffrey Bell and Mr. Charles
Stewart direct attention to two cases of abnormalities in these forms ;
tliey arc both exhibited by spoi imens belonging to the Teranopleurid
genus Amhlypneustcs, and are, wlien taken together, interesting as
pointing in opposite directions ; so far that is, that one describes a
quadriradiate and the other a sexradiatc variation from the ordinary
pciitanurons arrangement.

Mr. Stewart's specimen, wliich was from his own cabinet, and
belonged to A. griseus, is remarkable for having "a crost-liko elevation
of what ai>pears to be ono of the ambulacra " ; this crest is shown to

* ' Jnnrn. Linn. Soc' (Zool.), xv. (18S0) pp. 12fi-9. (1 plate.)

3 S 2

960 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

be formed by two ambulacra wbicb lie side by side ; the poriferous
zones which touch one another are fused together ; the other zones
and the anibiilacral arete are normal in character. In this form the
apical system was normal.

The other specimen is in the collection of the British Museum,
and was one of tlie examples of A. fo7-mosus which were brought home
by the ' Challenger.' In it no indications of the fifth segment of the
corona are to be observed except on the actinal surface, but there are
no indications of the interambulacral plates ; just as in Echinus melo,
the only other recent species in which a similar abnormality has
been noted (Philipiji), it is the left anterior area which has suffered
the injury ; the abactinal regions, in these two specimens, differ so far
from one another, that in Phillippi's specimen there was a tetramerous
arrangement, while in the British Museum specimen all the ten plates
are still present ; but this latter differs again from Mr. Stewart's
example in having an ocular plate considerably enlarged. Professor
Bell imagines that " had its capture been a little delayed, the plates
of the fifth segment or area might have been comj^letely forced off."
A purely tetramerous test has, he observes, been found fossil ; this,
described by H. von Meyer, belonged to the species Cidarites coronatus.
The author concluded by insisting (1) on the fact that deviations
from the pentamerous type seem, in the Echinida, to be due to abnor-
malities, and (2) on the striking constancy which is exhibited by these
forms, as compared with Asterids or Ophiurids.

Remarkable Form of Pedicellaria.* — Mr. Sladen gives in a
tabular form the " synonymy " of these organs : —

O. F. Muller (1778). Valentin (1841). Perrier (1869).

P. ghhifera = P. gemmiforme = P. cjemmiforme

P. triphylla = P. opicephale ou huccale = P. ophicephale

P. tridens — P. tridactyle = P. tridactyle

In SplicerecMnus granulans the pedicellarife globiferse are very
much larger than the rest and are, as compared with the same organs in
other Echinids, enormous ; upon their stem or pedicle there is situated,
between the middle portion of the shaft and the distal end, a remark-
able glandular organ ; it is divided into three separate sacculi, and
near the upper portion of each there is a small foramen through
which a glairy mucus is extruded ; this extrusion is mostly easily
observed when a specimen is placed in fresh water. Each sacculus is,
on examination, seen to contain an " elongate-ovate or sub-cordiform
mass " ; when seen separately this mass is found to consist of a
" white, spongy, reticulated substance with a denser central portion
within and a number of moderately large j^ink cells distributed over
its surface," external to the general mass. Sections are best made
after a preliminary decalcification in a solution of 70 per cent, alcohol
with 2 per cent, of hydrochloric acid, and staining in haematoxylin.
Transverse sections made through specimens thus prepared show the
presence of (1) the epithelial nucleated cells of the investing mem-

* ' Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,' vi. (1880) p. 101.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 961

brane ; (2) a neuro-muscular layer ; (3) a tissue with numerous large
cells ; (4) a layer of large areolar spaces and gland-cells and ducts ;
(5) the central mass composed of a very finely reticulated substance,
densely filled up with mucous matter.

As to the characters of the " head " of the P. glohifera ; a longi-
tudinal section reveals the presence of the following parts : — (1) a
fine investing membrane, composed of a few epithelial cells. (2) A
stratum containing a few nerve-cells. (3) The walls of a large
saccular body bounded by a moderately thick layer of horizontally
disposed muscular fibres. (4) A reticular tissue terminating in folli-
cular gland-cells, which form a layer internal to the wall of the sac,
and of some considerable tliickncss ; the glandular sac is divided into
two chambers. Nerve-centres with fibres for each valve communicate
with the strong muscles which hold together the valves of the pedi-
cellaria. On the inner surface of the expanded valves there are to be
found three oval-shaped cushions, which are finely papillate and are
richly provided with nerve-fibres.

In regard to the suggested functions of these parts we find first
of all this notable discharge of mucus ; " when the tactile cushion of
the pedicellaria comes into contact with a tangible object of foreign
matter, the valves close and a discharge of mucus takes place " ; this
mucus surrounds the object and then the neighbouring spines gradu-
ally disentangle it, and the currents of water carry it off. The author
has made observations on Astropeden aurantiacus which strongly
confirm this view.

Mr. Sladen then gives a short account of the structure of the same
kind of pedicellaria in Echinus melo, which seems to resemble the
younger forms found in S. granularis. The pedicellarife tridentes
appear to have the function, already noted by A. Agassiz, of removing
the pellets of f.ccal matter ; that of the P. triphyllce is probably to
seize smaller particles of foreign matter which escape the larger
pedicellarife.

New Echinodermata.* — In addition to Hymenodiscus Agassizii,
referred to in the next note, M. E. Perrier jdescribes some very inter-
esting forms obtained during the dredging operations of Professor
A. Agassiz in the deeper parts of the Gulf of Mexico ; among these
are two new species of the genus Zoroaster of Wyvillc-Thomson
(Z. Slgshcii and Z. Acldeyi).

Z. Sl'jsheii is at once distinguished by the considerable projection
made by the enormous ossicles of its disk, wliich is thus rendered
clearly distinct from the arms and comparatively voluminous. Tho
arms, which are nearly rigid, are conical, and their skeletim consists of
nine regular series of s(^uare ossicles. In Z. Acldvyi the ossicles of
tho disk are not salient, the disk is continuous with the arms, which
are about twelve times as long as its radius, so that the aninuil lias
the physiognomy of a Chataslcr. These arms are much more mobile
than those of the other 6i)ceies, and are formed of seventeen rows of
rather small ossicles. In the two species before tho author the plates

* ' Comptea Rendus,' xci. (1880) p. 430.

962 BECOUD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATINQ TO

of the ventral region of tLe arms are covered with small flattened
sjjines placed close together and intermixed with larger spines, so as
to recall to mind the covering of the ventral surface of the LuidicB ;
the adambnlacral plates even bear, as in the latter, a comb of com-
pressed spines, the direction of which is perpendicular to that of the
ambulacral groove and the innermost of which is recurved like a
sabre, as in the Astropectinid^. The ambulacral tentacles are quad-
riserial at the base of the arms, but biserial at the extremity, which is
un additional proof how artificial is the old division of the Asterias
adojited by Mliller and Troschel. These tentacles are terminated by
a very small sucking disk which still further approximates Zoroaster
to Liiidia ; they are intermixed with small straight pedicellari^e
(pedicellaires droites). We may give the same name to some of these
organs disseminated between the dorsal plates.

Synthetic Starfish. — At p. 448 was noted an interesting form of
starfish, apparently bridging over the gap between the Stellerida and
the Ophiurida, which had been described by Mr. W. Percy Sladen.
M. E. Perrier now describes * a still more remarkable type obtained
from the Gulf of Mexico during the dredging operations above
referred to.

This starfish is very delicate in its structure ; it has a rounded
disk distinctly separated from the arms, as in the Ophiurida, and the
arms are elongated, flexible, and furnished with lateral rows of spines,
thus increasing the general resemblance to the Brittle-Stars. But
there are twelve arms, whilst no known Ophiurid has more than
seven. The description of the disk is very curious, and nothing like
it is known elsewhere among starfishes. It is flattened, very thin, and
quite destitute of any regular skeleton, the dorsal membrane being in
fact literally a circular membrane stretched upon the ring formed by
the basal ossicles of the arms ; it is membranous and transparent, and
so close to the buccal membrane that the stomach has only a space
about equal to the thickness of a sheet of paper in which to lodge.
M. Perrier very justly asks what can be the usual food of "u animal
with such a digestive cavity ? The dorsal skeleton is, however, repre-
sented by scattered perforated calcareous plates, each bearing a small
spine. Through the membrane the circular canal surrounding the
mouth, and the ambulacral vessels starting from it, may be recognized,
but no csecal prolongations of the stomach into the arms were to
be detected. The arms possess a double row of ambulacral tubes,
but no genital glanfls could be discerned in them. The skeleton
of the arms consists of four rows of pieces, two of which form a dorsal
ridge, and partially cover the others, which are placed on each side,
and each of which bears a median spine enclosed in a soft sheath,
clavate, and bearing at the apex a tuft of pedicellari^, the latter being
of the kind denominated " pedicellaires croisees " by M. Perrier, and
peculiarly characteristic of the Asteriadse, the most typical group of
the true starfishes. The lateral plates form the borders of the ambu-
lacral groove, in which the ambulacral vessel rests exactly as in the

* Loc. cit. See ' Pop. Sci. Eev.' (1880) pp. 380-1.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 963

Comatulfc, there being no ambulacral plates, sucli as occur in all
known Stellerida.

M. Perricr remarks that the contrast between the arms and the
disk, the probable absence of genital glands from the arms, and the
absence of stomachal cfeca, would seem to ajiproximate this form to
the Ophiurida, just as the structure of the arms would ally it to
the Comatulie ; but although in the abuormal characters above cited,
and especially the want of ambulacral and buccal plates, it differs
from all known Stellerida, the evidence of the pedicellarife leads him
to class it in that group, as forming an aberrant family of the Aste-
riadas, in the neighbourhood of the genera Lahidiaster, Pedieellaster,
and Brisimja, which also possesses only two rows of ambulacral
tubes.

M. Perrier names this singular starfish Uymcnodiscus Arjassizii.
It was obtained within sight of the island of JJomiuica, from depths
of 321 and 450 fathoms.

Formation of the Egg-coverings in Antedon rosacea.* — Dr.
Ludwig states that a short time before the extrusion of the ovum there
is to be noted, on the aboral surface of the pinnulfe, a small circular
projection, distinguishable by its whitish colour ; if we open a piuuula
at tliis stage and examine the ova we find a special disposition of their
surface. The whole egg ajipears to be invested by a network, the
bars of which are darker than the circular meshes. Further observa-
tion shows that this network owes its origin to a special development
of the investment of the ovarian cell and of the cell itself, for tlie
investment is, on its inner surface, villous, and the villi jiroject into
the yolk-sj)heres of the egg, so that the rounded clear spaces, already
noted, are merely the ojitical section of these villi. When the eggs
have been for some time subjected to the action of sea-water we find
that the surface of the egg has become plane, and has got itself in-
vested by a thick shell.

Ccelenterata.

The Ctenophora.f — This paper by Richard Hertwig occupies 135
pages, and is illustrated by seven plates. The more general results to
which his investigations have led him are the following : —

Structure of the Generative Organs. — Do these arise from the ecto-
dermal or from the endodermal layer ? Among the later writers wo
find Glaus on the one side and Chun on tlie other. Hertwig agrees
with Claus in regarding them as having an ectodermal origin. Tho
epithelium of the surface of the body projects into tho ctenoiihoral
vessels in the form of small saccules, which project into the gelatinous
layer, and reach as far as the endodermal epithelium of the vessels.
Hero they broaden out and form two epithelial layers, which are
separated by a cleft, the genital sinus. The layer which bounds tho
endodermal epithelium forms tlie generative products. As thiro are
uo blood-vessels, the tissues wliieh reijuire a rit-h supply of nutriment
are developed in close connection with those branches of the enteric

♦ ' Znol. Anzcig.,' iii. (1880) p. 470.

t 'Jon. Zeitschr. Naturw.,' xiv. (1880) j). :U3.

964 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

canal wliich are riclily supplied with chyme. It is probable that the
ctenophoral vessels of the Ctenophora, which are comparable to the
radial canals of the Medusae, were, like them, primitively placed just
below the ectoderm, and that they owe their changed position to the
development of gelatinous matter in the disk. In their change in
position they would seem to have been accompanied by the genital
organs.

Structure of the Neuro-muscular System. — After a short account of
the investigations of earlier observers, and a somewhat more detailed
notice of those of Eimer, the author states that in general he finds
himself in agreement with the latter. He is of opinion that there is a
true nervous system, the elements of which are to be found in the
gelatinous layer ; and he considers that they are diffused through the
body and do not exhibit any distinct centralization. Such physiolo-
gical observations as he has been able to make are found to be in con-
cordance with the results of Eimer. At the same time the agi'ce-
ment is only of the most general character. The varicosities which
Eimer regards as forming structures allied to ganglionic cells are
regarded by Hertwig as being artificial products. Yet again, Eimer
finds no nerves in the ectoderm, while Hertwig believes that he has
found a well-developed nerve-plexus in that layer.

The author next compares his results with those of Chun, and
then proceeds to say that the nervoixs system of the Ctenophora con-
sists of an ectodermal and a mesodermal portion. The former has
the character of a ganglionic plexus which lies just below the epithelium
and is equally distributed over the whole surface of the body. In
Beroe it may also be followed on to the stomach, where it takes up a
position between the gelatinous and the muscular layer, in consequence
of the great development of this latter. Only a small number of nerve-
fibrils are given off, and these branch and anastomose very consider-
ably. Nowhere in the plexus is there any indication of a commence-
ment of any centralization. From a priori considerations it is to be
imagined that there is some connection between uuo elements of the
plexus and the sensory cells of the auditory vesicles and the polar
areas, but this has not yet been demonstrated. In no one case was it
possible to detect nervous processes passing to the cells. The same
is true as regards the tactile cells, which are found everywhere in the
epithelium, and especially in the region surrounding the mouth in
Beroe. The tentacular apparatus forms a special division of this
neuro-muscular system. The ectodermal muscles are here of enormous
length, and pass at their base into epithelial cells. To the surface of
this layer they are set perpendicularly.

The mesodermal portion of the nervous system would appear to
consist of a very large number of very delicate fibres, which are, at
points, provided with spindle-shaped nuclei, and are invested in a
neurilemma. Like the muscular fibres, they pass separately into the
gelatinous layer, and end by branches in the epithelium. The pro-
cesses by which they are connected with this layer are probably de-
rived from the ectodermal plexus, but of this there is no certain
evidence. There does not seem to be any regularity in the mode of

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 965

the distribution of the nerve-fibres in the gelatinous layer, the only
constant character being the presence of the eight branches which
underlie the meridional bands. There are very various reasons for
regarding these elements as belonging to the nervous system : the
vital phenomena of these animals require it ; their histological struc-
ture is very similar to that of the nerves in other Invertebrata ; and
their mode of connection with the muscular fibres has a very striking
resemblance to what has been observed in the Tardigrada. On the
other hand, the nerves of the higher animals arise from the central
organs in the form of filaments of considerable thickness, and they
branch, as they pass peripherally, until they end in a sensory organ
or a muscular fibre. This is not the case with the nerve-fibres of
the Ctenophora ; they are branched at both ends, and the terminal
filaments never enter muscles, into which there only pass small
lateral branches.

On the other hand, if these filaments are not nerves, can they be
muscles? Hardly so, for in that case Cydippe hormiphora, at any
rate, would have muscles of the ordinary histological character, and
these very special muscles also. Nor can they be a part of the
suj^porting system of fibres, for the fibres that have distinctly a sup-
I)orting function have no nuclei, and never become connected by
anastomosis with one another.

We come, then, to the conclusion that the filaments which are dis-
tributed through the gelatinous layer of the Ctenophora have no close
resemblance to any elements found in higher animals, but that they
are best compared with the nerve-fibres of the Invertebrata. On the
physiological side their nervous function is very distinctly spoken to.

Helaiions of the Ctenophora to the other Cuelenterata. — The author
regards these forms as being very distinct from tbe rest of the group
in which they are placed. To decide the questions which have been
raised with regard to this subject, we have, first of all, to inquire
whether in the developmental history of the higher animals there is
any stage which is comparable to that which is permanent in the
Ctenophora. The nervous system of most of these, at any rate, is
situated in the mesoderm ; the same is true of these Coelenterates.
But now it has to be seen whether this system, derived in both cases
from the ectoderm, is in the first stage scattered through the mesoderm
and only secondarily concentrated. This, of course, is not the case.
Where the nervous system remains ectodermal in position, as it does
in Some of the higher Metazoa, it is nevertheless even there concen-
trated. Eimer's hypothesis is hereby negatived.

Secondly, there arises the questicjn, what relation have the neuro-
muscular cells of Beroii to those of Uijdra > The only point of resem-
blance is that mode o"f continuous connection between muscle and
nerve wliich always occurs in all animals provided with these structures;
otherwise there is nothing in common. The ueuro-muscidar cell of
Jli/dra is an cctodeniial, the neuro-muscular fibre of Bcror an eudo-
deruuil structure. The sensory cells only become connected with the
latter in a secondary fa-hiun.

The author then shows how the ucuro-muscular systems in the

966 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Hydroida and Anthozoa on tlie one hand, and the Ctenopliora on
the other, are to be regarded as having been developed along two
different lines, having their point of union in a common ancestor.
In the Actinife and Hydroida the nerves and muscular fibres are
developed in the epithelium. Some epithelial cells give off muscular
fibres at their basal ends, while others form processes and become con-
verted into sensory cells or epithelio-ganglionic cells. When most
comjiletely developed, these pass from the surface of the body and go
to form subepithelial muscular cells or ganglia. Wherever nervous
elements are found in the mesoderm, they are only migrated organs.
In the Ctenophora the corresponding mesodermal parts do not arise as
such in the ectoderm, but they there only form indifferent amoeboid
cells, and they undergo their further differentiation after that they
have changed their position. In connection with this important differ-
ence there is yet another, which is to be found in the histological
characters of the mesodermal muscular fibres. In the ActiniaB and the
MedusEe there are bundles of muscular fibres grouped around a proto-
plasmic multinucleated axis ; in the Ctenophora the muscular fibres
are all of them elongated multinuclear cells, which have arisen from
the growth of a single uni-nucleated cell, and which are invested by
a covering, which is not made up of sej)arate fibrils.

Led by these facts, the author has come to the conclusion that the
Ctenophora have arisen from very "indifferent" primitive forms, in
which the only indication of the characteristics of the Coelenterate
phylum was probably the tendency to a radially symmetrical arrange-
ment of the organs. Even the prehensile cells are so different that it
is hard to imagine that they had the same origin as the parts which
are regarded by Professor Haeckel as being homologous with them in
the other Coelenterata (" stinging-cells ') ; and Hertwig holds that the
Ctenophora are but very distant allies of the rest of the Coelenterata.

Preparation. — Osmic acid was used as a hardening material, carmine
as a colouring. For maceration purposes a soluti'-"- ,f • 05 jier cent,
osmic acid, containing -2 per cent, acetic acid, was used. No good
results were gained by the use of chromic acid, bichromate of potas-
sium, or gold chloride. Observations in the fresh state are of great
importance.

General View. — Along the body of a Ctenophore three axes may be
drawn. The longitudinal or primary passes from the oral to the aboral
pole, and this is generally the longest ; the transverse axis can best be
made out in the tentaculate forms ; the sagittal axis is perpendicular to
the other two. No true right or left, dorsal or ventral surfaces are to be
made out, but only an oral and an aboral end. The greater part of the
body is gelatinous, and this portion is extraordinarily rich in water.
The sensory body or " ganglion " and the polar areas are placed on the
aboral side of the body, and the former exactly occupies the centre of
the end of the primary axis. From the sensory body there arise eight
ciliated grooves, which are continuous with the eight rows of cteno-
l^horal plates; these form meridional bands. The most important
parts of the gastrovascular system are the stomach and the funnel ; the
latter leads into the peripheral canal system, which consists of three

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 967

sots of vessels. Then there are the tentacles, supj)liecl by the tentacular
vessels, and lastly, there are the generative organs which follow tho
course of the ctenophoral vessels, in the walls of which the products
are developed.

There are well-marked differences between the three layers of the
body. The ectoderm is the most widely distributed, inasmuch as it
does not only invest the body, but also the stomach. It is, further,
the layer which undergoes the greatest amount of differentiation,
formiug not only investing, but also glandular, pigment, ciliated and
sensory cells, in addition to nerves and muscles. The most important
organs are nothing but sjiecially differentiated parts of the ectoderm.

The sensory cells are of two kinds, which so far agree in structure
that they are always provided with stiff' processes, which have evidently
a tactile function. The most ordinary form of sensory cells is that
which carries a number of small tactile processes. Of these there may
be (Eucharis multicornis) as many as seven ; others bear only one pro-
cess, and that of considerable length and thickness. The author is
confident as to the presence in the epidermis of a nervous layer. Other
ectodermal structures must be here passed over, although they exhibit
many j^oints of considerable interest.

The mesoderm forms the great mass of the body. It is gelatinous,
and in Callianira, EucJiaris, and Cydippe is very soft, while in the
Cestidae and Beroidse it is much firmer. It does not develop any sup-
porting lamella, and although in itself completely structureless, it
contains a number of variously differentiated cells. In Beroe ovatus
there are found to be either muscular fibres, nerve-fibres, or connective-
tissiic corpuscles. Although these are, when most pronounced, easy
enough to distinguish from one another, there are also others which
seem to be intermediate in character. The muscles are either radial,
circular, or longitudinal ; each fibre consists of an axial and a cortical
substance, together with a sarcolcmma.

The endoderm is comparatively uniform in character. It would
appear to consist of a single layer of ci)ithelial cells, flattened on ono
side ; the epithelium of the vessels is richly ciliated ; distinct and
well-marked stomata are to be observed, by means of which fluid can
jKiss to the mesoderm, without any special modification of the endo-
dcrmal cells being necessary. They are boimdod by a rosette of cells
which call to mind, by tlicir arrangement, the structure of ciliated
infundibula. No nerves or muscles were to be observed in this layer.

Medusae and Hydroid Polyps living in Fresh Water. * —
Professor Lankoster jxjints out that the tolerance by marine animals of
fresh water is a much more freipicntly observed fact in all classes,
than the tolcriince of seik water by lacustrine or fluviatile forms. It is
undeniable that existing fiesh-water forms have been developed by
adaptation from marine forms, whilst it is difficult to cite any instance
in which adaptation in the opposite direction ajipears to have taken
place, some few marine 01igocha;tous ChiDtopods and Pulmouato
Gasteropods being i)erhaps such instances.

* 'Qiuirt. Jouru. Mkt. yd.,' xx. (18S0) pp. 483-5.

968 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

The tolerance by Medusae belonging to marine species of fresb
water under natural conditions was observed by Mr. H. N. Moseley,
in New South Wales, and Professor Agassiz writes : " It strikes me
as if the consequences resulting from the finding of the fresh-water
Medusa* had been somewhat overdrawn. In the first place, we have
two genuine fresh-water Hydroids, Hydra and Cordylophora, and in
the second place, as far as my experience goes, it is not conclusive of
so fatal an action of fresh water on Meduste as Eomanes would lead
us to believe in. We have quite an estuary leading out back of
Boston Harbour, extending on the one side to form what we call the
back bay, and beyond this up the Charles Eiver as far as Watertown,
where there is a dam, about seven miles from the inner extremity of
the harbour proper. Here the Charles Eiver falls into this estuary
as a fresh- water stream sufficiently large at times to atfect the saltness
of the estuary below it at low tide, so that at Cambridge, lialf way
from Watertown to Boston, the water is salt only at the highest tides,
quite brackish during the first half of the ebb, and comparatively fresh
during the last part of the tide. At West Boston Bridge, about one
mile from the head of the harbour, the water at the last part of the
tide is fresh enough and tastes but little salt. At this bridge there
is an abundance of Hydroids which thrive remarkably well on the
drainage of the district, and grow to an unusually large size. The
species found there which has no free Medusa is Laomedea gigantea ;
while of the Hydroids which have free Medusae we find Eucope
diapliann, E. pyriformis, and Obelia commissuralis. All these species
are, therefore, twice during twenty-four hours exposed to salt water
and to nearly fresh water, and thrive remarkably well under the
treatment, as must of course theii" free Medusae, which I have caught
both at high tide and low water — in salt and in nearly fresh water.

Other of our Medusae also find their way into this estuary, and I
have found in fresh water, at low tide, active '^"^sice, Tiaropsis, and
also Aurelice, which seemed unaflected by the large quantity of fresh
water in which they were found."

Origin of the Generative Cells in the Hydroida.t — Dr. Weis-
mann, in the paper referred to at page 813 (where the following
should have been inserted) gives the results of his examination of
Tiibularia mesembryanthemum, Eudendrium ramosum, Gonothyrcea Loveni,
Sertularella polyzonias, Plumularia setacea, and Aglaophenia pluma.
He confirms the fact that in some cases the eggs of the Hydroida
are, without doubt, developed in the endoderm, while the seminal
cells are by no means constantly developed from the ectoderm.
Thus Eudendrium, Sertularella, and Plumularia have an endo-
dermal origin for their sperm-cells, while Tuhularia, Gonothyrcea,
Campanularia, Hydradinia, Cordylophora, and Hydra have the origin
ectodermal.

In Hydroids with sessile buds, therefore, we find three combina-
tions, out of four which are, in the nature of things, possible ; (a) both
sets of sexual products are developed in the endoderm {Hydra,

* See this Journal, ante, p. 652. f ' Zool. Anzeig.,' iii. (1880) p. 22G.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 969

Cordylophora, and Tuhularia) ; (b) both arise from the endoderm
{Eudendrium, Plnmidaria, and Sertularella) ; (c) the seminal arise
from ectodermal, and the ovarian products from endodermal cells.
It is interesting to note that no certain evidence is to hand of the
fourth possible combination — the male elements being developed
from the endoderm and the female from the ectoderm — ever having
been correctly observed.

A further result of his observations is to be found in the fact that
in several Hydroids the ovarian cells chiefly arise in the ccenosarc of
the trunk, and only pass, during their growth, into the sexual knobs.
This is, further, to be confirmed by a reference to the statements of
Fraipont and of Van Beneden. The results of F. E. Schulze's
researches on Cordylophora would seem to be explicable by supposing
that he did not notice the very earliest stages, and that in Cordylo-
pho7-a the true scat of the origin of the cells is a portion of the
ccenosarc which belongs to the gonophoral region.

Development of Hydra.*— Hcrr Kerschner has a preliminary
communication on the results he obtained, under the direction of Prof.
F. E. Schulze. There does not apjiear to be any morula-stage proper.
A blastula apjiears very early, and at its inferior pole, or that directed
towards the pareut, there is an invagination of cells, which go to
form the endoderm. There is not, as Kleinenberg imagined, any
conversion of the ectoderm into a chitinous investment for the embryo ;
but that layer does give rise to the connection between the mother and
the embryo. The endoderm cells increase by the development of
numerous protoplasmic connecting cords ; and the lacunje between
them have a counective-tissue-like appearance, which only becomes
altered by the closer approximation of the cells of this layer. The
oral pole of the young Hydra corresponds to the vegetative pole of
the ovum.

Structure of Hydra. t — Herr Korotneff finds that the epithclio-
muscular cells of the " foot " are to be distingmshed from the other
ectodermal cells by their cylindrical form, their possession of a highly
refractive fibrilla, and the presence in their superior third of a
similarly refractive mucous secretion, by means of which the animal
is enabled to attach itself. These elements he would propose to dis-
tinguish as glandulo-muscular. At the beginning of autumn the
small, deei)ly-set cells o{ the ectoderm begin to jiroliferate actively,
and, arranging themselves in groups, they push their way between the
superjacent epithelio-muscular elements. These latter lose their
nuclei, and Lecome gradually absorbed. The cells thus lost are
replaced by a number of small cells, arranged in several layers. The
winter ectoderm cells, thus fi)rmed, undergo a fatty degeneration.
In consequence of the destruction of the muscular system, the animal
becomes considerably contracted, the endoderm gets folded, and the
cavity of the animal completely disappears. The develojunent of the
ova has many points of resemblance to that of the ectodermal cells just
described ; but it only occurs at certain points. Here the lowest lying

♦ ' Z(«)l. Aiiz.eifi: ,' iii. (1880) p. 454. + Ibid., p. 10."..

970 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

cells increase in size, their nuclei become converted into large germi-
nal vesicles. One of tliese vesicles continues to grow, and becomes
the definite germinal vesicle of the egg, while the other cells diminish,
and go to form part of the investing cell-layer.

After describing the further details of the egg's growth, the author
points out that in the course of its development there appear two
directive corpuscles. The peripheral cells of the morula go to form
the blastoderm-cells ; the nuclei pass to the outer margin ; the cells
increase in length, and elongate in a radial direction. The endoderm
is formed by cells which arise in the central portion of the morula.
Two covering shells can be made out at about this stage. One is
formed from the parent, and one is shed out by the egg itself. The
latter, primitively simple, becomes thickened under the influence of
external adverse conditions. It was this shell-layer which Kleinenberg
regarded as the ectoderm of the embryonic Hydra. The internal
cavity is formed by the centrifugal growth of the cells of the embryo.

Porifera.

External Gemmation in the Spongida.* — M. de Mereschkowsky
directs attention to this mode of reproduction, which, as compared
with the other asexual method (that of the formation of gemmules),
has been but little studied ; the process indeed seems to be rare, and
lias hitherto only been observed in the four genera of the family of
the SuberitidinfB, Tethja, Tetilla, Suberites, and Rinalda.

After referring to the observations of Bowerbank and Oscar
Schmidt, the author passes to the account which he has himself given of
Rinalda arctica (from the White Sea) ; here he observed that the whole
of the sponge was covered with long conical protuberances, hollow inter-
nally ; buds became detached from these cones, and fixing themselves,
gave rise to fresh sponges.

The observations now. to be recorded w — ^ made on a species
of Tcthya from the same sea. This sponge is not more than one

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXL

(Figs. 1-5 are natural size. Figs. 6-8 x 7, Figs. 9-11 x 40, Figs. 12, 13 x 10).

Figs. 1-3. — Adult specimens of Te/hya from the White Sea. On the surface
are groups of buds ou peduncles of different form, length, and size.

Fig. 4. — Probably a detached bud, throwing out in all directions long fila-
ments and protuberances, which later will bear buds at their extremities.

Fig. 5. — Two specimens of tlie same Tethya attached to tlie interior surface of
a Tcrehratula, without buds or any kind of protubcrnuces on the surface.

Fig. 6. — On a long peduncle originating from the mother-body x, is a bud of
irregular form a, on which are other buds, 6, c, d.

Fig. 7. — Metamery in the disposition of the buds.

Fig. 8. — Dichotomous ramifications of tlie peduncle, having a bud at each
extremity. That on the left side seems to be about to divide longitudinally,
which will probably give rise to further dicliotoiny.

Figs. 9-11. — First stages of the development of buds. In addition to the long
spicules, there are smaller ones in the form of stars.

Figs. 12, 13. — Buds at the surface of Tethya lyncurium, from Sicily.

* 'Arch. Zool. Exp. et Gen.,' viii. (1880) p. 417.

JO URN. R. MICE.. SOC. VOL. in, PL. XXI.

ymk

12

JLxternal Genima.Ljun m the Spongid^i

Wtsl,[i&wr>Mn%s.Cv hxi:

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 971

centimetre in diameter ; the body is regularly globular in form,
and is often found attached to the internal surface of some shell
(^Terebratula). It is of a clear yellow colour, sometimes darkened
to brown ; the regularity of the external form is seldom so well
marked as in the large and small specimen figured in Fig. 5, and, as
a rule (see Figs. 1-4), there are conical or filamentous projections
from its surface. The strange ajipearance produced by these projec-
tions leads one at first to sujipose that they are parasites ; this view
is shown to be incoi-rect by a closer examination. The most frequent
arrangement is shown in Fig. 1, where we find ovoid or pyriform buds,
romided at one extremity and at the other passing into a more or less
delicate stalk, ()f varying length. Sometimes (Fig. 1 a, 2 a) the buds
are globular, and these are seen to be " covered with that layer of
organic matters which is characteristic of an adult sponge " ; these
buds may even surpass in diameter the smaller specimen shown in
Fig. 5. The foot or process which supports the bud is merely a deli-
cate cylindrical filament, the length of which may be as great or greater
than the diameter of the parent sponge (Fig. 3). In Fig. 8 we have
an example of the dichotomous division of this filament. In some
cases (see Fig. 7) we may find examples of buds of the second order,
or (as in Fig. 6) a number of secondary buds (b, c) may arise from
the primary one (a), and these may be in various stages. A tertiary
bud (d) may also be seen arising from the stalk of a secondary
bud (c).

The following is an account of the development of these structures ;
at certain points on the surface of the sponge there is an agglomera-
tion of the syncytium into which there penetrates a number of long
spicules; this aggregated sarcode forms a small cylindrical body,
which gradually elongates ; the spicules already formed are displaced
by other fresh spicules ; the outgrowing filament, after having attained
a certain length, begins to form the bud at its tip (Figs. 9, 10, 11) ;
the peduncle has no canal and no j)ores, so that the bud cannot be
looked upon as being an invagination of the wall of the parent sj)ongo,
for the cavities which become developed in it arise indei^endently,
and have no connection with the cavity of the parent.

General and Comparative Morphology of the Sponges. — To the
above paper is appended an abstract of M. Mereschk(nvsky's views on
this subject, in which he compares the sponges with the Hydroida.

The formation of a very sim])le colony in the Hydroida is charac-
terized by the fact that tlie new individuals are not fortuitously
attached to the jjarent, but follow a rigorous law, so ordered that tho
appearance of one individual or tentacle is tho signal for the ajipear-
anco of lan identical one oi)posite to it ; after one pair has been
developed others may follow, but they arc always referable to the
formula 2 n. Nothing like this is to be observed in most sponges ;
the buds do not seem to folhnv any law, and arise without any order.
The second point of diflercnco is tliat in the Hydroida tho new
individuals or tentacles form a ramified colony, in which every indi-
vidual is completely distinct from its neighbours. Cases like this are
as a rare exception {Sycetta primitiva) to bo observed among sponges.

972 RECOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

but it is not tlie rule ; in them the daughter -individuals have their
walls fused together in such a way as to give rise to the appearance of
a single organism. If, then, it is allowable to regard the tentacles
of a Hydroid polyp as individuals distinct from the hydranth, we
have to speak of it as a polymorphous colony, composed of individuals
completely distinct and regularly arranged, while the sponge is formed
by a colony of individuals irregularly arranged and fused into a single
comj^act mass.

New British Sponge.* — Mr. J. G. Waller describes and figures
Saphiodesma minima, a new British sponge of small size (x inch x
^ inch), found by him at Torquay on a small pebble of limestone, held
in the roots of Laminaria saccharina. It was unfortunately not in a
fresh condition. The species is but little removed from _B. sordida,
and but for the absence of tricurvate and bihamate spicules, and the
possession of long, hair-like, acerate spicules in the membrane, as it
were in substitute, might easily be pronounced to be the same.

Mr. Waller also shows that Hymeniacidon macilenta, of Bowerbank,
is in reality an early stage of B,. sordida, of that author,f so that the
former name should be abandoned.

Protozoa.

Infusoria as Parasites 4 — Mr. W. S. Kent directs attention to the
consideration of the innumerable forms of Infusoria which are referable
to the category of " Parasites " in the strictest and simplest sense (as
distinguished from " Commensals "),

Amongst the Flagellata ten species are figured and described,
parasites respectively of frogs and other Amphibia, the intestinal
viscera of ducks and geese, the house-fly the blood of Indian rats, a
nematoid worm ( Trilohus gracilis), the c \mmon cockroach, and the
human nasal and respiratory passages, the latter being Dr. J. H. Salis-
bury's Asthmatos ciliaris, an active agent, as he considers, in the pro-
duction of one form of the infection known as hay asthma or hay
fever.

Hexamita intestinalis, which occurs abundantly in that prolific
hunting-ground for parasitic organisms, the rectum and intestine
of the frog, Ba7ia temporaria, has recently (in association with
examples of this Batrachian dissected at the South Kensington Bio-
logical Laboratory) been the object of investigation by the author,
as the result of which some points of interest concerning the deport-
ment of these singular organisms in the fluid medium they inhabit
were placed on record. While usually described as essentially
free-swimming organisms, it was found that they possess the faculty
also of attaching themselves at will to associated objects, and of
passing a temporarily sedentary existence. When first transferred
to the field of the Microscope no such pi-operty is exhibited, the
creatures hurrying hither and thither in the most aimless and ex-
cited manner. Gradually, however, their movements grow more

* ' Journ. Quek. Micr. Club,' vi. (1880) pp. 97-104, 1 plate.

t ' British Spongiadse,' iii. p. 230.

i ' Pop. Sci. Rev.,' iv. (1880) pp. 293-309, 2 plates.

INVEltTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 973

tranquil, till at length scarcely an animalcule is to be seen exhibiting
its natatory capacities, all with rare exceptions having attached them-
selves to the organic debris or other suitable fulcra, through the
medium of their two trailing posterior flagella, which possess a
marked adhesive function. Sometimes the entire lengths of these
filiform appendages are utilized as organs of adherence, and sometimes
only their distal extremities.

Under these last-named conditions, a highly remarkable modi-
fication of the movements of the animalcule was observed. Where
the adhesion is effected by the entire length of the flagella, the
motion .of the body is simply oscillatory, the four anterior flagella
being deployed and agitated without apparently any definite plan
of action. When, however, adherence is accomplished through the
medium only of the terminations of the flagella, the body gyrates
rapidly, and with rhythmical cadence, from right to left and left
to riglit, such action causing the adherent flagella to become twisted
on each other, while the four anterior ones describe elegant undu-
lations round tlie animalcule's body. It would seem highly pro-
bable that the form described by Professor Leidy under the title
of Trichoni/mpha ngilis, found within the intestine of the American
white ant, Termes Jlnvicans (likened by the discoverer to the performers
in an American ballet, whose chief attire consisted of long cords
suspended from their shoulders, whirled in mazy undulations around
them as they danced), represented a species of Hexamita, observed
under the conditions just described. Phenomena precisely identical
with those just recorded of Hexamita intestinalis have been found by
the author to obtain also in the non-parasitic and marsh-dwelling
species, H. inflata.

Of the Ciliata fifteen species are figured and described, viz. :
ectoparasites of young trout, the garden snail, Hydra vulgaris, a
planarian worm, and the fresli-water sponge, endoparasites of man,
frogs and toads, a myriapod {lalus marginalus), the water-beetle
(Hydrophilus piceus), the earth-worm, a marine planarian, and the
intestinal and pulmonary cavities of fresh-water molluscs.

Chlorophyll and Starch in Infusoria.* — M. P. Van Tieghem
mentions tluit he has often observed perfectly developed grains of
chloropliyll in true Infusoria, and notably in Stentor polymorphus.
Besides chlorophyll, the Euglence contain grains of starch (paramylon).

New Opalinids.f — In 1879, M. E, Maupas described J Eaptophn/a
gifjanten, a new Opalinid from the intestines of anourous Batracbia.
M. A. Certes records having also f(juud the Infusorian in Bufo pan-
ihcrinus from Constantine. Despite tlie rapidity with which they died
when removed from their natural surroundings, M. C'ertes succeeded
in preserving some alive for five or six days in albuminous water, and
made preparations in a mixture of osmic acid and 33 per cent, alcohol.

M. Certes confirms generally the description given by M. Maupas,

* ' Hull. Bot. S(>c. Fraiu-o,' xxvii. (1880) p. 132.
t • Bull. Soc. Zool. France.' iv. (1880) pp. '2i0-4, plato xii.
; Sue liib Juiiriiai, ii. (187'.i) p. 588.
VOL. III. 3 T

974 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

but finds the buccal sucker has a double crown (internal and external)
of vibratile cilia stronger than those of the body. The internal crown
is upon a kind of very fine membrane, and even the bottom of the
sucker appears to bo ciliated. Particles of carmine in the fluid in
which the animal was swimming were drawn in by the current set up
by these cilia and accumulated in the funnel of the sucker, without,
however, penetrating into the interior of the body. According to
M. Maupas, the long contractile canal communicates with the exterior
by a certain number of very small oval orifices ; but these M. Certes,
though he sought very carefully for them, was unable to detect.

M. Maupas has placed the animal amongst the Opalinida, but
M. Certes finds some difficulty in agreeing with this. The typical
Opalinid (0. ranarum) is remarkable for the large number of its
nuclei and the absence of a mouth. There is nothing similar in
H. gigantea. The nucleus is single ; the buccal sucker is, if not a
true mouth, at least an organ sui generis, where the first acts of nutri-
tion are localized. The thickness of the cuticle and the clear layer
separating it from the mass of the body excludes all possibility of
phenomena of endosmosis. On the other hand, M. Certes does not
think it right to conclude that, because the solid particles of colouring
matter drawn by the cilia into the funnel of the sucker do not
penetrate the sarcode mass, the albuminous liquid, by which the
animal is nourished, does not do so either, and that the sucker is only
an organ of attachment. Moreover, the animal is more often found
attached to the small Tcenice of the intestine of Biifo paniherinus than
even to the walls of the intestine. On these several grounds it should
be considered to form a link between . the true astomatous species
(Opalinida) and those which have a we /-defined buccal orifice.

In all probability, Haptophrya gigantea will not remain isolated in
this new group. M. E. Blanchard found, in 1878, in the intestine of
an Alpine Triton, an unknown Infusorian, which at first sight
M. Certes thought was H. gigantea ; but a closer scrutiny enabled him
to recognize diflerences between the two species, though they were
evidently closely allied.

In the preparations of M. Blanchard there is no trace of a dorsal
canal, nor does he recollect having seen one in the living animal. In
one of the individuals treated with osmic acid, there exists in the pos-
terior portion of the body a large vacuole which may be the indication
of the contractile vacuole. The cuticle has a double outline but is
destitute of the characteristic strise so conspicuous in the preparations
of H. gigantea. Finally (the most important difference), the buccal
sucker is replaced by an oval depression armed with very strong cilia,
and which cannot be better compared, for form and general appearance,
than to the mouth of a tiny whale, with its whalebone. The two ex-
tremities of this depression are connected by muscular cords (strongly
coloured by the carmine), arranged so that the anterior part of the
animal seems, under a low power, as though provided with a horse-shoe
sucker abruptly terminated in the interior part. There are, besides,
characters which establish apparently a clear line of demarcation, not
only between the two species, but also between the Infusorian of the

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 975

Triton and Balantidium elongatum and entozoon that Stein has foiind
in Triton cristatus and txeniatus.

H. Tr'donis is proposed as the name of the new species.

Dr. E. Everts has recently published * the description of an
Opalinid (Ojmlina Discoglossi) found by him at Naples, in Disco-
glossus picfus. In size rather than in general form, in habitat, in the
existence of a single nucleus, a dorsal canal, and a sucker, and also in
the great analogy in the phenomena of reproduction, this Opalinid
singularly resembles that described by M. Maupas, with which, how-
ever, it cannot be confoiuided.

Importance of Foraminifera for the Doctrine of Descent.t — At
the 63rd Congress of the Association of German Naturalists and
Physicians held at Dantzig in September, Professor Mobius, of Kiel,
read a paper with the above title.

He began by quoting Dr. Carpenter's view that the genera and
species of tlie Foramiuifera cannot be determined after the usual
method, but that the only natural classification of the great mass
of difl'erent forms is to arrange them in accordance with their degree
of relationship. Professor Mobius himself had come to the con-
clusion from his researches among the Foraminifera which he had
collected in Mauritius in 1874 that the repeatedly occurring pecu-
liarities among the Foraminifera may serve and must serve in form-
ing an idea of their nature and zoological position. The sarcode
of the Foraminifera behaves with regard to the formation of the
skeleton and shell just as does the protoplasm of the eggs of
the Metazoa to the formation of the germs and of all organs pro-
ceeding from them. Like the protoplasm of the egg, it possesses a
quite definite and hereditary capacity for self-development. As con-
firmatory of Darwin's theory of descent, they possess a value neither
greater nor less than that of all other animal classes. The Professor's
forthcoming work on the Foraminifera of Mauritius will contain much
detailed evidence in support of his views.

In the discussion which followed, it was suggested that the point
of difference between the author and Dr. Carpenter lay in the fact that
Dr. Carpenter had regard to the sarcode rather than to tlie skeleton,
to which latter Professor Mobius attached the greater importance.

New Moneron.| — K. Mercschkowsky describes a new form
(observed at Naples), under the name of Monojwdium KowalevsJii/i.
It is, of course, non-nucleated, and has a fairly consistent granular
proto^dasni, with rounded vacuoles, varying but little in form. As a
rule it only gives off a single homogeneous pseudopodium, wliich is
about ten times as hmg as the diameter of the mass. Attaching itself to
a filament of a Leptolhi-ix, it gradually draws the body after it.
When two individuals unite the component mass breaks up into three.
This was the only mode (jf reproduction which was observed, and the
observer has no information to give as to any other process for effect-
ing the same result.

* 'Tijds. Nederl. dferk. Verconijiing,' iv. (1879) pp. 02-96, plato iv.
t ' Nature," x.\ii. (18S0) pp. 527-8.
j 'Zool. Anzeig.,* iii. (I8h0) p. l:U».

3 T 2

976 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

BOTANY.

A. GrENEBAIi, including Embryology and Histology
of the Phanerogamia.

Division of the Nucleus in the PoUen-Mother-cells of Trades-
cantia.* — According to Baranctzky, the mother-cells of the pollen of
some species of Tradescantia, especially T. virginica, pilosa, discolor,
suhaspera, and zebrina, afford a remarkably good illustration of the
mode of division of the cell-nucleus. Almost as soon as division
commences they separate entirely from one another ; and it is only
necessary to crush the anthers in water under the cover-glass in order
to get readily the cells swimmiug about separately in a state of division,
and hence to observe the processes on all sides. Owing to the thin-
ness of the protoplasm, the cells will remain uninjured for hours in
river or spring-water without undergoing any material change ; after
a longer time the cell-contents contract without any formation of
vacuoles. The nucleus can be readily made out, even when the cells
lie only in water, from its density and sharp outline. The descriptions
of the process by previous observers are in certain points incorrect,
probably because it has been observed in salt or sugar solutions, in
which the nucleus is not nearly so clear, instead of simply in water.

Very young pollen-mother-cells are filled with a moderately dense,
finely granular protoplasm. The large nuclei, which are considerably
denser, appear also to be finely granular ; they have no membrane-
like outermost layer. The behaviour of the nucleoli is not altogether
clear. In T. zebrma there appears to be always a large nucleolus,
while in the other species none was clearly visible, and in some it was
altogether unrecognizable. Probably they are always present when the
nucleus is in a state of rest. The division now proceeds in the way
described by Hanstein. The dense parts of the nucleus, which at first
appear like fine granules without definite form, increase in size, and
gradually assume the form of short rods inclined in different direc-
tions, and separated by a sparse clear matrix. The appearance is,
indeed, somewhat as if the nucleus were full of bacteria. A nucleolus
can now be detected in the nucleus, usually with definite outline. The
rods appear to be of different lengths, but their terminations are not
readily made out ; they become thicker, while their number decreases,
and the nucleus becomes gradually denser and less transparent. At
one stage the appearance is more that of uninterrupted threads than of
rods or granules, and this is probably the case throughout.

As the process advances, the rods and threads, though increasing
in size, never lose their sharp outline, while the quantity of the inter-
mediate matrix diminishes considerably. The denser portions of the
nucleus are in its periphery, and in immediate contact with the pro-
toplasm of the cell ; and this causes the nucleus to lose its smooth
outline, and to bulge out with a number of protuberances, and it pos-
sesses this mamillated form when the rods have attained their full
size.

The mass of the protoplasm of the cell is at first indistinctly finely
* 'Bot. Zeit.,' xxxviii. (1880) p. 241.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 977

granular. When tlic diflferentiation of the nucleus begins, sharply
defined round granules appear in it, the protoplasm becoming less
transparent as they increase in number. These granules have much
the appearance of starch-grains. They frequently collect at one side of
the cell or form a ring round the nucleus ; this ring or sphere after-
wards becomes broader, the granules retreating towards the cell-wall,
while the nucleus remains surrounded by a transparent and nearly
homogeneous protoj^lasm.

In the final stage of the differentiation of the nucleus, the threads
form a dense convohition, the substance of which is obviously finely
granular. The line where they meet the periphery of the nucleus is
very fine, and apparently not smooth, but granular ; while in the centre
of the convolution the outlines of the threads are not clearly dis-
cernible.

The next processes comprise the second stage of development, the
phase of the division of the cell-nucleus. The outlines of the threads
become sharjier and their substance apparently denser and more homo-
geneous ; and at the same time they begin to change their position, so
as to lie more or less nearly parallel to one another, the convolution
increasing at the same time in size, and assuming the form of a plate
composed of serpentine threads. Some among the cells are dis-
tinguished from the rest by their size and transparency, although their
nuclei have not more than the ordinary size. The threads now pre-
sent the appearance as if they were elastic, and constantly endeavouring
to free and straighten themselves ; at all events the convolution breaks
up eventually into small fragments. The nucleus is now practically
composed of a great number of separate filiform fragments, without
any special distinguishable intermediate matrix, the threads appearing
to be surrounded by the same transparent cell-contents which fill up
almost the entire cell-cavity.

The division of the convolution, and the development of the two
new nuclei, usually proceed in the following way : — The plate, com-
posed of transverse coils of threads, becomes thicker, often passing
almost across the cell-cavity, and having sometimes somewhat of a
stellate form. Tlie tlireads at the same time break up into shorter
rod-like fragments, their outline becoming also less sharp. The split-
ting of the disk now commences at right angles to tlie direction of the
elements of the nucleus, beginning usually at the margin and advanc-
ing towards the centre. The two halves begin at once to separate
from one another, but remain for a time connected in the middle.
The intermediate space becomes filled with a very dense, opaque, and
usually granular protoplasm, in wliich a delicate striation is sometimes
to be seen. ]>ut tho elements of the two lialvcs of the nucleus possess
und(jubtedly from the first a certain polarity, that is, a tendency to
separate in t)pposite directions, as may be seen from the position taken
up by single free fragments. The two halves soon sej)arate completely
from one another, and whvu they have approaclied ch)so to tlie cell-
wall tliey are still composed of distiiiguislmblo rods or gi'anules. The
elements of the nucleus gradually fuse together, but its structure is
still apparently not homogeneous.

978 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

When the new nuclei begin to round themselves off, the protoplasm
again becomes more transparent ; and the granules again collect into
a peripheral zone, which includes the nuclei. The nuclear plate makes
its appearance suddenly as a dark granular streak, occupying at first
only the centre of the cell, and rapidly elongating on both sides until
it reaches the periphery of the cell, and the division is complete. It
is only after the complete division of the cell that the definite forma-
tion of the new nuclei commences, which gradually again attain their
original uniform finely granular structure. During the development
a considerable absorption of water must take place, the young nuclei
becoming less dense and increasing at the same time greatly in volume.

The four pollen-cells which are formed from a single mother-cell
are, in Tradescantia, always produced by two successive bipartitions,
the processes being in all essential points the same in the second
aivision as in the first.

The description now given applies to Tradescantia virginica, suhas-
pera, and pilosa. In T. discolor the pollen-mother-cells are small, and
filled with granular but slightly transparent protoplasm, and are
therefore not so favourable for observation. Some peculiarities are
presented by T. zehrina. The breaking-up of the nuclear threads into
short, nearly oval fragments takes place at a very much earlier period.
The nuclear plate has also more the character of a ring, its elements
almost disappearing from the centre and collecting near the periphery.

The nuclear threads so often referred to can be crushed out and
their structure examined in water. They are then seen to be longer
or shorter, often vermiform threads, the ends of which are always
smoothly rounded ofi". Their substance is not homogeneous, but con-
sists of a less dense matrix, and a denser portion which assumes the
form of an elevated ridge running spirally round the length of the
thread, and which can be even separated from its mass.

Baranetzky observed also the course of the division of the pollen-
mother-cells in other plants, both monocotyledons and dicotyledons,
especially in Aijapantlms umhellatus, Hemerocallis flava. Yucca gloriosa,
Hesperis matronalis, Lathyrtis odoratus, and Pisum sativum. None of
these present any differences, except in subordinate points. In Pisum
the process is extremely similar to that in Tradescantia zehrina, the
breaking-up of the nuclear threads taking place at an early period.
In Hesperis the substance of the nucleus is from the first differentiated
into rod-shaped, and in Pisum, Hemerocallis, and Yucca into perfectly
isodiametrical elements. The filiform nature of the dense elements of
the nucleus is therefore not a universal rule.

In conclusion, the following may be stated as the three most
important points in the division of the mother-cells of pollen : —

1. The differentiation of the mass of the nucleus; that is, the
gradual separation of the dense substance, which then assumes tlie
form, according to the species of plant, of long vermiform threads,
shortish rods, or roundish bodies, which may be called the elements
of the nucleus.

2. The tendency of the nuclear elements to separate from one
another in the equatorial plane of the cell, or rather, to approach the

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 979

cell-wall in this plane and arrange themselves into the nuclear plate
which, in Tradescantia zebrina, has the form of a ring, and in other
species of Tradescantia of an absolute flattening of the differentiated
nucleus.

3. The point where the centres of attraction appear to be shifted.
The nuclear elements are now drawn to the opposite poles of the cell,
their separation being thus determined into two distinct groups or new
nuclei.

Multinucleated Cells in the Suspensor of Dicotyledons.* — In
pursuance of recent discoveries by the author himself, Strasburger,
Treub, Schmitz, and others, t of the existence of a plurality of nuclei
in vegetable cells, Hegelmaier has closely examined and described a
similar phenomenon in the suspensor (pro-embryo) of certain dicoty-
ledons belonging to the tribe Vicie^ of Leguminos;c. The species
specially examined were Pisum saticum, Lathyrus sylvestris, odoratus,
Ochrns, pratensis, stans, Aphaca, and Nissolia, Orobus vermis, niger,
tuberosus, and atbus, Lens esculenta, Vicia sepium, pisiformis, and
tenuifolia, and Cicer arietinum. Of these the last is the only one
that presents any important differences from the rest.

The peculiarity presented by all the species above mentioned, and
probably by all belonging to the tribe, is that the fully developed
suspensor, which is of considerable length, is always composed of
the same number of cells, viz. four ; exceptions to this being rare
abnormalities. The structure consists of two parts, each composed of
a pair of cells. At full maturity the cells of the apical pair are
swollen out, and closely adj)resserl to one another with flat surfaces,
so as to form a roundish ellipsoidal or nearly spherical ball. They
contain a somewhat coarse-grained protoplasm forming a parietal
layer of variable tliickness, imbedded in which are large nuclei
placed at uniform distances, the number of these nuclei appearing to
depend on the size of the ball, which varies with the species. The
average number is perhaps from twenty to thirty, at least in species
with large flowers and seeds ; in Lens esculenta there were found
only from twelve to sixteen, in Vicia tenuifolia about eight, and in
Lathyrus stans and Nissolia only four. When, as in Lathyrus sylvestris,
these cells are smaller, the number of nuclei is still consideral)lo.

The two basal cells of the suspensor form, as it were, a kind of
})edicel to the capitulum ; its cells are much narrower, and taper off
gradually to the base. The number of nuclei in these cells is still
larger, and dt^pends on their size. In the upper, broader part of the
j)cdicel tlu:y are imbedded, at uniform distances, in the parietal proto-
plasm ; in the lower, narrower part they are arranged in several rows ;
in the narrowest basal portion the protoplasm is no longer in the
form (if a parietal layer, but is a mucilaginous mass occupying nearly
the whole of the cell-cavity.

The form of the nuclei presents nothing remarkable ; in each,
when mature, is a large, strongly refractive, and sharply defined
nucleolus. In old nuclei two nucleoli are occasionally found.

• ' IW. Z(it.,' xxxviii. (ISSO) p. UVX

t iSco thia Journal, ii. (187l>) i). GOO, and miL-, pp. Ill, 303, 482, 493.

980 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

All four cells of the suspensor display a tendency to round off, and
for the dividing cell walls to split into two lamellae, so that they very
readily separate from one another, as also does the embryo from the
suspensor, being sometimes attached to it only by a common external
layer of mucilaginous protoplasm.

The cell walls of the suspensor are extremely delicate, and it
is even doubtful whether they are composed of cellulose or any
isomerical substance. The entire absence of cuticularization suggests
the explanation oifered by Treub,* that the susj^ensory cells them-
selves absorb nutriment for the embryo, partly from the integuments
and funiculus, partly from the tissue of the placenta. The ovules of
the Vicie^ are, like those of other Leguminosge, campylotropous, and
the chalazal portion is separated from the much narrower micropylar
end by an elevated ridge. The long suspensor raises the embryo
into the micropyle, or even beyond it, which is a great advantage.

In all the Viciete, at the time when the formation of the embryo
commences, the ovule aud embryo-sac are but slightly curved ; there
is as yet no nucellar tissue ; the inner integument is preseat, but is
much thinner than the outer one. The longitudinal division which
separates the two cells of the lower part of the suspensor from one
another is formed much earlier than that which divides the two
apical cells from one another. Sometimes, even before the latter is
formed, the nuclei in the two lower cells begin to divide. The two
nuclei thus formed lie in such a position towards one another as if a
transverse septum had been formed between them ; but there is never
the least trace of such a sej^tum. This division of the nuclei then
advances from the base towards the apex. Not until the nuclei in the
lower cells have reached a certain number, at least sixteen, do those
in the upper cells begin to divide ; the formation of division- walls is
in them also extremely rare.

The division of the nucleus is always preceded by that of its
large nucleolus, which elongates, and becomes constricted into a
dumb-bell-like form ; the entire nucleus then assuming a long
ellipsoidal or fusiform shape ; but only after the nucleolus has
completely divided does the constriction of the nucleus itself begin.
While the definition of the nucleolus is always sharp, the nucleus
appears, during the process of division, to coalesce, at its periphery,
with the surrounding protoplasm.

Gicer presents several peculiarities in the form and development
of the suspensor. Instead of consisting of four multinucleated, it is
composed of a larger number of uuinucleated cells, viz. from six to
nine, on the average about seven pair. Each contains a large nucleus
imbedded in the parietal protoplasm, and subsequently a refractive
spherical nucleolus. The cell-walls, though still thin, are consider-
ably firmer than in the other Vicieas. The number of cells, and
consequentlj'' of nuclei, in the suspensor of Cicer is not so large as
that of the nuclei in other genera, and may even be not so large as
that of the nuclei in a single multinucleated cell. Tlie second
peculiarity of the embryo of Ci'cer— whether connected or not with
* ' Notes sur rembryogenie de quelques Orchidees,' 1 879.

INVERTEBRATA, ORYPTOQAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC 981

the first is uncertain — is that the entire large-celled suspensor, with
the exception of its narrow basal end, as well as the embryo, is
surrounded by an endosperm which develops in the micropylar half
of the young seed ; the base of the suspensor itself entirely fills up
the narrow pointed apical end of the embryo-sac.

Latex and Laticiferous Vessels.* — M. E. Faivre gives the
following as the main results of a very careful study of latex and
laticifcrs in the embryo and seedling of Tragopogon porrifolius.

The laticiferous vessels are first formed at the same time as the
other vessels, in the cotyledons, the plumule, and the radicle. They
are produced, like the rest of the vessels, by the union of cells, not
as simple intercellular spaces, and then undergo further development
by the elongation of jDrotuberances which are already present in their
wall ; they are simply or reticularly branched ; their ends are blind.
The laticiferous vessels most closely resemble tracheides in their
general distribution, and occur in all parts of the young plant ; they
are much more numerous in the cotyledons which contain chlorophyll
than in the plumule, and still more so than in the radicle. In the
interior of the cotyledons they appear at once in ribbon-shaped and
reticulated groups.

As regards the latex itself, the author distinguishes between an
original latex (latex primordial), which is formed before the chloro-
phyll, and the latex properly so called, which arises at a later period.

The author believes the latex to be a reserve-material, the essential
composition of which is undoubtedly related to that of protoplasm.
It consists fundamentally of fats and nitrogenous substances, and is
hence of great service to the plant. It ajipears in the plant in
its earliest stages of development, and is deposited, like other reserve-
materials, independently of the action of light and of the presence of
chlorophyll. When the plants are etiolated by the removal of light,
they lose their latex, just as, under similar circumstances, the starch
stored up as reserve-material also disappears. The yellow rays of
light favour the production of latex, just as they do the formation of
starch or oil in the chlorophyll-grains. When air is excluded under
a high temperature, the phenomena of etiolation are exhibited in the
diminution both of tlu; latex and of the protoplasmic reserve-materials.
With access of air and a lower temperature, the amount of i)roto2)hism
increases, as also, under similar conditions, does the reserve-starch.
Difterent soils cause an increase or diminution of the latex, according
as they promote or retard the development of the plant.

Rudimentary Coma in Godetia.f — While investigating the de-
velopment of the embryo-sac in the different genera of Onagracea),
Mr. J. M. Coulter's attention was attracted to certain hair-like pro-
jections which appeared upon the forming ovule of Godctia (probably
G. grandijiora). A careful examination showed them to be identical
in structure with the forming hairs in the coma of Epili>lnHm. They
occurred almost exclusively at the chalazal end, one or two scattered

• ' Mnii. Acad. Sci. Lyrm,' xxiii. (1878-79) p. 3G1. Sec ' Bot. Contialbl.,' i.
(1880)1). 747.

t 'Hot. Gazette' (hi<liiiim), v. (18S0) p. 7."). Sie ' Natur.,' xxii. (1880) p. 595.

982 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ones being detected farther down upon the raphe. A study of the
development of the coma of Epilohium shows that the first indication
of it is a tuberculated appearance of the chalazal end. Presently
these tubercles push out into elongating nucleated cells, which
eventually develop into the long hairs of the coma. Now Godetia
permanently retains this tuberculated margin at the upper end, but
does not usually develop its coma any further. In the cases examined,
however, the forming ovules (either in reminiscence or prophecy)
stretched out their tubercles into incipient hairs. Tracing these
ovules in their subsequent development, it was found that these hairs
gradually disappeared until, when the ovules had become anatropous,
there was no indication of them.

As Godetia has been merged into CEnothera, many species of the
latter were examined to see if any such thing occurred in them ;
but no trace of such growth was detected. This would seem to
indicate that if Godetia be not entitled to generic rank, it is at least
that part of CEnothera which approaches Epilohium. A discrepancy
must, however, be noticed here. In Epilohium the hairs of the coma
do not begin to form until the ovule has become completely anatro-
pous ; but in the Godetia observed the incipient coma had all disap-
peared by the time the ovule had become anatropous, beginning to
form before the nucleus is half covered by the coats. These hairs
appeared in gi-eatest size and abundance when the axis of the ovule
was at right angles to its anatropous position.

Nectariferous Trichomes of Melampyrum.*— On the under side
of the bracts of Melampyrum nemorosum and arvense are minute scales,
in the former case colourless, in the latter a dark violet, which
E. Eathay has determined to be nectariferous glands, freely visited by
ants ; and similar organs occur also in other species of Melampyrum.
The secretion contains at least 2 per cent, of sugar, which does not
reduce copper-oxide in the cold. This secretion is rapidly replaced
if removed from the scales. In addition to ants, the secretion is
eagerly devoured by other hymenopterous insects, especially humble-
bees. The gland itself consists, in the species M. arvense, nemorosum,
pratense, and hnrhatum, of a short pedicel-cell and a circular peltate
disk, composed of a single layer of prismatic cells. They belong to
the structures called by de Bary epidermal glands ; since they excrete
a fluid on the upper side of the disk between the cuticle and the cell-
wall of the prismatic cells, which is freed by the rupture of the cuticle.

With regard to physiological function, the author is unable to
agree either with the explanation of Kerner of the purpose of extra-
floral nectaries, that they attract insects which would otherwise attack
the flowers and other essential organs, or with that of Delpino and Belt,
that they attract insects which are hostile to and destroy those that are
injurious to the plant, but does not offer any explanation of his own.

Threads of Protoplasm on Glandular Hairs of Silphium.t—
According to Dr. F. Ludwig, these hairs on the inner side of the
leaf of Silphium perfoliatum have been found to bear oscillating
* 'SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,' Ixxsi. (1880) p. 55.
t 'Kosmos,' vii. (1880) p. 47.

INVERTEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 983

threads of protoplasm, which may be extended to a greater or less
distance, or may be retracted, and resemble in all points those of
Dipsacus. The leaves of Silphium are also united into a kind of cup
as in Dipsacus, and probably serve both as a reservoir of water to
protect them against the attacks of insects and mollusca, and as a trap
to catch insects for the sake of the nutriment derived from their bodies.
It is suggested that the occurrence of these threads in connection with
the leaf-cups in the two genera probably shows a certain relationship
between tlie two parts, and the former one probably utilized for the
absorption of nitrogenous substances from the water, as supposed by
Darwin to be the case. The glands of Silphium differ from those of
Dipsacus in their multicellular stalk, unicellular elliptical head,
smaller size, and greater numbers.

Resin-passages in the Coniferae.* — As a sequel to previous
investigations of the subject,t T. F. Hanausek has now examined the
resin-passages in the cone-scales of Pinus Laricio, Abies pectinata, and
A. Larix, with the following results.

Tlie epithelium of the resin-passages is neither lignified nor
suberized, but consists of cellulose only, with the exception of that of
Biota and Abies pectinata, which undergoes a transformation resembling
suberization. In the cone-scales of conifers there are both schizo-
genous and lysigenous resin-receptacles, the former in the bast-fibre-
zone, the latter abundantly in the fundamental tissue. The position
of the resin-passages appears often to depend on the position and
development of the vascular bundles, and to be associated with their
formation.

The author distinguishes four kinds of resin-formation : — (1) The
resin may be formed as a true secretion in true secretive organs. (2)
It may arise from a deliquescence of the outer walls of particular cells
(schizogenous resin-passages). (3) From metamorphosis of the entire
cell-wall and cell-contents (lysigenous and pathological resin-pas-
sages). (4) By the transformation of certain contents ; this frequently
occasioning an increase of the resin formed in the 2nd and 3rd modes.

In the cones of Finns and Biota, which remain green for so long a
time, the resin, which frequently escapes and flows over the outside of
tlie scales, must serve as a protection against the attacks of birds ;
when the scales become woody and nearly free from resin, the seeds
arc already ripe, and no protection is necessary.

Influence of Light on the Transpiration of Plants.^— The re-
sults of the experimental researches of M. 11. Comes a"ree entirely
with the facts already obtained on physical principles, and he sums
them up in the following projjositions § : —

1. The emission of aqueous vapour which takes place in plants is
subject not only to the action of the physical agents which influence

* ' JB. N. Oestr. Laiidca-olKTical- u. Ilandelsch. in Krciiis,' xvii. (1880) Seo
' Bot. Cuntrulbl.,' i. (ISSO) p. TTC

t Sec this Joiiriiiil, miti-, |>. 1 1:!.

X '(Joinptcs ReiitluH,' xci. (18.S0) p. 335.

§ Tho dctiiilH of tlie txpcriiiu'iits, tlio nunicrit-al flntii, plutea, &c., will bo
published iu ' Atti U. Accad. Liiicui ' (Mem.), vii. (1880).

984 EECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

ordinary evaporation from a free surface of water, but also to the
influence of light. Consequently, under similar conditions, a plant
transpires more under the action of light than in darkness.

2. The action exerted by light on the transpiration of plants
augments in proportion to its intensity ; consequently under similar
conditions transjiiration reaches its maximum shortly after noon.

3. Light favours transpiration only by that part which is absorbed
by the colouring substance of the organ ; therefore, under similar con-
ditions, the organ which is coloured with the greatest intensity
transpires more, and the transpiration is most active in the part of the
spectrum where the light is most absorbed.

4. The luminous rays which are absorbed by the colouring sub-
stance of an organ alone favour the transpiration of the organ ; there-
fore, under similar conditions, the transpiration of a coloured organ
will attain its minimum under the influence of light of the same colour
as the organ, and its maximum under the influence of the comple-
mentary colour,

Heliotropism.* — In a preliminary account of a recent series of
observations on heliotropic phenomena, J. Wiesner gives the following
as some of the more important points arrived at.

In very strong light, even rays which have no heliotropic proper-
ties, possess under certain circumstances the property of strongly
retarding growth. The prevalent theory that only rays belonging to
the more refrangible half of the spectrum have the power of inducing
heliotropism and hindrance to growth must be modified, since the
ultra-red, red, orange, and even yellow rays, possess this jiroperty
under certain conditions. The liability to heliotropism is always the
result of the relatively greater extensibility of the cell-wall on the
shaded side of the organ ; but the curvature itself is only completed
by turgidity. Positive heliotropism and negative geotropism act in
opposition to one another in erect organs ; in vertical organs which
grow downwards the heliotropic and geotropic effects co-operate.
Whenever heliotropism depends on definite mechanical processes
which take place in the cells, it must be regarded as a phenomenon
of adaptation, and may commence even in organs which have not
themselves any reference to light in their functions. The author
believes the physiological purpose of heliotropism to be to place in
the most favourable intensity of light those flowers which are de-
pendent on insect-fertilization. In those plants where heliotropism
would be injurious, no tendency is found towards heliotropic curva-
ture.

Formation of Chlorophyll in the Dark.f — M. d'Arbaumont has
followed out the investigations of M. Flahault | respecting the
apparent exceptional formation of chloroj^hyll without access of light.
The case to which he has paid especial attention is that of the appear-
ance of chlorophyll-grains in the internal tissue of the ripe fruit of the

* ' SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien,' Ixxxi. (1880) p. 7.
t ' Bull. Soc. Bot. France,' xxvii. (18S0) p. 89.
J See this Journal, ante, p. 298.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 985

pumpkin (^Cucurhita maxima). They were invariably found in tlie
large cells with thin walls near the carpellary furrows, or near the
seeds in the variety known as " Potiron jaune gros."

M. d'Ai'baumont is of opinion that neither of M. Flahault's
hypotheses — that the grains are formed in a young and semi-trans-
parent condition of the tissue or at the moment of exjjosure — will
apply in the present case ; but that they are actually formed in the
dark. In support of this view he cites the fact that he has observed
in this situation grains of chlorophyll in an active and not in a dor-
mant state, viz. actually in various stages of division, or evidently
only just formed in cells which have quite recently divided. He
further observed that the cells containing chlorophyll were always
situated either in contact with or in close proximity to reservoirs of
nutrient substances, and especially to deposits of starch. The grains
of chlorojihyll are dissolved in two ways, centrifugally or centri-
petally, i. e. either advancing from the centre towards the periphery,
or the reverse.

Chlorophyll in the Leaves of the Canada Vine.* — According to
Schnetzler, the red leaves of the Canada vine (Ampelopsis hederacea)
still contain chlorojihyll, which is, however, concealed by a red sub-
stance soluble in alcohol. Chlorophyllin can be separated from it by
means of ether, but is present in very small quantities in jjroportiou
to tlie red pigment. This latter is probably a derivative of chloro-
phyll, but not identical with it. If potassa is added to the red alco-
holic solution, it becomes of a beautiful green colour, but is not
fluorescent, by which it is distinguishable from true chlorophyll.

Absorption of Water by the Leaves of Bulbous Plants.f — From
experiments on this subject made on a hyacinth deprived of its dry
tunicated coats, the leaves of which, but not the bulb, were plunged
in water, M. Mer deduces the following conclusions : —

The leaves of bulbous plants absorb the water in which they are
immersed, so as to bring them to the condition maintained by the
bulb in free air. The absorption goes on without there being any need
first to diminish their turgidity, simply in consequence of the flow of
water caused by the transpiration of the bulb. The current from
below upwards (the plant being reversed) is not so strong as it would
be in the ojjposite <lirection when the leaves are slightly withered.
The renewal of turgidity is therefore due in part to the water derived
from the bulb ; it is only from this source that the leaves draw it
when the experiment is made under a bell-glass, and when the bulb
is still fresh. Tliey do not absorb the external moisture when other-
wise sufficiently sup])lied'\vith water.

Disengagement of Carbonic Acid from the Roots of Plants.^ —
In pursuance of his former investigation of this subject, us previously

• ' Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat.,' xvi. (1880) p. 701. Sec ' Bot. Cciitralbl.,' i.
(1880) p. <;5.").

t ' Bull. Soc. Bot. Franco.' xx\i. (1870) xli.-iv.
X ll.i.l., xxvii. (1880) p. XVS.

986 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

reported,* M. Cauvet now adds the following as definite conclu-
sions : —

1. The roots of plants are constantly disengaging carbonic acid.

2. This exhalation is less active by night than by day.

3. The disengagement increases at sunrise, diminislies towards
the middle of the day, and increases again in the evening.

4. The exhalation is, in proportion, more considerable during any
one diurnal period than during the night.

5. The activity of the roots is hence less by night than by day, at
least as respects their respiration.

6. If the root absorbs carbonic acid from the soil, it is possibly
only that which has served for the dissolution of the insoluble salts,
carbonates, phosphates, &c., necessary to the life of the plant.

Digestive Principles of Plants.f — Dr. Lawson Tait has recently
investigated afresh the digestive principles of plants. While he has
obtained complete proof of a digestive process in Ceplialotus, Nepenthes,
Dioncea, and the Droseracese, he entirely failed with Sarracenia and
Darlingtonia. The fluid separated Irom Drosera hinata he found to
contain two substances, to which he gives the names " droserin " and
" azerin."

Dr. Tait confirms Sir J. D. Hooker's statement that the fluid
removed from the living pitcher of Nepenthes into a glass vessel does
not digest. A series of experiments led him to the conclusion that
the acid must resemble lactic acid, at least in its properties. The
glands in the pitchers of Nepenthes he states to be quite analogous to
the peptic follicles of the human stomach ; and when the process of
digestion is conducted with albumen, the products are exactly the
same as when pepsine is employed. The results give the same reac-
tions with reagents, especially the characteristic violet with oxide of
copper and potash, and there can be no doubt that they are peptones.

Nutrition of the Drosera.| — Contrary to the views of Reess and
Darwin, E. Regel finds that the plants thrive best when not treated
with animal food, and is of opinion that their sustenance is properly
derived through the roots.

Botanical Micro-Chemistry.§ — In a Danish work on this subject,
V. A. Poulsen gives a resume of the most important micro-chemical
reagents, and the modes of investigation employed in micro-chemistry.

The first section treats of the reagents. In each case the composi-
tion is given, and the cases in which each reagent should be emj^loyed,
and its characteristic reactions. The second section treats of vegetable
substances, and the methods of proving their presence by the aid of
micro-chemistry. Among the substances thus discussed are cellulose,

* See this Journal, ante, p. 665.

t ' Proc. Birming. Phil. Soc.,' i. (1880) pp. 125-39. See ' Nature,' xxii. (1880)
p. 521.

X 'Journ. Ohem. Soc.,' Abstr. xxxviii. (1880) p. 820; from 'Bied. Centr.,'
1880, p. 482.

§ Poulseu, V. A., ' Botanisk Mikrokemie,' Copenhagen, 1880 (Danish). See
' Bot. Zeit.,' xxxviii. (1880) p. .^26.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 987

lignin, suber, protein compounds, protoplasm, starch, sugar, oil, resin,
&c. ; tlie vegetable salts, colouring substances, &c.

Red Pigment of the Flowers of the Peony.* — J. B. Scbnetzler
has examined the red colouring-matter of the peony, and finds that
the red alcoholic solution assumes, on evaporation in the air, a bea;i-
tiful amaranth-red colour. The dry residue is of the same colour,
even under tlie influence of direct sunlight. Calcium oxalate changes
the purple-red colour of the alcoholic solution into a pure fiery red.
If a very dilute solution of calcium carbonate is carefully poured, in
small quantities, on to the red alcoholic solution, the colour changes
successively into purple, purple-violet, blue, green, and yellow. The
green colour has a red tinge in transmitted sunlight. When exposed
to light, the green colour passes into yellow ; and this yellow colour
is not changed by acid or alkaline reagents ; while the green colour is
changed back by acid reagents into red.

The reagents employed in these experiments are substances which
occur abundantly in the living plant, or, like calcium carbonate, are
taken up by it. If a solution of ferro-ferrid-oxide sulphate is added
to the dilute red alcoholic solution, a blackish-blue precipitate is pro-
duced, showing the jiresence of a substance belonging to the tannin-
group. This occurs also as an accompaniment of the red pigment of
the rose and Hibes sanguineum, and appears to have some genetic
connection with these colouring-matters.

More than a hundred red, violet, and blue flowers gave similar
results when treated with the same reagents. In all there is a
chromogen which is soluble in alcohol, and is coloured red by acid,
purple-red, violet, blue, green, or yellow by alkaline reagents.

The Cell as an Element. — See M. P. Van Tieghem's paper on
' Social Bacteria,' infra, Fungi.

B. CRYPTOGAMIA.

Cryptogamia Vascularia.

Development of the Sporang-ium in Vascular Cryptogams.f —
K. Goebel has closely investigated the comparative history of develop-
ment of the sporangium in vascular cryptogams, with a view of show-
ing the close analogy displayed to tliut of the pollen-sacs and ovules
(microsporangia and macrosporangia) of flowering plants. Previous
observers have, for the most part, stated that the spores of vascular
cryptogams result from a sporogenons tissue formed by irregular cell-
division within the sporangium. The present writer asserts, on the
other hand, that in vascular cryptogams, as in phanerogams, the spore-
forming tissue can always be traced back to a single cell, or a row or
layer of cells, which can, at a very early period, be distinguished, by
the nature of its contents, from the remaining cellular tissue ; and
that tlie sporogenons tissue results from the perfectly regular division
of this primary cell, row, or layer of cells, to which Goebel applies
the term arrhespore.

* ' Hot. Contnilbl.,' i. (1880) p. 682.

t ' Bot. Zeit.,' xxxviii. (1880) pp. 545-52, ^^€A-7l.

988 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

In the typical FilicineaB, the course of development of the sporan-
gium is well known. A single epidermal cell of the leaf swells out,
forming the mother-cell of the sporangium, within which a pedicel-
cell is tirst of all separated by a septum from the mother-cell of the
capsule. Tliis last then divides into four parietal and one central
cell, the latter being the archespore, distinguished by the largo
amount of protoplasm that it contains, from which the spore-forming
tissue is developed. The archespore then forms two layers of so-called
" mantle-cells," surrounding the central cell, and corresponding to
the " tapcten-cells " in the pollen-sac of phanerogams. The arche-
spore is, therefore, in the typical FilicineiB, a Jiypodermal cell.

In the Ophioglossacete, the process is somewhat different, the
sporangium originating not from a single cell, but from a mass of
cells. The young sporangia of ButrycMum Lunaria are masses of
cells forming a hemispherical protuberance. Notwithstanding the
contrary statement of Eussow, the archespore from which the sporo-
genous tissue is developed is here also, as in typical ferns, a single
cell, although occupying a different position. The archespore is here
the terminal cell of the axial row which lies beneath the still uni-
lamellar epidermis, and is distinguished from the adjacent cells by
its abundant protoplasm, soon also surpassing them in size. The
mantle-cells are formed by divisions in the epidermal cell which lies
immediately above the arcliespore. The archespore at the same time
divides into four daughter-cells.

The development of the sporangia of the Equisetacese closely
resembles tliat of Botrychium. The archespore is here also the
terminal cell of a hypodermal row, formed on the under side of the
sporangiojjhore, and is originally unicellular ; the sporogenous tissue
resulting from its division. In specially vigorous sporangia it is
possible that it may occasionally be bicellular, and it at all events
divides longitudinally at a very early period into two cells. The
mantle-cells are formed in the same way as in Botrychium, but are not
so sharply defined.

Closely resembling the processes above described is that in Lyco-
podium (Selago). The sporangium arises at the base of the leaf, and
attains its subsequent axillary position by displacement ; it originates
from a few cells. The centre one of these grows the most vigorously,
and subsequently gives rise to the archespore. As in Botrychium and
Equisetum, the archespore, distinguished by its size, abundant proto-
plasm, and the power of swelling of its cell- wall, is the teiminal cell
of an axial row lying beneath the wall of the young sporangium. In
L. annotinum and other species the processes appear to be the same.

In Isoetes, the origin of the sporangium is a group of cells at the
base of the leaf. In its earliest stage the archespore, both of the
macrosporangium and the microsporangium, is here not a single cell,
but is composed of a layer of cells. A difference then sets in between
the development of the microsporangia and macrosporangia. In the
former the archespore- cells elongate in a direction vertical to the
surface, and divide by septa. No difference is yet discernible
between the sterile and fertile cells ; but subsequently some rows

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 989

of cells are arrested in their growth, lose their abundant protoplasm,
and divide only into elongated tubular cells. These are the sterile
cells or trabeculjB. The sporogenous cells, continuing to grow and
retaining their protoplasm, divide only by transverse se^^ta. In the
macrosporangium the fertile cells of the archespore undergo no
further divisions than those which result in the formation of the
mantle-cells.

A close analogy may be drawn between the development of the
macrospore of Isoetes and that of the embryo-sac of jihanerogams,
the chief difference being that the mother-cells are, in the former case,
numerous, while in the Litter case there is usually only one. In the
Coniferae the mother-cells of the embryo-sac (archespore) originate
from the hypodermal layer, and their depression in the interior of the
macrosporangium corresjjonds to that in Isoetes. In both cases the
embryo-sac consumes the surrounding tissue. Occasionally, in gymno-
sperms, there is more than one embryo-sac mother-cell ; but they are
not then, as in Isoetes, separated by a sterile tissue (the trabecul£e).
In angiosperras and in Ephedra, the archespore has been shown, by
Warming and Strasburger respectively, to consist of a layer of cells,
as in Isoetes. A similar comparison may be drawn between the deve-
lopment of the microsporangium of Isoetes and that of the pollen-sac
of phanerogams.

In the Bryineae and Sphagnace^ the archespore consists of a layer
of cells ; and this is also the case in certain Hepaticfe, certainly in
the Anthoceroteaj ; while, in Biccia, there is no separation into a sterile
part of the capsule and an archespore.

Muscineae.
Structure of the Stem of Mosses.*— M. I'Abbe Hy has carefully
studied the structure of tlie stem of mosses belonging to the family
Polytrichaceae, especially of the species Atnchum iindulatum and Poly-
trichum commune. The following is a summary of the most important
results : —

1. The anatomical structure of the stem in this family is more
complex than has hitherto been supposed, and includes six well-
marked different kinds of tissue. One of these, termed by Schimpcr
the woody tissue, is itself made up of three characteristic regions.

2. The stem is not miifurm, nor reducible to a single type.
In one species, for example, Poli/trichtm commune, very important
differences of structure may be observed at different heights, which
may be arranged under tliree kinds, connected by intermediate forms.
Even the external configuration varies, from cylindrical to triangular
prismatic, and irregularly polygonal towards the summit. The dia-
meter increases progressively, from ^ mm. to 1] mm., that is, about iu
the proportion of 1-4.

3. A cortical investment, similar in appearance to that which has
long been known in the case of the Sphagnaceic, and of which somo
traces arc also ftnnul in the genus Philiniolis, exists also well developed
at the base of the stem of our indigenous Poli/lrichums, and even of

* 'Dull. Sof. Bot. Fmiicc,' xxvii. (ISSO) p. IOC.
VOL. III. 3 U

990 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Atrichum undulatum ; it generally consists of three or four layers
of cells.

4. This cortical tissue has nothing in common with that of Sphag-
num except its appearance and its physiological function ; regarded
from the point of development, it is entirely diflferent. It is interior
with respect to the epidermal layers, instead of exterior, as in the
Sphagnacefe.

5. The true epidermis, characterized by the presence of hairs,
exists with certainty only in the lowest and subterranean portion of
the axis. The absolutely glabrous aerial stem is probably destitute
of an epidermis properly so-called ; the zone distinguished under this
name by authors belongs in its origin to the fundamental tissue, from
which it differs in its narrow coloured cells. If the true epidermis
is continued upwards as far as the stolons, it is only on the dorsal
side of the scaly appendages, following two projecting lines bordering
the median nerve.

6. The multiplicity of bundles noticed by Sachs in PolytricJium
commune is to be observed only at the summit of the stems, and is not
peculiar to this species. These isolated bundles in the midst of the
fundamental parenchyma are not, as Sachs states, similar to the axial
bundle ; in addition to their never containing any medulla, they are,
in the Polytrichacese, more simple than this axial bundle ; while, on
the contrary, in Atrichum undulatum, they are remarkable for the
complication of their structure.

7. A ternary symmetry prevails in the general disposition of the
tissues, but this is strikingly regular only in the subterranean region ;
in proportion to the height on the axis it becomes more obscure, and
finally completely disappears.

Stomata of Marchantiacese.* — The stomata of Marchantiaceje
are, according to Leitgeb, of two kinds, simple and canaliculate. The
former, which occur in Sariteria, Grimaldia, Behoulia, Fegatella, and
Targionia, are epidermal pores, situated immediately above the air-
cavities. The latter kind, found in Marchantia and Preissia, appear
like canals excavated in the surface of the thallus, and opening into
the air-ca*vities ; they occur also in the fructification of all Marchan-
tiacea3.

The mode of formation of the canaliculate stomata resembles that
of the intercellular spaces in the Eicciea^. On the cells which con-
stitute the epidermal layer at the point of the surface which lies
immediately behind the apex, pit-like depressions are formed at the
angles of the cells, which subsequently assume the appearance of
canals penetrating the superficial layer of cells. From this layer
proceeds the whole of the dorsal tissue of the thallus, which is
penetrated by air-cavities, including the epidermis, and the mode of
growth of this portion of the thallus determines whether the canals
retain their original form or increase to large air-chambers, which
tlieu either remain open through their entire breadth or are covered
by a growth which advances jxtri passu with their development.
The pits are properly to be regarded as depressions of the surface,

* ' SB. k. Akad. Wiss. Wieu,' Jxxxi. (ISSO) p. 40.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 991

formed by particular portions of the epidermis becoming covered by
the more rapid growth of the adjoining parts. The process is, in
fact, the same as in the formation of the sexual organs. The author
is of opinion that the pores and canals are primary, the air-chambers
secondary formations, notwithstanding the occurrence of apparent
deviations, as in Marcliantia.

AVith respect to the filling up of the air-chambers, they may
remain altogether empty, as in Sauteria and Oxymitra. But more
frequently segmented rows of cells proceed both from the basal inner
wall and from the lateral walls, running towards the covering of the
air-chamber ; this occurs in Marcliantia, Preissia, Lunularia, and
Fegatella. Finally, as in liehoulia, rows of cells grow out into the
air-chamber from all the inner walls of the cells which bound it,
including the covering while in process of formation, thus dividing it
into a number of imj)erfect chambers.

Inflorescence of the Marchantiaceae.* — The inflorescence of the
MarchantiacciD takes the form of disks sessile upon the thallus or of
umbels elevated above it on a pedicel. The best-known examples are
the male and female inflorescences of the genera Marcliantia and
Preissia. It has long been held that these receptacles and their
pedicels must be regarded as metamorphosed foliar axes ; as is shown
by (1) the remarkable coincidence in structure of the dorsal side of
both male and female receptacles with that of the corresponding side
of the sterile part of the thallus ; (2) the altogether similar dorsi-
ventral development of the pedicels to that of the thallus ; (3) the
aerial layer and stomata which continue without interru])tion from
the thallus to tlie pedicels ; and (4) the ventral or radical channels of
the pedicel w'ith their scales, which must certainly be regarded as the
equivalent of the ventral side of a portion of the thallus.

In an exhaustive treatise on the subject, Leitgeb maintains that
the attempt to apply this explanation to all the remaining genera of
Marchantiacea) with the exception of Targionia, and to regard all male
and female receptacles as resulting from the transformation of a
branch, is certainly inadmissable as regards most male inflorescences,
and is justified only for a portion of the female.

Leitgeb maintains that tlie Marchantiaceae arc descended from
Riccia-likc forms, and that they and the Ricciea) belong without
doubt to one and the same series of development. The following are
the most important points relating to the develoiiment and position of
the reproductive organs of the Iticciea) : —

1. Both kinds of sexual organs have their origin immediately
behind the growing apex. Henco they invariably stand on the dorsal
side next the median line of the thallus, on the mid-rib, and are
developed in acropetal succession ; new organs never being formed
further from tlie apex tlian those already in existence.

2. The mother-cells of the sexual organs at first project like
papilla) al)ovo tlio surface ; in conseciucncc of the increase in thick-
ness of the thallus, they subsequently ajjpcar as if imbedded in the
tissue.

* Si;, k. Akad \Vi.-^s. Wini,' Ixxxi. (1880) | p. 12:5-13.

3 u 2

992 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

lu these points the RicciesB agree with the Marchantiaceaj. The
following relate to the variety in the development of the branches or
portions of the thallus which bear the sexual organs.

3. The sexual organs of some species are associated in more or
less sharply defined groups (inflorescences).

4. On their formation the growth of the apex is modified in
various ways.

The following are described by the author as the different types of
develoi)ment of the male and female inflorescences of the Marchan-
tiacece.

1. The sexual organs are scattered over the surface of the thallus;
apical growth does not appear to be modified by their production.
To this tyi^e belong the true Riccieas $ and 9 ; also Clevea (Sauteria)
$ ; apjjarently also BoscMa ^ .

2. The sexual organs are congregated in groups (inflorescences)
recurring on the same axis ; where receptacles occur, these are there-
fore purely dorsal stnactures : — Corsinia ^ and 9 j Pkigiochasma,
Fimhriaria, Hehoulia, Grimaldia, Sauteria (Peltolepis) $ ; with
formation of true female receptacles : — Plagiochasma, Clevea 9 .

3. The inflorescences are also dorsal structures, but are placed at
the apex of an unbranched shoot : — Duvcdlia, Lunularia ^ ; Targionia,
Cyathodium $ and 9 j with formation of a true female receptacle,
from the enclosing of the apex of the axis : — Duvcdlia, Heboulia,
Fimhriaria, Grimaldia.

4. The inflorescences correspoud to an entire branch-system :
Lunularia 9 ; Fegatella ^ ; Marcliantia and Preissia ^ and 9 •

The following is the course of develoi^ment of the sexual organs in
the Marchantiacese : — At first distributed over the surface of the
thallus, they subsequently arise in groups, and become combined into
inflorescences, which, having at first a dorsal position, are constantly
pushed further back towards the apex of the axis, and enclose it in
their growth, and thus dorsal inflorescences are converted into terminal.
In those genera which dichotomize freely, the formation of the in-
florescence commences at the moment of branching ; and thus the
entire branch-system aids in the formation of compound inflorescences.

In conclusion, the author states that the same course of develop-
ment of the inflorescences may also be traced in the Jungermanniaccfe ;
and that it is highly probable that the same is true also of the Musci,
notwithstanding apparent deviations.

New Hepaticae.* — The following new and critical species of
Hepaticfe are described by Limj^richt : — Alicularia Brcidleri, Sarco-
scyphus confertus, S. commutatus, and Jungermannia decolorans.

Fungi.

Observations on Uredinese and Ustilaginese.t — G. Winter con-
tributes the following observations to our knowledge of the life-
history of some fungi belonging to these two families.

* 'JB. Schef. Ges. f. vuteil. Cultm-,' Iviii. See ' Bot. Ceutralbl.,' i. (ISSO)
p. 806.

- 1 'Hedwiyia,' xis. (18S0) p. 105.

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOOAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 993

The question has been hitherto in debate whether Phragmidlum
Las an ajciclio-form. Fuckel states distinctly that no fecidio-form is
kno\vn, but spermogonia ; while Schroter describes the secidio-
frnctification as similar to the uredospores ; but without paraphyses.
The author considers it possible, from his observations, that Cceoma
miniatum and its allies, which are found abundantly on Buhus and
other rosaceous genera, are the hitherto undiscovered aecidio-form of
Phraginidium.

The a3cidio-form of both species of Puccinia which are parasitic
on Caltlia are now known, and are developed on the same hosts. The
following is their diagnosis : — Puccinia Caltlice Link. iEcidium
maculas in foliorum pagina sujieriore luteas, dein fuseas, irregulariter
rotundas vel elongatas, interdum confluentcs, in pagina inferioro
tuborculatas, 1-5 mm. longas formans. Ad petiolura calla elongata,
ca. G mm. Lmga adsunt. Pscudoperidia irregulariter vel rarius
concentrice disposita, patellajformia, parum emersa, marginc lato
revoluto multum inciso albcscente praidita. Pseudoperidiorum cellulfe
polygoniaa rotundatai v. clongatfe, hyalinae, niembrana crassa, verru-
cosa, 22-35 /x diam. usque 45 rarius 60/ilongfe. Sporfe subrotundse,
plenimque polygonige, aurantiaca3, verruculosa3, 22-30 /x diam. — Puc-
cinia Zopfii Winter. iEcidium ab antecedente margine pseudo-
peridiorum parum iuciso, laciniis latis ca. 4-5 prasdito ; ad pctiolum
calla usque 15 mm. longa, sfepc confluentia adsunt.

The author also records the detection of the aecidinm on Mul-
gedium alinnum which belongs to Puccinia PrenantJiis, and of a
Puccinia on Senecio cordatus apparently identical with the P. con-
gJomeraia on Homogyne alpina.

The same paper contains also other interesting observations on
particular species belonging to this group.

Uredo viticida.* — For about the last ten years the vineyards of
Yonno have been devastated by a disease, somewhat similar to that
produced by the oidium, which as completely destroys tho grape as
docs the phylloxera ; but tho distribution of the disease is much more
limited. M. Daille has examined all the parts of the plant attacked,
and establishes as tho cause of the disease a fungus, Urcdo viticida,
mainly distinguished from oidium by its spherical spores, and
possessing a great similarity to the mildew of cereal crops.

Development of the Spermogonia of .fficidiomycetes-t— An ex-
amination by E. Iviithay of the spermogonia of a considerable number
of TEcidiomycetes — Puccinia Anemones, ohtcgens, Falcariir, Tragopo-
gonis, graminis, straminifi, and comnata, Gymnnspnrangium fuscum,
conicu7n, and clavaria^fnrtnc, Uromyccs acutellatiis, and JEcidium Magcl-
haenicum and CIcmatiilis — shows that in almost all cases they contain
a larger or smaller quantity of a substance which has tho property of

• • Journ. Pliarm, ct Cliiin.,' ii. (1880) p. 32. Seo ' Bot. Coiitralbl.,' i. (1880)
p. 712.

t *Vorpel. k. Aknd. Wiss. Wien ; Sitz. mftth.-nnturw. CI..' June 10, mso.
Bee * Bot. Centralhl.,' i. (1S«0) p. flfil.

994 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

reducing, with the assistance of heat, Fehling's reagent. Since the
contents of the spermogonia of Gymnosporangium fusciim and conicum,
which contain the greatest quantity of this substance, have a strong
sweet taste, Eathay believes it to be sugar.

The part of the host where the sugar-producing spermogonia of
the iEcidiomycetes are produced, is distinguished for a considerable
distance around. Thus, in the case of the ^cidiomycetes with mono-
carpous mycelium, the small part of the host which is possessed
by the mycelium, and on which the comparatively few spermogonia
make their appearance, is marked by a remarkably bright yellow,
orange, or red colour. And in the case of those with pleocarpons
mycelium, in which an entire branch of the host is infected, and the
spermogonia are numerous, breaking out either on all the organs of
the infected branch or only on the leaves, these infected branches are
doubly distinguished from the rest ; firstly, by their jieculiar appear-
ance, due either to the pale colour of their green parts, and the unusual
form of their leaves (like the shoots of Cirsium arvense attacked by
Puccinia ohtegens), or especially to their abnormally abundant branch-
ing and leafiness (like the " witch-broom " of the berberry caused by
JEcidium Magelhaenicum), or to the suppression of the flowers (like
the well-known sterile branches of Euphorbia cyparissias attacked by
Uromyces scutcllatus), and secondly by the sweet odour springing from
the spermogonia, as occurs in branches affected by Puccinia Anemones,
ohtegens, Falcarice, and Tragopogonis, Uromyces scutellatus, and ^cidium
Magelhaenicum. When the spermogonia have ceased to produce sugar,
their colour changes.

In damp or stormy weather, the contents of the spermogonia
escape from their mouths in the form of small drops wbich adhere to
the paraphyses ; and these are eagerly sought for and consumed by
various insects, such as ants and some Coleoptera and Diptera which
are capable of taking up honey of this description, such as the honey-
dew formed by aphides, the nectar of extrafloral nectaries, the honey-
dew of ergot, &c.

The author draws a comparison between the phenomena connected
with these male organs of the ^cidiomycetes, and the well-known
ones associated with the flowers of flowering plants.

Infection of Puccinia Malvacearum.* — By experiments carried
on in the botanic garden at Giessen, Dr. Ihne confirms the previous
statements of Cornu and Kellermann that this fungus can be pro-
pagated by direct infection on leaves of the same plant as that from
which it was obtained, or of some other malvaceous species. The
only plant on which the parasite made its appearance this year at
Giessen was the hollyhock {Althaea rosea). From infected leaves it
was directly conveyed by artificial contact to others on hitherto sound
plants, and it spread also by spontaneous infection. Another plant
belonging to the natural order Malvaceae, Kitaihelia vitifolia, was also
infected in the same way ; but similar experiments on Lavatera
trimestris were unsuccessful.

* 'Hedwigia,' xix. (1880) pp. 137-8.

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

995

Alternation of Generations in Gymnosporangium.* — Oersted lias
already sliowu that the sporidia of Podisoma sahince, parasitic on
Juniperus sabina, sown on Pijrus communis, give rise to Boestelia can-
cellata ; those from Podisoma jimiiyerinum, parasitic on Juniperus com-
munis, to Boestelia cornuta when sown on Sorbus aucuparia ; and those
of Podisoma clavariceforme, parasitic on J. communis, to Boestelia
lacerata when sown on Crakegus oxyacantha, and to B. penicillata on
Pyrus Malus (this last is, however, believed by the present writer to
be an error).

A long scries of experiments, conducted by Dr. E. Rathay, have
led him to the conclusion that: — 1. The Podisoma sabincB on Juniperus
sabina, and the Boestelia cancellata on Pyrus communis, belong to the
same species. 2. Tlie Boestelia cornuta on Sorbus aucuparia belongs
to the Podisoma juniperinum on JunijJerus communis ; and that, contrary
to expectation, to the same teleuto-form belong also the Boestelia
penicillata on Pyrus 3Ialus and Sorbus Aria, and the Boestelia on
Cydonia vulgaris. 3. The Podisoma clavariceforme on Juniperus com-
munis, the Boestelia lacerata on Cratcegus oxyacantha and monogyna,
and a distinct Boestelia found by the writer on Pyrus communis, and
another on Sorbus torminalis, all belong to the same species. 4. No
result followed from sowing the sporidia of Podisoma sabince on
Mespilus germanica, Cratcegus oxyacantha, G. monogyna, Pyrus Malus,
Sorbus Aria, or S. torminalis ; or those of P. juniperinum on Mespilus
germanica, Cratcegus oxyacantha, C. monogyna, Sorbus domestiea, or
S. torminalis ; or those of P. clavariceforme on Mespilus germanica,
Pyrus Malus, Sorbus domestiea, or S. Aria.

In order to simplify the nomenclature, Oersted united these series
of teleuto-forms and fecidio-forms into the genus Gymnosporangium ;
and to the three species occurring in Denmark he gave the names
G. fuscum, conicum, and clavariceforme, corresponding to the teleuto-
forms Podisoma sabince, juniperinum, and clavariceforme.

E. Eathay states that the teleutospores of P. clavariceforme are
mature earlier than those of P. sabince and juniperinum ; and that the
same is the case with regard to tlie maturity of the sperraogonia and
ajcidia of tlio corresponding aicidio-forms. He gives the following
table of all the species on which both forms of the three species have
at present been found to be parasitic : —

Hosts of Teleuto-form. Hosts op .^cidio-form.

GijTnnosporanguiin fuscitm I Juniperus sahini L.

DC, Oerst. |

Gymnosporangium conicum Juniperus communis L.

DC, Oerst.

Gymnos^pornntiium cinvn-
riivfurmc DC, Oerst.

Jnniprrnx communis L

Pyrw? communis L.

Sorbus aucuparia L.
Aronia rotuwlifolia Pcr.s.
Pyrus Malus Tj.
Sorbus Aria Crtz.
Cydonia vulgaris Pcr.s.

Cratwgus oxyacantha L.
Crata:g>is mono<jyiM Jac4].
Pyrus communis L.
Sorbus tonninalis Crtz.

* *Oestcrr. Dot. Zeitr^clir..' xxx. (1880) pp. 211-4.

996 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Conidial Apparatus of Pleurotus ostreatus.* — Specimens of this
fungus gathered in the woods of Meudon on Feb. 1st last, exhibited
the following peculiarities of structure.

The development of these specimens had taken place under
unfavourable conditions, in consequence of the severe cold of January,
which caused such an exuberant growth of the capiHary system that
the fungus, which ordinarily possesses only short hairs, and these
usually very few, on the pileus and the stipes, was entirely covered
with a dense white down.

The hairs which constituted this down were composed of two or
three cells with granular contents and witli a swelling at each articu-
lation. The hairs were ordinarily distinct ; but sometimes two or
three had coalesced either at the apex or at the point of contact of
two lateral walls, or finally by means of a kind of bridge.

The hairs on the centre of the pileus and on the stipes appeared
to be always sterile, while those on the edge of the pileus were shorter
and often sporiferous. These spores are ovoid, colourless, thin-walled,
and contain one or two vacuoles ; they are borne on a short sterigma.
Each hair bore one or two spores, but there was never more than one
attached to a single cell. The spore might be exactly terminal, or
near the summit, or altogether lateral.

The fertile basidia appeared to be less abundant than usual in
these specimens.

Ptychogaster albus, Cord., a Form of a Polyporus.f — This
fungus has been variously assigned to the Myxomycetes, Gastero-
mycetes, and Hymenomycetes ; and has been considered as a stage of
development of another fungus. T. Ludwig has now set the question
at rest by the discovery of a second mode of fructification.

On the entire under side or on free spots of it, it sometimes forms
PolyjJorus-tnhes, or the hyph^e display an evident tendency to collect
into tubes. Sections through the fungus do not bring out, even under
the Microscope, any diiference between this layer and the rest ; both
consist of similar hyphfe. The PoZ//porMS tubes are of moderate size
with angular or roundish mouth, where they have a few sharp teeth,
the extremities of hyphfe which project beyond the mouth.

On the spots inhabited by the Ptychogctster no other species of
Polyporus was found. Ludwig regards it therefore as an independent
and new species, most often propagated by conidia and but rarely by
the Po?//|>ori<s-fructification, and describes it under the name Polyporus
Ptycliog aster. The phenomenon is analogous to that in Fistulina
hepatica, in which De Seynes discovered a conidial generation, as did
Eidam and Van Tieghem in some species of Coprinus.

Synchytrium parasitic upon Dryas.| — Dr. F. Thonia,s records
the discovery, in the Tyrolean Dolomites, of a parasitic fungus
forming galls on the leaves of Dryas odopetala, which he identities

* ' Bull. Soc. Bot. France,' xxvii. (1880) p. 125.

t ' Zeitschr. fiir d. Ges. Natur,' 1880, p. 424. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880)
p. 865.

.% ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 703.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAM [A, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 997

with Synchytnum Myosotidis, Kuebn, distinguisliing it as the var.
Dryadis. The spherical, ovoid, or flask-shaped cells which conceal
the parasite resemble large golden-yellow or reddish-yellow glands
emerging above the epidermal layer ; they arc more abundant on the
upper than the under surface, often so closely packed as to form a
kind of incrustation ; they also occur on the leaf-stalks, stipules, and
sepals, less often on the flower-stalks. Each of these abnormally
swollen cells contains one, or less often two spores. The tissue of
the infected leaf undergoes the ordinary hypertrophy.

New Vine-disease.* — Under the name " Herbstbrenner " Dr.
Kfibler describes a disease of the vine which shows itself in the rapid
fall of the leaves, resulting from warm sunshine after a cold autumn
rain, causing some of the cells of the leaves to burst, and the fluid
contents to flow into the intercellular spacoSj and there decompose.
The products of decomposition give rise to a fungus which develops
with great rapidity into brown tufts on the upper surface of the leaf;
and entire vineyards lose their leaves in a few days. The fungus
consists of a white mycelium with fertile threads which bear bilocular
spores grouped in tufts. The author proposes for it the name Clado-
sporium autumnale.

With regard to O'idium Tuckeri and Sphaceloma ampelinum, Dr.
Kiibler considers that they are not the causes of the well-known vine-
diseases, but the result of unhealthy conditions of soil, climate, &c.

Pfau-Schellenberg disputes this last conclusion of Kiibler; but
confirms his observations with regard to the Cladosporium autumnale.

Clover-disease in Sweden.f — A very destructive disease first made
its appearance on the clover-crops in Hesse in 1857, since spreading
into Denmark and Sweden. Its histoi-y and cause have been closely
investigated by J. Eriksson, who attributes it, as previous observers
have done, to the ravages of a parasitic fungus. He does not, how-
ever, agree with H. Hoflhiann, in identifying the parasite with Peziza
cihoroides Fr., from which it diti'ers both in the time of year at which
it appears, and in other respects. The writer proposes for it the name
Peziza {Sdcrotinia) trifdUoruiu, and considers it nearly allied to S.
Jwmocarjia Karst. The form in which the fungus attacks the clover
is that of a sclerotium ; but its propagation the writer considers duo
to hyjjhaj which become attached to the clover-seeds.

Salmon Disease.t — The subject of the salmon disease still occupies
the attention of the Fishery Commissioners, and a jiaper on the
subject has been read at the Dumfriesshire Natural Histt)ry Society,
in which it is maintained that tho disease is aggravated, if not caused,
by the presence of a vast number of Bacteria in the flesh of tho
diseased spots.

Mr. Eutlicrford writes : — " Sccticms of tho muscle, when placed
under tho Microscope, wore seen to be literally one mass of life ; that

* ' Arch. Sci. i)liy.s. et n;it. Goiiove,' 1879, p. loG. Soo ' Bot. Contralbl.,' i.
(1S80) p. 2'.J8.

t ' K. Svcnsk. Laiultbr. Akad. Hiindl. och Tiddskr.,' 1880. Sco ' Bot.
Centmlbl.,' i. (1880) p. 2'.»(1.

X '(jirrvilUa," ix. (1880) pp. 0-10.

998 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

life being a species of Bacteria. They are small discoid-looking
bodies, which in this case I find imbedded in, and moving amongst,
the striated muscle-fibre of the fish, and when, by pressure or other-
wise, they are forced into the surrounding fluid, they have a power of
motion, moving mostly in a sort of circular direction. In some fish that
I have examined, I observed that the muscle was almost detached from
the strong fibro-muscle layer of the skin, and the muscle fibres of that
layer were not adhering together as in their natural state, and could
be separated from each other like threads by the needle. Whether
that diseased condition of that part of the skin was caused by the
muscle immediately below it, or by the fungus on the surface, I am
not in a position to say." Afterwards he says : — " The disease was
located in the muscle of the fish, and I also have some idea that it
will be found to commence in the blood, caused either by the food
they eat, or by some deleterious solution in the water which passes
through the gills ; and that the unhealthy decaying fluid or matter
which will naturally pass off from those Bacteria, and exude through
the pores of the skin, forms a healthy and proper nidus for the ger-
mination of the zoospores of the fungus, which must be in those affected
rivers in myriads."

It would be some consolation to the mycologist if, after all, he
could feel convinced that this fatal salmon disease was not primarily
caused by the Saprolegyiia ; but Dr. M. C. Cooke considers that
" there are very grave doubts whether these Bacteria are not more
probably the result of a certain disintegration of the substance of the
flesh caused by the mycelium of the Sajprolegnia, than a preliminary
depravity of the flesh inducing the subsequent development of the
fungus. However much we may dislike the conclusion that a fungus
is the principal cause of so much mischief, I fear that we must accept
the force of evidence which goes to show that the Saprolegnia appears
to be the great destructive agent in this disease. It may be true, and
undoubtedly is, that the constitution of the fish is in a low condition,
that it is debilitated, and powerless to resist the fungoid attacks ; and
that this condition may be the result of various secondary causes ;
but the theory that Bacteria in the fish is the primary cause, though
it may be a new suggestion, can scarcely be accepted as a true one.
The coincidence should be borne in mind, even if it is no more than
a coincidence, that in all the great instances of devastating fungal
diseases, there has been an undoubtedly weakened constitution in the
subject, caused by over-cultivation, and in-breeding, preliminary to
the attacks. Such was the case with the silkworm, and it fell a prey
to ' muscardine ' ; in the potato, and it succumbed to the Peronospora ;
in the vine, and it became the victim to Oidium. May we not add
also, in the salmon, ere it was devastated by the Saprolegnia ? and it
may yet be to the onion in Europe, and the poppy in India, unless
the threatened misfortune should be averted."

Biology of the Schizomycetes.* — H. v. Boehlendorff has applied
Bucholtz's method of investigating the life-history of the Schizomy-

* Bnehlendoi-ff, H. v., ' Ein Beitrag zur Biologie einiger Scliizomyceten.
Inaug.-Dissert.' Dorpat, 1880. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 692.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 999

cetes, especially to the albumen-bacteria. The luitrient fluid employed
was hard-boiled white of egg pounded in a mortar and then boiled
for an hour. The milky fluid thus obtained was preserved free from
bacteria for weeks by a carbol-wad. In order to obtain the bacteria,
he allowed a small, clean, strongly-heated glass, into which a small
quantity of the fluid had been poured, to stand exposed. In the
space of twenty-four houi's, numerous rods had made their appearance
in it ; the sulphuretted hydrogen reaction set up from five to eight
days later. The progressive development of the bacteria was
observed partly in the decoction of albumen placed in a hatching-
oven, partly in solutions of albumen infected with fresh bacteria, and
protected by a wad-stopper, also placed in the hatching-oven.

On the first day there were seen only small motile spherules and
rods ; on the following days the rods had increased in size, the
spherules had disappeared. The rods were partly free and motile,
partly collected into zoogkea-colonies. The sulphuretted hydrogen
reaction began with the formation of zoogloea, increased for five or
ten days, and tlien again decreased. As this evolution increased, the
zooglosa-colonies again always dispersed, and the rods gradually
disappeared, breaking up into strongly refractive spherules. When
the evolution had ceased, the spherules often again grew into rods, and
the development began afresh. There was a difference in the result
according as fresh albumen-bacteria or bacteria from a solution in
which sulphuretted hydrogen had already begun to be produced, were
placed in the albumen-decoction. In the latter case the sulphuretted
hydrogen reaction was manifested on the second day, in the former
generally not till the fifth. In two cultures, bacteria from a fresh
solution containing no suli>huretted hydrogen, and secondly from one
in which the gas was being abundantly developed, and in which there
were already a niimber of rods, were sown in boiled and unboiled
milk, in boiled urine, and in a decoction of ergot.

It was now seen that the stage of development of the bacteria
influenced the process of decomposition in the new nutrient fluid.
The young bacteria merely turned the milk sour or somewhat
accelerated the acidity ; the more vigorous old bacteria, which had
already caused a production of sulphuretted hydrogen in the albumen-
solntion, produced the same reaction in the fluid ; they continued to
develop, while tlie young bacteria were more indiflerent, or altogether
perished. In fresh milk no eficct was produced ; the natural ferment
acted quicker and more strongly. In urine the older bacteria always
produced alkalinity more rapidly than the younger ones ; in ergot-
decoction both soon perished. Ho also introduced the bacteria from
putrefying blood, tobacco- and pea-decoction into a great variety of
nutrient fluids.

The general results arrived at were that (1) the Schizoraycctes
from the same generating substances, when introduced into different
nutrient fluids, present great variation in their development ; and (2)
Schizomycetes from diflerent generating substances, introduced into
one and the same nutrient fluid, also develop ditferently, and in part
produce also different decompositions; and hence that both the

1000 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

generating substance and the nutrient fluid influence the growth and
the vigour of bacteria.

Further experiments were made by the author with the bacteria
of sour milk. He found in it the sphasro-bacteria described by
Pasteur, whose developments he followed out. Sowings in different
nutrient fluids also produced a more or less abundant growth of them.
In boiled urine they developed with especial vigour ; but after a
fortnight the alkaline fermentation was not produced ; while by the
bacteria of urine it was brought about in a few days. In urine there
arose spontaneously at first small spherules, succeeded by small rods,
which at length developed into long filaments and vibrios. The
experiments made with these urine-bacteria, which he placed in the
most various nutrient fluids, gave very diiferent and partially
irreconcilable results, so that the author was led to the conclusion
that a variety of bacteria arise spontaneously in urine, one of which
often smothers another.

Finally, he followed the development of bacteria-sowings from
various generating substances in unboiled flesh - water and in
Bucholtz's fluid, in boiled flesh-water, solution of peptone, and
solution of isinglass. Tho peptone-solution, which he strongly
recommends for bacteria-culture, he made of 0 • 08 gr. pepsin, 4 cc.
33 per cent, hydrochloric acid, and 20 gr. fibrin in 400 cc. distilled
water, leaving the mixture some hours in a warm place until the
fibrin was dissolved, the solution then neutralized with ammonia,
filtered, and finally sterilized by boiling. The solution, which is at
first turbid, soon becomes perfectly clear from an abiindant white
precipitate of parapeptone ; and the presence of bacteria can then be
recognized without the Microscope by the turbidity which always
again results.

The following are given by the author as the most important
results obtained : —

1. He believes in the existence of a number of different species of
bacteria.

2. He considers the fact that no development takes place in
Bucholtz's solution to be no proof that active bacteria and bacterial
germs are not present in a sowing.

3. Sphfero-bacteria are partly indcj^endcnt forms, partly stages of
development of bacillar bacteria.

4. The spontaneous infection of the nutrient fluid usually takes
place from the access of spores from tho atmosphere, and not from the
water used in the fluid.

5. The final results of the development of bacteria are strongly
refractive, longish oval resting-spores.

6. The nutrient fluid employed is not a matter of indifiPerence.

Influence of Schizomycetes on the Development of Yeast.* —
According to experiments carried on by M. Hayduck, the presence of
Schizomycetes exercises an injurious influence on the propagation of
yeast and the process of fermentation. The cause is probably simply

* 'Zeitschr. f. Spiritusindustric,' iii. (18S0) p. 202. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i.
(1880) p. 866.

INVEKTEBRATAj CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1001

that the former remove from the nutrient fluid the substances which
serve for the nutrition of the latter. On fully developed torula-cells
they appear to have no injurious influence.

New Microscopic Schizomycetes.* — V. A. Poulsen describes an
organism discovered by him belonging to the family Sarcinepe of
Schizomycetes, which he treats as a new genus and species under the
name Sarcinoglobulus pundum. It diflers from the genus Sarcina in
its spherical form and numerous cells. It occurs in sea-slime from
which sulphuretted hydrogen is given off. In similar situations he
found also a new species of Sarcina, S. lUoralis.

Chlami/domonas hi/alina Cohn is also described again in detail,
and the old name C. uva restored.

Social Bacteria. f — M. P. Van Tieghem remarks that in the
family of Bacteriacefe, the cells, whatever their form, spherical,
cylindrical, or spiral, are disposed in a variety of ways. Sometimes
they are arranged in a linear series, in the order in which they have
inci'eased or divided, so as to form long threads of beads [Micrococcus
urece, bomhicis, &c.), or cylindrical (Bacillas anthracis, the young state
of B. amijlobacter, &c.) or spiral filaments (Spirochiete), This is the
typical disposition, and is sometimes modified by the formation of a
gelatinous sheath either around the whole mass of cells ( Mi/conostoc),
or each separate cell [Leuconostoc) ; but this does not affect the
arrangement of the cells in a linear series, which is often contorted
and knotted on itself.

Sometimes, on the contrary, the cells separate immediately after
segmentation, without preserving any mutual relation as to direction.
Then they either disperse in the surrounding medium without main-
taining any connection, or they secrete a gelatinous substance which
keeps them united in more or less considerable masses altogether
indeterminate in form (several species of Micrococcus, Bacterium, Sec).

This permanent association in a linear series, and tliis immediate
dissociation into separate cells, present various connecting links,
which render the chai'acters diflicult and doubtful of applicati(jn in
the definition of genera and species. This does not appear to be the
case with a third mode of existence, which the author terms social
(agrctjre).

Under these conditions the cells, spherical or rod-shaped, become
completely dissociated immediately after the division by which tliey
have been formed, turn and glide one over another, and remain in
intimate contact, cemented together apparently by a gelatinous
substance. Starting from a spore or primitive cell, there is thus
gradually developed a compact mass, with more or less sharj) out-
lino, which soon assumes a definite form, spherical, oval, or cul)ical,
and which increases by repeated and simultaneous bipartition of tlic
cells of which it is composed. When it has attained a curtain
dimension, it divides into two equal halves, which so^iarato slightly,

♦ PouUeii, V. A., ' Ucbcr ciiiigo niikroskopisclio rilauzouorganisuicu.' !Soc
' Bot. Zfit.,' xxxviii. (lst<(i) p. 50J.

t 'Bull. S.c. But. Fniucc.'sxvii. (IS8U) pp. 118-1.k!.

1002 RECOKD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

increase so as to resume their primitive form, and then in their turn
divide when they have reached their full size. Sometimes the entire
mass is naked ; its contour is formed simply of the extremities of the
peripheral cells which are bound together by the interstitial gelatinous
substance. Sometimes, on the contrary, it is enveloped by a resisting
membrane of a gelatinous appearance, which, after each augmentation
of the contents, develops between the two halves, and then divides so
as to clothe them completely and independently after their separation.

The segmentation of the entire body takes place either in one
direction only, and the small masses remain, at least for a time,
united like bead-work, or in two directions in the same plane, and
the masses spread out side by side in the form of a membrane ; or
finally, in three directions, and the masses are superposed in a solid
mass, and form nodules of a smaller or larger size.

Thus are formed aggregations of cells, derived from one primitive
parent cell, and following henceforth a common law ; and these cells,
in their form, their mode of increase, their successive divisions, and
the relations which they maintain towards one another, behave like
so many simple cells, sometimes naked, sometimes enveloped in a
membrane. They constitute, in fact, cells of a second order, com-
posite cells, something like those compound bodies which, in chemical
combinations, play the part of simj^le bodies. By careful crushing,
these colonies can be decomposed ; when the isolated cells, continuing
to increase as when they formed part of the colony, soon again con-
stitute new societies, which again carry on their normal development.

In further investigating the form of the primitive cells, the form
of the colonies, or cells of the second order, the presence or absence
of a general membrane, and the relative disposition of the colonies
after their division, characters may be obtained of a certain number of
genera and species ; and the author proceeds briefly to define the types
best known to him, and the development of which he has been able to
follow. They arrange themselves in two groups, according as the
colony is or is not provided with an enveloping membrane.

1. Naked Colonies. — The colony is composed either of cylindrical
cells similar to those of Bacterium and Bacillus, or of spherical cells
similar to those of Micrococcus. The former are united into the
genus Polyhacteria, the latter into the genus Punctula.

Polyhacieria. — In the decoction of horse-dung which is frequently
employed for the production of fungi, M. Van Tieghem has often met
with a Polyhacteria, in which the naked, colourless, oval colonies,
composed of small rods aggregated in every variety of way, always
divide transversely in the same direction, and remain end to end in the
form of a frequently sinuous chain. This chain proceeds from the
increase and division of a single mass, and this primitive mass is
again entirely derived from a spore or a rod, as the writer has many
times demonstrated by tracing the development of this minute organism
in cell cultures, which is not unattended with difficulty. It may be
called Polyhacteria catenata.

In another species the rods are of a sulphur-yellow colour, the
colonics rounded or polyhedral, and segmentation takes place in two

IXVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1003

directions at right angles to one another. When placing themselves
side by side in the same plane, they form a sort of membrane, but
without adherence. This is Polyhacteria sulplmrea. It was found on
the surface of a liquid in which haricots were rotting.

Pundula. — The sj^herical cells are ordinarily extremely minute ;
they appear like innumerable dots united by a gelatinous cement.
A close examination is required to distinguish the colonies composed
of them from simple naked cells consisting of a finely granular
protoplasm.

In Pundula rosea the colonies are of a bright rose colour ; they
are spherical, and with a sharply defined outline ; the dots, which are
so many elementary cells, are arranged in them with perfect regularity
in radial rows and concentric circles. After each division, the two
halves of the colony become rounded off", and separate completely.
When one of these spheres is crushed, it is resolved into its elementary
cells, and the formation can then be followed of so many new colonies
by the repeated increase and division of each of the cells.

In Pundula cuhica the slightly larger cells are colourless, and are
associated together in cubical masses. After attaining a certain
dimension the cube divides successively in directions parallel to its
three faces, and each new cube behaves in the same way. At least
for a time, all the cubes arc associated together in larger or smaller
cubical masses.

In Pundula glomerata the colourless colonies are rounded into
spheres, divide in three directions, and remain thenceforth associated
in larger or smaller mamillated masses.

These three organisms have been found at various times on seeds
in a state of putrefaction.

2. Colonies trovided with a Membbane. — In this group must be
placed the genus Ascococcus of Cohn, composed of spherical cells,
which is nothing but a Pundula invested. The types with cylindrical
cells may bo combined into the genus Ascohaderia, which again may
be described as a Pohjhaderla invested.

Ascohaderia. — On the surface of li(|uids in which were rotting seeds
of various leguminous plants, and especially lupine, the writer fre-
quently found small, granular, polyhedral masses, each enveloped in
a thick cartilaginous membrane, placed side by side in a strongly
adherent layer, after the manner of an Ulca. But the contents of
each compartment, instead of being a simple protoplasmic body, were
composed of a great number of small I'ods, inclined in all directions,
and intimately united by a kind of cement. After having attained a
certain dimension by repeated and sinniltaneous bipartition of the rods,
it splits into two, and tho gelatinous membrane is continued over the
two new surfaces. Wlien the mass is crushed, the rods arc set free
and dissociated ; they then develop, as they did within the mass, and
soon give rise to as many new colonies, each of wliicli soon becomes
surrounded by its own membrane, or constitutes a cell of the second
order. Van Tiegheni has denominated this organism Ascohaderia
nlviiia.

Ascococcus Cohn — In Ascococcus Billrothii Cohn, as in the three

1004 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

species of Punctula, the excessively minute cells of the colony are
immobile. They are so closely bound together by a firm cement as
not to be easily separated. This is not the case with another species of
Ascococcus which the writer met with on the surface of water contain-
ing various aquatic plants, where Begcjiatoa was putrefying, and
which exhaled a strong odour of ammonia sulphohydrate. Here the
cells, also extremely minute, moved with a very rapid oscillating and
whirling motion in the interior of the membrane, and having all the
appearance of a Brownian movement. Hence this species has been
termed Ascococcus vihrans.

All the social bacteria hitherto described are aerobes, producing
an energetic combustion in albuminoid substances on the surfaces of
which they are formed, and often, if not always, disengaging a large
quantity of ammonia, a phenomenon which Cohn has already described
in the case of Ascococcus Billrothii.

From the observations above described, M. Van Tieghem deduces
a confirmation of his view already published that the cell cannot in
any sense be regarded as an element. It may, in fact, be split up, a
fragment may be separated from it, and this fragment, when placed
in favourable conditions, will retain all the properties of the entire
cell, and will be able to regenerate it. The plant itself also carries on
at every moment this splitting up of its cells into similar and
complete parts, often very numerous and minuto. It is indeed on
this division that all increase and reproduction depend. The j)roto-
plasmic body of a cell is then, in fact, an assemblage of similar 2)arts,
each complete in itself, which may be isolated artificially, and which
separate from one another naturally by the processes of growth and
reproduction, altho^^gh these parts are actually in continuity with one
another, and subject to a common law of development. In a large
cell there is a great number of these similar parts, and a great
number of fragments can be cut oft" from it, equivalent among them-
selves and to the entire cell. In a small cell there are fewer such
parts. Finally, when the cell is reduced below the size measurable
with precision by our existing instruments, the fact that it still divides
is clear evidence that it can no longer be regarded as an irreducible
element. The analysis of the cell shows, therefore, that it is not, as
has generally been stated, the formative morphological element of
organisms.

These observations on social bacteria lead, in another way, by a
synthetic path, to the same conclusion. We see, in fact, in them,
small cells springing from a primitive cell, and grouping themselves
into an intimate association governed by a common law of growth ;
this association assuming a definite form and dividing in a certain
manner when it has attained a certain size, and then multiplying and
maintaining each time its new parts formed in a certain relative
position. In one word, this association of similar cells behaves in all
respects like a simple cell ; it is, in fact, a compound cell. When
crushed, each part is able, like a simple cell, to exist independently,
and to regenerate the entire colony. There is, however, one
dificrence. This crushing only eft'ects a separation of the cells which

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1005

have been seen to form themselves and to become acslomerated in
order to constitute the compound cell, while in a simple cell the
detached fragments have no known origin nor precise morphological
significance.

The increase of tlie body of the compound cell, resulting from the
repeated and simultaneous bipartiticm of its several cylindrical or
spherical cells, closely resembles tlie mode of increase of so many
constituent parts of the protoplasmic body of a simple cell, for
example, of the chlorophyll-grains or nuclei. The recent researches
of Baranetzky * have shown that the nucleus is composed of
elements bearing the form of rods, and that it increases by the
elongation and repeated bipartition of these rods, just as bacteria do ;
and that it is this increase itself which, not being able to pass a certain
limit, brings about the division. Between a nucleus thus constituted
and the body of a compound cell of a Polyhacteria there is a striking
resemblance. One day it will perhaps be demonstrated that this
similarity of constitution and of growth extends to the whole of the
protoplasm of the simple cell.

A blow is thus, in the opinion of M. Van Tieghem, struck at the
view of the cell as an element, whether morphological or physiological,
and at the foundation of the cell-theory.

Development and Fermenting Power of Bacteria.f — Prazmowski
has specially studied the development and properties of the genera
Bacillus Colin, Clostridium Prz. n. gen., and Vibrio Cohn. Oi Bacillus
suhtilis Cohn, he has closely followed both the germination and
the formation of the spores. He believes it to have no fermenting
power, since it dies the moment it is deprived of oxygen. B. Ulna
was found by him in rotten eggs, and in the spore-producing state,
but he was not able to connect it with the process of decay.

The butyric ferment, or " vibrion butyrique " of Pasteur, is known
under the various names of Amylobacter Clostridium, Urocejjhalum
Trecul, Bacillus Amylohacter v. Tiegh., and Bacterium Navicula Reink.
et Berth. Tlie author establishes from it a new genus Clostridium,
of which two species arc described. The first, C. butyricnm (Bacillus
Amylobacter v. Tiegh.) is completely anaerobic, the spores germinating
at one end, instead of, as in Bacillus subtilis, in the middle. The
second species, C. Polymyxa Prz., is new, though closely resembling
G. butyricum, is almost entirely aerobian, and can only produce its
spores under access of oxygen ; when air is excluded, it incites
fermentation, but soon dies.

Vibrio Rur/uln Miiller has only been found by the author along
with other bacteria ; the formation of spores was observed, but not
germination. It decomposes cellulose.

The formation of jelly or zooghea-condition of bacteria is believed
by Prazmowski to indicate an affinity with the lower Ab'tc.

Witli regard to the anatomy of the spores, he states that they are
* Sfd this Journal, rin/r, p. !>7fl.

t I'ruziiKiw.ski, A., ' lliitcr.-<iicli. iibor dio EntwickolungspoRoliiolito u. Fer-
nifntwiikiiii",' ciniRor Hac-tfiU'ii-Artcn.' Leipzig, 18h0. fcleo ' Hot Zeit '
xxxviii. (KSHO) p. .V2H.

VOL. in. 3 X

1006 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

certainly surrounded by a cell-wall, but disputes tbe statement of
Brefeld that they possess an epispore and a clear intermediate space.

Effect of Putrefactive Changes on Bacteria.* — In all solutions
containing Bacteria a time arrives when they cease to propagate, and
after a longer time they lose their power to induce further life in
fresh nutrient solutions. The admitted fact leads to the belief that
the putrefaction induced by Bacteria produces substances which are
poisons to these organisms.

Experiments have been made by Dr. Wernich on meat extracts of
various ages with phenol, skatole, indole, and other putrefaction-
products, all of which were found to exercise an injurious effect on
Bacteria ; moreover, substances most disposed to putrefaction were
easily preserved from it by means of any of them in fresh solutions
which were purposely impregnated. The addition of trifling quan-
tities of these matters promptly caused inactivity of the Bacteria, and
the author considers he has fully proved the truth of Baumann and
Nencki's propositions on the subject.

The experiments in question lead to the solution of a highly
interesting problem in pathology. The author says that the same
or similar operations are carried out in the progress of septic
diseases ; the supposition that the organisms which are the cause of
infectious diseases give rise to products which eventually cause their
own destruction, is the only way in which the progress of these
diseases can be properly comprehended. Many diseases, such as
small-pox, measles, scarlet and relapsing fever, which are now
generally ascribed to the presence of Bacteria, progress so peculiarly
and take such a regular course that one is forced to believe that, with
the cause of the malady, its own distinctive poison is produced in the
same manner as in the experiments here noted.

Theory of Virulent Diseases and the "Fowl-Cholera.''t — The
view that the infectious diseases, such as measles, scarlet fever, small-
pox, syphilis, splenic fever, yellow fever, typhus, and others, are con-
nected with the presence and operation of organized ferments, the
communication of which from one individual to another constitutes
the infection, has lately met with increasing support. Hitherto,
however, except in the case of splenic fever, direct and conclusive
proofs of this hypothesis have not been forthcoming; but in the
instance named the bacteria which cause it have been discovered, and
their mode of action so far determined that it is possible by their
means to produce the disease whenever desired. Very recently
M. Pasteur has been able to rear the organism which is the cause of
another disease, and to study its biological peculiarities. As the
investigation throws light on the mysterious question of the immunity
of individuals from a given contagious disease from which they have
recovered, the facts elicited may be given more at length.

* 'Bied. Centr.,' 1880, pp. 224-6. See ' Journ. Chem. Soc.,' Abstr. xxxviii.
(1880) pp. 726-7. See also this Journal, ajite, p. 314.

t ' Comptes Reudus,' xc. (1880) pp. 239-48. Cf. ' Naturforscher,' xiii. (1880)
pp. 117-18; also Prof. J. Lister's address to Annual Meeting of British Medical
" Association at Cambridge, 'Brit. Med. Journ.,' 1880, pp. 363-5.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1007

A disease, usually known as hen-cholera, sometimes appears with
very disastrous effects among fowls. The animal attacked by it is
extremely prostrated, the gait is irregular, the feathers become erect,
the wings droop, a heavy somnolence comes over it, ending in a quiet
death : perceptible alterations are also caused in the internal organs.
The observations of Messrs. Moritz, Peroncito, and Toussaint have
shown it to be caused by a microscoj^ic form of life, the last-named
observer having proved by direct cultivation of it in neutral urine
that it is the origin of the poisoning of the blood.

M. Pasteur had not the same success in his attempts at rearing it
pure in neutral urine, but found a very favourable medium for the
purpose in a broth made from fowls' muscle, neutralized by potash and
heated to from 110^ to 115° C. so as to sterilize it. The organism
multijilies in this liquid with such rapidity that in a few hours the
most transparent solution commences to be clouded, and is filled
with immense numbers of minute and extremely delicate oval-shaped
structures slightly constricted in the middle, and appearing at first
sight like isolated points. Their transverse diameter is from t^^^j^
to ^5 Joij- inch. They have no independent movements, and it is
certain that they belong to a group quite distinct from the Vibriones.
These microbia of the fowl-cholera present the striking peculiarity of
rapidly perishing in yeast-liquid (although the Bacteria of splenic
fever flourish admirabl}'^ and reproduce in this fluid) ; for in less than
twenty-four hours they have all died, while any foreign bodies accom-
panying them continue their own growth ; this liquid therefore
furnishes a valuable reagent by which to ensure the purity of growths
which may be introduced into the solution of fowls' muscle.

If guinea-pigs are inoculated with this organism, an exclusively
local injury is caused, especially at a certain age ; this ends in an abscess
of greater or less size. If the abscess opens of itself, it heals up
without having caused the animal the least harm ; it may persist for
several weeks, and in this case is found full of a cheesy j)us contain-
ing quantities of the raicrobion among the pus-cells. Here it lives as
in a closed vessel, witliout injuring the animal; it remains very pure,
and does not lose its vital powers. On inoculating fowls with the
contents of the boils, they are found to die very (juickly ; the guinea-
pig may also die from its effects, but only when under special
circumstances tlio matter passes into the blood or the intestines. It
sometimes hap)»en8 that fowls or rabbits living with the infected
guinea-pigs suddenly become ill and die without the health of the
latter suffering in the least ; it is only necessary for some of the
abscesses to open si)oiitaneonsly and a portion of their contents to
reach the food of the raJjbits or fowls. Witliout a knowledge of the
relations thus made known, one wouM scarcely su])poso the healtliy
guinca-{)igs to be the cause of the decimation of their neighbours, but
would ratlier believe a spontaneous disease to be its origin.

In order to cause infection, it is only necessary to place a few
drops of a crop of the organism on the bread or meat given as food to
the fowls ; it undergoes so rapid a development in their alimentjiry
canal that their very excrement when used to inoculate other imli-

3x2

1008 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

viduals, is sufficient to cause tlieir death ; and tliis is doubtless the
manner in which this disease is spread through the fowls inhabiting
any one yard. The isolation of the sick from the sound birds,
together with the most careful cleansing of the yard and the mainte-
nance of it in a clean state, will certainly suffice to put a stop to the
spread of the malady.

The repeated cultivation of the microbion in fowls'-broth by im-
pregnating each successive liquid with an infinitely small quantity of
the preceding liquid, weakens in no degree the poisonous properties of
the agent. Its virulence is so great that inoculation by a very small
portion of a drop of one of the growths thus reared causes death in
every instance within two to three days, and very often within twenty-
four hours. It is possible by certain modifications of the method of
cultivation to bring about a mitigation of this virulence. The occur-
rence of this mitigation is marked by a slight retardation of the
development of the microbion, " but in reality the two kinds of
poison are identical. In the first, the most deadly condition, the
microbion may cause death twenty times in twenty cases of inocula-
tion ; in the second, out of twenty cases of inoculation it causes
twenty cases of disease, but never death. These facts have an
importance which is readily apjireciable ; they allow us, in fact,
to decide the problem of the recurrence or non-recurrence of the
disease now in question. If we take forty fowls and inoculate
twenty of them with a very poisonous specimen of infecting material,
the twenty fowls die ; if we inoculate the remaining twenty with
weakened poison, they become one and all ill, but will not die. If
we now let them become well again, and inoculate these twenty fowls
with the most poisonous substance, it will now no longer kill them.
The conclusion to be drawn from this is clear ; the malady is a safe-
guard against itself. It has the characters of the infectious diseases,
which do not recur."

At this point M. Pasteur reminds us that, of course, this fact is of
itself nothing new, for man has long been successfully protected against
small-pox by inoculation with cow-pox, the sheep in some places
against hoof-disease, the cattle against the rinderpest, and it is also
well known that people who have passed through measles, scarlet
fever, syphilis, &c., are not again attacked by these diseases. The
new and important point about the cholera of fowls is this, that we
have found the infecting agent in this disease to consist of a micro-
scopic parasite, which may be cultivated outside the body, and which
not only evokes the disease, but also affi^rds immimity against the
effects of a repeated inoculation as distinctly as the contagious
diseases.

The following passage of M. Pasteur's memoir qualifies slightly the
conclusion arrived at above : —

" I do not wish to have it believed that the facts present the mathe-
matical exactness and regularity which I have described. That is, my
statements do not take account of the great variability which is acci-
dentally presented by the constitutions and general vital powers of
individuals taken from a collection of domestic animals. No, the most

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1009

active poison of the fowl-cholera does not always kill twenty times in
twenty cases, but in the observed cases which I have seen with my
own eyes, it has killed at least eighteen times out of twenty in those
instances where it has not killed twenty times. Similarly the poison
which has had its violence diminished has not always preserved life
twenty times out of twenty cases ; in the cases of inferior protection
this occurred sixteen or eighteen times out of the twenty. Further,
it does not absolutely and by a single inoculation prevent a recurrence
of the disease ; this non-recurrence is attained much more surely by
two inoculations than by one."

Since M. Pasteur's first experiments, he has investigated the
conditions of immunity more fully, and has arrived at the following
hypothesis of the real natui'c of the protective operation and the
reasons for the immunity.*

Numerous experiments had shown that the inoculation with the
weaker poison (which on the grounds of analogy and simplicity is
named vaccination) gives such diiferent results with different fowls,
that in one case one vaccination is sufficient to cause entire immunity
against the deadlier poison, while in others a once- and even twice-
repeated vaccination is necessary. To illustrate this, let eighty fowls
be taken, and twenty of them be inoculated with the violent poison,
these twenty will die ; inoculate the next twenty with the mitigated
poison and none of them will die ; if these twenty fowls which have
once undergone vaccination be inoculated with the stronger poison,
about six or eight will remain alive. A fresh series of twenty fowls
may be vaccinated on two occasions, one operation to follow the other
after an interval of seven to eight days, and inoculation with the deadly
poison is now without danger to from twelve to fifteen of the number.
If a batch of twenty new fowls is now vaccinated three or four times in
succession, the inoculation with the powerful poison will cause neither
the death or even the sickness of any more. In this last case the fowls
can never again take the disease.

With regard to the reason of the immunity, we cannot avoid the
idea that tlio microscopic organism which causes the disease, finds in
the body of the animal a medium in which to grow, and tliat it alters
or destroys certain substances while carrying out the activities of
its own life. But wlion the perfect immunity is attained, one may
inoculate any muscle one pleases with the more deadly organism
without obtaining the slightest effect, that is, all cultivation in these
muscles is now impossible ; tliey no longer contain materials to nourish
the microbiou.

The question now is, whether this suppression of the j)ossibility of
any cultivation of the parasite in the muscles is limited to these j)art8
which have undergone the protective inoculation. To decide tliis, a
new series of strongly vacciiuited fowls was once inoculated by intro-
duction of tlie poison into tlic jugular vein, and in a second series of
experiments by feeding witli tlie infectod muscles of a fowl wliieh had
died of tho parasite. The result was that in both cases tlic fully

• 'Coniptcs Uciulus,' xc. (ISSit) pp. '.>;V2-8. Cf. ' NiiturroMolicr,' xiii (1880)
pp. -247-8.

1010 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

vaccinated individuals were uninjured, none of them dying; while
those not vaccinated succumbed to the poison, both when this was
directly introduced into the blood and when it was introduced by the
alimentary canal.

Experience shows that there are individual fowls which are
proof from their birth against the poison, being protected by their con-
stitution against taking the disease. Therefore it must be assumed
in their case that they are devoid of the substance which forms the
nutriment of the microbion,just in the same way as the liquor of beer-
yeast is absolutely unfitted to nourish the same parasite, while other
microscopic organisms thrive very well in this liquid.

" The explanation to which the facts lead us," says M. Pasteur,
" both with regard to the innate resistance which certain individuals
manifest, and to the immunity which is induced by repeated vaccina-
tions, appears very natural when one remembers that in general every
process of cultivation alters the medium in which it takes place : the
soil is altered when it comes in contact with ordinary plants ; plants and
animals are altered when they meet with their parasites, and our culti-
vating liquids are altered when they meet with Mucedinefe, Vibriones,
or ferments. These modifications are both betrayed and characterized
by the circumstance that fresh growth of the same species in these media
is impossible or very difiicult. If we sow fowls' broth with the cholera
microbion and filter the liquid after three or four days to remove every
trace of it, and sow the filtered liquid afresh with the parasite, this
shows itself entirely incapable of undergoing the slightest development.
If the liquid is entirely clear after the filtering, it preserves this clear-
ness intact.

Must not the thought occur to us, that by the cultivation of the
weakened poison in the fowl, its body is put into the position of the
filtered liquid, which cannot support the microbion. The comparison
may be followed out further, for if the solution is filtered while the
cultivation of the microbion is in full activity — not on the fourth, but
on the second day of growth — then the filtered liquid will still be in
a condition to grow the microbion afresh, though less energetically
than at first. We see therefore that after cultivation of the weakened
microbion in the fowl's body we have not been able to exhaust its
nutriment in all parts of the body. Thus that which is left behind
will allow of a fresh growth, but again to a more limited extent. This
is the action of the first vaccination. Subsequent inoculations will
gradually remove all the material for the cultivation of the parasite.
Through the action of the circulation a moment must come, at which
any fresh growth in the fowl remains unfruitful. Then the disease
can no longer recur, and the individual is fully vaccinated. It may
be wondered that a first growth of the mitigated poison should remain
inactive, before the materials for nourishing the microbion are
exhausted. But we should not forget that as the microbion is a gas-
needing being, it exists by no means under the same conditions in the
body of the animal as in an artificial medium for growth. Here there
is no obstacle to its increase. In the body, on the contrary, it is
incessantly in conflict with the cells of the organs, which are in like

INVEETEBBATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1011

manner beings which need gas, and are always ready to seize upon
the oxygen.

But is this the only possible explanation of the phenomena ? Not
strictly speaking. We can account for the facts of non-recurrence if
we assume that instead of removing and destroying certain substances
in the body of the animals, the life of the microbion introduces certain
others which are a hindrance to tho further development of this
microbion. The life-history of the lower organisms, and in general
of all organisms, justifies such an assumption. The excreta produced
by the vital processes may oppose a vital function of the same species.
In certain fermentations antiseptic products are seen to arise, during
and as the result of the fermentation, which put an end to the active
life of the ferments and to the fermentation long even before this.
A formation might take place during the cultivation of our microbion
of products whose presence would strictly explain the immunity and
the vaccination.

But our artificial cultivation of the parasite allows us to control
this hypothesis as well. Let us prepare an artificial growth of the
microbion, and after evaporating it under the influence of cold and in
a vacuum, restore it to its original volume by a cultivating solution.
If the extract contains what is a poison to the life of the micro-
bion, and if this is a reason for cultivation being impossible in the
filtered liquid, then the sowing in the fresh medium should prove
unfruitful ; but it is not so. Thus it is impossible to believe that
substances appear during the life of the parasite which are able to
oppose its further development. This observation confirms, on the
contrary, the former theory, given above, with regard to the causes of
the non-recurrence of certain infectious diseases."

A further fact in support of his views of the nature of tho
immunity and the vaccination was communicated by M. Pasteur to the
Academy : * In well-vaccinated and healthy fowls sometimes appear,
in one part or other of the body, boils, full of pus, which have caused
no injury to tho health of the bird. It was remarkable that these
boils originated from the cholera microbion which was preserved in
them as in a closed vessel, and doubtless was only imablc to rejiroduce
itself because the fowl was vaccinated. The pus could be taken from
the boils and cultivated, or fresh fowls could be inoculated with it,
in which it developed largely and killed them in tho ordinary
way. These facts remind us of the observations which M. Pasteur
described in his first memoir on the bcliaviour of tho guinea-pig with
regard to inoculation with tho poison of fuwl-cholera.

]\r. Pasteur lias followed up f his experiments in fowl-cholera by in-
vestigating with regard to the germ-theory the case of a patient aftlicted
with an intermittent eruption of boils. He found the matter formed
in the cones of the boils to produce, when added to a proper culti-
vating liquid, numerous microscopic spherical bodies united together,
generally in pairs. The same occurred with matter taken from a loss
advanced boil. Diflfercntial experiments showed tho production of

• 'Comptca Kcndus,' xc. (18S0) pp. 1030-3. Cf. ' Nuturforschcr,' xiii. (1880)
p. 218. t Il>id-, PP- 1033-44.

1012 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the bodies by this matter, and not by blood or lymph taken from
other parts of the same subject, even when from the very edge of the
boil. Three separate subjects were experimented on, and from each the
same microscopic organism was obtained.

By injecting the cultivated growths of the organism under the skin
of rabbits, &c., small and readily healed abscesses were produced in
which the organism was found in a state of development. Injected
into the jugular vein of guinea-pigs, the growths produced no result,
a circumstance which is important as confirming other experiments
which show the difficulty — due probably to its healthy activity and the
absorption of oxygen by the blood-corj)uscles — of propagating such
organisms in blood. The disease osteomyelitis is also accompanied by
the same growth, in the form of minute grains aggregated by twos
and larger numbers.

In an ultimately fatal case of puerperal fever, the lochia were found
to contain the same organism. Two days later, the blood itself was
found to contain a growth of long chains of cells. After death, pus
from the peritoneum, the blood of the basilic and femoral veins, and
pus from the surface of the uterus and Fallopian tubes was found on
cultivation to contain the germs of the long chains of cells. In the
peritoneal matter occurred a vibrio, already described as " organism of
the pus." In another instance, in which the mother and child both
died, the boil-organism and the pus-vibrio were found in the lochia
and in the milk, and the inoculation of a rabbit with the matter caused
the development in it of large abscesses. In another case the blood
and the synovial membrane of the knee were ultimately affected by
the chain-like microphyte. In the blood of an infant which died soon
after birth, was found the pyogenic vibrio. The only indications of
disease found in the mother were a number of abscesses in the liver
and ulcerations on the hepatic vein. The lymphatics of the uterus
appear in some cases to distribute the disease-germs to the rest of the
body.

Professor Lister, in his address to the Cambridge Meeting of the
British Medical Association,* says : " I need hardly remark on the
surpassing importance of researches such as these. No one can say
but that, if the Association should meet at Cambridge again ten years
hence, some one may be able to record the discovery of the appro-
priate vaccine for measles, scarlet fever, and other acute specific
diseases in the human subject. But oven should nothing more be
effected than what seems to be already on the point of attainment —
the means of securing poultry from death by fowl-cholera, and cattle
from the terribly destructive splenic fever, it must be admitted that
we have an instance of a most valuable result from the much-reviled
vivisection."

Fowl-Cholera and "Sleep Disease." t — M. Talmy has been struck
by the resemblance of the fowl-cholera to the " sleep disease " or
" nelavan," which attacks the natives of the west coast of Africa.
In this disease, whose symptoms may be compared with those given

* Loc. cit. t 'Comptes Rendus,' xc. (1880) pp. 1014-17.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOQAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1013

above for tlie fowl-cholera, the eyelids are half closed. At certain
times an urgent want of sleep is felt ; later, sleep becomes continuous ;
the sick person has to be awakened for his meals. Sleep now takes
place in the most various and uncomfortable attitudes, but in such as
need no muscular effort; the body gradually becomes stretched out until
death ensues quietly and without pain. The patients are sometimes
affected at the same time with swellings on the neck, and these have
been excised with the effect of curing the disease. The disease appears
to differ from that affecting fowls, in its long duration — lasting a
year or two in some cases — and in inevitably proving fatal. It
is said to attack individuals who have eaten large-necked fowls or
fish with swollen gills ; hence these animals should be carefully
studied in order to trace the connection between their condition and
the disease which attacks human beings.

With reference to this subject, M. Declat quotes * the cure of two
cases of the disease by means of phenic acid, which is used so success-
fully in the case of other diseases due undoubtedly to septic organisms.
This seems to confirm the belief in a similar origin. The phenic
acid solution is injected, 100 drops at a time, and these injections
are often repented. A gradual recovery followed the operation in the
two cases quoted.

Fowl-Cholera and Anthrax.t — lu a letter to M. Dumas,
M. Pasteur alludes to his experiments J on the cultivation of the
fowl-cholera bacterium in fowls' broth (which appear to show that
in the process certain principles necessary to the life of the bacterium
are removed from the liquid), and to his subsequent ojiiniou that
probably fowls vaccinated for the " cholera " would not be proof
against antlirax. Numerous exjieriments have, however, since shown
him that the effects of anthrax on a medium inoculated against fowl-
cholera are slow, small in amount, and difficult to ])r(jduce. Some of
his experiments tend to prove that this result is shown in fowls
similarly treat(;d, wdiich, if confirmed, shows that an immunity from
anthrax can be created by means of a parasitic malady of quite
a diti'orent nature.

Etiology of Anthrax.§ — The origin and mode of propagation of
this disastrous disease are considered by M. Pasteur worthy of
investigation for the ])urpose of discovering proj)er means for its
prevention. Tlic works of Davaine and Delafoud in France, and
Pollender and Brauel in Germany, have shown tliat the blood of
animals which have died of the disease contains a microscoj)ic
parasite, while Koch of Brcslau, in 187G, showed that the vibrionic
form of the organism is cupablu of resolution into spores. Witli the
support of the MiiiistcT of Agriculture, and the dei)artmental Presi-
dent of the General Council of Eure-et-Loire, M. Pasteur, in 1878,
instituted experiments on a small flock of sheep near Chartres in the
open air.

Certain sheep were fed on lucerne, wliich had been sprinkled with

• ' Coinptcs RondiiH,' xc. (1880) pp. 10S8-00. + Ihi.l . xci. (1880) p. 315.
X See aiih; p. 1010. § ' Omptes Rendus,' x.-i. (1880) p. 86.

1014 RECORD OP CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

artificial growths of tlie anthrax-bacterium, full of bacteria and germs.
A small number of the sheep thus treated died, after a period of
incubation of the disease of from eight to ten days, with all the symp-
toms of anthrax ; many sheep escaped with no other hurt than
becoming decidedly unwell. The mortality increased when to the food
treated as above were added rough objects, such as points of dried
thistle-leaves, and especially the spines of barley-ears cut into minute
fragments. The appearances found in animals which die under these
conditions are exactly those of such as have died spontaneously of the
disease, and show that its effects commence in the mouth or the
pharynx. From these experiments it seems that the anthrax-
poisoned animals of the Eure-et-Loire district die under the effects
of spores taken in with their food.

In spite of the opinion of M. Davaine, that an animal which has
died of anthrax cannot communicate the disease after putrefaction,
and that of M. Colin, that earth and water containing anthrax-
infected matters do not transmit the infection, it may be shown that
though during putrefaction the bacterium dies, its spores survive to
propagate infection. The difficulty of proving this fact is great, for
the relative amoimt of the organism dispersed among the particles of
soil is almost infinitesimal, and, when it has reached the soil, it there
meets with so many antagonistic agencies, in the form of other germs
which compete with it for existence, that it requires very careful
handling (e. g. cultivation in air or vacuum or with other changes of
medium and temperature) to bring the particular species to maturity
from the soil examined, even though it is there already.

It is stated by the slaughterers that there is no danger in handling
the bodies of the diseased animals when putrefaction has begun, and
that there is no cause for apprehension when so doing after the
animal has become cold ; and MM. Pasteur and Joubert have shown
that when placed in a vacuum or in an atmosphere of carbonic acid,
the bacterium dies and breaks up into granules, while its spores live.
Now it appears probable that the bacteria of a diseased animal which
has been buried escape in abundance into the surrounding earth in
the blood which usually issues at death by the nostrils and the mouth,
and in the urine, and at a later stage in the liquids expelled by gaseous
inflation of the body ; probably not even in the latter case has decom-
position set in and destroyed the parasite. A proof of this view
is found in the fact that infected blood added to earth sprinkled with
yeast liquid or urine, and kept at the temperature which probably
exists around a decomposing animal, shows that a multiplication of its
bacteria and their resolution into germs takes place. A still more
practical proof is furnished by the case of a diseased sheep which
was buried as an experiment ; ten months afterwards the earth of the
grave furnished germs of the bacterium capable of causing the death
of fowls inoculated with them, and did the same four months later.
The graves of some diseased cows furnished anthrax-material during
and after an interval of two years since burial. Lastly, the bac-
teria have been detected in the earth above graves over which cul-
tivation has been carried on, and at those points of the field alone.

INVEETEBKATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPYj ETC. 1015

The explanation of how the bacteria reach the surface is to be
found in the operations of the earth-worms which bring to the surface
much of the subjacent earth ; in their casts, as in the earthy contents
of their digestive canals, the germs are found. The contents of these
cylinders of soil when they are broken up by rain and then scattered
in the form of dust become distributed over the low plants of the
pasturages, with the same fatal effects to the animals browsing there as
were shown above in the experiments with infected fodder. The
dangerous state of the soil in this case suggests the use of cremation
to destroy the germs.

The soils most likely to be proof against the transmission of
the disease would appear to be poor, sandy, or calcareous, not damp
ones, which would be thus unfitted for worms. These conditions
are found in the Snvarts of Champagne, where a poor, shallow soil
rests directly on chalk, and in parts of Aveyron, where the soil is
schistous and granitic, and in these places anthrax is unknown.

Anthrax— Its Spread and Prevention.* — M. Pasteur's views as
to the cause of the spread of this disease in certain countries, viz. by
the liberation of the bacteria from the decomposed bodies of animals,
and their subsequent dispersion by the agency of earth-worms, culti-
vation of the soil, &c., are supported by the circumstances connected
with an outbreak of the disease in a village in the department of the
Jura.

Hero three cows which had died of the disease were buried at
a depth of 2 metres. At different times within the ensuing two
years the rich earth and the worm-casts above the graves were
examined, and in all cases were found to contain germs of the Bacillus
anthracis, while earth taken from a few metres' distance contained
none.

To further show the transmissibility of the germs, a pen was
made over one of the graves, and four sheep were placed in it ;
and in a second one, a few metres above the first, were placed four
more sheep. After a week one of the sheep in the former pen
died, and the cause was found to be the Bacillus. The sheep in
the second pen remained quite well. The origin of the disease was
evidently therefore in the cartli infected by the dead cow.

Another important question relating to this disease is the possi-
bility or impossibility of 2)rcvcnting its recurrence. M. Bouley gives
an account | of exitoriments made by M. Toussaint on twenty sheep
by inoculating tliem with a liquid intended to preserve them from
antlirax. Of the twenty animals, four died of the disease. To show
the immunity conferred by inoculation, two of the surviving sixteen
sheep were again inoculated with a very active anthrax solution,
without experiencing any ill effects, while a rabbit treated with tho
same fluid died.

To make this discovery practically useful it will bo necessary to
obtain virus of such a strength that it will act with sufficient vigour
without destroying tho animals subjected to it. M. Chauvcau states

♦ ' Comptca Ueii(lu«,' xci. ( l.SSO) p. I'lCi. \ ll.i,!., p. K)7.

1016 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

that the Algerian breeds of sheep are peculiarly refractory to the
disease, only exhibiting when inoculated the minor signs of its
action, viz. rise of temperature, glandular swellings, and low spirits.
The immunity is carried further with lambs born of dams inoculated
in the last stage of gestation, for inoculation is absolutely without
result in their case.

One operation therefore effects two results, the immunity of the
mother and that of the offspring at the same time.

M. Pasteur,* having determined to test independently some similar
results obtained by M. Louvrier, instituted experiments on cows to
ascertain the effect of inoculation with the bacteria which cause the
disease. On inoculation of two cows, each with five drops of a solution
of these organisms behind the right shoulder, swellings appeared on
both. In the one the swelling disappeared — no rise of temperature
occurring — by the fifth day after the operation. In the other, after
two days, the swelling extended to the belly, the cow became very
ill, the temperature rose from 38 "8° to 41*5° C. M. Louvrier then
applied his method of recovery, which consists of warming by friction,
and by subcutaneous injection of terebenthine, and of covering all the
body except the head with hay soaked in warm vinegar. By the
fourth day the temperature had fallen to 39-7°, but the swelling
under the stomach was very large, and the lymphatic glands of the
thigh hard and painful ; then the recovery became pronounced, by
the gradual fall of temperature and diminution of the swelling.
Subsequent inoculation of the first cow produced no effect. An-
other inoculated individual jiassed safely through the stages of the
disease above mentioned without the aid of M. Louvrier's pallia-
tive measures. On repeating the inoculation upon the two cows
which had passed through the disease with much pain, the only
result observed was a slight swelling. A third inoculation produced
no effect at all.

Thus the disease once passed through cannot recur, as has been
already proved for French sheep. A further experiment shows that the
method of M. Louvrier is not a specific cure for the disease, for of
four inoculated cows, two of which were treated by him and two not,
one of each category died, while the two survivors showed no ill
effects when re-inoculated on the side opposite to that of the first
operation.

The relative insusceptibility to the disease of the Algerian breeds
of sheep is explained by M. Pasteur as caused by a vital resistance of
the constitution, not — as held by M. Chauveau — by the presence in
the animals of substances obnoxious to the bacterium ; for with fowls,
merely cooling them brings out the charbon. M. Chauveau's facts
as to the Algerian sheep and the charbon harmonize well with
M. Pasteur's explanation.

Immunity from Anthrax obtained by Inoculation. f — M. Tous-
saint's long experience has led him to believe that the bacterium of
anthrax is not completely at its ease when developing in animals, for

* ' Comptcs Rendus,' xci. (1880) p. 531. f Ibid., p. 135.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1017

it multiplies tliere by division only, not by spores. Some animals are
more readily affected by it than others (e. g. the pig), and others
in youth rather than in old age (e. g. the dog, horse, and ass). He has
been able to prevent its development in young dogs and in sheep by a
method of inoculation with spores or with the bacterium in its fission-
stage (bacillus).

Four puppies were thus inoculated, and five were not. The first
batch resisted successfully four successive inoculations, while the non-
vaccinated puppies succumbed to the first inoculation in from two to
four days, showing great oedema of neighbouring parts. The first
batch developed slight fever, and in two cases slight oedema ; tho
other inoculations produced no effect on them.

Of eleven sheep of the Lauragnais race, which is very susceptible
to the anthrax, five which were once inoculated with the poison died.
The remaining six were inoculated by the preventive method, and one
died from the eftects of a subsequent inoculation out of two thus
tested. The other five were re-vaccinated, and in a month's time were
found to show no signs even of illness when inoculated in various
ways.

M. Toussaint has also performed experiments of injecting into the
blood of healthy sheep blood taken from an animal affected with
splenic fever, but deprived of the Bacillus anthracis. Taking blood
from a sheep just on tho point of death, when the bacillus has pre-
sumably produced all its possible eftect upon the vital fluid, M.
Toussaint proceeds to deprive it of the living bacillus in either of two
ways — by filtration, or by destroying the vitality of the organism.
The former he effects by mixing the blood with three or four parts of
water, and then passing it through about twelve layers of ordinary
filter-paper. The bacillus, in consequence of its large dimensions, is
entirely retained by this form of filter, as is proved by the fiict tliat
the filtrate no longer gives rise to the organism in a cultivating liquid
or in a living animal. Nevertheless, if injected in considerable quantity
into the circulation of a healthy sheep, it produces a true vaccinatin"'
influence ; that is to say, secures immunity from splenic fever. But
(what is further extremely interesting), in order tliat this cliaiige in
the constitution of tho sheep may be brought about, the lapse of a
certain time is essential. If a vaccinated sheep bo inoculated with
anthrax within a few days of the operation, it will die of splenic fever •
but if from twelve to fifteen days be allowed to elapse, complete immu-
nity is found to have been produced.

Similar results followed from the injection of anthrax blood treated
by M. Toussaint's other method, which consists of maintaining it
for a considerable time at a temperature of 55° C, which has
the ofiect of killing "the bacillus; after which half per cent, of
carbolic acid is added, to prevent putrefaction of the liquid. Tho
blood treated in this way having been proved to be free from living
bacilli by negative results of an experiment upon a rodent, about four
c. c. are injected into the venous system of a sheep, with the effect of
producing the same protective influence against splenic fevor as is
ensured by tlic filtered blood. Tlusc experiments an; still in pro-

1018 RECOED OF CURRENT RESEARCHETS RELATING TO

gress, but M. Toussaint informs Professor Lister tliat he has already
ascertained the existence of immunity against anthrax for 3^ months
in both sheep and dogs treated in this way.*

Identity of Bacillus anthracis and Hay-Bacillus, t — This has
been investigated by Dr. H. Buchner of Munich, of whose observa-
tions Professor Lister gives the following account : —

"It is well known that the Bacillus anthracis is morphologically
identical with an organism frequently met with in infusion of hay,
which may be termed hay-bacillus. Such being the case, it occurred
to Dr. Buchner that they might be merely one and the same organism
modified by circumstances. For my own part, I am quite prepared
to hear of such modifying influence being exerted upon bacteria,
having made the observation several years ago that, when the Bacterium
lactis had been cultivated for some time in unboiled urine, it proved
but a feeble lactic ferment when introduced again into milk. Its power
of producing the lactic fermentation had been impaired by residence
in the new medium. In the case before us, indeed, the physiological
difference between the two organisms seems, at first sight, so great,
as to forbid the idea of anything other than a specific difference. The
Bacillus antliracis refuses to grow in hay-infusion in which the hay-
bacillus thrives with the utmost luxuriance ; and conversely, the hay-
bacillus is utterly incapable of growing in the blood of a living
animal, whether introduced in small or in large quantities. The hay-
bacillus is remarkable for its power of resistance to high temperatures,
which is not the case with the Bacillus avthracis. The latter is
destroyed by a very slight acidity of the liquid of cultivation, or by
any considerable degree of alkalinity, whereas the former survives
under such conditions. Both will grow in diluted extract of meat,
but their mode of growth difiers greatly. The hay-bacillus multi-
plies rapidly, and forms a dry and wrinkled skin upon the surface,
while the Bacillus anthracis produces a delicate cloud at the bottom of
the vessel, increasing slowly.

Nothing daunted by these apparently essential differences. Dr.
Buchner has laboured with indomitable perseverance, by means of
experiments carried on in Professor Niigeli's laboratory, to solve
the double problem of changing the Bacillus anthracis into hay-bacillus,
and the converse. Having devised an ingenious apparatus by which
a large reservoir of pure cultivating liquid was placed in communica-
tion with a cultivating vessel, so that any cultivation could be drawn
off by simply turning a stop-cock, and further cultivating liquid
supplied to the organisms remaining in the vessel by a mere inclina-
tion of the api^aratus, Buchner proceeded to cultivate the isolated
Bacillus anthracis in extract of meat for several hundred successive
generations. As an early result of these experiments, he found that
the bacillus lost its power of producing disease in an animal inocu-
lated with it. Up to this point he is confirmed by Dr. Greenfield,^

* Cf. 'Brit. Med. Journ..' loc. cit.

t SB. k. Bay. Akad. Wiss.,' 1880, pp. 3G8-413, and Prof. Lister's Address,
loc. cit.

% See this Journal, ante, p. 83S.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1019

who has found that, when the Bacillus anthracis is cultivated in
aqueous humour, after about six generations it loses its infective
property. Then as Buchner's experiments proceeded, the appearance
of the growing organism was found to undergo gradual modification.
Instead of the cloud at the bottom of the vessel, a scum began to make
its appearance — at first greasy-looking and easily broken up — consti-
tuting, so far as appearances went, an intermediate form between the
two organisms ; and in course of time the scum became drier and
firmer, and at length the modified Bacillus anthracis was found to be
capable of growing in an acid hay-infusion, and to present in every
respect the characters of the hay-bacillus.

The converse feat of changing the hay-bacillus into the Bacillus
anthracis proved very much more difiicult. A great number of ingeni-
ous devices were adopted by Buchncr, who was, nevertheless, con-
tinually baflled, till at last he attained success in the following
manner. Having obtained the blood of a healthy animal under anti-
septic precautions, and dcfibrinated it also antiseptically, and having
arranged his apparatus so that the pure dcfibrinated blood, which was
to be the cultivating medium, should be kept in constant movement,
so as to continually break up the scum, and also keep the red cor-
puscles in perpetual motion so as to convoy oxygen to all parts of the
liquid — in this way imitating, to a certain extent, the conditions of
growth of the Bacillus anthracis outside the animal body, within which
the hay-bacillus could not be got by any means to develop — he pro-
ceeded to cultivate through numerous successive generations. A
transitional form soon made its apjiearance ; but the change advanced
only to a limited degree, so that further progress by this method
became hopeless. The modified form hitherto obtained failed entirely
to grow when injected into the blood of an animal. On the contrary,
it was in a short time completely eliminated from the system, just like
the ordinary hay-bacillus. It had, however, been observed by Buchner
that spores had never been formed by the bacillus growing in the
dcfibrinated blood ; and it occurred to him that, perhaps, if it were
transferred to extract of meat, and induced to form s])ores there, the
modified organism might yet grow in the blood of a living animal.
The carrying out of this idea was crowned with success ; and, both in
the mouse and in the rabbit, Buclmcr succeeded by injecting various
difl:erent quantities containing the ox-ganism iu difierent animals.
When large (quantities wore introduced, the animals died ra})idly li-om
the merely chemical toxic effects of the injected liquid ; but in some
instances, after the period for tliese primary efiects had passed, a fatal
disease supervened — attended, as in autlirax, with great swelling of
the spleen, tlie blood of which was found i)eopled as in that affection
with newly fcjrmed bacilli ; and the s])leens affected iu this way were
found to communicate anthrax to healtliy animals, just like those of
animals which had died of ordinary splenic fever.

Supposing these results to bo trustworthy — and the record of them
bears all the stamp of autlionticity — I need scarcely point out their
transcendent importance as bearing upon the origin of infective
diseases, and their modifications as exhibited in ej)itloniic8."

1020 KECOED OF CUERENT EESEARCHES EELATING TO

Bacteria in Ear-disease, &c.* — M. B, Loewenberg has discovered
in abscesses of the auditory meatus the same microscopic orgauism
(micrococcus) found by M. Pasteur in surface-boils. He regards the
multiplication of boils on any individuals to be due to what he calls
" auto-contagion," or the spread of matter from an open boil over
other parts of the body, conveying its microbia with it, to deposit
them in other follicles of the skin, and there set up fresh irritation ;
and, this granted, the spread of the affection to other individuals is
seen to be a probable occurrence.

The treatment of this disease of the ear is that of cutting through
the abscess and then bathing the place with solutions of thymic or
boric acid, or sprinkling it with the latter acid finely powdered. In
the case of general furnnculosis, lotions of boric acid solution applied
to the whole body have been found to prevent the formation of new
boils in the single instance in which the experiment was made.
With regard to other diseases of the ear, the micrococcus is found in
great abundance in cases of otorrhoea where the ear has not been
properly cleansed, especially where a fetid condition has arisen. In
the employment of emollients, such as poultices, in these cases, the
debris cast off is found to be surrounded by a coat of the micrococcus;
boils are often noticed after a long-continued use of these applications,
and so they may perhaps act deleteriously by developing the parasite.

" Hysterophymes " of Starch and Fat.f — H. Karsten discusses
the chemical composition of Torula, Bacteria, Vibriones, and the other
inciters of putrefaction and fermentation, which he does not regard as
specific organisms, but as pathological forms of cells, terming them
" Amyloid- und Fett-hysterophymen." Their formation depends,
according to him, on the presence of a definite organic substance,
soluble in water, together with phosphoric acid and its salts, and of a
deficiency of nutrient salts in the superficial layer. The addition of
sugar to a butyric nutrient fluid causes the Vihriones, Bacteria, Micro-
cocci, and Dicocci, to develop into Torula-cells.

Carpozyma, the Ferment of Wine.;]: — In the recently published
second volume of his great work on viticulture, M, Ladrey describes
the various ferments associated with the fermentation of beer and
wine, enumerating the various species of Saccharomyces established by
Eeess.

In addition to these, he describes another alcoholic ferment which,
according to Engel, does not belong to that genus, but is a Protomyces
without mycelium, and is called by him Carpozyma. Engel affirms
that all fermentations of the must of fruits are caused by the growth
of a ferment, the mature cells of which are ellipsoidal in form, about
6 ^ in length and 3 /a in breadth, the two ends having each a small
protuberance or apiculus, which gives to the whole the form of a
citron. When vegetating in a fermenting fluid, the young cells

* ' Comptes Rendus,' xci. (ISSO) p. 555.

t 'Zeitsclir. AUgem. oesterr. Apotheker-Verein,' 18S0. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,'
i. (1S80) p. 596.

+ Ladrey, C, ' Traite' de viticulture et d'oenologie,' 2">" ed., toine ii. Paris,
1S80. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 718.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1021

always appear at tliese small protuberances, and nowhere else. Most
commonly they have at first the form of a small spherule ; and not
till one of them has attained one-half its full size does the second
appear at the opposite end; much less frequently the two appear
simultaneously at opposite ends of the mother-cell. Reess did not
succeed in inducing this ferment to produce spores. Engel was more
fortunate, and discovered that the mode of fructification was very
different from that of Saccharomyces, closely resembling that of Pro-
tomyces.

Engel gives the following diagnosis: — Carpozyma n. gen. — Vege-
tative cells isolated, producing buds at their poles, which soon become
detached ; theca spherical, clothed with a perithecium, and hibernating ;
spores numerous, developing very slowly. Solitary species, C. apicu-
latum Engel. — Vegetative cells ellipsoidal, terminated at their poles
by two projecting mamillfe, which give them a resemblance to a
citron.

Lichenes.

Morphology of Lichens : Endophlceal Species of Polyblastia ;
Epiphora ; Magmopsis.*— A. Minks is carrying out a series of minute
morphological observations to assist in determining the yet unsettled
points in the structure of lichens.

1. In his monograph of the Scandinavian Polyblastice, T. Fries
separates from the genus on the one hand P. discrepans Lehm. and
Verrucaria suhdiscrepans Nyl., from the want of one layer, and from
their parasitic habits on other crustaceous lichens, and unites them
with the Endococci among the Pyrenomycetes ; on the other hand,
the bark-dwellers P. lactea Mass., P. sericea Mass., P. fallaciosa
Stizb., and Verrucaria suhccerulescens Nyl., from the want of one layer
and of the gonidia. Minks asserts the Litter to be true lichens, as
shown by the presence of microgonidia in the paraphyses, asci, and
spores, and has subjected the structure again to careful examination.

The hyjihema of crustaceous lichens is the forerunner of the
hyplue in their various forms, and the matrix of the hypha? which
envelope the already formed groups of gonidia. The species of Poly-
blastia already named possess, in addition to the gonangia as a form
of acroblastesis, a mesoblastesis as respects the formation of gonidema
or gonothallium. This form of racsoblastesis occurs in the midst of
the course of the short-celled secondary hyjjha^ and begins with tlie
division of a smaller number of its cells in the common axis of the
hyphfc, producing finally a pseudo-parenchymatous structure, in
which the development of the gonidia takes lAacc from the micro-
gonidia present in each cell. The same process takes place also in
the cells of the hyphema, in the same way as in the hyphema of
Nosloc and Lcplogium.

Tlio forms referred to are united by the author into one species,
without exactly defining its limits. As to its position, he would
unite the cortical P(i}yJ>histi<r with the forms included under Blasto-
desmia, Arrocordia, and Pyrrnnia Ki'irb., rntlier than with the genera

* 'Flora.' Ixiii. (ISSO) pp. 120, lO.'i.
VOL. III. 3 Y

1022 RECOED OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Arthopyrenia and Microthelia, into which the genus Pyrenula Tuck,
must be separated.

2. With respect to the genus of epiphytal lichens Epiphora,
established by Nylander, Minks states that E. encaustica is a true
lichen, which, however, in consequence of unfavourable vital con-
ditions, is unable to attain full development, and does not therefore
possess the characters of a true species, still less of a distinct genus.

3. The new genus Magmopsis was considered by its author Nylan-
der as the representative of the peridium-type among the Byssacefe.
A careful study has, according to Minks, established the fact that, in
the supposed peculiar thallus of Magmopsis, Nylander had under his
eyes a mixture of three distinct layers. The altogether lecideine
apothecia belong to Catillaria athalUna Hepp., or a nearly allied
species. The thallus and the apothecia of this are overgrown by
two other lichen layers, still in an early stage of development. The
apparent peridium-type arose from the overgrowth of a hypothallus
bearing densely crowded gonocysts.

Application of Pringsheim's Researches on Chlorophyll to the
Life of the Lichen.* — Mr. G. Murray, referring to the suggestion
of Dr. Vines in regard to Pringsheim's researches,! that by the aid
of an artificial chlorophyll screen the protoplasm of fungi might be
excited to the decomposition of carbonic acid, and to the formation of
starch from carbonic acid and water, contends that this experiment is
proceeding naturally in Lichens. In these organisms we have the
fungal tissues in the body of the thallus, and the chlorophyll screen
in the gonidial layer; that is, the chlorophyll is in one system of
cells, and the protoplasm, apparently affected by it, in another, which
is in contact. Light traversing the chlorophyll-containing gonidial
layer excites in the fungal tissues the decomposition of carbonic acid.
In evidence he adduces the plentiful occurrence of starch, or rather
lichenin — a substance of the same chemical composition as starch
(CgHjoOg) and formed from it by the action of the free acids of the
plant.

This process, he considers, tends to explain the nature of the con-
sortism of the fungal and algal elements in the autonomous Lichen,
and thus to support tlie well-known views of Schwendener.

Algae.

Agardh's 'Morphologia Floridearum.' — Professor Agardh re-
publishes this work (in Latin, with 301 pp.) uniform with and forming
vol. iii. part 2 of his ' Species, Genera et Ordines Algarum,' in 8vo.
Unfortunately the reader is referred to the 4to edition for the plates
which illustrate the subject, thej not having been reproduced with
the text.

Oxyglossum, a new Genus of Laminariace8B.| — Under this
name Professor J. L. Areschoug proposes to establish a new genus

* ' Joura. Linn. Soc. Lond.' (Bot.), xviii. (1880) pp. 147-8.

t See this Journal, ante, pp. 117 and 480.

% ' Bot. Notiscr,' 1880, pp. 96-98. See ' Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 1154.

INVERTEBRATA, ORYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1023

founded on the species hitherto described by Suringar* and himself
as Laminaria japonica, and previously by Thunberg as Fucus sac-
charinus. The following is his diagnosis of the genus : — Radix
fibrosa ; stipes complanatus, evanescens in laminam e basi acute ovata
et firmiore, lineari-lanceolatam, fascia porcursam, in apicem juniorem
integrum et non dissolvendum longissime productam. Fructificatio
in parte inferiore et crassiore (?).

New Endophytic Alga.f — Under the name Entodadia WittrocJcii,
N. Wille describes a new Alga endophytic or parasitic on two species
of Ectocarpus, E. siliculosus, and E. firmus, in a fiord in the neighbour-
hood of Christiania. It forms unbranched or slightly branched rows
of cells in the interior of the cell-wall of the host. Its cells contain
large starch-grains and parietal chlorophyll. All the cells may form
in succession four, eight, or perhaps a larger number of zoospores,
which escape through a circular opening in the cell-wall.

New Genus of Oscillatorieae.:]:— In " Contributions to the Alga flora
of Wiirtemberg," Dr. 0. Kirchner describes under the name Clastidium,
a new genus of Oscillatoriefe belonging to tlie section Chamaesiphonca3
(Borzi), with the following characters : — Filaments short, unbranched,
without sheath, firmly fixed at the base, provided at the apex with a
thin, erect, unscgmented bristle ; cells scarcely distinguishable in the
young state ; afterwards cylindrical, finally spherical ; reproduction
by isolated gonidia resulting from the entire filament breaking up
into spherical cells.

The only species, C. setigcrum, grows attached to filaments of
Cladophora, which it completely covers ; the bristle is delicate, about
0*05 mm. long; the cell-contents homogeneous, pale blue-green; the
entire filament, excluding the bristle, when mature, 0*028 to 0-038
mm. long, 0-0025 to 0-004 mm. thick.

Clastidium is the only known genus of Oscillatoriea) provided
with a bristle, which is formed at an early period, and may be com-
pared to that of Coleochcete or Bnlbochcete ; no hormogonia have been
observed.

Change of Colour in Oscillatorie8e.§ — P. Eichter states that too
much value must not bo j)laced on colour as a distinguishing character
of the species belonging to the genera Oscillatoria and Phorinidium.
Cohn considers the bright green colour of the Phycochromacoai to be
due to a mixture of green chlorophyll and blue phycocyan. According
to Richtcr, a deficiency of water is favourable to the formation of
phycocyan, and hence to a blue-green colour, in consequence of the
Kulubility of phycocyan in water. The same species will exhibit
diilbrent colours, according to the quantity of water in which it grows,
and other conditions.

• ' AlgtB Japonicie,' p. 21.

t • Christiania Vidcnsk. Forlinndl.,' 1880. Sco ' Bot. Centralbl..' i. (1880)
p. 571».

X ' Jahreshpftc Vcr. fiir vatorl. Nnturk. Wiirtteniberg,' xxxvi. (1880) p. 1;").
§ ' Hot. Centralbl.,' i. (ISSO) p. (505-7.

3 Y 2

1024 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Cell-division in Conferva and CEdogonium.* — N. Wille has
observed the mode of cell-division in a large newly discovered variety
of Conferva amoena which he calls var. norvegica. The cell-wall
appears to be composed of pointed H-shaped pieces, a smaller and a
larger one always alternating, the latter enclosing the margins of the
former like the lid of a box. The whole row is surrounded without
and within by a dense substance which binds it together. The
division of the cells is preceded by the formation of a watery layer,
which may be termed the " lengthening-layer," in the interior of the
dense layer which lies on the inner side of the cell. The further
development of this lengthening-layer causes the older pieces of cell-
wall to become separated from one another. At this period the
nucleus divides, becoming first of all constricted in the middle, and
then breaking up into two parts, which at once begin to separate from
one another, jiarietal protoplasm at the same time collecting between
them. The new septum then develops from the lengthening-layer
in the form of a circular ridge inside the cell, the central part being
perhaps formed at the time, and divides it into two halves. When
fully developed cells open, the cell-wall breaks up into H-shaped
sharp-pointed pieces ; but when cells open while in the act of division,
the ends of these pieces are united by a membrane, since in this case
the line of dissociation does not pass through the innermost denser
layer.

Conferva flaccosa, Ag. (3 Norm Semlice can multiply by the cells
losing their connection with one another.

Cell-division in CEdogonium is thus described by the same writer.
The ring of cellulose is here the " lengthening-layer," and is formed in
the same way as the corresponding layer in Conferva ; but its subse-
quent development differs in the greater firmness of the cell-wall. In
occasional abnormal instances the development resembles that in Con-
ferva. While, in Conferva, the lengthening layer and the septum are
closely united with one another, in CEdogonium they are quite distinct.
In the latter the septum is fonned simultaneously in a disk of parietal
protoplasm, which is no doubt produced by the activity of the nucleus,
this latter appearing to divide like that of Conferva. The ring of
cellulose expands to a new piece of cell-wall, by which means the
young septum is raised up by the pressure in the lower daughter-
cell, uniting them in its growth with the wall of the mother-cell.

Incrusted Filaments of Conferva. f — Professor Hanstein has ob-
served, in a ditch at Godesberg, which receives the very warm water
of a steam engine, as well as water impregnated with iron, conferva-
filaments enclosed in a thicker or thinner, continuous or interrupted,
ochre-coloured envelope. The filaments were stift" bristles or knotty
moniliform threads. The interrupted envelopes Hanstein believes to
have been originally continuous, but to have been ruptured and separ-
ated by subsequent extension of the filaments. Both the girdles and

* ' Christiania Vidensk. Forliandl.,' 1880. See ' Bot. Ceutralbl.,' i. (1880)
p. 579.

t 'SB. niederrhein. Ges. Bonn,' v. (1878), p. 78. See ' Hedwigia,' xix.
(1880) p. 118.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1025

the continuous tubes are always enclosed by an evident membrane, and
the deposit always consists of a number of concentric layers, which
are again sejiarated by membranous division-walls. Isolated streaks
or warts indicate the commencement of the deposit. On treatment
with potassium ferrocyanide, with addition of hydrochloric acid, the
iron is dissolved, and Prussian blue formed. The deposits first appear
as minute dots between the inner and outer membranes, which soon
unite ; or the formation begins between the layers of the septa of two
cells, forces itself outwards, and spreads in the form of a sheatli in
both directions of the superficies of the cell, raising up the outermost
layer. The formation of several concentric layers may be the result
of a repeated raising-up of successive layers of cell-wall.

Kiitzing has described these incrusted confervae as Psichohormium
(according to Hanstein Psichormium), but Hanstein does not consider
the genus one that can be retained, and proposes to combine the species
Psichormium glohuliferiim, didans, approximatum, incBquale, and fus-
cescens under the name Conferva martialis, imtil a more full investiga-
tion has been made of their mode of reproduction. Hanstein states
that propagation has been efiected by disintegration of the cells.
Besides the iron hydrate there is also abundance of calcium carbonate
lying loose on the surface of the filaments or between them, which,
however, does not form an organic envelope, and is similar to that
which occurs in CEclogonium ; it is only attached externally. Klitziug's
figures of P. antliare, cinereum, puhescens, &c., appear to represent such
incrustations.

Hanstein explains the phenomenon by supposing that these confervte,
when in active growth and greedy for carbonic acid, take up the iron
dissolved by the carbonic acid in the water, deprive the carbonate of
its carbonic acid, and deposit beneath its outermost layer of cell-wall
the iron which has been oxidized by the nascent oxygen, while the
calcium carbonate, deprived of one atom of carbonic acid, usually
remains external, but sometimes in the internal spaces.

Germination of the Zoospores of (Edogonium.* — Wille confirms
in all essential points Poulsen's description, adding a few new observa-
tions. The ring is formed at the apex of the cells, and is drawn out
upwards in a longitudinal direction. The red eye-spot can be made
out almost until the first division takes place. A large number of
the germinating plants do not multiply by division, but again form
zoospores, which separate and have a long, extended, but unbranchcd
or only slightly branched root-portion. Those whicli divide are
cither firmly seated or have a unieh-branchcd attachment-disk, which
is formed when the gi'owing root-portion meets with an impediment
by which gi-owth in length is prevented. The j)urietal protoplasm
then continues in an active state, causing a lateral cximnsion of tlio
radicular extremity, and frequently forming new branches, altliough
growth usually ceases. The formation of cellulose ajjpears to be pro-
portionate to the mass of the parietal protoplasm.

* 'Christianiu Vidcnsk. Forhandl.,' 1880. Sec ' Bot. Ccutralbl.,' i. (1880)
p. 581.

1026 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Codiolum gregarium, A. Br.* — Mr. E. M. Holmes records the
recent identification of this Alga from a Briti'sli locality by Dr. Bornet,
it having been discovered at Teignmouth in 1855 by the Rev. R. Cres-
well, one of the few British algologists who have paid attention to the
minute algfe growing near high-water mark, whereby he has discovered
many species overlooked by others.

It forms a scattered velvety growth of a dark-green colour on the
vertical surface of the blocks of sandstone and Devonian limestone
forming the sea-wall, where it is liable to be wetted by the spray at
high tide only, unless the sea be rough, in which case the surf dashes
over it. Mr. Creswell has found it throughout the winter, year after
year, in the same place, presenting the same appearance to the naked
eye and the same characters under the Microscope. In June he has
found full-grown specimens in a spot where the plant is within reach
of every tide.

Mr. Holmes states his reasons for considering it highly probable
that the " hypnospores " of Braun — the globose cells which he believed
to play the role of resting-spores and to preserve the plant during the
winter and spring months — are in fact only the earliest stage of
growth of Hormotriclmm flaccum.

Algse from the Amazons. f — Professor G. Dickie gives a list of
the Algfe collected by Professor J. W. H. Trail during explorations
on the Amazons and branches.

Of the total of 102 species and varieties (excluding Diatomacese)
the following are new : —

BATRACHOsPERMACEa:, TJiorea Train. Confervace^, BMzoclonium
spongiosum, Gloeotila nigrescens, and G. aurea. Protococcace^,
Limnodictyon obscurum. Nostochace^, Anahcena scabra, Cylindro-
spermum cceruleum, and C. janthinum. Oscillariace^, Inactis obscura.
Chroococcace^, Microcystis ccerulea and M. lobata.

Of the Diatomacefe the names of 188 species and varieties from
different localities are given, but this includes a number of duplicate
species found in more than one of the localities enumerated.

Fossil Diatoms. I — The Academy of Genoa has published a paper
by Count Castracane on the importance of diatoms in the formation
of the earth's crust. Owing to the indestructible nature of their test,
the author believes that fossil diatoms enable him to demonstrate that
in the vegetable kingdom " the fixity of species is a constant law."

Dimystax Perrieri, new Ciliated Organism containing Chloro-
phyll.§ — Van Tieghem describes under this name an organism com-
municated by M. Perrier, and found by him in sea-water from Roscoif,
containing Algae and lower animals, and again in a small laboratory
aquarium in the museum.

It consists of a tremulous gelatinous mass of a pure green colour
and sharply limited form, spherical or oval, somewhat more than a

* ' Journ. Linn. Soc' (Bot.), xviii. (18S0) pp. 132-5.

t Ibid., pp. 123-32.

X ' Rev. Sci. Nat.,' ii. (1880) p. 250.

§ ' Bull. Soc. Bot. France," xxvii. (1880) pp. 130-2.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOOAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1027

centimetre in diameter, and fixed by a point of its periphery to some
large marine algal. From a distance it has the appearance of a
Nostoc. Exposed to solar light, it disengages oxygen, and the green
colouring substance is therefore chlorophyll.

More closely examined it is seen that the mass is composed of a
colourless jelly, studded with isolated green points visible to the
naked eye, and sufficiently numerous to give the characteristic green
colour to the whole body. It is therefore not a Nostoc. If some of
the green points are removed from the gelatinous mass, they are
found, when in a sufficiently advanced stage of development, to have
a remarkable constitution.

Each of the small green bodies is nearly spherical, and measures
from 0*3 to 0 • 4 mm. in diameter. It is composed of very finely
granular and rather dark protoplasm, uniformly impregnated through-
out with amorphous chlorophyll. Neither nucleus, vacuoles, nor red
eye-spot can be detected, and the membrane which envelops it is very
delicate. At one spot which may be termed the pole, the cell bears
a tuft of vibratile cilia, attached side by side to adjacent points, and
endowed with independent motion. At two diametrically opposite
points of the equator is a small indentation in the green matter
through which passes a strongly refractive homogeneous protoplasmic
band which traverses the membrane, bends towards the pole in close
contact with the inferior hemisphere, and divides at the same time at
its external border into a delicate fringe composed also of vibratile
cilia. Since these cilia coalesce at their base, they are not capable
of independent movement. The motion is like a wave which is
transmitted gradually from the outermost to the innermost cilium.
In their nature and disposition these lateral cilia therefore differ con-
siderably fnmi those which compose the polar tuft. At this phase of
development there are no cilia either at the opposite pole or at any
other point of the surface of the green grains.

Notwithstanding the movements of these three tufts of cilia, which
are often rapid, the entire body is in general immobile. Its centre of
gravity is so jdaced that, in a position of equilibrium on the slide, all
three groups of cilia are visible to the eye.

At a more advanced stage, the polar tuft first of all disappears
gradually, losing its cilia one by one, which may bo found detached
in the surrounding jelly, the pole finally becoming completely bare.
Next, the two lateral tufts also disa2)pear, apparently by becoming
absorbed in the general pr()t(»i)lasm, this being certainly the case with
the band wliich cnnnects them. A membrane, henceforth continuous
and smooth at all points, with very sharp outline, now clothes tho
proto})lasmic body, which has changed iicither in appearance nor in
size, two slight depress'ious at the sides still indicating the position of
tho lateral tufts of hairs.

Subsequently a fissi(m takes place in the mass following tho equa-
torial plane, and diviiling it into two halves, each half then dividing
a^ain by a division at right angles to the first ; and this process c<m-
tinucK until a family of sixteen round(.d cells are formed, surrounded
by the primitive membrane. The division and multiplication of cells

1028 KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

therefore takes place as in Euglena, at what may be termed the period
of encystment, i. e. during the phase of immobility, when the body is
entirely destitute of cilia.

In the next stage, each of the new cells increases in size, separates
gradually from its sister-cells, becomes clothed with a delicate cell-
wall, and finally entirely covered with vibratile cilia inserted inde-
pendently side by side, and uniformly clothing the whole of the
surface. It next begins to move about, and at the same time secretes
abundance of a gelatinous substance. The cilia then gradually fall
ofi" in proportion as the body grows in acquiring its ultimate dimen-
sions. Only the single polar tuft of hairs now remains. Beneath
this bare surface, at two diametrically opposite points of the equator,
a band of bright homogenous protoplasm now makes its appearance,
which develops on each side into a fringe of hairs towards the pole.
Thus we arrive at the original point of departure.

At no period of development can the presence of cellulose be
determined in the membrane, nor of starch in the protoplasm, other-
wise the process of gelatinization proceeds as in the Nostochine^e and
Bacteriacese.

Whether this organism ought properly to be considered as belong-
ing to the animal or to the vegetable kingdom is, M. Van Tieghem
considers, doubtful, and he adds " in the present state of science this
question, to which formerly so much importance was attached, seems
to me devoid of interest."

The name Dimystax (Perrieri) is proposed, to indicate the secon-
dary tufts of cilia developed after the first tuft has almost completely
disappeared.

MICEOSCOPY, &c.

Permanent Microscopical Preparations of Amphibian Blood.* —

Mr, S. H. Gage says that the very excellent method of drying the cor-
puscles of mammalian blood on the slide is not applicable to the much
more bulky corpuscles of Amphibia. The corpuscles of the latter are
sure to be distorted and seamed in drying, hence various methods of
preserving the corpuscles moist have been tried with varying success.
The following very great modification of the method proposed by
Ranvier in his treatise on histology f has been in use for some time
in the Anatomical Laboratory of Cornell University, and has given
uniformly excellent results. Preparations made three years ago are
quite as good as at first.

Three or four drops of fresh blood are allowed to fall into 10 cc.
of normal salt solution (common salt 750 milligrams, water 100 cc),
preferably contained in a high narrow vessel like a graduated glass or
beaker. The mixture of blood and salt solution should be well
agitated, and then 100 cc. of a saturated aqueous solution of picric

* ' Am. Nat.,' xiv. (1880) pp. 752-3.

t 'Traite technique d'Histologie,' i. (1875-78) p. 195.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1029

acid added with constant stirring. After the corpuscles have settled,
as much of the supernatant liquid as possible is poured off, and in its
place is put about an equal volume of normal salt solution. The cor-
puscles are allowed to settle, the liquid poured off, and another volume
of salt solution added. This is continued until the salt solution
acquires only a faint yellow tinge. The use of the salt solution is,
first, to dilute the blood in order to avoid distortion of the corpuscles,
and second, to wash away the picric acid, so that the subsequent
staining will be more satisfactory.

After pouring off the last salt solution, there is put in its place 10
cc. of a mixture of five parts of Frey's carmine and ninety-five parts of
picrocarmine. The corpuscles will stain in from one to fifteen hours.
A drop of the agitated mixture should be examined occasionally, to
ascertain when the staining is sufficient. The nucleus should be
deep red, and the body of the corpuscle yellow or pinkish.

When the staining is completed as much stainer as possible should
be poured off, and in its place 10 or 15 cc. of acid glycerine (glycerine
100 cc, acetic or formic acid 1 cc). This mixture of corpuscles and
glycerine may be jilaced in a bottle and used at any time, it being
simply necessary to agitate the mixture slightly or to take up some of
the sediment with a pipette and mount it precisely as any other
glycerine preparation.

The process consists, therefore, of these five steps : —

1. The fresh blood is first diluted with about fifty times its volume
of normal salt solution. 2. To this diluted blood is added ten times
as great a volume of a saturated aqueous solution of picric acid. 3.
The picric acid is washed away with normal salt solution. 4. The
corpuscles are stained with picrocarmine, or a mixture of this and
Frey's carmine. 5. They are preserved in acid glycerine, and may be
mounted for the Microscope at any time.

Preparing and Mounting Wings of Micro-Lepidoptera.*— Mr.
C. H. Fernald describes a method by which the wings of the micro-
lepidoptera can be prepared so that the venation can be studied under
the compound Microscope, in a manner that will leave no doubt of
the presence or absence of the faintest vein in the whole wing-
structure.

The removal of the scales by mechanical means he considers un-
satisfactory, as also are the methods recommended for bleaching the
wings, described by Chambers and Dimmock. Wlicn mounted dry by
the latter method, the scales, although bleached, were not sufficiently
transparent to show clearly the more obscure parts of the structure,
and when mountctd in Canada balsam, the entire wing was rendered
so trans2)arent tliat only" the larger veins were visible, and it was found
to be extremely difficult to get rid of the air-bubbles, which so readily
gather midtir the concave portions of certain minute wings.

The author's metliod consists in mounting in cold glycerine ; after
having been bleached by Dimniock's method (which, for bleaching, is

♦ 'Am. Mnn. ISIicr. Jour.,' i. (I8S0) p. 172. (Paper read before the Sub-
section of Microscopy of the Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci.)

1030 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

to be recommended), the wings are transferred to the slide direct from
the water in which they are washed, then allowed to dry (sometimes
hastened by holding the slide over the flame of a lamp) ; and, when
quite dry, a drop of glycerine is to be added, and the cover at once put
on. When the glycerine has penetrated around the edges so as to
completely saturate portions of the wing, the scales at once become
transparent, and the structure is clearly apparent.

By holding the slide over the lamp till ebullition takes place, the
glycerine will be found to replace the air under the concave portions
of the wings, without any injury to the structure ; and even in those
refractory cases when the glycerine has been allowed to boil for a
considerable length of time, no injury was found to be done to the
wing-membrane.

Microscopical Investigation of Wood. — The Vienna Academy
propose as the subject for the Baumgartner prize of 1000 florins,
" The microscopical investigation of the wood of living and fossil
plants." By such investigation, and the comparison of all known
recent and fossil woods, it is desired to ascertain characters whereby
it will be possible to determine the genus and species with certainty
from microscopical sections. Papers must be sent in before Decem-
ber 31st, 1882, and the prize will be awarded at the anniversary
meeting in 1883.

Permanent Preparations of Plasmodium.* — Two methods are
already known for making permanent preparations of the motile or
naked protoplasmic stage of the Myxomycetes ; the older one being to
dry the extended plasmodium, and the newer, to harden it with osmic
acid. Both these methods are defective, for osmic acid changes the
colour of the protoplasm, and drying causes it to shrink as well as to
change colour.

Mr. S. H. Gage gives the following as a simple and efficient
method of extension and preservation : Small pieces of the rotten
wood, on which the plasmodium is found, should be placed on
moistened microscope-slides, with some of the plasmodium touching
the slides. These should be on a piece of window or plate glass, and
over the whole should be placed a bell-jar, or other cover, to prevent
evaporation. After an hour or more, the glass on which the slides
rest should be lifted up to see whether the plasmodium has crawled
out upon any of the slides. If any of the slides are satisfactory, lift
off the bell-jar, and remove the pieces of wood from the slide, the
Plasmodium remaining. The slide should then be put very gently
into a mixture of equal parts of a saturated aqueous solution of picric
acid and 95 per cent, alcohol ; it should be removed in fifteen or twenty
minutes, and placed, for about the same length of time, in 95 per
cent, alcohol ; it may then be mounted in Canada balsam in the
usual way, but without previous clearing. The picric acid stiffens the
protoplasm almost instantly, but does not shrink it ; the alcohol
removes the water, and allows of Canada balsam mounting.

* 'Am. Mon. Micr. Journ.,' i. (1880) pp. 173-4. (Paper read before the
Sub-section of Microscopy of the Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci.)

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1031

The method is especially good for the yellow plasmodium, as the
colour is precisely that of the picric acid solution. If white Plas-
modium is to be mounted, it should be soaked in 2.5 per cent, alcohol,
to remove the yellow colour of the picric acid, before anhydrating it
with strong alcohol. Experiments have not been tried with plasmo-
dium of purple and other colours to determine successful methods
of preservation, but some slight modification of the above is confi-
dently expected to succeed.

Preparation of Green Algae.*— Last summer Prof. 0. Nordstedt
collected at Jonkoping the rare, and in many respects interesting,
alga, SphcBroploea annulina. This alga has the chlorophyll in the
sterile cellules arranged in transversal bands or rings. As he tried
to dry them, he found that the rings were destroyed by getting dry.
He repeatedly tried to obtain good microscopical preparations by using
*' liquor HantzschifB," as well as acetate of potassium ; but when
unsuccessful, he applied warmth. He put a small bottle, containing
the alga in water, on a black object, and exposed it to strong sunlight
for a couple of hours. When the alga afterwards was dried, the rings
proved to be pretty well preserved ; when afterwards heated by a
spirit lamp, the thermometer indicated that the rings when boiled

h minute at 35°-40° Ccls. Did not keep, or were very badly preserved.
Wiien boiled 5-10 minutes!

at 45° Cels., § minute at > The rings kept very well.

50°-98°Cel3 )

10 minutes at GO- Cels., j"^'?^ ""?' Tf ^T'^'lf ^'T *V "^•'?'
2 minutes at 98° Cels. j tiie^'celTule ° ''^ " ''^"""''"^^

It appears to be most convenient for the purpose to use 40^-50° Cels.
during about two minutes.

In the Spirogyra tlie chlorophyll-bands, when the plant was boiled,
also kept tolerably well ; ho, therefore, has often applied heat in pre-
paring them. The different species seem to require different degrees
of heat.

Slides from the Naples Zoological Station. — A provisional
priced catalogue of the microscopical preparations issued by the
Zoological Station at Naples t has now been published.f It includes
4 different preparations of Protozoa, 33 of Cadenterata, 49 of Echino-
dermata, 33 of Vermes, 57 of Arthropoda, 54 of Mollusca, and 193 of
Vertobrata.

The list is prefaced by an explanatory note by Dr. A. Dohrn, tho
Director of the Station, in which he points out that tho microscopical
preparations which have liitlicrto been sold " have only in rare cases a
true 8ci(!ntitic value. For tliis they must not only be prepared by hands
well skilled in the t(;i-lmicul processes, but thero must also bo tho
understanding of scientific prol)lenis and points of view," so that tho
preparations may exhibit just those jiuints which ai-o of importance

* 'Grovilloa,' ix. (ISSO) pp. .S7-8 (from 'I3ot. Notiser').

t See this Journal, nntc, p. 700.

X ' MT. Zool. Stat. Nenpel,' ii. (1880) pp. 238-53.

1032

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

scientifically. The slides are preparer! under the superintendence of
Mr. F. Meyer of Leipzig, who at Dr. Dohrn's request undertook this
department. They are of the ordinary English size, and their price
varies from 1 to 10 francs.

Aeroscopes.* — In his studies on the microscopic organisms con-
tained in the atmosphere, M. P. Miquel describes two forms of
aeroscopes in use at the Montsouris Observatory for collecting such
organisms.

M. Miquel objects to Dr. Maddox's " aeroconiscope," f that the
quality of air passing during each experiment cannot be calculated,
so that the statement of the number of germs collected has no definite
signification. In his opinion, it is preferable to make use of apparatus
capable of acting in all weathers, during rain and squalls as well as in
fine weather.

Fig. 105 represents his " aeroscope a aspiration," which is composed
essentially of two parts — the bell A, which is solidly fixed at 2 metres
from the ground, and the cone B, which is screwed to A. The former
has an aspiring tube placed in communication with a trumpet, and the

FiQ. 106.

Fig. 105.

latter has at its upper part a very fine aperture, by which the air is
directed to the centre of a thin glass plate smeared with a mixture of
glycerine and glucose. This plate, which is kept in a horizontal
position, may be brought nearer to the summit of the cone, or vice
versa. The air aspired by the trumpet, after having passed through
the apparatus, is received in a meter, which measures its volume
exactly.

A second instrmnent (" aeroscope a girouette ") is shown in Fig. 106.
It operates by the action of currents of air, and is used only to
analyze the air qualitatively when the other form cannot be employed.
Like the apparatus of Drs. Maddox and Cunningham, it is light and
portable, but in the same time gives 100 times as many germs. It is
in the form of an S, and consists of the chambers B (united to a
vane, so that the upper bell-shaped aperture is kept constantly
opposite to the wind), and A carrying a thin glass plate and a conical

* ' Brebissonia,' ii. (1880) p. 147.
t ' Mod. Micr. Journ.,' June, 1870.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1033

diaphragm, and having its lower aperture turned in the direction of
the currents. The apparatus set upon a vertical axis is acted upon
by the feeblest currents. A Robinson anemometer serves to measure
the velocity of the air during the experiment, and to estimate
approximately the volume which has passed through the apparatus.

Both forms were originally constructed of glass, but are now
made of copper nickelled.

Microscopical Appearance of the Valves of Diatoms.* — This
paper by Mr. Julien Deby is written with the view of enabling micro-
scopists more readily to interpret the appearances presented by diatoms
as seen under the Microscope, which is often very difficult with trans-
mitted light. By an attentive examination, however, of the details,
" even the most incomprehensible problems will be resolved as if by
enchantment."

Taking Niti^chia as the first type, the author divides the different
forms into two principal divisions — those in which the two sections of
a valve meet at an acute angle, and those which meet at an obtuse
angle, each of which divisions may have the valve-sections plane or '
curved. Tliese four divisions may each be subdivided into three others,
according as the midrib is central, normally excentric, or submarginal
(that is, with one of the valve-sections nearly obsolete).

The author then gives diagrams of the appearances of various
forms, of wliich we can only subjoin one — Fig. 107 [sm., im., upper
and lower midrib; o, connective). This
shows a Nitschia with valves whose two
sections form an acute angle, and witli
an excentric midrib. Taking the line
which represents the surface of either
of the larger sections as a horizontal,
and drawing tlie perpendiculars, we
shall have the true microscopical pro-
jection of the diatom when viewed from
the upper or under side respectively.

The author considers tliat it is
necessary to pay more attention to
details tlian has liitherto been the case
in this difBcult genus, and in defining
every species (1) to describe the general
form of the frnstule, and tlie relations
of the length of the two sections of tlie
valves to the breadth ; (2) to indicate
the position of the midrib by reference
to the imaginary central line of tin
valve, that is to indicate the relative
size of the two sections ; (3) to deter-
mine the number of stria? by reference to tlic nodult-s of tlio midrib;
(1) to count the siliceous grains of the midrib, the striie of tlio valve
sections, and the number of points per stria ]>er micro-millinietro ; (.'")) to
indicate if the valve is acute or obtuse, and its sections plane or curved.
* Sep. rcpr. ' Ann. Soc. n,!;;. Micr.,' v. (1880), Mt-ni., IH pp. aii.l 20 figs.

Fio. 107.

1034 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Cleaning Diatoms with Soap.* — Dr. H. Stolterfoth having tried to
clean some of the Welsh deposits hy the common acid process, which
gave very poor results, even alkalies destroying the valves of the
larger Surirellce before they were free from the dirt, boiled them in
soap and water for about an hour, with excellent results. The process
is also applicable to all kinds of fresh- and salt-water deposits.

The method is this : Place in a test-tube (6 inches by 1 inch) a
portion of the earth, about ^ inch in depth, and pour in water till the
tube is one-fourth full ; into this drop a piece of common yellow
soap, about the size of a small pea, and boil gently over a lamp. The
solution should be examined under the Microscope from time to time,
by taking out a drop with a dipping-tube, and putting it on a slide ; as
soon as it is seen that the valves are clean, fill up the test-tube with
cold water, and let it stand, then wash in the usual way, until all trace
of soap is removed.

In pouring on the cold water after the boiling, the solution is
quite fluid as long as the water is warm. During this time the diatoms
fall to the bottom, but, on getting cold, the solution assumes a some-
what jelly-like consistency, and holds the fine particles and mud in
suspension, and is a very useful means of getting rid of what is often
a great trouble.

In deposits in which there is much organic matter, recourse must
still be had to acids or fire to destroy this, but the result will be im-
proved by afterwards boiling in soap and water. The author has also
boiled fresh gatherings in soap and water, and then burnt on platinum
foil with good success, much of the flocculent matter being removed.

Dr. E. Kaiser, of Berlin, referring to this paper, says t that the pro-
cess was communicated to him several years ago from England, but
that " it has very many defects and inconveniences."

Separation of Heavy Microsopic Minerals.;}: — In order to separate
minute particles of heavy minerals, of diiferent specific gravities, from
each other, M. Eene Breon proposes to employ a mixture of the fused
chlorides of lead and zinc, the respective specific gravities of these
two liquids being 5 and 2*4, so that by properly proportioning the
mixture, any two minerals of different specific gravities, but lying
within the above limits, can be separated. The fine powder to be
experimented on is thrown into the fused chlorides contained in a
conical glass tube, when the particles speedily come to rest, some
floating, and the others sunk at the bottom of the tube ; the mass is
then allowed to cool, and when set, the tube is plunged into cold water,
thus cracking the glass. The upper and lower portions of the mass
of chlorides containing the minerals can then be removed, and the
chlorides dissolved out with water acidulated with hydrochloric acid.

Pearson-Teesdale Microtome. — At the October Meeting Mr.
Washington Teesdale exhibited a small and convenient form of micro-

* ' Journ. Quek. Micr. Club,' v. (1880) pp. 95-6.
t ' Bot. Ceiitralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 1213.

% ' Bull. Soc. Min. France,' iii. See ' Mineralog. Mag. and Journ. Mineralog.
Soc.,' iv. (1880) p. 129.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOQAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1035

tome, for amateur use, made by Mr. A. A. Pearson, of Leeds. The
instrument is shown in Figs. 108 and 109, and was thus described by
Mr. Teosdale : —

"In general form it is based upon the Continental model of Dr.
Schieflferdecker, of Strassburg,* but it is more compact, and small
objects are more readily held or packed, as the holding or grasping

Fig. 108.

Fig. 109.

is eflfected by jaws closing centrally like those of an American
chuck. The object so held is raised by a double-threaded screw
of 50 per in., metrically equal to (but possessing some advantage
over) one of 25 threads per in. Its elevation is regulated and recorded
by a circular plate and spring stop catching in 20 equal divisions,
each one of which indicates an advance of -^—^ in. In practice I have
generally found about ^lx)> ^^ ^^'^ divisions of this graduation, the
most convenient average thickness for vegetable sections.

I have used most of the forms of ordinary section-cutters for nearly
twenty years. Some are ingeniously contrived and good in theory,
or suitable for some special purpose, but have some practical fault
or inconvenience for the general all-round work of an amateur.
The Strassburg model which furnished the basis of the design of
this, was, it appeared to me, an excellent one, and the principle of its
construction sound, inasmuch as the object was not irregularly forced
up by pressure from beneath, but held firm, and liad the cutting table
or guide-plate lowered by screw and graduated index. Such intelli-
gent mechanical aid to accuracy and facility ought, and would,
assuredly have obtained favourable recognition and general adoption,
but, uufortiniately, in copies of it made and distributed in England
the screw was cut taper in the lathe (instead of being cut perfectly
parallel with stocks and ilies), consequently the instrument was some-
wliat shaky."

* ' Quart. Joiirn. Mior. Sci.' (1877) p. n.'i.

1036

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Hailes' Poly-microtome.* — This instrument, shown in Figs. 110
and 111, is the design of Dr. W. Hailes, Professor of Histology, &c., at
Albany Medical College (U.S.A.), who thus describes it: —

This instrument is designed especially for use in the working

Fig. 110.

Poly-microtome (without freezing apparatus). A, small well, fitting on
pyramidal bed-plate. B, pyramidal bed-plate, containing different sizes. C,
micrometer screw. D, ratchet-wheel attached to screw. E, lever actuating
the micrometer screw by means of a pawl engaging in teeth of ratchet-wheel.
F, arm, carrying a dog, which prevents back motion of screw. G, regulator for
limiting the throw of lever, and consequently governing the micrometer screw.
H, lever-nut for fixing regulator. I, index, with pointer and graduated scale,
from ^^o inch to -s-tio iii<^h. K, knife for cutting sections. L, knob to turn
micrometer screw direct when pawls are attached. M, table-clamp. T, table of
microtome, with glass top to facilitate cutting.

laboratories of medical schools and colleges, where large numbers
of sections are required for microscopical examination. It may be
employed as a simple instrument or as a freezing microtome, arranged
for ice and salt — ether spray, phigoline, &c.

The employment of ice and salt (coarse) is preferred, because it
costs but little and freezes the mass solidly and quickly, and, if
desired, 500 or 1000 sections can be obtained in a few moments.

* 'Science,' i. (1880) p. 187. (2 figs.)

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1037

Time of freezing is about seven minutes, except in very warm weather,
when it requires a few moments longer. The instrument does not
work so satisfactorily in warm weather, owing to the rapid melting of
the surface of the preparation. It is absolutely necessary that the
mass should be frozen solid, or the sections cannot be cut smoothly.
An extra freezer may be employed, and
while one specimen is being cut the other Fig. 111.

may be frozen, and by exchanging cylinders f

(they being interchangeable) no delay is /f^^^^^^^^

necessary to its continuous operation. // _..._.7\\

The art of cutting is readily acquired, ''" e 'H

and when the preparation is frozen it is the V:;^ ----^— — '.'/

work of a few moments to obtain several o/'"\ ' V^}'// /""n
hundred sections. Two hundred sections or ^-r^-1il■^.f^ '^r-^-j-''l
more, if desired, can be made each minute V-' ~ i |ji|H R >;,V
and of a uniform thickness of about ^L of ; i:^^[~|jl!]i| ^^^ i
an inch (thinner or thicker, from about | ,l^-rj--in|l[---^l j
5^ViT inch to about t^^^ inch, according as ciy-"-"' ^'^^ ^.^ /

the pointer is set). The delivery, ease, and ~"--— /> '

rapidity with which they can be cut, must ^

be seen in order to be appreciated. It is a, B, tube containing spe-

not necessary to remove the sections from cimen, which is surrounded

the knife every time, but twenty or thirty ^y freezing mixture in tiio

may be permitted to collect upon the blade ; fceiver C, D E,F, revolving

*i T 1 J r ^1 3 i.1 ^ -r I'opper, With wings W, W,

they he curled or folded up upon the knife, f^r stirring the ice G, outlet

and when placed in water straighten them- for melted ice.

selves out perfectly in the course of a few

hours. The knife is an ordinary long knife from an amputating

case.

Perfectly fresh tissues may be cut without any previous prepar-
ation, using ordinary mucilage (acaci39) to freeze in, but most speci-
mens require special preparation. If preserved in Miiller's fluid,
alcohol, &c., they require to be washed several hours in running
water ; then according to the suggestion of Dr. D. J. Hamilton,* the
specimen is placed in a strong syrup (sugar, two ounces ; water, one
ounce), for twenty-four hours, and is removed to ordinary mucilago
aeaciaa for forty-eight hours, and is then cut in the freezing micro-
tome.

The sections may be kept indefinitely in a preservative fluid :
R glycerin®, 5iv ; aqua) destil. 5iv ; acidi carbolici, gtt. iij ; boil and
filter. The addition of alcohol 5U is advisable.

Salicylic Acid as a Preservative. f — Mr. A. Micklc has had very
good success witli salicylK; acid in mounting vegetable preparations
of all kinds. One diHiculty, however, is that it dissolves very
8j)aringly in water, and alcohol j)roduces clianges wliich are frequently
undesirable. It is well known tluit salicylic acid dissolves freely in
a solution of borax, and it is also familiar to most persons that borax

* Soo " A Now Method of Prppftiing liHrgo Sections of Norvoiis Centres for
Microscopicni Fnvostigalion."— • Journ. Anat. and I'liys.,' vol. xii.
t 'Am. .lourn. Micr.,' v. (1880) p. 185 (>.

VOL. HI. 3 z

1038 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

itself is quite efficient as a preservative. It therefore occurred to him
to combine them, two parts of salicylic acid and one part of borax
dissolving completely in half an ounce of glycerine — this solution,
when mixed with three parts of water, forming an excellent preserva-
tive fluid for coarse organisms. More delicate preparations should be
mounted in the above solution diluted with five parts of water.

Preparations so mounted are very durable, and there is no danger
of the salts crystallizing out and spoiling the object, and, in addition,
it is very easily kept in a cell of almost any kind.

Dry "Mounts" for the Microscope.* — Prof. Hamilton L. Smith,
referring to his former papei',f in which he described the methods
which he had found tolerably successful, viz. the rings made of shellac
and lampblack, and those punched out of gutta-percha tissue, further
says "that the former appear to answer quite well, and the changes if
any are very slight, yet he has in a very few cases observed a
deterioration after the lapse of a year or so, probably from imperfect
manipulation. Although he has not observed any great change in
the gutta-percha mounts, he is not certain they will stand prolonged
use with immersion objectives without injury. Messrs. Spencer are
decidedly of opinion that the shellac ring is the better for durability ;
and Mr. Gundlach says that the gutta-percha ring will not stand cedar
oil. Dr. Phin has suggested that in time the gutta-percha tissue will
disintegrate, but the author has not yet noticed this, and does not
think it will happen under the cover of a " mount," especially if pro-
tected by a ring of cement subsequently applied. If it does, it will
of course be a great objection to its use. The " tissue " becomes so
charged with electricity by handling, and also by punching, that it
interferes seriously with the latter operation, and thus makes it neces-
sary to place strips of the " tissue " on thin moistened strips of paper,
and to punch out both at the same time. The preparation of the
shellac rings by the turntable obliges one to keep on hand a large
stock all the time, to ensure perfect drying and to have them always
ready. The author is obliged to have some 1000 or 1500 on hand in
advance, and this necessitates a considerable outlay in stock which
will not always be convenient for amateurs.

For the above reasons, a new process is now proposed which
appears to meet all the desired wants, and which combines the
advantages of the shellac cement and the gutta-percha rings. The
author says that " the very simplicity of this process causes him to
wonder why it was not thought of before."

Take a sheet of thin writing paper, white or coloured, and dip it
into thick shellac varnish (shellac dissolved in alcohol), and hang it
up to dry. When thoroughly dry, it should have a good glaze of
the varnish on it (different thicknesses of paper can be used according
to depth of cell required). Out of this shellac paper cut the rings,
and these can be made in any quantity, and kept for any time. The
process of mounting is simple. The slide is cleaned and the flat
paper ring placed in the centre ; on this the cover is placed, having

* ' Science,' i. (1880) p. 74. t See tliis Journal, ante, p. 861.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOaAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1039

the object dried on it, and the two are held together by the forceps
and gently warmed ; this serves to attach the ring to the slide and
cover at several points, so that the forceps may now be laid aside.
The next step is to take a glass slip (another slide), and laying this
on the cover, to grasp the two slides at each end by the finger and
thumb of the two hands, and pressing them tightly together, to warm
the slide gently ; by looking at the ring obliquely on the under side
one can tell at once when all the air is pressed out, and the adhesion
is complete between the cover and the ring, and also the ring and the
slide, and they must be held together a moment or two to cool. If
the lac is sufiiciently thick on the paper, the adhesion takes place
quickly, and with moderate heat, and there will be no danger of
breaking the cover, unless it has been warped in the process of warm-
ing, which will sometimes occur when very thin glass has been heated
too much for the purpose of burning off the organic matter, or when
the su2)port is too small in diameter, or when it is not flat.

The author, in conclusion, says, " I cannot conceive of anything more
satisfactory than these rings. IMany largo objects which would be
crushed if one used only the shellac rings made on the slide by the
use of the turntable, by the giving way of these by softening, and
under the necessary pressure for attaching the cover, are perfectly
protected by the paper rings. I am satisfied that the balsam mounts
will be much less frequently used as soon as we can find some sure
dry process. The diatoms as a rule show much better when mounted
dry, and with whole frustnles, exhibiting both the side and the front
view, also the mode of attachment, &c. The dry mounts are certainly
to be preferred when they are desired for anything except pretty
objects, and even for this latter purjjosc there is often a very great
difference in favour of the dry mount. Although I have not used
these shellac paper rings for any very great length of time, yet I can
see no reason why they should not be equal to the simple shellac ring
for durability, and very much superior to it in other respects."

We should note, in regard to this suggestion of Prof. Hamilton
Smitli, that the rings above referred to were the subject of a paper
read to this Society by Mr. James Smith* in 18()5.

Dr. Phin has found, he says,t "that pure shellac in all its forms
is very apt to separate from the glass after a time.

Wax Cells. :J: — Dr. Phin does not appear to be disposed to abandon
these cells, as suggested by their originator (Prof. Hamilton L.
Smitli). He has carefully examined a number of slides of the mounting
material of which wax forms a part. Some were found to be spoilt,
others were good. It is- evident that the dew may arise either from

* 'Trans. Micr. Soc. Lond.,' xiv. (18GG) p. 29. The following is nn extract
from Mr. Jnnies Smitli's proper: — "lUitli surfiic-c8 of the rnrdboanl [are to he]
coveri'd willi a cciuiiit turimil of whcUac or niaiiiic j^hir di.sscdvi'd in naplitha ;
onu to Ihrou cuutinj^s of this ceiiunt Ix-iii^ u.sually sullifirnt, cure hcinf: tnkcu
that one ia perfectly dry lioturo the next is iipplied. The cells hi iug tlius pre-
pared, tlicy Clin be cnt oil", and by the ap|dication of heat and slight pressure are
easily attached to a class slide."

t * Am. Journ. Micr.,' v. (IS.s(l) p. WX X Ibid.

a z 2

1040 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the object itself or from the mountirig material. In the case of such
objects as Polycistina and diatoms which have been exposed to low
red heat, it is unlikely that any vapours would ever be given off, and
slides of these objects have been found both with dew and free from
it. A good deal probably depends upon the quality of the wax and
the processes used in bleaching it. Where bleached by exposure to
sunlight and water, and afterwards carefully melted, it is believed no
vapour will be given off. Where the wax has been bleached by
the action of acids and chlorine it is difficult to tell what changes may
occur.

Amongst the directions for mounting in wax cells, one which has
been generally given and very usually followed, is to soften the wax
with turpentine at the point where the object is to be placed. When
this has been done, and the cell closed immediately, the turpentine is
sure to evaporate and settle on the cover. It there becomes oxidized
or ozonized, so that it is no longer volatile, and it was undoubtedly
this ozonized turpentine which resisted the high temperature alluded
to by Prof. Smith. Instead of turpentine, a copper wire should be
used, highly heated, and held near but not in contact with the wax.

To the same tenor are the remarks of Mr. C. F. Cox and Mr. J. F.
Stidham.* The former points out that while if the ground for con-
demnation— "dew" on the cover-glass — were found exclusively in
the case of wax cells, it might be fair to infer that the cause was the
wax, yet as it is found more or less in cells of all kinds, and is not
worse in wax cells than in most others, the denunciation by Prof.
H. L. Smith of his own invention is not justified. The misty con-
densation may possibly be caused in some cases by emanations from
the sheet wax, but Mr. Cox's experience goes to prove that it is
mainly due to the too free use of cements containing resinous or oily
solvents, like turpentine or benzole, though sometimes it may arise
from the want of dryness in the object itself, or a recrystallization of
chemical constituents of the cements, as the Professor suggests. If
a cement is used, composed of shellac dissolved in alcohol, plenty
of time allowed for the completion of each step, no more cement used
than is necessary, and the sj)ecimen itself thoroughly dry, the cell will
be free from vapour and condensations, and he is therefore of opinion
that the wax cell is "the best cell for dry objects that has ever been
used."

Mr. Stidham's testimony is to the same effect. He " has found
no trouble since covering the whole cell with a thin film of shellac,
and using shellac to fix the cover, provided the day was a dry one,
and the cover is held for a moment over the lamj) flame." He thinks
Mr. C. C. Merriman's suggestion of leaving a small opening so that
moisture may get out would be of practical advantage if it can be
done.

Improvement in Making Wax Cells.! — For making wax cells,
when they are wanted smoother and handsomer than they can be made
with a punch alone, Mr. J. D. White recommends the following

* • Am. Journ. Micr.,' v. (ISSO) p. 207.

t ' Am. Mon. Micr. Journ..' i. (1880) p. 150-1.

INVEBTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1041

process as simpler and easier than that of Dr. Hamlin, described on
page 507.

With home-made punches of ordinary brass tubing (cartiidge
cases answer very well), cut out rings and disks a little larger than
the finished cells are to be, and fasten them to the sides by pressure
and gentle warmth, after centering as accurately as possible. Then,
with a tool made by bending a small chisel at a right angle about
half an inch from the edge, turn or scrape the cell on a turntable until
it is of the right size. If the tool is sharp, a beautifully polished sur-
face will always result. The chisels which accompany sets of brad-
awls are just right ; but any flat piece of steel, if not too heavy or
clumsy, will do. The cutting edge should be about one-fourth of an
inch wide. Punches, and all tools used for cutting wax, should always
be dipped or moistened in starch, prepared precisely as for laundry
use ; this operates much better than water, or indeed anything else.

Atwood's Rubber Cell.* — Mr. H. F. Atwood calls attention to a
cell for opaque objects made of hard rubber highly polished.

Fig. 112 is a sectional view of the cell, the dotted line indicating
the position of the thin glass covei*. The base is solid,
giving a black background of rubber, and round the top *^'^' ^ '""
is a ledge fitted to receive a ^-inch cover-glass, which ^^^^----^^g^
may be secured by a little shellac or similar cement.

The cell is claimed to be specially advantageous in two ways : —
1st. It solves the problem which often perplexes the collector who is
crowded for cabinet room. Many objects for future reference may be
mounted, numbered, and put away without a slide, a cabinet drawer
holding 200, while but 40 slides could be accommodated in the
same space. 2nd. In exchanges the cells may be sent through the
post without glass slips, so that there is a saving in postage and no
risk of breakage.

Mr. Atwood suggests that the cell " may be attached to a glass
slip by any cement before or after preparation." Our own experience
is that rubber is by no means easy to attach securely, and that some
other means of examining the cells under the Microscope will be neces-
sary. In this view, Messrs. Beck have devised a circular cell-holder,
in ebonite, holding 12 cells, which lies upon the stage, and can be
rotated so as to bring each cell successively under the objective. t

Parkes's Frog-plate. - Instead of the ordinary method of examining
the circulation of the blond in the frog's foot, which is attended with
some degree of inconvenience, at any rate, to the animal, the following
plan is recommended; —

Put the frog into an empty wide-mouthed bottle (such as a pickle-
jar), cover the cork witli a piece of linen rag, on which pour a little
sulphuric ether, and then insert the cork immediately, and lay the
bottle on its side. In a ft;w minutes the animal will be sufficiently

• 'Sciencp,' i. (1880) p. 200.

t A ilrscriptinn of tlii.-) hoMcr, with n flRurf, will !><• •^\\-cn in tho next iniml)or.

1042

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 113.

etherized * without affecting the circulation, and may then be placed
on the frog-plate, shown in Fig. 113, in an erect position, with its feet

on the circular glass, a little
soft tape being placed — not too
tightly — round the body to keep
it erect. The web of the foot
may now be moistened with a
little cold water, and the plate
laid on the stage for examina-
tion.

If sufficiently etherized, the
frog will remain perfectly quiet
for half an hour, and both feet
may be examined alternately.
The toes must of course be
spread out so as to stretch the
web, which should be moistened
occasionally with a camel-hair
pencil dipped in cold water.
The process may be repeated
many times on the same frog
if carefully managed, but after
each examination it should be
piit into a vessel with a little
cold water, till it recovers con-
sciousness.

Sternberg's Culture-cell.f — There are many experiments in
which a culture-cell is required which will preserve the blood in a
fluid condition, free from atmospheric contamination, and yet sur-
rounded by a sufficient amount of air to furnish the necessary oxygen
to organisms that may develop from any germs that may be present
in the blood. In addition to this it is necessary that a very thin
stratum of blood should be within reach for examination by the
highest-power immersion objectives.

The Boldeman cell fulfils the first requirement. A central emi-
nence is surrounded by a circular channel, ground in the glass, which
serves the purpose of an air-chamber. The summit of the central
eminence is slightly concave, and the drop of fluid to be observed is
placed upon this and protected with a thin glass cover, which is
attached to the slide by a circle of cement, or simply by a little oil.

The main objection to this cell was found by Mr. G. M. Sternberg,
Surgeon U.S. Army, to be that the stratum of blood held in the
shallow cup of the central eminence was too thick for satisfactory
examination with high powers; that portion of the fluid next the
cover, which could be brought into focus, being shut off from the

* It may always be known when the frog is fully under the influence of the
ether, by placing it on its back, before taking it out of the bottle, as it will not
remain quietly in this position except when etherized.

t ' Am. Mon. Micr. Journ.,' i. (1880) pp. 141-3. 1 fig.

INVERTEBRA.TA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1043

light by floating corpuscles in tlio background. And this difficulty
led him to invent the following culture-slide.

A circular hole, about \ inch in diameter, is drilled through the
centre of a glass slide. A very thin circle of cement, ^ inch in
diameter, is then turned about this central hole on one side of the
slide, and a thin glass cover is attached to it by gentle pressure.
When the cemeiit is thoroughly dry, the cell is ready to receive
the drop of blood, or other fluid which is to be observed. This is
placed in the bottom of the cell (a, Fig. 114), and flows by capillary
attraction into the space below, between the thin cover and the slide,
until it extends to the circle of cement by which the cover is attached.

Fig. 114.

a

he be

We have thus a thin stratum of the fluid between the points 6 and c,
which may readily be examined by inverting the slide and bringing an
immersion lens down upon any point between the central air-chamber
and the circle of cement by which the cover is attached. Finally, the
cell is closed by turning a still larger circle of cement upon the upper
surface of the slide, and attiching a larger thin glass circle (d).

Mr. Sternberg docs not sec why it should not also serve a good
purpose as a cell in which to mount objects either dry or in fluid. If
the manufacturers would furnish glass slips of diflcrent thicknesses,
having central perforations of :j to ^ inch in diameter, a thin glass
cover can easily be attached to make the bottom to the cell ; and
these might, for many purposes, replace the various cells in common
use.

Apertures exceeding 180° in Air. — Mr. Shadbolt's note on this
subject will be found in the Proceedings of the November Meeting,
infra, p. 1080.

Visibility of Minute Objects — New Medium for Mounting
{Monohromide of Naphthaline). — Professor Abbe has recently been
experimenting upon substances adapted for mounting diatoms (having
regard to the suggestions made in Mr. Stoi»henson's recent paper *),
and has discovered that monohromide of naphthaline is very suitablo
for the purpose, and does not present the inconveniences of some of
the other substances.

Tlio liquid is colourless and oleaginous, with the odour of naph-
thaline. It is soluble" in alcohol and otlicr, and has a density of
1*555, with a refractive index of l-r)5(S, giving therefore as tho
" index of visibility" 22 as against 11 for Canada balsam. It is not
volatile.

Dr. II. van Ileurck refers to this substance, some of which was
sent him by Mr. Zeiss. His experiments with it have given tho l>est

• Sec this Joiirnnl, antr, p. ^^CtX,

1044 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

results, the diatoms mounted in it showing with " excessive beauty."
The strife of Ampldpleura pellucida, amongst others, were clearer than
he ever before saw them. Objectives, with which he had never been
able to see the strife by simple lamp-light, showed them at once in
the new medium. He considers, therefore, that its employment will
be found very useful wherever the delicate details of diatoms are not
sufficiently visible in ordinary preparations.

Dr. L. Dippel, also writing * on Mr. Stephenson's paper, commends
oil of aniseed and oil of cassia for mounting, the last of which has
especially proved to be well adapted for making the fine structure of
the siliceous valves clearly visible. He has recommended both oils
for some years to one and another of the German mounters. Oil of
aniseed was employed by Professor Weiss in studying diatoms.f

Of the fluids which Mr. Stephenson further proposes, the solution
of phosphorus in bisulphide of carbon is, Dr. Dippel considers, pre-
cluded on account of its combustibility, and mounting in bisulphide of
carbon as well as in the solution of sulphur is attended with so many
inconveniences that neither could well be taken into common use as
fluids for mounting. On the other hand, monobromide of naphthaline
is most excellently adapted for it. It does not affect wax as far as
experience has gone as yet, and hence objects may be conveniently pre-
pared with it. The cover-glass should be run round with a ring of wax,
then with a cement of isinglass dissolved in spirit (called Heller's
porcelain cement), or Canada balsam, rather thick, dissolved in chloro-
form ; finally closing with a solution of shellac. Amongst other
diatoms thus mounted, is a small and very finely striated Amphipleura
pellucida, the structure of which, with immersion objectives — homo-
geneous-immersion specially — appears wonderfully clearly and sharply
defined.

Absolute Invisibility of Atoms and Molecules. J — Professor
A. E. Dolbear writes : —

Maxwell gives the diameter of an atom of hydrogen to be such
that two millions of them in a row would measure a millimetre ; but
under ordinary physical conditions most atoms are combined with
other atoms to form molecules, and such combinations are of all
degrees of complexity. Thus, a molecule of water contains three
atoms, a molecule of alum about one hundred, while a molecule of
albumen contains nine hundred atoms, and there is no reason to
suppose albumen to be the most complex of all molecular compounds.
When atoms are thus combined, it is fair to assume that they are

* «Bot. Centralbl.,' i. (1880) p. 1148.

t Dr. Dippel, if we understand him correctly, also points out that " this
method of preparation is not in all respects new. He himself came upon it
in his investigations on the cell-wall ['Das Mikroskop,' i. pp. 67 and 83], and
since 1867 has mounted not only histological objects, but also various diatom
preparations in oil of aniseed and oil of cassia." We need hardly, however, men-
tion that the point of Mr. Stephenson's paper is not to describe as a noveltr^ the
use for mounting of phosphorus, bisulphide of carbon, &c. ; for, as he says in
the paper, preparations were so mounted in 1873, when his previous paper was
read.
■ t 'Science,'!. (1880) p. 150.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1045

arranged in tho three dimensions of space, and that the diameter of
the molecule will be approximately as the cube root of the number of
atoms it contains, so that a molecule of alum will be equal to

(VIOO = 4-64) iruV^DW = ?7TTJ7FTT mm.,
and a molecule containing a thousand atoms will have a diameter of

A good Microscope will enable a skilled observer to identify an
object so small as the a- .T.nr vaxn. Beale, in his works on the Micro-
scope, pictures some fungi as minute as that ; and Nobert's test bands,
and the markings upon the Amphipleiira pellucida, which are about tlio
same degree of fineness, are easily resolved by good lenses. If thus
the efficiency of the Microscope could be increased fifty times
('""""" = 50), it would be sufficient to enable one to see a molecule

400 ■" _ _

of albumen ; or if its power could be increased one himdred and
seven times, it would enable one to see a molecule of alum.

Now, Helmholtz has jiointed out the probability that interference
will limit the visibility of small objects ; but suppose that there
should be no difficulty from that source, there are two other conditions
which will absolutely prevent us from ever seeing the molecule.

1st. Their motions. A free gaseous molecule of hydrogen at the
temperature of 0° C, and a pressure of 760 mm. mercury, has a free
path about ttiooo '^™- ^^ length, its velocity in this free path being
1860 m. per second, or more than a mile, while ils direction of move-
ment is changed millions of times per second. Inasmuch as only a
glimpse of an object moving no faster than one millimetre per second
can be had, for the movements are magnified as well as the object itself, it
will be at once seen that a free gaseous molecule can never be seen, not
even glimpsed. But suppose such a molecule could be caught and
held in the field so it should have no free path. It still has a vibra-
tory motion, which constitutes its temperature. The vibratory move-
ment is measured by the number of undulations it sets up in the ether
per second, and will average five thousand millions of millions — a
motion which would make the space occupied by the molecule visibly
transparent, that is, it could not bo seen. This is true for liquids and
solids. Mr. D. N. Hodges finds the path of a molecule of water at its
surface to be • 0000024 mm., and though it is much less in a solid, it
must still be much too great for observation.

2nd. They are transparent. Tho rays of the sun stream through
the atmosphere, and tlio latter is not perceptibly heated by them, as it
would bo if absori)tion took place in it. Tho air is heated by conduc-
tion contact with the earth, which has absorbed and transformed tlio
energy of tho rays. -When selectivo aUsorption takes place, tho
number of rays absorbed is small, when compared with tho whole
number presented, so that practically tlie separate molecules would bo
too transparent to bo seen, though their maguitudo and motions were
not absolute hindrances.

Wale's "Working Microscope." — Tho now feature of this instru-
ment by Mr. G. Walo (Fig. 115) consists in tho method of suspending

1046

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

tlie main limb carrying the optical body, so that it may be inclined at
any angle. It is suggested that the ordinary method changes the
position of the centre of gravity of the instrument so considerably
as to render it more or less unsteady, while the new method avoids
the difficulty, and at the same time furnishes a secure and convenient
means of clamping the body at any position.

Fig. 115.

The stage and optical body are supported on the curved limb,
which is nearly a semicircle, as shown in the figure. This limb has
sectoral grooves about 90° in arc on either side, and slides between cor-
responding curved jaws, on the inner side of the upright pieces of the
foot. The foot itself is made in two symmetrical pieces fitting together,

mVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1047

Fig. 116.

and grasping the limb by means of a screw, of wliicli the milled head
is seen at the right-hand side of the instrument. By loosening this
screw somewhat the curved limb is released ; the sectoral grooves
then permit it to slide between the jaws of the foot until the tube
reaches the desired position (vertical, horizontal, or an intermediate
position), when it may be clamped by tightening the screw.

The fine adjustment moves the entire body by a lever in contact
with the screw (milled head) shown on the back of the limb, the
distance between the eye-piece and the objective not therefore
changing.

The rotating stage-clips can be applied to hold the object on
either side of the stage, as described and figured in vol. ii. (1879),
p. 623, where this Microscope was briefly alluded to.*

Seibert and Krafft's Fine Adjustment. — We referred on p. 883
to this fine adjustment (Figs. 99 to 101), citing an explanatory
passage from Niigeli and Schwcndener's ' Das Mikroskop.' The
accompanying figure (Fig. IIG ) from the same authors will enable the
reader to understand the mechanism, and the
description will correct a slight inaccuracy
(in the original) relative to the non-displace-
ment of the optic axis.

The focussing - screw 8 acts upon the
funnel-shaped head of the pivot m, the upper
end of which acts in a similar manner upon
//, the solid bar attached to the optical body.
The ring r, which serves as a guide-piece,
lies loose in the hollow column, and as a
rule does not touch the pivot ; its function is
merely to prevent the point of the pivot from
slipping out of the notch in //. The cross-
bars h h (two on each side) are attached by
screws to the hollow column, and the optical
body is held between the points of four screws
near the front ends of the bars. The focus-
sing motion is communicated to the solid bar
//by the screw s acting against the pressure
of the spiral spring shown above by dotted
line, the friction being confined to the eight
screw-points of the four cross-bars. The
movement is similar to that of an ordinary
parallel ruler with connecting bars, the
hollow column being the stationary side.

It is obvious from .an inspection of the
figure that the optical axis must suffer a
sliglit displacement. Any movement of the
focussing screw 8 upwards or downwards
from tlie normal position as shown, will
cause the cross-bars bh to assume a diagonal position ; the pivot m
will consequently incline from its base backwards, and the solid

♦ See also Dr. Carpenter's obscrvntions on tliis Microscope, infra, p. lOSC.

1048 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

bar // will be drawn in the same direction, and with it, of course,
the optic axis.

This method of fine adjustment presents difiiculties in combination
with a rotatory stage, and for comparative micrometrical measurements.
The position of the milled-head at the lower end of the column is,
however, very convenient, as the hand rests on the table while
focussing.

"Sliding" Objectives. — The Microscope shown in Fig. 117
(Parkes's " English Medical Microscope ") is provided with a '• patent

Fig. 117.

sliding adapter," for enabling the powers to be applied and changed
.very rapidly, without the loss of time occasioned by screwing. It is

niVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1049

Fig. 118.

claimed that this plan will be found to save much time in cursory
examinations, such as medical men have frequently to make.

In Fig, 118 A is the adapter, shown natural size (having the Society
screw, it fits any Microscope); this adapter contains a "sprung"
tube into which the tube B slides, carrying the optical part C (a
2-inch in the figure) at its lower end. All the objectives are composed
of the sliding-tube B and the optical part C, which together form one
piece about the usual size of an objective. In use, the adapter A is
kept screwed to the body of the instrument, and
the removal of B C from A is effected by simple
withdrawal, as in the case of an eye-piece, and
another power can thus be readily substituted.

For the convenience of those who have ob-
jectives with the Society screw, the lower end of
the compound body of the Microscope is screwed
to the standard size, so that by simply unscrewing
the adapter which receives the objectives belong-
ing to the instrument, any standard glass may
be used. On the other hand, by sliding any
of the former objectives into the adapter when
thus unscrewed, they may be used on any other
standard instrument. The Society screw has not
been adopted for the optical part (joining C to B),
which, however, it would be advantageous to adopt
if it can be done mthout increasing the weight
to such an extent that the latter would slip down
out of the adapter. With the Society gauge,
any objectives might of course be ajiplied. At
present, the use of the sliding arrangement is
confined to the maker's own objectives.

Instead of the " sprung " tube, the plan
adopted by Mr. Browning for astronomical eye-
pieces might, we think, be made use of with
advantage, viz. to make the sliding tube B not
cylindrical, but tapering, the " taper " being for a short distance
below the middle less rapid tliau at the middle part, the portion next
the collar being exactly cylindrical.

Homogeneous - immersion Objectives for the Binocular, —
Fig. ll'J shows in natural size a ,'., hoiiio^ciicdus-immcrsiou objective
of Bowel] and Loahuid made as described by Mr. II. Gibbes at p. 373,
for use with the ordinary Weuham binocular, and showing both fields
fully illuminated.

The lenses of the objective are contained within the lower part of B,
tlie u[»i)er portion of B being a very short adapter into which the
former can be screwed from behind. The back lens is thus brought
to within about a (juarter of an inch of the binocular prism. As the
objective is so mutli shortened it is necessary with most Microscopes
to have eitlier a super-stage or a special arrangenu'iit for allowing tlio
tube to be racked down that tiio objective may focus upon the object
on the ordinary stage.

1050

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

When not required for use with the Binocular prism the lenses
are screwed to the long adapter A.

Mr. Wenham many years ago suggested the use cf a very small
binocular prism with high-power objectives. The prism was mounted
in a special tube and was slipped down the body of the objective
almost to touch the back lens. Fig. 120 shows (natural size) an -|-
objective (with correction-adjustment) constructed by Messrs. Powell
and Lealand on Mr. Wenham's plan, D being the objective complete,
and C the tube with the binocular prism. The objective, as will be
seen, is shorter than usual.

Fig. 120.

Fig. 119.

The plan first described can be used more effectively with homo-
geneous-immersion objectives, as they do not necessarily require
correction-adjustment. The body can therefore be much shorter and
the back lens almost in contact with the binocular prism.

Extra Front Lenses to Homogeneous-immersion Objectives. —
It is suggested * that if such an objective as Powell and Lealand's
new formula homogeneous-immersion -jVt (aperture = 142° in crown
glass of index 1 • 5 nearly, by means of a front lens greater than a
hemisphere), were provided with two extra front lenses, one giving
an aperture in glass of, say, 115° and one giving 90^, we should be
enabled to view objects through a considerable range of thickness of
covering-glass, approaching in each case to the maximum aperture
that could be used, and hence, probably, we should find much less
need of \ or jL objectives.

By the homogeneous-immersion formula adopted by Powell and
Lealand the focal distance is practically a constant quantity ; it

* ' Eng. Mech.,' xxxii. (1880) p. 84. t See this Joiirnol, ante, p. 8S6.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPT0GA3IIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1051

follows then that a reduction of the aperture by making the front
lens thinner immediately provides greater working distance without
affecting the aberrations, for as the first refraction takes place at the
posterior (curved) surface of the front lens the removal of any portion
of thickness at the auterior (plane) surface simply cuts off zones of
peripheral rays without altering the distance — the distance being at
once filled up by the homogeneous-immersion fluid or by an extra
thickness of covering-glass. An extra front lens may then be applied
to the back combinations of such a ^^^ to enable the observer to view
an object through a covering-glass that would be practically a maxi-
mum thickness for an ■} (aperture = 90^) constructed on the usual
formula where the setting encroaches on the active spherical refrac-
ting surface ; a second front might give a high average aperture for
a -Y^ (115'^), whilst the thickest front (representing the maximum
aperture of the whole construction, 142') enables the observer to view
an object with a greater aperture than has hitherto been obtained with
any j\-., owing to the difficulties of construction, and through a thicker
covering -glass than a y'.y of this aperture (even if it could bo success-
fully made) would permit of ; hence the three different fronts would
give a great range of aperture with a corresjionding range of working
distance, which is practically what is sought by having objectives
constructed of the three different foci, i, yV, and y\r.

We imderstand from Messrs. Powell and Lcaland that for an
aperture of 115° in glass, there would be no necessity to mount
the front lens on a plate, that aperture having already been success-
fully obtained and exceeded by mounting the front in the usual
way. The purpose of the plate (which is only '003 in. thick) is, as
before mentioned,* to allow of a portion of the posterior curved
refracting surface of tho front lens beyond the hemisphere to be
utilized.

Fluid for Homogeneous-immersion Objectives.— Mr. A. A. Brag-
don writes to us in regard to his note inserted at page 701. After
referring to tlic fact that sulpho-carbolate (jf zinc was first suggested by
Professor Abbe,t he says that cedarwood oil, in his opinion, can never
become generally useful. It varies so much in diftcront samples that
even an index of 1*512 as first named for it cannot be relied upon. Then
it is so fluid that it runs all over slide and stand, so that the objective
cannot be immersed without placing the Microscope erect every time.
Experimenting with it, however, in combination with other oils,
Bonie good results were obtained, e. g. with oil of anise, although not
equal to the zinc and glycerine, which can be as easily cleaned from
the slide and kns as glycerine by using water.

By taking equal -parts by weight of C. P. glycerine (Price's) and
Bulpho-carbolate of zinc crystals, mingling the two, and applying
heat sufficient to lujil the glycerine, a solution of proper index wvn bo
obtained for use with a Zeiss objictive of 1*50 index, or a Tolles of
1 -525 index (i. e. for all practical purjxises). If, however, one desires
to be exact for the latter, the solution will have to be evapoi*ated

• See this Jourmil, mdr, pp. 884 5. t "'i'l- ii- (l'^T:») j.i.. 'MC, and 82:^.

1052

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

somewhat, or more carbolate added. The solution can be made in
about one hour.

No fear need be had about boiling too long, as the longer this is
done the less liability will there be for the solution to deposit crystals
on the bottom of the bottle when cooled, which it will do if the tem-
perature is only kept up long enough to first dissolve the crystals.
Some made in October 1879 is still free from any deposit. Filter while
hot, and the microscopist will have a solution practically of fluid
croivn glass as clear and transparent as glycerine itself, having only
one objection, viz. when of 1 • 50 to 1 • 525 index, the consistency is
such that if used on a histological preparation just mounted and the
objective racked back to remove the slide, the cover, unless great care
is used, will be lifted enough to endanger a choice preparation.

Mr. Bragdon is still experimenting with the view of finding a
medium a trifle more fluid so as to make the homogeneous-immersion
objectives " as nearly perfect as possible for every -day use."

Iris Diaphragms. — To the " Working Microscope " of G. Wale *
an inexpensive and very simple and ingenious form of " iris " is
adapted, shown (separated) in Fig. 121. It consists of a piece of
very thin cylindrical tube A, about £ inch in length and | in. diameter,

the whole circumference of which is cut
through with shears to nearly its whole
length at intervals of about ^ inch ; by
means of a screw-collar B, attached
below, this cut tube is forced into a
parabolic metal shell (contained within
C) whose apex is truncated to an aper-
ture of about I inch ; the pressure of
the screw causes the thin metal tongues
to turn and to overlap in a spiral which
gradually diminishes the aperture to the
size of a pin-hole. On unscrewing the
collar B, the spiral overlapping of the
tongues is released somewhat, and their
elasticity causes the aperture gradually
to expand.

As adapted to the stage of the
" Working Microscope," the iris, when
unsci-ewed until its aperture is smallest,
is then almost in contact with the base
of the slide ; when at its largest expan-
sion it is about y'^ inch lower. The whole device is fitted into the
opening of the stage from beneath (so as to be flush with the upper
surface) with one turn of a very coarse screw on the edge of C — a
far more convenient plan than the " bayonet joint."

Another form of " iris " (Fig. 122) has been manufactured in
America by Messrs. Sidle and Poalk (fitting to their " Acme "
stand).! I^ is similar in construction to the earlier forms Imown

See ante, p. 1045.

t See this Journal, ante, p. 522.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1053

in England, but instead of the movement of the plates being
controlled by a lever arm, there is an outer cylinder-cap A, that
can be turned like the adjusting collar of an objective. The range
of aperture is from about ^ inch to a pin-hole, and it remains

Fig. 122.

in the same piano during the motion. This diaphragm is mounted
on a substage B provided with centering motions (a short bar
working with a loosely fitting slot, that can be clamped beneath),
which is a somewhat primitive contrivance. Centering motions must
be capable of exact adjustment or they are practically useless.

Swift's Calotte Diaphragms. — Messrs. Swift have recently devised
two forms of " calotte" diaphragms for use above the achromatic con-
denser, and on a level with the plane of the object stage.

Fig. 123.

Fig. 123 shows the first mctliod. A small rectangular segment of
II sph(!ricul shell has thrdc ditTcniit sized diaphragms cut, and the

VOL. III. 4 A

1054

BECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

mounting is so contrived that by movement of the lever-arm (shown
with shaped handle attached), the diaphragms can be successively
moved over the achromatic condenser, the optical part of which is
shown by dotted lines. The stage is suitably hollowed out beneath
to facilitate the adjustment.

Fig. 124 shows an improved form, which Messrs. Swift regard as
superseding that shown in Fig. 123. The diaphragms are here cut in

Fig. 124.

a metal " calotte " mounted eccentrically, so that by rotation the
apertures pass successively over the top of the achromatic condenser ;
the rotation is effected by the projecting edge of the calotte — somewhat
as with the diaphragms in Gillett's condenser.

It should be observed that Mr. Zeiss has for some time applied
calotte diaphragms to his " Travelling Microscope " ; * but they do not

Fig. 125.

act quite in the plane of the stage, nor are they constructed to be
used in conjunction with the achromatic condenser. It is evident,
however, that the effect obtained is similar to Mr. Bulloch's applica-
tion of the Gillett diaphragm above the condenser.f In Messrs. Swift's

See tliis Journal, ii. (1879) p. 9.5.5.

t Post, p. 1078.

INVERTEBRA.TA, CRYPT0GA:M[A, MIOROSCOPY, ETC. 1055

arrangement (as shown on a larger scale in Fig. 125) the calotte
is attached to the under surface of the stage, — in Mr. Bulloch's plan,
the diaphragm plate forms part of the condenser and can thus be
removed at iilcasure.

Swinging Substages. — As there seems to be a tendency to provide
Microscopes which have a substage with the so-called '"swinging"
form, we now extend the history of such instruments by giving
descriptions in the succeeding notes of some which we have not yet
described.

Taken in chronological order, the instruments hitherto made with
such substages are as follows : —

Grubb 1853-S .. See vol. ii. p. 320, and below.

Thury-Nachet .. 1855 .. „ post, p. 1059.

RoYSTOS-PiGOTT .. 1862-4 .. „ ;?os^, p. 1060.

ToLLEs 1871 .. „ post, p. 1061.

BuLLOiH 1873 „ j»08^ p. 1067.

Zentmaver and I is^fi-RO / " vol. i. p. 197, vol. ii. p. 320, and

Koss-Zentmayer / ■■ ' " \ a/i^t.', p. 70i. andjxjs^p. 1067.

Tolles-Blackham .. 1877 .. „ vol. i. p. 392, and an<e, p. 520.

Bui-Locu 1877 .. „ post,p.lOTd.

Sidle and Poalk .. 18S0 .. „ a?i^^, p. 522.

Beck 1880 .. „ a«i!e, p. 329.

Swift 1880 .. „ ante,p.867.

Grubb's Sector Microscope. — This is admittedly the earliest in-
strument of the kind referred to in the preceding note. Tbe following
description is contained in a paper read on the 26th March, 1858,
to tbe Royal Dublin Society,* and is entitled " On a New Table
Microscope, by Thomas Grubb, Engineer to the Bank of Ireland " : —

"The instrument to which I have the honour of drawing your
attention this evening will bo recognized by some present as having
the same general and peculiar form of that which I had devised and '
constructed some years since, and previous to our (Dublin) Microscopic
Society having merged into the * Natural History ' Society.

" The instrument, in its original state, included, iudeed, the advan-
tages of extreme steadiness, an improved fine adjustment for focussing,
and improved safety-tube for the object-glass, with the means of
viewing ob.ects (placed on a horizontal stage) at the most comfortable
angle for vision. But it is the peculiarity of the instrument, in its
present state, that it removes all necessity for that subsidiary and
costly apparatus for illumination which those microscopists who
pursue delicate microscopic research find it necessary to provide, in
addition to the Microscope pr()j)er ; and not only this, but tbe present
instrntnent enables the observer to apply, with a facility otherwise
unattainable, without removing the eye from the instrument, without
any changing of parts, and by simply moving its one illuminator on
its sector, every kind of illumination, ^crl Uim, to an object placed

• 'Jniim. R. Diihliii Sot.,' 18r)S; roproiliu-cd in ' Knp:l. Meoli.,' xxii. (1880)
p. 229.

4 A J

1056

EECORD OF CUKRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

A A. The base (of mahogany).

B. One of the two brackets of support.

C. One of the two milled heads for clamping
the instrument at the desired inclination for use.

D. One of the milled heads for coarse adjust-
ment of focns, acting upon a strong triangular -
bar (not seen in tlie engraving).

E. illuminating prism.

F. Milled ring for adjusting by hand the
azimuth of the prism.

G. Slide, with rack and pinion, for adjusting
the distance of the prism from the object.

H. Sector (seen also at h) on which the prism
Is moved by hand through any required arc con-
centric with the object on the stage.

I. The stage ; i i, upper and lower milled
rings, which produce, on being turned by hand,
the slow motions, in two directions, of the object -
plate of the stage.

K. iiracket-piece supporting the stage, and
also the plate for carrying the polarizer when
required.

L. Toothed wheel with pinion and milled
nut for revolving the stage In azimuth.

M. Dovetailed slide carrying both stage and
sector, with the illuminating prism. A screw and
its bent lever (the latter passing to the back of
the instrument) are partially seen at N ; and at
O is a spiral spring which keeps the slide M in
close contact with the screw N. The lever N is
equally available to either hand at the back of
the instrument ; P P are opposing screws which
serve to bring the optic axis of the body or tube
Q to coincide with the centre of revolution of the
stage, Q being purposely not screwed (as usually)
into the projecting arm, but held (with a suffi-
cient amount of lateral movement) between the
collars rr.

raVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1057

upon the stage of the instrument. It does more than this ; for it
enables the observer, when he has produced any appearance or eflfect by
the illumination which he desires to reproduce at pleasure, to register
the same, so that he can either resort with certainty to it at a future
time, or communicate the particulars to a friend, who, if possessed of
a similar instrument, can do likewise.

"The subsidiary apparatus for illumination of a well-furnished
Microscope usually includes a set of achromatic condensers, the prism
of Amici, the parabola of Shadbolt, and Bergin's addition to the
latter for oblique illumination. It is unnecessary to go into any detail
of the trouble experienced, and the time frequently consumed in obtain-
ing, with the assistance of one or more of these appliances, a satis-
factory illumination. These di-awbacks are well known to micro-
scopists. For the information of others, I may state that frequently
five minutes of very eye-teasing work, and sometimes three times that,
are devoted to obtaining a satisfactory result, which, after all, is liable
to be undone by an incautious touch of the mounting, and which is
only to be restored by the same tentative process of the previous
adjustment.

" It was such experiences as these which led to the improvements
combined in the present instrument. A little consideration was
sufficient to show that, assuming we are in possession of an illumina-
ting pencil of unexceptional quality for every kind of illumination
required, then every kind of such, including the illumination of
opaque objects, will be comprehended under two heads, viz. first, the
means of applying such illuminating pencil at all angles with
respect to the jilaue of the object (or the stage of the Microscope) ;
secondly, the means of applying the pencil at all azimuths of
same.

" This generalization, so to speak, of the illumination indicated
the means of carrying it out effectually. I had previously ascertained,
from direct use, that an achromatized prism was capable of giving
every kind of illumination required, in a manner not surpassed by
other means extant. Itc^jecting the difficult matter of causing the illu-
minating pencil to move in azimuth round the object, I devised the
present stage, which, while it is made to revolve, has those objections
to revolving which appertain to other stages removed ; and, by making
a little variation in the manner of attaching the body (or tube) of the
instrument to its arm, means are provided for readily bringing the optic
axis of this tube to pass through the centre of revolution of the stage,
and thus all objection to revolving the object, instead of the light, is
got rid of.

" For the other movement of the prism (or that vertical to the
plane of the stage), I have, as maybe seen, adopted a sector, on which
slides the carriage containing the prism and including the ordinary
adjustment for focussing and a small azimuthal movement for modi-
fying the illumination. This sector is attached to the same piece
which carries the stage, and so that its centre, if i)ro(lueod, would cut
the optic axis of the tube where an object mounte<l upon a glass slide
of the ordinary thickness and laid upon the stage of the instrument

1058 Record op current researches relating to

would be. A prism or other object being simply moved round on a
sector so placed, will evidently remain unchanged in its distance fz-om
that central point.

" In constructing the illuminating prism, it was to be recollected
that there was but one direction in which the light could be placed,
viz. in the plane of the object, or say one-tenth of an inch above the
plane of the stage, and vertically to the sector's plane ; and, secondly,
that the distance of the light from the stage must be assumed. The
prism, therefore, necessarily reflects the rays at a greater angle than
90°, and its reflecting surface usually requires silvering. This has
been assumed to be an objection ; but the light is still more than
ample, as well as beyond that given by most other illuminators, the
prism having (although a triple combination) only two uncemented
surfaces. I have, from my own experience, adopted a distance for the
source of light of about 15 inches, as most useful for general work ;
but should a distance of 2 feet or upwards be selected, then the prism
may be one of total reflection and its reflecting surface consequently
remain unsilvered.

" The manner of using the instrument is, shortly, as follows : —
The microscopist will, of course, place it as he would any other
Microscope, conveniently on a table, and incline it to the desired angle
for work. The lamp, or other source of light, is to be placed directly
opposite, and in front of, the instrument, and at the proper distance of
height, the distance being always the same, and the height that which
brings the light into the plane of the upper plate of the stage. The
adjustment may be verified and corrected as follows : — Place a slider
with a grayed surface on the stage (grayed surface upwards) ; move
the prism to the lowest point of the sector (or to zero), and turn it
directly outwards, or towards the light ; adjust the distance of the
prism from the grayed surface, so that an image of the light is formed
upon the latter ; and looking through the tube of the instrument (the
lenses being removed), observe if the image formed on the grayed
glass be central with the tube ; if not, make it so by a slight altera-
tion in the inclination or azimuth of the instrument, without varying
its distance from the light. It is by no means necessary to make these
adjustments accurately ; but the more accurate they are, the more
perfectly will the image on the grayed surface only revolve, and without
changing place, on moving the prism on the sector. It is, perhaps,
unnecessary to observe that the Microscope, without making any of
these adjustments, may be used in the same manner as, and with all
the convenience of, an ordinary instrument, while, by making the
adjustments as described, we obtain the peculiar advantages sought for
in the construction.

" These advantages may be shortly summed up as follows : — An .
object being placed upon the stage, and the focus adjusted, the observer
can examine it under every azimuth of illumination by revolving the
stage, and under every possible kind of illumination in each azimuth,
viz. direct transmitted light, oblique transmitted, dark-ground illu-
mination, and, finally, the illumination for opaque objects, by simply
moving the prism on the sector ; and he can do all this without once

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOaAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1059

removing his eye from the eye-piece ; while the quality of the illumi-
nation, in all its varieties, is such as is not surpassed by other more
or less special contrivances. Indeed, the general impression of those
who have used the instrument is that its illumination is more eflfective,
particularly in showing the delicate details of difficult objects, than any
other extant.

" Lastly, and not least, the power of reading off on the sector the
angle of illumination used, whereby the effects of different angles of
illumination can be registered, resorted to again at pleasure with
certainty, or communicated to other observers, enabling them to do the
same, if provided with a similar instrument.

" Perhaps I may be permitted to conclude this imperfect description
by mentioning what one who is well qualified to judge of the merits of
the instrument has commuuic:ited respecting it. He quaintly says,
' I find but one fault with your Microscope, and that is, that it puts
me out of conceit with the using of any other.' "

Although the above paper is dated 1858, it should be noted* that
the main features of novelty had been previously described by Mr.
Grubb, viz. in 1853, in the ' Proceedings ' of the Royal Irish Academy,f
and in his j)atent of 1854, J in both of which the graduated sectoral
arc is referred to. In the paper of 1853 Mr. Grubb said he had
mounted " a suitable illuminator on a vertical circular sector (nearly
a complete circumference), concentric with the focus ; this part of the
arrangement enables me to throw the beam on the object at all angles
of incidence, whether from beneath, as in the case of translucent, or
from above, in the case of opaque objects, and as the sector is
graduated, I have the power of observing or restoring any position at
pleasure."

Thury-Nachet Traverse Substage. — This appears to be the next
in order of date, having been made by M. Nachet, on the suggestion
of M. Thury, in April 1855.

The substage is shown in Fig. 127, separated from the Microscope.
It consists of two sector-bars C C equidistant from the object, mounted
parallel and attached to the main limb of the stand by screws behind
the square end G. These bars carry the condenser B above, and the
mirror A below, on a moving framework on which is a graduated
scale F for observing the degree of inclination. By means of a rack
and pinion (milled head D shown on tlie further side of figure) the
framework, carrying condenser and mirror, can bo moved concentri-
cally with the object, producing oblique illumination. The traversing
movement causes the toothed pinion H to turn in the rack J, and an
endless screw at the lower end of the same pinion (behind tlio milled
head E) works on the toothed wheel I attached to the mirror ; this auto-
matic motion keeps the reflected beam from the surface of the mirror
exactly in the axis of the condenser whilst the latter is being inclined
obliquely to the object. The mirror itself can bo adjusted by tho
milled head E, tho pinion through I being held ia position by

♦ 'Engl. Mtch..' xxxi. (1880). t Vol. v.

: See this .lourual, ii. (1879) p. 320.

1060

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

friction. An indicator arm on I marks the degree of inclination on
the scale at F.

If we suppose the apparatus, as figured, to bo in adjustment for
central light, then, by turning the milled head D, obliquity of

incident light is obtained as far as the rack on the sector-bar or the
thickness of the stage will permit, the surface of the mirror inclining
regularly so that the reflected light is directed constantly in the axis
of the condenser throughout the traversing movement.

The original apparatus from which Fig. 127 was drawn was at once
forwarded to us by M. Nachet upon our applying for information on
the subject, and at the same time he wrote : " The apparatus was
specially designed to keep the focus of the illumination upon the
object with varying degrees of oblique incidence. The movement
was, however, only from back to front — not lateral. In Grubb's and
more modern stands, lateral movement of the substage (unless the
lamp be attached to the moving arm) necessitates a continual readjust-
ment of the mirror or reflector ; whereas in this device the mirror
moves automatically with an exactly calculated differential motion, and
the light is constantly directed in the axis of the condenser, conse-
quently in the field of view, whatever may be the inclination. The
observer can thus watch the minutest changes- developed by the
obliquity, which appears to me a considerable advantage."

Royston-Pigott's Oblique Condenser Apparatus. — Dr. Eoyston-
Pigott is the inventor of an appai'atus for giving oscillating oblique
action to the condenser. It was thus described * by him : —

" In former times the precise position of the mirror for throw-
ing the rays of reflected light at one particular angle (often hit
only with much waste of time and labour) was attained with
more or less success so as to give the most brilliant definition of

* ' Mon. Micr. Jouvn.,' xvi. (1876) p. 178.

INVEETEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1061

difficult objects. In 1862 I adapted a semicircular arc carrying a
condenser, and afterwards I constructed gimbals to carry an achro-
matic condenser at any angle of obliquity, attached to a double-
motion stage placed exactly beneath the upper stage movements : by
this contrivance particular angles of illumination could be readily
attained \vithout the excessive aberration of the usual wide-angled
achromatic condenser. The instrument is exhibited in the South
Kensington Museum Collection, No. 3551 — described as follows : —
' 3551. Microscope with complex adjustments, searcher, and oblique
condenser apparatus. This Microscope is fitted with a peculiar
hypocycloidal movement and traversing screws for very delicate
observations. The condenser possesses wide rectangular movements
combined with a unique oscillatory oblique action for directing the
minute image of a flame or of the sun either directly or obliquely
upon any desired point in the field of view, giving fine views of
many difficult objects ' "

ToUes' "Radial Arm" and "Circular Track" Microscopes. —
Our information in regard to these Microscopes is derived from
certain sworn depositions which have been forwarded to us, and
which we print verbatim.

" Invention of Sicinging Suhstage.
Washington City, District of Columbia, ss.

I, J. J. Wood WARD, a Surgeon in the United States Army, and a
resident of the city and district aforesaid, do hereby solemnly swear
that Mr. R. B. Tolles, of Boston, visited me at the Army Medical
Museum, Washington, District of Columbia, June 30, 1871 ; that he
had with him several objectives and a small Microscope-stand fitted
with a radial arm beneath the stage, carrying a condensing lens of
about one inch focal length, and so arranged that by deflecting the
arm, any degree of obliquity in the illumination could be obtained ;
and that I was so pleased with the contrivance that, November 8,
1872, having occasion to inquire of Mr. Tolles the price at which
he would make a large stand for the Museum, I made it a condi-
tion in a letter written on that day, that the stand should have a
' radial arm to carry an inch condensing lens for oblique light.'

J. J. Woodward,

Surgeon U.S. Army.

Sworn to and subscribed before mo this cightoonth day of Septem-
ber, A.D. 1880.

LODIS SCHADE,

Notary Public.

I, Edward W. Mori.ey, of Hudson, in the State of Ohio, Professor
of Clutmistry and Toxicology in Cleveland CoUogo, and Professor of
Chemistry in Western Keservo Collogo, on oath depose and say that
on the Hcveuth or eighth day of August, 1872,1 was in Boston, in the

1062 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

State of Massachusetts, and there selected a Microscope objective at
the office of Charles Stodder, agent for Eobert B. Tolles, of said
Boston. Afterward on the same day I met said Tolles, the maker of
said objective in his manufactory on Hanover Street in said Boston,
and conversed with him about the manipulation of said objective. In
said conversation said Tolles described a device for facilitating the
application of light of any desired obliquity, which device he thought
would be possibly the best for my purpose. It was to attach to the
stand of the Microscope an arm vphich would rotate on an axis at the
level of the upper surface of the object-slide. To this arm an achro-
matic condenser (or objective as a condenser) could be screwed so that
if adjusted to bring light to a focus on the object at any one obliquity
it would still be in focus at any other obliquity. Said Tolles exhi-
bited to me a device used by him on his own stand to accomplish this
result. It consisted of an arm under the stage carrying the achro-
matic condenser, which arm was adapted to carry the condenser
through a considerable arc, keeping it in a radial position with the
centre of motion at the focus of the objective in use in the body. We
discussed several plans for securing the motion around the plane of
the upper siu'face of the object. I understood that the plan used in
said Tolles' stand was an adaptation of a stage not originally designed
for the purpose and therefore of necessity the radial motion with
centre in the plane of the object was obtained by some combinations
whose nature does not occur to me. My recollections about the radial
arm for oblique light from a condenser as seen by me at this time are
very distinct because I had then some intentions of imitating the
arrangement and actually afterwards made some preliminary trials
in that direction. In reference to my own Microscope-stand, said
Tolles, in said conversations suggested the making of a semicircular
track to be borne on the substage fitting, which should answer the
same purpose of carrying the condenser concentrically with the
object on the stage.

Edward W. Moeley.
State of Ohio, Svmmit County, ss.

Sworn to by the said Edward W. Morlet, before me, a Notary
Public, within, and for said County and State, and by him subscribed
in my presence this 23d day of May, a.d. 1878.

Witness my hand and official seal at Hudson County and State
aforesaid this 23d day of May, 1878.

H. B. Foster,

Notary Public.

I, Orlando Ames, of Somerville, in the Commonwealth of Massa-
chusetts, on oath depose and say, that in the years 1870, '71, and '72,
in the shop of the Boston Optical Works, of which Mr. E. B. Tolles was
Superintendent, I had charge of the work of construction of Micro-
scope-stands. That in the years 1870 and 1871 the first Microscope-
stand of his class A was made. That after it was otherwise completed,
I by Mr. Tolles' direction adapted to the stand a swinging arm to
carry a condenser at various obliquities to the optical axis of the

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1063

Microscope.* This arm was hinged to have its axis of rotation as
nearly in a line passing through the object place on the stage as was
conveniently practicable. The stage having mechanical movements
was of considerable thickness and the axis of the arm was therefore
fixed at a point about three-fourths of an inch below the place of the
object. The arm swung over an arc of a circle graduated to read
angles of obliquity of the arm, and the condenser had an independent
motion of its own so that its axis could always be brought to coincide
with a line passing through the object on the stage. That at this time
and for an indefinite period before, I had known of such an arrange-
ment of swinging arm on a Microscope used by Mr. Tolles particu-
larly for trial and testing of objectives. In this case the whole
arrangement could be attached to the main arm of the Microscope
and detached readily. The axis of motion of the arm was under the
stage, but the whole apparatus had adjustment laterally (or sidewise)
so that the swinging arm could bo brought into line with any radius
of the object as a centre through a considerable range of obliquities.
That in the summer of 1875, I, by Mr. Tolles' direction constructed
and adapted to a Microscope-stand of his class B, numbered [ ]

and now belonging to Dr. J. Bacon of this city a cirrular track as a
substitute for a radial arm. That this circular track having its centre
coincident with the object place on the stage involved no change in the
model or construction of the B stand, whereas the incorporation of a
radial arm required considerable change ; and I desire to distinctly
state that the circular track was adopted for that instrument instead of
the swinging radial arm to avoid such change and reconstruction.

I have also to state that during the period named, from 1871 to
1875, the plan as an invention of Mr. Tolles of a swinging radial
arm for condenser, and other accessories of a Microscope having its
axis of motion in the object or object-place on the stage was
familiarly known and talked of in the shop where his Microscopes
were made. Orlando Ames.

Witness, F. L. Hates.

Suffolk, ss. Boston, March 19, 1878.

There personally appeared the above named Orlando Ames and
made oath that the foregoing statement, by him subscribed, is true.
Before me, Francis L. Hates,

Justice of the Peace."

In July 1875, Mr. Tolles made and sold the instrument described
in the following sjtecification for a patent (the application for which
was filed in July 1877 1) : —

• Note.

"TOLI.ES" LAIiOEST MICROSCOPE.

******* Can bo furnished with radial arm
to carry accessory apparatus at any angle for $50."

— C. St'Kldir's Price I-ist for 1S72, jjaj^e •'>.
t AcconlinR to tlio U.S. Patent Law, an invintor haa two yours njUr the lirst
instrument is sold in wliirh tu apj)ly for a patint.

1064

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEA.RCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 128.

United States Patent Office.
Eobert B. Tolles, of Boston, Massachusetts.

Improvement in Microscopes.

Specification forming part of Letters Patent No. 198,782, dated January 1, 1878 ;
application filed July 27, 1877.

To all whom it may concern :

Be it known that I, Egbert B. Tolles, of Boston, in the County of
Suffolk and State of Massachusetts, have invented certain new and
useful improvements in Microscopes, of which the following is a
specification, reference being had to the accompanying drawings,
making a part of the same, in which —

Figure 128 represents a front elevati n of a portion of a Microscope-
stand with my improvements
applied thereto. Fig. 129 re-
presents a side elevation of the
same. Fig. 130 represents in
section a portion of the sub-
stage detached. Fig. 131
represents in side elevation a
portion of the substage illu-
mination apj)aratus detached
and drawn upon an enlarged
scale, and modified by con-
necting with it a graduated
arc ; and Fig. 132 represents
in end elevation the parts
shown in Fig. 131.

My invention relates to
the combination of a circular
track in a plane parallel with
the optical axis of the instru-
ment and concentric with the
object to be examined, with
a substage carriage, upon
which said track is mounted
and carried on guides.

It also relates to the said
circular track, provided with
graduations, in combination
with a carriage running
thereon, and carrying a con-
densing-lens and other acces-
sories, either singly or com-
bined.

It also relates to a holder
to carry an achromatic illu-
minator or other accessory, in combination with a graduated arc and
clamping device, to fix the holder at any angle to the radius that may
"be desired, or in the radius of the circular track.

/> ^

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1065

It also relates to a convex lens, either plano-sphcrical or piano-
cylindrical, in combination with a plano-concave lens, that can be
caused to traverse the surface of the plano-convex lens, and an illu-
mination-tube to direct a beam of liglit through tlie plano-concave
lens.

It also relates to the convex lens and its support in the radius of
the circular track, in combination with an illuminating device.

Fig. 12D.

It also relates to a graduated circular track to support an ilhimi-
natiou-tubc and accessories, with tlie stage, to support the object-slide,
as will be mon; fully described hereiiiiifter.

Ill the drawings, the base or stand lias jointed to it a curved arm A,
upon which the body of the iustruinout is mounted. It also carries
the stage S, upon which is placed the object-slide ('. I) represents a
circular track mounted upon a substago carriage B, connected to the
arm A. This circular track is mounted and carried on or within
guides in a plane parallel to the optical axis X X of the instrument

1066

RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

and concentric with the object to be examined, mounted in the slide C,
so that whether the slide be above or below the stage, the object it
holds shall always be in the axis of said circular track D. This track
has graduation-marks placed upon it, by which the position of the
carriage P, that it carries, can be set and recorded. It may also be

Fig. 130.

Fig. 131.

Fig. 132.

Tised without graduations. Upon this carriage is mounted the sub-
stage T, carrying the holder I, to which is screwed the illumination-
tube I', or other accessories.

The spindle of the holder I can turn in its socket, and be clamped
to it by the screw t in any position in which it may be placed, to carry
an achromatic illuminator or other accessory,
either in the radius of the track D, or at any
degree of obliquity thereto ; and to facilitate
this adjustment, it is provided with an index M,
resting against a graduated arc i, attached to
the substage.

The apparatus is provided with a convex
lens L, either j)lano-spherical or piano-cylindrical
(the plane surface of either being modified to
concave or convex, if either of these forms
should for special purposes be deemed preferable
to a plane), and a plano-concave lens a, the
curvature of whose concave surface is the counterpart of the convex
surface of the lens L, the lens a being caused to traverse the surface
of the lens L by the movements of its carriage — in this instance an
arm of the carriage P, which latter also carries an illumination-tube I',
or a condenser arranged to direct a beam or pencil of light upon the
plane face of the lens a. The convex lens L is mounted upon the
axial end of an arm n, which arm is in the radius of the circular track
D, and is also carried by the substage.

Having now fully described my invention, I claim —

1. The combination of a circular track D in a plane parallel to
the optical axis XX of the instrument and coincident with the object
to be examined, with a substage carriage B, upon which said track is
mounted in a plane parallel to the optical axis, substantially as shown
and described.

2. The combination of a graduated circular track D, with a

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1067

carriage P running therein, and carrying a condensing-lens and other
accessories, either singly or combined, substantially as shown and
described.

3. A turning-holder I, carrying an index M, in combination with
a graduated arc i, and a clamping device, to secure the holder either
in the radius of the track D or at any degree of obliquity in which it
may be placed, to carry an achromatic illuminator or other accessory,
substantially as shown and described.

4. The combination of a convex lens L, of piano-spherical or suit-
able form, with a plano-concave lens a, of counterpart curvature, and
a carriage P carrying said concave lens, and also an illumination-
tube, substantially as shown and described.

5. The combination of a convex lens L, and an arm n, on the
axial end of which said lens is mounted, with a circular track D, and
carriage P, carrying a suitable illumination device, substantially as
shown and described.

6. The combination of a graduated circular track D, and carriage P,
for guiding and supporting an illumination device and other acces-
sories, with a stage S for supporting the object-slide, substantially as
shown and described.

In witness whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name.

Egbert B. Tolles.
In presence of —

P. S. Yendell,
Abthub MoNally.

Bulloch's Sector Microscope.— The next in order of date is the
Microscope shown in Fig. 133, which was designed by Mr. W. H.
Bulloch, of Chicago, U.S.A., and exhibited in 1873.

Tlie figure shows the general design of the Microscope. The
substage was described by Mr. Bulloch as follows : " Compound
substage, with the most complete movements for centering or for
oblique light, with achromatic condenser, has one-fourth inch move-
ment each way, rack and i)inion vertical movement, rack and pinion
movement in arc of circle for oblique liijht. . . ."

The sectoral arc is shown in the figure just below the stage, as well
as the rack and milled head of the pinion by which the substage is
moved. The mirror is on a separate bar and can bo swung above the
stage and clamped by a screw, the milled head of which is seen at the
back of the instrument.

Zentmayer's Centennial and Histological Microscopes. —
(1) Ccntennidl. — This ^Microscope, sliown in Fig. l.'U, waslirst exhibited
at the Academy of Natural Sciences of I'hiliidelpliia on April 2, 187G •
and then at the Phihul.'lphia Centennial Exliibition in 187(5, and sub-
se([Uontly at tho Paris Fxhil)ition in 1878.

The following is j\[r. Zoiitinayer's de.seription of it.* " Tho instru-
ment is I'J inches high when arranged for use. It is mounted on a

* 'IlluHtratrd Prioo Lisl.' 4tli c<Ht.

1068 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 133.

Bulloch's sector microscope.

INVERTEBRATA, CRVPTOGAMIA, MIOUOSCOPY, ETC. 1009

broad tripod base with revolving platform, bevelled, silvered, and gra-
duated in degrees for measuring the angular aperture of achromatic
objectives. Upon this platform are two pillars, between which the bar
and trunnions (which are of one piece) swing for inclining the instru-
ment to any angle.

The coarse adjustment is effected by rack and pinion. The fine
adjustment (in all other instruments of the Jackson principle in front
of the body) is removed to the more stable part of the instrument,
the bar, which is provided with two slides, one for the rack-and-pinion
adjustment, and close to it, another one of nearly the same length,
for the fine adjustment, moved by a lever concealed in the bent arm
of the bar, and acted upon by a micrometer screw. In this way the
body is not touched directly when using the fine adjustment, and
the body does not change the relative distance of objective, bino-
cular prism, and eye-piece. (A woodcut of the fine adjustment will
be found at p. 321 of vol. ii.)

The sioinging suhstage, which carries the achromatic condenser or
other ilhiminating apparatus and the mirror, swings ai'ound a pivot
placed behind the stage, of which the axis passes through the object
observed, so that the object is in every position in the focus of the
illumination. This most important arrangement, without which no
Microscope can be considered complete, is carried out in an extremely
simple and substantial manner. Although provided with but a single
joint, it admits of being swung over any of the stages ; a complete revo-
lution is only interfered with by the body of the instrument. It is
provided with a graduated circle at the upper collar for registering
the degree of obliquity, and a stop to indicate when it is central with
the main body.

The substage is divided into two cylindrical receivers, to facilitate
the adaptation of several accessories at one and the same time. The
upper cylinder has centering adjustment, the lower cylinder of the two
can be moved up and down or entirely removed.

As an object i)laced on the stage is in a plane with the axis of the
trunnions, it is obvious that, if the instrument is placed in a hori-
zontal position, the object is in the axis of revolution of the graduated
platform, and tlie angular a2)crturo of an objective focusscd on this
object can be easily measured. It can be readily seen that in tliis
position the obj(!ct is in tlie centre of all the revolving parts of tlic
instrument, the revolving stage, swinging substage, and the platform."

There are three Stages: Ist. One devised by Mr. Zentmayer in
l.Sr.2 (sliown in position on the stand, Fig. 131), which is 5^ inches
in diuiiictcr and i inch in thickness. " It consists of a bell-metal ring,
firmly attached to the bar, l)ut ailjustalde by means of set screws, in
order to niukc it perfectly (•(tncentric to tli(> optical axis of the instru-
ment. This ring nceivcs the stag(^ platform, which has a complete
rcv(dution. Tlio outer edge is bevelled, silvered, and graduated into
degrees to serve as a goniometer. The carriage on whieli tlu^ object
is placed rests on a piece of plate glass, kej)t down by a spring with
an ivory-pointed screw to the two rails on the revolving stage plat-
forni, whicli gives an exceedingly smooth and firm niov<;nient, and a

VOL. III. 1 B

1070 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

Fig. 134.

ZKNTMAYEU S CKNTEXNIAl, MICKOSCOPK.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1071

freedom of motion not obtained by any other arrangement. Owing to
its simplicity, convenience, and durability, it has been extensively
copied at home and abroad. The stage may be detached with facility,

Fig. 135.

by simply unscrewing the nut at the back Fig. 136.

of the bar, to be replaced by another
stage, as, for instance, the Mechanical
stage or the Diatom stage."

2nd. The Mechanical stage (Fig. 135,
lialf-size) is 4 inches square and -^^
inch thick, with rectangular movements
of 1 inch by the milled heads shown
on the right and left. The forward
motion of the stage is by means of a fine
chain winding on a spindle beneath the
stage acted on by the outer milled head,
and is provided with a set-screw by
which any stretching of the cliuin can be
at once compensated. The cross-motion
is effected by a travelling scrow-sockot
attached beneath the stage, acted on by
the inner milled head. These movements
are extremely well constructed by Mr.
Zentmaycr. The graduated scales shown
at tlie base serve as a finder.

The central circular plate (graduated at the margin) rotates in tho
jdane of tlio stage, an<l is provided with two clips for the object.
Inasmuch as this rotating cciitre-pieco moves out of centre with every

•1 n 2

1072

KECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

toucli of tlie rectangular motions, the iitility of the rotation is very
much curtailed ; a rotatory motion of the stage, unless it be approxi-
mately concentric with the optic axis, appears to us to be practically
useless.

3rd. The Diatom stage (Fig. 136, half-size) is 2^ inches in diameter
and is bevelled out beneath, so that its thickness is only ^^ inch at

Fig. 137

the centre. The lower plate rotates in the ring of the stage, and the
upper one can be slipped backwards and forwards (beneath the spring
clips) in two grooves. The four adjusting screws for centering are
shown in the figure. Owing to its small size, it is very solid ; it is
especially convenient in that the swinging substage can be moved
almost to the horizon of the object.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1073

All of the stages are reversible on the stand, thus admitting of
unlimited obliquity, and still keeping the object in the centre of the
swinging bar.

(2) Histological. — This, constructed in 1876 (Fig. 137), shows the
adaptation of the swinging substagc to a cheai) form of Microscope,
and was earlier in date to that which wo recently described at p. 532
as being the first cheap form that we had seen.

Mr. Zentmayer also constructed two other forms intermediate
between this and the Centennial (" U.S. Army Hospital stands ").

Bulloch's Congress and Biological Microscopes. — (1) Congress
{older form). — -In 1877 the form shown in ^ scale in Figs. 138 and 139
(19 inches high) was brought out (patented in 1879).

The figures render any detailed description of the parts of the
instruments unnecessary, with the exception of the substage and mirror
arrangements. These both move about the same centre, which is at a
jjoint the thickness of an ordinary slide above the stage, and they can
be rotated by hand above and below the stage either together, when
connected by the spring stop S (Fig. 138j, or separately (as shown in
Fig. 139).

The two arms (DD and 0 E) carrying the substage and the
mirror are attached to the graduated cii'cles shown in the figure, by
which the exact degree of obliquity can be registered.

As originally constructed by Mr. Bulloch, the end of the substage
pinion (passing through the limb) was provided with a toothed wheel
A, upon which the tangent screw B acted, producing the lateral
rotation of the substage bar. This mechanical rotation has since been
replaced by friction motion that can be clamped by the milled head
shown on Fig, 140 in the place of A in Fig. 138.

When placed horizontally as f(U' drawing, every part moves
accurately about the same centre X (in direct line with the object on
the stage).

The fine adjustment is on the Franco-German princii)le, and
moves the entire body without changing the distance between the
objective and the cyc-piccc. The levers 11 II act directly upon the
sliding-box wliicli contains the pinion of the coarse adjustment, and
this is in turn pressed down by a strong spiral spring J above it. In
addition (wliich is important with tliis form of fine adjustment) the
Society screw at the end of the body is nrrimged as a safety nose-
piece K with spring. The arnuigcnu^nt of this form of fine adjust-
ment difiers from that of Mr. Zentmayer, as the latter uses an
independent slide for the coarse and for the fine adjustment, and not
one slide for btitli.

Heretofore in centering the stage to the optical axis it has been
d(mc by a ring within aiiotlier one, in which the screws (»perate eitlier
to draw or pusli the iuttTior ring into position. By this metliod the
stage, in order to uso it for obliipu! light, has to bo made inincces-
sarily largo. In place of a complete ring. ]Mr. Bulhxdi therefore
uses a segment or " saddlu piece," to which tlie stage ring is attached.
Tlie amingcment is sliown in the upper section of Fig. l;!8, where F
is the saddle-pieie, witli tlie four centering screws putisiug through

1074 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

138.

bclloch's congress microscope (older form).

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOaAMIA,- MICROSCOPY, ETC. 1075

Fig. 130.

liriliMiis rnNi;nE.NS Micuosn H'K ((iI.uki; iiiKJO.

1076 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

it, beiug firmly fastened to the limb. Tlie ring may be clamped in
any position by a screw passing through the base of F, and the stage
may be clamped in any position by M. The projections at N (and M)
afford bearings for the stage to move upon and diminish friction.

The stage is thin enough to admit oblique light up to 134°.

(2) Congress (neiver form). — Mr. Bulloch writes : " I have recently
made several improvements and additions to the stand.

" As originally intended, the front end of the centre of the substage
passed through and supported the stage support or saddle-piece ; but
for the finer work of measuring angles of aperture as Dr. Blackham
does, any connection between substage and stage would cause the
object to move to one side when the substage was swung from one
side to the other ; as now made there is no connection between sub-
stage or mirror and the stage ; the stage is fixed to the limb by an
angle-piece quite independent of the swinging arms, which I consider
an imi)()rtant improvement. (Cf. Figs. 140 and 141.)

" I have also improved the arrangement of the pinion box ; the
slide of the coarse adjustment is now provided with a V piece on each
side of the rack-work, and these fit into corresponding slots : they act
as guides to the movement and add to the steadiness. I have also
added guide pieces outside the pinion box, that travel with the fine
adjustment on the sides of the limb. (Cf. Figs. 140 and 141 : they are
shown above and below the large milled heads on the limb.)

" In the end of the tube is the new broad-gauge screw (the ' Dr.
Butterfield broad-gauge screw '), 1^ inch in diameter, for low-power
objectives of extra high angle. In this screw are two separate
nose-pieces containing the Society screw — one is for the binocular,
which must have diaphragms, so that the full benefit of high angle is
lost ; the other has a clear aperture, the diameter of the Society
screw.

" At the upper end of the slide of the tube is a scale reading to yi^
of an inch, and the slow-motion screw reads to yoVo' ^^ ^^^^ working
distance of objective can be measured.

" There is also what I call a new adaptation of the Gillett
diaphragm, which can be used close up to the object, or when using
the hemispherical lens can be swung close round it. The Woodward
prism and also the hemispherical lens are specially fitted to the
imder part of the stage support, so that the stage can be revolved in
the axis without altering the position of the hemisphere."

Of the points mentioned in Mr. Bulloch's letter, we must certainly
agree with him as to the importance of making the attachment of the
stage substantial and rigid, as may doubtless be done by screwing it
to the limb by an angle-piece. If it were desired to have a second
stage adapted — say a small diatom stage — it would be quite possible
to provide convenient means for changing the stage, and at the same
time to ensure that either stage should, when in position, be exactly
at right angles to the optic axis.

Still later Mr. Bulluch has modified the stand to make it more
especially applicable for the examination of diatoms. The stand is
shown in Figs. 140 and 141, the latter being a representation of the

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1077

instrument in a horizontal position (with the lamp attached to the
substage bar) for drawing, measuring apertures, &c.

Mr. Bulloch claims to have improved the construction of the

Fig. 140.

sliding ghiss sUigt^ ; as jiroviously niiul»\ tlicro was ulwiiys a liability
to II siiililcii slipping of tli(! slug*' if tlif jNIicrosfopo wcrr acridrntally
jiirrod. I>v using two pressure points iittod on one bar that turns on

1078

KECOKD OF CUKRENT EESEARCHES RELATING TO

a swivel joint, the swivel accommodates for any difference of length
in the points and thus equalizes the pressure and prevents slipping.
The stage is thin enough to admit an angle of 160 degrees.

The substage is made in two parts, intended for the examination
of polarizing objects when using an achromatic condenser. The
lower part has a motion to one side, which leaves the condenser and
light from the mirror in the same position. Fig. 140 shows the
lower part swung out.

The Gillett diaphragm to the condenser — placed above the lenses —

Fig. 141.

is also shown, and a convenient plan for mounting a hemispherical lens
for immersion illumination attached to an elbow-piece beneath the
stage.

(3) Biological. — This (Fig. 142) is a smaller and more recent
instrument (patented in 1879).

The substage and mirror can be moved indei^endently round the
focal point as a centre, and can be used above the stage if required.

INVERTEBRATA, CRYPTOGAMIA, MICROSCOPY, ETC.

1079

They can also be clamped in any position by the milled head shown
behind the limb.

The stage (with revolving concentric movement) is adjustable to
the axis, measures 3 5 inches in diameter, and is 3^ inches above the

Fio. 142.

tiibhi. Wliuu iiol rcMiuircd to revulvc, it can hv chiiiipfd in any
jJOfiition by the milled head shown in front. When there is any
daiig(!r of injuring the stage by the use of acids, it can be lifted out of
the ring in which it revolves, and an ordinary piece of glass used on

1080 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES RELATING TO

the top of the ring when the instrument is upright. The stand is
12i inches in height, and the body and draw-tube are each 5 inches
in length. The fine adjustment moves the whole body-tube, and there
is the broad-gauge screw for high-angle low-power objectives, in
which fits an adapter with the regular Society screw.

Other details are shown in the figure, which is about two-fifths the
actual size of the instrument.

Standards of Length— Uluminatioii for Opaque Objects.* —
Professor "W. A. Rogers has T)ublished an exhaustive paper on those
standards of length which are in actual use, and which have the
authority and sanction of either national or international law. Much
of the paper is beyond our scoj^e ; but the author refers to two points
bearing upon the use of the Microscope in verifying standards.

With regard to the magnifying power of the Microscope employed,
which is best adapted to secure the greatest absolute accuracy in
measurements, the result of the author's experience on the subject is
favourable to high powers. With a proper illumination, and with
lines having smooth edges, a power of 900 can be used with great
ease, even in the comparison of two metres upon a longitudinal com-
parator. In all the earlier comparisons Microscopes of very low power
were employed, varying from 10 to 60 diameters, and the International
Commission have decided upon the low power of 40 to 50. M. Tresca,
of the French section, however, is a firm believer in high powers, and
prefers one of about 400.

On the best method of illumination for opaque objects, Professor
Eogers says — " I cannot better illustrate the necessity for a proper
illumination in making exact measurements than by saying that I have
been obliged to reject a series of observations, extending over a period
of four months, for the simple reason that I finally discovered that,
during all this time, I have never once seen the actual lines ruled, but
only their image. I used a parabolic reflector, giving a beautiful
white line on a black background. The lines were traced upon a steel
surface, nickel-plated, their width being about one ten-thousandth of
an inch. Investigation showed that the positions of the lines could
be changed by an amount more than half their width, by shifting the
position of the parabolic reflector.

The method of illuminaticm employed by Baily and Sheepshanks
seems to me radically defective. With the Microscopes used by Sheep-
shanks I found myself unable to separate lines ruled on a polished
steel plate, though sepaiated by an interval of only one-thousandth of
a centimetre. As already stated, I have used with great satisfaction
the form of illumination described by Mr. Tolles in the ' Annual of
Scientific Discovery' for 1866-67. f It is sufficient to say here, that,
as none of the light is lost by the reflection, it is easy to get all, and
even more than is needed. Diflused daylight falling upon the j)lane
face of the prism inserted between the two front lenses afibrds an
abundance of Kght for the most delicate tracings. With a 1-inch objec-

* 'Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci.,* xv. (1880) pp. 273-312.
t See this Journal, ante, p. 7.54.

INVERTEBRATA. CRYPTOGAjMIA, jnCROSCOPY, ETC.

1081

Fig. 143.

tive of the form recently constructed ])y Mr. Tolles, lines 30,000 to
the inch, ruled on a polished steel surface, are resolved with the
greatest ease."

Professor Rogers also refers to a " comparator " which he has
designed as an improvement upon that described at p. 947 of vol.ii., a
description of which we defer until a detailed account, with a draw-
ing, has appeared.

Mirror for Illuminating Opaque Objects for the Projecting
Microscope.* — Tlie subject of this note, by Mr. P. Frazer, jun.,
(which we give verbatim) " is an arrangement for representing opaque
objects through the gas Microscope, especially adapted to Zentmayer's
Iji-inch objective. It is only claimed to be better than the para-
bolic reflector of Smith and Beck,
J. Lawrence Smith, Sorby, and
others, where the working distance
of the Microscope is comparatively
large (i. e. the distance from the
objective to the object on the stage
is i inch or more) and for the
purposes mentioned. Where the
distance is as great as that just
mentioned, the dispersion of rays
from the reflection at one point, of
rays from very different parts of
the mirror, is so great that only a
few rays from the upper part of
the mirror reach the lens at all.
It would be different with a lens
having a very small working dis-
tance, and in this case a parabolic
reflector would be preferable.

The apparatus consists of a
brass tube made to slide over the
lens, on the lower end of which is
fixed a glass plate about 1 mm. in
thickness, so attached as to be
capable of a sliding motion to-
wards or away from the hinged
mirror which is attached to the
edge of the metal flange in which
the glass plate slides. This simple
contrivance porniits the glass plate to be brought into close contact
with the rtflf'cting mirror, no matter at what angle the latter may bo
placed.

The mirror is made of nickol-platcd German silver neatly mounted
on a small hinge.

The liglit is admitted from Ixlow through a diapliragni aftt>r the
rays have been rendered parallel by the condenser of the lantern, the

• ' Vroc. Am. Phil. Sfw-. riiiln.,' xviii. (ISSO) |.. .'■>03.

G V, cover-n;la.'«8. BF N. rt fleet-
ing mirror. U 1' K, reflcctidii on object.
L', raj'H which pass througli the oltjoc-
tivc. D, leiiH. T, sliding tube carrying
roflecting mirror. Angle of inoitlenc«
G2°.

1082 RECORD OF CURRENT RESEARCHES, ETC.

aperture of tlie diapliragm being adapted to the maximum thickness
of beam which can be effective for illumination, and which (calling a
the aperture of the lens and i the angle of incidenc3 of the beam)
= a cos. i ; or for an aperture of f inch ( = 0*875 inch) and an inci-
dent angle of 62°, 0"4:11 inch, or roughly 0*4 inch.

The less the incident angle, of course the larger the beam of light
will be, and the greater the diameter of the diaphragm. The refractive
index of the glass employed to make the plate beiug 1 • 5, in order
that the critical angle 41° 48' may not be exceeded in the refracted
ray, this angle of incidence or i must not be less than 61° 51', or
roughly 62°.

This minimum value of i determines the area of surface which
can be illuminated on the Microscope stage, but by altering the angle
of the mirror very slightly, all parts of the object may be successively
projected on the screen. This minimum value is easily obtained
from the critical angle of the glass employed, which is 41° 48'. The
complement of this, or 48° 12', is equal to the angle of refraction
(or r) when the minimum value of i is attained.

'4^^'- 1-5,
sin. /•

sin. 8 = 1-5 (sin. 48° 12'),

i = er 51'.

In other words, the angle between the luminous ray and the glass
plate can never exceed 28° 09', or in round numbers 28°."

Ebonite in Microscopical Appliances. — In America ebonite has
been adopted for some years for mounting eye-pieces, and for stages
of laboratory Microscopes, principally by the Bausch and Lomb
Optical Company, who claim for it sjijecial adaptability for these pur-
poses as well as economy. M. Verick, of Paris, has also used it for
the diagonal sliding-boxes containing the prisms of his binocular eye-
piece and the outer plates into which they fit, and it has also been
adopted for rings for cells.

We are glad to see that ebonite is coming into use in this country,
having been adopted for Stephenson's safety-stage* (by Mr. Teesdale),
and now for Botterill's life trough, f There are many other pieces of
apparatus for which the use of ebonite would be a great advantage in
reducing weight.

* See this Journal, ante, p. 332. f Ibid., p. 148.

( 1083 )
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

Meeting of 13th October, 1880, at King's College, Strand, W.C,
The President (Dr. Beale, F.E.S.) in the Chair.

The Minutes of the meeting of 9th Juno last were read and
confirmed, and were signed hy the Chairman.

The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints)
received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the
Society given to the donors.

From
Blackham, G. E.— On Angular Aperture of Objectives for

the Microscope. 21 pp. and 18 plates. (8vo. New

York, 1880.) The Author.

Braithwaitc, R. — The Sphagnaccse or Peat Mosses of Europe

and North America. 91 pp. and 29 plates. (8vo.

London, 18S0.) Ditto.

Cunningham, D. D. — On certain effects of Starvation on

Vegetable and Animal Tissues. 47 pp. and 11 figs.

(4to. Calcutta, 1879.) Ditto.

Lewi.s, T. R. — The Microscopic Organisms found in the

Blood of Man and Animals, and tlieir relation to Disease.

91 pp. and 3 plates and 27 figs. (4to. Calcutta, 1879.) Ditto.

Mandl, L. — Anatomie Micro.scopique. 2 vols. pp. 3U8, 92 and

54, 412 and 40. Plates 52 and 40. (Fol. Paris, 1838-47,

1848-57.) Dr. Carpenter, C.B.

Ranvier, L. — Lemons d'Anatomie Ge'ne'rale sur le Systeme

Musculaire. 4Gr. pp. and 99 figs. (8vo. Paris, 18S0) . . 3fr. Crisp.

Fungus? on Human Hair Mr. G. C. Morris.

Section of P^lectric Organ of the Ray Dr. B.W. Richardson.

Slide and Packets of the Llyn Arcnig Bach Diatomaceous

Deposit Dr. H. Stoltcrfoth.

The President called particular attention to the two volumes of
' Mandl's Microscopic Anatomy ' presented to the Society by
Dr. Carpenter (reading to the Meeting the letter which accompanied
tho donation), and lutjvcd a special vote of thanks to Dr. Carpenter,
which was carried unanimously.

Mr. Crisp cxLibitcd and described Waech tor's Demonstrating
Microscope and Wasserlein's Saccharimctcr-Microscope, and exhibited
Professor Huxley's Dis.secting Microscope (see p. 705), Tescliner's
Trichina-Microscoi)o (see p. 715), tho two shown at pp. 882 and 883
(Figs. 97 and 98), and another of VVaechter's, with fine adjustment on
the same plan as Seibcrt and KraOt's, Figs. 99 and 100, p. 883.

Mr. Swift exhibited and described a l^Iicroscopc with radial
traversing substago illumiimtor (see p. 8G7).

Mr. Crisp pointed out that tho speciality of tho instrument
consisted, 1st, in its having tioo sectors at right angles ; 2ud, in tho

1084

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

reduced size of the condensers ; and 3rd, in the sectors being remov-
able, so that they could be replaced by the ordinary substage if
desired.

Mr. Jno. Mayall, jun., exhibited " the Thury-Nachet Traverse
Substage," one of the earliest forms of what was now called the
" Swinging Substage " (made by M. Nachet in 1855 for M. Thury),
and described the peculiarities of its construction (see p. 1059).

Mr. Crisp exhibited and described Messrs. Parkes's frog-plate
(see p. 1041).

Mr. Teesdale's description of the Pearson-Teesdale microtome
was read, and the instrument exhibited (see p. 1034).

Mr. G. C. Morris's letter as to what was supposed to be a fungus
on human hair was read, together with a communication from Dr.
Cooke, to whom the specimens had been submitted.

Lr. Stolterfoth's paper " On the Diatomacere in the Llyn Arenig
Bach Deposit " (see p. 913) was read, and a slide in illustration
exhibited. Several packets of the deposit referred to were also
placed upon the table for distribution amongst the Fellows.

Dr. Matthews said that he visited the place some few years ago,
and then found some pipe-clay works upon the spot. No one at that
time thought that the deposit was diatomaceous earth, but pipe-clay,
and it was used as such.

Mr. Crisp read some recent communications from Prof. Hamilton
L. Smith, in which he recommended the abandonment of the wax cell
(see p. 861), and the use of paper dipped in shellac varnish for
making rings (see p. 1038).

Mr. James Smith said he had described these rings some fifteen
years ago, and a notice of it appeared in the ' Transactions ' at the
time (see p. 1039).

Dr. Braithwaite said he had used them twenty-five years ago.

Mr. Stewart described the observations of M. Eobin on a species
of Podophrya (see p. 817), in connection with Mr. Badcock's paper on
Acinetina (see j). 561), and drew figures in illustration on the board.

Mr. A, A, Bragdon's letter on fluid for homogeneous-immersion
objectives was read (see p. 1051), and a discussion enstied, in the
course of which

Mr. T. Powell said it was his decided opinion that such objectives
were better constructed with a collar adjustment ; if made so as to be
at the right jjoint when the collar was screwed home they could not
go far wrong ; and

Mr. Stephenson again reminded the Meeting that if the objects

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1085

were in air and non-adherent to the cover, a homogeneous-immersion
objective was no better than a water objective, as the aperture was at
once cut down to the equivalent of 180^ in air. The whole benefit
of the oil-immersion was thus entirely lost.

The following Objects, Apparatus, &c., were exhibited:—

Mr. O. Brandt : — Slides of diatoms arranged by E. Getschmanu.

Mr. Crisp : — The seven Microscopes mentioned on p. 1083.
„ Parkes's frog plate (see \x 1011).

„ Webb's finder (see p. 750).

Mr. J. Mayall, jun. : — The Thury-Nachet Traverse Substage (see
p. 1059).

Mr. G. C. Morris: — Fungus (?) on human hair.

Dr. B. W. Richardson : — Section of electric organ of the Ray.

Dr. H. Stolterfoth : — Slide of the Llyn Arenig Bach Diatomaceous
Deposit (see p. 913).

Mr. Swift : — Microscope with radial traversing substage illumina-
tor (see p. 867).

Mr. Teesdale : — New (Pcarson-Teesdale) microtome (see p. 1034).

New Fellows: — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows : —
Messrs. Thomas Goodwin, J. Sibley Hicks, L.R.C.P., J. Buxton
Payne, and J. C. Thompson ; and Ex-officio Fellow : — The President
for the time being of the Manchester Microscopical Society.

Meeting of 10th November, 1880, at King's College, Strand, W.C.
The President (Dr. Beale, F.R.S.) in the Chair.

The Minutes of the meeting of 13th October last were read and
confirmed, and were signed by the President.

The List of Donations (exclusive of exchanges and reprints)
received since the last meeting was submitted, and the thanks of the
Society given to the donors.

From
Heurck, H. van.— Synopsis rlos Diatonu-os de Belgique. Fasc.

I and II. Allan. Plates l-:]0. (8vo. Antwerp, 1«80) The Author.
MiiUer, N. J. C— Iliindl.iu-h dcr Botunik. 2" Band. 2''-

Theil. 482 pp. and 227 plates. (8vo. Heidelberg,

1880.) Mr. Crisp.

Photograplis of Pleurosigma angulatum and Frustulia saxonica Mr. 0. Brandt.
Santa Monica Earth,- and Section and Photographs of the

San Bernardino Mefeorito Mr. If. 0. flanks.

" Tripoli " from liichmond liivor, N. S. Wales I'rof. A. Livcrsidge.

Mr. 0. Brandt's letter as to the above photographs was read : —
" I enclose photograplis of : —

1. Plcurosiyma amjidntnm W. Smith, from a preparation of
J. D. MitUcr, Wedcl, magnified direct 2000 times with (rundlacli's
VOL. III. 4 C

1086 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

No. VII. immersion and amplifier (concave lens). Distance 1 metre,
central illumination.

2. PJeurosigma angulatum — the same frustule magnified direct
5900 times with Gundlach's No. VII. immersion and amplifier.
Distance 3 metres, central illumination.

3. Frustulia saxonica, showing lines parallel to the axis of the
frustule, magnified direct 5000 times with Seibert and Krafi't's new
oil-immersion objective.

The existence of these lines parallel to the axis of the diatom is
quite new, and I think many of the Fellows will be interested to hear
of it. It seems as if all drawings on all diatoms come back to crossed
lines or circles, and as soon as one sort of lines can be seen the
existence of others crossing the same can be guessed.

We are now trying to find these crossed lines in AmpMjpleura
pellucida.

All the photographs were made by Carl Gunther, of Berlin."

Mr. Jno. Mayall, jun., said it was very interesting to compare the
lithographs published in the 'Monthly Microscopical Journal' (1876)
of Dr. Woodward's photographs of Frustulia saxonica with those now
shown. Dr. Woodward was at first doubtful as to the existence of
both transverse and longitudinal lines, but Mr. Samuel Wells, of
Boston, afterwards showed them very distinctly, though not so well
as they were shown in the photographs before the meeting.

Professor R. Hitchcock's letter was read as to the publication of
Mr. Habirshaw's ' Catalogue of the Diatomacese ' if a sufficient number
of siibscribers were obtained.

Mr. Crisp exhibited and described the following nine Microscopes :
— Beck's Silk Mercer's, Swift's ditto, Holmes's Demonstrating, Nachet's
" Snufi" Box," Parkes's English Medical with sliding adapters for the
objectives (see p. 1048), and a small form of simple Microscope with a
mirror made in Paris. He also exhibited a Nachet Microscope to
which the " Thury-Nachet Traverse Substago" (see p. 1059) had
been attached, Sidle and Poalk's Acme Microscope with Iris Dia-
phragm (see pp. 532 and 1053), and the Tolles-Blackham Microscope
(see p. 520).

Dr. W. B. Carpenter, C.B., exhibited and described the " Working
Microscope " devised by Mr. George Wale, an American manufacturer
(see p. 1045). Being struck by the novelty of several parts of the
instrument, he had thought it worth while to get one, and he had
no hesitation in saying, after working with it, that it combined more
good points than any student's Microscope which he had yet seen.

The first point was the method of susj^ension, which, instead of
being on the usual plan of a swinging centre with two pivots, con-
sisted of a grooved arc moving between corresponding curved fillets
on a central support ; the foot was of cast iron (together with the
arc carrying the body), and was made in two pieces, on each of

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1087

which a projecting fillet was cast, and which on being put together
allowed the arc to freely move between them, a brass set-screw
enabling it to be clamped rigidly in any desired position. In
this way the Microscope was well supported without any tendency
to tilt in any position. The next point was the fine adjustment,
which was made upon a plan which he believed was Mr. Zentmayer's,
but it was one wliich made it impossible for there to be any twist.
The third point was in having the draw tube so made as to take an
objective of much longer focus than usual; it was fitted with the
Society's screw, and would also take an amplifier if needed.

The stage was simply a round plate of brass, but the method in
which the fork for holding the object was fitted to the stage gave it
almost the advantage of a revolving stage. The mode in which the
mirror was hung was also very satisfactory in a student's Microscope,
admitting as it did of being swung laterally in either direction, and
also — by means of a slide in the bar on which it was mounted —
of being moved up near to the objective so as to act as a condenser.
There was also an addition to the Microscope of great value, viz. an
iris diaphragm (see p. 1052) of very simple and ingenious construc-
tion (described and figured on the black board).

Altogether the instrument was one which much pleased him, and he
had brought it under their notice in the hope that some of its points
might be taken up in this country, where the demand for efficient
student's Microscopes of good quality was becoming so great that it
would be worth while for any maker to bring out the best that could
be produced at a moderate cost. This Microscope could be supplied
in New York at about 71., but he thought it quite probable that it
might be made here for say IZ. less.

The President expressed the thanks of the meeting to Dr.
Carpenter for his explanation.

Dr. Edmunds pointed out that this most useful microscope-stand
would be vastly improved if only the arc upon which the body turns
were so constructed tliat the centre of the circle of which the arc
forms part wore made to coincide in position with the centre of the
stage. The object then would undergo no movement of translation,
either in rotating the stage or in turning the optical tube from the
vertical to the horizontal. In rotating the stage, the object would
turn upon the optic axis ; in moving the tube into various degrees
of oblicpiity from 0" to 90", the object would rotate upon its horizontal
axis. The result would be that, with a thin stage and a hemi-
spherical lens in immersion contact with the under surface of the slide,
all the complicated swinging substagcs ami other contrivances now
upon the table might be swept away, and every angle of illumination
c«)\ild be got by merely inclining tlie bo<ly of the Microscope upon its
sustaining arc. There wouhl only bo needed a lamp on a level with
the object with a condenser at its focal distance standing upon the
table in line between the lamp and the object.

Dr. Carpenter said that another improvement had also occurred
to liini, and that was to construct tlie fork so that it would carry
round the object iu the axis of the Microscope. It did not do so as

4 c 2

1088 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

at present constructed, but might easily be made to do so, and thus to
answer the purpose of a rotating stage.

Mr. John May all, jun., described the ToUes-Blackham Micro-
scope, exhibited by Mr. Crisp (see p. 520), and described and exhibited
Hyde's Illuminator, which had been devised to produce a luminous
field similar to that obtained by Mr. Wenham's reflex illuminator.

Mr. Crisp called attention to several new applications of ebonite
to microscopical purposes, including " Botterill's Life Trough " (see
p. 148), now made in ebonite, Atwood's rubber-cell (see p. 1041), and
Beck's rotating holder for the latter.

Mr. Swift exhibited and explained by means of a diagram a form
of (" calotte ") diaphragm which he had devised for bringing a series
of apertures immediately below the object (see p. 1053).

Mr. W. G. Lettsom described Professor Abbe's new form of
binocular eye-piece (" Stereoscopic Ocular ") specially adapted for the
short-bodied instruments in ordinary use on the Continent, illus-
trating it by a diagram drawn upon the black board, and by the
exhibition of the instrument in the room.

Mr. Crisp exhibited for comparison three other forms of binocular
eye-pieces, viz. those of Prazmowski, ToUes, and Verick.

Dr. Carpenter said he should like to say a few words about the
arrangement of Professor Abbe. He had paid a great deal of atten-
tion to the subject of binocular vision, and might say that he had
been at the birth of the binociilar Microscope. As regarded the one
now exhibited, it seemed to him to have been overlooked that in order
to get a true stereoscopic projection the rays from one side of the
objective must cross completely over to the opposite side of the
instrument. This was done in Nachet's and in Wenham's, and with
either of these it was impossible to see an object in any other way
than stereoscopically. To produce this effect it was necessary that
the lateral inversion should be antagonized by the reflecting power of
the prism — they must have the reflected ray crossing the other
entirely, otherwise they could not have any true stereoscopic efi'ect.

Another observation which he had to make was that the arrange-
ment now described resembled Mr. Wenham's arrangement for a non-
stereoscopic binocular. In this form Mr. Wenham made his two
prisms in the same way, and except that they were in contact the
thing was the same ; it was devised for the purpose of diminishing
the fatigue of working with one eye so as to give a more comfortable
view of an object in case of prolonged observation, and this was
described and figured in the ' Transactiotis ' of the Society for 1866
(N. S. xiv. pp. 1U3-6, 3 figs.). In the true stereoscopic binocular the
pencil of light was split into two halves, and in Mr. Wenham's standard
form one lateral half went into the principal body and the other was
reflected obliquely into the secondary body. But this new form did

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1089

not do SO, neither did that of Messrs. Powell and Lealand — indeed they
did not pretend that it did. He had, therefore, no hesitation in saying
that any stereoscopic etfect in such an instrument must be formed
entirely in the imagination of the observer, just as a seal might be seen
under certain conditions, and might be imagined to be either a sunk
impression or a raised cameo ; for when one had got a conception
of solidity, this mental conception might easily be carried on.

He had found the binocular to be essential to a knowledge of solid
form, and as he had often expressed that opinion, a number of foreign
microscopists had from time to time come to him upon the subject.
One day Professor Haeckol, amongst others, seemed, as most conti-
nental observers used to be, rather doubtful as to the value of the
binocular. He showed him at first some Polycistina, which were of
course familiar to him as solid objects, and he looked at them and
said he did not see them ditferently from usual. Then he showed
him an object which he had not seen before — it was a piece of the
wing of a small moth, which had a peculiar arrangement of the scales.
Drawing out the prism, he asked the professor to look at the object
and to adjust the focus so as to get a good middle distance, and then
whilst he was looking at it the prism was suddenly replaced. He
quite started at the result, for he then saw the undulations as if they
were a solid raised surface, and admitted at once the true character of
the stereoscopic effect produced. The mere fact that altering the
caps as described by Mr. Lettsom was stated to be competent to
change the image from stereoscopic to pseudoscopic satisfied him at
once that there was no true stereoscopic effect produced.

Mr. Crisp referred to several communications upon the subject
of wax cells, American correspondents more particularly bcin*' of
opinion that Professor Hamilton Smith had given tliem up too hastily,
and tliat the sweating comi)hi,ined of came from the use of cements
containing turpentine, &c., and other causes apart from the wax (see
p. 1039).

Mr. Shadbolt's Memorandum on Apertures "exceeding 180° in
Air " was read as follows : —

" It was with c(Jiisidcrable regret that I found a short article in the
October nunibur <»tthe 'Journal' (i).875), entitled 'Apertures exceeding
180 in Air,' especially a.s it was not followed by any editorial com-
ment of warning against the errors of both theory and fact involved
therein.

In the article in question I find the following sentence, viz. : —
' The whole confusion has arisen from not getting beyond the simplo
and obvious fact, about wliich there can bo no dispute, that a </ry lens
cannot have an aperture of more than 18U\' To anyone who cannot
grasp this 'obvious hut,' 1 doubt th.it any explanation of optical plie-
noHKiia would bt! inttdiigible. The sUitenient is true, certainly ; but
it is also misleading, because it is only a part of the truth. The whole

1090 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

confusion has arisen from not getting beyond the simple and obvious
fact — aboiit which there can be no dispute, that no lens, dry or immer-
sion, can possibly have an aperture of 180°.

I presume that no one will dispute the fact, that two contiguous
points in any object must be in a straight line, and that three points
contiguous to one another lie in a plane, consequently that if the
bundle of light-rays radiant from each point reached 180° — one of
such rays at least must pass clean through the adjacent point ; and this
is equally true, whether the object is in air, or immersed in water, oil,
balsam, or any other transparent medium. The difference is infini-
tesimal ; but less than 180° it must be. Again, I presume that no one
will contend that it is possible to collect from any given point a
larger number of light-rays than are actually emitted from that point,
and if so, my contention is established.

But I am by no means content to leave the matter here. A lens
must have a surface of some kind, and it is quite impossible to bring
the surface of a lens in close contact with the whole of even so small a
part of the object as we wish to examine ; and unless we can do this —
nay, even if we could do this — we must leave out a further portion of
the supposed pencil of 180° of radiant light ; because, as the extreme
rays would be paralell to the front surface of the lens, there would be
no refraction,

I may add further, that were such a lens constructed that it could
refract the largest possible portions of the 180° of radiant light, it
would be practically useless, as there would be no working distance
and no possible adjustment to suit varying sights. I state as a matter
of opinion only, that I very much doubt whether we can hope to see
any lens constructed to include practically, that is, efficiently, more
than 170° of aperture. Let us suppose such a dry lens to have been
constructed and placed in position to examine some transparent object
simply laid upon a slip of glass, which object is illuminated from
below ; the lens would now receive and refract from each luminous
point a pencil of 170° ; but if that object were mounted in balsam, or
other dense medium, and protected as usual with a thin covering of
glass, the same dry objective could no longer refract the 170° radiant
pencil of light, because certain of the rays of that pencil would, in
their passage towards the lens, fall on the upper surface of the covering-
glass, at and beyond the critical angle, and would therefore find no
exit ; the angular aperture of each pencil of rays proceeding from the
object, would therefore be limited to an angle equal to double the
critical angle for the covering-glass employed, I may remark, in
passing, that this would not be the case were the object mounted dry
and the two surfaces of the covering-glass parallel.

It now becomes apparent why an immersion objective can in suit-
able cases perform better than dry ones. With an appropriate fluid
interposed the critical angle for glass becomes obliterated ; and the
pencil of rays, whatever its aperture, can pass direct to the posterior
surface of the front lens, and there become refracted for effective use
in forming an image ; and this is where the immersion lens has the
advantage ; it can include as large a portion of the radiant pencils of

PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY. 1091

light as the lens is constracted to admit, irrespective of the mounting
of the object, but in no case can it reach, far less exceed, 180^.

It may be as well here to note, that with a dry lens, both the front
and back surfaces of the front lens take part in the refractions ; but
with an immersion lens, the refraction at the front surface is sup-
pressed or greatly reduced.

Before concluding, I wish to make a remark or two upon some of
the statements in the article, and as it is anonymous, I trust I can do
so without offence ; my sole object being to resist the promulgation of
erroneous views, and the use of vague and incorrect expressions in
matters of scientific interest. What does the writer of the article
mean by ' radiant spaces ? ' How can ' diffraction spectra ' pass
through them ? How can a ' space of 6° ' become larger or smaller ?
It is to such expressions as these that confusion of ideas arises, far
more than from any inability to gi-asp the fact that a lens cannot have
an aperture of more than 180^."

Mr. Wilson said that Mr. Shadbolt appeared to have altogether
misapprehended the note at p. 875. That did not refer to " angle "
at all, but to " aperture," and it was now well established that they
were not synonymous terms ; he did not therefore follow Mr. Shadbolt's
demonstration as to the angle being necessarily less than 180^, which
he imagined that no one disputed. The original note and Mr. Shad-
bolt's letter related in fact to two distinct matters.

Mr. Crisp said the note referred to would certainly not have been
admitted into the ' Journal ' if it had been inconsistent with Mr. Shad-
bolt's demonstration as to an angle of 180^ On receipt of his letter,
he had written to Mr. Shadbolt, pointing out that the note referred to
aperture, and had received a further letter, in which he said : —

" I cannot assent to the word ' aperture ' as employed. The abso-
lute ' aperture ' of a telescopic lens is sufficiently intelligible, so is
the ' angular aperture ' of a microscopical lens, but an ' apertui-e ' that
is neither absolute nor angular is not intelligible at all, esj^ecially if
you call it ' numerical aperture.' Now, if it had been called ' nuyncrical
resolving poicer,' it would I fancy be nearer to what is really meant.

I am fully alive to the advantage of immersion lenses in appro-
priate conditions, but I altogether deny their universal apjdicability.
There is no difficulty in getting the largest practicable pencil of light,
say 170^", into a dry lens; the difficulty is, that you cannot get such a
pencil out of the mounting of the object when iu balsam, or similar
medium, and that is bounded by a stratum of air.

Tliis is very easily demonstrable by a few lines added to the diagram
given by Professor Stijkes, at p. lil, V(d. i. of the present scries.
Witli a little, modification this observation apj)lies also to an object
mounted dry, but covered with a thin film of glass.

Sliould there be any kind of discussion, kindly put forward these
remarks in my absence."

Mr. Wilson said that Professor Stokes' paper was a refutation of
tho very fallacy on which Mr. Shadbidt's reasoning was based. Tho
expression " angle of apijrturo " had never in fact been a measure of
the relative apertures of even dry objectives, and on tho introduction of

1092 PROCEEDINGS OF THE SOCIETY.

immersion objectives it had ceased to have any definite meaning what-
ever. ^

Dr. Maddox exhibited and described a modification of his Aeroconi-
scope for collecting particles from the atmosphere.

Mr. Crisp explained the properties of monobromide of naphthaline
proposed by Professor Abbe for mountiug diatoms. Its refractive
index was stated as 1'658, and its "index of visibility" (on Mr.
Stephenson's theory) as double that of Canada balsam, or 22 when
used on diatomaceous silex (see p. 1043).

Dr. Edmunds inquired if it was unchangeable.

Mr. Crisp said it did not seem to have been very long in use. It
could be obtained in London.

Dr. G. W. Royston-Pigott's paper " On a new Method of Testing
an Object-glass, used as a simultaneous Condensing Illuminator of
brilliantly reflecting objects, such as minute particles of Quicksilver "
(see p. 916), was, owing to the lateness of the hour, taken as read.

Mr. Stewart's paper, " On some Structural Features of Echino-
strephus molare, Parasalenia gratiosa, and Stomopneustes variolaris"
(see p. 909), was also taken as read.

The following Objects, Apparatus, &c., were exhibited:—

Mr. O. Brandt : — Photographs of Pleurosigma angulatum and Frus-
tulia saxonica.

Dr. Carpenter : — Wale's Working Microscope and Iris Diaphragm.

Mr. Coppock : — Eotating Holders for At wood's Eubber Cells.

Mr. Crisp: — The nine Microscopes mentioned on p. 1086; and
Botterill's Life Trough in Ebonite.

Mr. H. G. Hanks : — Santa Monica Earth, and Section and Photo-
graphs of the San Bernardino Meteorite.

Mr. Lettsom : — Abbe's Binocular Eye-piece.

Prof. A. Liversidge : — " Tripoli " from Kichmond Kiver, N. S. W.

Mr. J. Mayall, junr. : — Hyde's Illuminator.

Dr. Maddox : — Modified Aeroconiscope.

Messrs. Powell and Lealand: — Amphipleura pellucida with ^^
homogeneous-immersion objective, and their modification of the
vertical illuminator.

Mr. Stewart : — Various Echinoderms illustrating his paper.

Mr. Swift : — Microscope with " Calotte " Diaphragm.

New Fellows. — The following were elected Ordinary Fellows : —
Sir Henry Cotterell, Bart., and Messrs. F. M. Balfour, M.A., F.R.S.,
John Henry Cooke, and Levison Edward Scarph, M.A.

Walter W. Eeeves,
Assist.-Secretary.

( 9 )

NOTICE OF REMOVAL

68, CORNHILL,
London, E.G., June 24th, 1880.

R. & J. BECK,

MANUFACTURING OPTICIANS,

Beg respectfully to inform their friends that
they have REMOVED from

31 TO 68, CORNHILL

New Enlarged Edition

OF

ILLUSTlfATED CATALOGUE

UK

MICEOSCOPES, APPAEATUS, &c.,

Forwarded Post Free upon application.

( 10 )
I. Conversion of British and Metric Measures.

?cftle of Inche?,
C'Cnti metres,

cm. 'i

mm. Ins. ' [

Lj3t_i

TSocnr

1

2 0 O O 0
1

15000
. J.

lOooTT

1
80O0

10 6 a

Tooo

1

8O0

BoJT

1

Ton

1000 fx =1 mm. I
10 mm.=l cm. I

10 cm. =1 dm.

I
10 dm. =1 metre.,

Inches, <f-c., into

MicromilUmetres,

Millimetres, ^c.

ins. ^

1-015991

1-269989

1-693318

2-539977

2-8-22197

3-171971

3-628539

4-233-295

5 -.079954

6-319943

8-4(;6.".91

12-699886

25-399772

mm.

•028222

•031750

•036285

•042333

•050800

•056444

•063499

•07-2571

-084666

•101599

•126999

•169332

•253998

•507995

015991

269989

587486

693318

11(;648

539977

174971

233295

762457

079954

6-349943

7-937429

9-524914

11-112400

12-699886

14-287372

15-874857

17-462343

19-049829

20-637315

22-224800

23-81-2286

25-399772

50-799544

76-199316

101-599088

126-998860

152-398632

177-798104

203-198176

228-597948

253-997720

279 '397492

304-797-264

mptros.

= -304797
lyd.= • 914392

2-J
I

TSTo

Ta

s

i
X

tV

f

*
i

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

1ft.

(1.) Lineal.
MicromilUmetres^ Millimetres, 4'C., into Inches, 4'C.

M
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24
25
23
27
28
29
30

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

60

70

80

90

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000 (

000039
000079
000118
000157
000197
000236
000276
000315
000354
000394

000433
000472
000512
000551
000591
000630
000669
000709
000748
000787

000827
000866
000906
000945
000984
001024
001063
001102
001142
001181

001220
001260
001299
001339
001378
001417
001457
001496
001535
001575

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8
9
10 (1 cm.)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 (2 cm.)

21
22
23

24
25
26

27 1

28 1

29 1

30 (3 cm.) 1

001614
001654
001693
001732
001772
001811
001850
001890
001929
001969

002302
002756
003150
003543
008137
007874
011811
(015748
0]9685
023022
027559
031496
035433
Imm.)

31
32
33
34
35
33
.37
38
39

40 (4 cm.) 1

41 1
1

42

43 1

44 1

45 1

46 1

47 1

48 1

49 1

50 (5 cm.) 1

Ins. 1

039370
078741
118111
157482
190852
236223
275593
314963
354334
393704

433075
472445
511816
551186
590556
629927
669297
708668
748038
787409

826779
866149
905520
944890
984261
023631
063002
102372
141742
181113

220483
259854
299224
338595
377965
417335
456706
496076
535447
574817

614188
653558
692928
732299
771669
811040
850410
889781
929151
968521

declm.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

61
62

53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60 (6 cm.)

61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70 (7 cm.)

71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80 (8 cm.)

81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90 (9 cm.)

91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100 (10 cm.

10 (1 metre) 39
= 3
= 1

Ins.

-937043
•874086
•S11129
-748172
•685215
-622258
-559301
•496344
-433387
-370430
-280869 ft.
-093623 yds.

( 11 )

II. Corresponding De- jj

III. Coi

iversi

an 0

f Numeri

cal and i

Angular

grees in

the Fahren-

Aperture

heit and

Centigrade

Scales.

Angle of Aperture

of

Theoretical

Resolving

Tower, in

Lines to an Inch.

Fahr.

0

Cent.
o

Cent. Fabr.
o o

Numerical
Apertiure.

Dry

Water-
Immersion

JIOTtwgeneous
Jmvwrsion

500

260-0

100 212-0

UQj'-CElvco. 1

Objectives.

Objectives.

(A=0-5269/i,

450

232-2
204-4

98 208-4 i
96 204-8 I

K'* —

(n = l-33.)

1

(?»= 1-62.)

=line E.)

400

350

176 -7

94 201-2 i

1-52

180° 0'

146,528

300

148-9

92 197-6 1

1-50

161° 23'

144,600

250

121-1

90 194 0

1-48

..

153° 39'

142,672

212

100-0

88 190-4 ,

1-46

147° 42'

140,744

210

98-9

86 186-8 i

1-44

142° 40'

138.816

205

961

84 183-2

1-42

138° 12'

136,888

200

93-3

82 179-0 '

1-40

134° 10'

134,960

195

90-6

80 1760

1-38

..

,.

130° 26'

133,032

190

87-8

78 172-4 1

1-36

126° 57'

131,104

185

85-0

76 168-8 1

1-34

„

123° 40'

129,176

180

82-2

74 105-2 '

1-33

180°' C

122° 6'

128,212

175

79-4

72 161-6 i

1-32

165° 56'

120° 33'

127,248

170

7(3-7

70 158-0 j

1-30

.,

155° 38'

117° 34'

125.320

165

73-9

68 154-4

1-28

..

148° 28'

114° 44'

123,392

160

71-1

66 150-8

1-26

142° 39'

111° 59'

121,464

155

68-3

64 147-2

1-24

137° 36'

109° 20'

119.536

150

65-6

62 143-6

1-22

133° 4'

106° 45'

117,608

145

62-8

60 UO-0

1-20

128° 55'

104° 15'

115,680

140

60-0

58 130-4

1-18

..

125° 3'

101° 50'

113.752

135

57-2

56 132-8

1-16

121° 26'

99° 29'

111,824

130

54-4

54 129-2

1-14

118° 00'

97° 11'

109,893

125

51-7

52 125-6

1-12

114° 44'

94° 56'

107,968

120

48-9

50 122 0

110

111° 36'

92° 43'

106,040

115

46-1

48 118-4 1

1-08

^ ,

108° 36'

90° 33'

104.112

110

43-3

46 114-8 i

106

,,

105° 42'

88° 26'

102.184

105

40-6

44 111-2

1-04

.,

102° 53'

86° 21'

100,256

100

37-8

42 107-0

1-02

, ,

100° 10'

84° 18'

98,328

95

35-0

40 104-0

1-0

ISO^'

0'

97° 31'

82° 17'

96,400

90

32-2

38 100-4

0-98

157°

2'

94° 56'

80° 17'

94,472

85

29-4

36 96-8

0-96

147°

29'

92° 24'

78° 20'

92,544

80

26-7

34 93-2

0-94

140°

6'

89° 56'

76° 24'

90.616

75

239

32 89-6

0-02

133°

51'

87° 32'

74° 30'

88,688

70

21-1

30 86-0

0-90

128°

19'

85° 10'

72° 36'

86.760

65

IS -3

28 82-4

0-88

123°

17'

8-2° 51'

70° 44'

84,832

60

15-6

26 78-8

0-86

118°

38'

hO° 34'

68° 54'

82,904

65

12-8

24 75-2

0-84

114°

17'

78° 20'

67° 6'

80,976

50

10 0

22 71-0

! 0-82

110°

10'

76° 8'

65° 18'

79,018

45

7-2

20 680

i 0-80

106°

16'

73° 58'

63° 31'

77,120

40

4-4

18 61-4

0-78

10-2°

31'

71° 49'

61° 45'

75,192

36

1-7

18 60-8

0-78

9S°

56'

69° 42'

00° 0'

73,264

32

0-0

14 57-2 i

0 74

95"

28'

67° 36'

58° 10'

71,336

30

- 11

12 53-6

0-72

92°

6'

65° 32'

56° 32'

69,408

26

- 39

10 50 0

i 0-70
0-68
0-08

88°

51'

63° 31'

54° 50'

67,480

20

- 6-7

8 46-4

85°

41'

61° 30'

53° 9'

65,5.52

15

- 9-4

6 42-8

^r

30'

59° 30'

51° 28'

03,(;24

10

-12-2

4 3:»-2

0-64
0-62

79°

35'

57° 31'

49° 48'

61.096

5

-15-0

2 35-6

70°

38'

55° 34'

48° 9'

.')H,768

0

-17-8

0 32 0

0-60

73-^

44'

53° 3!^

46'^ 30'

57,S40

- 5

-20-6

- 2 28-4

0-68

70°

54'

51° 42'

44° 61'

65.912

- 10

-23-3

— 4 21-8

0-66

6S°

6'

49° 48'

43° 14'

53,984

- 15

-2(;-l

- 6 21-2

0-54

'65°

22'

47° 54'

41° 37'

52,056

-20

-28-9

- 8 17-6

0 62

6-Z°

40'

46° 2'

40° 0'

50, 1-28

- 25

-31-7

- 10 140

0-60

60°

0'

44° 10'

3S° 24'

4S,200

-30

-34-4

- 12 10-4

0-48

\^r

22'

42" 18'

36° 49'

46.272

- 35

-37-2

1 - 14 6-8

0-46

i>'4°

46'

40" 28'

35° 14'

45,344

-40

-40- 0

- 10 H-2

r.44

52°

12'

38° 38'

.13° 39'

42.416

- 45

-42-8

1 - 10 - 0-4

42

49°

40'

86° 49'

32'' 5'

40.48S

-50

-450

- 20 - 4-0

.-40

47°

9'

35° 0'

80° 81'

88,560

( 12 )

Microscopes.

The Cheapest House for First- Class Instruments

in London.
An Immense Stock always on hand for Selection.

Send for the NEW ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE.

Post Free, 2d. Ask for Microscope Catalogue.

New List of MICROSCOPIC OBJECTS.

Post Free, 2d. Ask for Micro. Object List.

W. Watson & Son, 313, High Holbom, London.

Two Doors from Chancery Lane.— Establislied 1837.

C. BAKER, 244 & 245, High Holborn,

Begs to call the attention of Microscopists to Lis NEW MODEL STAND, to

which any Apparatus or Object-Glasses can be supplied, price £3.

SrPEEioR English or Geeman Object-Glasses for same, from 21«.

C. BAKER being- the appointed AGENT for ZEISS, SEIBERT, and other
first-class GERMAN MAKERS, is now supplying their beautiful
productions at very LOW PRICES. Zeiss' new Homogeneous and
other Immersion Objectives now in Stock. Catalogue Fbee by Post.

A LARGE ASSORTMENT OF

SECOND-HAND MiCROSGOPES AND OTHER SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENTS

IN STOCK, AT THE LOWEST PRICES. LISTS OP SAME FORWARDED ON APPLICATION.

Instruments taken in Exchange. Established in 1765.

SECOND-HAND mCROSCOFES,

BT ALL ESTEEMED MAKEES, AT A LA.E6B EEDUOTION

FROM THE ORIGINAL COST.

AN IMMENSE STOCK TO SELECT PROM.

ASTRONOMICAL AND TOURISTS' TELESCOPES. FIELD AND OPERA GLASSES.

Illustrated Catalogue, Three Stamps.

W. LAWLEY & SON, 78, FARRINGDON ST., CITY, E.G.

ESTABLISHED UPWARDS OF A CENTUTiY.

MICROSCOPIC OBJECTS,

stained and Injected Preparations from Man and the Lower Animals;

Insects, parts and entire; Diatomaceas, Foraminifera ;

Double Stained Sections of Stems, Leaves, Seed Vessels, &c., of Plants;

Sections of Rocks and Possils,

T. r>. lirJSSELL, 48, Kssex St., Straiicl, TT.O.

Micro. Catalogue, Geological Catalogue, and Natural History Circular, Post Free, 2d.

ADVERTISEMENTS FOR THE JOURNAL.

Mr. Charles Blencowe, of 75, Chancery Lane, W.C., is the authorized
Agent and Collector for Advertising Accounts on behalf of the Society.

( 13 )

MICROSCOPES AND BALANCES

AS MADE BT

W. STONE, 44, GLOUCESTER STREET, HOLBORN

(Late Maker to an eaiincnt firm), are the best and
cheapest. Try his 35s. Box BALANCE, warranted to
tnrn to ONE-TWENTIETH OF A GRAIN : or 405.
Microscope. Price List of Balances (Illustriited) post free.

FUNGI, LICHENS, ALG/E, MOSSES, HEPATIC/E, FERNS, &c.,

PREPAKED AS MIOKOSOOPIOAL SLIDES,

MAY BE OBTAINED AT 2U. PER TWO IX)ZKN OBJECTS. EVERY SLIDE GUARANTEED
FREE FKOII LEAKAGE.

Apply Rev. J. E. VIZE, Forden Vicarage, "WelshpooL
SI^ECI^A^IL, ISrOTICE-

POWELL AND LEALAND'S

NEW OIL mMERSION CONDENSER

Can be adapted to any Microscope, rcsolvijs all the most difficult test objects, price

Two Guineas.

MICROSCOPES from £11 lis. to £200.

The £11 11«. Instrument consists of 1-inch and J-inch Object-glasses, with Apertures
of 30 and 95 dog. respectively, coarse and fine Adjustment, Glass Stajre and Bull's-eye
Condenser, fitted in mahogany case, and is most suitable for Students, Brewers, &c.
FLUID AND OIL lilMERSION LENSES.

Manufactory : 170, EUSTON ROAD, LONDON, N. W.

Barclay & Son's Mikrqs ^^Microscope Lamp.

■g This Lamp Is intended to ptiptrsede the
M Microscope Lamps now in use.

_ We claim for it the advanUigc that, being

3 ^ famished with a silvered reflector and a

,3 <0 powerful lens, a greater aiuoutu of light

^1 gj is obUiined with li*8 means tlun lu any

o c-j lamp we know of. it barns for 7 hours

"g "^ without replenishing, at a cost of one-

M eichth of a penny per hour. No light is

g wasted, and the iiiat given out Is scarcely
appreciable by the MicixiscopiBL

The Show Jiixmt eintain a large itock of Lamps of every detcription.

BARCLAY & SON, Wax Chandlers and Lamp Makers

13 8,

To ffer Ma jetty and Il.Ii.lI. the I'rince of WaUt,

COLLINS' MICROSCOPES.

Fully ILLUSTRATED CATALOGUE of ENSTRUMENTS and APPARATUS,
MOUNTING MATERIALS, &c,, Mailed Eree to any part of the World.
Ste full-page AdvcrtUement in April Part of this Journal. ,

CHARLES COLLINS, MANUFACTURER,

ICJT', CJrciit I'oi'tltmtl SSli*ct*t, X^ou<lun, "\V.

Also, SPECIAL LIST of MiCBooooncAi, BooRa and otueb SoBMTirro Wub&s, witu

FULL DISCOUNT.

( 14 )

OS/CIOI^OSOOI^IO OD3J-EOTS-

Claseified Catalogue. NEW EDITION FOB 1880. Tost Free and Gratis.

Specimens of the highest attainable perfection in every branch of Microscopy. New and

Rare Diatomacese. Test and Binocular Objects. Moller's Typen Plattes.

Microscopes, Achromatic Objectives, and all Materials and Instruments for Mounting.

EDMUND WHEELER, 48 B, Tollington Road, Holloway, London, N.

QUEKETT'S (J.) LECTURES ON HISTOLOGY,

Delivered at the Royal Collepe of Surgeons, describing the Elementary Tissues of Plants and Animals, the
Structure of the Skeleton of PLiuts and Invertebrate Animals. Upwards of 400 Engravings. Two Vols, in
One, thick Svo, cloth, "Js. M. (pub. £1 8«. 6d.) ; post free, 8s. Ad.

" Wiih this work every microscopist should be acquainted. . . . The woodeuta of microscopical ol^ects in
this VFork have not been sm^passed." — Science-Gossip.

JOHN WHELDON, NATURAL HISTORY BOOKSELLER,

68, GREAT QUEEN STREET, LONDON, W.C.

PATENT RADIAL TRAVERSING

ACHROMATIC SUBSTAGE ILLUMINATOR,

For Projecting Two Rectangular Pencils of Light on the Object.

At same time greater angle of obliquity can be obtained by Swift & Son's contrivance than by any swinging
stage hitherto made. The same can also be used above the stage for the illumination of opaque objects. It
can instantly be detached from the microscope, and is capable of being fitted to any modem Instrument where
the stage is sufiSciently thin. Illustrated Circular for Stamp.

ELEVENTH EDITION of CATALOGUE just from Press, with many Improved
Forms of Microscopes and Apparatus, for Six Stamps,

UNIVERSITY OPTICAL WORKS, UNIVERSITY STREET, LONDON, W.C.
MICROSCOPICAL SPECIALITIES.

ARTHUR C. COLE (F.R.M.S.) & SON,

Having completed arrangements to increase both the supply and variety of their
Preparations, beg to announce that their VAKIOUS SEEIES, a most extensive
assortment of PATHOLOGICAL and PHYSIOLOGICAL specimens, CHEMICAL
COMPOUNDS, DIATOMACEAL and MISCELLANEOUS OBJECTS, can now
be obtained from all the principal opticians in London and the provinces, and by
whom Lists will also be furnished on application. For wholesale terms apply to

St. Domingo House, 53, Oxford Gardens, UTotting Hill, London, W.

SUCCESSORS TO GEO. KNIGHT & SONS,

73, FARRINGDON ST. (late of 2, Poster Lane, and 5, St. Bride St.).

HOW'S MICROSCOPE LAMP. THE MINIATURE MICROSCOPE LAMP.
HOW'S STUDENTS" MICROSCOPE, £5 6». THE POPULAR BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE, £12 lit.

Rock Sectioks and other Microscopic Objects.

]>J[ICI10SOOI?IC SPECIALITIES

ILLUSTRATING STRUCTURE IN THE VARIOUS BRANCHES OP

iSSffr, ENTOMOLOGY, ^\-r-',.,

showing Internal PREPARED AND SOLD BY post free,

2/and3Teach. FREDERIC ENOCH, on application.

30, EUSSELL KOAD, SEVEN SISTEES EOAD, LONDON, N.

( 15 ):

Council Medal and Highest Award, Great Exhibition, London, 1851.

Gold Medal, Paris Exposition, 1867.

Medal and Highest Award, Exhibition, London, 1862.

Medal and Diploma, Centennial Exhibition, Philadelphia, 1876.

Medal and Diploma, Antwerp, 1878.

Gold Medal and Diploma, Paris Exposition, 1878.

R088' NEW
AND IMPROVED

MICROSCOPES,

WITH

WENHAM'S NEW
THIN MECHANICAL STAGE,

AND

ZENTMAYER'S

PATENT SWINGING

8UB8TAGE

ARRANGEMENT,

for any Degree of
Oblique Illnmination.

FULL r>Kscr«-ir»Tioiv -ajni> o^^-rrAX-oouK

ON APPLICATIOy TO

BOSS & CO., 164, New Bond Street, London.

THE

ROYAL MICROSCOPICAL SOCIETY.

(Founded in 1839. Incorporated by Eoyal Charter in 1866.)

The Society was established for the communication and discussion
of observations and discoveries (1) tending to improvements in the con-
struction and mode of application of the Microscope, or (2) relating to
Biological or other subjects of Microscopical Research.

It consists of Ordinary, Honorary, and Ex-officio Fellows.

Ordinary Fellows are elected on a Certificate of Recommendation
signed by three Fellows, stating the names, residence, description, &c., of
the Candidate, of whom one of the proposers must have personal know-
ledge. The Certificate is read at a Monthly Meeting, and the Candidate
balloted for at the succeeding Meeting.

The Annual Subscription is 2Z. 2«., payable in advance on election,
and subsequently on 1st January annually, with an Entrance Fee of 21, 2s.
Future payments of the former may be compounded for at any time for
31Z. 10s. Fellows elected at a meeting subsequent to that in June are
only called upon for one-half of the year's subscription, and Fellows
absent from the United Kingdom for a year, or permanently residing
abroad, are exempt from one-half the subscription during absence.

Honorary Fellows (limited to 50), consisting of persons eminent
in Biological or Microscopical Science, are elected on the recommendation
of three Fellows and the approval of the Council.

Ex-oflB.eio Fellows (limited to 100) consist of the Presidents for
the time being of such Societies at home and abroad as the Council may
recommend and a Monthly Meeting approve. They are entitled to receive
the Society's Publications, and to exercise all other privileges of Fellows,
except voting, but are not required to pay any Entrance Fee or Annual
Subscription.

The Council, by whom the afiairs of the Society are managed, is
elected annually, and is composed of the President, four Vice-Presidents,
Treasurer, two Secretaries, and twelve other Fellows.

The Meetings are held on the second Wednesday in each month,
from October to June, in the Society's Library at King's College, Strand,
W.C. (commencing at 8 p.m.). Visitors are admitted by the introduction of
Fellows.

In each Session two additional evenings ("Scientific Evenings") are
devoted to the exhibition of Apparatus and Objects of novelty or interest
relating to the Microscope or the subjects of Microscopical Research.

The Journal, containing the Transactions and Proceedings of the
Society, with a Record of Current Researches relating to Invertebrata,
Cryptogamia, Microscopy, &c., is published bi-monthly, and is forwarded
gratis to all Ordinary and Ex-ojBficio Fellows residing in countries within
the Postal Union.

The Library, with the Instruments, Apparatus, and Cabinet of
Objects, is open for the use of Fellows on Mondays, Tuesdays, Thursdays,
and Fridays, from 11 a.m. to 4 p.m., and on Wednesdays from 7 to 10 p.m.
It is closed during August.

Forms of proposal for Fellowship, and any further information, may he obtained by
application to the Secretaries, or Assistant-Secretary, at the Library of the Society, King's
College, Strand, W.C.

New York Botanical Garden Librar

3 5185 00266 7853

% -u

■^-•*' «^f>^

^:\^

■^A#^

/ ^'^

^-:^^*''l- >■